m^ 


110 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[286-286 


From  now  on  the  special  vocabulary  will  be  discontinued  and  all 
new  words  (except  the  verbs)  will  be  found  only  in  the  general 
vocabulary. 

285  Strong  Verbs 


to  drive  away 

tjertretben 

t)ertrteb 

tjertrteben 

to  forgive 

t)er^ei^en 

Derjie^ 

tjersie^en 

to  die 

fterben 

ftarb 

geftorbeu 

to  make  one's  way  fi(^  burd)f(i^la= 

Wm  fic^ 

fic^  burc^gefrfilagen 

gen 

bur^ 

Weak  Verbs 

to  live 

leben 

to  sigh 

feufjen 

to  love 

tithtn 

to  snow 

fc^neien 

to  permit 

eriaubeu 

to  weep 

toeineu 

to  play 

f^ielen 

to  believe  to  be 

gutrauen,  traute 

to  be  afraid 

fid^  bangen 

capable  of 

ju,  gugetraut 

to  deserve 

tjerbienen 

to  pay 

be5a{)len 

286  2Bo  ^at  ber  (Sc^netber  gemo^nt?  ^at  er  allein  getuo^nt? 
2Bie  t)iele  ^inber  f)atten  bie  2iiitt?  (Stub  fie  f^dter  (later)  atlein 
gen?efen?  2Ba§  tuirb  ber  ^ater  tim,  U)enn  ber  (Bo^n  fortlciuft? 
SSann  Mrb  ber  @o^n  tt)ieber!ommen?  SSirb  t)iel  ^etb  ba  fein  nad) 
be§  SSaterg  Stob?  SSirb  bie  9Jlutter  t)er5tt)eifetn  (despair)? 
SBarunt  tuirb  fie  m6)t  tJergiDeifeIn?  SSie  toirb  fie  fic^  burd^fd^lagen? 
3ft  ber  Wann  geftorben?  SBoran  ift  er  geftorben?  §attt  er  ben 
(So^n  fe^r  geliebt?  SSie  ^attt  er  i^n  be^anbett  (treated)?  §at  er 
fi(^  tia^  gorttaufen  be§  (So^ne§  fe^r  gu  ^erjen  genommeu?  SSie  fe^r 
()at  er  e§  fic^  gu  ^erjen  genommeu?  SSirb  ber  So^n  tuieberfommen? 
SSon  tt)em  mirb  i{)m  bie  SJlutter  erjdfilen?  SSeffen  t)at  ber  ^ater  in 
[einer  Xobe^ftunbe  gebac^t? 

2Ba§  ift  ein  Sc^neiber?  eine  ©c^neiberin?  ein  ©d^u^moc^er? 
geben  fie  ein  anbere§  (other)  SBort  fiir  (Sc^u^mad^er !  2Ba§  ift  ein 
Set)rer?  eine  Se^rerin?   ein  (Sc^iiter?   eine  Sc^iilerin?    '^a^  ift  eine 


287-289]  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  111 

Sd^ule?  eine  SSerfftott  (workshop)?  SBag  ift  ein  3lrbeitcr?  eine 
Wrbeiterin? 

287  Translate:  1.  I  shall  have  a  story  for  you  which  you 
will  like.  2.  I  shall  have  returned  when  your  brother  is  in 
school.     3.  When  the  youth  returns  he  will  not  find  his  father. 

4.  Does  the  mother  think  of  her  son  in  the  hour  of  her  death? 

5.  The  father  h.ad  taken  the  departure  {\i^^  ?^ortge^en)  of  the  son 
so  much  to  heart  that  he  died.  0.  The  mother  will  not  make  her 
way  through  life  and  will  not  see  her  son  again.  7.  Will  the 
latter  have  become  rich?  8.  The  former  will  have  become  old. 
9.  I  shall  have  run  away. 

288  Change  all  the  above  sentences  so  as  to  use  the  present 
tense;  the  perfect;  the  preterite. 

LESSON  28 

289  ADJECTIVE  DECLENSIONS 

Nominative 

^a§  ift  bet  gro§c  S&awm, 


^er  SBaum  ift  gro^. 
S^ie  93lume  ift  fi^bn. 
5)ag  ^inb  ift  flcin. 


^a§  ift  cin  grower  S3aum. 

^a§  ift  btc  fd^onc  S3hime. 
^a§  ift  eine  fc^one  S3lume. 

^a§  ift  ba§  ftetne  ^iub. 
®a§  ift  ein  fleinef  ^inb. 


M. 

bet  grogc  93aum 

ein  grower  S3aum 

F. 

bie  f^onc  Slume 

eine  fc^oue  93tuTne 

N. 

btt0  fleine  ^tnb 

ein  fleineS  ^inb 

Observe  that  when  the  article  has  an  ending  which 
shows  the  number,  gender,  and  case  of  the  following  noun 
the  adjective  has  merely  a  perfunctory  inflection.  In  the 
nominative  case  this  is  e.     When  the  article  has  no  inflection 


m  MEMOmAM 
J.  Henry  Senger 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elementsofgermanOObeckrich 


tlbe  Xahc  (Berman  Series 


Elements  of  GtErman 


A  PRACTICAL  COURSE  FOR 
SCHOOL,  AND  COLLEGE 


BY, 

HENRIETTA    K.    BECKER,    Ph.D. 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


CHICAGO 
SCOTT,     FORES  MAN    AND    COMPANY 

19  0  3 


IN  MEMORIAM 


COPYRIGHT,  1903 
BY  SCOTT.  FORESMAN  AND  COMPANY 


BOBT.    O.    I^AW    CO.,   PSXNTBKS    ANJ>    BIKDXJRS,  OBI.CA.aO, 

TYPOGRAPHY  BY 

MARSH,  AITKEN  &  CURTIS  COMPANY 

CHICAGO 


PREFACE 

The  idea  of  effecting  a  compromise  between  the  "natural" 
and  the  "classical"  method  in  the  teaching  of  modern  languages 
is  not  a  new  one.  It  has  been  tried  for  some  time  and  often 
with  considerable  success.  The  advantages  of  each  method  are 
so  obvious  to  the  thoughtful  teacher — and  the  disadvantages  no 
less^ — that  it  is  but  natural  for  a  renewed  attempt  to  be  made 
to  secure  a  perfect  amalgamation  of  the  benefits  of  both 
methods. 

In  the  book  herewith  presented  a  thorough  study  of  the 
essential  principles  of  German  grammar  lies  at  the  foundation 
of  the  lessons.  But  the  means  by  which  these  principles  are  to 
be  inculcated  are  inductive  rather  than  deductive.  The  student 
is  first  given  a  literary  unit — a  story  or  poem  selected  because 
of  its  fitness  to  illumine  the  particular  point  to  be  studied. 
From  this  as  a  text  the  grammatical  rule  is  inferred,  informal 
exercises  based  upon  the  chosen  unit  follow,  and  finally  the 
new  words  thus  used  are  impressed  upon  the  memory  by  con- 
stant repetition.  The  use  of  a  story  or  a  poem  as  illustration, 
instead  of  disconnected  sentences,  tends  to  arouse  a  real  interest 
in  the  mind  of  the  student,  besides  presenting  language  facts 
in  their  natural  relationship  and  environment.  These  points 
are  so  well  taken,  it  is  hoped,  that  their  pedagogical  importance 
need  not  be  further  dwelt  upon, 

A  word  as  to  the  grammatical  arrangement.  The  value  of 
first  impressions  scarcely  requires  emphasis.  It  is  safe  to  say 
that  the  beginning  pages  of  a  grammar  and  the  opening  lines 
of  any  one  chapter  in  it  impress  themselves  upon  the  mental 
vision  of  the  learner  with  far  greater  incisiveness  than  do  the 

91^656 


2  PREFACE 

facts  which  are  subsequently  brought  out.  The  picture  grad- 
ually becomes  more  and  more  blurred  as  the  mind  grows  weary 
a»d  as  details  iiicifease.  Thus  it  would  seem  highly  advisable 
to  begin  with  the  most  vital  element  of  the  language  and  to 
gH^^tj^^Jiliis  preeminently  the  emphatic  position.  For  this 
reason  the  Verb  has  been  made  the  leading  motive  of  the  book. 

Under  this  arrangement  the  various  elements  of  the  lan- 
guage are  grouped  around  one  central  point  and  the  student 
deals  not  with  a  large  number  of  isolated  facts,  but  with  a 
totality  each  part  of  which  with  its  organic  functions  becomes 
gradually  clear  to  him.  When  he  has  finished  the  book  he 
should  feel,  it  is  true,  that  many  details  remain  to  be  filled  in, 
but  that  no  large  or  important  portion  of  the  whole  is  unfa- 
miliar to  him. 

The  book  is  divided  into  ten  chapters  each  one  of  which 
contains  a  number  of  lessons.  Every  chapter  has  as  a  main 
theme  some  form  of  the  verb  which  is  to  be  thoroughly  learned. 
This  theme  is  generally  the  subject  of  the  first  lesson.  Subse- 
quent lessons  treat  of  the  main  features  of  the  verb  form  in 
question,  supplemented  later  by  the  other  forms  of  the  language 
and  by  the  syntax  which  the  student  is  required  to  learn  dur- 
ing the  first  year  of  his  high-school  German  or  the  first  six 
months  of  German  in  college. 

The  exercises  in  the  book  are  of  a  two-fold  nature.  In  the 
first  four  chapters  they  consist  mainly  of  such  brief  questions 
as  will  bring  into  strong  relief  the  words  and  constructions 
previously  studied.  But  from  the  fifth  chapter  on  the  ques- 
tions become  wider  in  scope  and  afford  a  larger  freedom  of 
originality  in  treatment.  For  it  is  expected  that  the  habit  of 
analyzing  the  connected  stories  will  by  this  time  have  so  gained 
upon  the  student  that  he  will  experience  small  difficulty  in 
retaining  for  individual  use  the  longer  phrases  which  they 
contain.  The  final  lesson  of  each  chapter  contains  a  careful 
review  of  the  grammatical  statements  made  in  the  preceding 
lessons  of  the  chapter.     By  means  of  these   summaries   the 


PREFACE  3 

student  may  bring  up  all  the  points  previously  dwelt  upon, 
and  by  running  through  the  review  exercises  he  may  test  his 
ability  to  apply  these  facts. 

The  lessons  are  supplemented  by  an  appendix  which  seeks 
to  give  in  succinct  form  a  synopsis  of  the  elements  of  grammar. 
It  may  be  used  both  for  ready  reference  and  review.  The  first 
part  of  it  (§§  1-89)  deals  with  the  inflected  words  so  arranged 
as  to  bring  together  those  which  are  alike  in  form,  e.g.,  the 
definite  article  and  the  demonstrative  pronoun,  the  indefinite 
article  and  the  possessive  adjective,  etc.  An  attempt  has  been 
made  to  present  each  page  in  a  form  which  will  render  classi- 
fication and  enumeration  graphic,  in  order  that  visualization 
may  assist  memory.  The  second  part  of  the  appendix  (§§90-249) 
enunciates  the  more  important  rules  of  syntax  with  accompany- 
ing illustrations.  In  both  parts  the  procedure  is:  article, 
noun,  pronoun,  adjective,  verb.  This  appendix,  if  so  desired, 
may  be  used  as  a  reference  grammar  in  later  courses  devoted  to 
composition  work  or  to  the  reading  of  texts. 

In  explanation  of  a  few  innovations,  chief  among  which  k 
perhaps  the  inflection  of  the  subjunctive  mode,  it  may  be  said 
that  in  every  case  actual  usage  as  found  in  modern  writers  and 
in  accepted  speech  rather  than  grammatical  tradition  has  served 
as  guide. 

The  new  official  orthography  sanctioned  in  the  year  1901 
and  now  in  force  in  the  public  schools  of  Germany,  Switzer- 
land, and  Austria  has  been  adopted  without  change.  The 
seventh  edition  (1902)  of  the  inexpensive  and  excellent  Duden's 
Orthographisches  Wbrterluch  is  cordially  recommended  to  all 
who  wish  a  safe  guide  in  vexed  matters  of  spelling. 

The  Elements  of  German  endeavors  to  give  to  beginning 
students  of  German  an  opportunity  to  acquire  a  firm  grasp  on 
the  essential  facts  of  the  language.  It  is  hoped  at  the  same 
time  to  stimulate  interest  because  of  the  chance  which  it 
affords  for  the  reading  of  good  German  and  for  the  continu- 
ous practice  of  the  spoken  language  in  the  classroom.      For 


4  PREFACE 

only  in  this  way  can  a  sure  feeling  for  correct  form  be  devel- 
oped. 

It  is  a  most  pleasant  duty  to  acknowledge  the  unusual  debt 
of  obligation  which  the  author  owes  to  Professor  S.  W.- Cutting 
of  the  University  of  Chicago.  From  first  to  last  he  has  shown 
a  tireless  interest  in  the  book,  has  offered  many  helpful  sugges- 
tions and  has  stinted  no  effort  in  his  desire  to  be  of  constant 
assistance.  Professors  C.  von  Klenze  and  Max  Batt  have  also 
done  much  to  further  the  progress  of  the  author's  work.  The 
editorial  connection  of  Philip  S.  Allen  of  the  University  of 
Chicago  with  the  Lake  German  series  during  the  early  stages 
of  the  preparation  of  the  book  and  his  continued  generous  aid 
to  the  time  of  its  publication  have  been  an  invaluable  help  to 
the  author. 

Henrietta  K.  Becker. 
Chicago  August,  1903. 


CONTENTS 

CHAP.  PAGE 

I.  Indicative  Singular  Present 9 

1.  Verb:  Third  Person ;  Nouns  and  Pronouns :  Nominative 

and  Accusative  Singular  9 

2.  Continuation  of  Lesson  1 12 

3.  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns:   Nomina- 

tive and  Accusative 15 

®er  ^aufmann  unb  ber  ^unb 

4.  Verb:  First  and  Second  Person :  Possessives 18 

5.  Grammar  Review 21 

II.  Indicative  Singular  Perfect 25 

6.  Tense  Auxiliary  f)a6en 25 

®te  ^a^e  unb  bie  Wlau^ 

7.  Tense  Auxiliary  fein 29 

®er  Sc^neiber  unb  ber  ©c^u^inac^er 

8.  Genitive 33 

®er  Wiener  he^  ^dnig§ 

9.  Dative 38 

%aS  @Jenji[fen  be§  SSolfg 

10.  Prepositions  with  Accusative 42 

©onntagmorgen 

11.  Dative  and  Accusative  with  Preposition 46 

@in  Unterfd^ieb.    2)a3  S3ac&lein 

12.  Grammar  Review  51 

III.  Indicative  Preterite.    Plurals 55 

13.  Weak  and  Strong  Verbs 55 

SSa§  jcber  fa^ 

14.  Weak  and  Strong  Verbs— Continued  61 

©efunben 

15.  Plural  of  Verbs 64 

S)ie  SSoget 

•        16.  Plural  of  Nouns— Strong  Declension — Class  1 68 

®e§  ajlanneg  SSerbtenjt.    9^ad)taeb 

17.  Plural  of  Nouns — Strong  Declension — Class  II 73 

^ie  SSolfe 

18.  Plural  of  Nouns— Strong  Declension — Class  III.. 77 

^erbftaeb.    Ulbenblieb 
5 


6  CONTENTS 

19.  Weak  and  Mixed  Declensions 80 

2)ie  3a()lett 

20.  Grammar  Review 84 

IV.  Indicative  Pluperfect  87 

21.  Pluperfect  Tense 87 

@r  l^atte  ©pa^en  imter  bent  ^utc 

22.  Personal  and  Reflexive  Pronouns 90 

^er  aJlorber 

23.  Possessives 93 

(5ein  9tid)tgfpru(t) 

24.  Demonstrative  and  Indefinite  Pronouns 97 

®er  einfaE 

25.  Relative  Pronouns 101 

®er  ^rin§  bon  |)omburg 

26.  Review 105 

V.  Future  and  Future  Perfect 107 

27.  muttetikbe 107 

28.  Adjective  Declensions Ill 

29.  muitexikbc  {(Bdjln^) 115 

30.  ^ie  gaule  unb  bie  ?5Iei§i(;c 119 

31.  ^ie  ^auie  unb  bie  gleifetge  (gortfe^uncj) 121 

32.  2)ie  f^aule  unb  bie  ^(cifeige  .©c^lufe) . .' 125 

33.  Grammar  Review 128 

VI.  Reflexive  Verbs 130 

34.  ®ie  SSerirrten 130 

35.  Cardinals  and  Ordinals 133 

®te  SSerirrtcn  (5ortfc|ung) 

36.  Fractionals 136 

2)ie  SSerirrten  (f^ortfe^uug) 

37.  ^ic  SBerirrten  (©c^Utfe) 140 

38.  Comparison  of  Adjectives 144 

^eutfc^eg  ©d^ulmefen 

39.  ^eutfd)c§  Sc^ufnjcfen  (Sdjlufe) 148 

40.  Grammar  Review 151 

VII.  Passive  Voice  153 

41.  ®eutfd)Ianb 153 

42.  Word  Order 156 

(Srlfonig 

43.  Transposed  Order 160 

3Benn  ber  ^riitiling  auf  bie  S3erge  fteigt 

44.  Conjunctions 162 

©iegfrieb  » 

45.  Grammar  Review  165 


CONTENTS  7 

VIII.  Modal  Auxiliaries 167 

46.  Present  Tense 167 

S3ttte  ail  bie  Whittet 
4!7.  Preterite  of  Modal  Auxiliaries 170 

(Siegfrteb  (gortfc|ung) 

48.  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  of  Modal  Auxiliaries 173 

©tegfrieb  (©djrufe) 

49.  Future  and  Future  Perfect  of  Modal  Auxiliaries  and 

Passive  Infinitives 174 

^riem^ilbe^  Xraum 

50.  Grammar  Review 177 

IX.  The  Subjunctive 178 

51.  Present  Third  Person  Singular 178 

2)ie  ©Dime  unb  bcr  2Binb 

53.  Present  and  Preterite 180 

^ie  ©onnc  unb  bcr  SBinb 

53.  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Subjunctive 184 

2)a§  treue  dio% 

54.  Future  and  Future  Perfect  Subjunctive 187 

®cr  ©chafer  unb  bcr  ®Dlb[d)micb 

55.  Subjunctive  Passive 190 

^ag  gefto^lcne  ^ferb 

56.  Ideal  Condition 193 

®er  ^hig  ber  Sicbe.    ®er  ^'onig  uiib  bcr  iianbmaim 

57.  Wish— Unfulfilled .' 197 

®ie  t)ier  2Biinfd)e 

58.  Wish— Fulfilled ;  Desire  and  Prayer 199 

2)cr  9Jlai  ift  gcfommcu 

59.  Subjunctive  of  Doubt 301 

•Der  giite  ^amcrab.    Xu  btft  lutc  eiuc  S3Iuuic 

60.  Grammar  Review 303 

X.  Imperative.    Compounds.     Infinitives.    Participles 305 

61.  Imperative 305 

®eutfd)er  ffiat    Xic  SO^a|ming 

63.  Compounds 308 

©in  f^ricb^ofggang 

63.  Infinitives 313 

®ie  beutfd^en  ©table 

64.  Infinitives 215 

Xic  beutfd)cu  ©tdbtc  (©d)lufe) 


8  APPENDIX 

65.  Participles 216 

5)ie  beutfc^e  ®ef(i)id)te 

66.  Participles 218 

^ie  beutfc^e   @efrf)ic^te  (©djlufe).     ®ie   SSad^t  am 

67.  Grammar  Review 232 

APPENDIX 

Alphabet 224 

Pronunciation /. 227 

accidence 

Article 231 

Nouns— Gender 232 

Declension 233 

Pronouns 237 

Adjectives— Declension 239 

Numerals 241 

Comparison 242 

Verbs— Conjugations 245 

Tense  Auxiliaries 245 

Modal  Auxiliaries 256 

Causatives 259 

Reflexive  Verbs 259 

Impersonal  Verbs 259 

Table  of  Strong  Verbs 260 

SYNTAX 

Word  Order 265 

Use  of  Article 266 

Nouns— Syntax  of  Cases 368 

Nominative 268 

Genitive 269 

Dative 273 

Accusative 377 

Pronouns 280 

Verbs— Mode 282 

Indicative 282 

Subjunctive 284 

Imperative 288 

Infinitive 288 

Participle ' 290 

Passive  Voice 291 

Modal  Auxiliaries.  . . . , 292 

Impersonal  Verbs 295 


ELEMENTS    OF    GERMAJST 

CHAPTEE   I 

INDICATIVE   SINGULAR   PRESENT 

LESSON  1 
Verb:  3rcl  person 
Nouns  and  Pronouns:  Nominative  and  Accusative  Singular 

I  Masc.  2)er  ^cA\6)i  fliegt  fliegt 

Fem.  2)ie  $enne  ift  grog.  ift 

Neut.  ^ttg  Siii^Iein^  tjt  fleiiu  ift 

M.      ^et^  §abic^t  fliegt,  er^  ift  ein  SSogeL  er 

F.       ^ie  ^eiuie  fliegt,  fie  ift  and)  ein  9?ogeL  flc 

N.      2)ag  tii(^Iein  fliegt  nidjt,  e§  ift  ein  SSoglein.'    e« 

2  VOCABULARY  ^ 

flies    fliegt  hen    bic  §enne  wrd  tin  ^ogel 

is         ift  large   grOg  also  aUC^ 

chick  'ha^  ^iic^Ieiu        not  nic^t 

hawk  ber  §abic^t  smaii  !(ein  iittie  bird  ein  SSoglein 

3  ^  The  syllables  leilt  and  ^etl  may  be  added  to  any  noun  to  ex- 
press diminutive  size  or  endearment.  Such  nouns  are  always  neuter 
(see  App.  13a). 

2  In  German  the  article  and  the  personal  pronoun  denote  the  varia- 
tion of  gender  even  where  no  sex  designation  is  felt. 

^  In  the  vocabularies  the  words  that  represent  the  new  principle 
will  be  found  first.  After  these  will  come  the  other  new  words  in  the 
order  in  which  they  occur  in  the  story  or  exercise  above  them. 


10  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [4-8 

4  Subject  Object 

2)te  .^emie  fie^t  ben  §aiir|t. 

®ie     fur(^tet     t|n. 
2)er  ^abi^t  fie^t  bie  §enne. 

@t        jagt         fie. 
2)te  $enne  Itebt  bag  ^nt^lein. 

®ie       ruft        eg. 

5  sees      fie()t  chases   jagt  calls  ruft 

fears  furd^tet  loves    liebt 

6  DEFINITE  ARTICLE  AND  PERSONAL  PRONOUN 

Nominative  Accusative 

Def.  Art.  Pers.  Pron.  Def.  Art.  Pers.  Pron. 


ber 

er 

ben 

illtt 

bie 

fie 

bie 

fie 

ba§ 

ee 

bag 

ee 

7  INDEFINITE  ARTICLE 

Nominative  Accusative 

@ln  ^abid^t  fliegt.  ©tne  .^eitite  ftel)t  etuen^abid^t. 

(Sine  §emte  ruft.  ©in  ^abi^t  fie^t  eiue  §eune. 

Gin  Mdjietu  fommt  nidjt*  (5ie  l)at  ein   Su(J)Iein. 

8 

M. 


F. 

N. 


j  Nom. 
\  Ace. 

Def.  Art. 

ber 
ben 

ludef.  Art. 

eiu 
^  eiuen 

Pers.  Prou. 

er 
itin 

(  Nom. 
]  Ace. 

bie 
bie 

eiue 
eiue 

He 
lie 

(  Nom. 
1  Ace. 

ba§ 
bag 

ein 
ein 

eg 
eg 

9-12] 
9 


INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PRESENT 

Sine  ®eft|i^te 


11 


Sine  ^enne  fte^t  eineu  ^abi^t.  ©r  fliegt,  S)ie 
^enite  i)at  ein  Mc^Iein,  ©ie  ruft  e^,  2)a§  Siid^Iein 
fommt  nid^t,  eg  ift  ungef)orfam»  S)a  fommt  ber  ^abic^t 
unb  ijolt  bag  Siid^lein,  ®g  jd^reit  laut,  aber  ber  ^abid^t 
frigt  eg  unb  fliegt  fort,  2)ie  §enne  ift  fe^r  traurig,  ®ag 
Md^Iein  ift  nun  tot.  2)ie  SJlutter  ijat  !ein  ^iic^lein  nte{)r/ 
®ie  §enne  f)a§t  ben  ^abid^t  unb  fie  fiird^tet  i^n  and). 


10 


VOCABULARY 

has 

t)at 

and 

unb 

comes 

!ommt 

aloud 

taut 

fetches 

^olt 

but 

aber 

yells,  squeak 

s  ^c^reit 

away 

fort 

devours 

frigt 

very 

W 

hates 

mt 

sad 

traurtg 

does 

tut 

• 

now 
dead 
mother 

uuu 

tot 

bie  gjJutter 

story 

bie  OJefd^i^te 

disobedient 

ungei)oiiam 

no 

!eiu 

then 

ba 

more 

me^r 

« «  3ft  bie  §enne  ein  SSogel?  ©ie  ift  ein  SogeL  3ft 
fie  gro§?  ©ie  ift  gro§.  3ft  ber  ^abii)t  ein  SSogel? 
(£r  ift  ein  aSogel  3ft  er  tiein?  ©r  ift  nidjt  flein. 
gliegt  ber  §abid)t?  ©r  ftiegt.  ^(iegt  bie  §enne? 
bag  tii^Iein?  9?uft  bie  ^enne  bag  tii^Iein?  ©ie 
ruft  eg,  tomntt  eg?  ©g  fommt  nid^t,  3ft  eg 
ungel)orfam?  §oIt  ber  ^ahii)t  bag  ©iid^Iein?  gri^t 
er  eg?    3ft  bie  50?utter  traurig? 


12    '  ^ttt  fein   ...  me^r  =  has  no 


left. 


12  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [13-15 

13  LESSON  2 

SBer  fliegt?  S)er  ^abi^t  fliecit.  SBag  tut  er?  ©r 
fliegt.  2Ba^  tut  bie  ^tnxitl  @ie  fliegt  auc^»  3ft  ber 
^abic^t  fe^r  gro§?  ®r  ift  uic^t  fe^r  grofe.  SBa§  ift  bie 
^euue?  ©ie  ift  ein  SSogeL  2Bie  fliegt  ber  §abi^t? 
©r  fliegt  fi^uell,  Sliegt  bie  ^tnm  fi^ueU?  9iic^t  fo 
fd^uell  tt)ie  ber  |)abidjt»  2Sie  fliegt  ba§  Mi^leiu?  ©§ 
fliegt  laugfam,  e§  ift  fleiu.  3ft  e§  au^  eiu  3Sogel?  3a, 
e§  ift  eiu  SSogleiu, 

Answer  the  following  questions : 

i4  SBer  fliegt?  aSa^  ift  bie  ^tmtl  SBie  fliegt  ber 
^abi^t?  aSa§  ift  bag  Siic^leiu?  3ft  bie  ^txmt  grofe 
ober  fleiu?  %i\tQ,t  bag  ^iid^leiu?  3ft  ber  ^abii^t  eiu 
9Sogel?  3ft  bie  ^tUMt  eiu  SSoget  ober  eiu  SSogleiu? 
giiegt  ber  SSogel  fi^uell? 

1 5  PRONOUNS 

3Beu  fie^t  bie  ^mm'i  @ie  fie^t  \^tn  ,^abid^t.  Siebt 
fie  i^u?  9teiu,  fie  liebt  i^u  uidjt,  fie  ^^t  i^u.  SSeu 
fie^t  ber  ^abit^t?  ®r  fie^t  bie  l^txmt.  gri^t  er  fie? 
3a,  er  jagt  fie  uub  fri^t  fie»  Siebt  ber  ^abi^t  bie  |)euue? 
9ieiu,  er  liebt  fie  ui^t,  3Beu  ruft  bie  ^tmxt'^  ®ie  ruft 
bag  Sii^leiu.  Siebt  fie  eg?  3a,  fie  liebt  eg.  ^rifet 
bet  ^abi^t  U^  M^leiu?  3a,  er  frifet  eg.  2Beu  liebt 
bie  ^tMMt'i  giir^tet  fie  beu  ^abid^t?  393eu  fri^t 
er?  33Sag  fiet)t  bag  Siid^leiu?  ^ort  eg  bie  SUJutter? 
2Ber  ruft?  SBeu  ruft  bie  ^tMXitl  SSer  fiir^tet  beu 
^abi^t?    aSeu  fiir^tet  bie  ^zxiM'i    S^iirc^tet  bie  ^twxiz 


lG-17]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PRESENT  13 

ben  ^abic^t?  aBarum?  SBag  tut  er?  2Sag  ift  ber 
^abi^t?  me  ift  ba^  Mdjlein?  SBer  Itebt  eg?  S)a§ 
Sinb  Itebt  bie  ^^enne,  ober  bag  ®tnb  l^at  bie  ^entie  gern* 
SSBag  liebt  bag  Sinb?  SBer  Itebt  bie  ^entte?  ^at 
ha^  Sinb  bie  |)enne  gern?  SSag  ^at  eg  gern?  2)er  9Jfann 
I)at  eitten  ^unb*  ©r  ^t  ben  ^uttb  gertt»  ^^at  bie^enne 
ben  ^abidjt  gern?  SBaritm  ni^t?  Ser  ^abid)t  fri^t 
bag  Suc^Iein,  2)ie  9}Jutter  ^at  bag  tinblein  gern,  2Ber 
liebt  bag  Slinb?    SBen  liebt  bag  tinb? 

16 


VOCABULARY 

hears 

I)ort 

slow 

langfam 

likes 

i)ai  ... 

.  gem 

yes 

ja 

■ 

or 

ober 

who? 

toer? 

whom! 

?  mn? 

what? 

toa^? 

no 

neiu 

how? 

tvk? 

why? 

tuanim'? 

quick 

frfinea 

child 

ba§  ^inb 

so 

fo 

man 

ber  Wann 

as 

tuie 

dog 

ber  |)imb 

17  GRAMMAR  REVIEW 

1.  Verbs  in  third  person  sing,  indicative  pres.  end  in  t. 

2.  All  nouns  are  masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter,   as  shown 
by  the  form  of  the  article. 

3.  The  definite  article  nominative  singular  is  bcr,  bic,  bttS. 

4.  The  definite  article  accusative  singular  is  bctt,  bie,  bal. 

5.  The  indefinite  article  nominative  is  eitl,  ciltc,  tin. 

6.  The  indefinite  article  accusative  is  cineit,  cine,  citt. 

7.  The   nominative  and  accusative  forms  of  the  personal 
pronouns  in  third  person  arc :  er        flc       el 

i^tt     fie      eS 


14  ELEMENTS   OF   GERMAN  [18 

18  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

I,  Fill  out  vntli  verbs:  Ste  ^ettne — etn  Ru^Ietn, 

2)er  ^abic^t f ^neU,    ®ag  Sii^Iein  —  tiein.    ®er 

^abi^t "^a^  ^u^Iein.    ®a^  Siidjletn nt^t 

^ie  §enne laut.    2)ag  Siii^Iein  —  uiiQe^orfam. 

S)er  ^abic^t ba§  Mi^Iein  unb e^, 

//.    Fill  out   with   noun   and   definite   article: 

f)at  etn  Siid^Ieitt,    fdegt    fie^t 

i^n,     2)ie  §enne  ruft .     tommt  nii^t 

fommt  mtb  fri^t ,    jdireit,    — 

frtfet  bag  Sii^tetu.    ift  tot    2)ie  9Kutter 


I)at  nii^t  mef)r, {}a§t   ben  ^abic^t, 

fltegt  langfam.    fltegt  jdjnell. 


ift  flein,    tft  etn  SSogel.     tft  an^  ein 

SSogel    ift  ein  SSoglein. 

III.    Fill  out  with  noun  and  indefinite  article: 

ift  tranrig,    S)er  ^abi^t  frifet .     

^enne  f)at .    ®ie  ^enne  fie^t .    ■ 


fiiri^tet  ben  §abi^t.    ift  nnge^orfant. 

fliegt  f d)nell,    fliegt  langf am.    ift  tiein, 

ift  grofe*    fri§t . f^reit 

lant*    3)ie  3Jlntter  ^at ntel)r. 

IV.  Fill  out  with  personal  pronouns:  2)er 
©abi^t  ift  ein  SSogel  —  ift  gro^,  —  fliegt  f^nell. 
t)ie  ^enne  ift  anc^  ein  SSogel  —  fliegt  langfam.  SDa^ 
^it(^lein  ift  ein  ^^ogelc^en.  — ift  nnget)orfant.  ®ie 
§enne  rnft  —  nnb  —  fontntt  nic^t.  2)er  ^abit^t  fontntt 
nnb  bie  ^enne  fief)t — .  ©ie  l^a^t  nnb  fiirc^tet — . 
S)ag  Sitd^lein  fie|t  —  ni^t,  ®ie  gjJntter  rnft — , 
—  fontntt  nic^t.  S)er  ^abi^t  frifet — .  S)a§  M^= 
lein  ^ort  —  ni^t,    2)er  ^abid^t  fie^t  — . 


19-21] 


INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PRESENT 


15 


LESSON  S 
Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns :  Nom.  and  Ace. 

1 9  ^er  Sttufmatitt  untJ  ber  ^unli 

©in  Saufmann  ^ai  etn  ^ferb,  ©r  reitet  eg.  S)iefer 
Saiifmann  ^at  ehte  Sorfe»  S)iefe  fdflt  unb  ber  Sauf= 
maun  jie^t  ba§^  nid^t.  ®er  .^unb  jiel)t  bie^/  er  beUt 
iinb  jprittgt.  S)er  Saufmaun  benft:  ,,2)iefer  §unb  ift 
toll!"  2)ann  nimmt  er  bag  ©eme^r  unb  f^ie^t  ben 
|)unb.  ®er  §unb  ftirbt  nnb  ber  Saufmann  reitet  traurig 
ttjeiter;  er  ^at  biefen  |)nnb  je^r  gem.  S)a  t^ernti^t  er 
feine  SSorfe  unb  get)t  juriid  unb  finbet  fie,  Stber  eg  ift  jn 
fpdt,  ber  ^unb  ift  nun  tot.  S)er  Saufmann  ift  fefjr 
traurig.  ©r  ^ai  ben  §unb  gem,  unb  eg  tut  i^m  leib/ 
bafe  biefer  tot  ift.^ 

VOCABULARY 

merchant  ber  ^aufmann 


20 


rides 

reitet 

falls 

fdHt 

barks 

beat 

jumps 

fpringt 

thinks 

benft 

takes 

nimmt 

shoots 

frfliegt 

dies 

ftirbt 

misses 

tjermifet' 

goes 

gef)t 

llnds 

finbet 

horse 

ba§  $ferb 

purse 

bie  Sorfe 

mad 

toll 

then 

bann 

gtm 

\ias>  (SJett)el)r' 

on 

tueiter 

back 

guriid' 

too  late 

m  fpat  ^ 

sorry 

leib 

that 

ba§ 

2  I   '  btt§,  ilieS— neuter  demonstratives  referring  to  preceding  sentence. 

2  Observe  inversion  of  subject  and  predicate  caused  by  prece- 
dence of  the  adverb  tiann. 

^  eg  tttt  i|m  leitl  =  lie  is  sorry. 

*  Note  that  the  verb  comes  last  in  the  dependent  clause. 


16  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [22  20 

22  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative 

melc^er  Saufmann? 
Norn.  itx  Saufmann      biefer  Saufmann 

jener  Saufntann 

JDcId^eu  Saiifmann? 
.  Ace.  ben  Saufmann      biefeii  Saufmann 

jenen  ^aufmann 

welijt  33orje? 
Norn.  &  Ace.    V\t  93orfe  btefe  93orfe 

jene  Sorfe 

tt)el(^e§  ^ferb? 
Norn.  &  Ace.    bag  $ferb  bieje§  ^ferb 

jene^  ^ferb 

23  Masculine 

Norn   -^  3SeI(^er  Saufmann  reitet? 


{ 


Siefer  Saufmanu  reitet. 


(  2)iefett  §unb  f^ie^t  er. 

24  Feminine 


^^^    f  3BeIc^e  Sorfe  fadt? 
^'""-  t  Sent  «orie  follt. 


^^^     J  SBeldjc  SSorfe  fiel)t  ber  |)unb? 


2)iefeg  ^ferb  fri^t. 


3ene  33orfe  fietjt  er. 

25  '  Neuter 

^,^^   j  SBelc^eg  $ferb  frtfet? 


^^^     j  2SeI^e§  ^ferb  reitet  ber  Saufmann? 
\  ®iefe§  ^$ferb  reitet  er. 

26  The  demonstrative  and  interrogative  pronouns  biefcr,  btefe, 
biefcS  (this),  jencr,  jene,  jencS  (that),  iDetc^cr,  mi<i)t,  Jpelc^cS 
(which),  are  inflected  like  the  definite  article  in  the  nominative 
and  accusative  cases. 


27-29]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PRESENT  17 

27  9isa§  ijat  biefer  9)Zami?  ®r  ^at  eiuen  ^unb»  2Bte  ift 
jeiier  ,^unb?  Qeiier  ^unb  ift  fe^r  treu,  SBa^  tut  biefer 
Saufmann?  (£r  reitet.  aSag  faUt?  Sie^t  bag  ber  taiif= 
maun?  SZetn,  er  fte^t  ba§  nt^t.  2Ber  fie^t  eg?  2Bag 
tut  jeuer  ^uub?  SJJerft  eg  ber  Saufmauu  je^t?  9?eiu, 
cr  uterft  eg  je|t  and}  ui^t,  3Bag  beuft  er?  Sft  bag 
tua^r?  2Sag  tut  jeuer  Wlann  bauu?  ©tirbt  ber  ,^uub? 
Wie  ift  ber  ffaufmauu?  Sermi^t  er  uuu  jeue  Sorfe? 
5iubet  er  fie?    9ft  eiu  §uub  eiu  Xier? 

.^at  ber  Saufutauu  eiu  ^ferb,  eiueu  |)uub,  eiue  ^euue 
ober  eiueu  ^abidjt?  2Bag  tut  ber  ,^abid)t?  bie  ^euue? 
ber  ,^uub?  bag  Md)Ieiu?  ®er  ,^uub  beUt.  ®iefer 
^^^uub  ift  gro§.  SBelc^er  ^uub  ift  grau?  Seuer 
.^uub  ift  (]rau.  3ebe  >^euue  t)idt  bag  Soru.  3BeId)er 
§uub  beat?  3eber  ^mh  beUt,  S8eld)eu  .g)uub  ^at  ber 
Saufmauu?    @r  ^t  biefeu  ^uub. 

S?e(d)e  ^cnm  ruft  it)r  ffiic^Ieiu?  3)iefe  .^euue  ruft 
eg.  ai^eld^er  ^abic^t  ftie^t?  Qeuer  ^abidjt  fliegt.  ®iet)t 
ber  ,^abid^t  biefeg  ober  jeueg  tiidjleiu?  ®r  fri^t  jebeg 
teiic^Ieiu,  bag^  er  faucet.  Sft  biefe  ,^enm  traurig?  2BeI= 
i)en  ,^uub  fc^ie^t  biefer  Saufumuu?  SBeli^e  93orfe 
tjermifet  jeuer  Saufmauu?  SSeldjieu  ^uub  ^at  biefer 
Kaufmauu  geru? 

28  VOCABULARY 


29 


notices    Itterft 

true         lDaI)r 

picks       picft 

animal    ba§  %kv 

catches  fciugt 

gray        (^mu 

every      jebcr,  jebC,  jcbCg 

faithful  treu 

grain      ba§  ^OVW 

now         je^t 

which    ba§ 

^iia*f,  rel.  pron.  =  which. 

For  word  order  cf.  21,  4. 

18 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[30-3J 


Verb:  1st  and  2nd  person.     Possessives 

30  9^a^  iii  VnU 


^6)  liebe  bte  Slunte, 
Sd)  liebe  ba^  ©piet, 
Sc^  liebe  bie  @d)ule, 
^d)  liebe  gar  t)ieL 

^(^  liebe  ben  SSogel, 
®r  ftngt  gar  fo  fdjon/ 
3?c^  liebe  bie  SBieje, 
^6)  liebe  bie  ^^o^'n, 


®ie  ©rbe,  ben  ^immel, 
2)ie  Sonne,  ben  Stern, 
Qd)  liebe  ba§  aHe^v 
3d}  f)ab'  e^  fo  gern,' 

3d)  liebe  ben  5!]{cnfd)en, 
Da^  ^^erj  nnb  ben  9)htt, 
3d)  liebe  I)erjinnig, 
St?a^  fd)on  \]t  nnb  gnt 


3  1         Hove     id)  (iebc   ^ 

I  have 

id)  I)abc 

you  love  bn  Uebft 

you  have 

bn  I)aff 

he  loves  er  liebt 

he  has 

er  Ijaf 

I  call     id)  rnfe 

I  sing 

id)  fingc 

you  call  bn  rnfft 

you  sing 

bn  fingft 

he  calls  er  rnft 

he  sings 

er  fingt 

32                                           VOCABULARY 

flower         bie  33(unte 

heaven 

ber  .^immcl 

game             ba^  'S^icl 

sun 

bie  Sonne 

school          bic  @(f|Mle 

star 

ber  ©tern 

a  great  deal  gau  Uiel 

all 

aUe§ 

exceedingly  C\aV 

man 

ber  SOfJenfdj 

beautiful       |c^on 

heart 

ba§  .^er,^ 

meadow      bie  2Bieje 

courage 

ber  mm 

heights       bie  |)oI)en 

heartily 

l)er^innig 

earth          bie  @rbe 

good 

gnt 

33  ^  gttt  fo  fi^Ott— idiom :  so  very  charmingly. 

2Cf.  10. 

3 Note  omission  of  h    before  ft  and  t,    an  example  of  the  wear- 
ing-off  process  which  words  undergo. 


34-36]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PRESENT  19 

34  ^i)  Itebe  bie  ©onne,  liebft  bu  fie?  ^a,  ii)  liebe  bie 
Sonne  imb  ben  ©tern*  Siebft  bu  bie  aSiefe  tne^r  ate 
btn  SSatb?  9iein,  i^  liebe  ben  aSalb  ebenjo  jeljr  tnie^ 
bie  SSiefe,  §aft  bu  bie  ^lume  gern?^  3a,  ic^  i}abe  bie 
33lnme,  bag  Spiel  unb  bie  @d)u(e  fel^r  gern*  SBag  ^aft 
bu  lieber,^  bag  Spiel  ober  bie  Sd^nle?  3cf)  l^abe  ta^ 
Spiel  gern  unb  and)  bie  Sdjule,  aber  ic^  glaube  bo^/ 
ic^  ijabe  bag  Spiel  etwa^^  lieber, 

3[8el^e  23lume  liebe  id)?  ^d)  liebe  biefe  93lume  unb 
jene,  id)  liebe  jebe  93lume.  SSag  i)at  biefer  SKenj^  gem? 
®r  ^t  atteg  gem,  tnag^  ji^on  ift  SBeld)er  SSogel  fingt 
fc^on?  ^at  biefer  SSogel  ein  ^erj?  3a,  jeber  9Sogel 
^at  ein  *^erj,  SBag  ijat  jeber  3Sogel?  SSelc^eg  Sii^= 
lein  i^at  biefe  §enne  gem?  3ene  §enne  i)at  biefeg 
Sii^lein  gern,  SSeld)en  .^unb  t)at  biefer  50Jann  gem? 
©r  ^at  biefen  |)unb  gem. 

35  POSSESSIVES 

aSen  l)at  biefer  9)iann  gem?  ©r  i)at  feinen  3Sater 
unb  feine  Tlntt^x  gem.  |)aft  bu  beinen  SSater  unb  beine 
3Kutter  gem?  3a,  gen)i^!  3^  ^cibe  nteinen  SSater  unb 
meine  5!JJutter  feljr  gem.  §aft  bn  beinen  Dnfel  lieber  alg 
beine  S^ante?  3d)  l)abe  fie^  gleic^  lieb.^  §aft  bu  einen 
®ro§t)ater  unb  eine  ©rofemutter?    2iebft  bu  fie? 

36  1  eBenfo  fe^r  mie  =±=  just  as  much  as. 
^  ^ttft  iiu  . . . .  flem,  cf .  10. 

^  Ott  ^aft Itfber  =  you  prefer. 

Ml^  glttUk  iJOli^  =  I  rather  think. 
5  ctttiaS  =  somewliat. 
'ttae§  toltt§  =  all  that. 

'  fie  =  they,  them  (see  she,  her  =  fie,  p.  10). 
^  tj^  ^ttfte  fie  gleid^  Uefi  =  I  love  them  alike  (see  \^  Ittht  . . .  ebenfo 
fe§r  ttlie,  note  l  above). 


20 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[87-40 


37  ,^aft  bu  behieii  ©ro^dater  ebeitfo  geru  \me  beine 
©roBmntter?  §aft  bn  fie  glei^  lieb?  aSelc^e^  M^= 
lein  f)at  bie  .f>enne  gern?  @ie  ijat  xi)x  Sn(J)Iein  gern. 
©ief)ft  bn  bie  ^enne  nnb  i^r  Sii^Iein?  3a,  id)  fe^e 
fie»  ^aft  bn  fie  gern?  SBa^  ^aft  bn  lieber,  bie  §enne 
ober  'i)a§>  Sit^tein?  SSSeldje  §enne  ^aft  bn  lieber,  biefe 
ober  jene?  SKa^  ^at  ber  Sanfmann  lieber,  feinen  §nnb, 
fein  ^ferb  ober  feine  33orfe?  .^at  ber  Sanfmann  nnn 
noc^  eine  33orfe?  9?ein,  er  t)at  feine  93orfe  nte^r  nnb 
and)  feinen  ^nnb.    |)aft  bn  einen  ©^tnager? 


38 

XOMINATIVES 

tin 

©olcr 

cine  abutter 

cin  ^inb 

ic^ 

tnein 

Sater 

meine  9)Jntter 

nietn  Kinb 

bu 

betn 

n 

beine        ,, 

betn     ,, 

er 

feitt 

ft 

feine 

fein     „ 

fie 

tlir 

ff 

it)re 

\¥      „ 

e0 

fein 

ft 

feine 

fein     ,, 

teitt 

It 

feine        ,, 

Wn     „ 

39 

Accusatives 

cinctt  35otcr 

cine  9Wuttcr 

cin  ttnb 

meinen  93ater 

meine  9JJntter 

ntein  Sinb 

beineii 

beine        ,, 

betn      n 

feinen 

feine 

fein      ,, 

i^ren 

i^re 

iDtr       n 

feinen 

feine         ,, 

fein      „ 

feinen 

feine         ,, 

fein      „ 

40  Note  that  the  po^Hessivc  pronouns  and  the  word  fein 
(no)  are  inflected  like  the  indefinite  article  in  nominative  and 
accusative. 


41-48]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PRESENT  21 

41  3a,  id)  ^abe  etneu  (S(f}tDager  uiib  eiiie  @d)tudgerin 
uiib  id)  ijahe  nteiiteu  Sdjiuager  imb  meine  ©d)it)dgerin 
ie()r  gent*  3Keii  I)aft  bu  lieber,  beinen  SSetter  ober  betne 
tSoujiue?  3d)  I)abe  meiiten  i^etter  ebenjc  gem  me  mehic 
Soujiue*  |)aft  bu  feiiien  35ater  uiib  feine  9)cuttcr?  JJetii, 
id)  ^abe  feineu  Skater  unb  feine  aifutter.  Sag  Kinb  ^t 
lueber  i^ater  nod)  SUJutter,  e§  ift  eiite  SBaife, 

42  VOCABULARY 

father  bei*  S3ater  suii  noc^ 

yes,  certainly  ja,  gett)!^  brother-in-law    bcr   Sd^tUagcr 

uncle  ber  £)n!el  sister-in-iaw     btc  (Srf)tudgerm^ 

aunt  bie  ^ante  cousin  (male)    ber  S5etter 

grandfather    ber  (S^rofeDater  cousin  (female)  bie  ©Ouft'ltC 

grandmother  bie  (^rO^lUlltter  neither ...  nor  tOebcr  .  .  .  Itod) 

orphan  bic  SBaife 

43  Compare  ber  (Sc^luager,  W  <Sc^mdgerin.  What  is  the  feminine 
suffix  ?  What  change  in  the  original  word  is  effected  by  the 
suffix?  Form  feminines  of  bcr  Center  (teacher),  bcr  @f|u(cr 
(student),  bcr  ^iinig  (king). 

LESSON  5 
GRAMMAR  REVIEW 

44  1.  Present  indicative  endings  are: 

First  person  c 
Second  person  ft 
Third  person  t 

45  2.  The  definite  article,  de^nonstrative  and  interrogative 
pronouns  are  inflected  alike  in  the  nominative  and  accusative. 

46  3.  The  indefinite  article,  possessive  pronouns,  and  fcitt 
are  inflected  alike. 

47  4.  Personal  pronouns  must  agree  with  their  antecedents 
in  gender  whether  the  noun  represents  a  person,  an  animal,  or 
a  thing, 

48  ^  For  explanatioa  of  the  umlaut  in  ^i^tt)d(tcrtn  see  App.  7, 


22 

ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN                            [4 

49 

PARADIGMS 

tc^  ^abe                    icf)  rufe 
bu  fiaft                       bu  ruffl 
cr  ^nt                        cr  ruft 

50 

Definite  Article 

Nom. 
Ace. 

Masc.                       Fern.                           Keut. 

bet  yRann         bte  9Kutter           ba§  Stub 
bett  "^ann         bie  9J}utter           bttfif  Stub 

[49-56 


51       Demoxstrative  and  Ixterrogative  Pronoun 

Nom.    biefet  ^uub       jeue  @d)tt)efter      U)et^e§fttub? 
Ace.      biefett  ^uub       jeue  @(^tt)efter      uiel(f)e§  fttub? 


52 

Indefinite  Article 

Nom 
Ace. 

.    eitt  33ogeI          etue  Slume 
eiueit  SSogcI       etue  Sluute 

eitt^ferb 
eitt  ^Jpferb 

53 

Possessive  Pronoun  and 

fein 

Nom, 
Ace. 

.    ttteitt  Oufel        i^re  Se^rertu 
meiuett  Dufel     i^re  £el)rertu 

feitt  ©eiue^r' 
feitt  ©etoe^r 

54 

Personal  Pronoun 

Nom, 
Ace. 

55 

et 
i^tt 

fie 
fte 

IDIOMS 

e« 
eg 

Hike 

I  prefer 

I  like  equally  well 

1  rather  think 

1  have  no  . . .  left 

he  is  sorry 

i(i)  ^abz  .  . .  gem 
tc^  ^aU  . . .  tieber 
tc^  \^aht  .  . .  gteidj  (or 
i^  gtaube  bod) 
ic^  ^aht  fein  . . .  niel)r 
e^  tut  tf)m  tetb 

ebenfo)  lieb 

66]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PRESENT  23 

56  REVIEW  EXERCISES  (Written) 

/.  Aiistver^  using  as  many  'j^'^'onoiuis  as  possible: 
1.  aSeWjer  Saufmami  ^at  beii'^mtb?  2.  aBa^  (}at  bie 
^enite?  8,  2BeIcI)en  .^unb  f^tegt  ber  $l:aufmanu?  4. 
mk  fliegt  ber  ^abid)!?  5,  SBer  jdjiefet  beii  ^unb? 
(3.  2Bag  tut  ber  Socket?  7,  ma^  ^abe  id)  gerii?  8,  SBen 
tjaft  bu  Iteber,  ben  ®roJ3t)ater  ober  bie  ©rogmittter? 
9,  mtw  liebt  ba^  Sinb?  10.  2lsa^  liebt  eg?  11,  2Bag 
liebe  id)?  12,  Sl^a^  Derlicrt  ber  taufmami?  13,  SBer 
merft  e^?  14,  2Bag  tut  ber  ^uub?  15,  3BeId)eu 
^mx^  ]l)u^i  ber  Saufmauu? 

II.   Fill  out: 

1,  2)ief —  9)Jaun  liebt  feiu —  ,^unb» 

2,  3)ie)—  9Jhttter  ruft  il)r  Siub, 

3,  2)iei—  Siub  fief)t  feiu—  9}httter, 

4,  ^a\i  bu  ■ flutter? 

5,  |)at  er 9«utter? 

6,  S)ie  aSaife  f)at «ater SJ^utter, 

7,  S)ie  aSaife  t)at aSater  uub 9Jlutter, 

8,  aUeiu  @d)tuager  t)at ^iub, 

9,  9JJeiu —  (5d)U)dneriu  t)at  aud)  ciu  ftiub, 
10,  3eu —  93lume  ift  lel)r  fd)ou, 

III  Use  in  sentences:  biejeu,  meiue,  i^r,  feiu, 
feiue,  itw  aSater,  fd^ie^t,  fd)iege,  liebt,  l^at . . .  geru,  I)at 
, . ,  lieber,  l^abe  . . .  ebeufo  geru  tuie,  id)  glaube  bod), 
etluag,  feiueu, 

IV.  Translate:  1.  This  bird  sings  beautifully.  2.  It  flies 
quickly.  3.  That  hawk  catches  the  chick  and  eats  it.  4.  The 
merchant  shoots  his  dog  and  he  is  sorry.     5.  A  mother  loves  her 


24  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN         •  [57 

child  very  (much).^  6.  Have  you  a  brother-in-law?  7.  My 
sister-in-law  is  an  orphan,  she  has  neither  father  nor  mother. 
8.  I  have  no  purse.  9.  The  horse  is  an  animal.  10.  The  dog 
is  also  an  animal.  11.  This  hawk  chases  that  chick. 
12.  Which  man  loses  his  purse?  13.  Do  you  prefer  this  dog? 
14.  Do  you  love  your  grandmother  and  your  grandfather 
equally  well?  15.  What  do  you  like  better,  school  or  play? 
16.  I  rather  think  I  prefer  play. 

57  ^  Words  in  parentheses  are  not  to  be  translated;  words  in  brack- 
ets are  to  be  inserted  in  the  translation. 


58  (ilj  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  25 


CHAPTER    II 

INDICATIVE   SINGULAR   PERFECT 

LESSON  6 

58  Tense  Auxiliary  ]^ttbcn 

S)ie  |)enne  ^at  einen  §abi(^t  gefe^en.  @ie  ||at  \\)\\ 
gefurri^tet  unb  ^at  ba^  Siidjlein  gentfeu.  ©^  ^at  bie 
3JJiitter  ntd)t  ge^ort.  S)a  ^at  e^  ber  ^abtc^t  gefreffen. 
2)a^  Stub  ^ttt  bie  Sonne  gelieJt.  3c^  ^aJe  ben  ^nnb 
geliett.  §aft  bn  ben  §nnb  gefe^en?  §ttt  ber  Sanf= 
ntann  ben  |)nnb  gentfen? 

59  Strong  Verbs  "Weak  Verbs 

(Wt)     f)at  gefe^en  (fiirc^tet)    \^ai  gefiird^tet 

(nift)     ()at  gernfeH  ftort)        |)at  ge^ort 

(fn6t)    i)at  gefreffen  Oi^bt)        (jut  geliebt 

60  Note  difference  in  perfect  participle  of  strong  and  of 
weak  verbs.  Observe  that  the  perfect  tense  is  used  in  German 
for  the  simple  statement  of  a  fact  in  past  time.  (See  App.  177.) 

61  SBag  ^at  ber  .^abic^t  getan?  @r  ):jCii  etn  Siid^Iein 
gefreffen,  §at  bie  ^enne  ba^  Mijtein  gernfen?  3a, 
fie  I)at  e^  gernfen,  aber  e§  f)ut  nid)t  gefjort,  238er  ^at 
\>Ci^  Md)tein  gernfen?  ^ai  e^  ge()ort?  ^at  bie  ^enne 
:)a^  Siidjlein  gern  geljabt?  ^ai  W^  Siid)lein  bie  5Ilhitter 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [62-65 

gettebt?  ^at  bie  ^enne  ben  .f)abi(^t  gettebt?  9fein,  jie 
i)at  il}n  md}t  (^eliebt,  fonbern^  fie  l}at  tlju  geljafjt  aS?en 
f)at  bag  Sinb  gern  ge^abt?  SSen  ^at  eine  ^eiine  gern 
ge^afat?    2Sen  i)at  fie  (^efiir^tet? 

62 


63 


Present 

AVeak 

Perfect 

\6)  fiirc^te 

id)  ^nOc  gefiirc^tct 

„  I)ore 

„     „    ge{)ort 

„  ^Qbe 

/,      „     Q^t)M 

.  ^affe 

n     /,     Q^¥i^ 

„  i)aht  gern 

Strong 

„      „     flern  ge^abt 

id)  fef)e 

tc^  f)abe  gefef)en 

„  tne 

„      „     getaii 

.  freffe 

,/     „    Qefreffcn 

//  nife 

„     „    gerufen 

PARADIGM 

Perfect  Tense— 

-Singular 

Weak 

Strong 

icf)  f)abe  gefitrdjtet 

ic^  I}abe  gerufen 

bu  i)a\i 

bu  !)aft       „ 

er  f)at 

fie  ^at 

64  ^ie  ^tt^e  ttttb  bie  SJlang 

Sine  Sa^e  l^at  immer  eine  9}la«§  Q^i^Qt.  3)a  ^^i 
bie  9J?au§  bie  Sa^e  feljr  gefiird^tet  imb  fe^r  ge^a^t 
©ublic^  f)at  bie  9]?aug  einen  ©infad  ge^abt  ®ie  f)at 
gebadjt:  ,,Sc^  ge^e  au^  iinb  faufe  eine  Stfjelle,  bie^  pnge 

65  1  fontlem  =  but,  used  after  a  negative  clause  to  introduce  an 
affirmation,  the  opposite  of  what  has  been  denied,  W^tX  is  used  for 
h\d  to  introduce  an  additional  thought  (after  either  positive  or  nega- 
tive statements). 

^  tlie  =  demonstrative  fem. ,  masc.  lier.  neut.  ba§. 


66-68]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  27 

id)  hex  ^a^e^  an.  2)amt  f)ore  id)  immer,  luenn  bie  ^ai^e 
fommt."  ®te  I)at  aljo'  bie  SdjeUe  gefauft.  ,^at  fie  biefe 
ber  fialie  augel)dugt?^  9leiu,  fie  fiird)tet  bie  ft'a|e  fo 
fe^r,  ba^  fie  fd)uell  fortlduft,^  iuenn  jeite  fommt  @o  gef)t 
bie  Sa^e  itoc^  ()eute*  o^ite  (Sd^eUe  ^erum. 

66 


VOCABULARY 

chased  gejagt 

had         gr!)QBt 

feared  9efurd)tCt 

thought  gcba^t 

hated    0Cl)aSt 

bought   gcfaitfl 

hung     geljdugt 

cat       bic  ^a^c 

I  hang 

onto  id)  ()ange  an 

always   tmiltcr 

I  hear 

[^  ()ore 

mouse  bie  Wan^ 

when 

tueuu 

then        bd 

so 

a(fo  (resumptive) 

finally    twhlid) 

I  run 

i(S)  (aufe,  (bit  Idufft, 

idea      bcr  ©iiifatt 

cr  Iditft) 

I  go  out  tc^  gefjc  au§ 

without 

o[)ue 

I  buy    id)  faufe 

about 

I)cntm 

bell      bie  (Scfielle 

67  SBag  I)at  bie  .^atje  irnnter  getait?  ®ie  t)at  bie  9JJau§ 
gejai^t.  ,^at  bie  Siau^  bie  Statue  (]ern  gefjabt?  9iein,  fie 
I)at  fie  uidjt  gem  gel)abt,  fie  Ijat  fie  ge^a^t  uub  gefiird)tet. 
a^a^  ^t  bie  9JJau^  gefauft?  ,^at  fie  ber  Sa^e  bie 
Sd)etle  auge^dugt?  aKarum  uidjt?  .gat  bie  Sa^e  nun 
eine  ©djeUe?    aSie  gel)t  fie  uoc^  tjeute  Ijerum? 

68     ^  bcr  Sa<?C  =  dative  form. 

2  dljo  =  so,  resumptive ;  never  the  English  also. 

^auge^dttgt.  Note  that  the  particle  tttt  is  attached  to  the  parti- 
ciple, making  one  word.  Observe  similar  position  of  particle  in 
fortliittft,  where  Idttft  is  placed  last  in  the  dependent  clause.  See  21,  4. 

^noiii  ^Cttte  =  still  to-day  (a  redundancy  of  expression  common  in 
German,  noi^  ic^t,  ttoii^  tmmer  =  still). 


28  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [«;)-71 

69  GRAMMAR 

1.  The  perfect  tense  is  composed  of  the  tense  auxiliary  ^ai  + 
perfect  participle.  Note  that  the  perfect  participle  of  all  verbs 
begins  with  the  augment  9c,  but  that  some  verbs  add  (c)t  to 
the  stem,  while  others  add  (c)n  and  change  the  stem  vowel. 
The  former  are  called  weak  verbs,  the  latter  strong.  The  per- 
fect participle  of  each  verb  must  be  learned.  The  participle 
comes  last  in  the  sentence. 

2.  The  perfect  tense  is  often  used  in  German  where  in  Eng- 
lish the  preterite  would  be  employed.     See  App.  177. 

70  WRITTEN  EXERCISES 

/.  Write  perfect  'participlm  of:  id)  fiirdjte,  id) 
freffe,  t^  ^abe,  \i)  fef)e,  bu  t)orft,  bu  faufft,  bu  f)a§t/  cr 
^at  gern,  er  Ijcingt,  er  tut 

//.  Write  out  the  paradigiti  of  the  above  verbs 
in  singular  present  and  perfect. 

III,  Answer:  28en  ^at  bte^emie  ge^a^t?  SBeldje^ 
Sii^Iein  ^^i  fie  gern  ge^abt?  aSag  ^^i  ber  Saufmami 
oerloren?^  2Ber  \)^i  e§  gefe^en?  SBag  ^t  bag  Siub 
geliebt?  SBen  ^^i  ba§  ^inb  geliebt?  2Ber  ^t  tueber 
SSater  noc^  abutter  ge^bt? 

IV.  Translate  and  ansioer^  using  'perfect  tense:  Whom  did 
the  hen  fear?  The  chick  did  not  fear  its  mother.  The  mer- 
chant had  a  horse.  The  mouse  hated  the  cat.  Whom  did  the 
hen  like?  The  merchant  did  not  see  the  purse.  The  hawk 
devoured  the  chick. 

What  did  the  dog  do?  Who  devoured  the  chick?  Whom 
did  the  hen  call?     Did  you  call?     I  thought:  "He  did  not  do 

7  I      '  Syncopated  from  ^affcft,  cf.  ^aft  for  ^afift. 
^Perf.  part,  of  %x  Ucrticrt,  he  loses. 


72-76]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  29 

this."  Did  the  mouse  buy  a  bell?  The  cat  always^  chased  the 
mouse.     Why  did  the  mouse  fear  the  cat? 

LESSON  7 

72  Tense  Auxiliary  fcin 

S)tefer  §abt^t  tft  fe{)r  fc^netl  gejlogett,  Q'ene  §enne 
ift  gefommen  unb  t)at  it)r  Mc^lein  geriifen,  ®er  ®auf= 
mann  tft  fdjneU  geritten,  ber  ^unb  ift  gef^inittgen,  Q'ener 
.^aufmann  ^at  biefen  ^unb  gef(^ojfen,  ba  ift  biefer  rjes 
ftorien,  Q'eneg  Siid^Iein  ift  f^ned  gefommett,  aber  ber 
A^')abic^t  ift  no^  j^neHer^  fl^folgi 

73  Participles 

Strong  Weak 

(ftiegt)  ift  geflogen  (foigt)  ift  gefolgt 

(fommt)  ift  gefommen 

(reitet)  ift  geritteu 

(fpringt)  ift  gefpruitgeii 

(ftirbt)  ift  geftorbett 

74  Note  that  all  the  above  verbs  are  intransitive  and  express 
a  transition  either  of  condition  (as  geftorbett)  or  of  place  (as 
gefottttttett).  Such  verbs  are  conjugated  with  ift  instead  of  ^at 
in  the  perfect  tense.  In  the  same  manner  is  conjugated  the 
verb  ift  —  er  ijl  geloefett,  and  mirb  —  er  ift  getuarbett. 

75  2)er  S^neiber  ttitb  ber  ®^tt^mar|et 

©in  Sc^u^mad^er  ift  einmal  fe^r  tranf  gemefen,  2)a 
^t  er  einen  3)  of  tor  gerufen.  ®iefer  ift  gefommen  unb 
I)at  i)iel  SJlebijin  t)erf(^rieben.  33efonberg  f)at  er  befo{)Ien: 

76     '  Observe  position  of  always  in  text. 

'^  nor^  f (^netter  =  stiU  more  quickly  (cf .  noji^  \itVik,  68,  4). 


30 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[77-78 


„®ie  effen  nic^t^!"^  9?un  ^at  aber  ber  S^nlimadjer  fef)r 
gern-  Sauertraut  Qegeffen  nnb  ba  er  hunger  gefjabt  f)at,'^ 
]^at*  jeine  ^^xan  einen  2:o|)f  ©auerfraut  gefodjt,  i^r 
Wann  i)at  tiic^tig  gegeffen  iinb  ift  batb  gefnnb  getnorben, 
SlI^  ber  Sottor  bag  geljort  Ijat,^  ^at  er  in  feiit  ^Zoti^biicf) 
gefc^rieben:  ,,®auerfraiit  ift  ein  Wittel  gegen  ben 
X^p^ng."  Salb  ift  and)  ein  ©c^neiber  franf  geiDorben, 
®er  Sottor  ift  gefomtnen  nnb  i)at  fogleii^  ©anertrant 
t)erfcl)rieben.  2l(Iein^  ber  Srfjneiber  ift  geftorben.  S)a 
i)at  ber  ®oftor  in  fein  9Zoti^bncf)  gefd^rieben:  „®aner= 
frant  fnriertbenSc^nljmadjer^  nnb  tbtet  ben  ©d^neiber/"' 


77 


came 

prescribed 

commanded 

ate 

became 

wrote 


VOCABULARY 
Perfect  Tense 
Strong 
ift  gemefeit 
ift  gefoinmen 
I)at  t)erfd)rie'beif 
t)at  befo{)'Ieir 
^at  gegeffen 
ift  getDorben 
t)at  gefd^rteben 


Weak 
had       ^ai  gef)abt 
cooked  f)ai  gefod)t 
heard    t)at  geljuvt 
cure      ^at  furiert' 
kill      ^at  getotet 


78  1  ^ic  effen  ui^tg— an  indicative  used  for  a  command  =  you  must 
eat  nothing. 

^ |at  Bern  gegeffen  =  like'd  to  eat.    Observe  order  of  words;  cf.21,2. 

3 Observe  order  of  words;  cf.  21,  4. 

*  Observe  order  of  words;  cf.  21,  3.  Here  the  preceding  adverb  is 
a  temporal  clause. 

^  aUein  =  but,  adversative  after  eitlier  positive  or  negative  state- 
ment; see  fonliem  and  after,  66,  1. 

^ben  Sdjn^ma^er  =  shoemakers — noun  with  geneHc  article  stands 
for  entire  class;  see  App.  100. 

^  Note  that  where  the  first  syllable  of  a  verb  is  an  unaccented  pre- 
fix (er,  tte,  Uer,  ht,  itV,  ent)  the  augment  ge  is  omitted  in  the  parti- 
ciple. The  same  is  true  of  verbs  ending  in  ie'ren  (which  last  are  of 
French  origin). 


79] 


INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT 


31 


tailor 
shoemaker 
once 
sick 

ber  ©d^ueiber 
ber  (Scf)u()mac^er 
einmar 
fran! 

pot 

man,  husband 

heartily 

soon 

ber  Xo^f 
ber  Wann 
tiic^tiij 
balb 

doctor 

ber  ^  of  tor 

well  (healthy) 

gefmib' 

medicine 
especiallj' 

bie  9}lebiain' 
befou'berS 

notebook 
means 

ba^  9Jotis't)ud) 
t>a^  mind 

nothing 

now,  well    } 
(expletive)  \ 

sauerkraut 

iiic^tg 

mm 

ba§  ©mierfraut 

against 
typhoid  fever 
at  once 

gegen 

ber  ^9|)()U0 
^fogleic^' 

hunger 

ber  |)mtger 

to  cure 

hirie'ren 

woman,  wife 

bie  e^rau 

to  kill 

toten 

79  2Ber  ift  trauf  (^emeieii?  aBa§  I)at  er  c^e^abt?  aSa^ 
i)at  er  getan?  Sft  ber  Sottor  fogleicf)  gefommen?  SBa^ 
^at  ber  3)oftor  getan?  SBa§  f^at  er  befo{)Ien?  §at 
ber  S^neiber  ha^  getan?  a93a§  ()at  er  gern  getan? 
SBer  ^at  §nnger  ge^abt?  2Ba^  ()at  bie  "Svan  gefoc^t? 
aSie  t)iel  I)at  fie  gefodjt?  JJiir  tuen  I)at  fie  e^  ge!od)t? 
$at  ber  3)fann  e§  gern  gegeffen?  Sisie  ift  e^  i^ni  befom=^ 
men?  (How  did  it  agree  witli  him?)  S'g  ift  i^m  fel)r 
gnt  betommen,  3ft  er  gefnnb  gemorben?  SBa§  ijat  ber 
3)o{tor  gelernt?  ^at  er  e»  be^aCten  (remembered)? 
3Sa§  t)at  er  gefi^rieben?  Q^ft  fonft  jemanb  (anybody 
else)  franf  gemorben?  SSe(d)e^  SiJtittel  ^at  ber  3)oftor 
Derfd^rieben?  ^\t  e§  i^m  gnt  betomnten?  SBie  ift  e^ 
if)m  betomnten?  SSa^  f)at  ber  2)ottor  nnn  gelernt? 
2Ba§  ^aft  bn  gern  ge(}abt?  3Ben  i)abe  id)  geliebt?  SBer 
ift  gefommen,  at^  ber  Sd^nfjmac^er  franf  gemefen  ift? 
Sft  ba^  ^ndjtein  unge^orfam  getnefen? 


32  ELEMENTS    OF   GERMAN  [80-83 

80  GRAMMAR 

1.  The  perfect  tense  of  both  strong  and  weak  verbs  is 
formed  by  means  of  the  tense  auxiliaries  l^rit  or  ifl  +  per- 
fect participle  of  the  verb. 

2.  Only  intransitive  verbs  of  transition  (of  place  or  con- 
dition) take  ift;  all  others  take  |ot.     See  App.  68-70. 

8 1  PARADIGM 

Strong 

ic^  ^abe  gefe^en  ic^  bin  gemefen 

bu  l}aft       „  bit  bift       „ 

er^at         „  er  ift 

Weak  ' 

\d)  ^aOe  gefiirc^tet  tc^  bin  gefoljt 

\>\\  ^aft          „  bu  bift       „ 

er  :^ot           „  er  ift          „ 

82  SBag  1:\(ii  ber  ^aWd^t  getan?  ©r  ift  geflogen,  2Sie 
ift  er  geflogeu?  ©djnell  ift  er  geftogen?  SBa^  ^at  bie 
Sa^e  getan?  ©ie  ift  gefprungen,  2Ba^  ()at  fie  fonft 
no^^  getan?  ©ie  Icjdt  bie  2)iang  g^jcigt-  ^at  fie  fie 
gefangen?  9lein,  fie  \)ai  bie  3JJan§  nic^t  gefangen,  aber 
bie  3Kan§  l^at  bie  Sa^e  gefiird^tet,  SBa^  ^at  bie  SKanei 
getan?  ©ie  ^at  eine  ©c^eUe  getanft.  §at  fie  fie  ber 
fe'a^e  ange^cingt?  9?ein,  fie  ^ai  ba§  ni(^t  getan,  fie  t)at 
feinen  9Knt  gef)abt,  3ft  ber  Sanfmann  geritten?  3ft 
ber  §nnb  gefprnngen?  Sft  ber  SSogel  geflogen?  aSer 
ift  gefontmen?  3Ber  ^^ai  ben  ^abic^t  gefetjen?  3Sen  ^at 
bie  ^enne  gernfen?  SBen  l^at  bie  §enne  gem  ge^abt? 
aSer  ift  geftogen?  3ft  ber  §abi(^t  fd^neU  geflogen?  SSer 
ift  getomnten?  aSa^  Icjdi  ber  ^abid^t  getan?  3ft  ^^d^:} 
Siic^Iein  ge^orfant  getnefen? 

83  ^ fonft  no(|  =  besides;  cf.  no^  immer,  <>8, 4;  noi|  fj^nettrr,  76,3. 


84-8«]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  33 

84  WRITTEN  EXERCISES 

/.  Write  the  perfect  paradig7)i  of:  bu  fotgft,  bu 
bx\t,  er  ruft,  er  ^at,  er  tut,  id)  fiird^te,  fie  jagt* 

II.  Aiisiver:  2Ber  ^at  ben  ^abic^t  gefei)eu?  2Ba§ 
^at  ber  ^aufmann  t)erIoreu?  Sft  ber  ^unb  gefprmigen? 
,^at  er  gebeHt?  2Ben  {)aft  bu  geru?  SBa^  I)at  ba§  Siub 
tieber,  ben  33erg  ober  ba^  SKaffer?  2Bie  ift  ^a^  Siid^Ieiu 
gefommeu?  2Bie  ift  ber  3Sogel  geftogeu?  SBa^  t)at  bie 
ajJau^  gefauft?    ^at  bie  Sa|e  bie  ©c^eUe  an? 

///.  Translate:  The  dog  jumped  and  barked.  The  merchant 
lost  his  purse.  When  did  the  dog  jump?  What  did  the  hen 
see?  What  did  the  mouse  fear  ?  Whom  did  you  love  ?  What 
did  I  love  ?  How  did  he  come  ?  The  doctor  prescribed  much 
medicine.  The  sauerkraut  cured  the  shoemaker,  but  killed  the 
tailor.  The  doctor  came  quickly.  The  girl  became  ill.  The 
chick  died.      The  dog  died  suddenly. 

LESSON  8 

85  Genitive 

2)ag  ift  ber  ^Juub  beg  9}Jauue^. 
©ie  liebt  bie  Sa^e  ber  grau* 
©r  fiel^t  ben  35ogeI  beS  Siube^* 


NOM. 

Gen. 

M. 

ber  9JJaun  (etn) 

be§  ajJauueS  (eiueg) 

F. 

bie  fjrau  (eiue) 

ber  grau  (eiuer) 

N. 

bag  Siub  (eitt) 

beg  SiubeS  (eiueg) 

ttjer?  ttja^? 

lueffen? 

86  Note  that  the  inflection  of  the  genitive  masculine  and 
neuter  is  alike  (c8)  both  in  the  noun  and  the  artide;  that 
the  feminine  noun  is  not  inflected;  and  that  the  article  in 
feminine  genitive  ends  in  ct. 


34  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [87-90 

87  Observe  that  the  genitive  follows  the  noun  it  limits. 

88  2)er  ftopf  ber  ^euiie  ift  Hein, 
SLVeffen  Sopf  ift  ftein? 

2)er  giiicjel  beg  §tttii^t«  ift  ftarf. 

aSeffeu  gtiigel  ift  ftarf ? 

Der  Sorper  beg  ^it^Ieing  ift  !(ein/ 

SBeffeii  ftorper  ift  fleiii? 

2)ie  g^arbe  einer  ^emie  ift  grau  ober  tueig, 

aSeffeu  garbe  ift  grau? 

2)cr  5tii9  ^itt^€^  §tt6i^t0  ift  I)o^» 
aBeffeu  ^lug  ift  l)od)? 
2)ie  ajhtttet  beg  ^inbeg  ift  l)ier. 
aSeffeu  mnitex  ift  I)ier? 

89  VOCABULARY 

head       bcr  ^'opf  -    color   bic  ?^arBe 

wing       ber  ?^lugcl  flight    ber  glug 

strong      ftar!  high       ()£)d) 

body      ber  ^or^er  here     I)ier 

90  Xtv  2)ieiter  beg  Itiinigg 

Gin  ftouig  ^at  eiiimal  eiiieu  Sieiier  ge^abt,  3)er 
5Dieuer  beg  Souigg  I)at  bie  ffiadje  ge^bt,  aber  er  ift 
miibe  geiDefen  uiib  ift  eiiigefdjlafeiL  2)er  Sonig  ^t  if)U 
gerufeU;  aber  ber  Sieuer  beg  Souigg  t)at  eg  uidjt  get)ort. 
®a  ift  ber  Souig  gefommeu  unb  l)at  U)n  gefu^t.  ©r 
^at  einen  aSrief  beg  Sienerg  gefunben.  2)er  33rief  ift 
an  bie  9Kntter  beg  2)ienerg  gemefen,    ®er  ^onig  l)at 


91-92]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  35 

ben  35rief  gelefen*  2)a  i)at  geftanben\*  ,,Sd^  bin  je^t  jo 
miibe,  benn  i^  ^be  lange  nic^t  gejdtilafen.  Qc^  i)abe  fo 
Diel  jn  tnn  ge^abt,  nnb  nnn  fc^icfe  id)  bir  ba§  @elb/'  2)a 
l)at  ber  ffonig  SOJitteib  gefiitjlt  nnb  i}at  @elb  t)in'gelegt 
nnb  ift  fort'gegangen,  ®er  S)iener  ift  balb  anf gema^t, 
i}at  ba^  ®e(b  be^  S^onig^  gefnnben  nnb  ift  ^nerft  je^r 
erfd^rocfen,  ®ann  f)at  er  ade^  geprt  nnb  f)at  fic^  fe^r 
gefrent  nnb  ijat  ha^  @e(b  be^  ^onig^  an  feine  SKntter 
gef^ictt, 

9  i  VOCABULARY 

Masculine 
NoM.  Gen. 

king      ber  ^'onig  bel  ^ouigl 

servant  ttt  Xieiter  bcl  ^ieuevl 

letter     bcr  23nef  beS  33nef8 

Feminine 
NoM.  Gen. 

story     bit  6Jefc^ic^te  ber  ^efc^ic^te 

watch    bie  2Boc^e  ber2Bad)e 

mother  bie  3)hitter  ber  SOhitter 

Neuter 
NoM.  Gen. 

pity      ba0  SD^itleib  bel  mnum 

money  baS  ®elb  bel  ®elbel 

Pres.  Perf. 

I  go  to  sleep  ic^  fc^lafc  etii'  ic^  bin  ein'gefc^Iafen 

he  hears       er  ^ovt  er  ^ot  gef)ort 

you  seek         bu  flK^ft  bll  l^oft  QefllC^t 

I  find  i(^  finbe  ic^  ^abe  gefimbeu 

you  write     bu  f c^reibft  bu  ^aft  gefd^rtebeu 

92     ^  §at  Qefianben  =  stood ;  subject  is  the  following  clause.    What  is 
the  order? 


36 


ELEMENTS   OF   GERMAN 


[93-94 


Pres. 

Perf. 

he  reads                         er  licft 

cr  l)at  gelefen 

he  sleeps                        er  fd^lftft 

er  f^at  gef^lafen 

I  feel                     ic^  fit^le 

id)  I)abe  gefui)tt 

I  do                      i^  tue 

id)  ^be  getan 

you  lay  money  dow-n    bu  legft  ^clb  fjllt' 

bu  ^a\t  (^elb  ^tn'gelegt 

he  goes  away                er  ge{)t  fort'  ^ 

er  ifit  forfgegaugen 

I  wake  up                      [^  lt)OC^e  Qltf 

id)  tin  mif  gemac^t 

I  watch                  id)  tva^t 

id)  'f)aht  geujod^t 

you  are  frightened       bU  erfd^rttfft' 

hn  hifi  erfc^ro'cfen^ 

he  rejoices  very  much  er  f  reut  ftC^^  f  e^r 

er  ^at  \id)  fe^r  gefreut 

I  send  to  my  mot^her  td^  fd^irfe  ait  metite 

tc^  1)aht  on  meine  9}^ut= 

ajJutter 

ter  gefd^icft 

tired  mube                         a  long  time  lange  (adverb) 

for    beuu                         at  first       ^uerft' 

all 

aHeg 

93  aSer  f)at  ben  33rief  gejd^rieben?  3ft  er  eiugefc^Ia^ 
fen?  aSer  I)at  i^n  gefnnben?  ,^at  ber  Sonig  ben  Srief 
gelefen?  9ln  tuen  ift  ber  93rief  gemefen?  2ln  meffen 
9)httter  ift  er  getDefen?  3ln  bie  SKntter  be§  ®iener§, 
2Ba§  {)at  ber  S)iener  be§  Sonigg  gefdjrieben?  ^at  ia^ 
ben  Sontg  geriil^rt?  2Bag  l^at  ber  ^ontg  l^ingelegt? 
aeSeffen  ®elb  ift  eg  getnefen?    j^iix^  wen  ift  eg  getnefen? 


94  ^  Observe  that  an  adverb  closely  associated  with  a  verb,  is  written 
with  the  perfect  participle,  like  a  part  of  the  verb.  In  the  present 
tense  it  comes  last  in  the  sentence.  This  particle  always  has  the 
accent.     See  App.  80. 

2  Note  that  when  an  unaccented  prefix  is  attached  to  the  verb, 
the  perfect  participle  omits  the  augment  gf. 

^  flli^  is  reflexive  for  third  person. 

*  fiir  tuen?  =  for  whom  ? 


96-97]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  37 

^at  ber  2)iener  be§  Sontgg  ba§  ®elb  gefunbeu?  3ft  er 
erfdjtoden?  ^at  er  jidj  gefreut?  2i>ag  f)at  er  baim 
getan?  3Seffen  @o^n  I)at  gej^Iafeu?  SBeffeu  Sieiter 
Ijai  bie  SBa^e  ge^abt?  SBeffen  Sonig  ^at  if)n  gefunben? 
aSeffen  ^uiib  l)at  bag  @elb  geje^en?  &^efjen  ^ferb  ift 
j^neH  gelaufen?  SBeffen  33orfe  ift  gefaUen?  SBeffen 
ftud)tetn  f)at  ber  §abi^t  gefreffeu?  SSeffeu  9Jtutter  ift 
bie  ^enne? 

95  Mil  m  witJi  articles:    3)te  ^enne  ift  bie  SUJutter 

fiiid^Iein^.     S)er  §unb ftaufmann^  I}at  bie 

33orfe  gefet)en.    5Da§  ^ferb SWanue^  ift  grau,    S)ie 

garbe ^unbe§, ^eiiue, ^Mdjlein^.    S)er 

I51ug ,^em\e  ift    nidjt    ^odj.     Sie  SRutter 

Sinbeg  ift  ^ier, 

96  Answer:  SBeffeii  Siidjieiu  ift  uidjt  gefommen? 
SSeffen  §unb  I)at  bie  33orfe  gefe^en?  SSeffen  Sruber  ift 
ein  Dntel?  SBeffen  SSater  ift  ®roBt)ater?  SBeffen  Sorfe 
ift  gefaUen?  SSeffen  ©^ttjefter  ift  eine  STante?  SKeffen 
glug  ift  t)oc^?  aSeffen  ajJutter  ift  ^ier?  SBeffen  Sopf 
ift  grofe?    SBeffen  gliiget  ift  ftart? 

97  Translate:  The  hen's  chick  did  not  hear  the  mother.  The 
merchant's  purse  fell.  The  horse  of  the  merchant  was  large. 
The  merchant's  dog  saw  the  purse.  The  chick's  mother  called 
it.  The  king's  servant  did  not  go  to  sleep.  The  grandfather 
is  the  father's  father  or  the  mother's  father.  Is  the  nephew 
the  son  of  a  brother  or  of  a  sister?  The  uncle  of  the  brother 
of  the  father  or  of  the  mother. 


38  ELEMENTS    OF   GEEMAN  [98-100 

LESSON  9 
Dative 

98  Indirect  Object 

2)er  2)iener  t)at  bcr  SJlutter  mten  Srief  gef^rieben. 
3)cr  Koiiig  I)at  bem  Wiener  ba^  ®elb  gegeben*  2)ie 
9Kaug  :^at  bcr  ^a^c  !etne  Sc^elle  auge^dugt  ®er  ^uub 
t)at  bem  ^aufmami  'i)a^  @elb  iii^t  gerettet  2)er  Sauf= 
mami  l^at  bem  SJJferb  bie  ©poren^  gegebeiu  S)er  Wiener 
l)at  feittet  SJluttcr  eiueii  33rtef  gefdjriebeu.  2)er  tonig 
]^at  feittem  ^itntv  bag  @elb  gegebeii,  Qeiie  Wlam  l^at 
blefet  ^a^e  feiiie  ©djette  auget)diigt,  2)iefer  §uub  l^at 
itntm  ^attfmttiitt  feiit  ©elb  nidjt  gerettet. 

99  KoM.  Dat. 

bet  Stoiiig  bem  ^ontg 

bie  5Jlutter  bet  ^ntttv 

bag  ^^ferb  bem  ^ferb 

100  SBem  l)at  ber  2)iener  einen  Srief  gefdjrieben? 
I)er  Stttttter  ijat  er  i^n  gefdjrieben, 

aaSag  ^at  er  beir  SJlutter  gefd)riebeu? 

©iueu  Srief  t)at  er  i^r  gefc^rieben. 

3Bem  ()at  ber  ftaufmami  bie  ©poreu  gegcbeu? 

Setnem  5pferb  ijat  er  fie  gegeben, 

aiJag  l)at  er  feiuem  ^Pfevb  gegebeu? 

2)ie  Sporen  ^t  er  ti||m  gegebeu. 

SBem  Ijat  ber  Sonig  bag  ®elb  gegebeu? 

®etnem  2)iener  Ijat  er  eg  gegebeu, 

aSag  ^at  er  ttm  Wiener  gegebeu? 

^a^  ®elb  ijat  er  t^m  gegebeu, 

*  tie  @|iprctt  =  spurs. 


101-103] 


INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT 


39 


101 


Nominative 

J  and  Dative 

Nom. 

ber 

bie 

ba§ 

Dat. 

bem 

ber 

bem 

Nom. 

jener 

jeue 

jene^ 

Dat. 

jeucm 

jener 

jenem 

Nom. 

eiit 

etue 

eiii 

Dat. 

eiiiem 

eiuer 

ctnem 

Nom. 

metii 

metne 

nieiii 

Dat. 

meiitem 

meiiier 

meiuem 

Nom. 

tuer? 

Dat. 

mem? 

102 


Dative  after  Prepositions 

^tt§  ©emiffeii  be§  SBoIfS 


©in  ©jel  fonimt  einnml  an^  bem  Sl^albe  nnb  begeg^ 
net  einem  SBolf.^  liefer  Ijat  feit  bem  Xag  3nt)or  nidjt^ 
gegefjen  nnb  ift  fe^r  Ijungrig.  ®a  uerfnc^t  ber  ©jel,  fid) 
jn  retten.  ,,^cibe^  SOJitleib  mit  mir,  id)  bin  arm  nnb 
franf,  id)  tomme  eben  t)on  bem  9BaIbe,  ino  id)  anf  einen 
SDorn  getreten  bin.  3d)  ge^e  nnn  nadj  ber  @tabt,  p 
einem  2)ottor,  ber  foU  mir  l)elfen.^  Unb  er  ^^eigt  bem 
a55oIf  feinen  %n^,  tnorin  rid)tig  ein  2)orn  ftedt.  2)od)^ 
bei  bem  2Bolf  fte()t  e^'  feft/  ha^  er  ben  &)el  frigt.  ®o 
fprid)t  er,  nad)bem  er  fid)  ein  inenig  befonnen  \}at:  ,,5!Kein 
©emiffen  befief)(t  mir,  bid)  t)on  beinem  Seiben  ^n  be= 
freien."    Unb  im  9?n  t)at  er  ben  (£fet  anfgefreffen. 

1 03    1  Note  that  ficgepet  takes  dative  as  direct  object.  See  App.  133. 
^fidht,  imperative. 

*lier  jott  mir  ^ctfen  =  he  is  to  help  me. 
J  )I0(^  =  but.  yet  (adversative)  cf.  78,  5. 

■'  Anticipatory  object — in  apposition  with  the  foUowing  ba^  clause. 
'^bct .  .  .  feft  =  it  is  a  settled  matter  with  the  wolf. 


40 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[104-106 


I04     Prepositions  that  always  govern  the  dative: 

to  (a  place)    na^  out  of  au^ 

to  (a  person)  git  near,  with  bcl 

from  t)On  since  jeit 

with  mit 


105 

VOCABULARY 

Masculine  ' 

NOM. 

DAT. 

wolf 

ber  SSoIf 

bent  SSolf(e) 

donkey 

ber  @fel 

bem  efel 

woods 

ber  SSalb 

bem  2Batb(e) 

day 

ber  Xag 

bem  Stag(e) 

thorn 

ber  ^orn 

bem  ^orn(e) 

doctor 

ber  ®o!tor 

bem  Softer 

foot 

ber  5u§ 

bem  5it§(e) 

FemininI: 

NOM. 

DAT. 

city 

bie  Stabt 

ber  ©tabt 

Neuter 

NOM. 

DAT 

conscience  ha§>  (^etOtf  feU 

bem  ^emif  feu 

pity 

'i)a^  mtki'o 

bem  $mitleib 

suffering    ha^  Seibett 

bem  Seibeu 

Pres. 

Perf. 

I  come 

ic^  !omme 

i^  Bin  gefommen 

I  meet 

i6)  begeg'ne 

id)  bin  begeguet 

he  eats 

ertgt 

er  ^at  gegeffen 

I  try 

td^  t)erfu'c§e 

tc§  \)aU  t)erfu^t 

he  saves  himself 

er  rettet  fid)* 

er  ^at  fic^  gerettet 

I  step 

i^  trete 

i(^  Bin  getreten 

I  go 

i(i)  ge^c 

t^  Bin  gegangen 

he  shows 

ergeigt 

er  f)at  gegeigt 

*  Observe  that  the  infinitive  phrase,  flt^  jtt  tettCU  (to  save  him- 
self), occurs  in  the  text. 


100-107 


INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT 


41 


PRES. 

Perf. 

it  sticks 

e§  fterft 

c§  ijat  geftedt 

he  devours         ei*  f  ri^t 

er  i)at  gefreffeit 

he  speaks 

er  fpric^t 

er  l)at  gefprod^en 

I  consider 

ic^  befin'ne  mic^ 

ic^  ^ahz  mid^  befonnen 

he  commands     ei*  Beftel^It' 

er  f)at  befoti'len 

he  frees 

er  befreit' 

er  f)at  befreit 

before 

5ut)or' 

in  -w 

rhich  tuorin' 

hungry 

l^ungrifl 

really       ric^ticj 

I)oor 

arm 

but 

boc^ 

sick 

!ran! 

firm 

feft 

just 

eben 

after       nac^bcm'  (conjunction) 

where 

tl)0 

a  little    eiii  mentg 

now 

nun 

in  a 

trice  im   9fJu 

I06  Seit  tvann  ^t  ber  SBoIf  ge^nngert?  3Sie  ift  er 
je^t?  aSem  bec^egnet  biefer  33?olf?  35>em  begeguet  ber 
gfel?  SBag  Derfud)!  ber  ©fel  511  tun?  2Ba^  geigt  er 
bem  aSolfe?  aSBa^  i)at  er  in  bem  gn^?  2Bo^er  ift  er 
gefommen?  SBo^in  gef)t  er?  Sffier  lnot)nt^  in  ber  ©tabt? 
3u  tuem  ge^t  ber  (£je(?  SBa^  jo(l  ber  2)oftor  bem  ©fel 
tun?  2Ba^  ftectt  in  bem  5nj3  be^  ©fete?  2Bag  fte^t  bei 
bem  SSolfe  feft?  2Bie  lange  ^at  \\i)  ber  SSoIf  befonnen? 
3ft  \)a^  ©emiffen  be^  2Bo(fe§  fef)r  jart?'  SBa^  befie^It 
e^  it)m?  @e^ord)t^  er  feinem  ©emiffen?  SBag  tnt  er 
im  9lu? 

aSo!)in  reitet  ber  Sanfmann?    9?ac^  ber  Stabt  reitet 
er,    ajlit  mem  f priest  ber  9Jlann?    $IJit  feinem    9?ater 


1 07     ^  ttio^ttt  =  dweUs. 
^  jUtt  =  tender. 
^  (je^Orj^t  =  obeys. 


42  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [108-110 

j<)ri(^t  ber  Tlamu  ^u  tuem  ift  ha§>  tiidjlein  gelaufen? 
Su  jeiner  mnttn  ift  e§  gelaufen,  SBo^er^  ift  ber  SSoIf 
gefommen?  ©eit  wann  ^at  er  nid)tg  gefreffett?  93ei 
tuem  l^at  ber  ®iener  be^  Sonigg  getebt?  SBem  i)at  er 
eineu  Srief  gefi^riebeu?  3u  ttjem  ift  ber  Sotiig  gegangen? 

LESSON  10 

pREPOSITION^S    WITH    ACCUSATIVE 

108  ©in  S)orf  liegt  fe^r  einfam  itn  gelbe,  ®g  ift  feit 
lange^  ffrieg  getDefen,  unb  je^t  ^ort  mm,  ba§  ber  geinb 
gegen  ba§  S)orf  jie^t.  2)a§  2)orf  ^at  feine  Slrmee'  miber 
\>n\  geinb  511  fc^icfeu  unb  man  fiirc^tet  fi^  fe()r,  3)a 
bittet  ber  ^farrer  ®ott  nm  feinen  ©d^n^,  ©r  foil  ettt)a§ 
fiir  ba§  35orf  tnn.^  ^n  ber  9iad)t  fommt  and)  ber  geinb, 
bod)  er  jie^t  Doriiber  ol^ne  SJJorb,  <5ener  ober  S^otfd^Iag, 
2Bag  ^ai  nur  ben  Drt  bef^it^t?  3n  ber  ')ilcii)i  \)ai  eg 
gefd)neit  nnb  eine  SSanb  t)on  ©d^nee  \)ai  fii^  nm  bag 
Sorf  ge^ogen,  fo  ha^  ber  g^nb  nid)tg  bauon*  gefe^en 
\)Cit    ®a§  ^at  "ba^  Sorf  gerettet, 

109  Prepositions  that  always  govern  the  accusative: 

through,  by  means  of  buvrf)  against,  contrary  to  tUtbcr 

for  fiir  without  of)Ue 

against,  toward  QCQCU  ai'oiind  UTtt 

f  iO    *  tUO|er  =  whence. 
2  feit  lOttge  =  a  long  time. 
^  fott  iVin  =  is  asked  to  do. 

>iiatiott  =  of  it. 


Ill]                    INDI 

CATIVE  SINGUL 

AR  PERFECT 

1  1  1 

VOCABULARY 

Masculine 

NOM. 

Acc. 

war 

bcr  ^'rieg 

belt  Srieg 

enemy 

ber  ^^eiiib 

belt  geinb 

pastor 

ber  starrer 

belt  ^farrer 

God 

ber  (^ott 

\)tn  (^ott 

protectiou  ber  @C^U^^ 

ben  ^d)u^ 

murder 

ber  mvvh 

ben  moxh 

slaughtei 

'  ber  Xotjdjlag 

belt  Xotfdjiag 

place 

ber  Drt 

ben  Ort 

snow 

ber  (Sdjitec 

ben  8^nce 

Feminine 

army 

bie  5(rmee' 

bie  ^Irmec' 

night 

bie  ^ad)t 

bie  3lad)i 

wall 

bie  3Boub 

Neuter 

bie  SBmtb 

village 

\)a^  ^orf 

ha^,  ^orf 

field 

ba^  Tsd't) 

'oa^  gelb 

fire 

\)a^  gcuer 

bo§  geiier 

Pres. 

Perf. 

It  lies 

e§  liegt 

c§  I)at  gclcgen 

one  hears 

luaii  I)ort 

man  I)at  gel)i)rt 

he  marches 

er  5iel)t 

er  ift  gc^ogeit 

he  sends 

cr  irf)tcft 

cr  I)at  gefd)idt 

one  is  afraid 

iimu  furd)tet  ]id) 

man  t)at  jid)  gefiird)ti 

he  prays,  heg 

s  er  bittet 

cr  ()at  gcbeten 

he  prays 

er  betet 

cr  I)at  gcbetet 

he  does 

er  tut 

cr  l)at  gctan 

he  protects 

er  bc}d)ufet 

cr  I)at  bcjd)ii^t 

it  snows 

e»  jd^neit 

e§  I)at  gefd)neit 

it  draws  abont  C»  ^tct)!  ftd) 

e^  t)at  fic^  ge^ogen 

he  sees 

er  fiel)t 

cr  I)at  gefel)en 

this  saves 

'oa^  rettet 

ta^  hat  gerettet 

43 


44  ELEMENTS  OF  GERJMAN  [112-114 

lonely     ein|'am  something  et'tUQ^ 

for  long  feit  lange  past         uorii'ber 

now        je^t  only  mir 

1 12  SBJte  Uegt  ha^  ®orf?  2Ber  jie^t  gegen  bag  ®orf? 
^at  bag  2)orf  feine  Strmee?  ®egen  tueu  fdjidt  man  eine 
SCrmee?  S^iird^tet  man  fid^  fe^r?  3u  ft^^nt  betet  ber 
starrer?  28er  bittet  nm  ®otteg  ©^n|?  33ittet  er  nm 
©otteg  ©(^nfe  fiir  bag  2)orf?  SSag  ^at  ®ott  fiir  bag 
2)orf  getan?  6r  l^at  eg  befi^ii^t  ®egen  tnen?  SBer 
lommt  gegen  bag  ®orf?  Snt  er  ettnag  imber  bag  ®orf? 
aSie  3iel)t  er  t)ornber?  SSag  i)at  ben  Drt  bef^it^t? 
2Bo  tft  bie  aSanb  gemefen?  3ft  fie  aug  ©c^nee  getnefen? 
3Bag  ^at  ber  geinb  nidjt  gefef)en?  395ag  tear  um  bag 
3)orf? 

1 13  ^onntagtnorgen 

®te^/  ber  9Jiann  !ommt  ang  ber  SBette, 
Cangfam  bnrc^  ber  SSiefe  ©lan^, 
Unb  er  ijixlt  in  ^anben^  Ijente, 
©tatf  beg  ^flngg  ben  Stofenfranj. 

aUntter  fommt  mit  i^rem  Sinbe, 
Unb  eg^  eitt  bie  ©c^nitterin, 
^immelggarben^  l^ent^  p  binben, 
3u  bem  §ang  beg  ^immelg  ^in. 

I  14    iM=  behold! 

^ttt  ^iillilCtt  —  stereotyped  phrase  =  in  his  hands. 

^  fiatt  —  preposition  governing  the  genitive  =  instead  of.  These 
prepositions  are  not  so  frequently  found  as  those  that  govern  the 
dative,  or  the  accusative.     See  App.  126. 

*  e8 — merely  introductory;  do  not  translate  (somewhat  like  English 
there). 

^  p'mnitU^nvttn  =  heavenly  sheaves— picturesque  figure  of  speech 
for  "laying  up  treasures  in  heaven." 


116-118]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  45 

SlHe^^  ^ie^t  nadj  einem^  ^iri^ 
Slu§  ber  9id^e,  an§>  ber  S^ernV^ 
SSeg  t)om^  lauten  SSeltgetDit^te 
§in  sum*  ftiUen  §aii^  be^  |)ernu 

binbet 

bag  Qid 
hit  D^d^e 
bie  gerne 

ba§  SSBettgetDiiljl 
ftia 

ber  §err  (gen. 
be§  |)errn) 

1 16  SBie  ift  ein  ©onntagmorgen?  9(r6ettet  bann  alle§? 
SSa§  tut  jeber?  SBa§  ^at  bie  SSiefe?  ©ie  ^at  eiiien 
©(aiij,  SBer  gieljt  burd^  ben  ©lans  ber  3Siefe?  SKa§ 
^d(t  ber  9JJann  ()eute  in  |)dnben?  aSa^  ^dlt  er  jonft 
(on  otlier  days)  in  ,^dnben?  Strbeitet  er  mit  bent 
^ftug?  Setet  er  mit  bem  3?ofentranj?  SJJit  mm 
fommt  bie  9JJutter?  SBa^  binbet  bie  ©c^nitteriu 
fonft?    aBa§  binbet  fie  ^eute?    SSo  jie^t  aUe^  ^in? 

I  1 7     Insert  nouns  in  proper  cases :    9lIIe§  fomntt  a\\^:> 

unb  ^ie^t  nac^ ,    2)ie  9JJutter  fommt  mit 

t)om ,   §um  ,    ®er  SJfann  ^dlt 

in  §dnben«    ©onft  ^dlt  er .     (£r  ^ieljt 


1  15 

VOCABULARY 

Sunday  morning  bei*  (Somitag' 

binds 

morgeii 

draws  toward 

distance 

bie  2Beite 

goal 

brightness 

ber  (^\mi 

neighborhood 

to-day 

^eiite 

distance 

plough 

ber  $flug 

away 

rosary 

ber  9iofen!ran5 

rush  of  the  wo 

she  hurries  away  fie  ettt  I^IU 

quiet 

reaper  (fem.) 

bie  (Sc^nitteriii 

Lord 

sheaf 

bie  (JJarbe 

burd) ,  gu 


■  ■"    ^  (lfff§  —  neuter  as  collective,    very  common  in  German,    mea- 
ning all  people,  but  seeming  to  include  all  beings. 

^  etnem  ^ielc  —  emphasize  einem  in  reading  and  translate :  one  goal. 

^  ^U§  . . .  i^f ttt  =  from  near  and  far. 

*tiom,  pm  —  contractions  of  tion  tiem,  ivi  bem. 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [119-121 

LESSON  11 

Dative  and  Accusative  with  Preposition  to  express 
Position  and  Transition 

1 19  Dat.  2Bo  ift  bie  ^Jeniie?    3u  bem  ©arten. 
Ace.  aSoljiu  geljt  fie?    ^w  ben  ©arteiu 
Dat.  aSo  ift  bie  Sa|e?    Sluf  bet  ©trafte. 
Ace.  aaSo||itt  fpringt  fie?    Sliif  bie  Strafe. 
Dat.  ago  ift  bie  9Kutter?    SJor  "^m  C^aufe. 
Ace. .  aSa^itt  get)t  fie?    aSor  ba§  ^pan§. 

120  Observe  that  the  prepositions  in,  ttttf,  tior  may  express 
either  position  or  transition  from  one  place  to  another,  accord- 
ing as  the  verb  expresses  a  state  of  rest  (as  ftc^eit,  lilciben, 
fi^en)  or  a  motion  towards  an  object  (as  gc^cn,  Ittttfen).    When 

a  state  of  rest  is  expressed,  tlie  preposition  is  followed  by  the 
dative,  when  motion  towards  an  object  is  expressed,  by  the 
accusative.     The  prepositions  of  this  kind  arc: 

by        an  over       liber  upon  auf 

behind    ()inter  under       lintcr  in,  Into  ill 

beside     ncbeit  between  gtDljd^en  before,  in  front  of  t)Or 

121  SBofjiu  ift  ber  Sonig  be§  2)ienerg  gefommen? 
®r  ift  in  ba^5  ^intmer  gefommen.  ^ffio(}in  ift  ber  |)abid)t 
geflogen?  9lnf  ba^  5!iic^Iein  ift  er  geflogen,  3Bo  ift  ba^ 
Siic^Iein  getuefen?  3n  bem  ®arten  ift  e^  gemefen.  3Sof)in 
ift  e^  nirfjt  gelanfen?  Unter  ben  ^liigel  ber  9J?ntter  ift  e^ 
nid)t  gelanfen,  3)er  tanfmann  ^ai  anf  bem  ^ferbe 
gefeffen  nnb  fein  §nnb  ift  neben  i^m  t)ergetanfen.  2So 
^ai  er  gefeffen?  2Bo  ift  ber  .^nnb  tjergelanfen?  2)ie 
33orfe  ift  auf  ben  33oben  gefatlen,    SSo^in  ift  bie  93orfe 


122-124]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  47 

gef alien?  ®er  §unb  ift  jtDtj^en  bem  Saufmann  unb  ber 
33()rfe  ^in  unb  l)er  gefprungen.  2Bo  ift  ber  §unb  Ijxn 
unb  ^er  gejprungen?  ®ie  SKaus  ift  Winter  ben  ©tu^l 
gefprungen*  SBo^in  ift  fie  gefprungen?  Der  Stnl)I  I)at 
Winter  bem  Xifd)  geftanben^    SBo  ijat  er  geftanben? 

122  Pres.  Perf. 

er  ftl3t  er  f)at  cjefeffen 

id)  iQufe  l)er  irf)  bin  I)erge(aiifen 

fie  fdllt  fie  ift  gefalleu 

where:-       tt)l)?  room  'i)a§>  3^^^^^' 

where  to!-  lUOl^ilt"?  to  and  fro  ij[n  Ullb  ^er 

garden     ber  kartell  chair       ber  (3tut)l 

street      bte  Strafje  tawe       ber  %i]<^ 

house  hCl^  ^a\l^ 

123  (§in  Uttterft^ieb 

Sluf  einem  Sirrfjtnrme  l)at  einmal  ein  ©tord)  gefeffen. 
9((§  er  niiibe  gemorben/  ift  er  t)innnter  anf  hie  Strafe 
geflugen.  S)a0  !)at  ber  Sater  gefel)en.  ©^  l}at  i(}m^  gut 
gefallen  unb  er  ijat  bei  fid)  gebadjt:  „®i,  ba^  tue  id) 
andj!"  ©r  ift  alfo  anf  ben  2:nrm  getlettert,  Ijat  .anf  bie 
Strafe  gefe^en  unb  Ijat  fid)  bann  l^inunter  anf  ben  Soben 
geftiirst,  9l6er  ba§  Ijat  iljm^  fe^r  inelj  getan  unb  er 
Ijat  laut  gefdjrieen,  2)a  I)at  er  gefagt:  ,,2)ag  gUegen^ 
Ijat  fidj  gemadjt,  aber  ha^  SUeberfi^en^  ift  ehva^ 
befd)tner(idj  gemefen," 

124      1  Supply  ift. 

-  Dat.  obj.  of  ^ttt  gefaUen. 

3  Dat.  governed  by  ^at  ttie^  getdll. 

*  Verbal  noun ;  note  gender. 


48 

125 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 
VOCABULARY 


[125-120 


Pees, 

Perf. 

he  sits  on  the  tower  CY  ft^t  OUf  bettt  Xuritte 

er  f)ot  auf  bent  Xurme 

gefeffen 

you  become                   h\l  W'u^t 

bu  bift  geU)orben 

he  flies  down            cr  fliegt  fjeruuter 

er  ift  ^erunter  geflogeu 

it  pleases  me  well         e§  gefdUt  Htir 

gut 

e§  ^at  mir  gut  gefalleu 

he  thinks                 er  beuft 

er  i)at  gebac^t 

he  climbs  on  the        er  ftettert  auf  ben 

er  ift  auf  ben  Xurm  ge^ 

Xurm 

flettert 

he  casts  himself  down  er  ftur^t  ftC^  f)i 

luiuter 

er  ^at  fic^  f)tuuuter  ge= 
ftiirgt 

that  hurts  me                \)a^  tut  lulr  tDCf) 

ba§  1:)at  mir  mi)  getaii 

I  scream                 ic^  fd)reie 

id)  t)ab^  gefd^rieeu 

I  say                      id)  fage 

id)  i)ah^  gefagt 

that  does  pretty  well  e§  inad^t  \xd) 

e§  ^at  fic^  geiuac^t 

it  is                       e§  ift 

e§  ift  gett)efeu 

difference  ber  Uii'terfc^ieb 

why: 

ei! 

steeple     ber  £*ird)tiirm 

tower 

ber  Xurm 

stork       ber  Stord^ 

ground 

ber  Sobeu 

when         aB 

flying 

't>a^  ^luQtn 

tired          llulbe 

sitting  down  ba§  ^Hcberft^eu 

down      f)initn'ter 

somewhat      et'tDO^ 

tom-cat    ber  ^akv 

difficult 

befc^mer'tic^ 

126  2Bo  I)at  ber  ©torc^  (]eie|fen?  aBo^iu  ift  ber  Skater 
(]e!lettert?  §at  ber  Stored  bem  Sater  gefallen?  SBo{)in 
f)at  ber  Sater  gefef)en?  SBofjin  ^at  er  fi(^  geftiir^t?  ^at 
i!)m  bag  tuef)  getan?  3Sag  l^at  i^m  rt)e^  getan,  ha^ 
gtiegeu  ober  bag  9iieberfi^en? 


127-130] 


INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT 


49 


2)er  ©tor^  fi^t  auf  bent  2:unn.  SBorttttf  fi^t  er? 
2luf  bem  Sturm.  aSobur^  I)at  @ott  bag  Sorf  befc^li^t? 
®ur(^  ben  @^nee»  SSorin  lebt  ber  gifd)?  Sm^  SBaffer* 
aSoritt  lebt  ber  SSogel?  Su  ber  Suft  Siegt  ba§  ®orf 
in  bem  2BaIb?  ^a,  eg  liegt  bartn.  2i^ag  lebt  tm2Bajfer? 
©in  %i\^  lebt  baritt.  ka^  ift  urn  bag  2)orf?  ©ine 
SBanb  aug  ©i^nee  ift  barum. 

1 27  Note  that  mag  and  the  demonstrative  pronouns  that  repre- 
sent lifeless  objects  are  not  used  as  the  object  of  prepositions, 
but  are  replaced  by  too  and  ba  (before  vowels  tt)or  and  bar)  and 
written  as  compounds  with  the  preposition. 


in  what? 

tDorin'? 

in  that 

barin' 

at  what? 

tporan'? 

at  that 

baran' 

on  what? 

tDorauf? 

on  that 

barauf 

under  what? 

hjorun'ter? 

under  that 

banm'ter 

with  what? 

Itjomit'? 

with  that 

bamit' 

before  what? 

tr)ot3or'? 

before  that 

batior' 

for  what? 

tDofiir'? 

for  that 

bafitr' 

wherefore? 

ioarum'? 

therefore 

barum' 

128  Similarly  are  compounded  the  interrogative  adverb  too 
and  the  demonstrative  adverb  bo  with  the  adverbial  particles 
^in  (thither)  and  ^cr  (hither) 

where?  tt)0?  there  (place)      'iia 

whereto?  tDO'^in'?  there  (to)  baf)in' 

where  from?     tVO^tx'?  from  there        ba^et' 

129  ^ag  Sai!^lein 

®u  3Sac^Iein,  filber^ell  unb  flar, 
2)n  eilft  t)oruber  immerbar; 
2lm  Ufer  ftet)'  i^,  finn'  unb  finn': 
aBo  tommft  bn  t)er,^  tt)o  get)ft  bn  l^in? 

i30    1  Contracted  form  of  in  bent. 

-  tOO^tn  and  tOO^er  are  sometimes  separated  in  colloquial  usage. 


50  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [131-182 

^i)  !omm^  aii^  buitfler  %eV]e\i  ®d)oJ3:^ 
9)leiu  Saiif  i]e()t  iiber  Slunf  luib  S)coo§; 
Stiif  metitem  Spiegel  jdjiuebt  fo  nitlb 
®e^  blaueii  ,S^imme(^  freunblid)  Stib. 

3)rum  ^aV  id)  frol}eu  ^tiiberfinn;'^ 
©^  treibt  mid)  fort^  iueif3=^  nidjt  tuoljiu, 
3)er^  mid)  ncruf^n^  au§  bem  Stein, 
©r,^  beuf'  tdj,  iuirb  meiii  g^ul)rer  jeiii,^ 


131 

VOCABULARY 

you  hun-y 

bit  cilft 

bu  Bifl  flccilt 

I  meditate 

id)  finiie 

ic^  I)abe 

nefoinien 

it  hovers 

c§  fd)li)cbt 

c§  I)nt  gcfdjlucbt 

it  drives  me  on 

c§  treibt  mid)  fort     c<g  I)at  mid)  fortgetrieben 

I  know 

ic^  toeig 

ic^  l)abe 

dehjufet  • 

brooklet 

bay  S3ac^(eiu 

(dim.  of  ber  S3ac^) 

bank 

ha^  lifer 

moss 

bn§  moo^ 

rock 

ber  i^etfen 

mirror,  surface  bcr  (S^ieCJCl 

lap 

ber  Sc^og 

picture 

bag  S3ilb 

course 

ber  Saiif 

stone 

ber  (Stein 

flower 

bie  33tumc 

guide 

ber  giif)rer 

bright  as  silver 

ft(berl)ea 

mild 

milb 

clear 

ilav 

blue 

Uan 

past 

t)oru'ber 

gentle 

freunblid^ 

forever 

immerbar 

therefore 

brum  (contracted 

dark 

bimfel 

from  bariim) 

32    ^  an«J . . .  ^^O^  =  out  of  dark  rocks.  ■ 
-  frozen  llittiicr|ltttt  =  joyous,  childlike  mood. 
^UJCife  =  iri^  ttieijj  (poetic  license). 
*  ber,  er  =  he  who. 
^ficrttfen,  supply  ^at. 
•^  ttiirii  fcttt  =  will  be. 


133-134]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  51 

133  aSo  IjQbe  id)  geftaubeu?  2{u  luefjen  ttfer?  2Ba§ 
i)abe  id)  ha^  33dd)leiu  gefragt?  2Bof)er  ift  e^  gefommeu? 
2l^o()tu  ift  e0  gegaii(]en?  9l>a§  fjat  auf  bem  ©piegel  be^ 
33ad}lein^  n^frf)^^^6t?  ai^ei^  ha^  33ad)(ein  luo^iu  e^  i]e()t? 
21%  ()at  e^  gerufeu?  3i^oI)er  ()at  @ott  bag  33ad)leiu 
gerufen? 

LESSON  12 
1 34  GRAMMAR  REVIEW 

1.  The  perfect  tense  of  all  verbs  is  formed  by  the  tense 
auxUiary  ^ttbcn  or  fcin  +  perfect  participle;  fcin  if  the  verb 
expresses  transition,  jobctl  in  all  other  cases. 

2.  The  perfect  participle  of  all  verbs  is  formed  by  prefixing 
the  augment  jjc  to  the  stem  (except  for  verbs  that  have  an 
unaccented  prefix)  with  endings  as  follows: 

{a)  Strong  verbs  alter  the  vowel  of  the  root  and  add  cjl — 
ic^  fpringe,  id)  bin  gcf^itungcn ;  gc  +  stem  changed  +  en. 

{h)  Weak  verbs  do  not  change  the  root  vowel,  and  add 
(e)t — ic^  folge,  id)  bin  gcf o(gt;  gc  +  stem  unchanged  +  (c)t. 

3.  The  participle  stands  last  in  the  sentence. 

4.  The  genitive  masculine  aild  neuter  has  the  article  bcS, 
cincif,  and  the  noun  =  ending  (c)8.  The  genitive  feminine  has 
the  article  bcr,  cittcr,  but  the  noun  has  no  inflection. 

5.  The  dative  masculine  and  neuter  has  the  article  bcm, 
eincm,  and  the  noun  has  no  inflection  (monosyllables  may 
add  e).  The  dative  feminine  has  the  article  bcr,  cincr,  (like 
the  genitive),  the  noun  has  no  inflection. 

6.  The  dative  is  used  after  some  verbs  as  the  direct  object; 
such  verbs  are:    16;)  folge,  ic^  begegne,  ic^  f)elfe.    See  App.  132-138. 

7.  The  dative  is  used  after  many  verbs  as  the  indirect 
object;  such  verbs  are:  ic|  gebe,  id)  fage,  ic^  jeige.    See  App.  141. 


52  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [135 

8.  The  following  prepositions  always  govern  the  dative: 
ttO(^,  Hon,  au8,  mit,  JU,  hti,  fcit.  See  App.  146.  These  must 
be  learned. 

9.  The  following  prepositions  always  govern  the  accusa- 
tive: bur^,  fiir,  gcgcn,  tnibcr,  o^ne,  urn.     See  App.  164. 

10.  After  the  prepositions  of  position :  an,  ouf,  Jitltcr,  in, 
ncbcn,  fiber,  nntcr,  tior,  jmifr^cn,  the  dative  is  used  if  the  verb 
expresses  rest,  and  the  accusative  if  the  verb  expresses  motion 
toward  the  object.     See  App.  147. 

11.  tUOg  and  the  demonstratives  that  represent  lifeless  ob- 
jects are  not  used  as  objects  of  prepositions.  Instead  of  them 
we  use  nio(r)  and  ba(r)  to  form  a  compound  with  the  prep- 
osition.    See  App.  171. 

12.  The  definite  article  +  preposition  are  contracted  when 
euphony  permits :  an  +  bem  =  ttm,  an  +  'i>a^  =  on8,  in  +  bent  =  im, 
ill  +  \>a^  =  inS,  ju  +  bem  =  jum,  511  +  ber  =  jnr,  bei  +  bem  =  Mm, 

135  VERBS 

Perfect  Ten^se 
Strong 

t^  })ait  bag  33u^  gefe^en 
bii  ^ttft  ha^  Su^  gefe^en 
er  ^at  bag  95uc^  gefe^en 

ic^  Bin  in  bag  dimmer  gelammen 
hn  iift  in  bag  dimmer  gefommen 
er  ift  in  bag  dimmer  gefommen 

Weak 

t^  me  ben  a3rief  ge^ttW 
bn  ^aft  ben  Srief  ge^ait 
er  ^at  ben  33rief  ge^ait 

id)  Bin  bem  aJZanne  gefolgt 
bn  6ift  bem  9Kanne  gefolgt 
er  ift  bem  Wanne  gefolgt 


136-137]  INDICATIVE  SINGULAR  PERFECT  53 

136  NOUNS 

Definite  Article  and  Demonstrative  Pronoun 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.  ber"^  aTcann  btefe  abutter  jeneg  Stnb 

G.  be^  9JJanne§  biefer  9Jiutter  jeneg  ^Hitbe^ 

D.  bent  SJJanne  biefer  9)Zutter  jenem  ftinbe 

A.  ben  9Kann  btefe  9JJntter  jene^  Stnb 

Indefinite  Article  and  Possessive  Pronoun 

N.  ein  §nnb  meine  S^tuefter  nnfer  23 ud) 

G.  etne^  §nnbe§  nteiner  ©djtnefter  iinfere^  23ud)e^ 

D.  einent  ^unb(e)  nteiner  @(^tne[ter  nnferem  33ud)(e) 

A.  einen  |)nnb  ntetne  ©c^tnefter  nnjer  33nd) 

137  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

/.  Give  present  and  perfect  paradigms  of:  etlft, 
bift,  iiaft,  ruft,  !aufe,  fpringft,  folgt,  geflettert 

II.  Decline:  ber  9JJann,  ber  SKalb,  bie  33Iume, 
\>a^  23dd)Iettt,  \>(i^  33ilb,  ba^  Ufer,  ber  giiljrer,  bie  Sal^e. 

Ill  Fill  out:   2)er  ©tord)  ji^t  anf 2:nnn» 

©r  fliegt  t)on 2^urnt,    ®er  ^ater  flettert  anf 

Xnrnt.     2)te  ©rofetnntter  ift  anf ©trage,    ®ie 

fflJntter  ge^t  in (Sarten,    2)er  gifd)  leOt  —  Staffer. 

2)er  55ogeI  lebt  in Snft    2)er  ©tordj  fliegt  t)on  — 

2^nrin, 

IV,  Ansioer:  SBo^in  fliegt  ber  ©tord)?  3Bof)er 
fontntt  ber  33ac^?  aBoriiber  ge^t  fein  £anf?  aSSent  ^at 
bie  aJlang  bie  ©^eUe  ange^dngt?    SBent  f)at  ber  2)iener 

*For  full  declension  of  the  articles  and  pronouns  see  App.  11 
Wd  \%  '■ 


54  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [187 

beg  Sonig§  ben  33rief  Qejcfjrieben?  SSem  ift  ber  SSoIf 
begegiiet?  3Bot)er  ift  ber  ©fel  (]e!ommeii?  aSoIjiu  ift  er 
gegangen?  SBag  ^at  er  in  bem  gug  geljabt?  3Beni  ift 
er  begepet?  33Jag  t)at  bei  bem  SBotfe  feftgeftaubeu? 
aSag  I}at  bag  S)orf  gerettet?  aiJoraug  ift  bie  Sl^aiib  ge^ 
madjt?  SKo  ift  bie  "i&anh  getucfeu?  SKer  ift  gegen  bag 
S)orf  gefommen?    2Beu  fdjicft  man  luiber  ben  3^eiiib? 

V.  Translate:  1.  The  man  went  to  the  house  of  heaven 
on  Sunday  morning.  2.  The  mother  came  with  tlie  child. 
3.  The  Lord  saved  the  village.  4.  The  brightness  of  the 
meadow.  5.  The  hen's  chick.  G.  The  pastor  of  the  village 
begged  God  for  protection.  7.  The  servant  of  the  king  wrote 
his  mother  a  letter.  8.  The  king  gave  the  servant  the  money. 
0.  The  wolf  met  the  donkey.  10.  The  doctor  did  not  help  the 
donkey.  11.  The  wolf  devoured  him  in  a  trice.  12.  The  cat 
sat  on  the  tower.  13.  The  stork  flew  from  the  tower  upon  the 
ground.  14.  The  cat  jumped  from  the  tower  upon  the  street. 
15.  Where  did  the  cat  sit?  10.  Where  did  he  jump  (to)? 
17.  Whence  did  he  jump?  18.  AVhat  hurt  him?  19.  Where  does 
the  brooklet  go?  20.  Whence  has  it  come?  21.  Whither 
does  its  course  go?  >^ 

\ 


138-141] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


55 


CHAPTER   III 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE.     PLURALS 


138 


139 


I40 


LESSON  IS 

^er  Stord)  ^t^i  aiif  bcm  Xurmc  gcfcffcn. 

©r  fog  mif  bem  Xurm. 

^er  tater  tfl  auf  bic  ©trnfic  gcf^jrungcn. 

@r  flirttitg  aiiT  bie  8traftc. 

^er  .^ater  ift  ant  ben  Xurm  gcflcttcrt. 

©r  flcttcrtc  auf  bcit  Xurm. 

Ta§  glicgen  ^ot  fid)  gcmttf^t. 

Xa§  gfi^G^"  mai^tc  fid). 


Strong 

InQnitive 

Preterite 

Perfect  Part. 

fi^cit 

fflfe 

Oefeffeit 

fpringcit 

flirong 

Weak 

gcfprungcn 

flctteru 

ftettcrtc 

c^etlettert 

mad)eit 

ma^tc 

(]cmac^t 

1 4  1  Observe  that  strong  verbs  form  their  preterite  from  the 
infinitive  by  an  alteration  of  the  stem-vowel,  and  that  no  suffix 
is  added.  To  form  the  preterite  weak  verbs  add  it  to  the  stem. 
The  stem  is  found  by  dropping  the  Ctt  of  the  infinitive. 

The  infinitive,  preterite,  and  perfect  participle  constitute 
the  principal  parts  and  on  them  are  based  all  the  modes  and 
tenses.  The  principal  parts  of  every  strong  verb  must  be 
learned. 


56 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[142-145 


42  paradigm- 

Strong 
fe^eit,  fo§,  gefe^en 

bu  faf)|l 
er  \di) 


PRETERITE 

"Weak 

fragen,  fragtc,  gefragt 
ic^  fragte 
bu  fragteft 
er  frogte 


Note  that  in  the  preterite  singular  of  both  strong  and  weak 
verbs  only  the  second  2)&niOn  shows  a  personal  ending,  (c)flt. 

143  9Bag  icbcr  {a§ 

©in  8pec^t  befuc^te  einmal  eiiten  "^^axu  Sine  %anbt  gtiig  mil. 
„9^un,  iDie  ()at  bir  I)eute  ber  ^<Pfau  gefallen?"^  fragte  ber  ©pec^t.  „2Bar 
cr  nic^t  iDibrig?  Uub  it)te  ftolg  er  ift!  2Barum  tft  er  mir^  fo  ftolg?  (5ein 
giig  ift  nid^t  fc^on,  feiite  Stimme  ift  Imtt  xin'i)  I)d§tid^,  er  ift  bumm, 
iii^t  lua^r?"^  ^ie  %anht  aber  antluortcte:  „3c§  geftelje,  id)  I)abe 
'iia^  itic^t  bemerft;  i(^  fal)  nur  immer*  feiueii  ^opf,  bie  @(^onI)eit  fei^ 
ne§  (^^efieber^  uub  ben  ^lan^  feine§  ©c^lueife^." 


144 

VOCABULARY 
Strong 

to  see       fel)en 

fat) 

gefet)eit 

to  go        gel)en 

9tng 

gegangen 

to  please   gef  atteu 

gefiet 

gefaHen 

to  be        fein 

Wat 

geioefeu 

to  confess  geftef)en 

geftanb 

geftaubeu 

1 45  ^  tilie  ^at  ilir  . .  .  gefatten  =  how  did  the  peacock  please  you?  or, 
how  did  you  like  the  peacock?  Notice  the  dative  after  Qcflltteu.  See 
App.  136. 

'^  ttiarum  . . .  nur  =  but  why? 

^tlid^t  ttJfl^r?  (the  French  ti' est-ce-pas)  requires  an  affirmative 
reply. 

*ili§  ftt§  nur  immcr  =  I  kept  seeing  only.  Observe  that  while 
the  German  has  no  progressive  tense,  the  idea  of  continued  action 
is  expressed  by  particles  (cf.  83). 


146-148]  INDICATIVE  PRETERITE  57 


to  visit     befitd^eit 

VV  i^^Aft. 

befuc^te 

befii^t 

to  ask       frageii 

fragte 

gcfragt 

to  answer  aitttDOrteit 

aittttjortete 

geantmortet 

to  notice   bemerfcn 

bemerfte 

bemer!t 

woodpecker   ber  SpeC^t 

voice 

bie  Sttmme 

peacock       ber  ^fau 

ugly 

^fetirf) 

dove           bie  Xoube 

foolish 

bumm 

along              mit 

head 

ber  ^opf 

to-day         fjeute 

beauty 

bie  ©c^on^eit 

disagreeable  tt)ibrig 

plumage  ba^  (SJefic'bcr 

proud             ftot^ 

sheen 

ber  ©tan5 

foot            ber  5»6 

tail 

ber  ©c^ttjeif 

146  SSen  befiid^te  ber  Spec^t?  SSar  ber  ^fmi  ^u  ^au\t?^  ©ing 
ber  (S^e^t  alleiu?  2Ba§  tat  bie  Xaube?  3ft  bie  Slaube  geflogeit  ober 
gegangeu?  (SJefiel  ber  $fau  bent  (S))ec^t?  2Bo§  gefiel  bem  @ped)t 
nic^t  an  bem  $fau?^  S33ie  ift  ber  ^fau  gen)efen?  2Bar  ba§  bumm 
t)on  i^m?  SSie  Wax  W  ©timme  be§  ^fau§?  fetn  gufe?  2Bie  gefiet 
ber  ^fau  ber  ^aube?  $at  fie  feine  6timme  unb  feineu  gu§  bemerft? 
2Ba§  bemerfte  fie?    SSie  mar  't>a^  dJefieber  be§  ^fau§? 

GRAMMAR 

147  Strong  Verbs 

1.  The  principal  parts  exhibit  a  vowel  variation  in  the  stem. 

2.  The  preterite  has  no  suffix.  The  personal  endings  of 
the  singular  are:  — ,  (c)fl,  — . 

3.  The  perfect  participle  ends  in  en. 

4.  The  imperative  is  formed  by  dropping  the  fl  of  the 
second  person  singular.  Note,  however,  that  only  c  verbs 
change  the  vowel. 

5.  In  the  present  tense,  the  personal  ending  of  the  second 

1 48  ^  Jtt  ^attfc  =  at  home. 

^  an  bem  $f  au  =  about  the  peacock. 


58 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[149-150 


and    third   singular    formerly   was    of    a   nature    to  produce 
umlaut  (cf.  App.  7),  hence:  e  becomes  t 

e         "        ie 

a        ''        a 

an      ' '         an 


149    In  the  following 

t  becomes  t: 

give     gebeu 

gab 

gegeben 

Present 

Preterite 

, 

•  id)  geOe 

id)  gab 

hn  gibft 

bu  gabft 

er  gibt 

er  gab 

speak    fprecf)eu 

fprac^ 

gefprod)eu 

icf)  f precipe 

id)  fprad) 

bii  iprirf)ft 

bit  fprad)ft 

er  fprirf)t 

er  fprad) 

f 

break      brcd^CH 

brad) 

gebroc^en 

id)  breeze 

ic^  brad) 

hn  hv\(i)\t 

hn  brad)ft 

er  brid)t 

er  brac^ 

become    toerbeii 

tuarb  (tuurbe) 

getuorbeu 

id)  tDerbe 

ic^  tt)urbe  or 

ttjarb^ 

hn  it)irft 

hn  iDurbeft  or  trarbft 

er  U)irb 

er  iDurbe  or 

toarb 

throw    tDerfen 

tporf 

gett)orfen 

ic^  tperfe 

ic^  rt)arf 

hu  n^irfft 

hn  tt)arfft 

er  tt)irft 

er  trarf 

I50  ^Note  that  ttiettlen  lias  two  preterite  forms,  one  strong,  one 
weak;  tuurbc  is  more  frequently  used.  The  second  and  third  person 
singular  present  has  undergone  the  same  assimilating  process  that 
we  observed  in  |afi  and  l^ttt.    The  imperative  is  weak. 


151] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


59 


151     In  the  following  C  becomes  \t : 


see    fel)en 

fal) 

Gefel)cn 

td^  fc()c 

i^  fo^ 

\>u  ficl)ft 

bit  fa^ft 

cr  jtc()t 

cr  \al) 

read       lefcit 

Ia§ 

gclefeii 

i^  lefc 

ic^  la§ 

bit  licft 

bit  iQfeft 

er  licft 

cr  ia^ 

steal    ftctjien 

ftal)! 

gefto()tcn 

i^  ftc^Ie 

id)  fta^I 

\)u  fticl)Ift 

bit  fta!)lft 

er  ftic^tt 

cr  fta()( 

step    treten 

trat 

gctrcten 

id^  trete 

id^  trat 

hit  trittft* 

bit  tratft 

er  tritt 

cr  trat 

take    ncf)incn 

na^m 

gciiommcn 

id)  ncl)mc 

i^  ita^m 

bit  nimmft* 

bit  iialimft 

er  nimmt 

cr  na()m 

Irregular 

fein 

iDor 

gciDcfcn 

tc^  bin 

id)  tvax 

bit  bift 

bit  tDarft 

erift 

Imperative 

er  luar 

flib!       fpric^! 

bric^ !      ttjerbj 

;!      mirfl      tritt! 

ntinm !      f  ict) !      lk§> ! 

fticl)(!      fei! 

*  Observe  that  in  tretcil  and  ne^men  the  long  c  is  changed  to  short 
I  and  the  following  consonant  is  doubled. 


50                                   ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 

Two  Exceptions 

go    ge^en 

Qtng 

gegangen 

Present 

Preterite 

i^  ge^e 

tc^  ging 

h\t  ge^ft 

\>n  gingft 

er  ge^t 

er  ging 

stand    ftel)en 

ftanb 

geftanben 

x6)  fte^e 

i<i)  ftanb 

bufte^t 

hu  ftanbft 

er  ftel)t 

er  ftanb 

Imperative                   Q^W) !                ft^MO 

l! 

152    In  the  following 

d  becomes  &: 

hold    I)alten 

^ielt 

ge^alten 

tc^  ^alte 

* 

i(^  ^telt 

bu  ^iiltft 

'on  ikU\t 

er  i)tttt 

er  ^ielt 

carry,  wear       trageit 

trug 

getragen 

i^  trage 

i^  trug 

\)n  triigft 

bu  trugft 

er  triigt 

er  trug 

fall    fatten 

Pel 

gefaUen 

ic^  faUe 

, 

id)  fiel 

bu  fritlft 

bu  fielft 

er  font 

er  fiel 

Imperative         ^alt(c)! 

trag(c) ! 

faa(c)! 

153    In  the  following 

aU  becomes  aU: 

run    laufen 

lief 

gelaufen 

t^  laufe 

i^  lief 

bu  liiufft 

bu  liefft 

er  Iduft 

er  lief 

Imperative 

lauf(e)! 

[162-163 


154-158] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


Gl 


1 54  Observe  that  the  imperative  of  the  a  and  an  verbs  does 
not  show  the  umhiut.  They  follow  the  analogy  of  the  weak 
conjugation,  though  the  final  c  may  be  omitted. 


155 


Weak  Verbs 


1.  The  weak  verbs  exhibit  very  few  variations.  The  prin- 
cipal parts  all  have  the  same  vowel ;  the  preterite  is  formed  on 
the  stem  by  adding  (c)tc;*  the  perfect  participle  ends  in  (c)t; 
the  imperative  is  formed  by  adding  c  to  stem. 

156 


157 


answer    ant'tuorteit 

aut'mortetc 

geant'tDortct 

Present 

Preterite 

id^  mitiportc 

iii)  auttt)ortclc 

bu  autmortefl 

bu  anttoortctcft 

er  antftjortct 

Imperative 

anttDortc ! 

er  auttuortctc 

Slightly  Irregul. 

^R 

^aben 

^attc 

L}t^ahi 

i<i)  i)dbi' 

iii)  f^atte 

bu  ()aft 

bu  Ijatttfi 

er  ()ot 

Imperative 

ijahtl 
LESSOX  U 

er  ()attc 

^ 


Continuation  of  Weak  and  Strong  Verbs  in  Present  and 
Preterite  Singular 


158  5Ser  fie^t  beu  Stored  auf  bent  Xurm?  2Ber  fpridjt  mit  bent 
(Spe^t?  SSoriiber  fprid)t  bie  Zaubt?  ^avl,  jprid^ft  bu  tnit  bem 
Set)rer  beg  9Jlabd)eu§?  2Ba§  tut  ^av{?  2k\t  er  bte  (S5ej^id^te  mi 
bem  SBotf  unb  bent  ©fel?  SSel^e  ©ef^ic^te  lieft  tiu  ant  liebfteu?  3c^ 
gebe  bent  Wiener  be§  ^omg§  ben  93rtef  ber  SJlutter.     2Sa§  tm  id)? 


*  Where  the  stem  ends  with  a  dental,    an  e  must  be  inserted 
between  this  and  the  t  of  the  inflection. 


62  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [159-160 

®er  ^ijuig  ninuiit  bcii  33rief  be§  ®iener§  intb  lieft  il)u.  2Ba§  tut  ber 
fonig?  SSer  tt)irft  bie  S3lumc  unb  ben  Stein  in  ha§>  '&ad)Um? 
©tie^It  ber  ^aufmaiut  U^  ^elb  au§  ber  SBorfe?  ^u  trtttft  in  ba§ 
Simmer.  2Ba§  tue  i^?  28a§  tut  ^arl?  SBeu  fie^t  ber^ater  anf 
bem  Xurm?  2Ba§  tut  ber  ©torc^?  ^a§  9}Zabd)eu  tt)irb  eine  ?5rou 
uub  ber  ^uaOe  tt)irb  eiu  9}^auu.  2Ba§  tpirb  9Jlarie?  2Bq§  tnirft  bu? 
S33a§  tragft  bu  gur  S^ule?  2Ber  fallt  t)on  bem  Xurme?  28a§  Ijciltft 
bu  in  ber  §anb?  ^ie  %anU  antn)ortet  bem  <Bpt^t  28em  antlDortet 
ber  SSolfV    2Ba§  ^at  ber  Wiener  in  ber  §anb? 

Change  the  above  sentences  to 

(a)  tlie  preterite 

(b)  the  perfect 
Answer  the  questions  in  both  tenses. 

1 59  Oefunben. 

3c^  ging  im  SSalbe  gcfj  modt'  e§  bred^en, 

©0  fiir  mic^  I)in/  ®a  fagt'  e§  fein: 

Unb  nidjt§  gu  juc^en  „SoII  id)  5um^  SSelfen 

^ag*^  tuar  mein  (Sinn.  ^ebrod)en  fein?"* 

3m  ©(fatten  faf)  id;  3d^  grub'§  mit  aden 

@in  ^liimd^en  fte^n,  ^en  2Biir5(ein'^  au^; 

SSie  Sterne  teuc^tenb,  Qum  Garten  trug  ic^'^ 

2Bie  ^Suglein  fd;i3n.  5Im  ^iibjc^en  §au§ 

Unb  pflan^t'  e§  tuieber 
5(m  ftitten  Drt; 
9^un  stueigt  e§  immer^ 
Unb  blitl)t  fo  fort.— ©oet^e. 

1 60  ^  fiir  mil^  ^tu  =  along,  by  myself. 

^baS,  demonstrative  that,  resumptive  of  ni^tS  Jtt  fui^en. 
^mm  (=SU  liem)  2fielfeH=  for  the  purpose  of  withering. 
*fott  i^  ...  ge6rO(^en  fein  =  shall  I  be  broken, 
^mit  afien  iien  SSiirjlein  =  with  all  its  rootlets. 
*tttttt...  immer  =  it  continues  to  grow,     ^mmer  has  progressive 
force  here ;  cf .  146. 


161-164] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


68 


161 


VOCABULARY 

Strong 

to  find 

fiubeii 

faiib 

gefunben 

to  dig 

tjrabeu 

grub 

gegraben 

to  carry 

tiageii 

trug 
Weak 

getragen 

to  seek 

fud)eu 

fuc^te 

gefi^t 

to  want 

iDoUeii 

hJodte 

gemoUt 

to  say 

ffl9^» 

fagte 

gefagt 

shall 

foflcu 

ioUte 

gefoUt 

to  plant 

^flaujen 

^flangte 

gepflanjt 

to  biid 

^tueigen 

atueigte 

ge^^toeigt 

to  blossom  OUiljCU 

blu()te 

geblu()t 

mood 

ber  (Siim 

garden 

ber  kartell 

shadow 

ber  Sc^atteu 

pretty 

pbfc^ 

fiowret 

ba^  SlumC^eu^               again 

hjieber 

shining 

leuc^tenb 

place, 

spot  ber  Ort 

littie  eye 

ba^  ^iiugleiii^ 

on 

fort 

softly 

feiii 

littigroot    ba§  SSuv^Ieiu 

162  SSo  giiig  id)?  ©ing  id)  mit  jemanb?  SBolhe  ic^  ittva^  fuc^a.? 
3Sa§  ianh  ic^V  3Bo  ftanb  ba^  ^(iimc^eiiy  2Bie  fal)  eg  au^?  SBj-S 
Juoflte  ic§  bamit  tun?  SBoUte  ba§  93(umc^eu  gebrodjeu  fein?  Wa§ 
fragte  e§?  ^a^  tat  ic^  bauu  bamit  V  SBobiu  trug  ic^  e§V 
2i3ag  pflan^te  id;'?  SfSag  btiibteV  SSo  blii^te  e^V  2Ba§  ^tte  id) 
bann  in  meinem  Garten?  3ft  ba§  ^adileiu  im  (SJarten  ober  im 
SSatbe?  93(u^t  ba§  531umc^eu  am  Ufer  be^  S3dc^(ein§?  SSo  ift  baS 
ajioog?    3ft  bie  93lume  blau?    2Bo  leud^ten  bie  ©terne? 

163  Exercise — Paraphrase  stanzas  1,  2,  4,  5,  using; 

(a)  the  present  tense 
{b)  the  perfect  tense 

164  ^lla#  ^litmc^en  and  ba§  ^ugUtn  are  the  diminutive  forms 
respectively  of  liif  ^lutnt  and  tial  %Vi%t.  Observe  the  umlaut  pro- 
duced by  the  suffix. 


64  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [16o-l(>9 

1 65  Translate^  using  preterite:  Where  was  I  walking?  I  was 
walking  by  myself  in  the  forest.  Where  did  you  go  ?  I  went 
into  the  forest.  Why  did  he  go  into  the  forest  ?  He  went 
into  the  forest  to  seek^  flowers.  Did  the  man  find  anything 
[etlt)a§]  in  the  forest  ?  Yes,  he  found  a  flower.  What  did  he 
do  with  it?  He  carried  it  to  the  garden  by  the  house.  There 
he  planted  it,  and  there  it  still  grows. 

Change  these  sentences  to  the  present  and  to  the  perfect. 

LESSON  15 
Plural  of  Verbs 

1 66  ^er  Wiener  be§  ^onig§  fi^t  in  bem  Si^tmer  imb  jrf)reibt.  ^er 
^ontg,  W  ^onigin  imb  ber  Wiener  fi^cn  in  bem  ^itnmer  be§  ^'onig^ 
unb  fdireibcn.  2Ba§  tun  fie?  (Sic  fi^cn  unb  f^reibcn.  ^er  Wamx, 
bie  gran  unb  ba§  ^inb  fe^cn  unb  ^orcn.  2Ba§  tun  fie?  Sic  fef)cn 
unb  ()orcn.  ^ie  Xanbe  fliegt,  ber  §abic§t  fliegt  auc^,  ber  (S|)ec^t  ftiegt 
and).  ®ie  Xanbe,  ber  §abi(^t  unb  ber  Spec^t  fUegcn.  ^ie  §enne 
pidt  ba§  ^orn,  "ba^  ^iic^lein  ptcft  an^  \>a^^  ^orn.  ®ie  §enne  unb 
\>a^  ^ii^lein  picfcn  "t^a^  ^orn.  ©in  Wann,  eine  ^xaw  unb  ein  ^inb 
fommcn. 


^'          Sing.  (3rd  person) 

Plural  (3rd  person) 

er,  fie,  e§  ge^t 

fie  get)cn 

,/      /,      ,r    vuft 

„  nifcn 

,/    ,/    ,.  tut 

//  titn 

//    n    „  tanft 

„  taufcn 

The  third   person   plural   is   formed 

by    adding   en   to  the 

stem.  2 

i  68     The  verb  to  he  is  irregular. 

Singular 

Plural 

er,  fie,  e^ift 

fie  finb 

I  69    1  Note  that  the  infinitive  phrase  comes  last  in  the  sentence. 
2  ttttt  adds  only  n,  since  the  stem  ends  in  a  vowel. 


170-171]  INDICATIVE  PRETERITE  65 

^ie  35ogel  tjaben'^  ^  lua^irltc^  gut: 
(Sie  fltegen,  I^iipfen,  fiitgen; 
(Sie  ftngen  frifd^  iinb  tt)ol)tgeinnt, 
^ag  SSalb  mtb  gelb  er!ltngeiu 

Sie  finb  gefunb  imb  forgenfret 
Uiib  finben,  it)a§  gut  fc^ntetfet;^ 
SSo^iu  fie  fliegeu,  mo'^  aud)  fei/^ 
3ft  fc^ou  ber  Xifc^  gebecfet;' 

Hub  ift*  t^r  Xaqtwcvi  t)oIIbrarf)t, 
SDauu  ^ie^u^  fie  iu  bie  ^dume ; 
©te  rul^en  ftill  uub  fauft  bie  9iac^t  ^ 
Uub  f)abeu  fiifee  Xrdume. 

Uub  tozdt  '^  fie  frii!)  ber  ©onueufc^eiu, 
®auu  fc^tuiugeu  fie'g'^  (S^efieber^ 
Uub  fliegeu  iu  bie  ^t\i  \)\x\.tm  ^^ 
Uub  fiugeu  i^re  Sieber. 

171      1  ^ttften'g  (=  ^albctt  eS)  pt  =  are  well  off. 

'^  f d^merfet,  fiCberfet— an  c  before  t  on  account  of  meter. 

^ujo'g  (=ttJO  eg)  and^  fet  =  wherever  it  be. 

*  Xtttb  ifi  t^r  Xagettier!  etc.  —  a  conditional  clause  with  the  con- 
ditional conjunction  tiietttt  omitted.  This  omission  always  causes 
the  inversion  of  the  position  of  the  subject  and  the  predicate.  See 
App.  188. 

^  jie^tt  (short  form  of  Jte|en)  literally  =  draw,  poetically  =  wander, 
betake  themselves. 

^  biC  ^tad^t — accusative  of  duration  of  time.     See  App.  169. 

^tiieift  flc,  etc.— see  note  4  above. 

«flc'g  =  flc  bag. 

^  fd^ttilttflctt  fle'g  ©cflebcr  =  they  soar. 

'"Itt  bie  SJcU  ^itteitt=into  the  world.  This  tautological  use  of 
the  adverbial  phrase  +  adverb  is  often  found.  Cf.  auS  ber  %ViX 
|lttatt§!=  out  of  the  door,  gum  Sfcttfter  ^crcttt!=  into  the  window,  etp. 


66  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [172-174 

172 


VOCABULARY 

Singular 

Plural 

flies 

er  fliccjt 

fie  fticgctt 

hops 

fie  ppft 

fie  t)ii))feu 

sings 

€§  fingt 

fie  fingeii 

resoundM 

e§  erfUngt' 

fie  er!(iit'gen 

is 

fie  ift 

fie  ftitb 

finds 

c»  finbet 

fie  ^n'i>m 

tastes 

c^  fc^mecft 

fie  fc^meden 

rests 

fie  ritl)t 

fie  ru[)eit 

wakens 

e^  Wcdi 

fie  tuerfen 

swings 

cr  fcfjtuingt 

fie  fd)tuiugen 

bird 

ber  SSoget 

bic  m^d 

tree 

ber  55aum 

bic  ^dumc 

dream 

ber  ^raum 

bic  Xrdunic 

song 

ba§  £ieb 

bic  Siebcr 

truly             Jual)l-U^ 

day's  labor    ZaQtWtxt 

fresh             frifc^ 

1 

completed      Dollbrac^t' 

joyous       iuot)(genmt 

sweet              fii§ 

carefree        forgeilfrei 

sunshine      Suuiieufc^ein 

set,  spread  gebccft' 

plumage       OJefie'ber^ 

1 73  SSer  l)at'§  gut '?  2Bo^  tun  fie  ?  SSie  fiugen  fie  ?  SBa§  mad^t 
SSalb  uub  gtur  crfliugeu  ?  ^a§  8ingeu  ber  SSi)ge(  ma^t  2Satb  uub 
giur  erftiugeu.  2Ba§  freffeu  bie  ^oge(  ?  SSo  fiubeu  fie  ba§  ? 
2S3o  ift  ifjr  %[)d)  gebecft  ?  SSBer  becft  uufereu  %i\d)  ?  SBa§  ift  ha^ 
Xagemer!  ber  SSi)ge(  ?  Siugeu  ift  bag  Xagetoer!  ber  3^oge(.  SSa§  ift 
meiu ,  ^agetuer!  ?  SSa§  ift  'i>a^  Xagemer!  beS  8rf)ul)macf)er§?  be§ 
6d)ueiber§?  be§  Eoc^§  (cook)?  SSaun  ift  ba§  ^agetuerf  ber 
SSogcl  lJolIbrad)t  ?      28a§   tun   fie  bann  ?     2So   ruf)en   fie?     SBic 

1 74  '  @f  Hc'bcr,  observe  that  nouns  as  well  as  verbs  have  unaccented 
prefixes. 


175-176] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


67 


(ange  ?  SBann  f)ahai  fie  Xriinine  ?  3Sann  iuecft  fie  bcr  (2onnen= 
fd^ein  ?  2Ba§  tnn  fie,  mnn  er  fie  mecft  ?  2BoI)in  fUegen  fie '?  2Ba§ 
tuw  fie  bo  ? 

2Ba§  tun  bie  SSoget  ?  28elc^c  35uget  befuc^ten  ben  ^fou  ?  2Bo 
fingen  bie  S^ogel  ?  2Bot)on  erflingen  SBalb  nnb  ^^Inr  ?  §i)rft  bn  bie 
SSi)gel  fingen  V  ^'arl  unb  iUiarie,  l)ort  Hir  bie  33iJge(  fingen  ?  3<^ 
ging  im  2Balb.  93?ein  ^ater  nnb  id^,  mir  gingcn  im  2Balb.  S93a§ 
fonb  ti^  V  SSa§  fanbcn  loir  ?  ^u  fingft  ein  Sieb.  ^n  nnb  bein 
33rnber,  i^r  fingt  Sieber. 

3Sir  fingen  Sieber,  n)ir  fangen  Sieber,  wiv  l)aben  Siebtr  ge= 
fnngen.  2Ba§  tnt  il)r  ?  3I)r  fingt.  2i^a^  tatet  iftr  ?  3f)r  fangt. 
2Bo^  ()abt  il)r  getan  ?  3f)r  Ijabt  gefnngen.  Sie  ge^en  an^  bem  ^a\x^, 
fie  gingen  au^  bem  $au§,  fie  finb  an§  bem  4)an^  gegangen. 


175 


GRAMMAR  LESSON 

Present 

Singular 

Plural 

id)  finge 

ttiir  fingrn 

bu  fingft 

il)r  fingt 

er  fingt 

Preterite 

fie  fingen 
Sie^  fingen 

ic^  fang 

tt)ir  fangen 

bu  fangft 

il)r  fangt 

er  fang 

Perfect 

fie  fangen 
©ie  fangen 

id)  I)abe  gefungen 

toir  \)<xht^  gefungen 

bu  ^aft 

It 

i^r  l)abt          „ 

er  ^at 

II 

fie  l)aben 
8ie  ^aben 

1 76      ^  The  third  person  plural  (written  with  a  capital)  is  used  in- 
stead of  bit  and  ilr  in  conventional  address.     See  App.  165. 


66  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [177-178 

Perfect 
Singular  Plural 

i6)  bin  gettjefen       '  tt)tr  finb  getuefen 

^n  bift      „  if)v  f  eib 

er  ift        „  fie  (@ie)  finb  „ 

Personal  endings  for  plural  (in  all  tenses)  are — 
en  (c)t  en 

177  EXERCISE 

Write  paradigms  singular  and  2}l'ff'ral  of  present^  preterite^ 
and  perfect  tenses  of  fiugeit,  geben,  gef)en,  fte^en,  fuc^eu,  p^fen, 
freffen,  ^aben,  fein,  toerben. 

Translate:  We  are  fond  of  grandmother^  and  grandfather.^ 
Do  you^  love  father^  and  mother?^  What  do  the  hen  and  the 
chick  pick  ?  Where  do  the  birds  fly?  Do  the  merchant's 
horse  and  dog  see  the  purse?  Whom  did  the  woodpecker  and 
the  dove  visit?     You  see^  the  birds  on  the  tree 


LESSON  IG 

Plural    of   Nouns 

178 

Strong  Declension— Class  I 

Singular 

N. 

^er  ^agclfltegt 

G. 

^ie  garbe  bcS  SSogelS  ift  f^tuars. 

D. 

maw  gibt  bcm  SJogcl  gutter. 

A. 

3c^  I)6re  ten  S^oget  fiugeu 

Plural 

^ie  aSbgcl  fUegeiu 

G. 

^ie  garbe  ber  SJiigel  ift  f^tuars 

D. 

man  gibt  ben  SSiigeln  gutter. 

A. 

3c^  ^ore  bie  SSbgel  fiugeu. 

^  Use  definite  article. 
2  Give  three  forms. 


179-182] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


69 


Singular 

bcm  ^oget 
ben  SSogel 

bog  9Jidbd)en 
bc8  SD^abd)en§ 
bcm  9JJabc^eu 
bag  9Jldbd)cn 

bic  SDlutter 
bcr  aJJutter ' 
bcr  9[}^utter 
bic  Sautter 


Plural 

bic  ^ogel 
bcr  ^ogel 
bctt  ^ogeln 
bic  55ogel 

bic  9}Zabd)en 
bcr  9}idbd)cit 
ben  9JJdbd)en 
bic  SO^dbd)eii 

bic  aJliitter 
bcr  9D^utter 
ben  aJiiittern 
bic  ajliittcr 


1 79     Observe  that  in  the  plural — 

(a)  The  article  is  the  same  for  all  genders. 

(b)  The  noun  takes  n    in  dat.  f   many  of  the  masculines 
modify  the  root  vowel. 

i80  The  nouns  in  this  class  are  all  poh/si/Uabic  and  hence 
are  not  increased  in  plural.  Most  of  them  are  masculine  or 
neuter,  ending  in  cr,  cl,  cn;  some  neuters  end  in  li^cn,  Icin. 
Only  two  are  feminine:  bic  SWuttcr  and  bic  Xoii)kv.  See 
App.  20. 

181  Decline  like  bcr  93Qgcl:  bcr  (^axttn,  ber  Sl^fel  (apple), 
bcr  fSaitx,  ber  53ntber,  ber  (^rogtiater. 

.  AVithout  umlaut:  'i)a§>  ^Hubleiit,  ha§>  grdittetn,  ba§  ^iid)(ein, 
ber  Sel)rer,  ber  @d)ufter  (shoemaker) ,  ber  Dn!e(,  ber  Sc^luager,  ba§ 
WcLt)d)zn,  ha§>  g^nfter  (window). 


182    ^  Note  that  feniinines  have  no  inflection  in  sing.     See  App.  17. 
2  Nouns  that  end  in  n.  do  not  have  this  inflection. 


70  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [183-184 

183  ^e§  mmriH  ^tttitnfi 

^arl  ber  ^rogc  intcrcffterte  fic^  fe()r  fiir  Silbung  mib  ©r^ie^ung. 
3u  jeiiter  3^^^^  fonutc  man  mir  in  bcii  .tloftern  5111*  Sdjule  gc^cn. 
^arum  griinbete  ber  ^aifer  cine  Semitic  an  feinem  §ofc.  ^ie  ©c^iitcr 
lernteu  bort  bon  Scl)rern,  btc  ber  ^aifer  aii§  ©ngtonb  bericf.  ®ic 
Sl^dter,  Ditfet  iinb  ©rogudter  ber  Sc^iiler  lunrcn  an  bem  §ofc  bc§ 
^nifer§,  fie  tuaren  feine  3Jatgeber  unb  ,f  rieger.  ^od)  mand^er  Snabc 
mar  faut  unb  ungef)orfam  unb  lernte  nic^t§,  iueit  er  glaubte,  ha^  ber 
©influg  fcine^  !!8ater»  ober  feine§  Dn!el^  il)n  bcfc^ii^en  foUte.'  3(ber 
e§  iuaren''  nod)  anbere  3(^u(er  in  ber  <3c^ute.  9fad)!ommcn  t)on 
^riegern,  ^rompetern,  ^ienern,  tut  ^ampf  fiir  f  Onig  unb  SSatertanb 
gcfaHen,*  fanben  I)ier  3(ufnal)me. 

(Bim^  Xagc^'fam  ber  .ftaifcr,  urn  bie  8d)utc  ju  befuc^en,  bic 
Stiller  5u  priifen  unb  uon  ben  Se^rern  33eric^t  5U  Ijoxtn.  <3etn 
■•^irger  tuar  gro6,  aU  er  fanb,  bag  @d)iiler,  bie"  9cad)!ommen  feiner 
9?atgcber  unb  S'rieger  luaren,  nid)t  fo  fleigig  luaren  aU  jcnt,  bic 
feine  Skater  unb  iOnfet  Don  SDZad^t  unb  5(nfe()en  l)atten.  ^a  befaljl 
ber  ^aifer  ben  S^iilern,  bie"  faut  Joaren,  auf  eine  8eite  5U  ger)cn. 
3)ie  anbercn^  ftettte  er  ouf  bie  anbere  <3eite.  9hin  rief  er  jencn' 
^u:  „3l)r  Schiller,  uieint  il)r  ber  ©iuflug  eurer  ^dter  unb  Ouf  el 
folltc  euc§  Ijelfeu?  8c^amt  end)!"  3Bei(  ij^dter  unb  ©rogodter  topfer 
iuoren,  mii$t  il)r  ftcigig  fein  urn  ^u  Derbicnen,  bog  il)r  fo(d)e  ^^dtcr 

1 84  *  jtt  fcinr r  ^f U  =  in  his  time. 

^  i^n  6t|(i^it^en  fottteI=  should  protect  him.     Observe  order. 
'  f  ^  tnarrn  =  there  were. 

*  ftffttttCtt— participle  of  strong  verb  fnllni,  flfl,  Hffjlffftt,  used 
adjectively  to  modify  Itriffiem,  etc. 

'  fittf^  Xagfl — genitive  of  time.     See  App.  128. 

« lltf  =  who. 

'  bie  ttltberttt  =  the  others. 

*  jfllfn  (dat.  pi.)  ==  the  former,     btffe  =  the  latter. 
^  |d||dtnt  eil^— imperative  reflexive. 


185-186] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


71 


^abt!  3^r  anbcru  aber,  bic  t^r  feinc  i8dter  me^r  ^ahi,  obcr  bo^^  nut 
fold^e,  bic  arm  [inb,  auf  euc^^  bin  ic^  ftolj!  3l)r  tDcrbct  einniaP 
meinc  ^flatgebcr  unb  .trieger,  mcinc  Seljrer  unb  ^^sriefter  I  Unb  merfl 
eii^  bicfen  meiiteu  2Ba^l(pnid):  Qd)  fragc  noc^  bc^  9JJauue^  S^erbieitft, 
ua(f)  fcincm  Xiamen  ni^t" 


185 


VOCABULARY 
Strong  Nouns— Class  I 


convent 

ba§  .tlofter 

bie  .tlofter 

pupil 

ber  Sd^iiler 

bie  6d)iiler 

teacher 

bcr  Se^rer 

bie  Se^rer 

emperor 

ber  .toifcr 

bie  taifcr 

father 

ber  ^ater 

W  ^dter 

uncle 

bcr  Oitfel 

bie  Oiifet 

councilor 

ber  D^atgebcr 

bie  9latgeber 

warrior 

ber  ,<^rieger 

bie  ftrteger 

trumpeter 

ber  Xrompeter 

bie  Xrompeter 

vexation 

ber  ^(rger 

power,  respect  ba^  2(nfe()cn 

, 

priest 

ber  ^^^riefter 

bic  ^ricfter 

Strong  Verbs 

to  call  berufcu     bcrtcf     bcrufen 

to  command  bcfc^tcii    befo()l    befol)lcn  (bu  bcfiet)lft,  er  befte^lt) 


Weak  Verbs 


to  take  an  interest  fld^  intcrefficrcil 

to  found  grunbeit 

to  learn  IcrilCU 

to  believe  gtaubeil 

to  protect  befd)ii^cn 


to  test  priifen 

to  place,  put  ftcttcn 

must  miiffcit 

to  earn  UcrbtCItCn 


1 86    *  tiO^  nitr  foll^C  =  at  least  only  sucli.     ttltf  fttdi  =  of  you. 
'^  f  tnmar  =  at  some  time. 


72 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[187-188 


desert 

t)a§>  ^erbienft' 

Influence 

ber  @iuf(u§ 

Charles  the  Great  ^avl  ber  ^rO^e 

others 

nnbere 

education 

bie  93itbuug 

descendants 

bie  9^ad)!onimen 

pedagogy 

bie  ©r^ieii'img 

struggle 

ber  ^ampf 

time 

bie  3eit 

native  country  'tia^  SCaterlaitb 

one  (any  one) 

man  (seeApp.35) 

here 

l^ier 

court 

ber  §of 

asylum 

bie  5(ufnaf)me 

England 

(bo§)  ©iigranb 

In  order  to 

urn  (with  inf.) 
ber  S3erid)ty/ 

many  a 

manc^er 

report 

boy 

ber  ^nabe 

might 

bie  m^ad^i 

lazy 

faut 

side 

hk  Sette 

because 

iDeit 

such 

folrfie 

diligent 

fteigig 

watchword 

ber  SSa^lfpru^ 

brave 

tapfer 

187  SSer  loaren  bie  58dter  unb  ^ro^Dater  ber  ©chiller  be§  ^^aifer§? 
SSofier  t)at  ber  ^aifer  bie  Se{)rer  berufen?  SSeld^e  ^naben  iDareii 
faut  unb  uugeI)orfam?  SSer  JDaren  hit  ©driller,  bie  fleigig  luaren? 
§at  ber  ^aifer  bie  8d^ute  befud^t?  SSantm?  2Ba§  h^otlte  er  bou  ben 
Se!)rern  ^oreu?  SBetd^e  (Schiller  iuaren  fleigig?  SSeld)e  toaren  faul? 
2Bot)in  ftettte  ber  ^aifer  ))k\t?  2Bo{)in  fteHte  er  jene?  SSeld^e  f^att 
er,  biefe  ober  jene?  5(uf  lueld^e  ttjar  er  ftol^?  2Sa§  JDurbeii  bie,  bie 
flet^ig  traren? 

SSa§  tun  ©filter?  2Ba§  finb  fie?  SSa§  tun  bie  Se^rer?  6ie 
lel^ren  bie  ©(filter,  ^'art,  bifl  hn  ein  Se^rer  ober  ein  ©djiiler?  ^art 
unb  SSiK^elm,  toa^  feib  i^r?    SBa§  tut  i^r  in  ber  ©c^ute? 

1 88  Translate:  The  mothers  of  the  pupils  were  proud.  The 
emperor  commanded  the  teachers  and  pupils.  The  cousins 
(masc.)  love  the  uncles.  Do  you  like*  the  birds  and  bird- 
lings?  Do  you  hear  the  birds  in  the  garden?  The  gardens 
are  beautiful  in  summer,  but  cold  in  winter.  The  girls  love  the 
apples. 


*  Give  three  forms. 


1S9-192] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


73 


189 

liber  alien  ©ipfelu 

3ft  ^x^\ 

Sn  alien  SStpfeIn 

©piireft  bn 

I90 

mountain  top 
tree  top 

Weak 
feel    fpiiren 
wait  tDorten 
rest   rnt)en 


^anm  einen  ^audj ; 

SDie  SSogelein  fc^metgen  im  SBalbe. 

SSarte  nnr,  balbe 

9f{n()eft  bu  and) ! 

Aortic. 

VOCABULARY 

Nouns   of   Class 

ber  ©ipfel  bte  (SJipfet 

ber  mp\d  bie  SSipfet 

Verbs 

Strong 
to  be  silent  fc^ttjcigen    jc^ttjieg    gefc^micgen 


breath  bev 

soon     Oalbe 


^an^ 


peace      bte  'tRll^t 
scarcely  fanUl 


91 


LESSON   17  ^ 

STRONG  DECLENSION  — CLASS  II 

Singular 

^cr  ©aum  ift  grun» 
®ie  garbe  bc8  ©ttumcS  ift  griin, 
^ie  ^^ogel  f%n  anf  bcm  ©attm(e).^ 
3d^  fe()e  ben  ©ttum. 

Plural 

^ic  ©dumc  finb  griin. 
^ie  garbe  bet  95ttttme  ift  griin. 
®ie  ^oget  fi^en  anf  ben  ©oumen. 
3c^  fe^e  bie  ©dume. 


92    ^  With  monosyllables  the  e  in  dat.  sing,  is  optional. 


74.  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [193-196 

193  Model  Noun— Class  II 
Sinpriilar  Plural 

ber  <Bo\)n  bie  8ot)ne 

be^  ®o^ne§  ber  @dt)iie 

bem  So()n(e)  ben  ®ot)neu 

ben  <3ul)n  bie  (Sof)ne 

194  (nf)  The  plural  takes  c  and  visually  the  umlaut. 
(b)   Membership  of  Class  II: 

1.  Monosyllabic  masculines. 

2.  Some  monosyllabic  femininos  and  neuters. 

3.  Some  polysyllabic  masculines  in  ig,  iitfl,  linfl. 

4.  Some  polysyllabic  neuters  in  itiS^  fol.    See  App.  21. 

1 95  Like  Solvit  are  declined — 

1.  Masculines  (a)  with  umlaut:  ber  ^tw^l  (chair),  ber  .^^nt 
(hat),  ber  ©tamm  (trunk  of  tree) ,  ber  ^aiu]  (walk),  ber  Jrl'opf 
(head),  ber  i^ii^i)^  (fox),  ber  ^litg  (stream). 

(b)  Without  umlaut:  ber  @c^u()  (shoe),  ber  §uub  (dog),  ber 
%vm  (arm),  ber  %\\ii)  (table),  ber  S3rief  (letter). 

2.  Feminine  monosyllables  (all  have  umlant):  bie  SSanb 
(wall),  bie  ^anb  (hand),  bie  6tabt  (city),  bie  3}Jan§  (mouse),  bie 
33anf  (bench),  bie  ^uft  (nut). 

3.  Neuter  monosyllables  (no  umlaut) :  ba§  3fl^t*  (year),  ba§ 
^aav  (hair),  \)a^  $ferb  (horse),  'i>a^  ^aar  (pair),  ha^  ^ult  (desk). 

4.  Polysyllabic  masculines  and  neuters:  ber  .funig,  ber  %rixf}' 
Itug  (spring),  ber  SihigUng  (youth),  ba§  ^e^eimui»  (secret). 

196  2)ic  2Bo(ff 

3n  einem  SBalb  gab  e§^  2Bi)Ife.  3^fi  ©i)l)ne  eine§  (Sc^afer^ 
l^iiteten  ©c^afe  auf  einer  2Biefe  in  ber  9Zd^e  be§  233albe§.  ^ie  Sente 
t)om  ^orfe  in  ber  9^a^e  fagten:  „333enn  SSolfe  an§  bem  2Ba(b  fon^ 
men,  jo  ruff'^  nn§.    ^ann  fommen  mir  nnb  ^elfen."   2^age  bergingen, 

^  0ft6  fl  =  there  were.    See  App.  87. 

^  rttft  (i^r)  irnl  =  call  us. 


197-198] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


75 


mtb  e§  iDurbe  langlueitig.  ^a  riefeit  ftc  ciumal:  „2Bbtfe!  SBolfc!'' 
ititb  hk  Scute  famcit  gef|jnmgen/  ^a  ladjkn  bic  @oI)itc  be^  (Sd^dfer^ 
bor  greubc  imb  mm  riefcit  fie  alle  Xage:"^  „2Bolfe/'  obgteid^  feiitc 
Xiere  ha  luaren.  3»^c^t  iuurbeit  bie  Seiite  ber  <^ad)i^  miibc.  %U 
ctiie^  Xage»  tmr!tid)  5tuei  5B0tfc  l)crborbrad)eu  uiib  bie  Sc^afe  fragen, 
Urn  niemaiib  auf  it}reu  9tuf  mib  fie  tomiteii  itid)t»  tim  at^  bie  §dnbc 
riitgen  imb  jd)reieu. 
197  VOCABULARY 

Nouns  of  Class  II 

ber  SSoIf  bie  SSolfc 

ber  8o()u         bie  8ot)ne 
ba^  Sd)af         bie  ®d)ofc 


ber  Xag 


wolf 
son 
sheep 
day- 
people 

animal  ba§  <Iier 
call       ber  9?uf 
hand     bie  §aub 


bie  Xagc 

bie  Scute 

bie  Xiere 

bie  9iufc 

bie  ,^dube 


Strong  Verbs 
l)elfeu   {\)n  I)ilfft,  l)alf 

er  l)ittt) 
to  pass  away   uerget)eit  (bit  ucrge()ft,    Uergiug 
er  t)ergel)t) 
rufeit  rief 

I)ert)or'bred)cu     (bu       brad)  Ijcruor' 
brid)ft  I)erDor',  er 
bric^t  I}erbor') 
to  wring         riuQCu  raug 

to  scream       fc^rcicu  f(^rie 


to  help 


to  call 

to  break  out 


ge^olfen 

toergangcn 

gerufeu 
I)eruor'gebrod)en 


gcruugen 
gefc^riecu 


I  98  1  gefjiruttften— perf.  part,  used  as  a  descriptive  adverb  with  (ommett 
=  came  running.  So  also  bcr  ^Ogrl  fommt  Qeffogett,  the  bird  comes 
flying;  tier  Rttttbe  fommt  gelaitfcu,  the  boy  comes  running,  etc. 

'^  ttUe  %a^t  =  every  day.  Ace.  pi  duration  of  time.  (See  App.  159.) 
Note  the  difference  between  this  phrase  and  iictt  QflttSftt  %(i%,  all  day. 

^ttX  ®aii§e  =  of  the  affair,  matter. 


76 


to  guard 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 
Weak  Verbs 
pten  to  laugh    la^en 


[199  200 


shepherd 

ber  @(^afer,  -§,  - 

joy 

bie  grcube 

two 

atuei 

although 

oBgletc^ 

village 

ba§  ^orf 

really 

iDtrflicC) 

tiresome 

langtoeittg 

nobody 

niemanb 

199  28ie  t)iele  ©o^ne  :^Qtte  ber  S^afer?  2Ba§  taten  bie  ©o^ne? 
2Bo  I)uteten  fie  bie  (Sc^afe?  2Bar  e§  gefa^rlic^  (dangerous)  ?  2Ba^ 
rum?  SBeil  2BoIfe  in  ber  m^t  maren.  SSo  it)aren  bie  2Botfe?  2Ba§ 
finb  SBolfe?  9^ennen  @ie  noc^  !i;iere.  2Bo  mo^i^en  SSolfe?  SBeld)e 
Xiere  tool^nen  im  §aufe?  ^iefe  ^eigen  |)au§tiere.  3ft  ber  SBolf  ein 
§au§tier?  berguc^§?  2Ba§  freffen  biefe  Xiere?  SSar  e§  ben  eo^nen* 
langn)eilig?  2Ba§  taten  fie,  at§  e§  i^nen  langmeilig  mar?  28er  !am? 
3Sie  !amen  bie  Seute?  SKoju  famen  fie?  Urn  ^u  §e(fen.  ganben  fie 
toa^  fie  furfiten?  (SJefiet  ba§  ben  (So^nen  be§  ©c^dferS?  ^a§>  taten 
fie?  SSie  murben  bie  Sente?  ^amen  fie  bann  nid)t  nte^r?  2Ber  !ant 
anient  (at  last)?    2Ba§  taten  bie  So^ne  be§  (5c^afer§? 

200  Fill  onty  giving  'proper  plural  forms:  %\\^ — ,  ©tii^t — 
unb  S3dn! —  finb  in  biefem  ^i^ii^^i*-  '^^^  ©chafer  );)(ii  fec^§  (5o^n — . 
3n  ben  3intmer —  finb  9}JobeI  (furniture).  3"  "^^^  ©drten  finb 
S3dnm — .  SInf  ben  S3dnm —  finbet  man  ^))fel  nnb  D^itff — .  ^ie 
(Sc£)iiter  mac^en  ben  Sel)rer — *  SOlii^e  (trouble).  3d^  l^aht  §mei 
gug— .  SDie  gliiff—  5rmeri!a§  finb  grog.  SSit^etm  nnb  ^art, 
if)r meine  ©chiller. 

Decline  in  singular  and  plural  all  nouns  of  the  first  and 
second  class  that  have  occurred  in  this  lesson. 

*  Dative  of  interest.     See  App.  142. 


201-204]  INDICATIVE  PRETERITE  77 

LESSON  18 

STRONG  DECLENSION— CLASS  III 
20  I  .  Singular 

^a0  Ctcb  be§  95ogel§  ift  fd^on. 
^er  9?amen  bc8  8icbc§  ftel)t  in  bent  33urf)c. 
3(^  lauf^e*  bcm  Sicb(c)  be^  3$ogel§. 
prft  bu  ba0  8icb? 

Plural 

^ic  Cicbcr  be§  SSoge(§  finb  fd^un. 

^Die  9^ameu  bcr  Cicbcr  ftelieit  in  bent  S3nc^. 

gc^  lanfc^e  ben  Sicbcrn, 

§orft  bn  bic  Siebcr? 

202  Singular  Plural 

ba§  S3ncf)  bie  33uc^cr 

be§  33nd)e8  ber  ^^nd)cr 

bent  S3nd)C  ben  ^^iic^crn 

ba§  93ud)  bie  S3uc^er 

203  {a)   Plurals  take  cr  umlaut  if  stem-vowel  permits. 
(Z>)  Membership  of  Class  III: 

1.  Monosyllabic  Neuters. 

2.  A  few  monosyllabic  masculines. 

3.  Masculines  and  neuters  ending  in  turn. 

4.  Polysyllabic  neuters  accented  on  last  syllable. 

204  Like  93tt^  are  declined: 

1.  Neuters:   'Xio.^  §an§,  ba§  ^inb,  \i^^  33ratt  (leaf),  ba§  93ilb, 
ba§  getb. 

2.  Masculines:   ber  9Rann,  ber  SSalb,  ber  %t\\i  (spirit),  ber 
SSitrm. 

3.  Nouns  in  turn :    ber  grrtnm  (error),  \^Qi^  5(ltertunt  (age). 
(See  App.  22.) 

4.  Polysyllabic  neuters :  \iO.^  ©ofpitar. 

*  lanfr^C  =  listen  to.     See  App.  138. 


78  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [205-208 

205  ^crbflHcb 

93init  ftitb  id)on  bie  2Bd(ber, 
dJelb  bie  Sto^^jelfeiber 
Uiib  ber  §erOft  beginnt. 
Hub  bie  flatter  fatten, 
Unb  bie  ^f^ebet  iunlleii, 
^ii()l  mf)t  ber  Wmh. 

206  ^ftetiblifb 

2)er  5lbenb  fommt  leife  f)ernieber 
5(iif  Sorter  imb  SSdIber  iinb  ^^^v. 
@§^  ftf^tDeigen  ber  S?i)glein  Cieber, 
^od)  e  i  n  Sieb^  ^ort  man  nut, 

207  VOCABULARY 
Strong  Nouns— Class  III 


forest         ber  SBalb                     bie  SSdIber 

stubbiefieid  bag  Stoppelfelb^           bie  @to^^e(felber 

leaf            ba§  maii                     bie  flatter 

village         'aa^'  ^orf                      bie  ^orfer 

song           bo§  Sieb                      bie  Sieber 

Strong  Verbs 

to  fall     fallen  (bii  fdllft,  er  faHt)     fie( 

gefatlen 

to  begin  beainnen                             begaim 

begonnen 

Weak  Verbs 

to  wander  toaUen                            to  blow     mi)m 

208  ^<li  .  ...  fiitbrr.  @8  is  merely  introductory.  Translate: 
The  songs  of  the  birds  are  silent. 

^fl0(^  .  .  .  iittr  =  one  song  only  is  heard.  9{o4  and  UUX  express 
the  same  idea. 

^In  compound  nouns  only  the  last  component  part  is  inflected. 


209  211] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


79 


gay  bunt 

already  fd^Olt 

yellow  gelb 

autumn  bcr  §erbft,  -eg,  -e 


wind      ber  2Binb,  -e§,  -e 

evening    ber  Slbeitb,  -§,  -C 

down      tieruieber 

meadow  bie  f^^wr  (bte  SSiefe) 

fog,  mist  ber  9Zebet,  -§,  - 


209  SSa§  iDddjft  in  ben  SSdtberit?  SSie  finb  bte  gelber  iitt  ©erbft? 
SBie  finb  fie  im  grueling?  SSamt  fallen  bie  33Iatter?  SSie  finb  fie 
im  §erbft?  SKaS  Ijabcn  bie  S3aiime?  Bairn  ^abeii  fie  93tdtter?  SSa§ 
ift  bie  mz^v^a^  (plural)  t)ou  „ber  SBiitb/'  „ber  |)erbft/'  „ber 
S^ebet/'  „bag  Sieb"?  SKa§  ift  ber  llnterfc^ieb  gmifdien  5)orf  unb 
©tabt?    2Ba§  ift  bie  mii)v^a^  t)on  „bag  ®orf/'  „bie  ©tabt"? 

2  I O  Review  of  Strong  Declension 

Singular  genitive  —  c0     (except  feminines) 

MAIN  CLASSES  SUBCLASSES 


Plurals 


II.  Masculine  Monosyllables 


III.  Neuter  Monosyllables 


cr 


I.  Masc.  &Neut.  Polysyllables     Two  feminines :  bie  Wni- 

ter,  bie  Xo^ter 
Monosyllabic  feminines 
Monosyllabic  neuters 
Masculines  in  ig,  ing,  ling 
Neuters  in  ni0,  fal 
Monosyllabic  masculines 
Neuters  and  masc.  in  turn 
Polysyllabic  neuters  ac- 
cented on  last  syllable. 

For  full  statement  and  examples  see  App.  19-22. 


2  I  I  EXERCISES  IN  STRONG  DECLENSION 

I.    Give  dative  plural  of:  ber  35ogeI,  ba§  ^a\i^,  ber  |)unb,  bie 
SSSanb,  bie  90^utter,  ber  mann,  ber  SSalb. 

//.    Give  genitive  singular  of  the  above. 


80  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [212-218 

///.  Change  nouns  and  verbs  of  the  following  sentences  to 
plurals:  ®er  ^aufmann  ^at  em  ^ferb  gel^abt.  ^a§  ^aw^  be§ 
ajJamteg  \\i  an  bent  %\\\%  ^ie  SSanb  be§  3immcr§  tft  tDeig.  (Sin 
S3latt  ift  griin.  3nt  §erbft  n)irb  ba§  S3ratt  eine§  93anme§  gelb. 
3m  SSi^fel  iff  9lu^.  3m  SSi^jfel  be§  33aume§  fifet  ein  ^ogel  unb 
ftngt.  %m  Xifrf)e  fijt  ein  a}Mbc^en  nnb  Heft.  SDer  (Sc^iiter  be§ 
Se^rer§  ift  ftei^ig.  ®er  Server  !ommt  mi§  ©nglanb  nnb  ift  fe^r 
Berii^mt.  ^a§  Staffer  ift  fait  nnb  ftar,  ^ib  bem  ^inb  einen 
5l))fet  t)on  bem  S3anme. 

IV.  Translate:  The  woods  and  the  fields  were  gay.  Did 
you  see  the  apples  oq  the  trees?  The  little-birds  were  singing 
sweetly  in  the  gardens.  The  fathers,  brothers,  and  uncles  of 
the  pupils  were  the  councilors  and  warriors  of  the  emperor. 
The  little-girls  have  sung  songs,  and  the  names  of  those  songs 
were  in  the  books.  Wolves,  donkeys,  foxes,  and  dogs  are 
animals.  Domestic  animals  live  in  houses  with  people.  Wolves 
live  in  forests.     Storks  live  in  the  neighborhood  of  water. 

LESSON  19 
WEAK  AND  MIXED  DECLENSIONS 

2  1 2  Weak  Declension 

Singular  Plural  (c)tt 

W  ©dtihjefter  \>k  ©c^meftern 

ber  8ct))r)efter  ber  Sc^tt)eftern 

ber  @(^n)efter  ben  ©c^n^eftern 

bie  (5d^rt)efter  bie  (Scf)n)eftern 

213     All  weak  masculines  take  the  ending  (c)n  in  all  cases 

except  the  nominative  singular. 

ber  ^nobe  bie  ^naben 

be§  ^naben  ber  ^naben 

bem  ^naben  ben  ^naben 

ben  ^naben  bie  inoben 


214-217]  INDICATIVE  PRETERITE  »1 

ber  §err  bic  |)erren 

be^  §errn  ber  ^erren 

bent  ^cxvn  ben  §erren 

ben  ^erin  bie  ^erren 

2  1 4  Singular  Plural 

bie  Se^rerin  bie  Se^rerinnen 

ber  £ef)rerin  ber  Sefirerinnen 

ber  Sefirerin  ben  Set)rerinnen 

bie  Se^rerin  bie  Se^rerinnen 

215  The  suffix  ttt  is  affixed  to  many  masculine  nonns 
(especially  names  of  occupation  or  nationality)  to  form  the 
feminines.  Ex. — ber  ©tubent',  bie  ©tubentin;  ber  @c^ii(er,  bie 
©d^iilerin;  ber  5(meri!a'ner,  bie  5Cmeri!anerin.  Wherever  possible, 
this  suffix  produces  umlaut — cf.  ber  ^oc^,  bie  ^od^in  (cook); 
ber  S3aner,  bie  SBdnerin  (peasant) . 

Note  the  doubling  of  the  tl  in  the  plural. 

2  1 6     Membership  of  Weak  declension : 

1.  Polysyllabic  Feminines. 

2.  Some  monosyllabic  feminines  (but  see  Strong  Class  II): 
bie  U^r  (clock),  bie  gran  (woman),  bie  Qa^l  (number). 

3.  Masculines  ending  in  c:   ber  ^nabe,  ber  S^^nge,  ber  (SJatte 
(husband),  ber  'tRdbz  (raven),  ber  §afe  (hare.) 

4.  A  small  number  of  masculines   formerly  ending  in  c: 
ber  §err  (master,  Mr.),  ber  ®raf  (count),  ber  Siirft  (prince.) 

5.  Foreign   masculines   with  accent   on   last   syllable:    ber 
©tubent'  (student),  ber  ©tefrntt'  (elephant),  ber  ©olbat'  (soldier.) 

2  1 7  Mixed  Declension 

Some  nouns  are  strong  in  the  singular,  weak  in  the  plural. 

Singular  Plural 

ba§  5luge  \>it  5lugcn 

be§  5lngc8  ber  ^Tugcn 

bem  9Iuge  ben  5(ugcn 

ba^  ^uge  bie  5tugctt 


82  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [218-220 

2  1 8  Like  ^ugc  are  declined :  ba§  Df)r,  ber  <Btaai,  ha^  93ett, 
and  words  derived  from  Latin,  as  ber  ®o!tor,  ber  gnf^ef'tor,  ber 
©eim'tor,  and  also  a  number  of  nouns  of  Latin  derivation  which 
end  in  ium  in  the  singular  and  ictt  in  the  plural. 

bag  ^^mnaftum  bte  (SJ^mnaficti 

ba§  Stubium  bie  ©tubien 

l)tx  (Biaat  fd)idt  id^rttc^  S^fr^^toren  an^,  urn  bte  <B(i)xiUn  auf 
bem  Sanb  imb  in  ber  @tabt  ^u  befi^tigeu.  ©inniat  l)at  eiu  6d)u^ 
tnf^eftor  eine  (Bd^nk  auf  bem  Sanbe  befud^t,  '^a  ift  fetn  5(uge  auf 
ciueu  ^noben  gef alien,  ber  erft  *  fteben  3^^^^^  ^^t  tear,  ober  fo  gefd^eit 
au§fa^,^  ba§  er  bie  5lufmer!fam!eit  be§  Snfpeftorg  auf  fid^  gog.^ 
„9^un/'  fagte  biefer,  „mein  Qunge,  ncnne  mtr*  etnmat  eine  gafit!" 
„S8ier  unb  jtuangig/'  anthjortete  t^a^  ^inb  fc^neE,  o^ne  fic^  ^u  beftn= 
nen.^  ^Der  ^ann  t)at  nun  bte  Qdf)l  an  bie  Xafel  gefd^rieben,  aber 
fo:  42.  ®aitn  faf|  er  ben  SunQ^n  erirartungSboII  an.  ^ie  ©filler 
f|)errten  3lugen  unb  D^ren  auf.  ^er  ^nabe  aber  macule  fid)  nid)t 
njiffen."  ®a  f)ai  e§  ber  93efud^er  nod)  einmal  t)erfu(i^t.  „@age  mir 
nod^  eine  Qdf)lV'  SDer  S3urfd^  fagte  fd^neH,  „fed^§  unb  fieb^ig." 
SBteber  fd^rieb  ber  @(^utinfpe!tor  bie  Qa^  tytvtt^xi:  67,  unb  toieber 
inad^te  ftd^  ber  Qunge  ntd^t  toiffen.*  9^un  fagte  ber  ^nfpeftor  njteber: 
„^\h  mir  noc^  eine'  Qa^V  ^a  ^jlajte  ber  S3urfc^e  ^erau§: 
„SSier  unb  t)ier§ig!  @d)reibe  \>a^  berfe^rt,  tt)enn  bu  fannft,  bu 
(Jiefc^eiter!''* 

220    lerfi— literally  y^rsf;  translate  only. 

^  au§fa|  =  looked,  appeared 

'  ttllf  ^ri^  jog  =  attracted  to  himself. 

*  Jlltr— ethical  dative.    See  App.  143. 

^  0|tie  fi^  Jtt  Ikefinnen  =  without  hesitating.  Note  the  use  of  Ger- 
man infinitive  as  object  of  the  preposition  where  English  employs 
the  present  participle.     See  App.  217. 

^mari^te  flii^  nili^t  miffctt  =  pretended  not  to  notice  it. 

'ttor^  eine  =  another. 

^iiu  ®e|(§eitcr— translate  here,  smarty,  you! 


221] 


INDICATIVE  PRETERITE 


83 


22 1  VOCABULARY 

Weak  Nouns 

Singular  Plural 

number        bie  Qa^i  bie  3^^!^" 

school  bie  (Bd)\ik  bie  Sd^ulen 

boy  ber  ^nabe  bie  ^naben 

attention  bie  5lufmer!fam!eit 

blackboard  bie  %a\tl  bie  ^afeln 

boy  ber  Sunge  bie  Sungen 

number  bie  S^iimmer  bie  9^umnteru 

boy  ber  S3urfd)(e)  bie  93urfrf)en 

Mixed  Nouns 

Gen.  Sing. 


Nom.  Sing. 

ber  (Staot 
ber  3nfpe!tor 
'ba^  5Uige 
ba§  p^r 


be§  @taate^ 
be§  Snfpeftor^ 
be^  ^hige^ 
be§  O^reg 
Strong  Verbs 
to  look,  appear    aii§'fef)en  (bu  fief)ft      faf)  aii§ 
an^,  er  fie()t  mi^) 
gie^eu 


Nom.  Plural 

bie  ©toaten 
bie  Qnfpefto'ren 
bie  §(ugen 
bie  Oi)ren 

au§'gefet)en 


to  draw- 
to  consider 
to  look  at 

to  send 


befinnen 
an'fe^en 

frf)ic!en 
iiennen 


509 
bejaiiu 

Weak  Verbs 


geaogen 

befonnen 

an'gefe^en 


nannte 


to  open 

to  know  (be  ac-  / 
quainted  with)  f 

to  try 
to  burst 


tDiffen 

t)erfiic^eii 

platen 

yearly   jdtirlic^ 
seven     jtebeu 

old      alt 
smart  gefc^eit 


auf'jperren    fperrte  aiif 
tpugte 
tjerfuc^te 


genannt  (see  App.  88) 
auf  gefperrt 

getDU^t  (see  App.  83) 
t)erfuc^t  (see  App.  80,  1) 


24  (four  and  twenty) 
76  (six  and  seventy) 
wrong  side  before 
you  can 


t)ierimb5tt)an5ig 
fec^^unbfiebsig 
t)er!e^rt 
bu  fannft 


84  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [222-224 

222  233of)m  ging  ber  3nf|)e!tor?  SBa§  tut  ein  3nfpe!tor?  SBie 
\af)  ber  Sunge  au^?  ^eben  ©ie  ein  (S^nont^m  fiir  „ba:  Sunge." 
^a§>  ift  bie  aJie^rga^l  tjon  „3unge"  imb  bem  @t)nont)m?  SSa§  tuoate 
ber  3nf^e!tor  t)on  bem  Sungen  ^aben?  S3e!am  er  fie?  SSofjin 
fc^rteb  ber  gnf^eftor  bie  3<^^^?  ©c^rieb  er  fie  ric^tig  ober  berfe^rt? 
SSotlte  er  ben  ^naben  bamit  fangen?  (SJetang  e§  if)m?  2Ba§  fagte 
ber  ^nabe  sule^t? 

223  WRITTEN  EXERCISES 

1.  Give  singular  and  plural  genitive  of  all  the  nouns  in  the 
above  story. 

2.  Change  tne  entire  story  so  as  to  have  all  the  nouns  in 
the  plural.' 

3.  Form  feminines  of:  ber  Siigner  (liar.),  ber  Sefer  (reader), 
ber  ©dnger  (singer) ;  decline  them  in  singular  and  plural. 

LESSON  20 

224  GRAMMAR    REVIEW 

1.  The  preterite  indicative  of  strong  verbs  is  formed  by  an 
alteration  in  the  stem  vowel — no  suflfix  is  added  to  the  stem : 
toar,  ging,  fta^. 

2.  The  preterite  indicative  of  weak  verbs  is  formed  by  add- 
ing tc  to  the  stem  of  the  present :  liebtc,  I)offlc,  befiic^tc. 

3.  Personal  endings  in  preterite  singular  are  the  same  for 
strong  and  weak  verbs,  — ,  ft,  — . 

4.  The  principal  parts  of  all  verbs  consist  of:  present 
infinitive,  preterite  indicative,  perfect  participle.  On  these 
parts  all  the  tenses  are  formed. 

5.  Strong  verbs  with  the  stem  vowel  a,  C,  OM,  take  the 
umlaut  in  second  and  third  person  singular  indicative  (except 
in  ge^en  and  fte{)en). 

6.  Plural  personal  endings  for  present  and  preterite,  weak 
and  strong,  are  en,  (e)t,  en. 


224]  INDICATIVE  PRETERITE     '  85 

7.  Ill  direct  address,  bu  and  i^r  are  superseded  by  StC 
(3rd  pi.)  in  all  conventional  conversation.  Only  towards  chil- 
dren and  animals,  between  members  of  the  family  and  very 
intimate  friends,  in  prayer  and  very  elevated  diction,  are  btt 
and  ijr  used. 

8.  In  the  declension  of  nouns,  two  facts  apply  in  every 
case  without  exception :  (a)  no  feminines  are  inflected  in  the 
singular,  (b)  all  dative  plurals  end  in  n. 

9.  There  are  three  noun  declensions,  strong,  weak,  and 
mixed. 

10.  All  strong  nouns  form  their  genitive  sing,  by  adding 
(C)8  (butcf.  8,  r^. 

Class  I  takes  no  additional  syllable  (sometimes  umlaut). 
Class  II  takes  e  (often  umlaut). 
Class  III  takes  cr  (always  umlaut). 

11.  Membership — Main  Classes. 

I  is  primarily  a  class  of  polysyllables  (masc.  and  neut. ) 

II  is  primarily  a  class  of  monosyllabic  masculines. 

III  is  primarily  a  class  of  monosyllabic  neuters. 
The  subclasses  are: 

I  two  feminines:  bte  SQlutter  and  bie  Xoc^ter  (umlaut). 

II  monosyllabic  feminines  and  neuters,  and  polysyllabic 
masculines  in  ig,  ing,  ling,  and  neuters  in  ntS,  .fol. 

III  monosyllabic  masculines,  and  polysyllabic  neuters  and 
masculines  in  tum,  and  neuters  accented  on  the  last  syllable. 

For  examples  see  App.  19-22. 

12.  The  weak  declension  has  (e)tt  in  singular  and  plural 
(except  nom.  sing.).     See  8,  a. 

13.  The  weak  declension  is  primarily  a  class  of  polysyllabic 
feminines,  but  it  contains  also  monosyllabic  feminines,  foreign 
masculines,  masculines  in  c  and  a  number  of  monosyllabic 
masculines  (no  neuters,  no  umlaut). 

14.  Mixed  nouns  take  a  strong  genitive  singular  and  a  weak 
plural.     See  App.  24,  25. 


86  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [225 

225  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

/.  Give  the  preterite  paradigms^  singular  and  plural^  of: 
gef)en,  ftei)en,  tun,  loufcn,  rufen,  fuc^en,  iuecfen,  fingen. 

//.    Write  principal  parts  of  these  verbs. 

Illi  Ansiver  the  following  questions:  2Ba§  inn  bie  ^^iigtetn 
tm  SSalbe?  SBelc^e  Xtere  fiitb  §au§tiere?  SBetc^e  Xiere  ftnb  im 
SSalbe?  2Ber  n)ar  faul  in  be§  ^aifer§  (B^nk?  SBer  Ie!)rte  bie 
©chiller?  SBo^er  !amen  bie  Se^rer?  SSie  finb  bie  flatter  ber  33dume 
im  gruf)ling?  SSie  tDerbeu  fie  im  §erbft?  2Ba§  fallt  im  SSinter  ab? 
SBie  l^eigt  ein  9}Zann  au^  5(meri!a?  2Bie  I)ei§t  eine  gravt  au§  5Imeri!a? 
@inb  @ie  5(meri!aner?  SSo^er  !ommt  ein  ©ngtdnber?  ^enuen  (Sie 
tJtele  5(merifanerinnen?  Sernen  <Sie  ^eutfd^  bei  einem  Sef)rer  ober 
bei  ciner  Seijrerin?  §at  man  f)ier  mel^r  Se^rer  ober  met)r  Se^rerin* 
nen? 

IV  Give  plural  forms  in  the  same  cases  of:  bem  ©taate,  be§ 
@(^ut)e§,  ber  (Sc^mefter,  ba§  ©au§,  be§  Wannt^,  bem  SSatbe,  ber 
ajJutter,  ben  ^ater,  ber  3nf))e!tor,  bie  Un^,  ber  tnobe,  ber  ©aft,  \ik 
SBanb,  ber  UI)r,  ber  grau,  ber  ©anb. 

F.  Translate:  1.  The  little  birds  sing  joyously  in  forest  and 
field.  2.  Are  you  well  and  in  good  spirits?  3.  The  trees  be- 
come brown  in  autumn  and  the  leaves  fall.  4.  The  pupils  were 
lazy  and  disobedient.  5.  They  did  not  obey  the  teachers.  6.  The 
warriors  and  councilors  of  the  emperor  had  sons  in  the  school. 
7.  Were  the  boys  lazy  in  the  eyes  of  the  teachers?  8.  In  the 
tree-tops  and  the  mountain-tops  is  peace.  9.  The  villages  are 
near  the  cities.  10.  The  sons  of  the  shepherd  herded  the 
sheep  near  the  city.  11.  Do  the  wolves  and  bears  live  in  the 
woods?  12.  They  come  out  and  devour  the  sheep  of  the  people. 
13.  All  day,  the  boys  watched  the  sheep.  14.  But  it  grew 
tiresome.  15.  The  numbers  on  the  board  were  wrong,  but  the 
boy  read  them  without  hesitating.  16.  The  eyes  and  ears  of 
the  pupils  were  not  open. 


22<>-227]  INDICATIVE  PLUPERFECT  87 


CHAPTER  IV 
INDICATIVE  PLUPERFECT 

LESSON  21 

226  6r  ^ottc  S^n^cn  wnter  bcm  ^utc* 

(?tn  23ancriijuiujc  uanicibi  W\6.)<d  ()attc  cinmal  ©pa^en 
gefonGcn.  Gi*  l)attc  nid)t  gcmufet,  luoftin^  baniit,  fo  r)attc 
cr  fie  in  feincn  §ut  geftecft  unb  ben  ^\xi  auf  ben  ^opf  geftiilpt. 
Sonn  mar  cr  dergniigt  Uieitergegangen. 

B  9^nn  Begegnete  i^m-  ein  "Maww ;  ber^  griiBte  i()n  freunblid) 
unb  Iprad): 

„3rGunb,  fonnft  bn  mir  DteIIeid)t  fogen,  n3o()tn  bicfer  23eg 
fit^rt?"  SBeil  abcr  9}Hd)eI  bic  3pa^en  unter  fcinen  §nt  geftedt 
ftattc,  fo  badjte  er:    „3BtK>  gel)t  bid)    ber  ^"Dtann  cin?"/*  lief] 

10  hzw  ^ni  Quf  bem  llopfe  unb  ging  n^eitcr.  9tad)bem  ber  30?ann 
il)m  ctn  paar  5?tinut€n  nadjgeblidft  Ijcitte,  fd)iittelte  cr  ben  .^iopf 
unb  fprad):  „2)er  Junge  l)at  nid)t  Uiel  SeBeneart!"  Xann  ift 
ber  90?ann  iDcitergegangen. 

Setst  !am  ber  5rmlmann  bec^  2Begec>.     2)cr'^  Ijatte  cinen 

15  8^Q3i€rgQng  gemodit  unb  mar  auf  bcm  3Scg  nodi  ^aufe. 
ijintcr  tl)m  I^cr  fam  ber  @erid)tc>biencr.  9tun  griifeen  tmmer 
alle  Scute  ben  Hmtmann.     5lBer  unfer  ?J?id)cI  iai  cc>  nid)t, 

227  ^  ttlO^itt  bomtt  (ge^Ctt)  =  what  to  do  with  them— literally=:  where 
to  go  with  them.  Note  the  omission  of  the  verb  of  motion,  since  the 
idea  is  already  expressed  in  the  adverb  tHOl^ttt. 

^  i^m— dative  after  !6egepeit.     Cf .  App.  133. 

*  tiJttg  (JC^t  bt(^  iier  SHtttttt  an  =  what  is  the  man  to  you? 


88 


ELEMENTS    OF   GERMAN 


[228-229 


erflen§  rt)eil  er  bon  ^an§  an^^  imnter  ein  ©robian  getDefen 
tear,  gtoeitenS  tuetl  er  ben  SO^orgen  lang  bie  ©^a^en  unter  bem 

30  ^uk  l^erumgetragen  ^atte,  unb  tijn  bolder  ntrf)t  oBne^imen 
fonnte.  ®q  ging  ber  ©eric^tSbtener  gu  t]f)m  unb  fprod^:  „'I)u 
^vohian,  l^a\t  hu  nod^  nie  gclcrnt,  \va§>  fid)  fdjicft?"  intb  rife 
il)m  ben  $ut  t)om  ^opU-  ^^^^ —  li^arcn  aHe  ©pa^en  IierouS^ 
geflogen  nad)  alien  ©d'cn  nnb  ©nbcn,^  hk  ber  3[)tid)el  ben 

35  9[)?orgen  long  anfBeh)aI)rt  ^atk.  Sllle  Sente  I)QBen  gelQd)t. 
llnb  toenn  man  I)ente  ben  $ut  nid)t  snr  3eit  oBnimmt,  bann 
f)ci6t  e§:^    ,,®er  I^ot  gemifs  3|.ial3en  nntcr  beni  .<Qui." 


228 

VOCABULARY 

Pluperfect 

Strong 

Weak 

had  caught 

^aitt  gefongen 

had  known 

tjattt  getDugt 

had  gone 

ttior  gegangeu 

had  stuck 

I)Qtte  geftedt 

had  been 

tattr  gelt)efen 

had  put 

^atte  geftiitpt 

had  walked  on  )ti at  ItJeitergegaugeit 

had  made 

I)atte  gentac^t 

farmer's  boy 

ber  SBauernjunge 

manners 

bie  Sebengart 

by  name  of 

namtn§> 

bailiff 

ber  Slmtntann 

sparrow 

ber  (SpQ^ 

walk 

ber  (Spa^ier'gang 

cheerfully 

ijerguiigt 

beadle 

ber  (^erid)t§'biener 

on, farther 

treiter 

first  (adv.) 

erfteng 

to  greet 

griigen  (weak) 

lout 

ber  ^robian 

pleasantly 

freunbli^ 

secondly 

5rt)eiten§ 

friend 

ber  ?5reunb 

morning 

ber  9JJorgen 

perhaps 

t)ie(Iei(^t' 

around 

I)erum' 

way 

ber  SSeg 

thereforo 

ba^er 

to  look  after 

itac^blideit   (weak) 

off 

ab 

shake 

fc^iittetn  (weak) 

229    ^  Hon  ^ttttg  ttttg  =  by  nature. 

^  @(fctt  Uttti  @utiett — an  alliterative  phrase  meaning  in  all  directions. 
^  t^  ^ei§t  =  the  saying  is. 


230-281]                    INDICAT 

IVE  PLU 

PERFECT 

to  snatch        reigeu,  rife,  geriff  cit 

to  ke^p          auf  benja^ren, 

ben)ai)rte  auf ,  auf'bert)af)rt 

to  laugh          tac^eu  (weak) 

to  be  called      ^elfeeu,  t)ieg,  ge^eigen 

certainly            QCtDlfe 

230                 Synopsis  Through 

Pluperfect 

Strong 

Weak 

fein    war    gemefeu 

\)aba\    f)atte    ge^abt 

ic^  bin 

ic^  f)ahc 

irf)  wax 

ic^  r)atte 

irf)  Bin  gemefen 

id)  f^aht  ge^abt 

id)  tottr  getoefen 

id;  i^aiie  ge()obt 

tragen    trug    getragen 

Iad)eu    lac^te    gekc^t 

bu  tragft 

er  lac^t 

'Dn  triigft 

er  lac^te 

't>ii  ^aft  getragen 

er  Jot  gelarf)t 

bu  ^ttttcft  getrogen 

er  Jattc  gelad)t 

89 


Note  the  pluperfeot  tense  is  similar  to  the  perfect  (see 
81),  except  that  the  preterite  instead  of  the  present  form 
of  the  auxiliaries  l^aben  and  fcin  is  used. 

23 1  SSie  ^atte  ber  SBauernjunge  ge^eifeen?  SSa§  f)atte  er  gcfangen? 
28o()in  i)atte  er  fie  geftedt?  2Bo  ^atte  er  \>tn  §ut  getragen  (carried, 
worn)?  28ie  tDar  er  meiter  gegangen?  3Ser  mar  i^m  baim  begegnet? 
§atte  ber  SJlann  ben  Qungen  gegriifet?  §atte  er  mit  if)m  gefprod)en? 
2Ba§  ^atte  er  gefagt?  2Bar  3}lic^e(  freimblic^  5u  i^nt?  2Barnm 
nid^t?  2Ba§  moUte  er  nicfit  tnn?  2Barum  nic^t?  2Bem  begegnete 
er  bann?  §atte  9J^ic^e(  ben  5Imtmann  dormer  gefannt?  SSer  tvat 
f)inter  bent  5(mtmann  ^ergegangen?  SSa§  tnig  ber  (iJerid^t§biener? 
2Ba§  follte  ber  gunge  tnn?  golgte  er  nid)t?  SSarum?  SSa§  rig 
i^m*  ber  ^eri^tgbiener  t)om  ^opf?  2Ba§  gef^al)  bann?  2Bie  tvaxm 
bie  SSogel  nnter  ben  ^ut  gefommen? 
*  See  App.  144. 


90 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[232-233 


232  EXERCISES 

/.  Cliange  verbs  in  the  following  {sentences  to  plupe^'fect: 
®er  S)iener  fagt:  „S[Ba^  ^aft  't>\\  imter  bem  §ut?"  9JJid)el  ant= 
ttjortet:  ,,  gd^  l)abe  nid^tS  barunter."  SSa§  f)at  ber  ^Imtmann  gefragtV 
@r  f)at  gefragt:  „2Barum  mmmt  ber  '^nrn^t  ben  §ut  nid^t  ab? 
^^(Ue  Seute  nef)men  if)n  ab."  ^ie  Seute  benfen:  „3Sir  ^aben  immer 
ben  §ut  abgenommen,  nur  ber  W\6)t\  tut  e§  nid^t.  SSarum  tut  er  e§ 
uid^t?"     @r  ^t  @^a^en  unter  bem  §ut. 

//.   Give  pri7icipal  ^jarts  of  all  verbs  in  the  above  story. 

III.   Fill  out  with  auxiliaries  to  form  j^^'^^l^^tfeot  tense:   3*^) 

—  nci6)  ber  Stabt  gegangeu.     SE)er  Sunge bte  3^^^^"  ^^  ^^^ 

Xafet  gefc^riebeu.     —  er  gu  §aufe  getoefen?     @ie  beu  ^ut 

aufgeftiilpt?    tt)ir  eineu  ^ragen  getrageu?     SSir  ^iuter 

bem  5(mtmaun  tiergegaugeu. 

LESSON  22 


233 


PERSONAL  AND  REFLEXIVE  PRONOUNS 
Personal  Pronouns 


Singular 

Masc 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N. 

ic^ 

bu 

er 

fie 

e§ 

G.  . 

meiner 

beiner 

feiuer 

i^rer 

feiuer 

D. 

mir 

btr 

i^m 

i^r 

i^m 

A. 

mi^ 

bid) 

Pt. 

URAL 

i^n 

fie 

e§ 

N. 

n)ir 

i^r 

fie 

(8ie) 

G. 

unfer 

euer 

i^rer  (3^rer) 

D. 

un§ 

z\v^ 

i{)ncu  (3^»^J1 

i) 

A. 

und 

eud^ 

fie 

(@ie) 

234-236] 

INDICATIVE  PLUPERFECT 

, 

91 

234 

Singular 

REFIiKXIVES 

Plural 

4 

X. 

_                         

(4.       

—                          

D.       mir 

bir 

fic^ 

itn§ 

tud) 

fid, 

A.       ttttd^ 

bt^ 

fi(^ 

un§ 

euc^ 

m 

235 

• ' 

^ct  m'oxhcx 

(5in  SSurm  tDor  einmal  aiif  bent  33oben  I)erumgefrod^en. 
®a  \)atte  il^n  em  Sperling  gefcI)Gn,  I)Qtte  il)n  fd}ncE  mit  feinem 
<S^nabel  gefofet  unb  tDor  mit  if)m  ouf  cincn  33aum  gcflogen. 
„5ld)",  I)Qt  ba  bcr  SSurm  gcrufcn,    „la%    mid)  bo(^^  leben! 

5  SSorum  toteft  bu  mid)?  Jd)  r)nbc  bir  nid)t§  311  Icibc  gctan,^ 
unb  id)  lebc  fo  gcrn!"^  5Ibcr  bcr  Sperling  ^ai  gcfogt:  „^d) 
freffe  bid^,  benn  id)  bin  grofe  unb  bu  bift  flein,  barum  gel^orft 
bu  mir!""^  X'amii  I)Qt  er  il)n  gcfofet  unb  aufgeselfirt. 

Xa  i]t  ein   §Qbid)t   gefommen   unb   i)at   ben   Sperling 

10  gefoBt.  „2)u  bift  ein  SO^Jorber!"  fd)rie  biefer,  „SBarum  frifet  hu 
mid)?  3tf)  l)cihc  bir^  nid)t^  getan."  .3*  freffe  bid)\ 
antlDortete  ber  §abid)t,  „benn  id}  bin  grofeer  qI§  bu!"  2)q^ 
l^atte  ein  ^dger  gcfe^en  unb  nun  fc^ofe  er  auf  ben  §abid)t. 

15  „So",  fagte  er,  „id)  bin  §err  itber  eucft  oHe,  benn  ifir  feib  oEe 
fleiner  aU  id) !  '^f)x  totet  eud^  unter  einanber,  unb  idj  tote  eud^ 
Qlle!" 


f 

236    *  bo^ — intensive ;  do  not  translate. 

^  i(i^  ^afcC  bir  nili^tS  JU  (ciiie  getan  =  I  did  not  harm  you.      For  dative 
see  App.  142. 

'  x^  Icbe  ftem  =  I  like  to  live. 

*  mir— dative  with  gepren.    See  App.  135, 


92 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[237-239 


Verbs— Pluperfect 

^ 

Strong 

had  crept  Wat   ge!rod)eu   (frie- 

had  flown 

Wat  geftonen 

c^eit,  !roc^,  gefroc^en) 

had  seen 

()atte  geje^eu 

murderer    bei*  SJJorber 

to  live 

(ebeit  (weak) 

ground      bei*  93obeu 

to  kill 

toteit    (weak) 

sparrow     ber   ©perUitg   (ber 

to  devour 

auf'^e^ren,  ^e^rte 

(Bpa^) 

(luY,  aiif'gege^rt 

bill          ber  @d)nabe( 

to  seize 

faff  en    (weak) 

to  let        lafi'en,   (bit  tdgt,  er 

among 

unter 

Idgt)  liefe,  gelaffeu 

one  anothei 

'  einanber 

238  SSar  ber  2Burm  grower  aU  ber  3per(tug?  S^ein,  er  Wat 
fleiner.  ^ati,  bift  bu  grower  aU  i^?  9lein,  t^  bin  fleiner  a(§  @ie, 
unb  6ie  ftnb  grower  uitb  alter  aU  id),  ®er  Sager  fagte:  „^d)  bin 
grower  a(§  i^r  alle,  fo  tote  id)  eu^  alle.  Q^r  feib  fleiner  ai^  id),  i()r 
fount  mic§  nidit  toten."  2Ba§  ^atte  ber  (Sperling  ^u  bent  SSurm 
gefagt?  S23a§  fiatte  ber  SSurm  gefragt?  333er  l)atte  ben  (Sperling 
gefagt?  SBarnm  fonnte  ber  §abid)t  ha^  tun?  SSa§  fjatte  ber 
Sperling  ^u  bem  §abi(^t  gefagt?  SSem  ge^orten  fie  alle?  SSarum? 
2Ba§  fagte  ber  Qager  ju  i^ueu? 

239  Translate:  "You  are  my  child, '^  said  the  hen  to  the 
chick.  "You  have  not  been  there,  Mr.  Smith, "^  said  Mr. 
Brown.  "Children,  you  have  been  lazy  and  disobedient,"  said 
the  mother.  I  had  seen  him.  They  had  gone  home.  He 
gave  you^  his  hand.  He  met  her  in  the  garden.  She  saw  him 
in  the  house.    They  wore  hats  and  coats.     "Children,  I  see  you 


1  ^crr  ^^mM. 

2  Use  three  pronominal  forms  for  you. 


240  242] 


INDICATTVE  PLUPERFECT 


93 


in  the  garden!"     ' 

"Mr.  Smith,  I  saw 

Change  all  the 

the  singular  to  the 


LESSON 

2S 

r 

POSSESSIVES 

o 

Singular 

Masc. 

Fein. 

Neut 

N. 

mcin 

metuc 

mcin 

G. 

meinc0 

nieincr 

meincS 

D. 

meincm 

ineincr 

titeiitcm 

A. 

ineinen 

meine 

mcin 

N. 

eucr 

eurc 

cncr 

G. 

eureS 

eurcr 

eurcS 

D. 

eiircm 

eurcr 

eurcm 

A. 

eiivcn 

eurc 

cncr 

'Mr.  Brown,  I  have  given  you^  the  purse." 
you  all  day."^ 

nouns  and  verbs  in  the  above  exercise  from 
plural,  or  vice  versa. 

/ 


Plural 

M.  F.  N. 

meinc 
meincr 
lueincn 
meinc 

eurc 
eurcr 
eurcn 
eurc 

241  Note  that  — 

1.  The  inflection  is  the  same  as  that  of  tlie  indefinite  article 
in  the  singular.  In  the  plural  it  is  like  the  definite  article. 
(See  App.  12.) 

2.  Three  forms  ()iom.  maf^c.^  nom.  and  ace.  neut.),  are 
uninflected.  The  other  forms  have  the  same  endings  as  the 
definite  article. 

3.  The  other  possessive  pronouns  are:  bcin  (your),  fcin 
(his),  ijr  (her),  fcin  (its),  unfcr  (our),  cncr  (your),  i^r  (their), 
3||r  (your) — all  declined  like  the  paradigms  above. 

242  Masculine 

N.  Scin  §nt  ttjar  aw]  bem  ^o^fe  gcbliebeu. 

G.  ^er  ^atfer  I)atte  ben  @o^n  fcincg  SlatgclicrS  geliebt. 

D.  ^ie  9)^utter  \6)xkh  i^rcm  So^nc. 

A.  3d^  :^atte  mcincn  ^Jogcl  getotet, 

'  Dative. 

2See  198,2. 


94.  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [243-247 

243  Feminine 

]S .  ^cittc  SWttitcr  toax  arm  imb  Iran!. 

0.  ^er  '^amzn  unfercr  <^tatt  ift  9lett)  ?)orf. 

D.  3^r  gebt  curcr  2^antc  etn  (SJef^enf. 

A.  (Sie  f)aben  3^re  <S(^U)cfier  lange  ntc^t  gefe^en. 

244  Neuter 

N.  Wltin  ©urj  ent^dtt  mete  (SJefd^ic^tem 

G.  ^er  ^aufmann  pit  ben  Bugel  (bridle)  fcincS  ^fcrbcg. 

D.  Xie  grau  l^atle  i^rcm  ^inb  einen  ^rief  gefd^nebeit. 

A.  ®ie  SSoget  fingen  i^t  fitcb. 

245  Plurals 

X.  Mtint  ©ruber  finb  in  bem  Garten. 

G.  ^ie  58iic^er  beincr  S^lucftcrn  finb  bentfrf). 

D.  ®§  fte^t  in  unfercn  ©Hii^crn. 

A.  ^ie  §ennen  lieben  ijre  ^ili^lein. 

246  ecin  md)t^^^xi\(i) 

Qtvei  ^aufleute,  namen^  ^oltljafar  unb  2)^iifta|)!)o,  tuaren 
f(f)on  rtjeit  geritten.    ^d  t)erIor  33alt!)afar  feinen  33eutcl,  oljnc 
eS  gleid^  3U  bemerfen.^  Gin  2}errt)ifcft  l^ar  ben  SBeg^  gegangen, 
^otte  il^n  gefiinben,  aufgel^oben  unb  eingeftecft. 
5  9^itn  Bemerften  an6^  bie  ^aufleute  il)rcn  35erluft  unb  'oev" 

f^radjcn  bem  Stuber  i()rev  @elbe§  500  ©olbftiitfe  aU  Coifin. 
S)er  ®ertDifd)  trot  ^erbor  unb  \pvadj:  „Qiev  ift  euer  ©elb,  gcdt 
ntir  meinen  So^n!"  ®od)  bic  ^aufleute  l^citten  fid^^  einen 
^lan  auggebad)t.    33alt()afar  offnete  feinen  33eutel,  sd^lte  ba^ 

247  ^  0|ttC. . .  ^U  Bcmerfcu  =  without  noticing.     Of.  App.  217.     ' 
^ben  99Scg — ace.  of  place.     See  App.  160. 

3jlj^—dat.  of  interest.     Cf.  App.  142. 


248-249J 


INDICATIVE  PLUPERFECT 


95 


20 


@elb  unb  rief :  „^d),  greunb,  id)  \el)e,  bu  ^a\i  bir  beincn  2or)n 
f(i)on  genommen;  e^  felfilt^  mein  8maragb.  Ser  tear  500 
©olbftiidte  mert."  S)e§l)alb2  tnoKten  fie  bem  ginber  ben  So^n 
n'ldjt  geBen.  Umfon[t  betcuerte  bcr  2)ertDifd)  feine  ©^rlid^feit; 
fie  cjlaubten  feinen  SSortcn  nid)t  unb  blieben  bci  iftrer  33e()aup= 
hmc\.  QnhWd)  gingen  aKe  brei  3u  eineni  ::}iid)ter,  trugen  iftni 
i()re  ^adjc  Dor  unb  Dcrlongten  feine  @ntfd)eibung.  Xcv  Widy- 
tcr  fprad):  ,,31)^  ^aufleute,  il)r  beftmiptct,  il)r  i-)aiict  cincn 
Smarogb  in  ben  33eutel  gcftedt?"  „^aV'  riefcn  fie  qu^;  „ber 
Smoragb  wav  in  unferem  33eutel,  toir  fd)ix)oren  ©ud^  unferen 
mb  borouf!"  ,,@ut!"  fogte  ber  9lid)ter,  „bann  ift  alleS  flor. 
2)ie^  ift  nid^t  euer  33eutel,  benn  er  entf)dlt  nid^t  euer  ©igentum. 
(Fr  gebort  alfo  biefem  90^anne,  unb  i()r  miifet  marten,  bi§ 
iemanb  euren  33eutel  finbet.  ^a§  ift  mein  ^i^t^f^rucft.  Se^t 
gebt  eure  SSege!"-'' 


248 

VOCABULARY 

judgment 

ber  9iic^t§fpruc^ 

to  count' 

3d()(en  (weak) 

merchants 

bie  ^aufleute* 

to  be  lacking 

fe^len  (weak) 

to  ride  horseback 

reiteii,  ritt,  gerit^ 

to  affirm 

beteuern  (weak) 

ten^ 

honesty 

bk  (S^rltc^feit 

far 

tvtit 

to  believe 

gtauben  (weak) 

to  lose 

berlieren,     tjerlor, 

word 

ba§  SSort 

terloren^ 

to  remain 

bleiben,  blieb,  ge- 

pouch 

ber  S3eutel 

blieben^ 

at  once 

gleid) 

assertion 

bie  93e^au^tung 

249    '  eg  fe^It  niein  Smaragtl— the  'fg  is  impersonal  and  introduc 
tory,  like  Eng.  there;  translate:  My  emerald  is  gone. 

^  tieS^al^  =  on  that  account. 

^  eurc  aSege— ace.  after  ge^t 

♦  Used  as  plural  of  tier  0attfmann. 

spiup.  ttior  geritten;  ^tttte  tierloreti;  mv  fiebliebett. 


96 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


260-251 


dervish 

ber  5J)ertt)ifc^ 

three 

bret 

to  pick  up 

•    auf'f)eben,()obauf', 

judge 

ber  atic^ter 

auf'ge^oben* 

cause 

bie  @Qc^e 

to  pocket 

ein'fteden  (weak) 

to  demand 

tJerlongeit  (weak) 

loss 

ber  S^erluft' 

decision 

bie  (Sutfd^ei'binig 

to  promise 

tjerf|)red)eu,    t)er^ 

to  Insist 

be^au))ten  (weak) 

fprac^,t)erfpro^eu* 

to  vow 

fc^tt)oreu,    jc^njur, 

finder 

ber  i^inber 

gefd^ttjoren* 

goldpiece 

bag  ©olbftilcf 

oath 

ber  eib 

forward 

i)ert)or' 

clear 

Hat 

reward 

ber  So^u 

to  contain 

ent^alten,  ent^ielt, 

plan 

ber  ^ran 

entl)atten* 

tooi)en 

offnen  (weak) 

property 

ba§  ©igentum 

250  SSelc^er  ber  ^aufleute  ^atte  feinen  ^t\M  berloreit?  SBeffen 
93eutel  fanb  ber  ^ertDifc^?  SBa^  tat  er  bamit?  S5km  oerf^rad)en 
bie  ^aufleute  ben  2ot)n?  2Ba§  tjerlaitgte  er?  SSofur?  SSeffeu  Seutel 
offnete  S3aU{)afar?  9^ac^  (according  to)  n^effen  $lon  h)ar  ba§? 
SBottten  fie  bem  ^ermifc^  feinen  So^n  nid^t  geben?  SSa§  fagte  ber 
^ertpifc^?  ^u  mm  gingeu  fie?  2Ba§  berlangten  fie  bon  it)m? 
|>at  er  i^nen  feinen  9^ic^t§f|)rn^  gegeben?  SSaren  bie  ^aufteute 
Snfrieben  bamit?    §atte  ber  9tid^ter  i^ren  ^lan  burci^fdjant? 


25 1  EXERCISES 

/.  Fill  out  the  blanks:  ®ie  SBoget  fingen  i^r —  Sieber.  ®ie 
Se^rer  te^ren  il)r —  (Stubenten.  ®ie  ©driller  ftnbieren  an§  i^r — 
S3iic^ern.  9JJein —  9Jiutter  liebt  i^r —  Xod^ter.  ®ie  ^inber  get)ord^en 
i^r —  (lltern.  2Bir  tieben  nnf —  Onfel,  nnf —  Xante  nnb  nnf — 
^ettern  unb  (£onfinen.  ^ie  S3iic^er  eur —  ^inber  finb  bicf  nnb 
fd^ttJer. 


*Plup.  liattr  ttttf'fif^often; 
ent^altru. 


^attr  tirrf)iro(^ett;   ^attr  grfi^ttiomt;  lattr 


2o2-2o3]  INDICATIVE  PLUPERFECT  97 

//.    Fill  out   loith  appropriate  posscssives :    ^avl,   f)a\t   bu 
^ufgabe  geternt?      §attc  Wlid)ti  bic  6per tinge   unter 


§ut  gefterft?    ^ic  SSogel  fc^tafen  in 9fleftern.     §aben  6te 

§ut  in  bcr  §anb  ober  Quf  bem  fto|)fe?      3c^  tiebe 3?ater, 

Gutter  unb ^I'ofteltern.     ^ec  3unge  ()attc 5(ngen  unb  — 

O^ren  tDcit  aufgemac^t.      ®er  Xiencr  be§  ^ijnigg  l^atte 9JhUtcr 

eineu  S3ricf  gefc^riebeu  unb  tvav  babei  eingefc^tofen. 

///.  Answer:  SOleiu  §unb  ift  grog,  tt)ie  ift  3()rer?  ^  Scin  ^ferb 
ift  grou,  mie  ift  3§rc§?  3^c  §au§  ift  teuer,  ift  meine^  billig?  Un[cr 
md)  ift  bicf,  h)ie  ift  eure§?  §aben  @ie  3^r  Suc^  ober  meine^?  §at 
cr  fein  ^ferb  ober  beine§?  §abt  i()r  euer  ^a\i^  ober  feine§?  9}lein 
§ut  ift  fc^hjars,  ift  beiner  tt)ei6?     3t)r  §au§  ift  !lein,  ift  feine§  grog? 

IV.  Fill  out  with  pronouns:    §au^  ift  neu, ift  alt 

§crr  SBraun  ^t  nic^t  mein  SBud^,  fonbern .    SSir  i)aUn 

V.  Translate:  She  has  her  book,  not  his.  The  boy  had 
written  his  word  on  the  board,  not  hers.  My  horse  is  expen- 
sive, is  yours  cheap?  Our  house  has  a  garden,  has  yours  one? 
I  hftve  two  apples,  my  brother  has  only  one.  She  has  one 
book  and  he  has  one.  Have  you  two  horses  or  only  one?  I 
see  your  hat,  do  you  see  mine? 

LESSON  2Jf 
DEMONSTRATIVE  AND  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS 

252  liefer  ^aufmann  ^atte  einen  33eutet  oertoren. 
3cncr  ^eriDifc^  ()atte  il)n  gefunben. 

^icfc  SJlau^  ^at  bet  to^e  eine  Sc^ette  nic^t  angepngt. 
gene  §enne  rief  il)r  ^iic^tein. 

253  ^  Note  that  when  the  three  un inflected  cases  of  the  possessives 
are  used  without  a  noun,  they  have  the  same  ending  as  the  definite 
article  (er,  e§. )    See  App.  44. 


98  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [254-265 

^icfc0  ^iic^lcm  tft  fcincr  ^utttx  nid^t  gefolgt. 

3cnc0  ^Hnb  ift  unge^orfam  geloefen. 

2)tcfc8  ^ferb  f)atte  jenen  ^aufmaim  nad)  ber  Stabt  gebroc^t. 

^er  ^obt^t  :^at  jcnc  |)enne  erfc^recft. 

^tcfcr  §abtd^t  ^at  jcncS  ^iid^lein  gefreffen. 

§ter  tt)ar  ein  Xifd^.     ^arauf  ^at  ein  ^sBitc^  gelegen. 
Sie^ft  bit  ba§  «iid^?    ^arin  ftel)t  etne  ©efc^t^tc. 
®te  Xafel  ift  fc^mar^.     ^ at ttuf  fte^eu  ga^len. 


254 

Singular 

Plural 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

M.  F.  N. 

this              N. 

btefer 

biefe 

btefe^,  bie§ 

biefe 

G. 

bieje^ 

biefer 

biefe^ 

biefer 

D. 

biefem 

biefer 

biefem 

biefen 

A. 

biefen 

biefe 

biefe^,  bieg 

biefe 

that             X. 

jener 

jene 

jene§ 

jene 

G. 

jene^ 

jener 

jene§ 

jener 

D. 

jenem 

jener 

jenem 

jenen 

A. 

jencn 

jene 

jeneS 

jene 

each, every  N. 

jcbcr 

jebe 

jebeS 

aUt' 

G. 

iebeS 

jeber 

jebeS 

atter 

D. 

jcbcm 

jeber 

jebem 

alien 

A. 

jebcn 

jebe 

i^.'o^^ 

atte 

this  one       N. 

ber 

bie 

\>a^ 

bie 

G. 

beffen^ 

beren 

beffen 

beren  (berer) 

D. 

bcm 

ber 

bem 

benen 

A. 

ben 

bie 

\)a§> 

W 

255    ^  jeber,  by  its  nature,  can  have  no  plural;  ttUe  may  take  its  place. 
The  singular  of  ttUe  is  inflected  like  the  other  pronouns  of  this  class, 
or  may  be  used  without  inflection— atteg  SSttffer  or  aU  M  ^difw, 
^  Note  difterenoe  from  gen.  of  definite  article. 


256-268]  INDICATIVE  PLUPERFECT  99 

256     Observe  that — 

1.  The  demonstratives  are  inflected  like  the  definite  article, 
Avith  a  slight  deviation  in  the  gen.  sing,  and  gen.  and  dat. 
pi.  of  ber. 

2.  The  demonstrative  bcr  may  often  be  translated  by  tlie 
personal  pronouns,  he,  she,  it. 

3.  2)icfer  and  jeitct  are  used  for  the  latter  and  the  former. 
See  App.  167. 

4.  The  demonstratives  (when  referring  to  things)  may  be 
compounded  with  the  prepositions  in  the  following  forms: 
barin,  barauf,  baruber,  barum^  baneben,  bamit,  babei,  etc. 
See  127. 


257  ^cr  dinfaff 

Btx'et  ??u]^rleute,  ^an§  unb  ^TiJid)eI,  trafeu  in  etnem  ^o^V- 
tnege  sufammen.  liefer  tear  \o  enge,  ho!)^  bte  SBagen  iener 
Wanmx  nur  mit  30?iir)e  barin  on  dnanber  dorbeifommen  fonn- 
iQw.     „5a!)r'  mir^  aii§  bem  SSege!"    rief  $oax\^  biefem  311.^ 

5  „2Beid^e  bu  felbft^  aix^V  entgegnete    x^m  biefer.     „^6)  tuifl 

ni^t!"  fd^rie  jener  barauf  guriicf.    3SeiI  nnn  ieber  nad^  feincm 

^o^f*  l^anb^In  mollte,  fom  e§^  3u  Qan!  unb  ©treit  barliber. 

@nblt(^  fagte  ^an^:    „9^un  frnge  \6)  bidf)  wo6)  einmol: 

inillft  bit  mir  qu§  bem  SSege^   fal^ren    ober    nid^t?     SSenn 

10  nid)t,  bonn  mQd)€  id)  e§  bir^  jejt  gerobe  fo  tnie  idi  e§  fteute 
morgen'^    jenem     SQ^anne^    gemad^t     I)Qbe."      2)a     iiberfam 


258   '  ntlr  au8  bm  SBege.    See  App.  144. 

^  Observe  position  of  ju;  prufew  =  to  call  out  to. 

*  fclftft — intensive  (uninflected)  =  yourself. 

*  tttt^  felnent  ^O^lf  =  according  to  his  own  inclination. 
^  f  am  eg  JU  '^mi  =  a  quarrel  arose. 

*  Dative  of  interest.     See  App.  142. 
'  ^eutC  morgett  =  this  morning. 


100 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[26J>  261 


^Dtid}cl  ein  gJrauen.  Jinn,  I)ilf  mil'  iDcniaften^  blefen  ^hiocu 
beifeite  f^ieben'',  brummte  er  barouf,  „fonft  fann  irf)  nid}t!'' 
^arnuf  ging  ^an§>  ein,  itnb  bolb  tear  bicfc  9lrbcit  geton. 

15  D^iun  foBtc  fid^  ber  SDMkI  cin  .S5er3  inib  frogtc:  „^bv' Q\n- 

mat  tDtc  l^aft  bit  g§  benn  mit  jcnem  SOIonn  l^eute  morgcn 
gemad)t?''  :3^Qraiif  loditc  ,§an§  iinb  rtef  au§:  „^enf'  bir  iiitr, 
jcner  3[)ten)d)  mid)  nun  cinmnP  nid)t  qiic>.  :l)a  bin  id)  ielbft 
auc^geix)id)cn!'' 

259  VOCABULARY 


wagoners 

bie  t^u^rleute^ 

once  more 

nod)  ein'moi 

to  meet 

treffen,  trof, 
troffen 

ge- 

overcome 

iiberfom'men,   nber= 
!am',  iiberfom'men 

canon 

ber  ©o^lmeg 

awe 

t>a^  ©ranen 

together 

jnfammen 

at  least 

n)enigfteii§ 

narrow 

enge 

aside 

beifeite 

wagon 

ber  2Bagen 

push 

fc^ieben,   fd)ob,    ge= 

difficulty 

bie  mn^t 

fd^oben 

past 

tjorbei' 

to  mutter 

brnmnien  (weak) 

give  way 

n)eid)en,  mic^, 

ge= 

otherwise 

■fonft 

mic^en 

to  agree 

ein'ge^en,  ging  ein', 

back 

^nriid 

ein'gegangen 

quarrel 

ber  3anf 

work 

bie  STrbeit 

fight 

ber  ©treit 

heart 

bag  §er5 

260  EXERCISES 

/.  Answer,  using  demonstratives:  SBeld^er  Wamx  ^aiU  etnen 
SBagen?  SSeffen  SBagen  ift  jn  breit  fur  ben  Sa^rtneg  gert)efen? 
aSelc^er  gn^rmann  ttjottte  nac^  feinem  ^opf  ^anbeln?  §an§  imb 
aJlid^el  n)aren  in  bem  3a^rtt)eg  getoefen.    SBeld^er  ift  banod^  Qn§ge= 

26  I   ^  nVin  rtntnal — a  somewhat  colorless  parenthetical  adverb  difficult 
to  translate.     Say :  The  man  would  not  get  out  of  the  way. 
2  PI.  for  gu^rmttttti;  see  ftttttfiftttf,  249,  4. 


262]  INDICATIVE  PLUPERFECT  101 

Ujic^cn,  biefer  obcr  jeiter?  2Be(c^cr  ^atte  etncn  (SinfoII  'aahti  gct)abt? 
§atte  er  btefe  ©rfa^ntitc^  (c^on  tinmai  (once  before)  ge^abt?  SD^it 
mem?  293a^  ^atte  cr  mit  jencm  SDlaimc  getan?  3Ser  ^attc  bobet  met)r 
90^ut  gejetgt,  §an§  ober  jcncr  Wann? 

II.  Translate:  1.  These  two  wagoners  had  met  [each  other] 
in  a  cafion.  2.  This  was  very  narrow.  3.  These  wagoners, 
Hans  and  Michael,  had  wagons  in  this  cafion.  4.  The  former 
said  upon  this :  "Get  out  of  my  way!"  5.  The  latter  did  not 
yield.  6.  Each  acted  according  to  his  own  inclination.  7.  The 
two  merchants  had  lost  this  purse.  8.  The  contents  (ber 
3nl)a(t)  of  it  were  gold  pieces  and  that  emerald.  9.  This 
dervish  found  that  purse  with  the  gold  pieces  in  it.  10.  These 
merchants  had  promised  that  finder  a  reward.  11.  The  judge 
spoke  this  sentence:  ''You  say,  your  purse  had  contained  this 
emerald.  12.  The  dervish  found  this  purse  without  the 
emerald.  13.  He  did  not  find  your  purse.  14.  The  purse 
without  the  emerald  in  it  is  not  yours." 

LESSON  2d      ■ 
RELATIVE  PRONOUNS  ■, }  \\^       .. 

262  bet,  tticld^cr 

Masculine 

Xcr  ?^u^rmann,  ber  guerft  auf  bent  §o^tit)eg  tt)ar,  imb  bcffctt 
SBageu  fetir  gro§  tDar,  ift  guriicfgegaugen.  §an§,  bor  bcm  SJiid^et 
fic^  fiirc^tete,  1;)Ciiiz  fet)r  laut  gefc^rieen.  ^er  SSagen,  ben  SOiic^el  nic^t 
allein  fc^ieben  fonnle,  ftaub  im  28 eg. 

263  Feminine 

^ic  Wm<i,  btf  bte  .^a^e  fiirc^tete,  ()atte  eiite  Sc^eHe  gefauft. 
^ie  §enue,  bercn  ^iic^leiit  iii^t  !am,  ()atte  e»  oft  gerufcit. 
^ie  f  a|e,  t)oii  bet  xoxx  getefen  ^aben,  trug  feiite  ©c^ette. 
®ie  Wuiitx,  bie  ber  Wiener  be§  ^omg§  ttebte,  tDar  fe^r  fran!. 

t 


102  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [264-267 

264  Neuter 

Dag  S3Ium^eu,  baS  im  SBatbe  geblu^t  §atte,  Uii^t  tm  (SJarteii 
better. 

Dag  ^iic^lein,  bcffen  9J^utter  e§  gerufen  Iiatte,  tuar  nic^t  gefolgt. 

Da§  ^inb,  bcm  bie  SJiutter  ben  Slpfel  gegeben  f)atte,  tear  gut 
genjefen. 

Da§  ^ebic^t,  baS  ft)ir  lefeit,  ift  fd^on. 

265  Plural  (Masc,  Fem.,  Neut.) 

Die  gu^rleute,  bic  fid)  in  bent  §of)ltt)eg  begegnet  tvavm,  finb 
einanber  auggemic^en. 

Die  ^ferbe,  bcrctt  3lrbeit  311  fc^tuer  geiuefeu  luaf,  tateit  fie  nic^t. 
Die  ^ogel,  \)on  bcncn  ioir  gelefen  I)aben,  lebeit  im  SSalbe. 
Die  Siirften,  bic  bag  «oI!  liebt,  finb  gliidlid). 

266  Der  ^o^ltoeg,  ttjoburiij  W  SBagen  fu^ren,  wav  fe^r  eng. 
Dag  Sdc^leiu,  tnotitt  bie  ©latter  f^mammen,  loar  filbertjell. 
Die  ^efd^tdite,  ttrnrin   ioir  ijou  bent  SSolf   gelefen  fatten,  Wat 

eine  gabcl  (fable). 


,.<>«'':;^:    ^  A 

;; 

• 

■\  "  '^"M.-'  "''■-■^'- 

F. 

N. 

PI. 

ber 

bie 

bag 

bie 

beffen^ 

beren 

beffen 

beren 

bem 

ber 

bem 

benen 

ben 

hk 

bag 

Ut 

tt)eld^er 

n)elc^e 

iuelc^eg 

iuelc^e 

beffen'' 

beren 

beffen 

beren 

mel^em 

n)et(^er 

njeld^em 

toeld^en 

n^elc^en 

melc^e 

ftjetc^eg 

tDtl^C 

267     ^  Note  difference  from  def.  article. 
2  See  A  pp.  36  and  168. 


268-271]  INDICATIVE  PLUPERFECT  103 

268  Relative  and  interrogative   compounds   are  formed   by 
too  +  the  preposition.      See  127,  also  App.  171-174. 

269  Note  that  in  all  relative  clauses  the  verb  comes  last. 

270  ^er  ^rtn^  uon  ^omburg 

griebrtd)  2BiI^€lm,  ben  man  „hcn  ©roBen"  nennt,  ireil 
er  fo  fel^r  tap\ev  tvat  unb  fetn  Sanb  t)on  geinben  Befreit  I)atte, 
tuav  ^xirfiirft  t)on  33rQnbciiburg.  ©r  1:)atie  ctnen  D^effen, 
bem^  er  fefir  gugetan  tvav.     2)tefer    wav    iung    unb    feurtg 

5  aber  oudft  ftiag^alficj.  ©r  l^atte  \d)on  atuet  'Bd}lad)tm  tierloren 
burcf)  ben  ©ifcr,  beffen"-^  er  nid)t  $err  getueien  tnar.  9tun 
Ijatte  tf)m  ber  ^hirfiirft  inieber  einen  ^^^oftcn  Qut)ertraut  in  ctner 
<S(^lQd)t,  iuoDon  man  t)iel  enuartete.  Stefe  (Bd)lad)t  Ijeifet 
„gel)rbellin"  nadj  bcm  Seamen  be§  Orte^,  wotin  man  \od}i. 

JO  ^er  ^$rtn3  fonnte  ben  Wnt,  ber  tftn  befeertc,  nidit  bdmpfen 
unb  ftitrgte  fid)  3U  friil)  in  bie  8d]Iad)t,  bte  er  and]  gemann. 
5lber  fein  Onfel,  beffen  Strenge  befannt  uuir,  nerurteiltc  ifin 
3um  ^obe.  33ergeben^  baten  alle  Offi^tere,  benen^  er  fel)r 
teuer  tuar,  unb  olle  ©olbaten  beren  ^er^  cr  geinonnen  f^atte, 

15  um  ©nabe. 

^Q  legte  ber  S^lurfiirft,  ber  9iefpeft  Dor  beni  (Sfiorafter 
be§  ^rinaen  Ijattc,  beffen^  llrteit  in  feine  Ajonb.  Itnb  ber 
^^Jrina,  beffen  ©eredjtigfeit^ifinn  fe()r  ftarf  \mv,  fd)rieb:  „2^ein 
Urteil  ift  gcred)t.    ^dj  I^Qbe  ben  Xob,  ben  Xn  niir  3ugcfprod)en 

20   I}aft,-t)erbient."    ®a  berjie]^  iljm  fein  Onfel,  ber  nun  fal),  bafe 

27  I     ^iicm— dat.  with  adj.     See  App.  145  and  136. 

-  beffen— gen,  with  ^err  ttlcrBen  =  to  become  master  of.     See  list  in 
App.  122. 

^  benen— dat.  with  adj.     See  App.  145  and  136. 

*beffett  Urteil  =  the  judgment  of  the  latter. 


104 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[272-274 


ber  ^rtns  ftd^  geBeffert  ):)aiie.  3Son  mm  an^  ift  ber  ^^5rtna, 
beffen  DZotnen  S^^tebrirf]  bon  $omburg  roar,  nic^t  nur  topfer 
fonbern  au6)  befointen  unb  fetbft  bef)err}tf)t  geioefen. 


272 

VOCABULARY 

enemy 

ber  getnb 

known  ' 

befannt' 

to  free 

befrei'en  (weak) 

to  condemn 

Derur'tetten  (weak) 

elector 

ber  ^urfiirft 

in  vain 

toerge'ben^ 

partial 

jugetau 

dear 

teller 

fiery 

feurtg 

pardon,  gract 

5  W  @nabe 

reckless 

tuag^alfig 

resjject 

ber  9?efpe!t' 

battle 

bie  <Bd)la6)t 

character 

ber  6;f)ara!' ter 

zeal 

ber  ©ifer 

judgment 

'tia^  Urteil 

to  entrust  to 

an'Dertraueu  (weak) 

sense  of  justice  ber  ^erec^'tigfeit^fiiut 

to  expect 

ertuar'ten  (weak) 

death 

ber  Xob 

to  fight 

fe^ten,  foc^t,  geforfjteu 

to  decree 

5ii'fpre^en,fprac^3ii', 

prince 

ber  $rins 

au'gefprot^en 

to  inspire 

befee'Ien  (weak) 

to  deserve 

ijerbie'nen  (weak) 

to  dami)en 

bdmpfen  (weak) 

to  forgive 

tjer^ei'^en,  t)er5te^, 

too 

3w 

tierjie^en 

early 

m 

to  improve 

befferii  (weak) 

to  win,  gain 

getoin'nen,  gehjaitn', 

careful 

befon'neii 

gett)on'nen 

controlled 

felbft  be^errf^t' 

severity 
273      FiJ 

bie  ©trenge 

7  in   wifJi   rpJaf.iiw.  rtr 

nnnunn'      S^ 

rtphrtffi  5'?^tlfiptm. 

9^omc  „ber  ^rofee"  tuar,  unb fein  Sanb  t)on  g^int^cn  befrett 

^aiit,  tt)ar  eiit  ^urfiirft.     ^m  Sa^re  1675  f^liig  er  bie  ©d^toeben 

(Swedes), feiite  geiiibe  tDareii.    ^ie  (Sd^tac^t, biirc^  bieg 

gefc^a^  (happened),  f)ie§  gefirbeUin. tuir  iiber  ben  ^^riiisen 

gelefen  I)obeii,  gef^a!)  ludl)reiib  biefer  ©d^lQd^t.     ®er  ^^riii^, etn 

S^effe  be§  ^urfiirften  tuar,  t)oii tuir  oben  gefproc^eii  ^abeii,  mar 

274    *  tlOtt  mm  an  =  from  now  on. 


275-276]  INDICATIVE  PLUPERFECT  105 

M)n,  aber  loagljalftg  geloefeii.     2)q§   9legiment, er  gu  fu()ren 

^atte,  ftanb  im  |)intergrunb.     ^er  ^urfiirft, Siebe  fiir  ifyx  fe^r 

grog  tvax,  ^atte  i^m  befoI)(en,  nxd)t  toor  ber   Orbre   (before  the 

command    came)    t)or5uge^en.       3(ber  ber  ^rinj,  ^ebulb 

(patience)  nic^t  ftar!  mar,  n^artete  nic^t  auf  bie  Orbre, i^m  ju 

langjam  mar.     ®r  fturjte  ftc^  ^u  friil)  in  bie  8d)Iad^t, miitete. 

^ie  Sdilac^t  enbete  in  einem  ©iege  fiir  ben  ^urfiirften, aber  auf 

feinen  SfJeffen, bie  Drbre   tjerte^t  ^atte,  fe^r  bofe  mar.     5((Ie 

Dffijiere, greimbe  be§  ^rinjen  gemefen  maren,  unb  ade  8olbaten, 

gu er  fe^r  gut  gemefeu  mar,  haUn  fiir  ben  ^rinjeu, fie  fo 

fe^r  liebten.     5(ber  ber  ^urfiirft, §ers  fiir  ben  ^riu^eu  fprac^, 

©inn  aber  fet)r  ftreug  mar,  Qah  n\d)t  nad),     (£r  fc^rieb  bem 

^rinjen, im  ®efdngni§  mar,  eiuen  ^rief,  — riu  ftanb:  „2Benn 

ba§  Urteil, id)  iiber  ®icl)^    gefproc^eu  t)ah^,  in  feinen  5(ugen 

nid^t  rec^t  (right)  ift,  mill  id)  Xic^  freifprec^en!"     ^er  ^rin^, 

Seele  gered^t  mar,  bac^te  longe  iiber  biefen  S3rief, i^n  feijr  gerii^rt 

i)atit,  nad).    ^ann  frfirieb  er:  ,,^a§  Urteil,  — nac^  id)  fterben  mug, 

ift  gerecfjt  (just)!"    ^er  ^urfiirft, Seele  biefe  5(ntmort  ermartet 

^atte,  mar   febr   geriif)rt.      ^xin   fonnte   er   ben   ^rin^en, fein 

Unrec^t  einfaf),  freif|)recf)en,  mo^*^  er  anc^  tat. 

LESSON  20 

275  REVIEW 

1.  The    pluperfect   tense  is    formed    of   the   preterite  of 
l^a&cn  or  f cin  -f  perfect  participle. 

2.  The  rule  for  the  choice  of  }^ti\^tXi  or  feitt  is  the  same  as  in 
the  perfect.     (See  80,  2.) 

3.  For  personal  and  reflexive  pronouns,  see  App.  27-29. 

276  ^  Note  that  in  letter- writing  the  proroun  of  address  is  capitalized. 
2  t]ja§  has  for  its  antecedent  the  preceding  clause. 


106  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [277 

4.  For  possessive  pronouns,  see  App.  31-33. 

5.  For  demonstrative  pronouns,  see  App.  34,  35. 

6.  For  relative  and  interrogative  pronouns,  see  App.  3Q,  37. 

7.  For  syntax  of  pronouns,  see  App.  165-175. 

8.  Eelative  clauses  have  the  verb  at  the  end. 

277  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

/.  Give  pluperfect  paradigms  of:  fteifen,  ftutpen,  l^oben,  feiu, 
tdten,  fliegen,  (aufen,  urteilen,  tDeid^en,  fec^ten. 

//.  Translate:  1.  The  battle  in  which  the  elector  freed  his 
land  was  in  Fehrbellin.  2.  That  wagoner,  whose  load  was 
very  large,  went  back.  3.  The  cafion,  through  which  he  had 
gone  in  the  morning,  was  too  narrow  for  two.  4.  The  hunter, 
who  had  killed  the  hawk,  cried  out:  *'I  am  large,  you  [all]  are 
small,  you  [all]  belong  to  me,  I  have  you  all!"  5.  The  mer- 
chants asked,  "What  have  you  done  with  our  emerald  which 
was  in  the  purse?"  G.  The  dervish  declared:  "The  pm'se  in 
which  the  emerald  was,  was  not  the  (one)  which  I  found." 
7.  The  judge's  sentence  whereby  the  merchants  had  lost  their 
purse  was  just.  8.  The  dervish  had  come  the  way  which  the 
merchants  were  coming.  9.  The  tower  from  which  the  stork 
had  flown,  was  that  tower  on  which  the  cat  was  sitting.  10.  Did 
you  find  the  flow'ret  which  you  were  seeking  in  the  woods? 

11.  I  had  found  it  in  the  garden  in  which  it  had  been  growing. 

12.  The  officers,  to  whom  he  had  been  very  dear,  begged  for  his 
life.  13.  The  soldiers  whose  officer  he  had  been  loved  him. 
14.  He  was  brave  and  reckless,  which*  lost  him  the  battle. 

///.  Give  the  plurals^  in  the  corresponding  cases,  of:  bent, 
bte,  tt)el(^e§,  ber,  melc^em,  biefe^,  biefer,  id),  bu,  meiiu 

IV.  Translate,  singular  and  plural:  My  book,  his  battle, 
that  officer,  his  judgment,  her  sparrow,  their  hat,  our  house, 
your  goldpiece,  in  which,  in  this,  on  which,  on  this. 

*See  276,  2. 


278-280]  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  107 

CHAPTER    V 
FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT 

LESSON  21 
278 

Present       ^er  ^^aufittantt  tcitct  ^eute  nac^  ber  @tabt. 

Future        @r  tuttb  morgeit  nac^  ber  (Stabt  tcitcn. 
Fut.  perf.    ®r  tnirb  morgeit  nac^  ber  Stabt  gcrittcn  fcin. 
@r  mitb  bie  Slrbeit  ^tivi^  §ckn. 

279  SDie  ^aufteute  merben  nac^  ber  (Stabt  reiten.  3^^  tperbe  bir 
morgeit  \iCi^  S3iic^  gebeit.  'J)ie  90^ait§  mirb  ber  ^a^e  itiemat§  eine 
@(^elle  auf)aitgeii,  benit  fie  luirb  fie  ftetS  fiird^teit.  %zx  (Sterling  fagt 
3tim  SSurme:  ,,3c^  tuerbe  bi^  freffeit,  beitit  td^  bin  gro§  unb  bit  bift 
flein/'  Xer^abid^t  fagt  ^um  ^dger:  ,,3Birft  bit  mtc^  tfiteit?  3d) 
^(i\it  bir  bod^  itt(^t§  5u  leibe  getait." 

@^e  bie  §enne  'tioA  f  itd^Ieiit  erreic^t,  mirb  e§  ber  §abic^t  gefaitgeit 
I)aben.  SBeiiit  \!)\z  ^^a^e  !ommt,  mirb  bie  3Jlau§  fortgelmifeit  feiit. 
SSenit  bie  S3ditme  ttirfit  me^r  blii^eit,  mirb  ber  grii^Ung  tiergmtgeit 
feiit.  ^ie  ©perlinge  merbeit  tjerlorett  fein,  tuenn  ber  Wiener  be§  5(mt=^ 
manned  bem  ^itabeit  beit  §ut  itimmt. 

280  Future  Tekse 

ic^  wcrbc  belt  50^aitit  fc^en 
bu  mirft  ben  9Jlanit  fc|en 
er  ttitrb  ben  SJiaitii  fc^cn 
ttjir  mcrbctt  ben  9J^ann  fcjcn 
i^r  ttjctbcl  ben  9Jlann  fcjcn 
fie  ttictben  ben  SD^ann  fc^en 
®ie  toerbm  ben  SJ^ann  fe^en 


108  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [281-283 

28 1  Future   Perfect 

Verb  with  Ifa^fn 

id)  wcrbc  ba^  2Bort  gcfi^ncBctt  |oBcn 
't>n  mirfl  'oa^  SSoit  gcf^ricbcn  ^aficn 
er  ttirb  ba§  SQSort  gcf^ncficn  ^ttbcn 

iuii  itterbcn  ba^  SSort  gcfc^ttcficn  IJafien 
il)i  mcrbet  ba§  SBort  gcfi^ricBcn  ^oBcn 
fie  mcrben  ha^  SBort  gcfr^ricficn  ^o6en 
@ie  tocrben  'tia^  SBort  gefi^riebcn  |abcn 

Verb  with  fftji 

ic^  tuerbc  md)  §aufe  gcfommen  fcin 
bu  mirfl  nad)  SQan)z  gcfcmmcn  fein 
er  ttiirb  narf)  §au}e  gcfommcn  fcin 

tt)ir  toerben  nac^  §aufe  gefommen  fcin 
it)r  mcrbet  itad)  |)aiife  gcfommcn  fcin 
fie  mcrbcn  nad)  §aufe  gcfommcn  fcin 
(Sic  toerben  narfi  §aiife  gcfommcn  fcin 

282  9RnttcrIic6c 

5n  einem  2)orfe  im  Sd^tDargtDalb  Icbtc  cin  vSd)nctbcr  itnb 

feine  grau.     ©ie  gotten  einen  ©oI)n  namen§  2)onteL     Xer 

93ater  ift  I)Qrt  unb  flreng  getoefen.   (^r  l^ai  ben  ©o^n  gelicBt, 

aber  er  I)Qt  it)m  felten  eriaubt  3u  fpielen.    Smmer  fafe  er  Bei 

5   bent  3Sater  unb  l^alf  il)m.     „2)u  iDirft  ben  S^ng^n  nod^  ^  t5er= 

283  ^  ttodi  =  before  you're  through  with  it.  Compare  with  the  use  of 
nod^  to  express  progressive  action  (83).  See  also  Ibod^  (36,  4).  These 
particles  lend  color  and  force  to  the  narrative. 


284]  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  109 

treibcn",  fagte  il)m  oft  bie  ^van,  bic  fid)  T()re^:^  (Sol^ne^  tDcgen  - 
Bangte.  5Iber  ber  3Sater  trurbe  sornig  iinb  fd)rte:  „5ur  tuen 
arbeite  id^  benn?  bod)  nur  feinettDegen  !^  ®r  tvivh  mmal  ein 
SO^cifter  fein  unb  Orel  ®€lb  tierbiencn!"    ^od)  bie  SDhttter,  bie 

10  Die!  fliiger  tDor,  feufate  mir:  ,,2Bcnn  er  mir  bio  bal)in'^  iiid)t 
Tangft'*  fortgeloufcn  fein  iDirb!" 

Unb  e§  fam  tnirflic^  fo.  SSdftrcnb  ciner  ^cid)t,  in  ber  e§ 
ftorf  fd)neit^,  ift  ber  .^nabe  baOongeloufcn.  Qt  I)interlie6  einen 
93rief  an  feine  90^utter:   „3Benn  2)u  biefcn  33rief  (ieft  mcrbe  id) 

i'>  ((ingft  fort  fein.  3Senn  id)  reid)  bin,  tnerbe  id)  miebcrfommcn. 
Si;^  haf)in  mirb  mir  ber  35ater  inol)!  Der5ief)en  baben!" 

2)a  meinte  bie  SUZntter  bitterlid^,  nnb  ber  3Sater,  bem^  nie= 
manb  fo  oiel  ©efiibt  gugetrant  botte,  nnbm  e§  fid)  fo  feftr  gn 
.§er5en^  bofj  er  franf  innrbe  nnb  ftarb.    (Jfte  or  ftnrb,  fagte  er 

20  5n  feiner  J^ran :  „9}iarie,  menn  bn  alle  8d)ulben  be3al)lt  r)aben 
rt)trft,  tnirb  tnenig  iibrig  bleiben.  5(ber  hu  tDtrft  bid)  burd)= 
fcftlagen,  benn  bu  bift  tnpfer  nnb  bu  liirft  dnft  nnferen  2)QnieI 
mieberfeben.  ^nnn  fagc  ibni,  ba)]  id)  feiner"  in  meinex  ^obe§= 
ftnnbe  gebad)t  i)ahQV'  Xaniit  ftarb  er. 

(Srf)lii6  folgt=ro  be  concluded.) 


284  ^  mcflen,  f^alttX,  urn  •  ttlitten  =  for  the  sake  of,  on  account  of— 
almost  synonymous.  These  prepositions  usually  follow  the  noun,  and 
govern  the  genitive.  See  App.  126.  When  united  with  a  personal 
pronoun,  ttirgm  is  preceded  by  et,  giving  frinettnegtlt,  for  his  sake, 
tnfinetilieBfn,  for  my  sake,  etc.     See  App.  88. 

^  h'xi  iltt^in  =  by  that  time. 

^  tdngft  =  long  ago. 

^liem— dat.  obj.  of  juttttttftt.     See  App.  132, 

*^na^m  eg  flr^  p  ^erjen^took  it  to  heart. 

'  jeiner-gen.  after  flfbai^t.     See  App.  122. 


110 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[286-286 


From  now  on  the  special  vocabulary  will  be  discontinued  and  all 
new  words  (except  the  verbs)  will  be  found  only  in  the  general 
vocabulary. 

285  Strong  Verbs 


to  drive  away 

t)ertretBen 

t)ertrieb 

tjertrieben 

to  forgive 

t)er^cif)en 

t)er5ie(} 

tjersie^en 

to  die 

fterben 

ftarb 

geftorbeu 

to  make  one's  way  fid^  burdlfrflla^^ 

Wm  firfi 

Jic^  burc^gefc^lagen 

gen 

burd^ 

Weak  Verbs 

to  live 

lebeu 

to  sigh 

feufjen 

to  love 

Ueben 

to  snow 

fc^neien 

to  x)erinit 

erlauben 

to  weep 

toeineu 

to  play 

jpielen 

to  believe  to  be 

gutrauen,  traute 

to  be  afraid 

fic^  bangen 

capable  of 

511,  jugetraiit 

to  deserve 

tjerbienen 

to  pay 

besaf)ien 

286  2Bo  f)at  ber  (Sd^neiber  getoo^nt?  §at  er  allein  Qttoo^ni? 
2Bie  t)iele  ^inber  fatten  bie  2tnU?  6inb  fie  fpdter  (later)  allein 
gen?efen?  2!3a§  mirb  ber  ^ater  tiui,  tpenn  ber  <3of)n  fortlduft? 
SBamt  ttyirb  ber  @of)u  iDieberfommen?  SBirb  mi  ^elb  ba  feiu  nad) 
be§  S^aterg  Xob?  SSirb  bie  Tlntitv  tjerstueifetn  (despair)? 
SSarum  tpirb  fie  nid^t  tjergtoeifetn?  2Bie  tt)irb  fie  fic§  burd^f^Iagen? 
3ft  ber  Waim  geftorben?  SSoran  ift  er  geftorben?  §atte  er  ben 
(Sof)n  fe^r  geliebt?  SSie  ^atte  er  i^n  be^anbelt  (treated)?  §at  er 
fic^  \>a^  gortlaufen  be§  (5o^ne§  fef)r  gu  ^er^en  genommen?  2Bie  fe^r 
()at  er  e§  fi^  gn  ^erjen  genommen?  SSirb  ber  8o^n  tuieberfommen? 
^on  tt)em  mirb  it)m  bie  9Jlutter  ergd^len?  SBeffen  ^at  ber  ^ater  in 
jeiner  ^obe^ftnnbe  gebac^t? 

2Ba§  ift  ein  8d^neiber?  eine  ©d^neiberin?  ein  ©d^nfjmad^er? 
geben  fie  ein  anbere^  (other)  SBort  fiir  ©i^u^mad^er!  SSa§  ift  ein 
Sel)rer?  eine  Se^rerin?  ein  Sd^iiler?   eine  ©c^iiterin?    2Bog  ift  eine 


287-289]  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  111 

B^nk?  eiite  SSerfftatt  (workshop)?  2Ba^  ift  eiu  5lrbeiter?  eine 
^^rrbeiterin? 

287  Translate:  1.  I  shall  have  a  story  for  you  which  you 
will  like.  2.  I  shall  have  returned  when  your  brother  is  in 
school.     3.  When  the  youth  returns  he  will  not  find  his  father. 

4.  Does  the  mother  think  of  her  son  in  the  hour  of  her  death? 

5.  The  father  h.ad  taken  the  departure  (ba§  gortge^en)  of  the  son 
so  much  to  heart  that  he  died.  G.  The  mother  will  not  make  her 
way  through  life  and  will  not  see  her  son  again.  7.  Will  the 
latter  have  become  rich?  8.  The  former  will  have  become  old. 
9.  I  shall  have  run  away. 

288  Change  all  the  above  sentences  so  as  to  use  the  present 
tense;  the  perfect;  the  preterite. 

LESSON  28 

289  ADJECTIVE  DECLENSIONS 

Nominative 

®a§  ift  bcr  grogc  S3aum. 


^er  S3aum  ift  gro§. 
%\t  Slume  ift  fj^iin. 
5)ag  ^inb  ift  flcin. 


SDa^  ift  cin  grower  S3aum. 

^a§  ift  btc  fd^bnc  93lume. 
®ag  ift  einc  fd^onc  SBlume. 

5)a§  ift  ba§  Heine  ^tub. 
®a§  ift  cin  fletncS  ^inb. 


M. 

bcr  gro^c  93aum 

ettt  grower  93anm 

F. 

liic  f(^onc  93lume 

eine  fc^one  93lnme 

N. 

bag  Heine  ^inb 

tin  fleineS  ^inb 

Observe  that  when  the  article  has  an  ending  which 
shows  the  number,  gender,  and  case  of  the  following  noun 
the  adjective  has  merely  a  perfunctory  inflection.  In  the 
nominative  case  this  is  e.     When  the  article  has  no  inflection 


112  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [290-291 

(as    tin   in  masc.  uom.,  iieut.  iiom.   and   ace.)    the  adjective 
takes  the  strong  characteristic  ending,  masc.  cr,  neut.  e8. 

290  Genitive 

^ie  flatter  bcS  griincn  93oume§  fiub  grog. 
^ie  SBIcitter  eiucS  griincn  S3aume§. 
^te  garbe  bcr  fc^onen  S3lume  ift  rot 
^ie  i^axU  etncr  fi^onen  S3lume. 
®ie  mutizx  bcl  fretnen  ^inbe§. 
SDie  SJiutter  eineS  fleiucn  ^inbe§. 

beS  griincn  S3anme§  einci  griincn  93anme^ 

bcr  f(^i)ncn  Slnme  eincr  fd^iincn  S3lnme 

bcS  fleincn  ^inbe§  eincS  fleincn  ^inbe^ 

Observe  that  the  perfunctory  inflection  in  the  genitive 
is  en,  and  that  this  appears  after  tlio  definite  and  the  indefinite 
articles,  since  both  indicate  the  number,  gender,  and  case  of  the 
noun  by  their  full  inflections. 

29 1  Dative 

5)ie  S3(atter  finb  ouf  bcm  grogcn  S3aumc. 
^ie  93tdtter  finb  auf  eincm  grogcn  ^anme. 
2)a§  ^inb  mirb  tjon  bcr  fc^oncn  S3(ume  jprec^en. 
^a§  ^inb  n)irb  oon  eincr  fi^ijncn  33lume  fprec^en. 
Xte  9Jiutter  ge^t  gn  bcm  fleincn  ^Hnbe. 
®ie  3JZntter  gef)t  5u  eincm  fleincn  ^inbe. 

bcm  grogcn  S3aume  eincm  grofecn  Sanme 

bcr  jc^onen  ^hime  eincr  jc^oncn  Slnme 

bcm  fleincn  ^inbe  eincm  fleincn  linbe 

Observe  that  the  dative  as  well  as  the  genitive  of  the 
adjective  after  the  definite  and  indefinite  articles  has  the  per- 
functory ending  en. 


292-295 


FUTiniE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT 


113 


202 


Accusative 

3(^  ttjerbc  bctt  grogcn  S3aum  fe^eii. 
3(^  toerbc  eincn  grogcn  Saum  fef)en. 
S33ir  tteben  btc  fc^onc  S31ume. 
SBir  Uebeit  einc  fd^onc  SUtme. 
SHait  ttJtrb  bag  fleinc  ^inb  ^oreiu 
SOlan  tDirb  cin  fleincS  ^inb  1i)6mu 


ben  gro^ctt  S3aum 
btc  jd^onc  S3(ume 
ba9  flctnc  ^inb 


eincn  gre^en  33aum 
einc  fd^onc  93lume 
cin  fleincS  ^titb 


Observe  that  in  the  accusative  neuter  the  adjective 
varies  according  as  it  is  preceded  by  the  definite  or  by  the 
indefinite  article.  Note  the  same  difference  in  the  nom. 
masc.  and  neut.,  caused  in  all  three  cases  by  the  uninflected 
condition  of  cin. 

The  masculine  accusative  is  alike  after  the  definite  and 
indefinite  articles  and  ends  in  en. 


293 


Plurals 


bic  grogen  53dume 
ber  fc^ouen  S3(umeu 
ben  fleiucn  ^inberu 
bic  gro^cn  S3dume 


feinc^  grogen  S3dumc 
meiner  fc^ouen  S3(umeit 
feinen  fleinen  ^iiibent 
!eiue  grogen  S3diimc 


294     AVhere  no  article  or  pronoun  precedes,   the  adjective 
is  declined  like  ber. 


grower  S3aum 
gro^cf''  93aume§ 
gro§em  S3aume 
gro^cn  S3aum 


fc^one  93(ume 
fc^oner  53lume 
fc^oncr  ^(ume 
frf)one  33tume 


fleincg  linb 
fleincr  ^tnbe^ 
fleiitcm  ^inbe 
!(einc8  ^inb 


Plural 

fc^one  S3Iumeu 
fc^oner  Slumen 
ft^onen  ©lumen 
\d)bnt  S3I|tmcn 


295  ^  The  indefinite  article  has  no  plural,  but  feitt  and  the  possessires 
which  are  decUned  like  it  and  have  a  plural  form  are  therefore  used 
instead  of  it.     See  App.  12. 

2  C9  is  usually  changed  to  en  to  avoid  recurrence  of  sibilant. 


114  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [296-297 

The  plurals  of  those  phrases  that  have  citt  in  the  singular 
*aro  also  declined  like  bcr: 

tin  ftetncS  ^inb  Heine  ^inber 

eineS  fteiucn  ^tnbe§  !teincr  ^inber 

eiucm  fleincn  ^iube  fleincn  ^inberu 

cin  fletncS  ^inb  fleinc  ^inber 

296  GRAMMAR 

1.  Adjectives  used  predicatively  are  uninflected. 

2.  Adjectives  iised  attributively  are  inflected  according  to 
the  following  principle:  One  of  the  adjuncts  of  the  noun  must 
show  the  number,  gender,  and  case.  If  this  is  done  by  the 
article  or  pronoun,  the  adjective  has  a  merely  perfunctory 
ending  (c,  Clt).  When  the  article  or  pronoun  does  not  do  this, 
the  adjective  must  have  the  strong  ending. 

3.  There  are  three  possible  conditions:  (a)  The  adjective  is 
not  preceded  by  article  or  pronoun ;  (b)  the  adjective  is  pre- 
ceded by  the  definite  article,  or  the  pronouns  declined  like 
it;  (c)  the  adjective  is  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article,  or 
the  words  declined  like  it.     We  get,  therefore, 

THREE  ADJECTIVE  DECLENSIONS 

I.  Strong — when  used  alone — inflected  like  definite  article. 
II.   Weak — preceded  by  def.   art.  (or  demonst.   pronoun)  — 
weak  endings  (c,  cn  ). 

III.  Mixed — preceded  hy  indef.  art.   (or  possess,  pron.), — 
three  strong  endings,  the  others  weak. 


297 

TABLE  OF  ADJECTIVE  INFLECTIONS* 

M. 

Singular 
F. 

Strong 

N. 

Plural 

M.  F.  N. 

-er 

-C 

-e§ 

-c 

-e§  (en) 

-er 

-e§  (en) 

-er 

-em 

-cr 

-em 

-en 

-en    ' 

-e 

-e§ 

-e 

*  For  full  adjective  declension,  see  App.  38-44, 


298-299] 


FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT 


115 


Weak 

ber  — c 

W  — e 

ha^  — e 

bie  —en 

be§  — en 

ber  — en 

be§  —en 

ber  —en 

bent  —en 

ber  —en 

bem  —en 

ben  —en 

ben  —en 

W  —t 

ba§— c 
Mixed 

bie  —en 

mein  — er 

meine  — e 

mein  — e8 

meine  — en 

meine^  — en 

meiner  — en 

meine»  — en 

meiner  — en 

meinem  —en 

ntetner  — en 

meinem  —en 

meinen  — en 

meinen  —en 

meine  — e 

mein  — e§ 

meine  — en 

LESSON  29 

298  aWntterliek 

(©cfilufe) 

^ic  einfome  Sraii  Icbtc  nun  Iraurig  lucitcr.    (5§  !am  fo, 

mie  e»  i6r  ftcrbcnbcr^  SO^ann  gefaot  ()attc.     Sie  ntiifstc  aUcv 

berfaufen  xmb  miifete  fogar  bet  fremben  Seuten  bienen,  urn  tf)r 

2eben  3u  crl)alten.     Sod)-  bie  lanacn,  trauriiicn  ^^nfere  ticr= 

5  gtngen  i^r^  fdjncll  in  ber  ^offnung:     ,/Dtein  SanicI,  mein 

lieber  ©ol^n,  irirb  fd^on  tricber  fommcn.    5<i)  tuerbe  bieHeid^t 

bann  fc^on  alt  gemorben  fcin,  abcr  fterbcn  tDerbc  \6)  ntc^t,  ^\^^ 

r  fommt!"     ®o  Icbte  bie  liebenbe  9[)?utter  iDeiter  in  biefer 

ftctigen  $offnung  unb  merfte  gar  nid)t,  n^ie  bie  ^a\)ic:  ont= 

10  {d)Iiipftcn. 

2)er  ©olfin  tear  mittlernjeik  iueit  ficntmgefommcn  in  ber 
SSelt,  \)aii^  nici  bnrdigcniadit  tnar  alt  itnb  grait  gelnorben  iinb 
f)atte  feine  Cittern  faft  gdnjlid)  t)ergeffen.    SSenn  er  ifirer"^  cin= 

299  ^  fterftettber = dying. 

'^  ilO^  —  an  adversative  conjunction,  weaker  than  abff. 
^i^r — dat.  of  interest.     See  App.  142. 
M^rer— gen.  with  Jjettfen.     See  App.  122, 


116  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [300 

mol  t)ad}te,  \o  fmjtc  cr  fid):   „2)ie  l^)cr^cn  uioljl  laiujft  ^fftorbcn 

S)o  tvat  er  einmal  augegen  bei  cinem  itoltenifc^en  Sefte, 
too  er  t)i€le  Srembe^  trof.  Swfallig  font  ble  9lcbc  ouf  bte 
beutfdfte  2:rciie.  Semanb  modjte  bte  ^emcrfung:  „5ld),  mit 
ber  BeriiJimten  b€utfd)en  ^reue  ift  C£^  and)  nid}t  fo  toett  I^er.^ 

20  !^ie  j^ot  aud^  i^xe  Siiden!"  Sie  onberen  Iad)ten  mit^  imb  aud) 
ber  grembe  an^  bem  Sd^iDorgtooIb  mod^te  cine  ironifc^e  33em€r= 
fung  boriiber.  So  fagte  ein  iunger  Spooler  mit  ernftem  (^e= 
fid^t:  „5c^  toiK  end)  etne  ©efd^id^te  eracil^Icn,  bie  mir  jiingft 
borgefommen  ift,  bo  merbet    il^r    \e^en,  toa§>  bn^  mit  ber 

25  beutfrf)eii  ^reiie  ouf  fid^  !)Qt!"^ 

^fJun  er3al)Ite  cr  bie  @efd)id)tc  Don  ber  alten  31*01!  im 
8d^toor3tooIb,  bie  if^r  l^orteg  2o§>  fo  gebulbig  trug,  toeil  il^r^® 
tief  im  .^perjen  bie  Sicbe  gum  ©ol^n,  tvk  dn  frifd^er  39riinnen, 
Seben  imb  ^offnung  gob.     ,,So  finb  nun  tiieraig  goitre  ber- 

80  floffcn,  bie  olte  grou  ift  toeife  getuorben  unb  gel^t  gebeugt  il&ren 
fd)rt)eren  SScg,  bei  fremben  Ceuten  nm  il^r  93rct  orbeitenb.  5tber 
ieben  SO^orgen  mxh  jeben  ?Ibenb  hokt  fie  fiir  biefcn  ©ol^n,  ieben 
gremben  frogt  fie  nod)  iljm,  unb  jeben  9^eifcnben"  bittct  fie 

300  ^  tOtttien  ttlOl|l  geftor^en  f tin  =  probably  have  died — an  idiomatic 
use  of  the  future  perfect.     See  App.  1 79. 

®  tltele  SfrfWlbe— fremb  is  an  adj.  Here  it  is  used  as  a  noun.  But  in 
such  cases  the  adjective  retains  its  full  inflection  according  to  rule. 
It  is  strong ;  coordinate  with  tlicle. 

Mft  e§  au^  niii^t  fo  ttiett  I|et  =  isn't  so  great  as  always  supposed— 
corresponds  to  the  slang  phrase,  "isn't  all  it's  cracked  up  to  be,"  but 
is  less  inelegant. 

8  mit  =  too. 

^  ttiaS  lltt§ ouf  fl(^  ^Ot  =  what  is  in  this  talk  of  German  fidelity. 

^«  i||r im  ^erjcn— dat.  pron.  -\-  def .  art.  instead  of  possessive.   See 

App.  144. 

"  jflint  9lHfentfn  =  each  traveler — a  present  participle  used  adjec- 
tively.     See  note  6. 


301-302] 


FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT 


117 


narf)  if)m  Qu^aufc^ouen.     Wnh  aii  i§r  fQiter  berbtente^  @elb 
35  gtbt  fie  Qii§,  urn  nad)  ii)m  511  frageu.    ®ie  tuith  uidit  fterben, 

bio  fie  t)on  if)m  f)6rt! " 

5I((c  tDaren  ftill  geluorben.    2)cr  ^Taniel  aber  fragtc  leifc: 

,Mic  I)ciJ3t  bie  alte  grau?"    „Si*i"iu  '^runner,  btc  "Biiwc  bct> 

8d)neiber5  '^runner,  unb  bcr  8or)n  ftieB  Saiiicll"  Xa  quxq  ber 
40  aj^ann  fttll  l^inou^,  f^niirte  fcin  33unbel  unb  mad)te  fic^  ouf 

ben  §etmtuct3,^"2  ^jj^^  j^i^  (^^itc  aiiiitlcr  nod)  cinniQl  3«  umarmon. 


301 

Strong  Verbs 

i 

to  maintain 

er^Qlten 

erfitelt 

cr^^Qlten 

to  forget 

tjergcffen 

bergag 

bergeffen 

to  pass  away 

Derflte^eu 

tjerflofe 

tierfloffeit 

to  bite 

betgen 

bi6 

gebiffcii 

to  happen 

tjorfommen 

Weak  Verbs 

t)orge!onimen 

must 

niuffcit,    mugte,   ge== 

tolrelate       Cr^oljlCU 

niugt 

to  bend         bCUgeil 

to  sell 

Derfaufcn 

to  pray         betClt 

to  serve 

bienen 

to  travel       reifcit 

to'escape 

entfd^lii^fen 

tosee/look  fd)aUCU 

to  experience 

burci^mad^eii 
burcb,  bur 

1,    mac^te 
cbacmocbt 

to  strap      f  c^niircu 

to  embrace  UlUarmcn 

EXERCISES 

302  SSag  fiir  eine^"  g^-^y  j^qj.  j^^,^  5ie  3Bitrt)e  be§  (Sd)neibcr§? 
2Ber  f)Qtte  tl)r  ha^:^  q^qV^  33ci  rt^em  muBte  fie  bienen?  SSie  iDoreii 
bie  3a!)re,  bie  nun  t)ergingen?  SSas  erftielt  ifiren  SO^ut  au  btefer 
trourigen  3eit?  2Sa§  ^offte  fie?  3Sa§  tDar  il)re  ftetige  ^offnung? 


'^moj^te  fllft  auf  ben  ^timttlf ft  =  started  on  his  way  home. 

"  ttia^  fiir  eine  =  what  kind  of. 


118  ELEMENTS    OF   GERMAN  [303-304 

''Mat  hn  ool)n  ein  retd^cr  ''Mann  geiuorben,  ioie  er  e^  geI)offt  l^atte? 
SSa§  fiir  ein  Stnabe  tvav  er  getDefen?  SSoS  fiir  etn  2)?ann  Ji:)ar 
cr  gctDorben?  3Ba^  bod^te  er  in  Sesug  auf  (in  regard  to)  feine 
(51tern?  Sei  iuqjS  fiir  einem  gefte  tuar  er  gugegen?  SSa§  ift  ein 
italienifcl}c^>  Reft?  SBorauf  fom  bie  9lebe?  Sft  bie  beutfdje  ^reue 
.l)criiI)mtV  ^ennen  ©ie  (do  you  know)  ba^  Sieb  „2;eutfd)Ianb, 
S)eiitfd)lQnb  iiber  aUe§"?  gielten^  bie  2eule  ki  bem  italienifci)cn 
5eft  Did  t3on  ber  beutfdien  ^reue?  2Bq§  fiir  33emer!uJtgen  mady 
ten  fie?  SSer  bodite  anber§  (differently)?  3Ba^  fiir  ein  ©efi(i)t 
niQcljte  er?  3Son  toem  ersctl^Ite  er  nun?  2Sie  fie^t  bie  altc  Jran 
jetst  anS^?  3Sann  Bctct  fie  fiir  if^ren  berlorenen  ©o^n?  SSo^et  !)at 
fie  @elb?  2Sa§  tut  fie  bamil?  SSeld^en  ©inbrucE  mad)te  biefe 
(3efd)id)tc  auf  Daniel? 


303     Fill  in: 


tierlaffen grou  n?irb  auf  ben  tierloren- 


(Bofyx  luarten.  S)er  arm — ,  alt —  SO^ann  tDirb  je^t  fein  —  alt  — , 
gcbcugt —  a)httter  umarmt  I)aBen.  S)er  jung — ,  ftiE —  Tlakv, 
mii  bem  ernft —  @efid)te,  er3a!)It  bie  traurig —  @efd)id3te  ber 
trcu — ,  alt —  grau.  ^a§>  italienifd) —  5eft,  tnobei  ber  iung— 
Stealer  bie§  erscit^Ite,  ift  langft  boriiber.  ®a§  §er3  be§  alt— 
®d)nciber§  mar  nid)t  fo  I)art,  alS  ber  gomig —  (Sol^n  geglaubt 
Ijattc.    2)a§  Ijart —  2o§>  ber  arm —  SSittoe  rit^rte  alte  ^ergen. 

304  Translate:  1.  The  poor  old  woman  will  work  hard  all 
her  life.  2.  Her  son  will  not  return  for  many  years.  3.  She 
will  hope  for  (ttuf)  his  return  and  will  look  out  for  him. 
4.  He  will  have  become  a  rich  man.  5.  She  hopes  to  see  her 
young  son,  who  will  have  become  an  old  man. 

^  lieltett  .  .  .  UOtt  =  thought  much  of. 


305-306]  \    FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  119 

LESSON  30 

305  ^ie  goulc  itnb  W  Slctfetgc 

©ine  3Sitit)c  f^attc  glDel  ^odjter;  bie  cine  toar  fc^on  unb 
ffetfetg,  aBer  bie  anbere  tear  l^dfeltd^  unb  faul.  Xte  90?utter 
liebte  hit  Ijaglidje,  faule  ^od)tcr  Diel  mel)r  al§  bic  fd)one,  flei= 
feigc.    ®ie  erft  gcnanntc^  !^od^ter  tear  i^r  etgcne§  Uxnh,  aBer 

5  hit  anbere  tear  ha^  einaige  S!inb  ber  erften  grau  il)rc§  9P^anne§. 
2)arum  Ijagte  W  bofe  SSitoe  ba§  arme,  fd^one  30^db(^en.  8ie 
^gaB  tl)rer  eigenen,  {)af3lic()en  S^odjter  alle§  ©ute^  ju  efjen,  311 
trtnfen  unb  311  tragen,  aBer  bem  jd^dnen,  fleifetgen  (Stieffinb 
gaB  fie  nid)t§  aB  !)arte  5IrB€it,  fd)Ied)te§  ©ffen  unb  alte,  aBge= 

10  riffene^  ^leibcr.  (^inft  toar  bem  armen  ©tieffinb^  Beim  ©pin- 
nen^  eine  ©|)ule  in  einen  tiefen,  bunflen^  ^runnen  gefaHen.  ®a 
fagte  bic  Bdfc,  alte  ©tiefmutter:  „9cun  ift  bie  fd)6nc  ©pule 
I)cruntergefancn.  Xa  luirft  hn  fie  ai\6)  \mthn  I)oIen,  bu  faulcsi, 
bummcS,  Bdsartige^  Sing!"  Sa§  arme  9Jidbd)en  Bangte  fid)  fo, 

15  ho!^  e§  bor  lauter'^  ©direden  in  ben  fc^tDargen  33runnen  fprang. 
Sod)  e§^  fici  nid^t  in  !alte§,  fdirerflid)e§  2Saffer,  niie  e§  tDoIjl^ 
ern)artet  \)aiit,  fonbern  auf  cine  fd)t3ne  fonnige  SSiefc,  boH  rci= 
3enbcr  33Iumcn.i^  (Sana  erftaunt  ging  e§  tecitcr.    „2Sa§  leerbc 

306  ^  bic  erft  genamtte  =  the  first  named. 

^  tttte§  ©tttC  =  all  good  things;  note  the  weak  adj.  after  atteS. 
^  ttbfteriffcn  =  shabby. 

*  ^ticffiniJ,  dat.  of  interest.     See  App.  142. 
^6cim(=bCt  ticm)  (©))tttttCtt  =  at  her  spinning 
^bunflCtt,  for  tittttfelett.     See  App.  31,  note. 
^  lautcr,  indeclinable  adj.  =  sheer. 

^  t%  refers  to  bag  9Rdb^en,  hence  neuter.      But  often  flc  is  used, 
referring  to  sex. 

9  ttJO^l  =  probably. 

'°  reii^Ctttlcr  ©lumen— gen.  after  tiott.     See  App.  125, 


120  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [307-308 

id}  jtun  Qlle$  finben?"  fragte  fie  fid).     S^a  fam  e§  an  etnen 

20  grofeen  ^odfofcn,  t)oE  l^elfseS  33rot.^^  Setnaub  Ijatte  i)a§>  fdjijuc 

33rot  I)inciiiGeftc(ft,  unb  l^otte  e§  bomt  l^cracffen.    ®q§  frifd)= 

cjebacfcnc  33rot  ricf:  „5[d),  3tel)e  mid)  IjerouS,  bii  fd)one§,  gutcS 

2)^Qbd)en,  fonft  lucrbe  id)  cjan^  uiib  gar^-  tiGrbrenneu".   -^q^ 

gate  Sliiib  tat  €§  unb  ging  frofilid)  iDciter.    Sa  !ant  e§  an  ctnen 

25  indd)tigen  St^jfelbaum.    Der^^  I)ing  bolt  fd)oncr  S^fel.    ^ic^^ 

ricfen:   „5ld),  gutc§,  licbcS  S^inb,  fd)uttlc  uii§  rcifc  S^jfcl  oB!" 

Sq§  gefallige  a)tdbd)eit  tat  ec^  gcrii  imb  gtug  glitdlid)  ldd)elnb 

tueiter.    ©nbltd)  tarn  c$  an  etn  fleine§,  niebrtge^  ^au§>,  init 

minstgen  genftern,  einer  fd)iefen  ^iire  unb  etnem  nieber^dn^ 

30  genben  Sod).    5Cu§  etnem  ber  iDinjigen  genfter^^  gudte  eine 

fleinc,  runjlige  olte  grau  ^erauS.    Sie^^  I)attc  gar  fcinc  Sdljue, 

fd)n€eiDet6e§  §oar  unb  eine  ^riide,  rt)orauf  fie  fid&  ftii^te. 

(^ortfe^ung  folgt.) 

307  SxRONa  Verbs 

to  tear  down  abretgen  rig  db  obgeriffen 

to  spin         fpinnen  fpann  gefponncn 

to  bake        badcu  buf  gebaden 

Weak  Verbs 

to  expect    erluarteu  to  shake  fc^iittelu 

to  burn  up  t)erbrenuen,  l)er=  to  smue  Icid^etn 

bramtte,  tierbrannt  to  peep    guden 


308  "  ^fifeeH  SJrot— accusative  with  tiott-  Cf.  note  10.  Observe  that 
Hott  governs  both  gen.  and  ace.  The  latter  is  more  usual  in  colloquial 
German. 

^^gattj  Wttil  gar  =  altogether.     Note  alliteration. 

*^  ter,  bit.     Is  this  relative  or  demonstrative?    See  App.  166. 

**  iffttjJer— partitive  genitive  after  etnem.    See  App.  120a. 


30»-310J      FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT         12J 

309  EXERCISES* 

1.  SSie  fa^en  bie  beiben  3:od)t€r  bcr  SBitire  auS? 

2.  3Sie  befjanbeltc  bk  9[^utter  bie  Beiben  99^Qbrf)€n? 

3.  SSa§  ge|rf)Ql)  ber  fd)oncu  Zo6)t^x  eine§  ^age^  beitn  ©pinncn? 

4.  33efd)reiBen  ©ie  ba§  Conb  boS  fk  in  bem  33runnen  borfonb! 

5.  3Sq§  iDor  bie  crftc  (first)  ^riifung,  bie  fie  gu  beftel^en  l^atte? 
G.  SSq§  tear  bie  nodifte? 

7.  3Bie  btitte  fie  fid)  in  ben  beiben  ^riifungen  geaeigt? 

8.  33efrf)reiben  Sie  hc[^-  §Qn§  unb  beffcn  QScmol^nerin ! 

1.  The  wicked  widow  had  an  only  daughter,  but  her  hus- 
band had  liad  a  daughter  before.  2.  She  will  not  treat  her 
beautiful  stepdaughter  well:  she  will  give  her  nothing  but  hard 
work  and  poor  food.  3.  Once  the  poor  child  let  her  spool  fall 
into  the  dark  cold  water  of  the  well.  4.  The  bad  stepmother 
called  (nonnte)  her  a  lazy,  stupid,  malicious  creature.  5.  The 
poor  girl  will  be  so  frightened,  that  she  will  leap  into  the 
black  water  of  the  deep  well.  6.  But  she  will  not  have 
taken  the  leap  in  vain.  7.  She  will  find  a  beautiful,  sunny 
land,  and  a  kind  old  woman  who  will  love  her. 

LESSON  SI 

310  ^ic  j^mXt  unb  bie  ^Icigige 

(3ortfe|ung) 
2ie  alte  5rau  rief:  „Swrc5^ie  bid)  ni^t,  licbes  ^inb !  99Idbe 
bei  mir !  3Betin  bu  aHe  5trbeit  in  meinem  f leinen  $aufe  orbent-- 
iid)  tiift,  mirft  h\\  Q%  g^wi  Ijabcn^  bei  mir.     Hbcr  mein  n^^ofeeS 

*The  questions  on  the  text  can  now  be  formed  by  student  and 
instructor  in  analogy  with  tliose  of  the  preceding  lessons.  The 
questions  in  the  exercises  from  now  on  will  be  more  in  the  nature  of 
composition  work  (frcie  9^eprobu!tion)  and  will  give  the  student  more 
scope  for  originality  and  independence  of  expression. 

'  ttllrfi  bu  eg  pt  ^aftrn  =  you  shall  have  a  good  time. 


122  ELEMENTS    OF    GERMAN  [811 

geberbett  mufet  bu  gut  fd^iitteln;  bann  tDtrb  e§  brunten  ouf  ber 

5  gonaen  SSelt  ber  Wcn\d]en  fdjneien.  ^cnn  id)  bin  bie  bir  tDolf)I= 
befannte  grou  ©oHe/'^  SSon  ber^  Srau  ©olle  W^^  ha§>  Wab^ 
d)en  fd)on  fel^r  oft  gelfiort.  S)ie  Seute  fagten  bid  i3on  il^r,  @ute^< 
unb  ^ofe§. 

SSeil  bie  5IIte  il&m  fo  gut  gufprad^,'^  fafete  fic^  ha§>  90^dbd)eu 

10  ein  §er3  unb  tuiEigte  ein,  unb  begab  fid)  in  iljren  2)ienft.  ©§ 
bcforgte  oud)  Qlle§  gu  il&rer  giinalidjen  3wfi^iebcnl)eit  unb  fd)iit» 
telte  ii)x  ha^  grofee  Sett  tmmer  fo  getoaltig  auf,  ha^  bie  bielen 
gebern  trie  lauter  (Sd)neefIoden  umljerflogen.  ^afiir^  l^atte 
e§  and)  ein  gut€§  Seben  bei  i!)r,  befam  fein  bbfcS  SSort  unb  aHe 

15  ^age  ©efotteneS  unb  ©ebrateneS.^. 

9^un  tvav  e^  eine  gonse  B^itlang  bei  ber  olten  gran  ^olle; 
ha  tvath  ^§>  trourig  in  fcinem  ^eraen,  unb  ob  e§>  !)ier  gleid)"^  t)iel 
taufenbmal  beffer  tvai  al§>  au  ^aufe,^  fo  l^atte  e^  boc^  ein  grofeeS 
35erlangen  bal)in.    ©nblid)  merfte  eg,  ba^  e§  ^cimtoei^  wax,  unb 

20  fogte  3u  il)r:  „S(^  6obe  b€n  '^amrnex  nod)  §au§  gefriegt,  unb 
n^enn  es  mir  aud^  I)ier  nod^  fo  gut  gel^t,^  fo  fonn  id)  bod)  nidjt 
Idnger  bleiben."  S)ie  alte  grou  ^oEe  fogte:  „($§>  gefdEt  mir,^^ 
bafe  bn  tDicber  nad)  $Qufe  berlangft,  unb  meil  bu  mir  fo  treu 

311  ^ble  bit  ttI0|l6e!ttttttte  Srau  ^otte  =  Dame  Holle  well  known  to 
you — an  example  of  the  use  of  the  participle  as  adjective,  with  its 
object  (titr)  before  it.     See  App.  214. 

^ijer.  The  article  is  used  with  proper  nouns  to  express  familiarity. 
See  App.  100,  3. 

*  %ni  JU^Jraj^  =  spoke  encouragingly 

^  bdfut  =  in  return. 

^  ©ejottctteg  ttttti  ©eBrttteneg  =  (meat)  boiled  and  roasted.  Note  sub- 
stantive use  of  participial  adjective.     See  App.  217. 

■^  oB filci^  =  although — the  separation  is  colloquial. 

®Jtt  ^ttttfe  =  at  home.     See  App.  101. 

®  loettn fiC^t  =  however  well  off  I  am  here.     See  App.  142. 

^^  eg  0rf iittt  mir  =  it  pleases  me,  I  like  it. 


812-313] 


FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT 


123 


gebtent  fiaft,  fo  tiierbe  t(f)  btc^  felBer  JDteber  l^ittaufbringen/' 

25  ©ie  nQl)m  e§  barauf  bet  ber  rei^ten  $Qnb  unb  fiii^rte  eS  bor 

ein  grofee^  ^or.    S)q§  grofee  ^or  offnete  fie,  unb  aU  ha§>  fleine 

Tlahd)en  barunter  ftanb,  fiel  ein  getraltiger  (S5oIbregen,  unb 

QEe§  @oIb  blieb  an  tl)m  l^dngen,^^  fo  ha%  e§  iiber  unb  iiber 

babon  bebedt  tear.     „S)q^  foEfl  bn  Ijoben,  iDeil  bu  fo  fleifeig 

30  gctDefcn  bift",  \pmd)  hie  Qlte  grau  ^oHe  unb  gob  tl^m  an^  bie 

Derlorene  ^pule  toicber,  bie  t^m  in  ben  ticfen  33runn€n  gefaHen 

mar.     S^arauf  fd^Iofe  fie  ba§>  Zov,  unb  ba§>    fleinc  3P^dbd^en 

befonb  fid)  oben  auf  ber  olten  SSelt,  nidjt  todt  t)on  feiner 

Wuttev  §Qufe;  unb  qB  e§  in  ben  befannten  §of  fam,  fag  ber 

35  rote  ^al^n  ouf  bem  olten  ^runnen  unb  rief:   ,,^iferi!i,  unfre 

golbcnc  Sitngfrou  ift  iDieber  r)ic!"i2    Xa  ging  fie  ()inein  3u 

il)rer  bdfen  Tluttet,  unb  tueil  fie  fo  mit  ©olb  hebedi  anfam, 

irar  bie  bofe  99httter  fel)r  freunblid)  gegcn  fie. 

(<Bd)\u^  folgt.) 

3  1 2  Strong  Verbs 


to  betake  oneself 

ftd^  hzq^htn 

htc^a^  fic^ 

ft^  htQthtn 

to  obtain 

befotttmeu 

befam 

befommen 

to  boil 

fieben 

fott 

gefotten 

to  roast 

braten 

briet 

gebraten 

to  be 

fic^  befinben 

befanb  fic^ 

fid^  befimben 

to  sit 

fifeen 

fa6 

gefeffen 

to  arrive 

aufommen 

font  an 
Weak  Verbs 

angefommen 

shall 

foUeii 

to  demand  DertaugeiT 

to  consent 

)  eintoiHigen 

•to  lead 

fii^ren 

to  arrange  Beforgeit 

to  cover 

bebcden 

to  get 

!riegen 

313   "  hlith  m  i^m  Idngen  =  stuck  to  her. 
"  |le— archaic  form  of  Ijler. 


124  ELElVIENTO  OF  GERMAN  [814-816 

EXERCISES 

314  1.    28q^  itJirb  bQ^  a^iabc^en  Bet  ber  alien  grau  tun? 

2.  2ISq^  fagten  bte  Seute  Don  ber  iDunberbacen  olten  grau? 

3.  Surd)tete  m  boS  mahd)cn  fe^r  l3or  iljr?  2Barum  ntd)t? 

4.  ^a^  tat  ba§  9Wabrf)en  bei  ber  alten  Srau?  SSle  bel^anbelte 
biefe  ha§>  gute  9}Zab^en? 

5.  SSie  ging  e^  bem  fremben  a^dbd^en  na^  einiger  S^it? 

6.  2Sar  bie  alte  S^au  sorntg  ober  gufrleben? 

7.  SSaS  fiir  ^in  ^erg  f)atte  ba§  Mabd^en?  SBte  getgt  fid)  bo§ 
filer? 

8.  35Joburd)  tnor  bo§  $Retd)  ber  alten  grau  $oKe  l^on  ber  SSelt 
abgefdiloffen?  SBirb  ba^  Wdbdjen  X2tiiau^gel)en,  Wte  e§  fieretn= 
gefommen  tnar? 

9.  SBtrb  fie  je^t  nod^  immer  „\)a^  oriuc  9}labd&cn"  ^etgenV 
SSarum  nid^t? 

315  Fill  out: 

?J?ein  grofe geberbett  iDtrft  hn  fd)iitteln.    S)ie§  ift  ha^ 

flein §au§  ber  btr  tDofilbefannt  —  J^xau  §oKe.    Sie  5llt  — 

fprad)  bem  fletn  —  S!??dbd)cn  fefir  freunblid)  3U.    2!ie  Sebern  bes^ 

grofe ^die§>  trerben  auf  bie  SSelt  ber  gut —  2)^enfd)en  fliegen. 

©in  mddfttig —  ^or  t)erf(^Io6  ba^'>  fUeid)  ber  gut —  grau  §olIe,  bte 
ba§  ^or  fiir  ba§>  gefdilig —  9J^dbd)en  dffnete.  ©in  rot —  §al)n 
fan  auf  einem  tief —  ^runnen  unb  begriifete  unfere  golben — 
^ungfrou. 

Change  all  the  verbs  in  the  preceding  story  to  the  future 
tense.  •  .  , 

3 1 6  Translate:  1  The  obliging  girl  met  an  old  woman  who 
was  supporting  herself  on  a  crutch.     2.  '*Will  you  come  with 


817-318]  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  125 

me  and  make  my  large  beds  well  and  shake  my  feathers  thor- 
oughly?" said  the  old  woman.  3.  The  feathers  in  the  old 
woman's  feather-beds  are  snow  down  in  the  world  of  men. 
4.  This  is  probably  Frau  HoUe,  who  is  well  known  to  us. 

LESSON  32 

317  ^ic  ^ttulc  unb  bic  Srlci^igc 

(@d)tu6) 

^a§  gate  90^abrf)cn  cr3d()Ite  olleg,  tuaS  il^m  Begegnet  mar, 
unb  al§  bie  bo)c  SDhitter  ()orte,  trie  e§  3U  bem  iDunberbarcu 
9^cid)him  gcfoinmcn  tiinr,^  iDoIItc  fie  ber  I)nBlicC)en  imb  faulen 
%o6)itx-  baC'jelBe  grofec  %\M  Dcrfd)affen.    ^iefe  ftafelidjc  unb 

5  faule  ^od)ter  iniiBte'^  fid)  mid)  an  ben  tiefen,  fd)mar3en  ^runneti 
feljen  niib  fpiinien;  fie  ivarf  bie  fleine  Spnle  in  ben  bnnflen 
33rnnnen  nub  fprnng  fclber  ()inein.  3ic  fam,  uiie  bie  anbre, 
Quf  bie  fd)one  SBiefe  unb  ging  auf  bemfdlien  griinen  ^^^fabe 
tDeiter.    51B  fie  gu  bem  fd^tDaraen  93adofen  gelangle,  fd)rte  ha^ 

10  gebacfene  33rot  n^ieber:  ,,5rd),  giel)  mid)  I)erau§,  siel^  mid) 
I)eraug,  fonft  toerbe  id)  berbrennen;  \6)  Vm  fd)on  Icingft  oit^^gc* 
hadm\"  Die  gaule  aber  antrtiortete:  „5^)  i^^i^^  «iirf)  "irf)t 
fd)mnt3ig  mad)en!"  unb  ging  fort.  33alb  fam  fie  ju  bem  mad)= 
tigen  ^fpfelbanme;  ber  rief:   „M),  fd)iittle  mid),  fd)iittle  mid); 

i."^  meine  rotcn  ^Ipfcl  finb  aKe  mitcinanber'*  reif!"  8ie  antlnortete 
aber:  „2)a§  \aiii  mir  nid)t  cin!"'^  unb  ging  meiter.  ?(B  fie  Uor 
ber  Jvfcm  .<5olIe  .<pQn!$  fnm,  fiird)tetc  fie  fid)  nid)t,  meil  fie  Don 
i()rem  3toc!e  fd)on  ge()ort  I)attc,  nnb  Derbingte  fid)  if)r  gleid). 

318  ^  ttlie ttmr  =  ^^ow  she  had  attained  this  wealth. 

2  tier ^or^tfr — dat.  of  interest.    See  A  pp.  142. 

^  mufete  =  had  to. 

*  atte  miteinotttlfr  =  all  together  {not  altogether). 
^bftS •• .  riu  =  I  have  no  suoh  intention.      What  does   it    mean 
literally? 


120  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [319-320 

2Im  erften  ^age  tat  fie  fid)  grofee  ©etnolt  axij^  tear  fleifelg 

20  unh  folgte  ber  alten  5rau  ^oIIe>  lD€nn  fie  i^r  ettva§>  fagte; 
benn  fie  hadjte  an  ha§>  biele  Oolb.  5tm  gmetten  ^age  fing  fie 
id)on  an  3U  faulensen,  am  britteti  nod^  me^ir ;  ba  iDoUte  fie  mor- 
gen§^  gar  tiid)t  auffte^en.  ©ie  tnad)te  aud)  ber  guten  grau 
^olle  ba§>  mdd)tig  grofee  33ett  fd)Ie(^t  unb  fd)iittclte  €§  ntd&t. 

25  <De^  JDarb  bie  alte  grau  §oEe  balb  miibe  unb  fagte  bem  fau» 
len,  unnii^en  ®ing  ben  Sienft  auf.^  !3)ie  gaw^e  tear  e§  tool^I 
gufrieben  unb  ertoartete  nun  ben  Befannten  unb  gett)iinfd}ten 
©olbregen.  ®ie  alte  Srau  ^olle  aber  fiil^rte  ha^  bumme  SO^ab- 
d)en  Bi§  an  ba§>  grofee,  fd^tDarge  ^or.    SIB  bie  So^Ie  barunter 

30  ftanb,  fiel  ein  Sf^egen  t)on  fd^trargem  ^ed^  ftatt  be§>  ertoarteten 
@oIbe§^  auf  if)r  bummed  §au^t  unb  il)ren  faulen  ^or^er.  2)a 
fam  nun  bie  gaule  gans  mit  foIjIfditDarjem  $ed^  iiberfd^iittct 
nad)  §auf€.  2)er  rote  §a]&n  fc^rie:  „^iferi!i,  unfre  fc^mu^ige 
Sungfrau  ift  tx)ieber  §ie!"    S)a§  fdjmarse  $ed^  iDirb  an  il^r 

35  l)angen  bleiben,  il^r  gan^eg  Seben  lang.^^ 

3  1 9  Strong  Verbs 

to  occur  einfatten  fiel  ein  eingefaHeri 

to  begin  aitf  aitgen         fing  an  aitgef  angeu 

to  get  up  aufftel)eu         ftanb  auf        aufgeftanben 

Weak  Verbs 

to  procure  Detf  d^affcu  to  be  lazy  f  aulengeu 

to  get        gelaugen  to  wish  tuiinfc^en 

to  hire  out  tjerbiugen 

320    ^tdi tttt  =  exerted  great  control  over  herself. 

^  lttOtgen§  =  in  the  morning — adverbial  genitive. 
®  fagte  belt  ^tenfi  auf  =  dismissed  from  her  service. 
« ®0Hie«-gen.  with  ftatt  (=  attftatt).     See  App.  126. 
^^X^t lang  =  all  her  life  long. 


321-323]  FUTURE  AND  FUXaRE  PERFECT  127 

32 1  EXERCISES 

1.  Sefd)retben  ©te  hie  Beiben  Zbd}tet  bet  SStoe! 

2.  ©radl^Ien  ©ie  JDa§  ben  3Jldbc^en  I)eim  ©pinnen  Begegnete! 

3.  Wie  unterfd^teb  fid^  bog  SSerJ^oIten  ber  Betben  in  bem  9let(f) 
ber  grau  §oll€? 

4.  SSie  ging  e§  ben  Beiben  bort?  33eid^retBen  3ie  jebe  ^ritfung, 
bie  fie  ha  3u  Beftelfien  Ijatten! 

5.  3Sie  famen  bie  Beiben  I^eim? 

6.  Wlxi  tveld)en  SSorten  Begriifete  fie  ber  ^oiin? 

7.  ^efd^reiBen  ©ie  ben  SlpfelBaum,  bejt  33Q(fofen,  baB  $au§  ber 
grau  ^olle! 

§ier  ift  ein  !Ieinc§  ©ebid^t  iiBer  biefe  grou  ^oHe,  ba§>  in 
2^cutfrf)Ianb  feljr  Befannt  ift.  Sefen  (©ie  e§  unb  fe^en  (5ie  e§  in 
^^rofa  um,  mit  fo  t)ielen  5Ibieftit)en  luie  moglidf). 

322  groit    ^uHc 

©d^neeflocfen  n)irBeIn  nm  nnb  um; 
Sm  (Garten  Blu^t  bie  SSei^nQd^t^BIum' ; 
gran  ^oHe  fal^rt  im  Sorf  l&erunt  — 
©d^nurre,  D^dbd^en,^  fd^nurrel 

2)er  a^onb  Blidft  au§>  hem  3BoIfengran§, 
SBeift  i^r  hen  SSeg  gn  jebem  ^au^, 
®q6  fie  bie  flinfften  finb^t  an^  — 
(sd^nurre,  Sldbd^en,  fd^nurrel 


323    ^  fldbli^en— addressed  to  the  spinning  wheel  with  which  tradition 
associates  Frau  HoUe. 


128  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [324-325 

33emerft2  fie  tDO'*^  nod)  einen  (Serein, 
grau  §oIIe  l^dlt^  unb  fd)aut  l)tnein; 
S)te^  tnunter  brel^'n,  belol^nt  fie  fern  — 
©cf)nurre,  9^abd^en,  fd)nurre! 

aRartitt  ®reif. 

Write  a  prose  version  of  the  poem  with  verbs  in  the  future 
tense. 

LESSON  33 

324  GRAMMAR  REVIEW 

1.  The  future  tense  is  formed  of  tticrben  +  present  infinitive. 

2.  The  future  perfect  is  formed  of  tticrben  +  perfect  infin- 
itive.    Cf.  App.  67,  II.,  and  76. 

3.  The  future  and  future  perfect  tenses  are  used  idiomatically 
to  express  probability.     App.  179. 

4.  The  infinitive  always  comes  last  in  the  sentence. 
App.  92. 

5.  Adjectives  are  not  inflected  when  they  are  used  predi- 
catively  or  when  they  follow  the  noun. 

6.  Attributive  adjectives  when  they  precede  a  noun  are 
inflected  in  three  ways,  according  as  they  are  preceded  by  the 
definite  article  (or  demonstrative  or  interrogative  pronouns) ; 
the  indefinite  article  (or  the  possessives) ;  or  by  no  limiting 
word  whatever.     See  App.  38-41. 

7.  The  general  principle  that  underlies  adjective  declension 
is :  Some  one  word  before  the  noun  must  show  by  its  form, 
the  gender,  number,  and  case.  After  such  a  word,  the  adjec- 
tive has  the  weak  ending  (c  or  en).  When  not  preceded  by 
such  a  word,  the  adjective  has  the  strong  ending. 

325  ^23emerft   fie  — inverted  order,  because  ttietttt   is  omitted.     See 
App.  188. 

3  )))p  =  anywhere. 

*pU  =  stops. 

^i\t  (=tte.  Me)  =  those  who. 


326]  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  129 

326  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

/.  Give  future  and  future  perfect  paradigms  of:  \6)Xt\^tn, 
gei)en,  !ommen,  fein,  l^alten,  bleiben. 

//.  Change  to  future  and  future  perfect:  %\z  arme  ^^rau 
\)Oii  tange  auf  i^ren  @of)n  getDartet,  ^er  junge  @o^n  ift  alt 
gett)orben»  ©r  ift  biete  Qa^re  in  ber  grembe  gebUeben.  ^er  alte 
^ater  ift  au§  (5Jram  geftorben.  %\z  SCRutter  ^at  bie  §offmmg  uic^t 
tjerloren.  ^ie  SQlater  unb  ^iinftler  I)abeu  ein  prdd)tige§  geft  gefeiert. 
@ie  finb  lange  gufammen  geblieben.  SDann  finb  fie  olle  nad^  §aufe 
gegangen. 

///.  Translate:  1.  The  old  story  of  Dame  HoUe  will  always 
please  the  little  children.  2.  The  wicked  stepmother  will  have 
died  before  (et)e)  the  good  little  girl  returns.  3.  The  two 
little  children  were  spinning  by  the  deep  well.  4.  They  will 
drop  the  shuttle  into  the  black  water  of  the  dark  well.  5.  An 
old  woman  will  be  very  kind  to  them,  and  they  will  not  be 
afraid.  6.  The  red  cock  will  crow:  "Golden  maiden!  good 
child!"  7.  When  she  returns  she  will  be  covered  with  gold. 
8.  Her  wicked  stepmother  will  treat  her  well,  because  she  will 
be  rich.  9.  The  ripe  apples  called  from  the  tree:  "We  are 
ripe,  will  you  not  shake  us?"  10.  The  little  girl  had  a  good 
heart. 

IV.  Decline  in  the  singular  and  plural  all  the  adjectives 
and  their  nouns  in  II.  and  III. 


130  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [327-329 


CHAPTER    VI 

REFLEXIVE  VERBS 

LESSON  SI^ 

327  Some  verbs  in  German  require  as  direct  object  a  per- 
sonal pronoun  which  refers  back  to  the  subject.  The  verb  and 
the  pronoun  together  express  the  thought.     For  example : 

fid)  freuen  =  to  rejoice 
fic^  fd^dmeu  =  to  be  ashamed 
ftc^  eriunern  =  to  remember 
fid^  Befinnen  =  to  recollect 

328  The  reflexive  pronouns  in  1st  and  2d  pers.  sing,  and  pi. 
arc  the  same  as  the  simple  personal  pronouns  in  the  dative  and 
accusative;  in  3rd  pers.  sing,  and  pi.  the  reflexive  pronoun  is 
fi(i^,  for  both  dative  and  accusative.  .'^ 

In  independent  clauses  this  pronoun  always  comes  immedi- 
ately after  the  inflected  part  of  the  verb. 

329  AccusATivB  Dative 

to  rejoice  to  imagine 

Singular 

ti^  freuc  mi(|  i^  bitbc  mlr  etn 

bu  freuft  bi(^  bu  bilbeft  bit  eiu 

cr  frcut  fl(^  cr  bitbet  fi^  ein 

Plural 

ftiir  freuen  unS  ttiir  bilben  tttt0  ein 

ii^r  freut  cui^  i^r  bilbet  vx^  ein 

fie  freuen  fi^  fie  bilben  fir^  ein 

@ie  freuen  fi(^  (Sic  bilben  fi^  ein 


830-332] 


REFLEXIVE  VERBS 


131 


330 


^u  SJcrtrrtcn 


10 


15 


Siuet  ^inber  gotten  M  int  SSalbe  Dertrrt.  2)a  fogte  ber 
fleine  £naBe  3U  bem  Jletncn  $D^dbd)en:  „©rinnerft  bu  bid)  benn 
gar  ntd^t,  tcol^er  tt)tr  gefommen  ftnb?"  ©r  fd)dmte  [id),  ba|5 
er  eg  nic^t  iDufete  unb  barum  fdftalt  er  feine  arme  fleine  ©efo^ir^ 
tin.  ®iefe  rief  qu^:  „5I(^,  fd)ilt  mid^  nid^t,  id&  fiir d)te  mid^  fo 
fd^on^  entfe^Iid^.  Safe  un§  tDcnigfteng  einanber  troften,  bann 
toerben  toir  un§  Jjielleidit  Befinnen,  n)o!)er  trir  gefommen  finb." 

^Bolb  famen  fie  an  eine  moofige  ^iitte.  ^nn  freuten  fie 
fid^,  benn  fie  glauBten  SO^enfdften  gu  finben.  ^od}  fie  l^atten 
fid&  geirrt.  §ier  n)oI)nten  brei  fonberBare  SSefen,  hie  fid) 
SSalbrtjeiBIein  nannten.  (Sie  iroren  flein  unb  flinf  unb  flei« 
beten  fid^  in  griine§  Tloo^,  ©rft  fiird)tete  fid)  ha§>  fleine  a^iib- 
d^en,  bod)  ber  ^naBe,  ber  fid^  gem  feine§  Tlute§>'^  riil^mte,  trat 
Be^ergt  bor  fie  r)in  unb  Bat  bie  2BaIbtt)eiBIein  urn  5lu§funft. 

®iefe  traren  gerabe  Bet  red)t  guter  Saune.  ®ie  Begniigten 
fid&  bamit,  ben  ^nbern  gtoet  9ldtfel  aufgugeBen.  „2Senn  iBr 
biefe  loft,  bann  iDerben  mir  eu6f  ben  red^ten  SSeg  meifen!"  fag= 
ten  fie. 


(iJortfe^ung  fol 

3t) 

> 

331 

Strong  Verbs 

to  scold 

fd^elten 

fc^att 

gefc^olten 

to  let 

taffcn 

Uefe 

gelaffen 

to  give 

aufgeben 

gab  auf 

aufgegeben 

to  guess 

raten 

riet 

geraten 

to  direct, 

show  njeifeu 

tDie§ 

getuiefen 

332    ^  fo  f^Ott  =  without  that. 

2  feittCg  attttte^  —  gen.  with  ^ij^  rit^mett.    See  App.  124. 
'  CUd^  —  dat.  of  indirect  ob j. 


132  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [333-334 

Weak  Verbs 


to  know  (intellec- 

toiffen, tDugte,    ge== 

to  comfort 

\xd)  troften 

tually) 

tpitgt* 

to  lose  one's  way 

fic^  tjerirren,  t)erirrte 

to  be  mistaken  \x^  irrett 

fid^,  ftc^  t)erirrt 

to  be  called 

fic^  nenneu 

to  remember 

\xd)  erinnern 

to  dress 

fid)  fleiben 

to  be  ashamed 

\xd)  fc^amen 

to  boast  of 

fid^  riiiimen 

to  fear 

fic^  fiird^ten 

to  be  content- 
ed with 

ftc^  begnugen 

to  solve 

lofen 

EXERCISES 

333  1.    SSqs  r^aben  hie  flettten  Slinber  getart? 

2.  SSie  bel^onbelte  ber  fleine  ^nobe  ha§>  90^db(i)en? 

3.  Hm  tDa§>  bittet  boS  fletne  3ll?Qbd)en  ben  ^mhen?  2Sa§  toufelen 
bie  Qtmen  ^inber  md)t? 

4.  2Sa§  tun  bonn  bie  Mnber? 

5.  ©efd^rciben  (Bie  hie  SSalbtceiblein  unb  il)r  §au§! 

6.  2Bq§  n^ar  ber  Unlerfd^ieb  iti  bem  SSerl^oIten  beg  Sluoben  unb 
bem  be§  2)^abd&en§? 

7.  aSerben  bie  SBoIbtceiblein  ben  ^inbern  l^elfen? 

334  Translate:  1.  I  have  lost  my  way  in  the  deep  dark 
forest, and  I  shall  ask  the  woodsprites  to  show  it  to  me.  2.  He 
scolded  the  little  girl.  3.  They  will  comfort  each  other  [fid^] 
4.  Guess  these  two  riddles  for  me,  and  I  shall  show  you 
the  way.  5.  Do  you  not  remember  [fid^  befinnen]  whence 
we  came?  6.  I  have  forgotten  it.  7.  He  was  afraid,  but  he 
liked  to  boast  of  his  courage,  so  he  stepped  forward  boldly. 

8.  I  am  afraid.  You  are  afraid.  He  is  afraid.  They 
will  rejoice.  9.  The  little  boy  will  say  to  the  little  girl,  '*Do 
you  not  remember  the  way  we  came?"  10.  They  had  lost  their 
way  and  they  were  frightened. 

*  Compare  fentten=to  know,  in  the  sense  of  "to  be  acquainted  with." 


335-330] 

REFLEXIVE  VERB^ 
LESSON  85 

;                           133 

CARDINALS  AND  ORDINALS 

335 

Cardinal  Numbers 

1,  ein^ 

11,  elf 

21,  ein  unb  atDon^ig 

2,  3tDet 

12,  ^xom 

22,  smei  unb  atDan^ig 

3,  bret 

13,  breiae^n 

30,  breifeig 

4,  bier 

14,  bierge!)!! 

40,  bteraig 

5,  fiinf 

15,  funf3€l)n 

50,  fiinfaig 

6,  fed)§ 

16,  fed^sel&n 

60,  fed^aig 

*     7,  fieben 

17,  ficBgeSn 

70,  fiebaig 

8,  Qd^t 

18,  od^tselfin 

80,  atfitaig 

9,  Tteun 

19,  neunaefin 

90,  ncunaig 

10,  ael^n 

20,  ait^ansig 

100,  fiunbert 

1,000 

taufenb                    1,000,000  cine  SDiillion 

1899,  ein  toufenb  adjt  Ifiunbert  neun  imb 

ncunaig  obcr  Q(^t3cr)n 

]&unbert  nciin  imb  neunjig. 

S(^  adl^Ie:  ein§,  atuei,  brei  u.  f.  to. 

336  Sq§  ift  ein  2^ann 
eine  grau 
tm  ^inb 

2)a§  [inb     atoei  SD^dnner 
atcei  grouen 
atuei  ^inber 

Observe  that  cittS  when  used  with  a  noun  drops  the  g 
and  is  inflected  like  the  indefinite  article.  The  other  cardinals 
have  no  inflection. 


134 


337 


EL 

EMENTS 

OF  GERMAN                       r337-339 

Ordinals 

tin^ 

ber,  bie, 

ba§  crjlc 

brci 

fi 

II     Sh'eitc 
„    tirittc 

t)ier 

n 

fi 

„     tiiertc 

fiinf 

neun§e^n 

gtDanjtg 

fuufunb^tuan^tg 

i)unbert 

ft 
n 
n 
n 

'1 

n 

1 
1 
1 

.     fiinftc 

„     sttjauatgflc 

„     fuufuubatDaitjigjlc 

„     ^imbertftc 

338  Observe:   1.  That  bet  Ctfic  and  bcr  brtttc  are  irregular. 

2.  That  all  other  ordinals  are  formed  regularly  by  the  addi- 
tion of  a  suffix. 

3.  That  from  1-10,  inclusive,  this  suffix  is  t,  from  20  on  the 
suffix  is  ft.    The  ordinals  are  regularly  declined  (cf.  App.  48.) 

An  old  form  of  jtucit  was  attbcr  (other)  which  is  still 
found  in  set  phrases  as  anberti)alb  =  one  and  one-half,  i.  e.,  the 
second  less  one-half,  ber  anbere,  the  other,  the  second. 

339  giiWcn  Sie  t)on  fed)3e^n  bi§  jtnanstg!  3Sa§  ift  mel)r, 
[ieben  ober  fieB3eI)n?  2St€  t)iel  mel^ir  ift  e^?  SSq^  ift  iDeniger,  a^i 
ober  Qd)t3tg?    SSie  biel  meniger? 

3toct,  bier,  fcd}^  flub  gcrabc  S^Wcn;  einS,  brct,  [icbcn  finb 
ungcrabe  3cil)Icn.  3BqS  fiir  S'^Bto  finb  bie  folgenbcn:  1,  9,  11, 
156,  58,  75,  89,  124? 

3Sier  unb  slnel  ift  fed^S,  stnel  tjon  ferf)§  ift  t)ter.  2Bq§  ift  7  t)on 
27?  8  bon  100?   10  t)on  100?  1  t)on  100?  2  t)on  80? 

3X4=12,  brei  mal  dier  ift  3Ji3oIf,  fed^§  mal  fieben  ift  stnei  unb 
t)icr3ig.  2Bte  btel  ift  8X9?  10X12?  ©ogeni  Sie  W^  ^xxmal- 
cins^    t)on  5  t)er!  bon  7!  i^on  9! 

2)rei  in  fed)^  ift  stoei.  '^vod  in  t)ier3el)n  ift  ficben.  ©ieben  in 
t)ier3e]^n  ift  ^Xozx.  D^eun  in  brei  unb  fed)3ig  ift  ficben.  3Sie  t)iel 
ift  8  in  48?   9  in  36?   4  in  84? ^ 

^  ^ftfttflen  =  recite. 

^btt§  ^inmalctn8  =  multiph'catiou  table. 


340-341]  REFLEXIVE  VERBS  135 

340  2)ie  a^erirrlctt 

(fjortfelung) 

®Q§  erfte  ^lotfel  loutete:  2Bie  biele  ©ternlem  ftel^en  am 
§immel§3elt?  2)te  Somber  sogen  ftc^  ein  toenig  guriiii  urn 
fid^  3U  Befinnen.  ^otte  nid^t  ber  fiefirer  in  ber  ©d^ule  babon 
gefprod^en?   ©ic  erinnerten  fid^  bunM,i  bafe  er  etmoS  gefagt 

5  I)Qtte,  oBer  ber  fleine  ^itobc  I^attc  fic^  5u  ber  3^it  gerabe  mlt 
ciiicr  fummcnbcn  SItcgc  amiifiert,  uub  ba^^  flciitc  Sll^abdOcn  Wat 
ciit  menig  ciugefdjlafcn. 

2)a  befam  ber  SInabe  plo^Iid)  emeu  guten  ©tnfaH,  ben  crftcn 
an  biefem  ungIMIid)cn  ^agc:    ,Miv  luoHcn  luartcn,  hh5  bie 

10  Sterne  l^erouBfommen,  bann  toerben  toir  fie  3dI)Icn!"  „^a,  ha^ 
iDerben  n)ir  inn,  ctber  id]  fann  nur  bi§  I)iinbert  3dl)len!"  ,/3d)a= 
bet-  nid^t^!  ^d)  fann  bi§  toufenb  3dl3len  unb  noc^  taujcnb 
fommt  gleid^  im  33ud)e  eine  SO^iHion;  iia§>  ift  fel^r,  fefir  t)icl. 
3Ber^  eine  SO^iHion  l&at,  l^eifet  a^iHiondr,  ber  ift  bid  nnb  fd^rt 

I'V  bierfpdnnig.  33effere^  gibt  e^''  gar  nid^t  in  ber  SSelt."  Sa§ 
a)Jdbd)en  iDnnbcrte  fid)  iiber  biefe  2Sei^^I)eit  iljresi  gnten  SlamC' 
raben  unb  fagte  nid)t^  meljr. 

Syiun  fe^tcn  fie  fid)  unter  bie  alte  ©id)e  unb  n^artetcn  anf 
bie  ©terne.    ^od)  bk  famen  nod)  langc  nid&t.    2)a  finb  fie  ein= 

20  gefd^Iafen,  erft  ba§>  9Wdbd)en,  bann  ber  ^nabe.    Sie  I)atten  aUe 

beibe  einen  n)unberlid^en  ^raum. 

(f^ortfe^ung  folgt) 

341  iilttttm=  faintly. 

^  fii^attet  =  bttS  f^abet — colloquial  omission  of  neuter  subject. 

3  mer  =  he  who.     See  App.  169a. 

*8tftt  c8  =  there  is.  @8  glftt  (sing,  and  plur.)  takes  the  accusative 
and  denotes  the  existence  of  an  object,  or  objects  in  general,  as: 
®#  9IM  titele  ^dume.  @^  ifi  and  its  plural  eS  flnb  denote  the  existence 
of  an  object  or  objects  within   certain   local  or  temporal  limits,  as: 

^^  flnti  tJrei  Siittme  in  biejcm  ©ttrtrn. 


136 
342 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 
Strong  Verbs 


[34'i-345 


towithdraw  ftc^  gurucf^te^en      ^og  fid^  ^uxM      \\d)  gururfgejogeu 
to  receive     befommeit  befam  be!ommeu 


to  solve       lofen 

to  sound,  be  laittCU 


Weak  Verbs 

to  buzz  fummeu 

to  amuse  oneself     fic^  amiiftereu 


343 


EXERCISES 
1.  SBag  tvax  fein  erfter  (^infatt? 


2.  SSie  hjeit  fonnte  ta^  SOldbc^en  nur  gdl^Ien? 

3.  fS^a§>  ift  bie  nci^fte  3aI)I  tm  S3u^e  na(^  100? 

4.  2Ble  befc^reibt  ber  ^nabe  ben  TtiUiomic? 

344  Translate:  1.  The  first  riddle  was  very  difficult.  2.  The 
second  thing  that  the  children  did  was  to  go  to  sleep.  3.  A 
millionaire  has  a  great  carriage  (ber  SBagen)  and  drives  a  four- 
horse  team.  4.  The  children  will  withdraw  and  the  first  child 
will  receive  an  inspiration.     5.  The  girl  will  go  to  sleep. 


LESSON  36 
FRACTIONALS 

345  J  =  \i(i%  ^rittet 

i  =  "^a^  ^iertel 
^  =  ein  giinftet 
\  =  ein  8erf)ftel 

Note  that  the  suffix  fcl  forms  fractionals.  SDrittel,  ^iertet, 
giinftel,  (Sec^ftel,  etc. ,  are  neuter  nouns. 

An  exception  to  this  is:  bie  §alfte  (the  half).  Tlie  adjective 
form  of  this  noun  is  ^olb,  which  has  the  regular  adjective 
declension. 


346-349]  REFLEXIVE  VERBS  137 


345            half  an  apple 

the  half  of  an  apple 

ein  ^alber  5l|)fel 

bie  §atfte  eine^  5IpfeI§ 

eineg  ^alhtn  ^\)^tU 

ber      „ 

einent  ^alben  3(pfel 

ber     „ 

einen  ^alben  5l|)fel 

bie      „ 

^alU  tpfet 

bie  |)d(ften  eine§  5(pfet 

^Iber  S^fel 

*^er       „        „        „ 

^arben  Spfein 

ben 

^albe  ^pfel 

'^i^ 

347  5d)  ^dbe  feinen  gonaen  5IpfeI,  id)  I)Qbe  nur  ein  ^rittel. 
SSie  t3iele  SSiertel  modjen  ein  ©angeg?  SSenn  man  ein  SSiertel 
nimmt,  tuie  biele  bleiben?  2)rei  35iertel  bleiben.  §Qft  bu  einen 
gonaen  5l^fel?  D^ein,  id)  l^abe  nur  einen  ]f)alben.  SSo  ift  bie 
onbere  $dlfte?  SP^eine  ©d^iDefter  I)Qt  bie  anbere  $dlfte,  id^  l^obe 
fie  i!)r  gegeben. 

348  ^ic  95crtrrtctt 

(Sortfefeung) 

Sm  ^roum  erfd)ien  if)nen^  il)r  alter  Sel^rcr.  5tber  er  ^atte 
fid)  tierdnbert.  (Jr  \vav  ^treimal  fo  bid  aU  gen)dl)nlid)  unb 
an\iati  eine§  §ute§2  trug  er  eine  grofee  ^^ed^enmafd^ine  auf 
bem  ^op\e.  ^-arauf  ftanben  aU  hie  QaW^t  aE  bie  33riid)e,  unb 
5  ha^^  ganae  (^inmalein§.  ^er  Sefirer  ful^r  t)ierf|:)dnnig,  tvie  ein 
3WiUiondr,  aber  anftatt  ^ferbe  r)atte  er  ^tvei  ^ometen  mit 
fcurigen  ©ditDdnjen,  unb  fein  SSagen  Wax  ber  grofee  Sdr. 

%n^  feine  Meibung  tvax  fcl)r  fonberbar.    ^g^nv  §dlfte''^  flei= 

349  ^  X^nttl.  In  the  inverted  order  the  subject  immediately  follows 
tlie  verb,  but  an  unemphatic  pronoun  or  adverb  may  intervene,  ^C^t 

frctttc  flri^  bag  flctnc  2RttlJ(^ctt. 

^  eittC§  ^Uteg,  gen.  with  ttttftatt.     See  App.  126. 
^gur  ^alftC  =  one  half. 


138  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [860 

bete  er  fid)  in  &olb  ,unb  3iir  anbcrcn  ^dlfte  in  8ilbcr.  SobeH 

10  tvai  fein  I^alber  Uop\  mtt  ©ternen  befat.  Xie  ^inber  tnunbcr- 
ten  fid)  fel)r  iiber  ir)n.  2)od^  frcuten  fie  fid),  aB  er  freunblid) 
Uid^elte  unb  gong  lieb^  mit  il)nen  fl^rad).  „92un,  fbnnt  il)r  ntd)t 
rcd)nen?"  fragtc  er,  ^ilir  l)aU  bod)  fo  tiid)tigen  XInterridjt 
ger)Qbt,  befinnt  end)  bod)!" 

15  9?un  gob  er  i[)nen  ©j:empel  auf,  nnb  fie  red)neten  fie  olle 
au§.  „SSie  titel  ift  brei  fiebjeftntel  oon  neun  I)iinbert  unb  neun- 
unbncunsig?  SSenn  ein  ^onig  brei  9J?itIionen  ©olboten  l)at 
unb  er  berliert  erft  hk  ^alfte,  bann  ein  Drittel  unb  anient  nod^ 
ad)t  l^unbert  ac^tunbad)t3ig,  mic  tiiele  bleiben  iibrig?"    Sie 

20  .<ilinber  tDunberten  fid^  felbft  iiber  bie  3d)ncEigfeit,  mit  bcr 
fie  ha^^  olle^  au5red)neten. 

S)a  Iad)elte  ber  Sel)rer,  noftm  fid)^'  bie  golbcne^  33riIIe  ah, 
3og  fid^^  bie  filbernen  8d)ul)e  qu§  unb  I)oIte  barau^>  ein  mcid)tig 
grofeeS   ©titdf  ^$a):)ter.     ^arouf  ftonben   un3dl)lige  ^$un!tc. 

35  ^iefe  bilbet^n  lange  S'^ei^en.  Sie  erfte  'tRei^e  tvav  noc^  gan3 
beutlid),  bie  jtneite  fonnte  man  faum  lefen,  aber  bet  ben  anberen 
t)erging  einem  §bren  unb  ©el^en.^  „©o",  fogte  ber  Se^rer, 
„ba  il^x  eud)  nun  fo  fc^bn  auf  ha§>  ^o^fred)nen  berftel^t,  fo  n)iK 
xd&  eud)  ]&elfen.    ^eht  bte§  ben  2SQlbn)eibIein,  fogt  il^nen,  ,,fo 

30  t)tel€  $un!te  auf  bent  Ropier  ftel&en,  fo  t)iele  ©terne  gibt  e§  tm 

^itnniel." 
(@d)tufe  tolgt) 

350    *  bttbei  =  in  addition. 

5  (if J  =  lovingly,  kindly. 

^^^  bie  .  . .  S3rtne=  his  glasses,  dat.  of  possession.     See  App.  144. 

^  golbcn — note  suffix  ett  to  form  adjectives  from  nouns  of  material. 
Cf.  jllftcm.  In  analogy  with  fllbcrtt  are  formed  l^oljent  (wooden)  and 
fltttfettt  (glass.) 

^Uetglng  .  .  .  Sc^eit  =  one  grew  dizzy  (literally,  all  sense  of  hear- 
ing and  of  sight  passed  away.)  \ 


351-363]  REFLEXIVE  VERBS  139 

35  I  Strong  Verbs 

to  appear       erfc^eineit  erfc^ien  erfc^ienen 

to  draw  off      an^k\)tn  5og  an^  au^gejogeit 

to  understand  fic^  Uerfte!f)eit     ijcrftaub  fid)      fic^  tjerftanben 

Weak  Verbs 

to  change         fic^  t)erdnbern         to  smiie    lad^etn 

to  sow  bef  den*        -  to  be  abie  !omten,  !ouute,  ge!oitnt 

to  be  astonished  ftd^  ttJUUberU  to  count     red^ueu 

to  rejoice  ftc^  f  reueu  to  form     bilbeu 

EXERCISES 

352  1.    Sefd^reiben  ©ie  ben  2cl)rer! 

2.  SKarum  erfd^ien  er  ben  ^inbern  aU  SO^tGiondr? 

3.  33efd)reiben  Sie  feine  ^^3ferbe  unb  fctncn.2Saaen! 

4.  2Sq^  Ijat  er  bie  ^inber  gefragt? 

5.  2Bq§  fiir  ©rcmpcl  I)Qt  er  ir)neu  aufgegeben? 
G.  3Bic  red)neten  bie  ^liuber? 

7.  SSoriiber  !)oBen  fie  fid)  getounbertV 

8.  2Sie  §Qt  er  fie  belofint? 

9.  Sefd)retben  Sie  bog  ^^3Q^:)ter,  bag  er  f)erau§5og! 

10.  SSa§  tDor  bie  erfte  3lnttDort? 

11.  28ie  mar  feine  33riEe?  2Sa§  fiir  ©c^u^e  l)aite  er?  Sft  etn 
SO^effer  golben  ober  filbern?  2Sa§  ift  ^olsern?  SBog  ift 
tDoKen?  33ilben  Sic  Slbjeftitie  aii§>:  <Seihe,  "^apkv,  ^ols, 
@oIb,  ©ilber,  ©la^. 

353  Translate:  1.  He  wore  his  silver  spectacles  and  golden 
shoes.  2.  The  children  will  be  surprised  at  (iiber)  his 
appearance.  3.  He  took  off  his  glass  shoes  and  his  golden 
spectacles.     4.  There  are  as  many  stars  are  in  the  sky  as  there 

*  ]^c|at  =  studded. 


140  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [354-355 

are  silver  dots  on  this  half  of  the  paper.  5.  Do  the  diligent 
little  children  know  the  multiplication  table?  6.  Which  half  of 
his  hat  was  silver  and  which  half  was  golden?  7.  The  old 
teacher  of  the  lost  children  had  changed  very  (much).  8.  He 
smiles  kindly,  and  gives  them  examples.  9.  He  came  in  a 
wagon,  which  was.  the  Great  Bear.  10.  He  was  driving  four 
horses.     He  had  driven  a  long  way. 


LESSON  87 

354  ^ie  aScrirrtctt 

(SrfiruB) 
®le  SSalblDeiblein  tDoren  fcl)r  erftaunt  bariiber.  ®a  rief 
ha%  etne^:  „&  fdKt  mtr  ein,^  ha"^  \mx  nod)  etn  9^atfcl  511 
fteHen  iiaBen.  %l\o^  ha%  a^i^eite  ^ai\tl  ift  foIgenbeS:  ,,38ic 
lange  bauert  e§,  urn  bte  gange  3SeIt  gu  retten?"  2)iefe  atoeite 
5  grage  f(^ien  ebenfo  fdjtDer  tuie  bie  erfte,  ho6)  bad)ten  fie:  ,,©5 
QxW  iDolf)!  nod)  einen  5tu§rt)eg/'  @ie  sogen  fid)  iDieber  nad) 
bem  SSoIbe  guriic!,  legten  fid)  nteber  unb  ftrengten  fic^  an,  um 
red)t  gut  nad^gubenfen.    2)oc5  e§  fiel  il^nen  nic^t^  eln. 

S)a  fielen  il^nen  enbltc^  bie  Suglein  3u.  Stud)  bie^mal  trcium- 

10  ten  fie  ettnaS  jel^r  ©onberbare^.^  2)od^  tear  e§  nic^t  ber  (Sd)ul= 

Ie!)rer,  fonbern  €tne  f)errlid^e  grou  mit  einer  golbenen  ^rone, 

'tAz  gu  tl^nen  font.    2;a§  toor  grou  ©onne.    ^\^  erfonnten  fie 

355  ^  iiaS  eine  =  one.      Note  weak   inflection  of  cin  after  def.  art. 
See  App.  43,  44. 

^ti  fiillt  wit  Cttt  —  note  impersonal  verb  with  dative.  See  App. 
249. 

3  jlljo  =  well  then. 

*  eS  9iBt  tUOl^l  =  there  is  surely. 

^SOttbcrbarcS — note  strong  declension  after  the  indeclinable  pro- 
noun etttiaS,  with  which  it  is  in  apposition.     See  App.  43,  4. 


356-357]  REFLEXIVE  VERBS  141 

fogleic^,  benn  fo  eine  gtBt  e§  nur  etnmal  in  ber  SBelt.  ®ie 
fagte:    „©§  tut  mir  mrfltd)  f€l)r  lelb^  urn  eu(f),  tl^r  £inbcr. 

15  S)oc^  t(f)  tviU  end)  I^elfen.  SSifet  il^r,  mie  t)iele  ©tunben  e^> 
bauert  U§>  tc^  einmol  um  bte  SSelt  reife?"  „5o!"  fdjrieen  Beibe 
^inber  laut.  „®a§  l^at  un§  bcr  2e!)rer  er3Ql)It.  5IHe  i^ierunb- 
glranatg  ©tunben  fal^ren  ®ie  einmal  mit  xr)ren  fd^onen  ^ferben 
um  hie  2SeIt,  ad^,  nel^men  8ie  un§>  hod)  etnmal  mit!"    ^a 

20  Iod)te  bte  ©onne  unb  fang  il)nen  ha§>  folgenbe  Sieb  t)or: 


356  ^te  ffctncn  Stcrnlctti 

Unb  bte  ©onnc,  fie  mac^te  ben  tceiten  9titt 
nmbieSSelt;        \ 

Unb  bie  (Sternlcin  fprod^en:    „SSir  rci(cn  mit 
Um  bie  SSelt!'' 
25  Unb  bie  ©onne,  [te  fd)Qlt  fie:  ,,56^  IJl^cibct  3U  $au§, 

S}enn  id)  Brenn'  eud^"  bie  golbenen  ^nglcin  au§, 
33ei  bem  feurigen  Witt  um  bie  SBelt." 

Unb  hk  ©ternlein  gingen  3um  lieBen  SO^onb 
Sn  ber  D^Jadit; 
30  Unb  fie  fprad^en:   „^u,  ber  auf  SSoIfen  t^ront 

Sn  ber  Tiad)t; 

Safe  un§  tDonbeln  mit  bir,  benn  bein  milber  ©d^ein, 
©r  Brennt  un§  nimmer^  bie  ^ugelein!" 
Unb  er  nal^m  fie,  (SefeEcn  ber  9iad)t. 


357    ^  eg  iUi  mtr  lelb  =  I  am  sorry.     See  App.  249. 
'  CU(^  —  possessive  dative,     See  App,  144, 

^  nimmer  —  poetic  form  of  nle  or  ntemolg. 


142  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [858-860 

35  dlun  miKfommen  ©ternlcin  unb  cjuter  90^onb, 

Sn  ber  9^ad)t! 

Sl&r  berfte!)t,  tDa§^  ftiE  in  ben  ^eraen  tDol^nt 

Sn  ber  ^adjt 

^ommt  unb  giinbet  bte  I)tmnilifd}en  2td)ter  on, 
«  S)q6  id&  lufttg  mitfd^iDdrmeni^  unb  fpielen  !ann 

Sn  ben  freunblid^en  (Si^ielcn  ber  3}a6:)t. 

©oriiBer  finb^^  bie  ^inber  erttjad^t.    ©ie  liefen  gu  \>zn  2Bolb= 
hjeibtein  unb  riefen  au§:   ^SSer^^  ^^|t  ber  (Sonne  fdf)rt,  totrb  in 
24  ©tunben  unt  bie  SBelt  reiten!"    (Sic  ^atttn  e§  rid^tig  geralen 
45  unb  bie  SSalbmeiblein  jeigten  i^nen  nun  ben  2Beg  na6)  §aufe. 

358  Strong  VERBi 

to  seem        fc^eiueu  fd)ien  gefc^ienen 

to  withdraw  \\d)  juriicfjiefien     ^og  fid^  ^uvM      fid)  guriidge^ogen 

to  close       gufaUen  fiet  gu  gugefatten 

Weak  Verbs  • 

to  make  an  effort  fid^  auftrengcu     ftreugte  fid^  an    fid^  angeftrengt 
to  recognize       erfeuueu  erfannte  erfannt 

to  meditate        nad^bcufeu  to  kindle  anjiiuben 

359  EXERCISES 

1.  Semen  ^le  ha§>  ©ebid^t  Qu^^rDcnbig! 

2.  33efd)reiben  ®ie  bie  (Sonne,  tvk  fie  ben  ^inbern  erfd)icnen  ift! 

360  'ttitt§  =  liag,  ttag. 

^°  tnttfli||tt)atttten  =  to  wander  along.  This  word  offers  great  difficult  y 
in  translation ;  it  means,  to  dream  day  dreams  or  to  indulge  in  fan- 
tastic musings. 

"  flttil  erttiaii^t  —  note  the  transition  of  condition  implied,  ^dii^cn 
(to  be  awake)  would  take  l^aBett,  since  no  transition  is  implied.  Cf. 
fdllafett  and  elttf(^lttfett.    See  App.  70. 

^2  ttjcr  =  tier,  ber.    See  App.  169. 


361-302]  REFLEXIVE  VERBS  143 

3.  3Sie  fatten  hie  ^inber  tierjudjt,  fid)  3u  Befinnen? 

4.  3Sie  wax  hex  atueite  Zxaum  derfi^ieben  t)on  bem  erften? 

5.  3Sic  t)iele  Stitnbcn  baucrt  c§,  bi§  bie  Sonne  urn  bte  SSelt 
reift? 

7.  SStc  t)iel€  SOttmiten  finb  in  etner  ©tunbe?  tvk  btele  ©efunben? 

8.  llm  tDtet)ieI  ll^r  ge^t  bie  Sonne  je^t  auf?  Ungef^ifir  urn  jed&§ 
Itl^r.  Hm  n)ie  oiel  Uf)r  gel)!  fie  im  Sommer  auf?  Ungefdl)r 
um  bier  U^v.  Itm  tDie  t)iel  U^x  gel^t  bie  Sd()ule  an?  Itm  ^alb 
neun^  Ul^r  gel^t  fie  an,  unb  nm  ein  W^x  ge()t  fie  au§>.  5(Ber 
mir  finb  immer  fd)on  ein  3SierteI  auf  ncun  IHir  I)ier,  unb  fom= 
men  erft  um  brei  ^Biertel  auf  smei  lU)r  fort.  Hm  wk  tiicl  lU^r 
gel^t  bie  ^ird^e  an?  ba§  ^r)eater?  llm  n)ie  tiiel  ltl)r  gefien 
fie  au§?  3Sann  finb  Sie  gen^ol^nli^  ha?  3Bann  fommen  Sie 
nad^  $aufe? 


361  Translate:  1.  The  beautiful  lady  with  the  golden 
crown  will  appear  to  the  little  children  in  their  sleep.  2.  At 
five  o'clock  they  will  have  come  home.  3.  Their  mother  said: 
*'When  did  the  sun  rise?"  4.  They  answered:  "It  rose  about 
[at]  6.30  and  will  probably  set  at  5.15.  5.  Usually  they 
come  home  about  [at]  six  o'clock.  6.  I  am  sorry  for  you. 
7.  The  children  had  fallen  asleep  and  were  dreaming  of  a 
beautiful  lady.  8.  The  little  stars  had  gone  around  the  world 
with  the  gentle  moon.  9.  At  eight  o'clock  little  children  go 
to  bed,  but  the  old  people  go  to  sleep  at  half  past  ten.  10.  The 
little  children  said:  "Please  take  us  along!"  11.  The  sun 
laughed  and  sang  them  a  song. 


362  ^  Be  careful  to  note  the  difference  between  the  English  and  Ger- 
man methods  of  reckoning  time.  Thus:  10.30  =  ^atb  elf;  10.15  =  etH 
mcxtti  auf  elf;  10.45  =  lurcl  SBiertel  auf  elf. 


144  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [363-365 

LESSON  38 
COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 

363  SE)er  Wiawn  \\i  giemlirf)  flein,  W  %xm  tft  fleiner,  'tia^  ^inb  ift 

am  fkinflen.  5ft  ^o§  ^iid^Iein  fleiner  ober  grower  aB  bte  ^enne? 
28a§  tft  am  fleinften,  ber  ®al}n,  bte  §ettne  ober  ba§  ^iid^lein? 
S}q^>  ^iid^kitt  ift  am  fleinften,  ber  ^al^rt  tft  am  grofetett.  SSa§ 
tft  am  btdfften,  ha%  Brautte,  ha^  rote,  ober  ha^  iDeiBc  ^ud)?  3SeI» 
(f)e^  tft  btdfer,  bo§  beutfd^e  ober  't^a^^  etigltfdie  33iid}? 

®a§  groge  S3uc^  tft  beittf(^. 
^a§  gro^erc  93ud^  ift  englifd). 
^a§  grb^te  S3uc§  ift  tateimfc^. 

Predicate  gro§  grower  am  grogten 

Attributive    i  ^.^  9ro|e      bie  grogm       ba?  grogtc 

(  etn  groger     etne  grogere     (metn)  gro§te» 

364  The  comparative  and  superlative  frequently  have  umlaut. 
Note  that  the  comparative  and  superlative  are  inflected  like 
the  positive.  But  naturally  the  superlative  can  not  be  inflected 
with  the  indefinite  article. 

365 


Regular  Comparison 

With  Umlaut 

lang 
furs 

Icing  er 
fiirser 
alter 

Idngjl,  am  langjiett 
fiirgeft,  am  fiiraefien 
ortefl,  am  orteften 

Without 

Umlaut 

flar 
laut 
bic! 
flein 

flarer 
tauter 
bider 
fleiner 

!(arfit,  am  !larflen 
lauteft,  am  tautcflen 
bidfl,  am  btdften 
fleinft,  am  fleinfien 

366-369]  REFLEXIVE  VERBS  145 

366  Slightly  Ikregular 

gro§  grower  grofet,  am  grogtcn 

^oc^  ^o^cr  ^oc^ft,  ant  fioc^ftcn 

ita^  itd^cr  ndd^ft,  am  ndc^ftcn 

367  Irregular  and  Defective  Comparison 

gut  beffev  beft,  am  beftcn 

t)iel  me^r  meift,  am  meiften 

—  —  erft,  am  erften  * 

—  —  le^t,  am  le^tcn  * 


368  :^cutfd)e)g  3cf)nhucfcn 

^Q§  UnterridjtC'tDefcn  in  2)eutfc^lQnb  oe()ort  311^  ben  in= 
tercffonteften  ©rfdicinungen  bee  Sanbcc^.  Tic  nicifton  ©lurid)- 
tuncicn  mei(en  aitf  alte  I^iftortfdic  23rand)e  iinb  ^rabitioncn- 
3uriirf,  befonbcr^  an  ben  llnioerfitaten,  and)  §od)]d)nfcn'^  gc= 
5  nannt,  beren  ciltefte,  bie  .*peibelbergcr^  Uniberfitat,  ]d)on  feit 
bem  ^softre  1386  ej:iftiert. 


*  From  these  superlatives,  comparatives,  tier  erftetf,  the  former, 
and  ber  le^tete,  the  latter,  have  been  formed  on  the  analogy  of  the 
regular  comparative. 

369  ^  fiCprt  gtt  =  belongs  to,  i.e.,  is  a  part  of.  @e^drett  +  dat.  (with- 
out preposition)  =  belongs  to,  in  the  sense  of  is  property  of ,  e.g., 
2)ttg  Sur^  geprt  mir. 

-  2^railiti0tt'— a  feminine  noun  of  Latin  origin.  Note  that  the  class 
of  nouns  ending  in  ttOtt  (pronounce  ^iott)  are  all  feminine  and  all 
accented  on  last  syllable,  bie  gcftiOtt',  bic  ®tttttOtt',  bic  9lttttOtt'. 

^  ^Od^jli^Ule  —  note  difference  in  application  from  our  '  'high  school. " 
^OJ^f^utc  is  used  to  designate  any  institution  above  our  high  or  pre- 
paratory schools. 

* ^CtbcIJerfiet — note  suffix  cr  to  form  adjectives  (always  unin- 
fiected)  from  names  of  cities,  e.g.  Jlety  ^^xUx,  G^liCttgoer,  SoftOtter,  etc. 


146  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [370 

®ie  niebrigfte  ©tufe  he§>  nnternc^t§tt)€jen^  ift  bie  ^Iem= 
fhtberfd^ule,  tno  fid)  bie  giingften,  im  HIter  t»on  brei  U§>  fed)§ 
Salfl^en,  burd)^  ©piel  gur  Orbnung  getDo^nen. 

10  :rte  rtdd^fte  ^Stufe  Bilbet  bie  33oIfc^fc^uIe,  rt^o  bie  ettt)a§ 
altercn  ^inber  ben  (JIementariinterrid)t  auf  ftantlid)e  Soften 
genieBen.  ^ier  lernen  .^naben  imb  90^abd)en  geteilt  bie  ®Ie= 
mentQr=5dd)er,  Senlfd),  Sf^eligion,  9fied)Tien,  (55efd)i(^tc,  Oco= 
graphic,  D^aturlef^re,  3SoIf§tDirtf(^aft,  ©ingen,  g^i^nen,  3:iir= 

15  nen  imb  ^aiiborbeit.  (2e^tere§  lernen  nur  bie  9P^dbd)cn.) 
Ser  llnterrid}t  bauert  mcift  bon  8  ]6i§  12  nnb  t)on  2  Bt§  4, 
mit  5trei  ^olbfeiertagcn,  9KitttDod)f>  nnb  3amftag§.  ^n  bie 
3SoIf§fd)nIcn  gel)en  meiften§  bie  ^inber,  bercn  ©c^ulbefud)  mit 
bem  bierse^nten  '^aljice  fc^Iiefet.    3Ser  eine  meitere  33ilbung  fitr 

20  jeine  ^inber  tDiK,  fd^idt  fie  tiom  nenntcn  Softie  an  auf  ha§> 
(St)mnafinm.  ^ier  finbet  l^auptfad^Iid)  bie  35orI)ereitnng  sum 
Gintritt  in  hie  llniberfitdt  ober  hie  ted^nifdjen  ^od^fd^ulen  \iatt. 
griil^er^  lag  an  alien  ©Qmnafien^  ber  §anptfd)tr)er^un!t  auf 
ben  flaffifdjen  ®prad)en,  je^t  legt  man  in  ben  fogenannten 

25  9^ealgt)mnafien  unb  91eformgt}mnafien  tueniger  @€n)id)t  auf  bie 
atten  3prad)en  unb  mef)r  auf  bie  neucren^  unb  auf  bie  9?atur= 
triffenfc^aften. 

((Scfihife  folgt) 


370  ^iltttd^ — preposition  of  means;  cf.  tlOll  —  preposition  denoting 
agency. 

^  ^rul^cr — adverb,  literally,  earlier,  translate  formerly.  Note  that 
adverbs  in  German  are  often  simply  uninflected  adjectives. 

'  ©^mttttflen— pi.  of  ©^mnafittm— belongs  to  mixed  decl.  Observe 
the  Latin  ending  ittni  changed  to  ten  in  plural.     Cf.  218. 

^  iJte  ncueren  ^^irar^cn  =  modem  languages. 


371-874] 

REFLEXIVE  VERBS 

371 

Strong   Verbs 

to  direct, 

point 

toeifen 

lt)ie§ 

getoiefeu 

to  enjoy- 

geuiefeen 

geno^ 

genoffeit 

to  sing 

fingeii 

fang 

gefungen 

to  close 

fc^Uegeii 

fd)lofe 

geid)tof)eu 

Weak  Verbs 

to  belong 

ge^i 

mn 

to  draw 

'^dd)\m\ 

to  exist 

eiiftiereii 

to  take  gymnastics  tUl'lteit 

to  accustom  geft)d()nen 

to  send 

fc^icfen 

to  share 

teilen 

147 


EXERCISES 

372  328 ogu  ge{)ort  ta^  Unterrid)t§tDejen  5J)eutf^lanb§?  (SJe^oxeu 
hk  33oIf5i(^uIen  3u  ben  §0(^id)ulen  ober  ju  ben  ©Icmentarfc^ulcn? 
SSarum?  SSem  ge[)oren  bk  Sd)ulbud}€r?  SSa^  gel^ort  ben  3d}u= 
lern?  3Bac>  ift  ber  Unterid)ieb  aroifc^cn  einer  I)iefigen^  §od)fd)uIc 
nnb  einer  beutfc^en?  SSorouf  tDeifen  I)euttgc  @el)rdud)e  on  hen 
Uniberfitaten  oft  jnriid? 

9^ennen  Sie  bie  oltefte  UniDerfitdt  Seutfd^Ianb^ !  ©ett  toann 
Beftel^t  biefelbc?  2Sa5  mad)t  ba^>  beuti'die  UnterriditStcefen  pdjft 
intereffont?  5iennen  Sie  bie  t)erfd]iebenen  8tufen  ber  ©c^ulcn 
unb  erflaren  3ie  beren  9iu^en!  3So()in  gcr)en  bie  jiingften,  tooliin 
bie  diteren  ^inbcr?  SBoburdj  unterjd)eibet  \\ii)  ber  je^ige  llnter= 
rid)t  in  ben  ©Qmnofien  Don  bem  frii^eren? 

373  Translate:  1.  The  students  in  a  German  school  study- 
very  diligently.  2.  A  very  interesting  phenomenon  in  German 
life  is  the  good  system  of  instruction.  3.  Of  all  the  schools 
the  gymnasium  makes  the  greatest  demand  on  the  students. 

374  '^teflfi=in  this  country;  derived  from  adverb  ^ier;  so  also 
borttfi  (from  iJort),  iC^ifl  (from  jc^t),  ^CUttfi  (from  |cute). 


148  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [375-37(i 

4.  From  the  lowest  to  the  highest  grade  of  German  schools, 
the  children  study  the  most  difficult  subjects  (gdc^er).  5.  Usu- 
ally the  instruction  lasts  from  early  morning  to  (M§)  late  in  the 
afternoon.  6.  The  hardest  work  is  in  the  gymnasium.  7.  The 
technical  schools  and  the  universities  are  the  most  advanced 
schools.  8.  More  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  modern  languages 
than  on  the  ancient.  9.  But  formerly  the  greater  emphasis  was 
placed  on  the  ancient  languages  and  less  on  the  natural  sciences. 

LESSON  39 

375  2)cutf$c8  S^ttltncfcn 

S)ie  (Sc^iiler  befiidjcn  bie  ©Qmnaiien  im  ^urd^fdjnitt  Dom 

neunten  big  gum  neun^cljnten  ^a^tz.    ^n  ben  I^o^cren  ^laffen 

I)Qt  ber  3d)iiler  meiften§  bretfeig  Itnterrid^tSftunb^n  btc  SSoc^e, 

Qlfo  fiinf  Stuiibcu  tdglid).    9JZQn  ftcljt,  bofe  cr  fidj  aufg  I)6d)yte^ 

B  onftrengen  muB. 

2^er  3taat  mad)t  tiuBerft^  ftrcngc  5lnforbcrungen  an  xi)\\, 

^     unb  ha^  ©jamen,  momtt  ber  ^wrfug  fc^IieBt,  tft  pd^ft^  fd)tt)ic= 

rig.    3SieIe  8tiibenteu,  bte  todfirenb  ber  ®d)ul5eit  Quf§  an= 

geftrengtefte^   ftubiert  I)a]6en,   fonnen   bie  ^ritfung  fiir  boS 

10  fogenannte  S^eifeseugnt^  nid^t  Befteften  unb  fallen  olfo  burd). 

S)Q§  tft  ()od)ft  Befdjdmcnb  fiir  fie  unb  tl^re  5(ngeprigen. 

SSenn  ober  bos  ©i-amen  gliidltd)  boriiber  ift,  bonn  gel^t'^"^ 
luftig  auf  bie  llntDerfitat.     gier  ftubieren  fie  5uerft  aufeerft^ 

376  ^  ttttf§  pri^fte  =  to  the  highest  degree.  \I  This  is  called  the 
absolute  superlative,  since  it  does  not  suggesr  comparison  as  does 
the  relative  superlative  am  p^ftett.  The  phrase  is  adverbial.  The 
adjective  (attributive)  equivalent  is  seen  in  iiufeerft  jirettfie  ^ttforbentttgetl 
(most  severe  demands),  w^here  the  absolute  degree  is  shown  by  the 
superlative  adverb  au^etfi  (sometimes  P^fif).     See  App.  56, 

^batttt  geP'g  luftifl  =  then  they  start  merrily. 


377]  REFLEXIVE  VERBS  149 

incnig,  bcnn  e§  Ijeibtp  fid)  tnocjiid)]!  jd}neE  unb  Grihtblid)  in  ba§ 
15  neue  Seben  einfiuben.  SDer  juuge  ©intrctenbc  I^etfet  „3ud)s", 
tuenn  er  fid^  einem  dltercn  v^tubenten  anfdjltefet,  I^elfet  er  ,,2eib» 
fuc^s^".  9??ogIi(^ft^  fdjneH  tritt  er  etner  „SSerbinbung"  Ul 
^un  lentt  er  „paiifen",  ba§  l)et6t,  fid)  mit  bem  3al3el  fdjlagen, 
tragi  etne  Bunte  ^appe  unb  Befudit  bie  ,Mi^eipen".  5IEe  ntd)t= 
20  ftubierenben  33iirg€r  ^leifeen  ^'ip^iltfter",  unb  fiir  biefe  ^at  ber 
„^u6)^"  dufeerft    trenig  5ld)tung. 

Sm  britten  ©emeftcr  ge()t  mctft  ba^  ©tubteren  (in  ber 
3tubentenf^rad)e  ,,od)fen"  ober  „biiffeln'0  Io§.  9^un  bereitet 
cr  fid)  3ur  Softor^riifung  t5or,  unb  ha  gilt^  e§  oufS  tiid)tigfte 
25  ftubieren.  "Bod)  hei)alt  cr  immer  nod)  3eit,  fid)  ju  amii= 
ficren  im  SBerein  mit  feinen  ©enoffen,  fo  bofs  fiir  jeben 
Xeutfd^en^  bie  llniberfitats^eit  3ur  gludlid)ften  3eit  feine§  Se= 
bcuij  gel)6rt.    SSenn  er  fifteiben  mufe,  fo  fingt  cr  traurig: 

£)  alte  !Surfd)enr)errIid)feit! ' 
30  SBo^in  bift  hu  cntfd)h)unben? 

9Zie  fef)rft  bu  n)ieber,  golbne  Qeit, 

3o  frol^  unb  ungebunben! 

3Sergcben§  fpcil^e  id)  um!)er, 

3d)  finbe  beine  ©pur  nid)t  mel)r. 

0  ierum,  ierum,  ierum,  o  quae  mutatio  rerum!^ 


377        ^  eg  ^et|;t  (=  C8  fiilt)  =  now  it  is  important. 

*  ficiftfu^g— somewhat  equivalent  to  the  "fag"  of  English  schools. 

^  mofiiili^ft  fl^ttcff  =  as  quickly  as  possible. 

^fiir  jcien  ^CUtf^en— note  that  bcutfd^  has  always   the  adjective 
inflection. 

^  »ttrfr^Ctt^crrU(^!elt  =  jolly  student  life. 

*Such  a  Latin  refrain  occurs  with  many  similar  student  songs. 


150 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[378-379 


78 

Strong  Verbs 

to  pass  (exam- 
ination) 

befte^en 

beftanb 

beftanben 

to  fail 

burc^faHen 

fiel  burc^ 

burc^gefallen 

to  enter 

j  \xd)  eiufinben 
1  eintreten 

fanb  fic^  tin 

firf)  eingefunben 

trat  ein 

eingetreteu 

to  join 

beitreten 

trat  M 

beigetreten 

to  fight  a  duel 

fi^  fd^lagen 

Wn  m 

fic^  9efd)tagen 

to  start,  begin 

lo§ge{)en 

ging  Io§ 

lo^gegangen 

to  retain 

be^altcn 

be^ielt 

be^alten 

to  part 

fc^eiben 

frflieb 

gefc^ieben 

to  disappear 

entfc^njinben 

entfc^ftjanb 

entfd)tt)unben 

Weak  Verbs 

to  fight 

paufen 

to  prepare 

t)orbereiten 

J  od^fen 
(  biiffeln 

to  enjoy  oneself    fic!^  omiifiereu 

to  "dig" 

to  return 

n)ieber!el)ren 

to  look  about 

umfierfpd^en 

379  EXERCISES 

1.  3So  ftubieren  bie  (Hd)uler  auf§  angcftrcngteftc,  itnb  iDarum? 

2.  33€fd)reiben  Sie  bie  erftcu  Semefter  best  llnil^erfitdtslcbens ! 
bie  f|)dteren! 

3.  3Ba§  fiir  5tnforberungen  mac^t  man  an  bie  ©tubenten  im 
^oftorejamen? 

4.  SSie  benft  ber  ©tubent  an  feine  Hnit)erfitdt  auriicf? 

1.  A  most  difficult  examination  closes  the  course  at  the 
gymnasium.  2.  [The]  studying  begins  in  the  third  semester 
and  is  carried  on  most  severely.  3.  The  student  now  makes  the 
greatest  effort  of  his  school  life.  4.  He  prepares  himself  for 
the  difficult  doctor's  examination.  5.  But  he  amuses  himself 
also,  so  that  his  university  life  belongs  to  the  happiest  time  in 
his  life. 


380]  REFLEXIVE  VERBS  151 

LESSON  J^O 
380  GRAMMAR  REVIEW 

1.  Reflexive  Verbs  require  as  object  a  reflexive  persoual 
pronoun  either  in  the  accusative  or  the  dative.  This  pronoun 
is  often  untranslatable.  Many  reflexives  take  a  secondary 
object  in  the  genitive  case.     (See  App.  124. ) 

2.  The  numerals  are  uninflected  except  citl,  which  is 
inflected  like  the  indefinite  article. 

3.  Ordinals  are  formed  from  cardinals  by  the  addition  of 
the  suffix  t  from  the  numbers  1-19.  From  20  on,  the  suffix  is 
fl.  The  ordinals  are  inflected  like  any  other  adjectives. 
@rft-,  Wxii-  are  irregular  in  the  formation  of  their  stems. 

4.  Fractionals  are  formed  from  cardinals  by  adding  the 
suffix  tel.  The  fractional  is  a  neuter  noun  of  the  first  class, 
strong  declension.  §alb,  bic  ^iilfte,  and  bal  ^rtttel  are 
irregular. 

5.  Adjectives  of  material  are  formed  from  nouns  by  the 
addition  of  the  suffix  cm  (sometimes  ctt). 

6.  The  comparative  degree  of  adjectives  is  formed  by  adding 
cr,  and  the  superlative  by  adding  (c)fl,  to  the  positive  stem. 
These  suffixes  often  produce  umlaut  in  the  stem  of  the  adjec- 
tive. Some  adjectives  are  compared  irregularly.  (See  App. 
60-52.) 

7.  When  used  attributively,  the  comparative  and  super- 
lative are  declined  according  to  the  regular  adjective  declen- 
sion.    Predicatively  the  superlative  phrase  ttttt  — Ctt  is  used. 

8.  The  absolute  superlative,  which  represents  a  very  high 
degree  of  the  quality  and  no  comparison  with  other  objects,  is 
formed  attributively  by  means  of  the  adverb  pri^jl  or  du^crfl 

4-  the  positive ;    predicatively  by  the  phrase  ttufS c.     (See 

App.  56.) 


152  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [381-382 

REVIEW  EXERCISES 

381  Fill  in: 

Xic  3lDGi  rUnbcr  I)Q]6en  —  im  2BaIbe  Derirrt.     2!ie 

Wcmmx  Qtniifieren  —  in  ben  erft —  Semcftern  bc;^^  lIniDcrf{tQt§= 
Ieben§.  ®te  Unberfitaten  gepren  —  ben  §od)|d)uIen  be§  Son^ 
beg.  ®te  ©onne  fdjcint  5^ute  auf§  — .  ^ie  Sonne  fd^eint  — 
tm  ©ommer.  ®er  flein — ^naBe  \)Cii  'ba^^  fd^roer —  ®i*empel  im 
^opfe  Quggcrec^net.  Ser  fleinfte  ^noBc  tt)irb  am  —  red)nen. 
^ie  licben  fleincn  3ternlein  o€]^cn  cjern  mit  bem  —  90^onb,  fein 
Sl\6)i  \\i  t)iel  milber  qI§  —  ber  ©onne. 

382  Translate:  1.  The  small  boy  and  the  smaller  girl  had 
lost  their  way  iu  the  exceedingly  dark  forest.  2.  "Shame  on 
you!"  said  the  queer  wood-nymph  to  the  lost  children.  3.  The 
children  rejoiced  at  the  riddles,  and  their  old  teacher  helped 
them  with  their  mental  arithmetic.  4.  "In  how  many  hours 
does  the  sun  go  around  the  world?"  asked  the  first  wood- 
nymph.  5.  "In  24  hours,"  replied  the  little  boy,  who  boasted 
of  his  mental  arithmetic.  6.  The  first  half  of  the  riddle  was 
hard  to  guess,  but  the  second  half  was  easy.  7.  This  half- 
page  (bte  ^txiz)  is  full  of  little  dots,  the  other  half -page  is 
golden.  8.  The  silk  gown  of  the  beautiful  lady  was  most 
gorgeous.  9.  The  Universities  of  Germany  are  most  inter- 
esting. 10.  The  most  interesting  universities  are  the  oldest. 
11.  The  boys  study  hardest  in  the  gymnasium.  12.  The  de- 
mands are  the  most  severe  in  the  last  two  years.  13.  The 
children  are  the  youngest  in  the  kindergarten.  14.  The  chil- 
dren enjoy  themselves  exceedingly. 


383-385] 


PASSIVE  VOICE 


153 


CHAPTER  VII 


PASSIVE  VOICE 


LESSON  J^l 


383        Active 

3^  fa^  iiin 

3(^  ^abc  if)n  gcfc^cn 

3d^  ^attc  il)n  gefc^cn 

3d^  mcrbc  il)n  fc^cn 

3(^  tocrbc  if)n  gefet)en  ^aben 


Passive 
@r  toirb  t)on  mir  gcfe^en 
@r  tourbe  tjon  mir  gefel^en 
@r  ijl  Don  mir  gefcjen  taotbcn 
@r  tuor  Don  mir  gcfe^cn  morbcn 
©r  tuirb  Don  mir  gcfc^cn  tucrbcn 
@r  tuirb  Don  mir  gcf  cl^en  tQorben  f  cin 


The  passive  voice  of  any  transitive  verb  is  composed  of 
some  form  of  the  verb  toetben  and  the  perfect  active  participle 
of  the  required  verb  (see  App.  78).  In  the-  perfect  tenses 
of  the  passive,  the  augment  of  the  participle  gctoorbett  is 
omitted. 

The  German  preposition  of  agent  is  Hon  (by)  and  it 
takes  the  dative  case.  ^ur^  is  the  preposition  of  means. 
For  complete  passive  inflection  see  App.  78;  for  syntax,  App. 
218-222. 

384  2)eutfc^Ionb 

2!eutfd^Ianb  mirb  jd^rlid]  Don  Dielen  ^TuSldnbern  bcfit(f)t, 

tDeil  e§  ))M)\i^  intereffonte  (3iftorif(^e  unb  fultureUe  ^pnomene 

gu  bieten  ^at    %u6)  feine  nQtiirltdjen  ^Inlogen  ftnb  oft  betDun= 

bert  hiorbcn.     9Wan  finbet^  in  bem  fleirten  Sanbe  (e§  tDtrb 

5  bcredjnet,  'ba'^  ganj  2;eiit]d)lQTtb  ntd^t  fo  grofe  ift  tuie  ber  (Stoat 

385  ^  ^dt^ft  Itttercffattte— see  App.  56. 

^man  flnbct— translate  there  is  found.     See  App.  220. 


154  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [386 

Xeica^)  erftaunlid)  grofee  llnterfdjiebc  tm  SUma  unh  tiielfadjen 
SBec^fel  ber  Sanbfdiaft. 

Sm  9^orben  Breitet  fid^  ha§>  2anh  in  meilenlangen,  fanbi= 
gen  gldc^en  qii§,  bie  fogenannte  SOZarf^  beren'^  ^^oefie  unb 

10  ^^vb^t  diei^^  )oon  olelen  norbifd)en  ^id^tern  befungen  iiDorben  ift. 

®tefe  grofeen  5Iad)en  finb  don  einonber    burd)  magige 

(Erf)ebungen  getrennt.     3^^'  treiter  fublidi  man  fommt,  befto 

p^er  liegt  ba^  Sanb  iiber  bem  SOZeeresfpiegel.    .§ier  beftnben 

fic^^  hk  grofeen  SSiilber    (ber  ©c^tDaratDalb,  ber  3:;6uringer=^ 

15  toalb,  unb,  iueiter  oftlic^,  ber  33olf)mertt)aIb^),  jdo  bo^  O^r 
burc^  bog  iHaufi^en  ber  ^annen,  Sinben  unb  (Si(^en  entgiidt 
JDirb,  unb  rt)o  ber  ©inn  tion  bem  SSalbgauber  gefangen  genom- 
men  mirb.'^CSn  biefen  bemolbeten  ^ugelldnbern  befinben  ftd^ 
tounberf^bne  ttefbloue  8een.  v 

20  ^n  ber  ^itte  bes  Sonbc^^,  an  ben  Ufcrn  ber  ©Ibe,  ido  bie 
l^errlii^e  ^tahi  Sresben  liegt,  ift  hk  ^anb(d}aft  fo  fd^on  unb 
grofeartig  gefunben  tuorben,  ba^  man  ber  ©egenb  hen  DZomen 
„hk  fdd^fifd)e  (Sd)n)ei3"  gcgeben  ]f)at. 

2)ur(^  bie  ©ebirge,  bie  ha^  Sanb    burd^freugen,    tvevben 

35  2Bafferfc^eiben  gebilbet,  t)on  benen  fic^  bie  grofeen  8trdme  nadf) 
t)er{d^iebenen  Seiten  ergiefeen.  Siefe  ©trome  (ber  9^f)ein,  mit 
feinem  romantifd^en  Hfer,  hie  breite  ©Ibe,  bie  blaue  2)onau, 

386    ^  3Rttrf— originally  meaning  boundary,  territory,  now  specialized 
in  connection  with  Brandenburg. 

*  ticrctt  =  whose— refers  to  SRatf- 
^  Berber  ^Ctj  =  rugged  charm. 

^  jc  tueiter befto  ]^O^er=the  farther the  higher— both  German 

bcftO,  and  English the  are   remnants  of  an  old  instrumental 

case. 

'  0eft1t)ien  fld^  =  are  found.     See  App.  220. 

*  These  forests  are  renowned  in  song  and  story.    Locate  them  on 
the  map. 


887-388] 


PASSIVE  VOICE 


135 


bie  geidjdftige  SSefer  unb  bie  2Seid^feI)  l^abert  ^Inlofe  gegeben 
311  bem  ©riinben  t)on  mdd)ttgen  ©tdbten  unb  retaenben  ®or= 
30  fern.  3Si€le  biefer  ©tdbte  finb  fcE)on  bor  '^at)v^unhevten  gegriin^ 
bet  toorben  unb  finb  beriil^Tnt  megen  ber  ©rdfee  i^rer  Snbitftrie, 
ber  ^radit  ii^rer  ©ebdube  unb  ber  (Sigenart  unb  be§  2Serte§ 
if)rer  S^unft.  2)Qbon  h)irb  in  einer  fpdteren  Seftion  nod)  gef)an= 
belt  merben. 


87 

Strong  Verbs 

to  offer      bteten 

bot 

geboten 

to  sing       befingen 

befang 

befungen 

to  rise         mporfteigcn 

ftieg  empor 

emporgeftiegen 

to  be  found  firf)  befiiibeu 

befanb  ficb 

\\6)  befunbeu 

'eil^tT'       e^'9i^6^» 

ergog 

ergoffen 

Weak  Verbs 

to  admire      benJUUberU 

to  rustle  raufc^en 

to  calculate  htV^(i)ntn 

to  delight  ent^iicfen 

to  spread     fic^  aii^breiteu,    breitete 

to  form    bilben 

\id}  au§,  ficb  au§gebreitet 

to  cross    biirc^freujen 

to  separate  treuiieil 

to  found  griinben 

EXERCISES 

388     1.    33on  tnem  mirb  3)eutfd)Ianb  oft  befud)t?   SSarum? 

2.  9iennen  ®ie  einige^,  toa§>  barin  gefunben  tviibl 

3.  ^ejdjreiben  ®ie  bie  £)berfldd)e  be§  fionbe^! 

4.  SSa^  mirb  tion  ben  ^ic^tem  geton? 

5.  ^s[t  ha^:^  fdjon  lange  getan  tnorben? 

6.  33cid)reiben  Sie  bie  3SdIber  8iibbeutfd)Ianb§! 

7.  2S03U  l^aben  bie  grofeen  Strdme  Slnlafe  gegeben? 

8.  2Ba§  tDirb  on  ben  Stdbten  geru()mt? 


156  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [389-391 

389  Translate:  1.  Germany  has  been  praised  for  its  most 
interesting  historical  and  natural  phenomena.  2.  Great  di- 
vergence of  climate  is  found  in  this  little  land,  which  is  smaller 
than  Texas.  3.  The  rugged  charm  of  the  northern  lowlands 
has  been  sung  by  many  poets.  4.  We  were  charmed  by  the 
beauty  of  the  forests  with  their  rustling  oaks  and  firs.  5.  By 
the  beautiful  rivers  will  be  found  pretty  villages  and  mighty 
cities. 

LESSON  Ji2 

WORD  ORDER  m 

390  I.  ®ie  ^inber  |oBcn  ivXt%i  bie  9?atfel  geliift. 
II.  3utefet  Jttbcn  bie  ^inber  bie  "^ii^tX  geloft, 

III.  ^og  bie  ^inber  i\x\z%i  bie  9fidtfel  geloft  §abcn. 

Note  that  in 

I.  The  clause  is  independent  and  begins  with  the  subject. 
Normal  Order. 

II.   The  clause  is  independent,  but  begins  with  an  adjunct. 
Inverted  Order. 

III.   The  clause  is  dependent.     Transposed  Order. 

391  The  verb  (i.  e.,  the  inflected  part  of  the  verb)  changes 
its  position  according  as  the  sentence  is  dependent  or  inde- 
pendent, and  in  the  latter  case  according  as  it  begins  with 
subject  or  not. 

I.  If  a  sentence  is  an  ordinary  statement  and  stands  by 
itself,  there  is  no  especial  reason  for  emphasizing  one  word 
much  more  than  another.  Hence  we  say  the  order  is  normal 
and  we  mention  first  the  subject,  then  the  verb,  then  all  the 
adjuncts. 

II.  If,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  some  part  of  a  sentence 
outside  of  the  subject  is  placed  first  (it  may  be  an  adverb  or 
the  object,  or,  indeed,  an  entire  dependent  clause),  then  the 
natural  or  normal  order  is  disturbed,  and  attention  is  called 


392-303]  PASSIVE  VOICE  157 

to  this  phenomenon  by  an  inversion  of  subject  and  predicate. 
This  is  an  extremely  frequent  usage  in  German.  The  inverted 
order  is  also  found  in  questions  and  commands. 

(SJe^en  @ie?    ^e^en  @te! 
(^tWt>u?    (SJe^e(bu)! 

III.  The  dependent  clause  is  parenthetical  in  its  nature,  and 
in  German  is  always  set  off  by  commas.  A  peculiarity  of 
the  German  dependent  clause  is  the  position  of  the  adjuncts, 
which  are  placed  in  between  the  subject  and  the  verb,  as  if  the 
adjuncts  were  to  be  thus  protected  and  kept  by  themselves. 
The  transposed  order  gives  rise  to  a  suspense  of  the  idea, 
expressed  in  reading  by  a  suspension  of  the  voice. 

These  main  rules  of  order  should  be  carefully  studied  since 
they  are  at  the  foundation  of  German  construction.  It  must, 
however,  be  borne  in  mind  that  sentence  structure  can  be  best 
learned  by  constant  observation  of  good  German. 

392  (S 1 1  f  0  n  i  g 

SSer  reitet  fo  fpdt  burd)  ^ad)t  \mh  SStnb? 
@g  ift  ber  3SQter  mil  feinem  ^inh ; 
©r  1)ai  ben  ^aben  idoIjI  in  bem  5lrm, 
@r  fofet  il&n  fid)er,  ev  ]f)dlt  xf)n  tnorm. 

6  ,M^in  SoEin,  tt)Q^^  btrgft  bu  fo  bong  bein  Oiefidjt?"  — 

„©iel)ft  3Sater;^  bu  ben  (Jrlfonig  nid^t? 
25en  ©rlenfonig  mit  ^ron'  unb  !Sd)tx)eif?"  — 
„a^ein'©of)n,  e§  ift  €in  S^ebelftreif." 

„®u  liebeS  ^'tnb,  fomm,  gel^  mit  nur! 
JO  @ar  fd^one  ©piele  fpiel'  i(^  mit  bir; 


393      '  tiJOg?  =  tiiarum?    Cf.  Latin  quid. 

2  flelft,  S5ttter,  bu— poetical  arrangement  for  ^attx,  fle^ft  btt. 


158  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [394 

Tland)  bimte  93Iumen  finb  on  bem  ©tranb; 
Wleine  Wluttei  1:)at  mand)  giilben^  ©etoanb!"  — 

„90^etn  ^atet,  mein  SSaterl  unb  preft  bit  ntd)t, 
SBq^"*  ©rienfonig  mir  leife  t)erf:prid)t?"  — 
15  „(Set  rul^tg,  Bleibe  ru!)tg,  mein  ^inb; 

Sn  biirren  33Idttern  foufelt  ber  SBinb!"  — 

„3StIIft,  feiner  ^nobe,  hu  mit  mir  gel)n? 
90?eine  Xbdjtev  foGen  bid^  iDarten^  fd^on; 
^e\m  Zbd)tex  fiil^reTt  ben  nadjtlidjen  ^cilj'n 
20  Unb  tciegen  nnb  tonsen  unb  fingen  bid)  ein!"*^  — 

„90?ein  SSater,  mein  Scoter!  unb  fte()ft  bu  nid)t  bort 
©rlfonigS  ^od)ter  om  biiftern  Ort?"  — 
,,a)^etn  ®of)n,  mein  ©ot^n,  xdj  W  e§  genou: 
(^^"^  fd^einen  bie  olten  SSeiben  fo  grau."  — 

25  "Sd)  lieBe  bx^,  mid)  reigt  beine  fd)one  ©eftolt; 

IXnb  bifts  bu  nid)t  tDillig,  fo  Brand)'  id)  (35etDaIt!"  — 
„2^ein  Scoter,  mein  Scoter,  ie^t  fafet  er  mid)  on! 
©rifonig  1:)at  mir  ein  2eib§^  getan!-' 

394  ^  Qiiltien  =  golden  —  note  poetical  omission  of  inflectional 
syllable. 

*  toaS  —  see  App.  1 70. 

^  biri^  ttiarten  =  wait  upon  you  —  a  somewhat  poetic  use.  Cf . 
tottttCtt  +  gen.     App.  122. 

^  ein— compounded  with  Uilegctt,  tttttjCtt,  ftttfiett  in  analogy  with 
etnfli^Iafen  (to  fall  asleep)  i.e.  they  will  rook  you,  dance  to  you  and  sing 
to  you  until  you  fall  asleep. 

^  e§ — introductory.     Translate:  It  is  the  old  willows  that,  etc. 

^  ftift  btt — inverted  because  in  this  conditional  sentence,  the  con- 
junction menu  is  omitted.     See  App.  188 

^etn  ficitig  getan  =  has  done  me  an  injury.  Cf.  etttltti  Jtt  leitJ 
gCtan*    ficibS  is  an  old  genitive  form. 


395-397]  MSSIVE  VOICE  159 

®em  SSater  groufet'S,!^  er  rettet  gefcf)tt)tnb ; 
30  (gr  fj'dlt  in  ben  Slrmen  ba§  dc^genbe  ^inb, 

©rrei(f)t  ben  §of  mtt  2)?uf)'  unb  9^ot;  — 
Sn  feinen  STrmen  ba§>  ^inh  —  tear  tot. 

395 


Weak 

Verbs 

to  rustle 

faufetn 

to  use     brauci^en 

to  rock 

h)iegen 

to  groan  dd^^eit 

to  dance 

tansen 

to  reach  erreictjeu  (cf .  reidjen 

to  charm, 
orovoke 

rei^en 

to  reach  for) 

396  EXERCISES 

1.  1.  ^eben  Sic  bic  SBortftcHung  (sentence  order)  eincr 
icben  Qeih  an  unb  3^re  ^riinbe  bafiir ! 

2.  SSerdnbern  (change)  Sie  bk  atoci  le^ten  S^i^f^n  im  erften 
9Ser§  fo,  ha^  bie  SBortfteflung  jnr  ^ntierfion  mirb.  Tlad)en  ®ie  bie 
SBortfteEung  in  ber  gnjeiten  Qeih  be§  britten  SSerfeS  gnr  nor- 
malen;  ond^  in  ber  tiicrten  Qeih  be§  t)ierten  3Serfeg,  nnb  in  ber 
Stneiten  S^ile  be§  fiebenten  ^ex\e^. 

3.  S5on  toem  tonrbe  ber  ^nobe  fic^er  gefafet  unb  getrogen? 
28q§  ift  Oon  bem  Slnoben  gefe^en  niorben?  3Son  mem  ift  ber  britte 
^ex§>  gefungen  morben?  28q§  mirb  bem  ^naben  t)on  bem  ®rlen= 
!dnig  t)erf|:)rod^en?i^  3Son  toem  inirb  ber  ndd)tlid^e  Zan^  gefiil^rt 
iDerben?  3Sa§  h)irb  fonft  nod^  Oon  ben  ^oc^tern  be§  ©rl!dnig§ 
getan  tDerben?  SSie  tourbe  ber  SSoIb  t)on  bem  SSoter  ongefel^en 
unb  toie  t)on  bem  ©df)nd)en?  SSoburd)  njor  ber  (Srifonig  gereiat 
morben?  2Bie  ift  ber  §of  bon  il^nen  erreid^t  tcorben? 

397  *°iiem  Skater  graufet  eS— impersonal  with  dative.     See  App.  139. 
Related  to  eS  gtaut  Wir.     Translate :  The  father  shudders  with  dread. 

"The  active  form  would  be-^er  ^rlenfiittig  uer^irir^t  bem  ftnabcn 
ettoaS;  tierfJireii^Ctt  takes  an  indirect  as  well  as  a  direct  object. 


160  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [398-399 

II.  Translate:  1.  In  the  father's  arms  the  little  child  was 
carried  safely  and  firmly.  2.  Why  do  you  ride  so  rapidly 
through  the  gloomy  forest?  3.  Upon  the  old  willows  the  fog 
appears  gray.  4.  Do  you  see  my  daughters  in  their  golden 
robes  by  the  shore?  5.  In  the  father's  arms  the  dead  child  was 
found. 


LESSON  JfS 
TRANSPOSED  ORDER 

398  SSenn  bcr  grueling  auf  bic  ^etgc  ftetgt     , 

SSettn  ber  grii^^Iitig  auf  bte  ^erge  ftetgt 
Unb  im  ©onnenftrolf)!  ber  ©d^nee  gerfliegt,^ 
3Benn  bo^  erfte  ©riin  am  93aum  \\6)  getgt 
Unb  im  ©ro^  ha^  erfte  Sliimlein  f^rtefet,^ 
5  SSenn  t)orBei  im  %al 

9^un  mit  einemmal^ 
5lEe  S^egenaeit  unb  SStnterqual, 
©djallt  es^  tjon  ben  ^ol)'n 
33t§  3um  ^ale  meit: 
10  „£),  tDte  inunberfc^on 

Sft  bte  SruI)Itng§3€tt!" 

SBenn  am  ©letfd^er  Iieife  bte  ©onne  ledft, 
SSenn  bte  QueEe  bon  ben  33ergen  f^ringt. 


399    1  The  ttjetttt  belongs  to  both  clauses.     If  it  did  not,  what  would 
be  the  order  of  the  second? 

2  tttttt  wit  ettteminal=all  at  once. 

3  Observe  that  the  inversion  here  is  caused  by  the  precedence  of 
the  dependent  clauses.     Note  the  same  in   ^rlfottig. 


400  402] 


PASSIVE  VOICE 


161 


15 


400 


5lIIe§  rtngg  mit  jungem  @run  fi(%  becft"^ 
Unb  bQ§  Suftgeton  ber  2SdIber  flingt, 

Siifte  Itnb  unb  lau 

aSiirgt  bte  griine  5Iu 

Unb  ber  ^immel  lad^t  fo  rein  unb  Blau, 

(SdjaUt  e§>  t)on  ben  ^ol^'n 

S3t§  3um  Sole  tDeit: 

„0,  tvie  n)unberfc£)on 

Sft  bie  SruWing^aett!" 

»oiicttftci)t. 


to  melt  away  jerfltegeu 

to  sprout       f  prie^en 

to  resound,      *r'    ^„„ 

ring  tlmgen 


to  resound, 
ring 

to  lick 


fc^affen 
teden 


Strong  Verbs 
aerflo^ 

!(ang 

Weak  Verbs 

to  cover 

to  scent, 
perfume 


aerfToffen 

gefproffen 

geflungen 

berfen 
tDur^en 


40 1  EXERCISE 

1.  3Bq§  ift  bte  SSortfteEung  in  alien  ©d^en,  bte  mit 
„n)enn"  anfangen?  SSarum?  SSeil  fie  S^ebenfd^e  finb.  2Ba§ 
ift  bie  £)rbnung  be^  ^auptfa^e^,  (principal  clause)  bem  ein 
D^ebenfa^  t)orange]^t?  ^ann  man  biefen  §auptfo^  normal  madden? 
SSie?  ^un  ©ie  e§>  fo  oft  aB  mdglid^!  Sefd)reiben  ©ie  einen 
@Ietf(f)er!  2So  toerben  ©letfc^er  gefunben?  2Somit  tuirb  im  3^^iil&= 
ling  aVie§>  gebecft?  ©d^reiben  ©ie  biefeS  @ebid)t  unb  aurf)  ben 
„@rI!onig"  in  ^rofa  um! 


402    *fl(!^  beift— one  could  say  betiedt  tiJtrb,  but  when  agent  is  not 
mentioned,  a  reflexive  verb  or  utlltt  +  active  is  more  usual. 


162  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [403-404 

LESSON  U 
CONJUNCTIONS 
403  Coordinate  (Followed  by  Normal  Order) 

(  aber     — copulative. 
^^^    ■{  allein    — adversative. 

'  jonbern — adversative  after  a  negative  statement, 
or     ober  and     unb  for    beiut 

Subordinate  (Followed  by  Transposed  Order) 


until 

bi§ 

while 

tod^renb 

as,  since 

ba 

because 

xotxi 

that 

txi"^ 

(    ttjenn* 

in  order  that 

bamtt 

when 

(    al§ 

whether 

ob 

If 

tpemi 

although 

obgteic^ 

after 

nac^bem 

as  long  as 

folange 

Adverbial  Conjunctions 
(Followed  by  Transposed  Order.) 


when? 

iDann? 

whence? 

tDo^er? 

why? 

marum? 

whither 

Ujo^in? 

wherefore? 

tDe§f)atb? 

with  what? 

iDomit? 

how? 

ft)ie? 

for  what? 

tDofiir? 

how  much? 

njieDiet? 

in  what? 

tporin? 

where? 

h)o? 

from  what? 

tDorau§? 

® 

i  e 

gf rtcb 

404 


5tu§  Idngft  bergangener  3eit  toirb  bie  folgenbe  @efd)i(f)te 
er3d]f)It.    ©irtft  tool^nte  tm  granfenlanbe  etn  tndd^tiger  ^ontg, 

*  tuenn  is  used  to  express  present  time  or  repeated  action ;  al&  to 
express  past  time. 


406]  PASSIVE  VOICE  163 

namenS  ©iegmunb,  bem^  biele  Sanbe^  untertan  toaxen.    92un 
trurbe  hem  ^ontg  ein  ©ol^n  geBoren,  ber  fid)  \d)on  al§  ^nabe 

5  bitrd^  QufeergelDo^nli^en  ^ut  unb  burd^  ^elbenftdrfe  au^* 
seidfinete. 

5ri§  (stegfrtcb,  benn  fo  l^te^  er,  noc^  ein  bungling  tvav,  3og 
er  f(f)on  in  hie  SSelt  nad)  5IBenteuern  au§.  SSdl^renb  er 
einft  burd^  eitten  finftern  SSoIb  3og,  in  hem  er  bon  Qllen 

10  ©eiten  t)on  iDilben  ^ieren,  ©rod^en  unb  Hngetitnten  he- 
hvofjt  iDurbe,  tvaxh  er  l^Io^Iid^  eine§  ntdc^tigen  ©rod^en^ 
getoa^r,  ber  einen  ^ii^a1§  ^utete.  ©ofort  ftUrste  fic^  ©iegfrieb 
auf  ha§>  Ziex  unb  Balb  tvax  hex  ©rod^e  mit  bem  ©d^toert  er- 
JdilogenS  ha^  t)on  bem  ^elben  felbft  berfertigt  morben  tear, 

15  unb  ha^  t)on  niemanb  fonft  getragen  n)erben^  fonnte. 

5IBer  beim  ^am^fe  n^ar  ha§>  2^radienblut  iiber  iJin  gefloffen, 
unb  n)o  e§  il^n  beriil^rt  l)atte,  tvax  ex  unt)ern)unbbar  getuorben. 
^TEein  eine  ©telle  tear  berfdiont  geblieben;^  benn  gJDifd^en  bie- 
©d^ultern  tvax  ilfim  ein  Sinbenblott  gefaH^n,  ha  tvax  bie  ©telle 

20  trodfen  geblieben,  tva§>  it)m  footer  ha§^  Ceben  foftete.  5(ber  je^t 
mer!te  er  nid)t§  babon,  fonbern  aog  frol^Iid^  tceiter,  nadftbem 
er  fid^  he§>  ^d^ai^e^i^  bemod^tigt  l)atte.  villein  er  bemerfte  gu 
feinem  grofeen  ©rftaunen,  bofe  il^m  bie  ^pxadje  hex  SSogel  nun 
^Id^Iid)  tjerftdnblidf)  getDorben  tvax,  benn  ha§>  ^rad^enblut  'f^aite 

25  iljm  biefe  Tlad)t  gcgcben. 

405    ^  tiem— dat.  with  adj.  Utttertatt.     See  App.  146. 

^  8ttttilC— the  more  poetical  form  for  gdttlier.  See  bttS  SBort,  with 
its  double  plural,  App.  26. 

^  elttCg ^taii^m— genitive  with  adj.  gcttltt^t.    See  App.  125. 

*ttiar  Ctjii^lafiCtt  =  was  killed.     Is  this  a  passive?    See  App.  219. 

^  Note  form  of  passive  infinitive.     See  App.  79. 

^ttJttt  Hcrf(i^Ottt  gclbUcBen  =  had  been  spared.  bleiBett  is  often  used 
where  in  English  we  use  to  he ,  to  represent  a  stationary  condition. 
Cf.  ili^  Blctfie  fie^en,  I  stand  still,  id^  Btcifie  fl^cn,  I  keep  my  seat. 

^  tie§  Sd^a^cS — gen.  with  reflexive  verb.     See  App.  224. 


164  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [406 

Solgenbeg  Sieb  erga^It  hie  @ef(f)id)te  bon  feinem  <Bd)tt)exi: 

Stegfrieb)^  (Sc^toert 

Sung  ©tegfrieb  Voav  ein  ftolser  ^nab\ 
(Sing^  bon  be§  3Sater§  33urg  !)€rQb, 
•  SSoEf  ^  roften  nid)t  in  3Sater§  §qu§, 

30  3SoIIt'^  iDQnbern  in  oEe  SBelt  ]^inau§. 

33egegnet'9  il^m  mancf)  Skitter  tuert 
90ltt  feftem  ©c^tlb  unb  Breitem  ©d^mert. 
©tegfrteb  nur  elnen  'Bteden  lrug;i^ 
S)a§  tear  tl^m  bitter  unb  Idb  genug  — 

35  Unb  al§  er  ging  im  finftern  SSalb, 

^oni  er  3U  einer  ©d&miebe  bolb. 
2)a  fol^  er  ©ifen  unb  ©taf)I  genug; 
©in  luftig^i  S^uer  glammen  fc^Iug.  — 
„£)  SO^eifter,  liebfter  9D?cifter  mein, 

40  Sofe^^  'on  mi(^  beinen  ©efeEen  fein; 

Unb  Iel)r  bu  mirf)  mit  Sleife  unb  5I(f)t, 
SSie  man  bie  guten  ©(^toerter  mod^t!"  — 
©iegfricb  ben  §aninter  rt)oI)I  fd)tDingen  funnt,^^ 
©r  f(f)lug  ben  5Imbo6  in  ben  ©runb. 

45  ©r  fd^Iug,  ha%  tveii  ber  SSoIb  erflang 

Unb  Qll€§  ©ifen  in  (Stitc!e  fprang. 
Unb  t)on  ber  le^ten  ©ifenftang'  \^ 

Tlad)V  er  ein  ©c^tuert,  fo  Breit  unb  lang. 
„9^un  ^ab'  id)  gef(f)miebet  ein  gute§  ©(fitcert; 

M  9^un  bin  id}  tvie  onbre  Skitter  trert. 

9^un  fd^Iag'  icf)  tcie  ein  onbrer  §elb 
®ie  ^Riefen  unb  S)ra(f)en  in  2SaIb  unb  gelbl" 

igubttitg  UPanti. 

406    ^  filttfi  —  coordinate  with  mat,  hence  same  relative  position. 
^BtfiCgttCt.    In  prose  there  would  be  no  reason  for  inversion. 
^"  truft — such  transposition  is  frequent  in  poetic  usage. 
^^  lufhg — poetic  omission  of  inflectional  syllable. 
^'  la^....feilt  =  do  let  me  be  your  apprentice. 
"  funttt — archaic  form  of  fottttte.    For  order  see  note  10. 


407-409]  Ly^ '    PASSIVE  VOICE  165 

407  Strong  Verb"^ 

to  pass      t)er9e^en  ttergiug  oergangen 

to  bear      gebftreu  geBar  geboren 

to  flow       fliefeen  flog  gefloffen 

to  resound  er!Ungen  erflang  erflungen 

Weak   Verbs 
to  threaten  bebrO^en  to  rest    rofteu 

to  make      terferttgeu  to  forge  fc^ntteben 

to  spare      jjetf  c^oneu 

408  EXERCISES 

I.  1.    3Serdnbern    ©te    aHe    normalen    (Sa^e    ber    oBigen 
@ef(f)id)te4o  ha%  hie  SSortfoIge  aur  Snt)erfion  tDirb!  (^teUen*  ©te  C^ 
in  aEen  ©d^en,  bie  3nt)er[ion  seigen,  bie  normale  SSortfoIge  l^er! 
©d^retben  ©ie  aHe  92ebenfd^e  au§  unb  madden  ©te  btefelBen  3u 
^Quptfd^en!    ©rgdfilen  ©ie  bie  33QlIabe  in  ^rofa! 

II.  Translate:  1.  The  mighty  king  to  whom  many  lands 
were  subject  had  become  old,  on  which  account  he  needed 
his  son  at  home.  2.  The  boy  did  not  remain  at  home,  but 
went  away  in  search  of  adventures.  3.  When  he  became  aware 
of  the  dragon  in  the  dark  woods,  he  rushed  upon  him  and  slew 
him.  4.  A  linden  leaf  fell  between  his  shoulders,  so  that  this 
place  was  vulnerable. 

LESSON  Jt5 

409  GRAMMAR  REVIEW 

1.  The  passive  voice  is  formed  of  ttierben  and  the  past  parti- 
ciple of  the  verb.  When  used  as  passive  auxiliary  the  past 
participle  of  toerbett  has  no  augment. 

2.  The  substitutes  for  the  passive   are   matt  +  active  and 

*  Jerfictten  =  restore,  \/^ 

/ 


166  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [410 

reflexive  form  of  verb.     These  are  used  when  the  agent  is  not 
expressly  mentioned. 

3.  The  preposition  of  agency  is  tion  (with  dative),  of  means 
is  bur^  (with  accusative). 

4.  The  order  of  words  in  a  German  sentence  is: 

(«)  Normal — Subject,  verb,  adjuncts. 
(J)  Inverted — Verb,  subject,  adjuncts. 
(c)  Transposed — Subject,  adjuncts,  verb. 

a — Used  in  independent  statements  beginning  with  subject. 

h — Used  in  independent  statements  beginning  with  an 
adjunct  (word,  phrase,  or  clause);  also  in  questions  and  com- 
mands. 

c — Used  in  dependent  statements. 

4IO  EXERCISES 

I.  Write  the  third  person  sing,  passive  indie,  of  entjurfcn, 
Befleigen,  fe^en. 

II.  Write  three  sentences  in  normal  order.  Change  them 
to  inverted  order;  to  transposed  order. 

III.  Translate:  1.  The  cities  of  which  much  (t)iete§)  has 
been  said  are  situated  on  large  streams.  2.  Many  men  have 
been  charmed  by  the  splendor  of  German  cities  and  the  beauty 
of  the  villages.  3.  By  means  of  the  mighty  mountains  great 
watersheds  are  formed.  4.  The  moaning  child  is  held  fast 
in  his  father's  arms.  5.  When  the  spring  climbs  the  moun- 
tains the  snow  melts  in  the  sun.  6.  The  zephyrs  are  soft 
and  mild  when  the  first  flower  of  spring  appears.  7.  The 
dragon  was  killed  by  Siegfried,  who  had  always  distinguished 
himself  by  his  courage.  8.  Siegfried  had  been  made  invulner- 
able by  the  blood  of  the  dragon  in  which  (tDortn)  he  had  bathed. 
9.  The  dragon  was  soon  slain  by  the  brave  young  knight  who 
had  made  the  sword.  10.  Then  he  went  out  in  search  of  adven- 
tures, although  his  father  was  old  and  feeble  (fd^toad^). 


411  412] 


MODAL  AUXILIAEIES 


167 


CHAPTER   VIII 
MODAL  AUXILIARIES 

LESSON  J,6  ■ 


PRESENT  TENSE 

4 1  I  The  modal  auxiliaries  express  the  mood  of  the  actor 
toward  the  action.  They  are  irregular  in  form,  since  the  form 
used  to  express  the  present  is  an  old  preterite  of  a  strong  verb, 
the   other   forms  of   which   have   been   lost.     There  are   six: 


fbnnctt     (possibility),     mogctt*^  (desire),    muHeit    (compulsion). 

turfctt    (permission),    ttHJUctt    (intention), 

fottcn  (d 

esire   from 

without). 

i^       !ann 

mag 

mug 

barf 

tt)ill 

foil 

bu       fannft 

tuagft 

mugt 

barfft 

hjillft 

foUft 

er        faitu 

mag 

mug 

barf 

h)ia 

fon 

toir     fonneu 

mogeu 

miiffeu 

biirfeu 

njotteu 

folleu 

i^r      fount 

mogt 

mugt 

burft 

moUt 

font 

fie       fouueu 

mogeu 

miiffeu 

biirfeu 

moUeu 

follen 

©ic     fonuen 

mogeu 

miiffeu 

biirfeu 

tDoHeu 

foUen 

Imperative 

fijuue 

moge 

miiffe 

biirfe 

njoUe 

foHe 

4  1 2     Observe  that  the 

personal 

endings 

are  not  those  of  the 

present  but  those  of  the 

preterite 

tense  of  strong  verbs,  as  the 

correspondence 

below  will  show 

Present  of  fiJnttCtt 

Preterite  of  fUttttlCtt 

ic^ 

fauu 

i 

(^  f)3auu 

\!i\x  fauuft 

bu  fpauuft 

er 

fonu 

er  fpauu 

^  For  fuller  discussion  of  meanings  see  App.  230-248. 


168  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [413-415 

4  1 3  The  infinitive  without  ju  is  used  with  the  modal  auxil- 
iaries and  with  laffen.  This  last  verb,  however,  is  not  a  preterite- 
present.  SBiffcn  is  a  preterite-present,  but  cannot  omit  the 
sign  of  the  infinitive. 

td^  n?ei6  .    ton  njtffen 

bu  meigt  i^r  tt)igt 

er  toeig  fie  (@ie)  tuiffen 

414  mttan  btc  3)iutter 

O  fiifee  Splutter,  2)er  Srii!)Itng  Qudet 

^d)  fann  n\d)t  fpinnen;  §eE  burd^  bie  ©tfieiben; 

S(^  iann  ni(f)t  fi^en  2Ber  fann  nun  ft^en, 

Sm  ©tiiblein  innen^  SSer  fann  nun  bktben 

3m  engen  §qu§.  Hub  fleiBtg  fein? 

©§  ftoc!t  ba§  ^^dbd&en,  O  Iqb  micf)  ge:^en 

©§  reifet  ha§>  5db(f)en;  Hub  lafe  mic£)  fel)en, 

£)  fu(3C  9[y^utter,  £)b  trf)  fann  fliegen^ 

^cf)  mufe  !)tnau§.2  SSie  .^dgelein. 

£)  lafe  mid)  fe!)en,         1 
O  lafe  mic^  loufd^en,  <J 
2So  Siiftlein  toel^en, 
3So  33a(^kin  rauf(f)en, 
SSo  mixmMn  bm!)'n! 
Safe  fte^  mt(^  ^flitcfen 
Hub  fc^bn  mir^  fc^miicfen 
2)ie  braunen  Socfen 
2)?tt  buntem  @riin! 

415  ^  itltlCtt  —  poetic  tautological  form.  Translate :  In  the  little 
room. 

2.mufe  ^inattS— supply  gc^en.    See  App.  230. 
^  fann  ^iegcn— note  order.     Cf.  App.  90,  III. 

^  la^  flc  mit^  JJplfcn  =  let  me  pluck  them.     The  object  of  lafe  is 
Jttt^,  of  ))Hu^en  is  flc.     Euphony  decides  this  order. 
^  mit— possessive  dative  with  §orfcn-    See  App.  144. 


416-417]  MODAL  AUXILIARIES  169 

416  .  Strong  Verb 

to  tear    reigeu        rig        geriffen 

Weak  Verbs 

to  stop    ftocfen  to  blow,  waft  it) e^en 

to  peep    guden  to  murmur    rauf(f)en 

to  listen  laufd^eit  to  bloom         bluf)eit 

4  I  7  EXERCISES^ 

I.  S)Q§  iunge  9P?abd^en  foE  ft^en  unh  fpinrtcn,  obex  e§  tDtG 
l^iuQuSgelfien  unb  fptelcn.  S^orf  C5  ge^en?  3Scnn  il)re  ftrcnge 
SDiutter  e§  tuilL  Slber  bie  abutter  fagt:  „^u  mu§t  511  §aufe  bleiben 
unb  bid)  QTi  bie  tdglic^e  ^Trbeit  mad)cn.  2)u  bift  cin  faulc§  2)^db= 
djcn  unb  eine  fd)Ied)te  ^od)ter."  SBa§  tt)ill  bie  ftrenge  SO^uttcr 
nidjt?  3Sq§  fonn  bos  a)?abd)cn  ntd)t?  SSa§  foK  fie?  SSill  fie  boS? 
SSag  triE  fie  tun?  2Sa?^  mag  fie  nid)t  tun?  2:arf  fie  ()inQu§?  2m 
hk  ftrenge  SO^utter  bie  junge  ^od)t€r  im  griinen  Selbe  fpielen? 
^ann  fie  gel^en,  njenn  fie  tDiE?  WaQ  fie  gel^en?  orf  fie  gefien? 
3SQ5  fon  fie  tun? 

II.  Translate:  1.  You  may  go  now  if  you  wish.  2.  Do 
you  want  to  go  out  or  to  remain  in  the  house?  3.  Young 
Siegfried  wants  to  make  himself  a  strong  sword.  4.  He  says  to 
the  master:  "May  I  forge  a  sword  on  your  anvil?"  5.  The 
master  answered:  **If  you  can  use  this  heavy  hammer,  you 
may  use  the  anvil,  hut  you  must  not  strike  it  into  the  ground.'* 
6.  The  young  students  at  the  German  gymnasium  are  sup- 
posed to  study  thirty  hours  a  week.*  7.  We  have  to  stay  in 
the  house,  although  all  is  green  without.  8.  While  the  little 
children  are  permitted  to  run  about  (umt)er(aufen)  the  older  peo- 
ple must  remain  indoors  and  work. 

*SeeApp   100,5. 


170  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [418-420 

4 1 8  Caution:  German  and  English  auxiliaries^  are  cog- 
nates, i.e.,  they  are  from  the  same  root.  But  in  the  course  of 
time  some  have  developed  new  meanings,  so  that  they  no  longer 
correspond  in  the  two  languages.  For  instance,  mag  cannot 
usually  be  translated  by  may,  nor  does  shall  usually  translate 
fatten.  The  only  safe  method  is  to  become  acquainted  with 
the  general  meaning  and  translate  from  it.  When  the  Eng- 
lish word  expresses  permissioji  the  German  will  be  barf,  when 
the  English  expresses  desire  the  German  will  be  mag.  Note 
especially  the  divergence  of  dare  and  barf.  They  are  not 
at  all  related.  The  English  dare  is  expressed  by  the  weak 
verb  ttiagen:    He  dared  to  go,  er  tuaglc  e§,  gu  ge()en. 

LESSOjV  47 
PRETERITE  OF  MODAL  AUXILIARIES 

419  The  preterite  is  formed  from  the  infinitive  stem  on  the 
analogy  of  the  weak  conjugation,  but  if  the  infinitive  exhibits 
an  umlaut,  the  preterite  indicative  does  not  retain  it. 

Infinitive  Preterite  Infinitive  Preterite 

fannen  fanntc  burfen  burftc 

magen  inad^tc  nJoHen  tvoUit 

miiffen  mn^it  fotlen  fotttc 

In  translation  care  must  be  exercised  to  find  proper 
English  equivalents,  since  the  English  language  has  not  adopted 
these  new  weak  formations  to  make  up  for  the  wearing  away  of 
old  forms,  but  has  left  them  defective.  Thus  the  preterite  of 
must  is  rendered  by  tuas  obliged  to,  had  to ;  f otten  is  rendered 
by  is  to,  falltc  by  was  to,  etc. 

420  <S  t  e  g  f  r  t  e  b 

(gortfe^ung) 
"^Iflnn  foUte^  ©iegfrieb  fcin  slneiteS  unb  grofeteS  Slbenteuer 
bcfteften.    Sn  ber  Serne  fonnte  er  einen  madittgen  geuerf(f)ein 

^  fottte  •   ,j  •  fteftc|ett  =  was  destined  to  encounter. 


421-422]  MODAL  AUXILIARIES  171 

fei^en.    ^teugterig  rttt  er  boraiif  Io§,2  bamit  er  fe^en  fonnte, 
tDQ§  baS'  War.     ?iad)bem  er  cine  ©trerfc  gerittcn  tvat,  fam  €r 

5  an  ein  ftoIseS  ©d^Iofe,  ha§>  rtngc>um  t)on  einer  lobcrnben  5euer= 
maucr  umgeBen  tvax.  Tlan  fonnte  nid^t  ijtnburd^.^  Obgletd) 
ha§>  ?>euer  fc^recfltd)  gen  §tmmel  flammte,  gab  ©iegfrteb,  bem 
5urd)t  iinbefannt  tvat,  fcinem  9^o6  bie  ©porcn  unb  iDoUte  fid] 
in  bie  Jlomme  ftiir^en.    ^llfcin  foBalb  er  bie  lobernbe  S^onrme 

10  berii^rte,  fonf  bicfelbe  nieber,  \o  ba%  ©iegfrieb  ungel)inbert 
l^inburd^  reiten  fonnte. 

2Sor  il)m  lag  nun  bno  gel)eimm§t>one  ©c^tog,  wovin  feiue 
lebenbe  ©eele  an  fein  fdjien.  5IIIcin  im  Saal  foUtc  er  fein 
fd^onfteg  5lbenteucr  finbcn.     2)q  lag,  in  ticfem  ©c^Iaf,  eine 

15  rtnnberfd^one  2Raib,  gang  in  ^^^an^er  gepUt.  ©iegfrieb  toolltc 
fie  genauer  fcf)en  unb  biidte  fid^  gu  ir)r  nieber,  naljm  it)t  ben 
(Bdjilh  unb  loderte  b€n  '^^^anjer.  ®r  fonnte  il^re  5tugen  nidjt 
fel^en,  ba  fie  feft  gef(^Ioffen  tDaren.  ©o  rief  er:  „2Sa(^e  auf, 
bu  l^errltd^e  ^aib,  unb  blide  mid)  an!" 

20  ®od&  er  fonnte  fie  fo  nidjt  meden,  fie  fd^Iicf  3u  feft.  2)a 
fiifete  er  fie  auf  ben  roten  90?unb  unb  fie  mufete  bie  I^errlid^en 
5rugen  auffd)Iagen,  unb  burfte  if)m  i^ren  ^amen  fagcn. 

42  I  Strong  Verbs 

to  surround   uiTtgeben  umgab  umgeben 

to  sink  finfen  fan!  gefiinfen 

to  open  (eyes)  auffd)(agen  fc^Uig  ouf  aufgefd)tagen 

Weak  Verbs 

to  flare  lobem  to  loosen      toderu 

to  envelop      i^uUeU  to  awaken    \wdtn 

to  bend        fid^  budeu  to  kiss       fuffeu 

422    ^  tiarauf  lo8=rode  up  to  it.    The  adverb  Io§  (literally  loose)  is  used 
in  many  compounds  to  denote  determined,  sometimes  violent  action. 
3  Supply  fommctt- 


172  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [423-426 

423  EXERCISES 

I.  8e^en  @ie  bie  obtge  ^efd^td^te  in  ha^  $rdfen§  urn! 

II.  @e^en  (Ste  ben  erften  Zdl  btefer  (^efc^i^te  in  ha§>  ^mper* 
fe!t  itm! 

III.  ilberfe|en  @ie:  1.  He  was  to  encounter  a  wonderful 
adventure  in  the  proud  old  castle  that  stood  in  the  dark  forest. 
2.  He  had  to  ride  through  a  flaming  wall  of  fire  before  he  could 
reach  the  beautiful  maiden.  3.  The  brave  youth  wanted  to  see 
her  face,  but  she  was  completely  covered  by  her  armor.  4.  He 
may  loosen  the  armor  and  kiss  her  red  mouth.  5.  He  is  destined 
to  awaken  her,  if  he  will.  6.  She  cannot  tell  him  her  name,  but 
must  love  the  man  who  can  ride  through  the  fire. 

LESSON  4-8 
PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  OF  MODAL  AUXILIARIES 

424  The  perfect  tenses  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  are  formed 
by  means  of  the  tense  auxiliary  ^abtn  and  the  perf .  part,  of  the 
modal.  If  no  infinitive  complement  follows,  this  participle  is 
the  ordinary  weak  form. 

With  an  infinitive  complement,  however,  the  old  strong 
perfect  participle  is  used.  This  has  no  augment  and  is  identical 
in  form  with  the  infinitive.     Hence  we  have : 

t^  ^abe  ha^  gcfonnt  t^  ^abe  ha§>  inn  fotttten 

tc^  ^aU  ha§>  gcmoi^t  ic§  ^aht  ha^  inn  miigctt        v 

bn  f)aft  ba§  gcmup  bu  1^a\i  \)a^  inn  muffcn        < 

er  ^at  ba§  gcbutft  er  ^at  ha^  inn  tiurfcn 

tvit  ^aben  ha^  gettiollt  n)tr  ^aben  ha^  inn  toaUtn 

it}v  1)aU  ha^  gcfottt  i^r  1)aU  'i)a^  inn  fottcn 

425  S  i  c  9  f  r  i  c  b 

9^un  ^at  fie  i;^m  erga^Ien  muffen,  tner  fie  tvai  unb  tnie  fie 
in  biefe  Sage  {)atte  fontmen  fonnen.^ 

426  ^  Note  that  in  transposed  order,  the  tense  auxiliary  is  placed 
just  before  the  two  complements,  instead  of,  as  usual,  at  the  very  end. 


427-428]  MODAL  AUXILIARIES  173 

,,'^dj  l^eifee  33runl)ilb,  unb  bin  fruiter  eine  SSalfiire  geiDefen. 
9P^it  meinen  ©dimeftern  f^aht  ic^  burd)  bie  Siifte^  fol^ren 
5  biirfen,  unb  ^ahe  ben  ta^feren  §elben  anf  ben  ®d}lac^tfelbern 
r)elfen  biirfen.  SScnn  fie  aber  fielen,  I)abe  id)  il)re  ©eelen  bon 
hen  ©djiadjtfelbern  I)oIen-unb  fie  nac§  SBal^oUa,^  tDO  bie  ©otter 
iDo^nen,  bringen  miiffen. 

2)a  follte  id)  einmol  eincn  ta^fercn  ^elben  I)oIen,  aber  id} 
10  l^abe  nid)t  getoollt,  benn  er  tvav  mir  gu  lieb.    S<^  ftt^be  i!)n  nic^t 
tDoHen  fterben  laffen,  fo  l^abe  id)  il^m  gel^olfen,   gegen  ben 
SSillen  SBobon?^. 

5lber  ben  ©ottern^  barf  man  nid^t  tro^en,  fie  fonnen  fid^ 

furd^tbar  rad^en.     SSoban  I)at  nid)t  getDoEt,  bofe  jener  §elb 

15  Icben  follte,  fo  l)at  er  i^n  felbft  gctbtet  unb  mid)  I)at  er  furd^tbar 

geftraft.     3a!)r]^unbert€S  I)abe  id)   fd)lafen   miiffen,   n)d!)renb 

meine  ©d^tceftern  mit  ben  SSoIfen  reiten  burften,  unb  einem 

2Renfd^en  mufe  idf)  nun  angel^bren,  id),  Ue  ftolse  SSalfiire! 

2)odb  €ine  ©unft  l^at  mir  ber  5lEt)ater  gen)al)rt.    ^d)  l^abe 

20  feinem  (Sd^n)ad)Iing  angepren  mbgen,  fonbern  nur  bem  ftdrf» 

ften  ber  90^dnner,  unb  biefer  ftdrf fte  bift  hu ;  brum  ^aft  bu  mm 

hie  S3runt)ilb  meden  burfen,  ©iegfrieb,  §errlid)fter  ber  90^en- 

fd)en!" 

427  Weak  Verbs  ' 

to  belong  to  aitgel^oren  to  punish     ftrafen 

to  defy        tro^en  to  grant      gett)dt)ren 

428  ^  Note  plural  form  of  bie  Sttft,  not  easily  translated.    One  might 
say,  through  the  clouds. 

^  28 ttl^ttff a— according  to  Germanic  mythology,  the  abode  of  the 
gods,  where  they  meet  for  drinking  bouts  after  days  of  happy  hunting, 
and  whither  heroes  that  die  on  the  field  of  battle  are  brought  by  the 
Valkyries. 

*bCtt  ©ottcttt— dative  with  tro^eit.     Cf.  App.  138 

^  3tt|r|tmJJCrte— ace.  of  duration  of  time. 


174  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [429-431 

429  EXERCISES 

I.  (Se^en  <Bk  biefe  (S^efc^ic^te  in  ba§  3m^erfe!t  um! 

ir.  @ejen  @ie  bie  ©ef^ic^te  auf  @eite  171  in  ba§  ^erfeft  um! 

III.  Translate:  1.  The  proud  valkyrie  had  been  obliged 
to  become  subject  to  a  mortal,  but  she  was  permitted  to 
choose  the  bravest  for  her  master.  2.  She  had  not  been  able 
to  defy  the  gods,  for  these  can  avenge  themselves  dreadfully. 
3.  The  father  of  gods  and  men  had  not  wished  to  let  the  hero 
live,  but  the  valkyrie  wanted  to  save  him.  4.  She  was  com- 
pelled to  sleep  for  centuries,  and  could  not  be  awakened  except 
(au§er)  by  the  bravest  of  men.  o.  She  was  destined  to  kill  the 
hero,  but  she  would  not,  hence  she  had  to  suffer  (ieiben). 


LESSON  J^9  *  ^ 


FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  MODAL  AUXILIARIES  AND 
PASSIVE  INFINITIVES 

430    The  future  tense  of  modal  auxiliaries  is  formed  regularly : 
ic^  tDerbe  fonnen,  id)  n^erbe  geben  fomten,  etc. 

The  future  perfect  shows  the  same  variation  that  we  have 
observed  in  the  other  perfect  tenses:  ii^  ttJCrbe  gcfonttt  ^abett; 
i(^  ttierbe  ^aben  ge^en  fonnen. 

In   the    last  example   Ijttbcn   precedes    ge^cn    and    fiinncn 

instead  of  following  them.     Note  this  tendency  to  end  the  sen- 
tence with  the  modal  auxiliary. 

S(tf{cn  is  used  like  the  modal  auxiliaries,  with  the  meaning 
to  have  (something  done).  It  may  be  substituted  for  the  passive 
voice.     See  App.  84  and  220,  221. 

43  I     The  modal  auxiliaries  may  take  a  passive  infinitive  com- 
plement : 

td^  !ann  gcfc^cn  tncrben 

bu  magft  gclobt  mcrbcn 

er  ttjitt  bcrgeficn  tuerbcn 

Observe  that  the  passive  infinitive  is  simply  the  perfect  par- 
ticiple of  the  verb  and  tucrbcn. 


432  433J  MODAL  AUXILIARIES  175 

432  ^itmf)iihe§  Xxanm 

3m  ^urguuberlonbe^  lebte  bamaB,  aU  ©iegfrieb  ^run= 
^ilb  au§  ben  lobernbcn  Slammen  '^att^  retlen  biirfen,  em 
munberfd^one^  ^omgsfinb,  nomen^  ^tieml^ilb-.  3!)re  brei 
^Brliber  tDoren  ^ontge  unb  alle  t)ier  tDo]()nten  fie,  sujammen 

5  mit  t^rer  Tlnttev,  3u  2Sorm§.^  2!a  gefd^Qlj  e§>  etnmal,  ha^  bte 
^^Jrinaeffin  ctnen  ^raum  t)aite,  ber  i^r  md)t  au§>  hem  ^opf 
tDoIIte.^    ®en  mufetc  fie  t!)rer  SO^utter  ergafjlen. 

„5m  ^raume  l^atte  ic^  einen  tDunberfd^iJnen  galfen,  ber  mtr 
fel^r,  fel^r  lieb  tt)ar.    ^d)  troEte  i!)n  immer  bel^alten,  bod}  5rt)et 

10  ^Tore  fomen  unb  loteten  il)n  bor  meinen  Sfugen.  2)q§  tat 
mir  furd^tbar  tDe!)!""*  Sa  fagte  i^re  9??utter:  „S)er  ^raum 
Bebentet,  bofe  bu  einen  9titter  lieben  mirft  unb  tl^n  bein  gan^e^ 
2eBen^  tuirft  Bei  bir  Bel)alten  n)oIIen.  Stud)  tDirft  bu  iDieber 
t)on  i^m  geliebt.     5lber  belfialten  iDirft  bu  il)n  nid^t  fonncn, 

15  benn  er  tuirb  auf  SIbcnteuer  ouSgel^en  tooVien.  ©djlimme 
geinbe  nierben  il^n  ergreifen,  unb  bu  trirft  il^n  t)€rlieren 
miiffen."  Sie  Swngfrau  aBer  fpradj:  „@]^€  mir  foldf)  ein  Seib 
gefd^e^en  foE,  toerbe  id^  niemals  lieben!"  ,,'^a",  fagte  bie 
toeife  grau  Ute,  bie  SO^utter  ber  Jungfrau,  „o5  bu  triEft  ober 

20  uid)t,  tuenn  bie  3eit  fommt,  luirft  bu  fd^on  lieben  miiffen, 
ba§>  tcirft  bu  nid^t  t)crf)inbern  fonnen!"  llnb  fo  fam  €§  oud). 
2;enn  ©iegfrieb,  ber  bie  fd)one  S3run!)itb  t^erlaffen  l)atte,  um 
meftr  5Ibenteuer  3u  fuc^en,  !am  nad^  2Borm§. 


433    ^  SttrftUttiJerltttlbe  =  land  of  the  Burgundians. 
'^  Jtt  33orm§ — observe  the  use  of  the  preposition. 
^  tiiotttc— supply  ge^Ctt.    See  App.  230. 

*  iia§  tttt  mir tiie^  =  that  hurt  me. 

^  What  accusative  construction  is  this?    See  App.  169. 


176 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[434-436 


Srau  Ute  Itefe  tftn  einen  Saubevtvani  trinfen,^  ben  fie  t)on 
25  einer  Wlaqh  l^atte  Brauen  laffen^.  S)kfer  mad)te,  bafe  feine 
erfte  SieBe  t)on  tlim  tjergejfen  tDerben  mufete.  2!ann  fal^  er 
^rieml)ilb.  ©te  l^at  bon  il^m  gelteBt  trerben  biirfen.  STBer 
bef)alten  tvhb  fie  il^n  nid)t  fonnen;  benn  er  tDirb  t)on  il^ren 
eioenen  Sriibern  getotet  tuerben. 


434 


to  happen  gefd)e!f)en 
to  keep  bel^alteu 
to  leave     terlaffcu 

to  mean      BebeuteU 


Strong  Verbs 


gefdia!) 
bef)iett 
uerlie^ 


Weak  Verbs 

to  hinder 


gefc^e^en 
bef)atten 
tertaffeu 

t)eri)inberu 


435 


EXERCISES 


I.'*'  1.  S!Ba§  tr)irb  ^riemftilb  mcf)t  tun  iDoEen?    SSarum  nid)t? 

2.  SStrb  fie  e§  t)er!)inbern  fonnen?    SSer  fagt  boS? 

3.  2Sa^  n^irb  ^rieml&ilb  berlteren  miiffen?    SSie?    SSa§  tDirb 
iI)nT  gef(f)e!)en? 

4.  SKtrb  fie  il)ren  treuen  Skitter  bel^alten  biirfen? 

5.  SSie  tt)irb  e§  if)m  ergel)en? 

6.  ^on  tDem  foH  ©iegfrieb  getotet  merben? 

7.  SBoburd^  l^at  33run]&ilb  bergeffen  trerben  fonnen? 

II.  Trmislate:  1.  Siegfried  will  have  to  forget  his  first  love. 
2.  He  will  be  allowed  to  marry  the  beautiful  Kriemhild.  3. 
But  he  will  be  killed  by  her  three  brothers,  who  are  the  eagles 
of  whom  (ttJObon)  Kriemhild  dreamed.  4.  Brunhild  will  be 
forgotten  by  her  lover.  5.  Kriemhild  will  not  be  able  to  keep 
her  lover. 


436    ^  Itefe  i^tt trittfen  =  had  him  drink. 

^  Itttte  irauetl  laffen  =  had  brewed.  Observe  difference  in  the  two 
constructions  just  noted.  In  the  second,  the  braum  has  a  passive 
meaning.     See  App.  248. 


437-438]  MODAL  AUXILIARIES  177 

LESSON  50 

437  GRAMMAR  REVIEW 

1.  The  six  modal  auxiliaries  are  preterite-presents,  i.  e.,  the 
present  forms  are  lost  and  are  replaced  by  the  old  preterites 
which  retain  the  strong  preterite  endings.  New  preterites  and 
participles  are  formed  on  the  infinitive  stems  in  analogy  with 
the  weak  conjugation.     For  full  inflection,  see  App.  81. 

2.  The  perfect  tenses  have  two  forms  according  as  the 
auxiliary  is  used  with  or  without  an  infinitive  complement. 
See  App.  82. 

3.  SlBiffcn  is  a  preterite-present,  but  cannot  omit  the  sign  of 
the  infinitive.     See  App.  83. 

4.  Saffcn  is  not  a  preterite-present,  but  takes  the  same 
construction  as  the  modal  auxiliaries  and  has  an  idiomatic  pas- 
sive meaning.     See  App.  84. 

5.  The  modal  auxiliaries  may  have  a  passive  infinitive 
complement,  which  is  composed  of  the  perfect  participle  of  the 
verb  and  tUCtben. 

438  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

I.  Translate:  1.  The  mother  of  the  princess  had  a  potion 
brewed.  2.  She  will  let  the  young  knight  drink  it.  3.  Brun- 
hild will  have  to  be  forgotten  by  her  lover  because  of  this  potion. 
4.  The  brave  valkyrie  cannot  ride  through  the  clouds  with 
her  sisters.  5.  She  must  lie  asleep  for  centuries  until  the 
bravest  of  the  knights  can  release  her.  6.  She  had  wanted  to 
disobey  the  father  of  gods  and  men.  7.  One  may  not  defy  the 
gods;  they  can  punish  dreadfully.  8.  Siegfried  was  destined 
•to  awaken  the  most  beautiful  maiden  with  a  kiss.  9.  He  was 
destined  to  be  killed  by  her  brothers.  10.  They  were  per- 
mitted to  kill  him. 

II.  Relate  the  last  story  in  the  preterite  and  perfect  tenses. 


178  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [439-440 


CHAPTER  IX 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

LESSON  51 

PRESENT  THIRD  PERSON  SINGULAR 
Indirect  Discourse 

439  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  German  to  express  not  a 
fact  but  a  supposition.  This  supposition  may  be  based  on 
fact  or  not,  but  if  the  speaker  implies  the  slightest  shade  of 
doubt  or  indirection  as  existing  either  in  his  own  or  another's 
mind,  the  subjunctive  is  used.  The  most  frequent  use  of  the 
subjunctive  is  in  indirect  discourse. 

Fact— Indie  Supposition— Subj. 

er  9cjt  fie  glaubt,  \>a!^  er  ge^c 

er  ijl  \)a  fie  fagte,  'lia^  er  \>a  fci 

er  fatt  gel)en  fie  bac£)te,  er  foUc  ge^en* 

er  ttiirb  gef)en  fie  ^atte  ge^offt,  er  luerbc  ge^en 

er  ^ttt  eg  fie  f)atte  geglaubt,  \ia^  er  e§  {)abc 

440  ^ic  Sonne  nnb  bcr  SStnb 

©inft  ftritten  fid^  bie  ©onne  unb  ber  SBinb,  tner  )dox\  ilinen 

am  ftdcfften  fei.     ©ie  famen  iiberein,  berjenige^  foUe  bafiir 

gelten,2  ber  einen  SSonberer  am  erften  nottge,  ben  90^antcl 

abgulegen. 

5        S)er  SStnb  bad^te,  er  moUe  red^t  ftiirmen,  bann  tocrbe  ber 

*The  indirect  clause  may  be  introduced  by  tio||  (transposed  order) 
or  may  be  without  any  conjunction  (normal  order). 

'  iierienlfie— see  App.  35,  107. 

'^  Translate :  That  he  should  be  accounted  (the  stronger). 


441-442] 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE 


179 


dJlann  fd)on  \\a6f  fetnem  SSiEen  tun.  2)0(^  al§>  er  fo  ftiirmte 
unb  bites,  xneinte  ber  Wann  nur,  ba^  q§>  bod]  red^t  fait  fei  unb 
bofe  er  feinen  'Mantel  nur  immer  fefter  umtun  tDoEe.  ©r  flagte, 
e§  friere  i^n  fo  fel)r,unb  ber  Xaq  fd^eine  immer*  falter  gu  mer= 

10  ben.    ^abei  gog  er  hen  SO^antel  immer  fefter  an. 

9Zun  bad-jte  hie  ©onne,  e§>  fei  bie  dleilje  an  ilir,^  aber  fie 
moUe  e»  gan3  anberg  mac^en.  9D^it  milber  unb  fanfter  (Slut 
liefe  fie  il^re  ©tralilcn  ^erabfaHen.  .^immel  unb  ©rbe  murben 
l^eiter  unb  aUe§>  meinte,  ha§>  SSetter  mad]e  fid)  ja  gang  I)errlid)^ 

15  unb  ber  ^ag  fei  gar  nid}i  fo  itbel.  ®er  SBanberer  glaubte,  fein 
9J?anteI  fei  il^m  moI)I  3U  marm,  er  nel)me  il^n  leii^ter  auf  ben 
?Irm.  ©r  nal)m  il)n  ah  unb  erquidte  fid]  in  bem  (2d)atten 
eineg  33aume§,  inbeffen  fid^  hie  ©onne  freute,  bei  bem  (Seban= 
fen,  ha^  fie  mit  i(}rer  Tlilhe  mef)v  ^raft  jeige  aU  hex  3Sinb  mit 

23  feinem  ©etofe. 


441 

Strong  Verbs 

to  quarrel 

fid)  ftreiten 

ftritt  fi^ 

fic^  geftritten 

to  agree 

iibereinfommen 

!am  iiberein 

iibereingefomnten 

to  be  worth 

gelten 

gait 

gegotten 

to  blow 

blafeii 

btie§ 

geblafen 

to  wrap  around 

umtun 

tat  urn 

umgetan 

to  freeze 

frieren 

fror 

gefroren 

Weak  Verbs 

to  compel 

notigen 

to  think 

nteinen 

to  take  off 

ablegcn 

to  refresh  oneself      fid)  er(^uideu 

to  storm 

ftiirnteu 

2      ^^idiS^feinem  SSitlcnV according  to  his  desire. 
Mmmcrtttltcr  JU  ttJCriJcn  =  to  be  getting  colder  all  the  time. 


442       ^  ^  . 

Note 
that  the  adverb  immer  gives  the  idea  of  the  progressive  tense. 

^  C§ t^t  =  it  was  his  turn. 

^iia§  SBetter l^crtU^  =  the  weather  was  turning  out  beautifully 


180  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [443-444 

443  EXERCISES 

I.  ©e^en  ©ie  Me  oBtge  @efd)id)te  in  bte  bireftc  dtehe  urn! 
S3eif]3iele:  (?irtft  ftrttten  ficft  hie  ©onne  imb  ber  SSinb:  „3Ser  bon 
«n0  ift  am  ftarffi^n?"  ©ie  fometi  iiberein:  ^^erjentge  foU  bafiir 
gelten,  ber  u.  f.  ro." 

II.  ©e^en  ©te  folgenbe  9^eben  in  bte  inbircfte  D^lebe  nm: 
,Manm  ^at  ber  ^lann  nnr  feinen  S^lantcl  fo  feft  um?''  „©§ 
ift  entf€^Ii(^  fait,  idj  tniH  meinen  90?antel  fefter  umtun,  e§  friert 
mid&  fo  fel^r,  ba%  id)  mtr  gar  nic^t  mel)r  I)elfcn  fann!"  „S<^  "^'^^^ 
e^  gan3  anber^  madden,  ber  90^ann  mufc  jetnen  9JtanteI  abtun,  ob 
er  tnill  ober  nid)t/'  „^d)  tuiH  ein  (Sdjtuert  I^aben,  fo  gut  unb  ftarf, 
trie  anbere  D^itter,  bann  gel)e  ic^  auf  ^Ibcnteuer  au§."  „^annft* 
bu  mir  eine  Qai^l  nennen?   ^dj  tvifl  fie  auf  bie  ^afel  fdjreiben." 

III.  Write  the  following  verbs  in  third  person  sing,  indie, 
and  subj.  Remember  that  the  subjunctive  is  always  formed  on 
the  infinitive  stem. 


geben 

ne^tnen 

faUen 

tragen 

laufen 

^ahtn 

fein 

tperben 

fiif)Ien 

ge^en 

ftef)en 

tun 

benfen 

tuiffen 

raffeu 

moUen 

foHen 

fonnen 

mogen 

leruen 

LESSON  52 

PRESENT  AND  PRETERITE 

Indirect  Discourse 

The  personal  ending  of  the  third  singular  we  saw  differed 
in  the  subjunctive  (c)  and  the  indicative  (i).  In  the  first  and 
usually  the  second  singular  and  in  all  the  plurals  the  endings 

*  The  indirect  question  will  be  introduced  by  the  conjunction  ol^ 
(whether).     This  takes  the  transposed  order. 


445]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  181 

of  the  subjunctive  are  identical  with  those  of  the  indicative 
(c,  jl,  en,  ti,^n).     Hence  we  have: 


Indicative 

Subjunctive 

ic§  ge^e 

ic^  ge^e 

\)n  ge^ft 

bu  ge^eft 

er  gc^t 

er  gc^c 

tt)ir  gefien 

toil  ge^en 

t^r  ge^t 

if)v  gef)et 

fie  getien 

fie  ge^ien 

Notice  that  only  one  form  shows  the  difference  between  the 
modes.  The  so-called  thematic  vowel  c,  in  the  second  person 
singular  and  plural  is  too  unemphatic  to  be  heard  distinctly 
though  it  appears  to  the  eye. 

Spoken  language  distinguishes  the  subjunctive  from  the 
indicative  by  using  the  preterite  subjunctive  for  the  present 
wherever  the  subjunctive  forms  are  not  distinct  from  the 
indicative.  In  actual  usage  the  paradigm  of  the  present  sub- 
junctive reads : 

i(^  gtngc  instead  of  ic^  ge^e 
bu  gingcfl         "      ''  't>n  geljeft 
er  ge^e 

tviv  gingen        *'      "  wix  ge^en 
i^r  gtnget  *'       "  i^r  ge^et 

fie  gingen  *'      "fie  gef)en 

445  This  shifting  has  resulted  in  a  weakening  of  the  feeling 
of  time  difference  between  present  and  preterite  tenses  in  the 
subjunctive,  so  that  they  are  used  interchangeably  without 
difference  of  meaning.  Observe  that  there  is  no  such  thing  as 
sequence  of  tenses  in  German.  The  tense  of  the  quoted  sen- 
tence has  nothing  to  do  with  that  of  the  leading  verb.     It  is 


182  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [446 

simply  a  question  of  the  tense  of  the  action  at  the  time  it  was 
described. 

Thus  the  speakers  in  the  last  story  all  used  the  present 
indicative  at  the  time  of  utterance.  In  quoting  them  the  pres- 
ent subjunctive  was  employed.  It  would  be  equally  correct  to 
substitute  the  preterite  subjunctive  in  every  case,  as  has  been 
done  below; 


446  ^ic  Sonne  unb  bcr  2Binb 

(Jtnft  ftrilten  fid)  ^ie  ©onne  unb  ber  SSinb,  toer  tion  i^mw 
am  fldrfften  tndre  (fet).  <Bie  fomen  iiberein,  berientge  foEte 
(foEe)  bafiir  gelten,  ber  einen  SBanbercr  am  erften  nbtigte 
(ubtige),  ben  Tlantel  Qbgulegen.    S)er  SSinb  bac^te,  cr  moUte 

5  (tDoIIe)  red^t  ftiirmen,  bonn  tdte  (tue)  ber  Tlann  fd^on  nac^  fet= 
nem  SStHen.  Xod)  al§>  ex  \o  ftikmte  unb  blte§,  metnte  ber 
Wlann  nur,  bofe  e§  hod)  red^t  !alt  tDdre  (fet)  unb  ha^  er  feinen 
30^antel  nur  tmmer  fefter  umtun  inoUte  (tcolle).  ®r  flagte,  e§ 
frdre  (friere)  il^n  jo  fel^r,  unb  ber  Xaq  fc^iene  (fd)etne)  tmmer 

10  fdlter  3u  merben.    ®abei  gog  er  ben  30^antel  tmmer  fefter  an. 

9^un  bod^te  bie  ©onne,  e§  Jndre  (fet)  hk  diei^e  an  ii)v,  aber 

fie  moUte  (moGe)  e§>  gona  onberS  moc^en.     SO^tt  mtlber  unb 

fanfter  ^lut  liefe  fie  ii)xe  ©traf)Ien  l^erabfallen.    ^immel  unb 

(Srbe  murben  l^etter  unb    aGe§  metnte,  ha§>  SSetter    mad^te 

t5  (mad^e)  fid£)  ja  gans  l^errlid)  unb  ber  ^og  mdre  (fet)  gar  ntd)t 
fo  fd^Itmm.  2)er  2Banberer  glaubte,"  fetn  Tlanid  mdre  (fei) 
tl^m  lno!)I  3u  marm,  er  natjxm  (ne!)me)  t^n  letd^ter  auf  ben 
STrm.  ©r  nalfim  il)n  ah  unb  erqutdfte  fid^  in  bem  ^d)aiicn  etne§ 
33aume§,  tnbem  fid)  bte  ©onne  freute,  bet  bem  ©ebanfen,  baf^ 

20  fie  mit  tftrer  S0?ilbe  mel^r  ^raft  aetgte  (setge)  ai§>  ber  SStnb 
mtt  feinem  ©etofe. 


447-448]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  183 

447 


PRETERITE 

(3rd  Sing.) 

Strong  Verbs 

Subjunctive 

] 

[ndicative 

todre 

irar 

tate 

tat 

frore 

fror 

jc^iene 

fc^ien 

na^me 

nat)m 

Weak  Verbs 

fottte 

joate 

uottgte 

notigte 

tDodte 

troUte 

ma(^tc 

mad)te 

aeigte 

aeigte 

The  preterite  subjunctive  of  strong  verbs  is  formed  on 
the  preterite  indicative  by  the  addition  of  c  and  the  umlaut 
when  the  stem-vowel  permits  it.  The  preterite  subjunctive  of 
weak  verbs  does  not  differ  from  the  preterite  indicative.  For 
a  slight  exception,  see  App.  81. 

448  EXERCISES 

I.  Sc^reiBen  @ie  bie  @aje  auf  8eite  180  nun  ntit  bent  ^on* 
junttit)  3m))erfe!t  anftatt  be§  ^rdfen§  au§! 

II.  Write  the  paradigms  of  the  present  and  preterite  sub- 
junctive of  the  following  verbs: 

fein  ^aben        rtierben        tDoHen        fotlen        fonnen 

ntogen      fallen         lieben  taffen         ge^en        bleiben 

III.  Translate:  1.  The  sun  said  that  it  took  (bauern)  24 
hours  to  ride  around  the  world.  2.  The  children  told  the  wood- 
nymphs  that  they  could  guess  the  riddles.  3.  The  teacher 
asked  the  children  whether  they  did  not  know  (fonnen)  the 
multiplication   table.     4.    The  little   girl    asked    her   mother 


184  ELEMENTS   OF   GERMAN  [449-460 

whether  she  might  go  out  into  the  green  fields.  5.  She  said 
she  could  not  stay  in  the  house.  6.  We  want  to  know  whether 
'we  may  not  listen  to  the  birds.  7.  The  little  stars  wanted  to 
know  whether  they  might  not  go  with  the  sun.  8.  But  the 
sun  told  them  that  they  should  go  with  the  mild  moon.  9. 
The  wanderer  thought  his  cloak  was  too  warm. 


LESSON  53 

PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 
Indirect  Discourse 

449  The  perfect  tense  is  formed  by  the  present  tense  of 
l^aben  or  f ein  +  perfect  participle,  the  pluperfect  by  the  preterite 
of  l^aBcn  or  f cin  +  perfect  participle.  The  rule  for  the  substi- 
tution of  preterite  forms  for  present  forms  learned  in  the  last 
lesson  applies  to  the  pluperfect  forms  and  perfect  forms  also. 
But  in  use,  they  are  not  differentiated  and  both  tenses  are  used 
indiscriminately  for  indirect  quotation  in  past  tense.  See  App. 
184.     Hence  we  have : 

ic§  ^citte  getan      instead  of  \6:}  ^aBe  getan 

bu  f)abeft  getau^ 

er  ^n^aht  getan 

lt)ir  fatten  getan  instead  of  Xoxx  ^aben  " 

ii)r  t)dttet  getan  "  i^r  \)CiUi   " 

fie  tjdtten  "         fie  l^aben    " 

Perfect 
\6)  fei  gelt)efen^  tt)ir  feien  getoefen 

bu  feieft  getoefen  '  t^r  feiet  gemefen 

er  fei  getuefen  fie  feien  gemefen 

450  ^  Because  btt  ^ttft  is  irregular. 

2  Since  the  subjunctive  and  indicative  forms  in  this  tense  are  not 
identical,  no  substitution  is  necessary.    See  App.  62. 


461-452 J 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE 


186 


Pluperfect 


tc^  tDcire  getDefen 
bu  tDdret  getoefen 
er  tudre  geti:)efen 

i<i)  ^dtte  getan 
bu  ()dtteft  getan 
er  ^ixttt  getan 


Wit  todren  gen)efen 
i^r  tDdret  geftjefen 
fie  lt)dren  getoefen 

tvix  Ijdtten  getan 
i^r  f)dttet  getan 
fie  ptten  getan 


Fact 


Past  Time 


id)  tarn,  i^  bin  gcfommcn 
ic^  iai,  id)  ^atte  getan 
id^  gab,  id)  ^ak  gcgekn 


Supposition 


iii)  fct  or  ttjiirc  gcfommctt 
id^  ^abc  or  pttc  getan 
ic^  l^abe  or  ^dtit  gegelien 


45 


^a^  trcne  ^Hoft 


/^ 


S(S  I^ab'  mein  D^ofe  berloren, 
9P^€in  Q^felgraueS  D^ofe; 
@§  ttiar  fo  treu  im  SeBen; 
^ein  treu're§  fonn  e§>  geBen^ 
Sm  gangen  3«9  unb  ^rofe.^  ^ 


Unb  al§  e§  tuollte^  fterBen, 
Sa  blidt'  e§  mid^  nod^  an, 
STB  fprad^'S  mit  feincn  Tliemn: 
„^Qnn^  bir  nid^t  tuciter  bienen; 
5(be,^  mein  Sf^eitergmann!" 


452    ^  fann  e§  gcBcn  =  can  there  be. 
^  3ttg  Wttil  Xrofe  =  in  the  whole  camp. 
^ttJOttte  ftcrbCtt  =  was  about  to  die.    See  App.  245. 
*  fdtttl  —  note  poetic  omission  of  personal  pronoun. 
5  nlje  =  adieu,  farewell  (popularized  French  adieu). 


186  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [46B-466 

®a  Qvnb  W§>  el^rltd)  ein 
SSol^I  unter  griinen  Tlaiten 
Sn  eineg  fitnbbQum§  ©c^otten; 
15  ®Q§  joE  fein  2)enfmal  fein. 


20 


453 


^a  ft^en  bie  fletrten  356gel 
Hnb  l^alten  bog  ^oknamt 
3^^  Braudf)t  nid^t  erft  gu  lefen, 
2Sie  treu  nteirt  9^o6  getoefen^ ; 
©ie  fingen'^  inSgefamt. 

Hoffmann  tion 

^alUx^Uhm, 

Verbs 

to  bury  eiitgrabeu  ^ 
to  serve  bieneii  (?^)« 

grub  ein        eingegraben 

454     In  indirect  discourse  the  poem  would  be  told  as  follows : 

1.  'l!cr  9?eiter  erjciljlt,  er  I)Qbe  (I^dtte)  fein  apfelgroueg  dio^  t)cr= 
loren;  e§  fei  (tcdre)  fo  treu  im  Qeben  getnefen;  fein  treuere^^ 
fonne  (fonnte)  e§>  geben  im  ganaen  3^tg  unb  ^rofc. 

2.  Hnb  al§  e»  l^abe  (^atte)  fterbcn  tnollen,  ha  I)abe  (f)Qtte)  e§  i^n 
no(^  einmol  angeblidtt,  unb  Ijabe  (I)Qtt€)  mit  feinen  SD^ienen 
gef^rod^en,  bofe  e§  il^m  nid^t  tneiter  bienen  fonne  (fonnte). 

3.  Hnb  qB  eg  geftorben  tDore,  l^abe  (f)atte)  er  e§  el)rlid)  unter 
griinen  90^atten  in  eine§  CinbbaumeS  ©(fatten  eingcgraben; 
ba§>  foEe  (foEte)  fein  S)cnfmal  fein. 


455    ^  Note  incorrect  order  for  the  sake  of  the  meter. 

^  gClDCJeit  (timt) — often  in  dependent  construction  the  auxiliary  is 
understood. 


466-458]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  187 

4.  2)a  fdfeen^  bte  fleinen  3SogeI  unb  f)telten  ba§  ^otenamt.  2Str 
Brau(f)ten  ni(f)t  erft  311  lefen,  tnte  treu  feln  ^ofe  gett)efen  fei 
(irdre);  fie  fdttgen  e§  tnSgefamt. 

456  EXERCISES 

I.   Change  Brunhild's  narrative  (page  173)  to  indirect  dis- 
course. 

II.  Write   the   present,    preterite,  perfect,  and  pluperfect 
paradigms  of  the  following  verbs : 

^olen        rufen        ge^en        fo(gen        fingen        laiifen 
fein  hperben     fageit        lieben         lefen  laffen 

toiffen       mijgeu      biirfen       joHen         njolleu 


LESSON  6J^ 

SUBJUNCTIVE  FUTURE  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT 

Indirect  Discourse 

457  Fact  Supposition 

©r  toirb  fommen.  2)er  9Jlann  fogt,  'tio,^  er  fommcn 

tocrbc. 
@r  ttiirb   bi^  baf)in  gcfommen     @te  meinte,  bi§  batiiu  tucrbc  er 

fein.  gefommcn  fcin. 

®u  toirfl  fc^cn.  ®r  fiir^tet,  bit  tncrbeft  e§  fc^cn. 

9ldc^fte§   Sa^r  ttjirft  bu  e§  gcs     @r  t)erfpri^t  bir,  bag  bu  e§  ndd)= 
fc^cn  ^aBcn.  fte§  Sa^r  gcfc^cn  ^aficn  ttJcrs 

bcft. 

We  have  seen  that  the  present  subjunctive  is  inter- 
changeable with  the  preterite,  and  the  perfect  with  the  plu- 
perfect.    Likewise  in  the   future  subjunctive  for  tuctbe  +  inf. 

458  ^  fiiffett— could  not  be  ji^en  because  of  identity  with  indicative ; 

so  also  ^icitm,  ftrttttd^ten,  fangcn. 


188 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[459-461 


we  may  substitute  tourbc  +  inf. ,  which  makes  the  form  iden- 
tical that  of  the  conditional  mode. 


Fut.  Subj. 

er  lt)erbe  ge()en 

Fut.  Perf.  Subj. 

er  tuerbe  gegaugeu  fein 


I.  Conditional 

er  tourbc  gel^en 

II.  Conditional 

er  ttiurbc  gegangen  fein 


459 


Indicative 


t(^  tvexhe  geften 
hu  tnirft  gel)en 
er  tntrb  gel^en 
intr  tnerbcn   ge^cn 
i^r  tmxhet  gefjen 
fie  tcerben  gelfien 

td&  tnerbe  gegongen 

hu  tDtrft 

er  tnirb 

tntr  tnerben     „ 

i^r  tnerbet      „ 

fie  tnerben      „ 


PARADIGM 
Future 

Subjunctive 

tc^  tniirbe  geften  (tnerbe)       ^ 

bit  merbeft  gelien 

er  raerbe  ge(}cn 

inir  miirben  gcI^en  (tnerben) 

iftr  miirbct  gel)en  (roerbet) 

fie  tniirben  gc^en  (tucrbcn) 

Future  Perfect 

fein  id)  tviivbc  gegongen  fein  (tnerbe) 

bit  tncrbeft  gegangen  fein 
er  tnerbe  gegangen  fein 

tnir  tniirben  gegongen  fein 

(tnerben) 

il^r  tnilrbet   gegongen   fein 

(tnerbct) 

fie  tniirben  gegangen  fein 

(tnerben) 


460  ^cr  Srfjafcr  itnb  bcr  GJoIbfj^tnteb 

©in  ©d^dfer  frogt  einen  ©olbfd^mieb,  tnie  t^iel  tnoljl  ein 
fo  unb  fo  grower  ^lum^en  @oIbe§i  tnert  fei.  2)er  Oolbfc^mieb 
^offte,  ber  ©deafer  l^otte  einen  fold^en  ^lum^en  gefnnben  nnb 

46  I      ^ettt ^Ium))en    @olbc§  — it  is  more  usual  to  employ  a  noun 

in  apposition,  i.e.  eltt  tlumjiett  ®olil. 


462-464]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  189 

tvexhe  (jDiirbe)  il^n  sum  35er!auf  Bringen.    ^e^l^alB  Betoirtete 

5  er  il)n  ^rddjttg,  urn  i^n  gefc^meiMg  3u  mac^cn,  benn  er  bad)te: 

„2)er  bumme  ^erl  bcnft  getDiB,  tc^  toiirbe  il^m    etne    grofee 

©umme  bofiir  Bieten,  tcenn  trf)  if)n  obex  gefd^metbtg  madje,  fo 

ift  er  auc^  mtt  tDenig  sufriebenr'    ©r  bot  ilf)m  olfo  bon  fetnem 

Beften  3Bein,  in  ber  ^offnung,  ha%  fie  gu  etnem  guten  (£int)er= 

10  ftattbni^  fommen  tDurben.^     ©nblicf),  qB  er  badjte,  bofe  ber 

Sauer  nun  ntcf)t  mei)v  fo  flor  int  ^opf  tcare,  fragte  er  il^n,  tDo 

er  benn  ben  ^Ium|)en  gefunben  l^aBe.     2Sie  grofe  tear  aBer 

feine  ©nttaufc^ung,  aB  ber  ^auer  erfldrk,  er  l^aBe  Bi§  je^ 

no(f)  feinen  gefunben;  foBalb  er  oBer  einen  gefunben  l^aBen 

15  toerbe,  tDiirbe^    er    il^n    bem    lieBen^tourbigen    @oIbfd)mieb 

Bringcn. 

462  Verbs 

to  offer    bieten        Bot        geBoten 

to  hope  l^offen       (w) 

to  treat,  entertain  Bett)irten     (w) 
to  explain,  declare  txUaVtn      (w) 

463  EXERCISES 

I.  Translate:  1.  I  thought  you  would  offer  me  a  large  sum 
of  money.  2.  We  promised  that  we  should  have  the  work  done 
when  you  came.  3.  They  wanted  to  know  (tDtffen)  whether 
you  would  come  or  not.  4.  The  charming  goldsmith  thought 
that  the  foolish  fellow  would  become  pliable  after  a  while  (hk 
SBeite).  5.  The  fellow  was  not  so  foolish  as  the  goldsmith 
thought  that  he  would  be. 

464  ^  Could  ttiettien  be  used  here? 

^  Note  that  here,  where  the  same  form  of  the  verb  occurs  in  two 
places  so  closely  adjacent  repetition  is  avoided  by  using  the  future 
perfect  in  one  instance  and  the  conditional  in  the  next.  They  might 
have  been  interchanged  without  affecting  the  sense. 


190 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[465 


II.  Put  into  indirect  discourse  (with  and  without  ba§) : 
©r  fogte: 

liefer  Wann  I)at  einen  grofeen  Sllum^en  ®olh  gefunben. 

©r  tDufete  nid)t,  1dq5  er  bomit  mad)en  foUte. 

©r  l^at  i^n  mir  gebrad)t,  um  3U  fel)en  mie  t)iel  er  bafiir  be!om= 
men  fonnte. 

^d}  l^atte  aber  fd^on  t)on  ber  gansen  ©efc^tdjte  ge!)ort. 

©r  tDirb  nad)  einer  SSeile  fc!)on  gefdimeibig  tuerben,  "bann 
trerbc  ic^  il^m  etne  fletne  (aumme  bieten. 

SSenn  id}  tl^m  bie  ©umme  ttierbe  gebotcn  b^ben,  tt)trb  er  fcbr 
frob  fein. 

III.  Change  t!ie  poem  „®a§  treue  ^o^"  to  future  in  direct 
discourse;  then  to  future  in  indirect  discourse. 


LESSOR  55 


SUBJUNCTIVE  PASSIVE 

Indirect  Discourse 

465     The  use  of  the  passive  construction  in  indirect  discourse 
does  not  differ  in  principle  from  the  active. 


Past 


Future 


Fat.  Perf. 


iNDic.  Pass. 


Present         er  tDtrb  gefd^tagcn 


SuBj.  Pass. 
toerbe 


er 


er  tDurbe  gefc^lagen 

er  ift  gejdilagen  h)orben    er 

er  XQdx  gefd)tagen  tporben 

er  rt)trb  gefd^lagen  tuer-  er 
ben 


er  hJtrb  gefd£)lagen  ttJor-  er  -<     or 
ben  fein  (  ^iirbe  )       jein 


gef^tagen 
gefd^tagen  n)orben 
gefd^lagen  merben 
gefd^lagen  tnorben 


466-467]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  191 

466  ^a^  mtoljknc  ^^fcrb 

©in  ^auer  ergdl^Ite  einem  greunbe,  bafe  i^nx^  t)or  etner 
SBodje^  ein  ^^'ferb  am^  bcm  ©taEc  gefto!)tnt  iDorben  fci.  ©r 
befc^rieb  ba§  ^^Sferb  genau.  Sa  fogte  ber  greunb,  er  f)abe  em 
foId^eS  9^o6,^  gona  geiiQu  n)ie  e§  ber  ^auer  befdjrieben  l^dtte, 

5  benfelben  SDZorgcn  ouf  bem  Qol^rmarft  in  ber  ndc^ften  ©tabt 
gefe]f)en;  e§  fei  i3on  einem  Sremben  gum  3Ser!Quf  angeboten 
tDorben. 

S)er  33auer  fc^tuong  fid^  auf  ein  onbereS  ^ferb  unb  eilte 
nocf)  ber  (Staht    9?i(^tig,  auf  bem  9Kar!tpIa^  fal^  er,  tDte  fein 

10  ^ferb  3um  SSerfauf  angeboten  tourbe.  ©r  eilte  l^t^rbei  unb 
erfldrte,  ba^  ha§>  fein  ^ferb  fei  unb  ba^  e§>  xf)m  bor  einer 
3Sod)e  gefto^Ien  niorben  nidre.  ®er  SP^ann,  ber  ba§  $ferb  ber- 
faufen  tnoEte,  erfldrte,  bafs  ein  S^^^twnt  borliegen  miiffe,  benn 
er  I)abe  ba§>  ^ferb  fd)on  jtDei  S^ifire.    SDamaB  fei  e§  il^m  bon 

15  feinem  33ruber  berfauft  tDorben. 

SDa  fagte  ber  33auer:  „9^un,  n)enn  ©ucf)^  ba§  ^^ferb  bor 
ginei  So^^^^n  berfauft  tvovben  ift,  unb  Sft^^  c§  fd)on  fo  lange 
6abt,  fo  miiBt  '^^x  and)  iDiffen,  auf  toeld&em  Sluge  e§  blinb  ift." 
"^abei  I^ielt  er  bem  ^^iferbe  beibe  5lugen  gu.    Ser  SO^ann  fagte 

20  fc^nelt:  „5tuf  bem  redjtcn  5ruge!"  Soc^  aB  b€r  Sauer  Iad)te, 
moUte  er  fid)  berbeffern  unb  rief  fd)nell:  „9^ein,  id)  I)abe  micft 
geirrt,  auf  bem  linfcn  5tuge  ift  e§  blinb  I"  S)a  3og  ber  93aucr  bie 
§anb  l^erunter  unb  aHe  Seute  fonnten  fel)cn,  ba^  ba§>  $ferb  auf 
feinem  5luge  blinb  mar.  9tun  mar  e§>  erfidjtiid),  ba^  bev  33auer 

25  t)on  bem  93?anne  beftoftlcn  morben  mar. 

S)er  33auer  erjdljlte  bann  feinem  greunbe,  ba%  ber  SO^ann 
bor  alien  Seuten  iiberful^rt  unb  berliaftet  morben  fei. 


467     1  t^m— dat.  of  interest. 

^  UOt  eittcr  SBor^C  =  a  week  ago. 

3  Cttt  fot(^c8  ^oii  =  such  a  liorse. 

*  ©ad^  —  note  use  of  ^f^x  and  (^u^  instead  of  Ste.     This  is  usual  in 
country  districts. 


192  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [468-470 

468  Strong  Verbs 

to  offer        anbieten  bot  an  angeboten      * 

to  vault       fic^  f c^tt)tngen    fd^tuang  ftc^  fic^  gefc^tDungen 

to  hold  shut  gu^lten  i)iett  gu  guge^atteu 

Weak  Verbs 
to  declare     erflareit  to  expose     iiberfu^reit 

to  err  fid^  trrcu  to  arrest      tjetl^aften 

469  EXERCISES 

I.  Change  all  direct  discourse  in  the  above  story  to 
indirect  and  all  the  indirect  discourse  to  the  direct. 

II.  Translate:  1.  The  former  said  that  the  horse  had  been 
seen  at  the  fair.  2.  The  friend  told  how  the  horse  was  stolen 
from  the  farmer.  3.  The  people  did  not  believe  that  the  large 
horse  had  been  sold  to  the  man  by  his  brother.  4.  The  man 
declares  that  the  horse  will  be  sold  to  the  farmer.  5.  The 
farmer  believes  that  the  man  is  exposed  and  arrested. 

III.    1.    ^(^reiBen  ®te  an^  toa^  bem   gremben  bort  bem 
S3auer  ersd^ilt  ttiurbe! 

2.  2So  tourbe  ha^  ^f^rb  gefunben?  SSeldje  ©rflctrurtg  \\i  bon 
bem  gremben  gegeben  inorben? 

3.  SSq§  ]^at  ber  33Quer  feinem  greunb  eraol^Ien  fonnen,  qB  er 
l&eim  fatn? 

LESSON  56 

IDEAL  CONDITION 

470  In  the  previous  lessons  on  the  subjunctive  we  treated  of 
Indirect  Discourse,  in  which  the  subjunctive  was  used  to  repre- 
present  a  thought  or  feeling  without  any  reference  to  the 
actuality  of  the  fact.  There  was  nothing  in  the  form  of  the 
verb  to  tell  whether  the  quoted  statement  was  based  on  fact 
or  not. 

We  observed  further  that,  as  the  result    of    shifting  the 
preterite  to  take  the  place  of  present  forms,  the  time  sense  of 


471-472]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  193 

the  tenses  had  become  weak  and  we  no  longer  recognized  any 
distinction  in  time  or  meaning  between  the  present  sub- 
junctive and  the  preterite;  the  perfect  and  the  pluperfect; 
the  future  and  the  conditional. 

In  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  now  to  be  studied  only  the 
preterite  and  the  pluperfect  tenses  are  used.  They  express  a 
condition  contrary  to  fact ;  the  preterite  expresses  such  a  con- 
dition in  present  or  future  time ;  the  pluperfect  in  past  time. 

Present  SSeitu  e§  Mt  txidvt,  giugc  16)  tn§  $au§ 

Past     SSenn  e§  fall  gettiefen  ttiiirc,  toiirc  i(S)  in§  §au§  gcgangcn 

;     47  I  ^er  glug  bcr  £ieBc 

SBenn  ic^  etn  SSi3gIein  tvat\^ 

Unb  Quc^  glnei  gliiglein  l&dtl', 

Slog'  id)  3U  bir; 

28€tl  €§  abet  ntd)t  fann  fetn,^ 

meiV  icE)  QE^ier. 

fBin  t(f)  glei(^3  ^^i^  j^jjj^  5^^.  4 

S3in  id)  boc^  tm  ^raum  Bei  bir, 

Unb  reb*  mit  bit; 

9Senn  td^  ertnac^en  tu', 

S3in  id)  oHetn 

@g  t)erge]E)t  fetne  ©tunb'  in  ber  'iflaiijt, 
I  2)a  mein  ^erge  ntc^t  ertt)ad)t, 

Itnb  on  bid^  gebenft, 
®q6  bu  tnir  biel  taufenbmal 
SDein  ^erg  gefdienft.^ 

472     ^  tiJiir',  fliJg'— poetic  omission  of  e. 

2  f anti  feitt— poetic  for  fcitt  fann. 

3  glcir^  (oftglei^)  =  although  I  am. 
*  Note  the  indicative  in  real  condition  throughout  this  stanza.  See 

App.  189.  Note  also  the  inverted  order  caused  by  the  omission  of 
mentt.     App.  188. 


194  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [473-476 

473  Verbs 

to  fly      piegen        flog        geflogen 
to  awake  ertDa(i)en  (iv) 

474  EXERCISES 

I.     ©e^en  ©te  obigeg  Oebid)t  in  ^rofo  um! 

II.  SSag  ift  hex  Unterfd^teb  atDtfdjcn  ber  33ebingung  im  erften 
unb  ber  tm  smeitcn  2Ser§? 

III.  ©rad^Icn  ©te  bte^  ©ebic^t  in  inbirefter  9^ebe,  foIgenber= 
mofeen:  ©in  Tlann  fingt  feiner  ©eliebten  Dor:  2Benn  er  ein  3Sog= 
lein  mare,  unb  atuet  Sliigel  I)dtte,  miirbe  er  gu  il^r  fitegen,  u.  f.  rt). 

IV.  (^e^en  ®ie  bie  unmogltd^e  Sebtngung  im  erften  3Ser§  in 
bie  SSergangcnI)eit  um! 

475  Conditional 

I.  irf)  miirbe  fliegen  ic^  toiirbe  fc^reibeu 

II.  t(^  njiirbe  geftogen  fein  ic^  tDiirbe  gefd^rieben  l)ahzn 

28enn  ic^  ein  ^oglein  njdre,  pgc  ic^  gu  bir. 


Past 


SSenn  i6)  ein  SSoglein  n)are,  tourbc  ic§  gn  bir  flicgcn. 

SBenn  ic^  ein  SSogtein  getoefen  mare,   njare  id)  jn  bir 

geflogen. 
SSenn  i^  ein  ^oglein  gertjefen  ft)dre,  miirbc  ic^  ^n  bir 
^     gcflogett  fcitt, 

476  1.  In  the  apodosis  of  an  ideal  condition  the  conditional 
mode  may  always  be  used  instead  of  the  subjunctive. 

2.  There  are  two  tenses  of  the  conditional : 

Present  time  corresponds  to  the  preterite  subj.  formed  of 
ttliirbc  + present  infinitive. 

Past  time  corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  subj.  formed  of 
ttiiirbc  + perfect  infinitive. 

Notice  the  use  of  ^ttbctt  and  fcitt  in  forming  the  perfect 
infinitive.     See  App.  77. 


477-478]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  195 

477  ^cr  ^omg  unb  bcr  Sanbmann 

®er  Sanbmann  Icl)nt  in  ber  ^iitte  aHein 
llnb  hlidt  iymau§>  in  ben  Ttonhen\d)ein 
Itnb  f(^aut  €m|3or  3u  be§  ^6ntg§  ^alaft; 
^r  meife  nid^t,  tceld^^  ein  ©efiil^I  i^n  fafet. 

5  „5rd^,  n)dr'2  1^  e^i^  ^onig  nur  eine  D^ad^t, 

^ann  tooEf  id^  fd)alten  mit  ntetner  SO^adCit! 
S^ann  ging'  id)  uml^er  bon  §au§  3U  §an§ 
Unb  teilte  ben  ©djlummernben^  ©egen  qu§! 

SSie  ftro^Ite^  bonn  ntorgen§  fo  mancfjer  33IidE 
10  2ie  Sonne  gum  erftenmal  !)ell  gnriidf! 

3Bie  •ftannten''  einanber  bte  ©liidflidjen  on 
Unb  meinten"^:  ba§>  l)at  ein  ©ngel  getonl"  — 

4 

®er  ^ontg  lel^nt  im  ^alaft  oGein 
Unb  hlidt  l)inau§>  in  ben  90?onbenfdf)ein 
1?  Unb  \d)aut  l)inab  ouf  be§  fianbSmann^  ^au^ 

Unb  (atf5t  in  ha§>  meite  ©djmeigen-^  l)inQU§: 

„Srd3,  tvax'  id)  ein  Canbmonn  mir  eine  ^adjt, 
2Sie  gem  entrief  id^  ber  briidfcnben  Tlad)t\^ 

478  ^  ttiel^ — uninflected    form    usual    in    this    construction.      Cf. 
foi(^  tin,  mau^  tin. 

2  Note  omission  of  ttietttt.  This  sounds  almost  like  a  wish,  but  the 
following  clause  showing  what  he  would  do  under  the  above  stated 
circumstances  indicates  that  it  is  an  ideal  condition. 

^tien  ^d^lltmrnerniJett  =  to  the  slumberers— a  present  participle  used 
as  a  weak  adjective,  with  the  noun  (gcntCtt)  omitted.     See  App.  217. 

^ftra^ltc — subj.  pret.  of  weak  verb,  coordinate  in  construction 
with  tijottt'  jti^ttUen,  line  6,  above. 

^iltt^  tiicitc  St^tuetgCtt  =  the  vast  silence. 

*ber  briijfcnbcn  2)laii§t— dative  with  entraten.    See  App  133. 


196  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [479-481 

SSte  le^rt'  id)  mid^  felber  hie  fditoere  ^unft, 
20  92t(^t  irr'  gu  gel^en  mit  meiner  ©unft! 

SBie  iDoEt'  id)  in§  eigene  ^erg  mir  fel^n. 
Urn  tviehet  e§  of  fen  mir  felBft  gu  gefte^n  F 
SSa§  toufenb  ®anbe  tnir^  nic^t  tioEBrod^t, 
®a§  ttJoEt'  id)  geiDinrten  in  einer  '^aii^tl"  — 

25  ©0  fd)Qun  fie  finnenb  Beim  ©ternenlauf, 

®er  ^onig  I^inunter,  ber  Sanbmann  !)inauf ; 
©onn  fc^fiefeen  Beibe  ben  miiben  33Iid 
Itnb  traumen  Beibe  t)on  frembem  @Iiid.^ 

m-  ®aBrtel  SetbL 

479  Strong  Verbs 

to  be  silent        fc^tDeigen  fc^tuieg  gejd^tuiegeu 

to  dispense  with  eutraten  entriet  entraten 

to  win  getDinnen  gehjann  getDonnen 

to  meditate       finiteu  faiut  gefoimeu 

Weak  Verbs 
to  recline  (e^Ueil  to  rule       f  (fatten 

to  glance  bUcfen  to  reflect  guriidftra^len 

480  EXERCISES 

I.  Write  out  in  full  each  of  the  two  conditional  state- 
ments contained  in  the  above  poem,  first  with  both  parts  in 
the  subjunctive,  then  with  the  conditional  in  the  apodosis,  with 
and  without  the  conjunction  tuettn. 

II.  Give  these  conditions  in  the  past  tense. 
III.  (grga^Ien  8ie  biefe§  (SJebi^t  in  ^rofa!  r^ 

48  I     '  ttW Q^fic^tt  =  to  frankly  face  the  secrets  of  my  own  heart 

again, 

^  wit — dative  of  interest. 

^  tlOtt  frembem  ©liirf  =  of  another's  joy. 


482-484]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  197 

LE880N  57 

SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  WISH— UNFULFILLED 

482  This  corresponds  very  closely  to  the  prota*sis  of  the  ideal 
condition.  "Were  I  but  king!"  suggests  "I  should  be  happy 
if  I  were  king!"  which  makes  a  correct  statement  of  ideal  con- 
dition. 

Present  23Bdrc  td)  bt)(^  ^onig ! 

Past  SBdrc  \6)  bo^  ^onig  gcmcfcn! 

Present  ^^Ht  \6)  bie  Ma6)i ! 

Past  §dttc  ic^  bte  Wa^i  gcJaBt! 

Observe  that  the  tense  use  corresponds  exactly  to  that  in 
ideal  condition.  In  fact,  almost  every  wish  of  this  kind  could 
be  made  into  a  conditional  sentence  by  adding  the  apodosis, 
and  almost  every  conditional  clause  may  become  a  wish,  if  the 
apodosis  is  omitted. 

483  «I)tc  liter  2Sitttf(^c 

^onnt'  \6)  ho6)  ber  gelfen  fein, 
^tef  tm  ©rurtbe  ha^  Urgeftein, 
^o6)  tm  §immel  ha^  ^Tngefid^t, 
©tntg  ftel^ett  unb  tnanfett  tttc^t! 

6  ^onnt'  \6)  bod^  ha^  33riinnletn  fein 

©|:)rubelnb^  au§  !u{)Iem  ©runbe  reitt, 
©e^ienb^  burcf)  griines  Hfergefd^td^t, 
@h)tg  rtnnen  uttb  raften  nic!)t! 

^onitt'  \^  bod^  ha^  ^dumleln  fein, 
10  2)te  SSurgel  geftrecft^  tn§  lifer  l^tnein, 

484  ^  f^lttttielttb  and  gc^Cttb— two  present  participles  used  adjectively 
with  Sriittttletn,  uninflected  because  they  follow  the  noun. 

^  gefh^edt — a  perfect  participle  used  like  the  present  participles  dis- 
cussed in  note  1 ;  modifies  gSltrjel. 


198  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [485-486 

(StDiQ  blii^en  tinb  tuelf en -ntcfjt ! 

^onnt'  id)  bod)  ha§>  SSoglem  fetn 
9tuf  ben  S^eigen  tm  ©onnenfd^ein, 
15  S)Q§  ©timmlein  toncnb  sum  ^immel  geridjl't, 

©tutg  tonen  nnb  fdjtocigen  nid)t! 

485  Verbs 

to  run     rinnen        ranu        geronnen 

to  bubble  fprubetu  (w)         to  sound  tonen    (w) 
to  rest     raften     (w)        to  direct  rid^ten  (/(;) 

to  wither  WzlUxi      {tv) 

486  EXERCISES 

I.  3[Bq!o  finb  bk  bier  SSiinfdje,  bie  l^ter  au^gefproc^en  ftnb? 
Xcv  Wlann  niiinfd^t,  er  fonnte  ein  Selfen  fein  u.  f.  w. 

II.  SO^ac^cn  ©ie  btefe  3Bunfd]fa^e  5u  Scbingungefatsen.  SScnn 
id)  ein  3SogIein  fein  fonnte,  n^iirbc  id)  auf  ben  Srocigcn  fil^cn  u.f.tt). 

in.  SSeld^e  SSitnfi^e  fatten  ber  Sonbmann  unb  bcr  ^onig 
(Seite  195)? 

IV.  ©e^en  ©ie  biefe§  (Sebid)t  in  ^$rofa  um! 

V.  Translate:  1.  Siegfried  said:  "Oh,  that  I  were  a  brave 
knight!"  2.  Then  I  would  go  in  search  of  (nad))  adventures. 
3.  If  Siegfried  had  been  a  bold  knight,  he  would  have  gone  in 
search  of  adventures.     4.  He  cried:  "If  I  only  had  a  isword!" 

5.  If  he  had  had  a  sword  he  would  not  have  gone  to  the  smithy. 

6.  Charles  the  Great  exclaimed:  "Oh,  had  the  rich  men's  sons 
been  as  diligent  as  the  poor  men's  sons!"  7.  If  the  rich  men's 
sons  liad  been  as  diligent  as  the  poor  men's  sons,  the  school 
would  have  been  much  better.  8.  What  would  the  king  have 
done,  had  he  been  a  peasant?  9.  If  the  peasant  had  been  a 
king,  he  would  have  made  everybody  happy. 

8  ttitegenti— see  note  1. 


487-489]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  199 

LESSON  58 

SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  WISH— TO  BE  FULFILLED.— DESIRE  OR 

PRAYER 
437         Fact— Indie.  Wish— Subj. 

©r  ift  glucflid^.  @r  fei  glucfttc^!     May  he    oe 

happy. 

@r  ge{)t.  (^e^e  er !     Let  him  go ! 

S)em  Sleid^  !ommt  2)etn  Sletc^  !omme!     Thy  king- 

dom come! 

488  ^cr  9Jht  ift  gcfommcn 

^er  Wax  ift  gcfommcn,  bic  23dume  fdjlagcn  au^, 
Da  bleibe,  rt)er  Suft  I)at,^  mit  ©oraen  3u  §an§' ! 
SSie  bie  SSoIfen  bort  iconbern  am  I^immlifd^cn  3clt, 
©0  ftel^t  an^  tnir  ber  ©inn^  in  bie  tceite,  tueite  SSelt. 

5       §err  SSoter,  Srau  9Wutter,  bafe  @ott  eutf)  Be!)iit'  P 
2Ber  tueife,  tro  in  ber  gerne  mein  ©Iu(f  mir  nod)  bliiljt?* 
(5§  gibt  fo  manege  ©tra^e,  ha  nimmer  id)  mar|(^iert  ;^ 
®§  giBt  fo  manc^en  SSein,  ben  \d)  nimmer  nod^  ^robiert.^ 

Srtfd^  auf  brum,^  frifd)  auf  brum  im  l^ellen  ©onnenftra^I, 
10  2Bo!)I  iiber  h\^  33crge,  tDof)!  burd)  ha^  tiefe  ^al! 
2)ie  £luellen  erflingen,  bie  93dume  raufd^en  all'; 
9D^ein  ^erg  ift  mic  'ne  Serdjc  unb  ftimmet  ein  mit  ©d^all. 

489  ^  iia  Meibc,  tticr  fittfi  ^at,  etc.  =  let  whoever  desires  stay  at  home. 
'^  |o ^'WX  =  so  does  my  mind  turn  to. 

'bafe bc^itt'— supply  i(^  tt)ittt|(i^e  before  this. 

*  ©liitf fttii^t  =  fortune  Avill  smile  upon  me.     Note  the  [figure ; 

bUt^ett  is  a  favorite  word  in  German  to  denote  a  flourishing  condi- 
tion, asbte  Mit^enlic  Stabt;  cin  Mii^cntJcr  ^itngUng,  etc. 

^  ^abe  is  omitted. 

^  %ti\iS^  ttttf  brum  =  Up  and  away ! 


200 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


[4490-91 


Unb  QbenbS  im  (Stdbtletn,  ha  Uf)i'  id)  burfttg  ein: 
,,$€rr  SSirt,  ©err  SStrt,  einc  Marine  hlanUn  SSein! 
15  ©rgreife  bie  gtebel,  bu  luft'ger  ®|)ieImQnn  bu! 
3Son  metnem  ©rf)a^  ba§  Siebel,^  ba§>  ftng'  id)  basu." 

Unb  finb'^    id)  feine  ©erberg',  fo  lieg'  icC)  gur  S^ad^t 
SSol^I  unter  biQuem  ©immel;  bie  ©terne  l^alten  2SQd)t; 
Sm  SSinbe  bie  Sinbe,  bie  roufc^t  mid^  ein^  gemac^;^^ 
20  (5§  fiiffet  in  ber  grtil^e  ba§  2^orgenrot  mid^  tvad). 

O  SSonbern,  o  SSanbern,  bu  freie  33urfd^enluft! 
©a  toel^et  @otte§  Obemi^  fo  frifdf)  in  bie  ^ruft; 
5)a  finget  unb  jaud^get  boS  ©era  gum  ©immeBgelt: 
SSie  bift  bn  hodj  fo  fd^on,  o  bu  tveik,  tueite  SSelt!       / 

Emanuel  @eiBeI. 


>o 

Strong  Verbs 

to  sprout  au^fd^lagen 
to  resound  erfliugen 
to  seize     ergreif  en 

fd^tug  au§ 

erflang 

ergriff 

Weak  Verbs 

au§gef^lagen 

erflungen 

ergriffen 

to  wander  h)anbern 
to  guard    be^iitcn 
to  march    marf  (^ieren 
to  try        ^robieren 

to  rustle  raufc^en 
to  join    einftimmen 

to  enter    tinU^XtXl 

49  I     ^  fiiclicl  —  a  South  German  diminutive   form ; 
would  be  Stetlli^en  or  giciJicttt. 

^  Note  the  real  condition  with  the  Uientt  omitted. 

^  rttttfii^t  mx^  tin  =  rustles  me  to  sleep. 

^"  gemttl^— old  form  of  ficmiiji^Iiii^,  comfortable. 

^^  Obcm— old  (poetic)  form  of  %itm. 


North  German 


492-494]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  201 

492  EXERCISES 

I.  Translate:  1.  Let  his  mind  turn  towards  home  (naci^ 
^aufe).  2.  May  God  guard  you!  3.  Let  the  woods  resound. 
4,  Let  the  host  bring  me  a  tankard  of  wine.  5.  Let  him  lie  all 
night  under  the  blue  sky.  6.  May  the  winds  blow  through  the 
trees  and  sing  me  to  sleep !  7.  Let  who  will  remain*  at  home,  I 
shall  go  out  into  the  wide,  wide  world 

II.  (Se^en  ©ie  obige^  ^ebtc^t  in  $ro)a  um ! 

LESSON  59 
SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  DOUBT  ^ 

493  Besides  the  subjunctives  of  indirect  discourse,  condition, 
and  wish,  there  are  a  number  of  subjunctive  phrases  and  sup- 
positions which  are  not  easily  classified.  Some  are  remnants 
of  an  older  optative,  others  are  parts  of  older  conditional 
clauses  which  have  become  stereotyped.     See  App.  192. 

A  very  frequent  use  of  the  subjunctive  is  that  after  al8  ob 
or  oil  tticttn  (as  though).  Note  that  the  q6  or  tticnn  maybe 
omitted  with  the  usual  result  upon  the  order.     See  App.  188. 

@r  ioi,  at§  ob  e§  immer  ©ommer  marc. 
(Sr  iai,  aU  tuiirc  e^  immer  (Sommer. 

494  ^cr  gitte  ^atnerab 

S(f)  '^cdi'  einen  S^ameraben, 
©inen  beffern  finb'ft  \)Vi  mi} 
2)i€  trommel  \6)hxQ  aum  ©treite, 
©r  gtttg  on  metner  ©ette 
Sn  gletc^em  ©d^rttt  unb  ^rttt.^ 

*  See  App.  197,  198. 

^  ttit — South  German  form  for  ut^t. 

^  8«i^ritt  ttttb  Xrjit  =  in  step. 


202  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [495-496 

©ine  ^ugel  fam  geflogen;^ 
(Silt's  mir  obcr  gilt  e§  bir?* 
S6n  !)at  eg  toeggeriffen ; 
@r  liegt  mir^  bor  ben  Siifeen, 
10  5tB  tDdr'g^  ein  ©titc^  t)on  mir. 

SBiH^  mir  bie  §anb  nod)  rcidjen, 
^ertoeil^  id^  eBen  lab'. 
,Mcinn^  hit  hie  ^anh  md]t  geBen; 
Skib  bu^^  im  eh)'gcn  Seben 
15  9P^ein  guter  ^amerob!" 


Sttbttitg  U^lanb. 


495  ^u  Btft  tnie  cine  35Iuinc 


S)u  bift  tDie  einc  ^lume 
©0  l^olb  unb  fd^on  unb  rein; 
Sd)  fd^au'  bid)  on,  unb  2BcI)mut 
©d^Ieidjt  mir  xn§>  $er3  f)incin.^^ 
mix  ift,i2  Qig  ^£13  1^^  ^ie  ^^j^vjg 
5tuf§  ^aupt  bir^  legen  foEt', 
93ctenb,  bofe  ©ott  bid)  erl^olte 
©0  rein  unb  fd}on  unb  ^olh. 


Ptiwxitii  pt'ttit. 


496  ^  fam  gejlOgClt — note  adverbial  use  of  perf.  part,  with  verb  fommett, 
cf.  198, 1. 

4  gilt  eg  =  does  it  mean. 

^  mtt . . .  ten  f^iifecit— what  dative  is  mtt? 

'^aU  tt)ttr'§—Wiiat  is  omitted? 

'm\n  =  tt  tiJitt. 

^  berttiCtl — modern  literary  form  is  ttttieitt. 

^fatttt  =  ij^  fatitt. 

^"S31etb  tlU — emphatic  imperative. 

"  ttt§  ^erj  l^inettt — note  tautological  use  of  adverb. 

^^  mir  tft — short  form  of  e§  ift  mir  =  it  seems  to  me. 

13  Could  oh  be  omitted?    What  change  would  that  make? 


497-500]  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  203 

497  Strong  Verbs 

to  tear  away  ttjegrei^cit  ri§  tt)eg  n^e  jgeriffen 

to  load         laben  lub  gelabeit 

to  creep       fd^leid^en  f(^li(^  gef(^lid)en 

498  EXERCISES 

I.  (Sr5ai)Ien  8ie  ben  3n^It  be§  obigen  ^ebic^tS  in  inbirefter 
9lebe! 

II.  SSie  tear  bem  $Ulann  ^n  Tluk,  aU  er  feinen  greunb  tot  fa^? 

III.  28er  Wax  £ubtt)ig  Uf)lanb?    §eutrid^  §eine? 


LESSON  60 
499  GRAMMAR  REVIEW 


^ 


I.  Form  of  subjunctive.     See  App.  72-83. 
II.  Syntax  of  subjunctive.     See  App.  180-199. 

500  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

1.  Give  present  indie,  and  subj.  active  paradigms  of  fc^cn, 
flc^cn,  burfcn,  mcrbcn,  fcin. 

2.  Give    preterite   indie,    and   subj.    active    paradigms   of 
ge^en,  ^akn,  fein,  tuottcn,  fadcn. 

3.  Give    perfect    indie,    and    subj.    active    paradigms    of 
laufcn,  gc^cn,  Men,  muffcn. 

4.  Give   pluperfect   indie,    and   subj.   active    paradigms  of 
burfcn,  ^abcn,  fcin,  ttJcrfcn,  Blcibcn. 

6.    Give  future  and  future  perfect  indie,  and  subj.  active 
paradigms  of  (cfctt,  ge^ctl,  miigCtt. 

6.  Give   synopsis   3rd   sing,    passive   indie,    and   subj.    of 
fc^ctt,  prcn. 

7.  Write  out  conditional   paradigm  active  and  passive  of 
fcljcn  and  ^brcn. 


204  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 

II.  Put  into  indirect  discourse  all  the  direct  discourse  in 
the  stories  on  pages  189,  191. 

III.  Tell  the  story  on  page  82  in  indirect  discourse. 

IV.  Translate:  1.  Once  a  rich  man  was  addressed  on  the 
street  by  a  beggar  (ber  S3ettler).  2.  The  latter  said:  ''Brother, 
give  ine  a  penny  (ber  pfennig)."  3.  Then  the  rich  man  asked 
how  long  they  had  been  brothers.  4.  The  poor  man  re- 
minded him  of  the  fact  (baran),  that  we  are  all  the  sons  of 
Adam.  5.  The  rich  man  said  that  he  was  right  and  that  he 
had  forgotten  that.  6.  Then  he  gave  the  poor  man  a  penny. 
7.  But  the  latter  thought  that  this  was  a  very  small  present  for 
a  brother.  8.  However,  the  rich  man  said:  "If  all  the  sons 
of  Adam  should  give  you  a  penny,  you  would  be  the  richest 
man  in  the  world!" 

V.  %tht\\  (Sie  ein  SBeifpiel  fiir  \)t\\  SSunfc^fonjunftit),  ben 
93ebiugung§fouiun!tit),  ben  ^onjunftit)  ber  inbireften  3fiebe ! 


601-503]  IMPERATIVE  205 


CHAPTER    X 

IMPEEATIVE.      COMPOUNDS.      INFINITIVES. 
PARTICIPLES 

LESSON  61 

IMPERATIVE 

50  I  Strong  Verb 

Wiam,  giB  mir  bein  S&\\6) ! 

SRarie  unb  ^arl,  gcbt  mir  eure  93iid^er! 

grdulein  (Sd^mibt,  bitte  gcBcn  Sic  ntir  g^r  S3ud^! 


502 


f 

Weak  Verb 

SBitf)etm,  mtt^c  bein  93itd^  auf! 
^arl  uub  SSit^elm,  moj^t  eure 
§err  93rauu,  mai^ctt  Sic  3^r 

93iic^er  auf ! 
93u^auf!     ^ 

gib 

lauf(e)* 

Strong 
Qebt 
l)artet 
lauft 

geben  (Sic 
^alten  @ie 
laufen  (Ste 

ntad^e 

Weak 
ntac^t 

mac^en  (Sie 

jet 

Slightly  Irregular 

feib                  feien  (Sie 

503  /      ^cjttfd^cr  9tat 

3Sor  oHern  ein§,  mein  ^inb,  fd  treu  unb  tral^r! 

fiofe  nie  bie  Siioc  beinen  932unb  entiDetl)'n!   *^ 

^^Jort^oIte^^^J^i  im  b€utfd)en  35oIfe  toor 

S)er  pd^fte  D^tul^m,  getreu  unb  tcatir  gu  fein. 
*  *  * 

*  See  154. 

^  95on  ttUetS  l^er  =  since  olden  times. 


206  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  (504-505 

Suerft  ein  3^erg,  ein  dik\e  iymiennad)f 
2)o(^  bein  ©etDtffen  ^eiQt  ben  geinb  btr  an, 
Itnb  eitie  ©timme  ruft  in  btr:   „©ei  tDad^V 

S)ann  tt)Q(^  unb  fant^f!   ©§  tft^  ein  geinb  bereit  — 
13  ®ie  Sitg'  in  bir,  fie^  brol^et  btr  ©efol^r. 

^inb,  S)eutf(f)e  fom^ften  tQ|)fer  oEejeit; 

2)u  bcutfc^e^  STinb,  fet  ta^fer,  treu  unb  ma^r!    Z 

Sloficrt  ^ctntif. 

504  ^te  Tla^nnn^ 

^iitet  eure  Sungen  ^ 

9Sor  33eleibigungen ! 
Sofet  fein  Bofe§  SSort  !)ert)orl 
©tofet  ben  D^iegel  t)or  ba§  ^or! 
6  (Stofet  ben  9liegel  t)or  ba§  ^or! 

Cafet  fein  bofe§  SSort  !)ert)or! 
35or  ^ekibigungen 
^iitet  @ure  3wngen! 

§iitet  eure  0]^ren 
10  Ober  il^r  feib  ^oren! 

Sofet  fein  Bofe§  2Bort  bQrtn;^ 

@§  berunel^rt  euren  ©inn! 

©§  berunel^rt  euren  ©inn; 

Sofet  fein  Bofe§  SSort  barin 
15  Ober  il^r  feib  ^oren! 

^iitet  eure  Ol^renl 


505    ^  att8  ^erj  j^eran— notice  the  tautology.    Sje  i:J)o.  11. 
^  ^itttcnnari^  =  later. 

*  ^8  ifi  Citt  ^txn'h  =  there  is  an  enemy. 
^  ^ic  8it9' ....  fie— poetic  tautology. 
*iiaritt  instead  of  |tnetti. 


506-50a]  IMPERATIVE  207 

506  Verbs 

to  push  f  togen  ftieg  Qeftogen 

to  desecrate  enttoeifien  (w)  to  fight  fdm^feti  (w) 
to  point  out  an^^eigen  (w)  to  dishonor  Derune^ren  (w) 
to  watch      tuac^en      (to) 

507  EXERCISES 

I.  Express  the  imperatives  in  the  above  poems  in  singular 
and  plural. 

SBenn  man  btefe  93efel^Ie  in  ber  tnbtreften  9^ebe  auSbriidfett 
tntH,  mufe  man  ha^^^  SOtoball^ilf^tnort  f  o  1 1  e  u  benu^ert,  3.  33. 
Tcr  Xidjiet  fagt,  etn  Simh  folle  (follte)  treii  unb  tna^r  fcin  inib 
folle  (foEte)  nie  eine  Ciige  fetnen  502unb  entmetl^cn  laffen. 

II.  (Se^en  ©te  Beibe  ©ebid^te  in  bie  tnbirefte  9?eb€  urn! 

508  In  addition  to  the  regular  imperative  there  are  three 
methods  of  expressing  a  command. 

(a)  The   present   subjunctive  —  a   command   in   the   third 
person,  as  cr  gc^c,  let  him  go. 

(b)  The  perfect  participle  )  -     ,  , 

/  X   rm     .   n   -,■  >  for  brusque  commands. 

(c)  The  infinitive  ) 

509  9?  it  ft  t  g  !  c  i  t 

Srifd)   getan  unb   ntd^t   gefdumt! 
3Ba§  tm  SSeg  liegt,  meggcrdumt! 
SSa§  btr  fel)let,  ]ndj  gefd^ininb! 
Orbnung  lerne  friil),  mein  ^inb! 

5tu§  bent  33ett  unb  ntd)t  gefdumt! 
9^id)t  Bet   l^eEent   %aQ   getrdumt! 
i^rft  bie  ^TrBett,  bann  ba§>  (Bpiell 
m^  ber  9^ctf€  !ommt  ha^  Qiell 


208  ELEMENTS    OF    GERMAN  [610-512 

(Sd^nell  befonnen,  md)t  getrctumt! 

^id]t§>  bergeffen,  ntu)t§  berfaumt! 

^id)i§>  Blofe  obenI)m  gemodit! 

2Ba§  hu  tuft,  baraiif  gib  ad)t! 

gr.  9ltt(fert. 

5  I O  Weak  Verbs 

to  hesitate    fautTten  to  miss       berfdumen 

to  remove     tDegrdunten 

51  I        Tlan  fonnte  aud)  fagen: 

grifd)  tun  unb  nic^t  faumen! 
SBa§  tm  SSeg  liegt,  tDegrciumen! 
2Ba§  btr  fe!)Iet,  g€fd)tt)trtb  fud^en! 
Orbnung  lerne  bQ§  ^tnb,fru!)! 

That  is,  a  command  may  be  expressed  as  follows — 

QtB!  gebe  er! 

gebt!  gegeben! 

geben  ©ie!  geben! 

^riiden  ©te  bie  93efet)Ie  tm  obtgen  ^ebtd^te  auf  jebe  ntogltd^e 
2Seije  qu§! 

LE8S0N  62 
\^  COMPOUND  VERBS 

512  \  Separable 

Present  W\6)tl   ttJCl^t   §an§    ttttS, 

Preterite  ^ie  9Jlau§  l^oitgtc  ber  ^a^e  bie  (Sc^elle  nic^t  an. 

Perfect  %\t  SSogleitt  fittb  im  SSinter  fcrtgcflogcn. 

Pluperfect  Siegfrieb  l^tttte  ben  ^rac^en  totgcfcjlagcn* 

Future  ^er  ^olbfc^ntieb  tuirb  bent  93aner  'txi^  ©olb  aBnel^nten. 

Put.  perf.  ^er  ^nabe  tnirb  jururfgcfotninctt  f cin. 


613-616] 


COMPOUND  VERBS 


209 


513 

Present 

Preterite 

Perfect 

Pluperfect 

Future 

Fut.  Perf. 


514 


Inseparable 
^er  ^aufmann  Umtxtt  "oa^^  gaden  ber  S3orfe  nid^t 
SDie  Siige  cnttuci^lc  ietnen  SOlunb. 
SDie  ^aufleute  l^aBctt  ben  93eutel  ticrlorctt. 
SStele  3af)re  ttjarctt  tJcrgangcn. 
®ie  ^naben  ttJcrbctt  hk  ^riifimg  Bcftc^cn, 
^te  ^inber  tticrbctt  fi^  Bcfonncn  ^aficn. 

SYNOPSIS 

er  Hertiert 


er  fliegt  fort 

er  flog  fort 

er  ift  fortgeflogen 

er  tear  fortgeflogen 

er  njirb  fortftiegen 

er  ttjirb  fortgeflogen  fein 


er  ticrlor 

er  ^at  Hcrloren 

er  ^tte  tJCtloren 

er  n)irb  ticrlteren 

er  Wixh  tjcrloren  fiaBen 


5 1 5  The  separable  particle,  which  is  strongly  accented,  is 
always  an  independent  word  (adverb  or  preposition),  which 
is  closely  associated  with  the  verb.  When  it  immediately  pre- 
cedes the  verb  as  in  the  participle,  infinitive,  and  always  in 
transposed  order,  the  two  are  joined  together  as  one  word. 

The  inseparable  particle  cannot  be  used  independently, 
hence  is  always  attached  to  the  verb.  .In  the  latter  case,  the 
augment  of  the  perfect  participle  is  omitted,  since  more  than 
one  initial  short  syllable  is  unusual  in  Grerman. 

516  A  few  compound  verbs  are  both  separable  and  insepar- 
able with  change  of  meaning. 


uficrfegen,  fe^te  nhtv,  uBcrgefe^t 
to  ferry      ^ 

ttttter^alten,  f)ie(t  untcr,  nntcrs 
ge^alten   to  hold  under 

buri^tanfen,  lief  buri^,  bur^ge- 
laufen  to  run  through 


ttBcrfe|en,    ubcrfe^te,    uBcrfe|t 

to  translate 
untcrfialten,   untcr^ielt,    untcrs 

flatten    to  entertain 
burc^tanfen,  bur^lief,  burr^tau^ 

fen    to  peruse  hastily  n^- 


210  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [617-518 

Separable  compounds  more  often  express  the  original  mean- 
ing of  the  two  parts,  inseparable  have  more  often  taken  on  a 
figurative  meaning. 


517  ©tn  grteb^ofiggang 

93eim  ^otengraber  |)0(i)t  e^  an: 
,Madj  aiil  mad)  au\,  bu  gretfer  Tlannl 

Zu  Qufi  hie  Zixv  unb  nimm  ben  ^tab, 
Tlu^t^  seigen  mtr  etn  leure§  OroB!" 

»  ©in  Sternberg  fprtd)t'g  mit  ftrupp'gem  33Qrt, 

SSerbronnt  nnb  raul)  nad^  ^riegerart. 

^SSie  I}ei6t  ber  ^eure,^  ber  ^udf  ftorb 
Unb  fic^  ein  ^$fii(}I  bet  mtr  evtvavh?'' 

„®te  abutter  tft  eg,  fennt  S^r  ntcf)t 
10  ®er  9[)?Qrt{)a  ©ol^n  me^r  am  @efi(i)t?" 

„^tlp  (Sott,  tote  grofe,  toie  braun  gebrannt! 
^citt'^  nun  unb  nimmer  @ud^  erfannt. 

Xod)  fommt  unb  fef)t!  $ter  ift  ber  €rt, 
9^ad^  bem  gcfragt^  nttd^  ©uer  SSort; 


518    Mtt  ailf  W  Xitr— prose  order  would  be  ttt  ilic  ^iir  ttttf. 

^  6ttt  3l*CWlier— note  the  substantive  use  of  the  adjective  fremb- 
*  Sttli^  —  dative  of  possession.    Note  that  bu  and  i^r  are  used  inter- 
changeably— not  uncommon  in  dialectic  and  poetic  usage. 

^^Uf  ®Ott  for  ®oii  ^elfe,  the  pres.   subj.  of  pleading  or  prayer. 

^^iitt'— what  subj.?  what  is  omitted?    See  App.  192. 

^  gefragt— observe  irregular  (poetic)  order.     What  is  omittedlj 


619-620] 


20 


COMPOUND  VERBS 

§ier  tDol^nt,  t)er!)uEt  t)on  ©rb'  unb  ©tein, 
dlnn  ®u€r  tote§  30^utterlein." 

2)a  fte!)t  ber  ^rieger  lang  unb  f(f)iDeigt, 
2)a§  $au^3t  l^inab  gur  33ruft  geneigt. 

@r  fteljt  unb  flarrt  gum  teuren  ©rob 
30?it  trdnenfeud^tem  33Ii(i  ]f)iriaB; 

S^ann  fdjiittelt  er  fein  $aupt  unb  fprid^t: 
„^f}V  irrt;  I)ter  mol^nt  bie  ^ote  riidjt. 

2Bie  fc^Ioff'^  ein  9^Qum,  fo  eng  unb  flein, 
^ie  Siebe  etner  SDZutter  ein?" 


211 


19 

Verbs 

to  open 

auftun 

tat  auf 

aufgetan 

to  procure 

emerben 

erlDarb 

emorben 

to  knock 

an|30c^en 

poc^te  an 

angepod^t 

to  open 

aufmac^en 

mad^te  au{ 

aufgemac^t 

to  burn  up 

t)erbrennen 

tierbrannte 

t)erbrannt 

to  recognize 

erfenueu 

erfaunte 

erfannt 

to  hide 

t)er()u(Ien 

t)erp(Ite 

ter^iittt 

^o^^^^e^f  own  ^tnabftarreu 

ftarrte  ^inab 

^inabgeftarrt 

520  EXERCISES 

I.  2Bq§  tierlangte  ber  Srembe  Don  bem  ^otengrdber?  2Sa§ 
tDoUte  ber  ^otengraber  tDtffen?  SSo^  fagte  il^m  ber  Srembe? 
SBarum  J^atte  ber  ^otengraber  ben  Sremben  nid^t  erfennen  fonnen, 
nienn  berfelbe  fetnen  D^amen  ntd)t  genannt  l^dtte? 

II.  (Se^en  ©ie  3Serfe  7,  8,  11,  12  in  inbircfte  9^ebe  um! 
^  f^liiffc — dubitative  subj.     See  App.  192. 


212  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [621 

LESSON  63 
INFINITIVES 

52 1  The  main  uses  of  the  infinitive  have  been  observed 
incidentally  in  the  preceding  reading  lessons.  They  fall  under 
three  main  groups : 

I.  Part  of  the  verb. 
II.  To  modify  nouns  or  adjectives. 

III.  Substantive  (when  the  infinitive  takes  the  place  of  a 
noun  or  a  clause).  The  German  infinitive  is  a  verbal  noun. 
As  such  it  translates  sometimes  the  English  infinitive,  some- 
times the  English  present  participle. 

Ex. — To  be  or  not  to  be  =  Scin  ober  9lit^tfetn. 

\j  Walking  is  wholesome  =  ^o8  @C^cn  tft  gefunb. 

I.  As  part  of  the  verb  it  is  used  (without  ju)  in  forming 

{a)  The  future  tenses. 
{h)  The  conditional  mode. 

(c)  The  complement  of  modal  auxiliaries  and  a  few  verbs  of 
similar  construction. 

Examples 

(a)  Future — S^  tozv\)t  a\l^t^tn, 

(b)  Conditional — @r  tDiirbe  e§  tutt,  n)enn  er  fonnte. 

(c)  Modal s — (Ste  h)iU  nic^t  f|Jtct^en. 

Verbs  like  the  modals — Sa§t  mi^  gc^cn ! 

II.  With  nouns  and  adjectives  the  infinitive  always  takes  jtt : 

e§  ift  fc^mer,  ha§  jtt  ttttt. 
^te  ^unft  gut  ju  (cf  en  ift  jelten. 
The  art  of  reading  well  is  rare. 


622-523]  INFINITIVES  213 

III.  As  a   substantive,  the  infinitive  is  used  either  with  or 
without  ju.     When  used  for  a  clause,  it  always  has  ju. 

Ex.— {a)  ®eutf^  lefcn  tft  leister  at§  SDeutfd^  f^rc^cn. 
Or  gut  ®eutfc§  ju  Icfen  tft  nic^t  fo  fe^r  leid^t. 

{i)  8tc  ge^t  in  ben  Garten,  um  SBIumen  gu  ^fiuifen  (=  bamtt 
fie  S3Iumen  pfliicfe). 

For  complete  statement,  see  App.  205-213. 

522  2)te  bctttfcfjen  ^iaW 

2In  ber  Mfte  ber  9^orb=  unb  ber  £)ftfee,i  an  htn  mQd)tigen 
(Stromen  unb  on  ben  lieblidfien  gliiffen,  bie  in  k^tere  miinben, 
finbet  man  groge  §anbeBftdbte,  gefd^dfttge  ©etnerb^ftdbte  unb 
retgenbe  altertitmlic^e  £)rtfci)aften  liegen.^  3SieIe  bcrfelBen 
5  laffen  fid^  ^\%  gu  mittelalterlidfien  '^^\i^^\  aurii(ffiil)ren,3  unb 
laffen  an  i^rem  33auftil  unb  an  bielen  ©inrid^tungen  hit  ©nt^ 
tnidlung  ber  ^al^rl^unberte  erfennen.^ 

©in  grower  Unterfd^ieb  tft  3u  bemerfen  jtoifd^en  ben  §on« 

bel^ftdbten  be§  9^orben§  (Bremen,  Sitberf  unb  ^amburg^),  W 

10  burd^  tl^ren  Umgang  mit  ©nglanb  unb  ben  anberen  benad&= 

barten  Sdnbcrn  ettna^  ^o§nto^oIitifrf)e§  an  fid^  l^aben,  unb 

benen  be§  ©iibenS,  W  ein  etn]^ettlid[)ere§  5Iu§fe]^en  f)aben. 

^Berlin,  bte  $au|)tftabt  be§  S^atferreidf)e§,  ift  eine  ber  grdfe* 

itn  SSeltftdbte.    ®a§  rafd)e  ^Intnadifen  ber  ©intnol^neraal^I,  ha^ 

15  fdineUe  SSergrdfeern  be§  SofalbesirB  unb  ha^  rege  3Serfe]^r§» 

523  ^  9loril«  VLM^  Oftfec— note  the  manner  of  placing  the  hyphen  to 
form  a  double  compound — in  English  we  say  the  North  Sea  and  the 
Baltic. 

^  matt  f tttbct ....  Ucficn  =  are.     See  App.  206  and  220. 

'  Ittff Ctl  jlr^ pritrffii^tCtt  =  can  be  traced  back.     See  App.  220. 

*  Ittff Ctt erfetinctt  =  show.     See  App.  212. 

'^SBo  liegen  biefe  ©tdbte? 


214  ELEMENTS  OP'  GERMAN  [524-626 

toefen  ertnnern  on  bic  rocftlic^en  ©table  ber  SSeretntgten  ©taa= 
ten  D^orbomerifag.  Tlitkn  in  ber  ©tabt  ift  ha§>  ^omgltdfie 
©i^Iofe  3U  fel}en6  —  ein  tnad^tiger  33au,  ber  ungefdl^r  700  ©die 
unb  Simmer  umfd^Itefeen  \oUJ     ^ort  nimmt  bte  Beriil^mte 

20  ©trofee,  „llnter  ben  Sinben",  tl^ren  5tnfang;  fie  erftretft  fidft  tion 
bem  mdd^tigen  S)enfmal  griebric^g  be§  ©rofeen  ungefdl^r  eine 
englifd^e  SO^eile  iDeftlid^  unb  enbet  am  „^ranbenburger  ^or." 
S)iefe§  ift  eineg  ber  fc^dnften  ^unftlDerfe  33erlin§.  ®ie  barauf 
fi(^  Befinbenbe  ©tatue  tvmhe  1806  bon  D^apoleon  nadj  ^an§^ 

25  gefiil^rt,  ober  1814,  Befonber§  buret)  Sllidiers^  (Jinfd)reiten, 

iDieber  guriicfgebrad)!. 

((Sd)fu6  folgt) 

524  Verbs 

lo  grow  anh)ac!^fen,  tvud)^  an,  ange-     to  interfere    einfc^reiten,  f(i)ritt  ein, 

tDad^feu  etngefc^ritten 

to  empty  miinben  (tv)  to  recognize  erfeuneu  (w) 

to  increase  tJergro^Cm    (?^) 

525  EXERCISE 

Translate:  1.  Along  the  coast  of  the  Baltic  Sea  are 
situated  many  busy  commercial  cities  and  many  large  indus- 
trial cities.  2.  Mighty  streams  and  large  towns  are  to  be  found 
in  Germany.  3.  The  customs  of  the  people  and  the  style  of 
architecture  of  many  of  these  cities  can  be  traced  back  to 
medieval  times.  4.  x\  more  uniform  appearance  can  be  observed 
in  the  cities  of  the  south  than  in  the  northern  (ones).  5.  A 
rapid  growth  of  population  and  a  great  increase  in  area  is  to 
be  observed  in  Berlin,  the  capital  of  Germany.     6.  The  capital 


526    Mfi. . .  in  fe^ett.    See  App.  212. 

'  umfii^Ue^en  foil  =  is  said  to  contain.     See  App.  242. 

*  S3(itd^er — the  Prussian  general  in  the  Battle  of  Waterloo. 


527-528]  INFINITIVES  215 

of  the  empire  is  said  to  resemble  the  large  cities  of  western 
America.  7.  By  the  intervention  of  Bliicher,  the  splendid 
work  of  art  was  brought  back  to  Germany  in  1814. 

LES80N  6Jf.  /) 

527  ^ic  bcutfdicn  ©tdbtc 

(©cfitufe) 

S)ie  fiibltd^en  ©tdbte  tragcn  tm  aonacn  ein  ctnr)ettIt(^Gre§ 
(Se^rdge,  inbcrn  fie  treniger  ben  au^Idnbifdjen  C^infliiffen^  au§= 
gefe^t  tcoren,  oB  bte,  hit  ber  Mfte^  naffer  liegen. 

Wm\&}Z\\,  bie  $QU|)tftQbt  bec^  ^dnigrcidi^^  Sat)crn,  ift  bor 
5  Qllem  bie  ^iohi  ber  ffinftlcr.  ^§>  mogen^  ha  tnol^I  einige 
^aufenb^  Mnftler  (arjaler,  Silb^auer,  ^upferftedjer  u.  a}) 
ttjofinen.  ^rdc^ttge  ^trc^cn  unb  ^^3aldfte,  f)errlid)e  S)enfmdlcr 
unb  grofee  SO^ufecn  finb  ha  3U  ftnben.  ^ontg  fiubmig  I.  I)at 
hit  grdfetcn  ©iimmen  Qu^gegebcit,  urn  30?und^cn  gur  erften 
10  ^unftftdtte  2)eutf(^Ianb§  3U  madjen. 

STnftatt  eine  Mnftlerftobt  311  ^eifeen,^  mie  2)^tind)en,  I)at 
5Iug§Burg  am  2ed)  feit  ^aftrljimbertcn  ben  D^omen  etner  ber 
grdfeten  ^onbeBftdbte  ©iibbcutfd)Ianb§.  Sm  S^^^-e  1500  mar 
5[ug§burg  burd)  fetncn  3Serfc[}r  mit  J^talien  bie  beriiljmtcftc 
15  unb  |)rd(^tigfte  ber  $anbeBftdbte,  unb  niemanb  berei[te 
2)eutfc^Ianb,  o()ne  biefen  SO^ittelpunft  be§  ^anbeB  3U  befid)= 
ttgcn.^ 


528    ^  ben  tttt§tdttt>i)i^cn  Cf titftitfiett— dat.  with  adj.     See  App.  145. 

^  miigen  —  expresses  possibility.     See  App.  234. 

^  einige  2^ttU[entl  =  some  thousands.     Observe  the  singular  form. 

*  tt.  a.  =  ttttii  ontiere. 

^  anftatt  •  •  •  •  p  ^eifjen  =  instead  of  being  called.    obtte...ficPii§ti8ett= 
without  visiting.     See  App.  217. 


216  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [529-530 

Sm  fubtt)eftlt(i)en  ^eile  bon  ^ui\d}lanh  tft  bk  Berii^mte 
^taht  ©trafeburg  gu  finben.  ^ier  liegt  ber  treltbefannte 
20  ©trapurger  SO^iinyter,  ber  toeit  iiBer  ba§  gange  Sanb  fd^aut, 
unb  ber  ein  au^gegetd^nete^  33eif|)tel  ber  altbeutfd^en  (fogenannt 
gottfd^en)  33auart  Bielet.  5tuc^  fann  man  f)ier  bte  toun- 
berbore  Hl^r  beftd)ttgen,  beren  Sauen  emem  30^enfc^en  ha§> 
Seben  gefoftet  I)aben  foE. 

529  EXERCISE 

Translate:  1.  In  order  to  make  Munich  the  greatest  art 
center  of  the  world,  King  Ludwig  I.  expended  vast  sums  of 
money.  2.  Without  having  seen  the  southern  cities  one  does 
not  know  the  beauty  of  German  art.  3.  Augsburg  was  known 
for  centuries  as  a  commercial  city.  4.  In  Munich  were  to  be 
found  great  museums  and  splendid  statues.  5.  The  building 
of  the  Strassburg  clock  is  said  to  have  cost  a  man's  life. 
6.  The  southern  cities  are  less  exposed  to  foreign  influence; 
therefore  they  are  more  uniform  in  their  style  of  architecture 
and  in  the  customs  of  the  people. 

LESSON  65 
PARTICIPLES 

530  As  the  infinitive  is  the  verbal  noun,  so  the  participle  is  the 
verbal  adjective  in  German.  As  such  it  conforms  to  every  rule 
of  adjective  declension.  It  usually  cannot  be  compared,  and  it 
may  have  its  object  or  adverbial  modifiers  with  it.  These  are 
always  placed  first.     (See  App.  214-217.) 

The  present  participle  is  active  in  meaning:  ®ie  \iCi^  ^inb 
rufenbe  Wwiitx,  the  mother  who  is  calling  her  child. 

The  perfect  participle  is  passive:  ®a§  t)on  feiner  SJ^utter 
gerufene  ^inb,  the  child  that  is  called  by  its  mother. 


631-682]  PARTICIPLES  217 

S)ie  ditefte  un§>  befonnte^  ©efdjtd^te  S)eutfd£)lQnb§  ftnbet 
ftc^2  ji^  5ei^  „@ermanta"  be^  %adtn§>  (gefd^rieBen  im  ga^ire 
98  n.  ©]&r.3).  ^Qcitu^,  ber  ein  genau  beoBad^tenber  ^efuc^er 
in  S)eutfd^Ianb  tear,  berid)tet  bon  ben  einfac^en  ©itten,  bem 
5  tal^feren  9P?ut,  ber  munberbaren  ^raft  ber  2)eut{d)en.  (Beit  ber 
3eit  ©dfar§  toaren  hk  2)eutfd^en  in  93eru]^rung  mit  ben  il^nen 
itberlegenen  S^tomern^  gefommen,  o!)ne  fic^  jeboc^  unterorbnen 
3U  lajfen.^ 

gm  S(^?)i^e  9  n.  (SI)r.  ^otte  ber  fluge  unb  befonnene  $er= 
10  monn  ben  fii^nen  aber  leid&t  berfiilfirten  SSaru^  im  ^eutoburger 
SSoIbe  gef(f)Iagen. 

S)a§  ndd^fte  gu  berirf)t€nbe^  @reigni§  ift  hie  fogenonnte  25oI= 
fertoanberung  —  biefe  mddjtige  90^igration  bon  9^orben  nadj 
©iiben,  tooran  gange  3SdIferftdnime  teilno^imen.  liefer  nidd)= 
15  tige,  nie  gang  erfldrle  3ug  in  bie  grembe  bauerte  ungefd^r 
bom  tiierten  U§>  gum  fec^ften  ^ol^rl^unbert  unb  berdnberte  hie 
gange  biSl^er  beftel^enbe  fiage^  ber  euro^dif(f)en  95dlfer. 

3u  einem  sufammengefugten  3SoIfe  iDurbe  ®eutfd)Ianb  erft 
tDieber  burd^  hie  ©r!)ebung  ^avU  be§  ©rofeen,  ber  im  ^Q^ire 
20  800  n.  Sl^r.  ^oifer  he§>  berii!)mten  ^eiligen  9^dmifcf)en  ?flei^e§> 
tvmhe.  S)odf)  balb  noc^  feinem  tief  betrauerten  Xobe  gerfiel  ha§> 
bon  il^m  bereinte  Sanb  unter  ben  unbermdgenben  §dnben  feiner 
fd^tcdd^Iid^en  D^ad^fommen. 

(©d)IuB  folgt) 


532    ^  mi8  fiefttttttte  =  known  to  us. 

2  flttbct  M  =  is  found.     See  App.  220c. 

^tt.  e^r.=ttttr^  (^^rtfio  (A.D.)    Cf.  tj.  g|r.  (B.c  ) 

*  ilCtt  i|ttett  itberlegcttCtt  ^lomertt  =  the  Romans,  who  were  superior 
to  them. 

5  See  App.  217  and  220b. 

^  Jtt  fiettji^tmbc  =  to  be  related. 

^  Bt§^cr  Bcfte^Cttiie  Sage  =  the  situation  as  it  had  existed  previously. 


218  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [533-536 

533  EXERCISE 

Translate:  1.  The  oldest  extant"^  German  history  is  found 
in  the  "Germania"  of  Tacitus.  2.  Tacitus  was  a  keenly 
observant  visitor  in  the  Germany  known  to  the  Romans. 
3.  By  him  the  bravery  and  simple  customs  of  the  Germans 
were  made  known  to  the  Eomans.  4.  The  Komans,  who  loere 
superior  to  the  Germans^  were  not  able  to  defeat  them.  5. 
Varus,  lold  hut  easily  misled,  was  defeated  by  Hermann  in  the 
year  9  A.  D.  6.  Whole  families,  including  men^  women,  and 
children,  took  part  in  the  Tribal  Migrations.  7.  This  migra- 
tion, 7iever  quite  explained,  lasted  for  two  centuries.  8.  Not 
until  (erft  gur)  the  time  of  Charles  the  Great  did  the  Germans 
become  a  united  people  again.  9.  His  death,  mourned  deeply 
hy  all,  caused  (lie§)  the  land  that  had  just  been  united  to  fall 
to  pieces. 

LE880N  66 

534  ^ic  bcutf^c  ©ef^i^tc 

©rft  tnit  bem  ©mporfommen^  be§  ^ofienftaufifcfien^  ^atfer= 

l^aufe^  (1138  bi§  1254)  felfirte  ber  t)erIoren  gegangene^  (SJIang 

rt)entgflen§  ouf  etne  SSeile  guriicf.     ®od)    )Durbe    buret)    bie 

STreusgiige  unb  W  ^dm:pfe  stDtfc^en  ben  ^aifern  unb  ben  $a|)= 

5  [ten  W  Uxci\i  be§  Sonbe^  erfd)o|)ft. 

®ie  ndd^fte  grofee  ©^0($e,  bie  man  in  33etrad)t  giefien  foil, 


*  Translate  all  italicized  expressions  by  participles. 
535    ^  Srfi — ©m^iorfoinmctt  =  not  until  the  rise. 

^  ^O^Cttftaufljt^cn— note  adjective  formation  from  the  stem  ^oJ^en^ 
ftttttf(ett) — the  name  of  a  castle  in  Swabia,  from  which  this  imperial 
family  came. 

3  ber  dcrlorett  fiefiangene  ©lattj  =  the  lost  glory.  Note  the  tautolog- 
ical expression  ticrlotett  ge^Ctt  =  to  become  lost,  i.e.  to  be  lost. 


536]  PARTICIPLES  219 

tft  ha§>  fed)3e]^nte  ^a1:)tt)nnhQvi,  mit  ber  alte  ©itten  unb  tau= 
fenbiQi)rige  (^inrid)timgen  umftiirsenben  D^eformation. 

SSieber  tourbe  ber  erft^  eroberte  (Slans  gebdm^ft.  0!)ne  \i6:} 

10  t)oE  auSleben  gu  fbnmn,^  tvuvhe  bte  neu  ertoorbene  ^taft  burd) 
ben  fiirc^terlidien  Sreifetgidftrigen  ^ricg  (1618 — 1648) 
erfd^opft,  tvohei  Canb  nnh  Seute  faft  gu  ©runbe  gmgen.^ 

9^ac^  ber  le^tgenonnten  ^ataftro^!)e  fom  ba§  ^reufeifdje 
S^dntgrcid),  ha§>  fpdter  gang  SDeutfd^Ianb  3ur  33Iute  berl^elfen 

15  foUte,"  langfam  in  bte  ^dl&e.^  2;er  erfte  Berur)mte  unb  tDoijt- 
E)aft  grofee  ©profe  biefe!§  §Qufeg  tear  jener  ^urfiirft  Srtebrid^ 
aSil^elm  t)on  33ranbcnburg  (1620—1688),  bon  beffen  er|)rob= 
ter  ©trenge  unb  ^^3flid)ttreue  tv'n  in  ber  @efd)ic^tc  Dom  ^^ringcn 
don  ^omBurg  gelefen  I)Qb€n. 

20  (Sein  birefter  ^lad)fomme  Wax  jener  griebrid),  ber  am 
Beften  Bejeic^net  tDirb  burd)  hen  9Zamen,  ben  i^m  fein  3SoU' 
gegeben,  ,,ber  alte  gri^".  Siiefer  t^erl^alf  bem  lange  gebemu= 
tigten  SSoIfe  auerft  toieber  gu  ©teg  unb  ©l^re,  ha  er  bte  ftolgen 
^Irmeen  SubtDig  XIV  fd)Iug  (©djlad^t  bei  S^ofebad)  in  ©adjfen, 

25  1757)  in  bein  tDo{)Ibefannten  t)on  1756  U§>  1763  bauernben 
©iebenidf)rigen  ^riege. 

^od)  eine  bemiitigenbe  ®^od^e  l^atte  S)eutfc^Ianb  burd^au^ 
mad)€n.  2^ie  Unterbriidungen  he§>  fiegenben  ^apohon^,  gtci^ 
fdjen  1795  unb  1813,  brad)ten  ba§  2anb  on  hen  dlanh  be§  9Ser^ 

30  bcrbenS.     S)ie  t)er]^dngm§t)olIe  9ZieberIage  gu  Qena   (1805) 

broI)te  ben  gdnalic^en  Untergang.    ®o(^  langfam  em|)orftrebenb 

crftoB  e§  fic^  nac^  ber  (^efangennaftme  be§  Unterbriider^  gu  in= 

536    *  Ctft — translate  newly. 

^  0|ttC . . . .  p  fomtCtt.     See  628,  5. 
*5tt  ©ruttic  fttngett  =  perished. 
7  lotttc  =  was  destined. 
^  in  iic  pof^t  =  to  the  front. 


220  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 

buftrteHer  urtb  ^oltttfi^er  ©rofee,  um  fdiliefelid^  in  bem  beutfc^» 

fransofifd^en  ^riege  (1870 — 1871)  gu  Betceifen,  ha%  es  audj 

35  fremben  Tladjten  g€tDQd)fen  ift.^  ^er  ©teg  Bei  ®eban  (1870) 

tnad^te  bie  oBengenannte  D^ieberloge  bet  Sena  (1805)  iDieber 

■  gut.    Tin  hex  borauffolgenben  llronung  beg  beutfc^en  ^atfer§ 

■  SStl^elm  I  m  3SerfatEe§  tm  Sa^re  1871  mt  ha§  burd^  Saftr^ 
i^unberte  geteilte  beutfdje  Sanb  3u  etnem  beretnten  ®eutf(f)Ianb 

40  erfldrt.    SSte  unfer  §etmatlanb,  fud)t  e§  je^t  jeine  ©tdr!e  in 
feiner  ©inl&eit  unb  bent  fricblic^en  ©nttcidfein  feiner  ^rafte. 

3ur  Qdt  be§  eben  genannten  ^riegeS  njurbe  'oa^  tm  ^a^xt  1840 
gefc^riebene  (55ebtc^t  „SDie  SSad)t  am  3flf)ein"  oft  nnb  begeiftert 
gefungen.  ^iefe§  §ur  beutfdien  9^ationalt|t)mne  ert)obene  2kh 
lautet: 

^ic  SSa^t  am  9!^etn 

©§  brauft  ein  9tuf  n)ie  S)onner]^aII, 
SSie  ©d^tcertgeflirr  unb  SSogen^raH: 
'  ,,3unt  ^!)ein,  gum  ^^ein,  gum  beutf(f)en  9^t)ein! 
SSer  tcia  be§  ©trome^  fitter  fein?" 
5  Sieb  SSaterlanb,  ntagft  ru!)ig  fein: 

Seft  fte^t  unb  treu  bie  3Bad)t,  bie  SSac^t  am  9^§ein! 

Surd)  ^unberttaufenb  sudt  e§  fdinell, 
Unb  aGer  5lugen  bli^en  !)ell: 
®er  beutfdje  SiinQltng,  frontm  unb  ftarf, 
10  33efd^irmt  bie  IjeiFge  Sanbe^ntarf. 

Sieb  SSaterlanb  2c. 

©r  blidt  !)inauf  in  ^immelBau^n, 
2So  ^elbengeifter  nieberfd)au'n, 
Unb  jdeitDort  ntit  ftolger  ^antpf eSluft : 
15  „S)u,  ^tliein,  bleibft  beutfc^,  trie  meine  93ruft!" 

Sieb  35aterlanb  2c. 


^ftcmtiett  mWtn  ftettltt^fett  =  able  to  cope  with  foreign  powers. 


637-638] 


PARTICIPLES 


221 


25 


537 


„<Solanq'  ein  Zxopfen  33Iut  nod)  qIu% 
9^od)  eine  gauft  ben  ^gen  aiel^t, 
Unb  norf)  ein  Slrm  bie  33u(f)fe  f^onnt, 
33etrttt  fein  geinb  l^ter  beinen  ©tronb!" 
SieB  SSaterlanb  2c. 

2)er  (Sd^n)nr  erfd^oEt,  bie  SSoge  rinnt, 
2)ie  gQl^nen  flottern  l^odf)  im  3Kinb: 
,;3wm  Df^^ein,  gum  9^^ein,  anm  bentf(f)en  D^l^ein! 
mix  aEe  tDotten  filter  fein!" 
2ieb  SSaterlanb  2c. 

2Rttj  ®r^nei!ettbur0er. 

Verbs 


to  rise 

emporfontmen 

to  gain 

ertuerben 

to  assist 

tjer^etfen 

to  raise 

erl^eben 

to  prove 

betueifen 

to  swear 

f^rtjoren 

to  set  foot  or 

I  betreten 

to  flow 

rinnen 

to  exhaust     erf cEjopfen 
to  overthrow  umfturjen 

to  conquer       tVOhtVn 
to  extinguish  bdnt))fen 


to  live  freely 

\id)  auSteben 

to  test 

er:proben 

to  designate 

bejeid^nen 

to  humble 

bemiitigen 

to  strive 

entporftreben 

to  resound 

braufen 

to  thrill 

5uc!en 

to  flash 

ba^en 

to  protect 

befd^irmen 

to  glow 

glii^en 

to  hold 

f^jannen 

to  resound 

erfd^allen 

to  flutter 

ftattern 

538  EXERCISES 

I.    1.    Sdl^Ien  (^ie  bk  obengenannten  ®|)0(f)en  ber  beutjd^en 
©efdfiid^te  auf!^ 

2.  9^ennen  <Bie  bie  Berii^intten  SO^dnner  ber  bentfd^^n  @ejc^id)te 
unb  fagen  (Sie,  iDe^tnegen  jeber  berii!)mt  n^or! 

3.  ©rgaiilen  ©ie  dtDa§>  t)on  jebem  ber  oben  genannten  ^riegel 


222  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN  [o3t»-640 

4.  2Bk  l^eifet  hie  hent\ii)e  9^ationQll3t)mne?   SSann  tour  be  fie  ge= 
fd)rteben?   SSann  ift  fie  toteber  t)tel  gefungen  toorben? 

5.  ©e^en  ©ie  bie  fiinftc  3^ile  iinb  bie  fedjfte  3etle  in  ben  3m= 
^erottt)  um! 

II.  Translate:  1.  Without  being  able  to  live  itself  out,  the 
land  was  exhausted  by  a  new  war.  2.  The  exhausted  country 
was  humiliated  by  the  proud  conqueror.  3.  The  reformation 
which  revolutionized  many  old  customs  occurred  in  the  six- 
teenth century.  4.  The  Prussian  Kingdom  was  destined  to 
raise  the  humiliated  country.  5.  The  Watch  on  tae  Rlmie 
was  made  the  German  national  hymn. 

LESSON  67 

539  GRAMMAR  REVIEW 

1.  Imperative— See  App.  200-204. 

2.  Compound  Verbs — See  App.  80. 

3.  Infinitives— See  App.  205-213. 

4.  Participles— See  App.  214-217. 

540  REVIEW  EXERCISES 

1.  1.  Let  the  Rhine  be  the  boundary  of  united  Germany! 
2."  Go,  German  youths,  and  fight  for  your  native  land ! 

3.  Look  at  the  beautiful  cities,  with  their  famous  works  of 
ai  t. 

4.  Without  having  seen  the  art  of  south  Germany,  one  has 
not  seen  the  country. 

5.  The  often  praised  scenery  of  the  Rhine  is  said  to  be  the 
most  romantic  in  the  world. 

II.     1.  93efd)reiben  @ie  bie  fiibbeutfrfien  ©tobte ! 

2.  8e|en  @te  bie  9^ational^t)mne  in  ^rofa  um! 

3.  Semen  @ie  bie  9fiattonaU)t)mne  augtuenbig! 


APPENDIX 


GERMAN   ALPHABET 

« 

a 

a 

^'cy 

all 

a 

» 

^ 

^ 

bay 

b 

® 

jr 

..^^ 

tsay 

c 

2) 

^ 

^ 

day 

(1 

e 

?? 

/ 

/ 

ay 

e 
f 

® 

3 

f 

gay 

liah 
ee 

g 
li 

i 

3 
« 

7 

r 

^ 

yot 
kali 

J 
k 

8 

=S? 

^ 

ell 

1 

m 

P^ 

in 

^if^^^ 

em  111 

111 

Stt 

^ 

n 

^<r^>^ 

enn 

n 

0 

^ 

0 

.-^^ 

oil 

o 

GERMAN  ALPHABET  225 

X         ^-^«^^  err  in  b^rry     r 


® 

^ 

f« 

/k^ 

ess 

2 

:r 

t 

V 

tay 

u 

^ 

tt 

oo 

SB 

^ 

t) 

.-^/^ 

fow 

2B 

^^ 

to 

.^^X-^^ 

vay 

a^ 

^ 

f 

■t 

icks 

?> 

^ 

i| 

-y 

ipsilon 

Modified  Vowels  { 

a 

Umlautc 

r 

0 

tset 

Diphthongs 

u 


w 


U     ^      it      .^    «K^  ^^     f«    ^^^^^ 

For  the  pronunciation  of  modified         f||^|        fjf*  itl  ^^^  ^^ 

vowelsanddiphtliongs,  seeApp.  6-8.        ^^        LxX-^^  III         ^^tyC-^^ 


226  ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


■-^/^^^ 


''/^^.^<^^>^<^^^ 


ti^//^f^^ 


Compound  Consonants 


APPENDIX 

The  following  statement  of  the  essential  facts  of  German  Gram- 
mar falls  under  the  heads  (a)  of  Inflections,  ^)  of  Syntax.  Rare 
usages,  poetic  forms,  and  complicated  constructions  have  not  been 
treated,  as  this  Appendix  purports  to  be,  not  a  complete  reference 
grammar,  but  a  concise  statement  of  those  facts  which  are  basic  in 
their  nature  and  which  should  be  committed  to  memory  by  every 
student  of  German. 

Inflections  which  resemble  each  other,  as  definite  article  and 
demonstrative  pronoun,  indefinite  article  and  possessive  pronoun,  etc., 
are  placed  side  by  side.  Wherever  actual  usage  differs  from  tradi- 
tional forms  (as  found  in  most  grammars)  the  former  is  given  prefer- 
ence. This  is  especially  noticeable  in  the  inflections  of  the  subjunctive. 


PRONUNCIATION 

VOWELS 

Quantity 

I  Vowels  are  long  and  short.  Care  must  be  taken  to  distinguish 
quantity.  Long  vowels  are  drawn  out  to  greater  length  than  in  Eng- 
lish, short  vowels  are  more  decidedly  clipped. 

A  few  rules  can  be  given  for  the  quantity  of  vowels,  but  in  most 
cases  the  student  must  rely  upon  the  authority  of  the  teacher  or  the 
dictionary,  and  must  endeavor  to  train  his  ear  to  the  correct  sound. 

(a)  Vowels  are  always  long 

[1]  when  doubled— §aar,  9Keer; 
[2]  when  followed  by  silent  1^  —  ^cit)t,  me^r; 
[3]  i  when  followed  by  silent  c  —  l^ier,  ikb, 
227 


228  APPENDIX 

(b)  Vowels  are  always  short  when  followed  by  a  double  conso- 
nant —  f oUen,  tiaden. 

(c)  Stressed  vowels  are   generally  long  in  an  open  syllable,  i.  e. 
one  that  does  not    end    in  a  consonant    (remember  that  r* 
single  consonant  always  goes  with  the  following  vowel  in  syl- 
lable division)— btt,  ^a^ben,  le^gen. 

(d)  Stressed  vowels  are  generally  short  in  a  closed  syllable  —  ba^/ 
©pCtling,  tDcg  (before  t,  VX,  and  k  in  the  pronouns,  the  vowel  is 
long  though  the  syllable  is  closed,  bet,  er,  bent,  ben). 

(e)  Unstressed  vowels  are  generally  short — bin,  ntit,  ^o'n'tg,  5lbler. 
(/)  Diphthongs  are  long, 

Quality 

2  Vowels  are  termed  front  or  back-vowels,  according  as  they  are 
articulated  in  the  front  part  of  the  mouth  (the  hard  palate),  with 
the  tongue  pushed  forward,  or  in  the  back  part  of  the  mouth  (the 
soft  palate),  with  the  tongue  drawn  back.  A  fundamental  difference 
between  German  and  English  lieo  in  the  fact  that  German  abounds  in 
back  vowels,  and  that  such  front  vowels  as  exist  are  pronounced  very 
decidedly  in  the  front  of  the  mouth,  with  the  tongue  pushed  far  for- 
ward, whereas  in  English,  the  tongue  is  more  flaccid  and  the  vowel 
much  more  neutral.  The  effect  upon  German  vowels  is  to  make  thetn 
much  fuller,  clearer,  and  more  sonorous  than  the  corresponding  Eng- 
lish sounds. 

3  It  is  impossible  to  present  through  the  eye  an  adequate  idea  of 
the  sounds  that  make  up  a  foreign  tongue.  An  approximation  is  here 
attempted,  but  it  must  be  used  with  great  caution. 

Long  Vowels 

4  Long  Vowels  resemble  the  sounds  that  we  give  to  Latin  long 
vowels  according  to  the  so-called  "  Roman  pronunciation. "  Remem- 
ber always  to  articulate  the  vowels  clearly,  keeping  the  tongue  more 
tense  and  the  lips  more  active  than  in  English. 

a  resembles  a  in  art 
e  resembles  e  in  eight 
i  resembles  i  in  pique 
0  resembles  o  in  slow 
U  resembles  oo  in  swoon 


APPENDIX  229 


Short  Vowels 


5  The  short  vowels  resemble  the  long  ones  in  quality  but  are  clipped 

very  short.  ui  •         ^.-^  •  i 

a  resembles  a  m  artificial 

e  resembles  e  in  yellow 

i  resembles  i  in  tin 

0  has  no  equivalent  in  English.      Very  much 

like  German  long  0  shortenejd.     Not  at  all  like  English  o. 

u  resembles  u  in  pwt. 

Diphthong 

6  Diphthong  is  the  combining  of  two  vowels  to  form  one  sound. 
There  are  three  of  these  in  German : 

ai  and  et  resemble  i  in  bind 
au  resembles  ow  in  how 

cu  (an)  resembles  oy  in  hoy  (with  greater  stress 
on  second  part  of  diphthong). 
All  diphthongs  are  long. 

Umlant 

7  Umlaut  is  the  fronting  of  a  vowel  produced*  by  anticipation  of 
the  front  vowel  I  in  the  following  syllable.  The  mind  visualizes  the 
whole  of  a  long  word  before  a  single  syllable  of  it  is  uttered.  If  a 
later  syllable  contains  something  remarkable,  the  fact  is  apt  to  so 
attract  the  attention,  that  the  tongue  involuntarily  seeks  to  form  the 
required  sound  before  the  right  time.  This  may  lead  to  a  decided 
modification  of  sounds  by  anticipation. 

A  front  vowel  immediately  following  a  back  vowel  naturally 
attracts  the  attention.  The  vowel  nearest  the  front  of  the  mouth  is  I. 
If,  therefore,  an  i  is  anticipated  in  a  word,  all  preceding  vowels  are 
drawn  forward  to  meet  it.     For  this  reason 

a  becomes  a 

0  becomes  d 

u  becomes  ii 

au  becomes  du 

8  Observe  that  these  vowels  remain  modified  after  the  i  sound  that 
caused  the  change  has  disappeared,  hence  the  prevalence  in  modern 
German  of  umlaut  without  visible  cause.  These  sounds  have  no 
exact  counterpart  in  English  (except  iitt  which,  like  eu,  is  pronounced 
like  oy  in  English).  Hence  they  must  be  learned  by  continuous 
practice.    A  few  helpful  suggestions  may,  however,  be  given. 

a  —  very  much  like  German  e  (as  in  they) 

d — round  the  lips  as  though  to  whistle  and  articulate  German  e 

ft— round  the  lips  as  though  to  whistle  and  articulate  German  i 


230  APPENDIX    . 

CONSONANTS 

9  With  a  few  exceptions,  German  consonants  are  pronounced  as  in 
English,  only  with  more  vigor.  The  lips  are  used  more  forcibly,  the 
glottis  is  closed  more  energetically.  Especially  is  this  true  of  finals, 
which  are  rendered  with  a  complete  stopping  of  the  breath  so  as 
to  produce  a  total  break  between  words — the  very  opposite  of  French 
liaison.  For  this  reason  the  medials,  b,  h,  are  pronounced  like 
t,  p,  when  they  are  found  at  the  end  of  a  word. 

ttttb  is  pronounced  like  nnt,  oB  like  op,  etc. 

f  O  SPECIAL  DEVIATIONS  FROM  ENGLISH 

(a)  ^  —  This  has  two  different  sounds  according  to  the  kind  of 
vowel  that  precedes  it. 

1.  After  the  bad-  vowels  tt,  0,  U,  tttt,  it  is  guttural  (far 
back). 

2.  After  tho  front  vow  Is  t,  \,  a,  3,  U,  tttt,  ett,  t\,  and  after 

all  consonants,  it  is  palatal  (farther  front). 

A  practical  hint  for  pronouncing  this  difficult  sound  is  as  follows: 
Sound  the  preceding  vowel  very  distinctly,  then  suddenly  cease  vocal- 
izing and  c^ntinue  breathing.  The  right  sound  will  always  follow. 
(Caution — Do  not  pronounce  if  like  ^.  The  former  is  simply  ft,  pro- 
nounced as  in  English  bacfc,  but  more  forcibly.) 

ip)  Q — At  the  beginning  hard  as  in  go.    Medially  and  finally  it 

approaches  *he  ^  sounds,  with  the  variations  noted  in  (a), 
(c)   j  resembles  y  in  young. 
(c?)  ti  resembles  /. 

(c)    tQ  resembles  English  v  (but  more  loosely  articulated). 
(/)  f(^  resembles  sh  in  sTiould. 
(g)   f  — At  the  beginning  like  English  z,  medially  und  finally  like 

escaping  steam  (so  also  ^      In  combination  with  t,  p,  it 

approaches  f^  (but  not  qjite   o  forcibly). 
(h)  g  =  fs  (this  must  be  carefully  observed,  as  the  English  z  sound 

is  used  for  initial  [  in  German). 
(i)   Jig  is  nasalized  as  ng  in  singer,  never  like  ng  in  hunger,  except 

in  a  few  proper  names.  ,  , 

U)  i\cn  (from  Latin)  pronounced  as  though  jtOtt,  i.e.,  tsion. 
(jc)  ^g  =  X  as  in  fox. 


APPENDIX 


231 


DECLENSION 


THE  ARTICLE  1,l:»t«"«e. 


If      I.    Definite— (a)  Every  case  has  a  characteristic  ending. 

(6)  Like  the  def.  art.  are  declined  the  demonstra- 
tive, relative,  interrogative  and  indefinite 
pronouns  and  strong  adjectives. 

(c)  The  def.  art.  and  these  pronouns  are  followed 
by  the  weak  declension  of  the  adjective. 


Definite  Article 

Demonstrative  Pronoun 

Singular       Plural 

Singular            Plural 

m.       f.       n.      m.  f.  n. 

m.        f.        n.          m.  f.  n. 

NOM. 

bcr     bie     ta&        bie 

biefer   biefc    bie[c§        biefe 

Gen. 

be§     ber    t>c^        ber 

biefeS  biefer  bicfcS       biefer 

DAT. 

bem    bcr    bent       ben 

biefem  biefer  biefem       biefei? 

AGO. 

ben     bie    boS        bie 

biefen  biefe   biefeg       biefe 

II,    Indefinite — (a)   Three  forms  (nom.  masc,  and  nom.   and 
ace.  neut.)  are  uninflected. 

(6)  Like  the  indef.  art.  are  declined  the  pos- 
sessive pronouns  and  fctll. 

(c)  The  indef.    art.    and    the    poss.    pron.    are 
followed  by  mixed  adjectives. 


Indefinite  Article 

Singular 
m.         f.        n. 
N.    ein       eine     ein 
G.    eineS     einer    eineS 
D.    einem   einer    einem 
A.    einen    eine     ein 


Possessive  Pronoun 

Singular  Plural 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

mein        meine     mein  meine 

nteineS     meiner    meineS  meiner 

meinem    meiner    meinem  meinen 

meinen    meine     mein  meine 


232  APPENDIX 

NOUNS 

GENDER 

13  As  a  rule  the  gender  follows  the  natural  sex.      Ex.,  bct  SD^ann, 

tie  d^au,  Jio§  ^inb. 

Exceptions: — (a)  All  nouns  in  ^cn  and  lein  are  neuter,  regard- 
less of  their  meaning:  ba§  SWdbc^en,  ba§  f^routcin,  ha^Wann6)tn 
(the  little  man). 

(6)  Occasionally  one  word  forms  an  exception,  as  ha^  SBeib  (the 
woman). 

14  Endings  determine  gender: 

(a)  Masc. :  ct,  Ultfi,  i^  tfi  — bcr  S3Qc!er  (baker),  bcr  grueling  (spring), 
hex  SSiiterid^  (tyrant),  bcr  ^cifig  (cage). 

(5)  Fem. :  Ic,  el,  l^cit,  itli,  ft^ttft,  «tt9,  e,*  in,  if,  ton  —  bic  Sortie 
(company),  bie  S3dcferci  (bakery),  bie  f^rei^eit  (freedom), 
bic  2)an!barfeit  (gratitude),  bic  f^reunbfd^oft  (friendship), 
bic  SSo^nung  (dwelling),  bie  g3lumc  (flower),  t>k  ^0(i)in 
(woman  cook),  bie  £t)ri!  (lyric  poetry),  bie  ficftton 
(lesson). 

15  But  few  additional  rules  can  be  given.     Most  nouns  must  be 

studied  with  the  proper  article  without  regard  to  rule. 

(a)  Masc. :  1.  Names  of  seasons,  months,  days  of  week,  ber  ^rii^" 
ling,  ber  ^anuar,  ber  2)onnerjtag. 

2.  Monosyllabic  nouns  derived  from  the  stems  of  strong 
verbs,  ber  @ang  (from  ge:^en=walk). 

(5)  Fem. :  Names  of  trees,  flowers,  most  German  rivers,  bie  ©idje 
(oak),  bie  9?ofe,  bie  SScfer;  but  bcr  U^tin. 

(e)  Neut. :  Substantive  infinitives,  and  collectives  formed  with 
prefix  ge:  ha^  6e!^en  (seeing),  ha^  ©cbirge  (the mountain 
system).  Almost  every  word  ending  in  niS  and  fal: 
ta§  ©e^eimnig  (secret),  ha^  S^idfal  (fate). 

16  A  few  nouns  have  two  genders  with  difference  of  meaning 

ttt  S3anb  (volume)  tier  93unb  (league) 

bag  S3anb  (ribbon)  bttS  93unb  (bundle) 

ber  ©ee  (lake)  ber  Xeil  (part) 

bie  ©ee  (sea)  bag  2:eil  (share) 
•For  masculines  in  C  cf.  23  c. 


APPENDIX 


233 


DECLENSION   OF  NOUNS 

GENERAL. 


1 7     (a)  All  feminines  are  uninflected  in  the  singular. 
(6)  All  nouns  add  n  in  the  dat.  pi. 


iS 


19 


NUMBER  OF  DECLENSIONS 

Sing.  Pl. 

I.   Strong    Gen.  (e)8  i—,C,tV 

II.  Weak      G.  D.  A.      (c)rt  All  cases  i  (c)n 
III.  Mixed     Gen.             (c)8  (  (e)tt 

I.    Strong  Declension 

Endings:    Gen.  Sing.     (e)§ 

Plurals  — ,  t,  tV 

Plural,  no  ending    (umlaut  rare) 

"         e  (       "       more  frequent) 

"ft  (      "      always) 


Classes 


(3 


20 


tiass  1 1  Plurals  — 


Membership:  (ct)    Polysyllabic  Masculines   and  Neuters  ending  in 
cl,  tn,  tt. 

(b)  Polysyllabic  Neuters  ending  in  i^cn,  Icin,  and  e. 

(c)  Two  Feminines,  bie  aJJutter  and  bie  Xod^ter. 


Examples 


(a) 


(&) 


Sing. 

PL. 

Sing. 

PL. 

NOM. 

ber  ©arten 

bie  ©arten* 

t)a^  fjraulein 

bie  graulcin 

Gen. 

beg  ©arteng 

ber  ©orten 

be§  f^rciuleing 

ber  ^rdulein 

DAT. 

bent  ©arten 

ben  ©drten 

bent  graulein 

ben  ^roulein 

Ace. 

ben  (3arten 

bie  ©arten 
Sing. 

ha^  fjraulein 
(c) 

PL. 

bie  §raulein 

NOM. 

bie  muttex 

bie  ajiiitter 

Gen. 

ber  aJJntter 

ber  aJJiitter 

Dat. 

ber  aJiutter 

hen  ajJiittent 

Ace. 

bie  abutter 

bie  ajJuttec 

♦  A  number  of  nouns  in  this  class  take  the  umlaut  in  the  plural.    No  rule 
cao  be  given.    Observe  each  noun  carefully. 


234 


APPENDIX 


21 


Clas8  2p-«^-?^'^g- 


Plurals 


Membership:  (a)  Monosyllabic  Masculines. 

(6)  A  few  monosyllabic  feminines  and  neuters,  as  btc 

^anb,  bie  SBanb,  tie  Wlau^,  bie  8tabt,  ba§  ^-a^r,  ha^ 

^aax,  ba§  ^f  erb. 
(c)  A  few  polysyllabic  masculines  in  Ig,  tttg  and  Htlfl 

and  neuters  in  nU  and  fal,  ber  Sii«9ii"9/  ^^^  ^onig, 

t>a&  ©e^eimnig,  ba§  ©c^icffal 


NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Ace. 


(a) 
Sing. 
ber  ©ol^n 
be§  (Sotinetf 
bent  (So:^n(e)* 
ben  ©ot)n 


PL. 

bie  ©ol^ne 
ber  (SoQne 
ben  ©o|nett 
bie  8o^nc 


(&) 


sing, 


Sing. 
btc  SSanb 
ber  SSanb 
ber  SKanb 
bie  SSanb 

The  omission  of  this  C  is  a 


PL. 

bie  SSanbet 
ber  SBcinbe 
ben  SBcinbett 
bie  SSanbc 


♦  Monosyllables  may  take  an  t  in  the  dat. 
matter  of  euphony. 

t  AH  feminines  and  many  naasculines  of  this  class  take  the  umlant  to  form 
the  plural. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

22 


Sing. 

be§  Sa^re§ 
bent  ^a^r(e) 


PL. 

bie  ^a^xt 
ber  Sa^re 
ben  Sat)ren 
bie  ^a^rc 


Sing. 
ber  Mngting 
be§  §iingUng8 
bent  ^iingling 
ben  ^tingling 


(c) 


PL. 

^ungltnge 
"iinglinge 
iinglingctt 
bie  ^iinglingc 


Class  a  J  ^®^-  ^^^S-    (^)^ 
Liass  6  J  Plurals  tV 


Membership:  (a)  Monosyllabic  Neuters. 

(6)  A  few  monosyllabic  masculines  as   ber  SQiann,  ber 

aSolb,  ber  ©eift,  ber  SSurnt. 
(c)  Nouns  in  tttlll  (mostly  neuter,  sometimes  masculine). 


(a) 

Sing. 

NOM. 

ba§ 

§au§ 

Gen. 

be§ 

§aufe8 

DAT. 

bent 

§aufe 

Ace. 

bag 

§aug 

PL. 

NOM. 

bici 

baufcr* 

Gen. 

ber. 

|)aufcr 

DAT. 

ben 

panfcnt 

Ago. 

bie, 

gaufcr 

Examples 

(P) 

Sing. 
ber  SlJJann 
be§  9!JJannc8 
bent  SO^anne 
ben  SD^ann 

PL. 

bie  Wanntt 
ber  aPcanner 
ben  SKdnncrn 
bie  Wlanntv 


(c) 
Sing. 
bo§  Stitertum 
beg  Slltertuntg 
bent  5lltertunt 
ha^  2lltertuni 

PL. 

bie  Stitertiintcr 
ber  5tltertiintcr 
ben  2tltertumettt 
tie  Slltertiimer 


•Plurals  always  have  the  umlaut  If  the  stem  vowel  permits.    This  class  con 
tains  no  feminines. 


APPENDIX  235 

23  n.    Weak  Declension 

Singular    (c)tt  (except  in  nom.) 
Plural         (e)tt 
Membership:  (a)  Polysyllabic  Feminines  (except  WlvLitex,  Sod^ter), 

(6)  Some  monosyllabic  feminines  —  bie  U!^r,  bie  i^rau, 
bie  Slrt,  bie  S3a^n,  bie  i8urg,  bie  ^flic^t,  bie  ©aat. 

(c)  Masculines  in  e,  ber  ^nabe,  ber  -Su^ge,  ber  ®attc,  ber 
9?abe,  ber  §afe,  ber  fiotue,  ber  §eibe. 

(d)  A  limited  number  of  masculines  that  have  lost  this 
e,  ber  9Jfenfc^,  ber  ^etb,  ber  ^irt,  ber  giirft,  ber  ®raf, 
ber  ^err,  ber  ^axx,  ber  £)d^§,  ber  S3ar,  ber  %ou 

(e)  Masculines  of  foreign  origin  with  the  accent  on  the 

last  syllable,  as  ber  ©tubent,  ber  eiefant,  ber  tatnerab, 

ber  mutuant 

Examples 

(a)  (6)  (c)  (d) 

Singular 

Nom.    bie  geber  bie  %xavL  ber  ^nabe  ber  9Kenf(!^ 

Gen.     ber  fjeber  ber  grau  t>e^  ^nabett  beS  9[Renicl(iett 

DAT.     ber  gebcr  ber  grau  bent  ^nabcn  bem  90^enfd^ett 

Ago.     btc  geber  bie  fjrau  ben  Sl^nabctt  ben  aJienfd^ett 

Plural 

Nom.     tie  gebcrti         bie  %xautn*       bie  ^nabcn  bie  ^en\6)tn 

Gen.     bet  fjebem         ber  graucn        ber  tnabcn  ber  SD^enfc^en 

DAT.     ben  fjebern        tim  %xautn        ben  ^naben  ben  SKenfdiett 

Ago.    bie  geberti         bie  iJrauett        bie  ^nabcn  bie  SKenfd^ett 

♦  The  weak  nouns  never  take  the  umlaut  to  form  the  plural.    No  neuters 
are  weak. 

Singular  (e)  Plural 

Nom.  ber  (Stubent  bie  (Stubentm 

Gen.  be§  ©tubentm  ber  ©tubentcn 

DAT.  bem  (Stubentctt  ben  ©tubentm 

Ace.  ben  ©tubentm  bie  ©tubentctt 

®er  ^err  (the  gentleman  or  the  master)  takes  tl  to  form  the  G., 
D.,  A.  singular  and  ett  to  form  all  the  cases  of  the  plural. 

ber  fierr  bie  §errctt 

be§  |)ecrn  ber  ©errcn 

bem  ^errn  ben  ^errm 

ben  ^errn  bie  £)errm 


236  APPENDIX 

24  III*    Mixed  Declension 

Singular    Strong    Gen.  Sing.    (c)8 
Plural       Weak      Plural  (c)tt 

25  Membership:   (a)   Masculines  in  e  that   have  become  contami- 

nated with  Strong  I.,  ber  ©laubc,  bcr  ^ame,  hex 
S3u(^[tabe* 
(6)  Some  monosyllabic  masculines,    ber  ©c^merj, 

ber  ©ee,  ber  ©taat,  ber  ©tro^t. 
(c)   Some  neuters,  t>a^  ^uge,  bo§  Df)r,  bo§  S3ctt, 
t>a^  ^emb,  ba§  @nbe. 
Examples 
(a)  (&)  (c) 

Singular  / — ^^s 

NoM.    bcr  9?ame(tt)       ber  ©Amer^  ba§  §erj  ha^  5Iugc 

Gen.    beg  Sf^amend*      beg  ©c^mergeg  beg  ^er^ett^*        beg  Stugeg 

Dat.    bem  Seamen         bem  ©c^tnerj  bent  ^ergctt  bent  5Iuge 

Ace.    ben  Seamen         ben  ©d)nter5  bag  ^erj  bag  2luge 

Plural 
NoM.    bie  SfJontent        ^ie  ©c^ntergctt         bie  feergett         bte  5lugen 
Gen.    ber  S^iantcji         ber  ©c^ntergcn         ber  ©ergctt         ber  Slugeji 
Dat.    ben  S^Jamett  ben  ©d)tner§ett        ben  ^ergctt        hen  ^lugen 

Ace.    bie  ^anten  bie  ©d^ntergeil         bie  ^ergett         bie  Slugeu 

*Note  that  the  contamination  of  these  two  classes  has  produced  in  all  the 
nouns  under  (a)  a  genitive  in  tlS.  In  the  noun  Ptt^,  the  genitive  form  is 
analogical  with  that  of  (o). 

t No  umlaut  in  plural;  nofeminines. 

A  few  nouns  form  two  plurals  with  difference  of  meaning : 

bie  SSorte  =  (connected  speech)  bie  S3onfe  =  (benches) 

bie  SBorter  =  (disconnected  words)        bie  $8anfett  =  (banks  for  money) 

26  PROPER  NOUNS 

Places— Gen.  g.    S)ie  ©inttJO^ner  Serling  (the  inhabitants  of  Berlin). 

If  the  noun  ends  with  g,  g,  or  j  no  case  ending  is  affixed.  The 
relation  is  expressed  by  means  of  a  preposition  —  bie  @intt)£>^ncr 
tion^atig. 

Persons— {a)  With  the  SLTticle—uninflected. 

^tv  Seinridb 
M  ^einriq 
bem  ^einrid) 
bctt  §einri^ 
(&)  Without  the  article— Genitive  in  g  or  (c)tt8t    ^einric^g, 
gran^igfag,  Souifcng,  SKarieng,  ^^ri^cnS,  ^anfens.* 

♦  If  the  noun  ends  in  t,  8,  J,  or  J,  (e)ng  is  added  to  form  Xi^e  genitive,  la 
all  other  cases  only  g. 


APPENDIX 


237 


(a) 
ib) 


declined  like  definite  article. 


Plural 

toir     i^r    fie  (©ie)* 
un[er  euer  il^rec  (^l^rct) 
ung     eud^  i^ncn  (^l^ncn) 
un§    end)  [le  (@ie) 


27  PRONOUNS 

Personal  and  Keflexive. 

Possessive  declined  like  indefinite  article. 

Demonstrative 

Indefinite  .  .  . 

Interrogative 

Relative .... 

28  ^Ii6  Personal  Pronoun 

Singular 

ra.      f.        n. 

N.    id^         bu  er       fie      c§ 

G.    meiner  beiner     feiner  i^rer  feiner 
D.    mir       bir  i^m     i^r     il^m 

A.    mic^      bid^         i^n      fie      eg 

♦  Used  In  conventional  conversation  for  3d  pers.  sing,  and  plural. 

Reflexives 

29  Singular  Plural 

m.  f.  n.  m.  f.  n. 

NoM.         —  —         _  _         _  _ 

Gen.        _  _        _  _        _  _ 

DAT.       mir        bir        fidb  unS       euA  fii 

Ace.        mid)       bid)       fiq  ung       tuq  \i 

30  The  other  pronouns  may  be  divided  into  two  classes,  according 
as  they  follow  the  declension  of  the  definite  or  that  of  the  indefinite 

article  (cf.  11  and  12). 

Possessives 

31  The  possessive  pronouns  follow  the  declension  of  the  indefi- 
nite article  (cf.  12). 

f.  n.  Pl. 

unf(e)re  unfer  unj(e)re 

nnf(e)rer  unfer(e)§  unf(e)rcr 

unf(e)rer  unfer  (e)m  unfer  (e)tt 

unf(e)re  unfer  unf(e)re 

*  When  two  unaccented  C's  occur  in  successive  syllables,  one  may  be  omitted. 

32  The  possessives  are :  mein,  bein,  fein,  i!^r,  unfer,  euer.  In  inflection 
they  agree  in  number,  gender,  and  case  with  the  noun  which  they 
modify.  For  the  possessive  +  noun  may  be  substituted :  ber,  bie,  t>a^ 
meinige;  ber,  bie,  ba§  meine;  meiner,  meine,  meine§.  The  declension  of 
these  forms  is  given  under  adjectives  (cf.  43  and  44). 

33  Possessive  compounds— With  the  prepositions  UieQett  and  l^aKcV 
and  itm .  .  .  MUn  (on  account  of,  for  the  sake  of)  the  genitive  stem 
and  the  suffix  ct  forms  a  compound: 

meinettoeaen,  meinetfialber,  um  meinetioitten  (for  mv  sake). 


NOM. 

Gen. 

DAT. 

Acc. 


m. 
unfer 

unfer(c)g* 
unfer(e)m 
unfer(e)tt 


238 


APPENDIX 


34 


Demonstratiyes  and  Indefinites 


Sing. 

PL. 

ber 
beffen 
bem 
ben 

bie 
berctt 
ber 
bie 

beffen 

bem 

ba§ 

bic 
beretl 
benett 
bie 

The  demonstrative  and  indefinite  pronouns  are:  ber,  biefcr,  jcncr, 
felber,  foli^er,  mandjer,  jeber,  jebtoeber,  jeglicfier,  einer.  The  only  deviation 
from  the  inflection  of  the  definite  article  is  in  Jjer  which  has  taken  on  a 
distinctive  su^x.in  the  genitive  singular  and  genitive  and  dative  plural. 

The  Demonstrative  Pronoun 

Sing.  Pl. 

N.    biefer  =e  =e^  biefc 

G.    biefeg  =er  ^e§  biefer 

D.    biefem  ^er  *em  biefen 

A.    biefen  =e  -e^  btefe 

35  For  regular  demonstratives  may  be  substituted  berfelbe,  ber^ 
jcnige.  In  the  declension  of  these  compounds  the  first  part  takes 
the  declension  of  the  article,  the  second  of  the  weak  adjective  (cf.  42). 

Other  indefinites  are:  jemanb  (somebody),  jebermann  (everybody), 
niemanb  (nobody),  man  (corresponding  to  the  French  on,  not  easily 
translated,  man  fagt=they  say).  These  are  generally  uninflected, 
though  they  may  take  (e)§  in  the  genitive  (except  mtttt,  which  is  used 
only  in  the  nominative,  taking  eittem  and  etttett  in  dat.  and  ace). 
Ex.  —Gen.    jebermann^;  niemanbe§,  jemanbeg. 

36  Relative  and  Interrogative 

Relative:    toclAer,    toex,    tt)a§,    ber. 
Interrog.:  tt)elc6er?    tt)er?    ttjaS?    ttJa§  fiir  etn? 


Relative 

Sing. 

Sing. 
m.  &  f .       n. 

Sma. 

N.  toetd^er    toeld^e    njetc^eS 

ttjer       h)a§ 

ber      bie       ba^ 

G.  beffen 

beren     beffen* 

meffen    (ttjeffen)         beffen  beren  beffen 

D.  ttJelA 
A.  ttjclc^ 

em  n^elcber  n)eld)em 
en  toelc^e    melc^eg 

mem     mem 

bem      ber      bem 

men      ma§ 

ben      bie       ba§ 

Plural 

Plural 

Plural 

N. 

hjeld^c 

— 

bie 

G. 

beren 

— 

beren 

D. 

tt)elAen 
toeldhc 

— 

benen 

A. 

— 

bie 

♦The  genitive  of  the  relative  tiiel^et  is  not  used;  the  genitive  of  the  relative 

Oet  has  taken  its  place.    For  other  deviations  from  inflection  of  def:  art.  cf.  34. 

Interrogative 

37 

Sing. 

Without  Noun 

NOM. 

n?el(her  'C  ^eS 

mer  and  ma* 

ma§ 

iir  einer  -e  =e8 

Gen. 

welAeg  ==er  ^eS 

same  as  rel. 

ma§ 

iir  eineg  -er  *e8 

DAT. 

njelffiem  =er  *em 

mag 

iir  einem  'tt  'tm 

Ago. 

ttjeld^en  't  =c8 

ma§ 

iiir  einen  =e  t& 

PL.  (m.  f.  n.) 

With  Noun 

NOM 

tt)elAe 

ttja§  fiir  tin,  eine,  eltt 

Gen. 

tt)el*ef 

ma§  fiir  eineS,  ^er,  ==e§ 

Dat. 

ttjelAett 

ma§  fiir  etnem,  -er,  -m 

Ago. 

ttJeiSc 

toa^  fiir 

etnen,  -t,  cm 

APPENDIX  239 

38  ADJECTIYES 

r  Strong — when  used  without  article  or  pronoun. 
8  Declensions  j  Weak — after  definite  article  or  pronoun. 

\  Mixed — after  indefinite  article  or  pronoun. 

39  Strong  adj. — without  article;  declined  like  definite  article 

Singular 
N.         guter  9Kann  gute  f^rau  guteS  tinb 

G.  gutc^  9D^anne§*  gutetr  f^rau  gutc§  ^inbeS* 

D.         (iuUm  SPfJanne  guter  i^tau  gutem  ^inbe 

A.         guten  SQJann  gutc  %tavL  guteS  ^inb 

Plural 
N.  gutc  Wl'dnnex,  f^rauen,  ^inber 

G.  gutct  aJldnner,  grauen,  ^inber 

D.  gutctt  SO^annem,  i^xauen,  ^inbem 

A.  gutc  Wlannex,  fjrauen,  ^iuber 

♦  In  gen.  sing.  masc.  and  neut.  the  weak  ending  (Ctt)  is  often  used  instead  of 
eg  to  avoid  recurrence  of  the  sibilant.    -Fa;.— f(f)ted)tCtt  SBaffer^. 

40  Weak  adj. — after  definite  article  or  pronoun  (inflectional  syl- 

lables e  or  Ctt). 

Singular 

N.        ber  gutc  SO^ann  bie  gutc  %tau  bag  gutc  ^iub 

G.        beg  gutctt  "ifRanne^        ber  gutcn  grau  beg  gutctt  ^iube8 

D.       bcm  gutctt  SJiauue        ber  gutcn  %xau  bem  gutcn  ^inbe 

A.        ben  gutcn  SD^ann  bie  gutc  fjrau  bag  gutc  ^inb 

Plural 
N.  bie  gutcn  Wannex,  grauen,  ^inber 

Q.  ber  gutcn  9Jianuer,  §rauen,  ^tuber 

D.  ben  guten  SD^aunern,  ^rauen,  ^iubern 

A.  bie  gutcn  SJidnner,  ^rauen,  ^inber 

4 1  Mixed  adj.— a/^er  indefinite  article  and  pronoun.     {Weak  when 

article  is  inflected,  strong  when  article  is  not  inflected.) 

Singular 

N.  cin  guter  9JJanu  eine  gutc  i^tan  eiu  gutcS  ^inb 

Q.  eiueg  gutcn  Wanned  einer  gutcn  gtau  etneg  gutcn  ^iubeg 

D.  eiuem  guten  SD^aune  einer  guten  §rau  einem  gutcn  ^inbe 

A.  cinen  gutcn  aJiann  eine  gutc  i^xau  ein  gutc0  ^inb 

Plural 
N.  feine  gutcn  Wdnmx,  i^xauen,  ^inber 

Q.  feiner  gutcn  Mannex,  grauen,  ^inber 

D.  feiuen  gutcn  SQidnueru,  grauen,  ^inbern 

A.  letne  gutcn  2Jidnuer,  g^^auen,  ^inber 


240 


APPENDIX 


42  The  demonstrative  compounds  that  are  composed  of  hex,  tie,  hai, 
plus  the  adj.  felb  or  jenig  are  declined  like  weak  adjectives.  (Not  in 
frequent  use.) 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A.- 


berjentge 
be^jenigett 
bemjenigett 
benjenigen 


Singular 

biejenige 
berjenigeii 
berjenigen 
biejenige 


bagjenige 
be^jeuigctt 
bemjenigett 
ba^jenige 


PL. 

biejenigett 
berjenigett 
benjenigett 
biejenigett 


43     1.     So  also  are  declined  the  possessives  ber,  tile,  bttS  tttettte  or 
meitttge  and  the  indefinite  tier  ettte. 

Singular 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


ber  meine 
be§  meinett 
bem  meinett 
ben  meinett 


bie  meinett 
ber  meinett 
ben  meinett 
bie  meinett 


bie  meinige  bfl§  eine 

bee  meinigett  be§  einett 

ber  meinigett  bem  einett 

bie  meinige  •  bag  eine 

Plural  (all  genders)        v 

bie  meinigett  "         bie  einett 

ber  meinigett  ber  einett 

ben  meinigett  ten  einett 

bie  meinigett  bie  einett 


2.  ^and)ex,  melc^er,  [oli^er  are  occasionally  used  without  the  end- 
ing: manc^,  tt)e(d),  [old^.  In  that  case  the  adj.  following  would  have 
the  strong  ending. 

Singular 


N.  manc^  guter  Wami 

G.  manc^  guteg(ett)  Tlanne^ 

D.  mond^  gutetti  SO^anne 

A.  manc^  gntett  3Kann 


Plural 

mand)  gnte  3Kanner 
mand)  guter  Wannet 
mand)  gutett  Tlannetn 
mand)  gate  9)ianner 


3.  The  strong  declension  is  also  used  after  a  personal  pronoun : 
ill  armer  2Kann!    SSa§  l^at  man  bir-,  tn  armeg  ^inb,  getan? 

4.  Also  after  the  indeclinable  pronouns  and  numerals:  etttia^, 
ttir^tS,  afferlet,  etc:  etnjag  guteS  2Ba[fer;  aUerlei  fc^one  ©ac^en;  nic^t^ 
SBa^reg. 


APPENDIX 


241 


44  The  possessives  and  the  indefinite  pronoun  clllCt  when  used 
without  preceding  article  or  following  noun  are  inflected  like  the 
strong  adjective. 


Singular 

N. 

meincr  -t  "t% 

eincr 

einc 

eincg 

G. 

meineg  -tx  ti 

cincg 

eincr 

eincg 

D. 

nteinem=er=cm 

eincm 

eincr 

eincm 

A. 

meinen  't  =e8 

einctt 

einc 

eincS 

Pl.  (all  genders) 

(No  Plural) 

N. 

meinc 

G. 

meincr 

» 

D. 

ntetnctt 

A. 

meinc 

■  bcr,  biC; 

\)a^  meinc 

//     // 

„   meinigc 

us: 

This  is  mine,  etc.= 

•  3)a8  \\i  ■ 

mciner 

=C  'C^ 

mcin,  bein,  fein,  unfcr,  cuer 

t  (but  never  hai  ift  i^r). 


The  pronominal  adjectives  oHetlei,  tjielerlei,  mand^crlci,  bcrlci, 
fotc^ctlci,  attcr^anb  were  originally  attributive  genitives  (as  the  gen, 
ending  cr  still  shows).  They  are  now  used  as  simple,  indeclinable 
adjectives  or  as  substantives.  Ex.—^HtxU\  Scute,  ^ii)  l^abc  dielfTlei 
ju  tun. 


5 

Ifnmerals 

1  cin8 

13  brei^e^n 

50  fiinfsig 

2  3tt)ci 

14  bierge^n 

60  fec^aig 

8  bret 

15  fiinfjc^n 

70  [iebaig 

4  bier 

16  fec^se^n 

80  acfitgig 

5  filnf 

17  [iebge^n 

90  neungig 

6fed)g 

18  ac^tge^n 

100  ^unbert 

7  fieben 

19  neungel^n 

121  ^unbert  einunbjnjanjig 

8  a6)i 

20  attjansig 

200  gnjei^unbert 

9  neun 

21  einunbgnjangig 

1,000  taufenb 

10  ge^n 

22  gtoeiunbgWangig 

1,121  taufenb  ein^unbert  cin« 

11  elf 

30  breifeig 

unbgttJcfngig 

12  8tt)oIf 

40  bierjig 

1,000,000  einc  Shimon 

242  APPENDIX 

46  The  cardinal  numerals  are  indeclinable,  except  eltt?,  which, 
when  used  adjectively,  has  the  forms  of  cttt,  CittC,  Citt,  the  same  as  the 
indefinite  article.  (Occasionally  gtuel  and  bret  are  found  inflected  in 
gen. :  gttJcier ;  and  dat. :  breictt). 

47  ^unbert  and  taufenb  may  be  used  substantively  and  are  then 
declined.  Ex. — ^unbcrtc  toaxen  ba  (Hundreds  were  there).  @r  f^at  XaU'' 
fcnben  unred^t  getan  (He  did  wrong  to  thousands).  They  are  then 
declined  like  the  plural  of  the  definite  article  (e,  er,  eil,  C). 

48  Ordinals 

Ordinals  are  formed  from  cardinals  by  the  addition  of  the  suflSx 
t  to  all  numbers  from  2  to  19  —  bcr  neunge^^nte,  and  ft  from  20  on— 
bet  stponsig^e. 

The  ordinal  of  eitlS  is  erji  (ber  crfte) 
"  brel  "  britt  (ber  brittc) 

They  may  be  declined  strong,  weak,  or  mixed,  but  can  not  be  used 
without  an  inflection. 

Henry  II  =  §einri(i)  ber  Bh^eUe 
§einricf)§  beg  S^^itetl 
^einric^  bent  Bl^^itm 
^cinrid^  ben  3^eitctt 

The  ordinal  adverbs  are:  crftcttS,  5tt)eiteil8,  brtttettS  (first,  secondly, 
thirdly,  etc.). 

49  ADTEBBS 

Adverbs  do  not  differ  in  form  from  adjectives,  except  that  they  are 
not  declinable.    Often  they  may  be  compared  like  adjectives. 

50  Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs 

The  regular  comparison  of  adjectives  is  formed  by  adding  er  and 
(e)P  to  the  stem  of  the  word,  and  is  usually  accompanied  by  umlaut. 


lang 

Ifinger 

langft  (ber  langfte,  am  langflen) 

9ro6 

grbfeer 

gr5§t  (8  omitted  for  euphony) 

hitj 

fiirger 

fiirseft 

tniibe 

miibcr 

miibeft 

APPENDIX 


243 


51  Without  umlaut: 

flat  flarer         flarft 

fd^Iau       fdjlauer       fc^lau(c)ft 
bunfel      bunfler        bunfelft 

52  Irregular  Comparison 

(a)  Change  of  1^  and  ^  (d)  is  used  finally  and  before  CQOSonants,  ^ 
is  medial) : 

na^c      nd^er       naii^ft 

(b)  Change  in  stem:  ^ 

gut  bcffcr         beft 

btel  mel^r         mcift 


53 


Declension  of  Comparative  and  Superlative 


The  Comparative  is  declined   like  the 
syllable  being  added  to  the  er.    ^a?. — 


Strong 
beffcrer  SBein 
befferc8(ett)  SBeineg 
befferem  SBeine 
bcfferen  SSein 
beffere  SBeine 
beiferet  28einc 
befferen  SBeinen 
bcifere  SSeine 


Weak 
bie  frf)onerc  %xan 
ber  [c^onerctt  Stau 
ber  fc^oneren  f^rau 
bie  [d^onere  grau 
bie  fd^onerm  t^i^auen 
ber 
ben 
bie 


positive,  the  inflectional 

Mixed 

ein  ^5^ere8  ^Ci\x% 
eineg  l^o^eren  ^aufeS 
einem  p^eren  ^aufc 
ein  l^bl^ereg  ^auS 
^o^ere  §aufer 
^o^erer  ^aufer 
l^ol^ercn  ^aufern 
l^o^ere  ^aufer 


54  The  Superlative  can  be  used  regularly  only  with  the  definite 
article,  hence  is  always  weak. 

Ex.—\itx  nodifte  g^ii^ling  bie  ndc^ften  f^i^ii^Ungc 

beg  ndd^ften  iJrii:^ling§  ber  nddijictt  ^rii^Ungc 

bent  ndd^fien  ?5i^ii^Ung  ben  nddjftm  f^rii^lingen 

ben  ndcl)|ien  grii^ling  bie  nddiften  fJ^ii^linQC 

55  In  the  predicate  the  phrase  am  en  may  be  substituted. 

Ex—^axi  ift  icr  Btofetc 
or 

^arl  \\i  am  orofeteti 
8m  gtii^ten,  originally  adverbial,  can  be  used  only  in  the  predicate^ 
never  attributively. 


244  APPENDIX 

56  Both  bcr  fitdfetc  and  am  GrofftCtt  are  relative  in  meaning,  i.  e., 
they  suggest  a  comparison  with  other  objects  of  the  same  class,  ^atl 
tft  bet  fitdfete  or  om  grdfetctl  means  that  he  is  larger  than  the  other  boys 
before  mentioned.  When  the  superlative  is  used  to  designate  merely 
a  high  degree  of  the  quality,  vsrithout  definite  comparison,  we  substi- 
tute for  the  attributive  superlative  fttt^etft  or  pii^ft  "1-  the  positive. 
{Ex.—%Vi^tx\i  Grofec  SSaume  toadifen  im  ®orten,  or  pci^ft  anocttc^mc  Seute 
toaren  gugcgen.)  For  the  adverbial  phrase  am  Ibcftett  we  substitute  atlfS 
fiejie,  but  this  can  never  be  used  adjectively.  {Ex.—<B\t  [ang  aufS  Ibefte.) 

Hence  we  have  four  forms  of  the  superlative— 

Relative  Absolute 

Attributive  ber  beftc  QU§erft  (^od^ft)  gut 

Adverbial  am  beften  auf§  befle 

Relative 

@r  tft  ber  bcfle  ©chiller  in  ber  ^Ia[fe    (He  is  the  best  pupil  in  the  class) 
©r  ijt  am  ficfJett  (He  is  the  best) 

Absolute 

(gr  ift  ein  ait|;erft  gutcr  Si^iiler         (He  is  an  exceedingly  good  pupil) 
(£r  ftubiert  aufg  bcfte  (He  studies  his  very  best) 

Caution 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  this  difference  is  not  so  distinctly  marked 
in  English,  hence  great  care  must  be  taken  in  translation. 

Thus,  "A  most  remarkable  man  appeared , "  becomes  in  German: 

„@in  iiufecrft  tnerfttJiirbiger  Wann  erfd^ien." 
But,  "The  most  remarkable  man  I  ever  saw,"  is: 

^er  merfttiiirbifliJe  SO^ann,  ben  id^  je  gefe^en.'' 
The  English  "  She  sings  best  of  all,"  "  She  is  the  best,"  and  "She 
sings  her  best"  are  carefully  distinguished  in  German: 
„<B\t  fingt  am  beften/' 
„@ie  ift  bie  befte"  or  ,,am  beften/' 
;,(5ie  fingt  auf§  befte." 

**She  sings  most  delightfully"  is: 

„(Sie  fingt  auf§  ^errlic^fte»" 


APPENDIX  245 

57  VERBS 

r  Weak — Tense  change  produced  by  suffix  le,  t 
Two  Conjugations  j  Strong —  "  "  "  by   vowel  altera- 

(  tion  in  stem 

58  PRINCIPAL  PARTS  OF  VERB  are  Pvcs.  Infinitive,  Preterite,  Perf. 
Participle. 

Weak       loben        lobte       gelobt         :jj^.    ,. 
Strong     fingen        fang        gefungen 

(Note  that  in  both  conjugations  the  infinitive  ends  with  ett  and  the  parti- 
ciple begins  with  gf.) 

59  There  are  five  modes;  indicative,  subjunctive,  conditional, 

IMPERATIVE,    infinitive 


present 
preterite 

PERFECT 
PLUPERFECT 

FUTURE 
FUTURE  PERFECT 


60  There  are  six  tenses: 
{ Simple 

(  Auxiliaries  ^aben  or  feln  +  perfect  participle  of  verb 
J  Auxiliary  tuerbctt  +  infinitive 

6 1  Tense  Auxiliaries 

Principal  Parts 

tfahen  l^attc  gc^abt 

fein  tvax  gemcfcn 

mcrbcn  ttjurbe  (marb)    geworbcu 

1.  I^abett  is  weak,  but  slightly  irregular  in  the  preterite,  the 
stem  consonant  being  assimilated  to  the  following  t.  The  same 
irregularity  will  be  found  in  the  2d  and  3d  sing.  pres.  indie,  (btt  l^ttfi, 
cr  ^at). 

2.  tuetbtn  has  two  forms  for  the  pret.  sing. ;  tDUrbc  is  preferable 
in  prose. 

8.  All  three  verbs  are  used  as  independent  verbs,  or  as  auxili- 
aries. As  verbs  they  have  full  inflection  in  all  modes  and  tenses  and 
mean  respectively  to  have,  to  be,  to  become. 

4.  Observe  that  j^aftctt  (the  verb)  takes  j^aftett  (the  auxiliary)  to 
form  the  perfect  tense,  while  fcitl  and  Uiettiett  take  feitt  (cf .  62). 


W  o 

fa  B 

W  « 

0.  «  Si 


a  fi 


tj    'i*    r* 

ii  >->  5^ 


fi  ^;^ 


1=1 

o 

cu 

fi 

w 

^ 

C 

i 

jp 

fe 

fi  fi 

fi 

!f^ 

*-> 

fi^jE 

ft:        fc 


g 

f 

S 


a 

M 

M 
P 

OQ 

o 
o 

i 


fi  s  a 


fi  fi 


fi'^fifil  fifis^sfia  2 


%  & 


7Q    1 

fi  a 


H    g 

W     05 


fc        fc      ft      t 


No^oiH-^"^^^  fi  fi  a 


fa  §  • 

Oh  CSS  ^ 

*^  «->  "IT 

^  «    «   a 


fc     t     fc 


rf ^  s  fis^ 


r§^^ 


^    a     K    «^  •'^    *-> 


« 


«   e  iti 


HH   >o   >o   '^— -  *""  i^ 


£  ^1^ 


I" 
Si 


«   rt   *-» 

a  ^ix. 


fe    ft    ft 

■9  -^  ^ 
^   '-»   w 


g    fi    fi   fi     g   fi   fi 


Is 

>g  S  ^      3   ^    !^ 


fc       fc       ft 


«a-SsC^«a     P^-g-s    fian 
sErj3-^j_^^=*^sS3-p^i3i5a     v»fi 


«  ^ 


a  a 


IS 


fie 


aS'ig. 


a     a 


»     a 


»    b- 


g  03  ti  ma 

53  fits  tt'^ 


5  S   fii^-iE 


'B^  5  H 


f^  >o  1"  **  -e  S  J 

f^  fi  fi  e   ?  s  - 


if 

eS    g      a     a       a     *     ft 

o 
■g      ft     fe       ft     ft     ft 

go  « 

K  a  -i^        S  -M  s 
S  fi  B 


^-■^U  ^    B  S3 


»•       ft      e       ft      «      a 

^     a    t^  ^    ,,    ja  jB   ^ 


>0   »0   vO  S 

^^^  e^  *  *  *  *  * 

J     '     '    I  t     ^     '      a     ft     .    H    «.     ft     ft      ft     ft     ft 

•lSrB-g|?^i|iSB5§i 


*«  ^  -c^ 

,000 
O    vO    >0 

> —  sC^  -iS- 
--*2  'B  ^    :«  ."S  53 


C 
o 

^      - 


'B'  5  M    p  S&  .2i 


jti-  o  •*:*    rs     D    '**   <u 

.-*:  .-^  t:  ••«  =«  **    -^  fc*  «- 

:a  :<3  rs 


«^2 


>Q    S 


„  -Si 


M-^ 


/3     . 


Bis 

fi  i^"^ 


248 


APPENDIX 


63  Conditional 

I.        tc^  njurbe  tjahen*  \6)  ttJurbe  fein  (etc.) 

IL        ic^  touvte  Qet)aht  tjahcn*  id)  tvuxhe  genjefen  fein  (etc.) 

I.        ic^  luiirbc  merben  (etc.) 
II.        ic^  toiirbe  geirorbcn  [cin  (etc.) 

64  Imperatives 

t)ahe  (bii)  fei  (hu)  toerbe 

]^ab(e)t  (il)r)        fcib  (i^r)  hjcrbet  (xp) 

^aben  ©ie  [eien  ©ie  toerben  ©ie 

65  Infinitives 

Pres.        Ijahen  fein  hJc^rben 

Perf.        gc^abt  l^oben  gcircfen  fein  0cn)orben  fein 

66  Participles 

Pres.         l^obcnb  fcienb  hjerbenb 

Perf.         ge^abt  gettefen  genjorben 

67  Use  of  Tense  Auxiliaries 

I.    V  ■       y  form  perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses. 

{forms  future  and  future  perfect  tenses, 
passive  voice, 
conditional  mode. 

68  Use  of  labctt 

^  1.  All  active  transitive  verbs. 
l^dbftt  \  2.  All  intransitives,  except  those  that  express 
\      transition  of  place  or  condition. 

69  llcpresentative   Verbs  that  take  fcltt 

1.   Transition  of  Place 


abreifcn  =  to  start  on  a  journey 
auffte^en  =  to  get  up  . 

bcgegnen  =  to  meet 
cilen  =  to  hurry    (but  fld^    cilctt 

takes  ^aben) 
erfd^einen  =  to  appear 
f al^ren  =  to  ride,  to  go 
faKen  =  to  fall  (but  the  causative 

f  dttctt  takes  I^aben) 

♦The  full  paradigm  is: 
tc^  tDiirbe  Ijaben  (ge^obt  l^aben) 
bu  tt)iirbeft     „  „         „ 

ettciirbe       »  «        » 


flicgen  =  to  fly 

fliel^en  =  to  flee 

flicgen  =  to  flow 

fofgen  =  to  follow 

ge^en  =  to  go 

gfeiten  (ou§gtciten)=to  glide,  to  slip 

frimmen  =  to  climb 

ffettern  =  to  clamber 

fommen  =  to  come 

njtr  ttJiirben  l^aben  (gel^abt  l^aben) 
i^r  ttJiirbct       „  h         n 

fie  toiirben       „         „         „ 


APPENDIX  249 

frlcd^cn  =  to  crawl  fc^ttjimmen  =  to  swim 

laufen  =  to  run  finfen  =  to  sink 

reiten  =  to  ride     <  f|)ringen  =  to  spring 

rennen  =  to  run  fteigen  =  to  climb 

rinnen  =  to  flow  fturgen  =  to  fall,  to  dash 

frf)feicf)en  =  to  creep  treten  =  to  step 

fcf)reiten  =  to  step  toeid^en  =  to  withdraw 

jie^cn  =  to  wander  (but  jie^en  =  to  draw,  takes  ^aben) 

70  2.  Transition  of  Condition 

aufttJQC^en  =  to  wake  up  (but  ttja^      gebeit)en  =  to  flourish 

d)en  takes  ^aben)  gelingen  =  to  succeed 

einfc^Iafen  =  to  go  to  sleep   (but      genefen  =  to  recover 

fj^lafctt  takes  l^aben)  gtiicfen  =  to  succeed 

entbtii^en  =  to  burst  into   bloom      fd)eitern  =  to  fail 

(but  Un^tn  takes  l)ahen)  fc^melgen  =  to  melt 

entfcf)Iafen  =  to  go  to  sleep,  to  die      fterben  =  to  die 
ertrinfen  =  to  drown  tjerarmen  =  to  become  impover- 

erujac^en  =  to  awaken  ished 

erfrieren  =  to  freeze  to  death  tjer^ungern  =  to  die  of  hunger 

tDai)\en  =  to  grow 
The  verbs  fcitt  and  blei^Ctt  also  take  the  auxiliary  feitt,  although 
the  transition  idea  is  not  so  plainly  apparent  as  in  the  other  verbs  of 
the  above  lists. 

7  I  Inflection  of  Verbs 

(a)  The  inflection  of  weak  and  of  strong  verbs  is  identical,  except 
in  the  formation  of  the  preterite  and  of  the  perf.  participle  as  shown 
above.  The  personal  endings  and  tense  auxiliaries  are  the  same  for 
both. 

(5)  Exception — Strong  verbs  with  the  stem  vowel  c  change  this 
e  into  I  or  ie  in  2d  and  3d  pers.  sing,  indie,  pres.  and  2d  imper. ;  those 
with  the  stem  vowel  a  change  this  to  a  in  the  2d  and  3d  pers.  sing, 
indio.  pres.,  but  not  in  imperative.     So  also  tttt  in  verbs  becomes  iiU- 

72  Subjunctive  Mode— The  present  subjunctive  shows  none  of 
the  irregularities  of  syncopation  or  umlaut  that  we  have  observed  in 
the  indicative.     It  is  formed  regularly  upon  the  present  stem. 

In  the  preterite  a  distinction  is  observed  between  the  strong  and 
weak  verbs,  the  former  taking  the  umlaut,  the  latter  not  (except  in 

Note— On  the  following  pages  will  be  found  the  indie,  and  subj.  conjugation 
Of  weak  and  strong  verbs  side  by  side  to  emphasize  the  difference  in  ending;  one 
▼exb  in  each  case  illustrating  the  l^aBctt  verbs  and  one  the  f  eiit  verbs. 


250 

APPENDIX 

73 

Weak  Verb  with  j^aBm 

Indicative 

SUBJUNCTIVB 

PRES. 

i^  licbe 
bu  liebft 
er  liebt 

i(^  liebte  (licbe) 
t>vi  Uefitcft  (liebeft) 
er  liebe 

toir  lieben 
t^r  liebt 
fie  lieben 

tPtr  UeBtett  (lieben) 
t^r  llcfttet  (liebct) 
fie  Ucbten  (lieben) 

Pret. 

i(^  liebte 
bu  liebtcft 
er  liebte 

id^  liebte 
bu  liebtcft 
er  liebte 

ttJtr  liebtcn 
i^r  liebtet 
fie  liebten 

toir  liebtcn 
il^r  liebtet 
fie  liebten 

Perf. 

td^  f^ahe  gelicbt 
bu  ^aft       „ 
er  iiat 

tt)ir  liaben  „ 
i^r  i)aU     „ 
fie  ^aben    „ 

ic^  Wit  gelicbt  (^abe) 
bu  ^abeft     „ 
er  i)cCbt       „ 

toir  ptten    „     (^aben) 
i^r^iittft     .      (^abct) 
fie  liittm     ,,      (^abcn) 

Plup. 

\<S)  ^attc  gelicbt 
bu^attcft   „ 
ex  ^atte      „ 
xoxx  fatten  „ 
i^rl^attet   „ 
fieliatten   „ 

id^  l^atte  gelicbt 
bu  ^<iMt\i     „ 
er  ^cittc 
toirpttcn   „ 
i^r  ^attct     „ 
fie  fatten     „ 

Put, 

\6)  ttjerbe  lieben 
bu  toirft       ,, 
er  ttjirb        „ 

ic^  ttiiirbe  lieben  (tocrbe) 
bu  toerbcft     „ 
er  tocrbe       „ 

ttjirwerbcn  „ 
i^r  ttJcrbct    „ 
fie  ttjerben    „ 

toirtoiittiett  „     (tocrben) 
i^r  toitrbet    „     (tocrbet) 
fie  murlictt    „     (tocrben) 

FuT.  Perf 

.  \6)  werbe  geliebt  ^aben 
bu  ttJirft        „ 
er  hJirb         „ 

id^  ttiiirbe  gelicbt  ^aben  (tocrbe) 
bu  toerbcft           „ 
er  tocrbe             „ 

ttJir  toetben    „ 
i^r  ttJcrbet     „ 
fie  ttjcrben     „ 

toir  toitrben         „        (tocrben) 
i^r  ttiiirbct           ,,         (tocrbet) 
fie  toiirben           «        (tocrben) 

APPENDIX                                           251 

'4 

Strong  Verb  with  ^ahttt 

Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Pees. 

tc^fe^c 
hu  fie^ft 
cr  [ie^t 

id)  ftt^e  (fcfic) 
bu  fe^eft 
er  fe^c 

ttir  fefien 
i^rfe^t 
fie  fc^en 

tDir  fii^en  (fetien) 
i^r  fii^ct  (fefiet) 
fie  fft^tn  (fe^cn) 

Pret. 

crfa^ 

id)  fd^e 
bu  fa^efi 
er  fa^c 

ttJir  fa^cn 
t^r  \ai)t 
fie  fa^en 

iDir  fa^en 
i^r  fo^ct 
fie  fa^en 

Perf. 

id}  f)ahe  gcfe^cn 
bu  W        n 
cr  ^at 

id)  Ijattf  gefc^cn  {^aU) 
tvi  ^abeft     „ 
er  ^aU 

ttjir  l^oben  „ 
i^r  fiabt      „ 
fie  ^aben     „ 

tDir  \}iiiit}x    „        (^aben) 
it)r  \iiiiti     „         (fiabet) 
fie  Hfitten     „        (^aben) 

Plup. 

id}  ^attc  gefc^en 
bu^attcft    „ 
er  ^atte      ;, 

id^  ptte  gefe^en 
bu  ^Qtteft     „ 
er  ptte 

tuir  fatten  „ 
t^r^attct    „ 
fie  fatten    „ 

tDirl^Qttcn   „ 
i^r  ^attet     ,, 
fie  fatten     „ 

Fur. 

id)  tDcrbc  fc^cn 
\iVi  tDirft       „ 
er  tDirb         „ 

id^  tuitrbe  fe^en  (tDcrbe) 
\iVi  tDcrbeft    „ 
cr  tDcrbe      „ 

tDir  tDcrben  „ 
i^r  tDcrbet    „ 
fie  tDcrbcn     „ 

tDir  ttiitrliett  „     (tDcrben) 
i^rttiitrbet    „      (tDcrbet) 
fie  tuitrliett    „     (tDcrben) 

FtJT.  Perf 

.  id}  tDcrbe  gcfe^cn  ^abcn 
bu  tDirft            „ 
er  tDirb             „ 

id^  ttiiirtie  gefe^en  ()aben  (tDcrbe) 
\iVi  tDcrbeft            „ 
er  tDcrbe              „ 

tDir  tDcrben        „ 
i^r  tDcrbet         „ 
fie  tDcrbcn        „ 

tDir  toiiriJCtt         „         (tDcrben) 
i^r  ttiiirbct           „         (tDcrbet) 
fie  ttitrtim          /,         (tocrben) 

252 


APPENDIX 


75  Weak  Verb 

Indicative 
Pres.  id}  folgc 

bu  folgit 
er  folgt 
toix  folgen 
i^r  folgt 
fie  folgen 

Pret.  \6)  folgtc 

t>u  folgteft 
er  folgte 
hJir  folgten 
il^r  folgtet 
fie  folgten 

Perf  td^  bin  gefolgt 

bu  bift  „ 
er  ift 

n)ir  finb  „ 
i^r  feib  „ 
fie  finb      „ 

Plup.  id^    wax   gefolgt 

\)u  toacit  „ 
er  ttjar  „ 

njir  ttjaren  „ 
it|r  tt)ar(e)t  „ 
fie  njaren       „ 

Fur.  x6)  ttJerbe  folgen 

bu  n)irft  „ 
er  njirb  „ 
h)ir  ttjerben  „ 
i^x  tt)erbet  „ 
fie  ttjerben      „ 

Fur.  Perf.  id)  toerbe  gefolgt  fein 
bu  h)irft  „ 

er  toirb  „ 

ttJtr  tt)erben  „ 
il^r  tuerbet  „ 
lie  njerben        „ 


with  feltt 

Subjunctive 
id)  folfitc  (forge) 
t'u  folfitcft  (foloeft) 
cr  folgc 

h)ir  folgtm  (folgen) 
il)r  folgtet  (forget) 
fie  folgten  (forgen) 

id^  forgte 
bu  forgteft 
er  forgte 
ftir  f  orgten 
i^r  f orgtet 
fie  forgten 

id)  fei  geforgt 
bu  feift      „ 
er  fei 

h)ir  feien  „ 
i^r  feiet  „ 
fie  feien     „ 

td^  ware  gefolgt 
bu  hjareft  „ 
er  todre  ;, 
n)ir  ttjoren  „ 
i^x  n)Qret  „ 
fie  ttjaren      „ 

id)  tttitrbe  forgen  (ttjerbc) 

t)u  ttjerbeft      „ 

er  njerbe         „ 

toir  toitrtiett    «  (ttjerben) 

tl^r  toiirbet      ,,  (werbet) 

fie  ttjiiriiett      „  (werben) 

id^  tturbe  geforgt  fein  (njerbe) 

bu  ttjerbeft 

er  tt)erbe 

njir  toitrbett        «  (roerben) 

i^r  ioitriiet         „  (toextet) 

fie  tourben         „  (njcrben) 


APPENDIX 


253 


6 

Strong  Verb  with  feltt 

Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Pres. 

ic^  fane 

icf)  fide  (fafle) 

bu  faUyt 

\iVi  f  afleft 

er  f  oEt 

er  faHe 

toir  fallen 

hJir  flcIen  (fallen) 

i^r  faUt 

ilir  fldet  (faCet) 

fie  fallen 

fie  Helen  (fallen) 

PRET. 

i^fiel 

ic^  fiele 

bu  fielft 

bu  fieleft 

erfiel 

cr  fielc 

toir  fielen 

hJir  fielen 

i^r  fielt 

i^r  fietet 

fie  fielen 

fie  fielen 

Perf. 

id}  bin  gefaHen 

id^  fei  gefoHen 

bu  bift      „ 

bu  feieft      „ 

er  ift 

er  fei 

toir  finb    „ 

XQ\x  feien    ,, 

i^r  feib     „ 

tf)r  feiet      „ 

fie  finb      „ 

fie  feien      „ 

Plup. 

id)  war  gefallcn 

id}  ttjore  gcfallen 

bu  njarft       „ 

bu  toareft        „ 

cr  toat         „ 

er  ttjare          „ 

Xoxx  xoaxtn    „ 

ft)ir  tt)aren      „ 

i^r  tt)ar(e)t    „ 

i^r  ttjoret       „ 

fie  waren     „ 

fie  ttjaren       „ 

Fur, 

icf)  ttjerbe  faOcn 

id)  toitrbe  fallen  (ttierbc) 

bu  njirft        „ 

bu  toerbeft     ,, 

er  tt)irb         „ 

er  hjerbe        „ 

ttJir  ttjerben    „ 

toir  tnitrben    „     (werben) 

t^r  luerbet     „ 

i^r  ttiiirbct     „     (njerbet) 

fie  ttjerben      „ 

fie  ttiiirbett      „      (luerben) 

FuT.  Perf 

.  id^  ttJerbe  gefaflen  fein 

id}  toiirbe  gefaflen  fein  (n)erbe) 

bu  ttjirft            „ 

tw.  tt)erbeft           „ 

cr  toirb             „ 

er  toerbe             „ 

toir  ttjerben        „ 

tuir  ttiiiriiett         „        (ttjerben) 

i^r  n)erbet 

i^r  ttitrbet          „        (luerbet) 

fie  ttierben         „ 

fie  mitrben          „        {xo^titn) 

254 


APPENDIX. 


77  Conditional 
Weak 

I.       i^  njiirbe  UeBctt* 
II.       id)  tciirbe  gcUeBt  laBttt 
I.        id)  iDiirbe  folgett 
XL       ic^  iDiirbe  gefolfit  feltl 

Imperative 
liebe  (bu)        fotge  (bu) 
neb(e)t  (i^r)    forg(e)t  (i^r) 
lieben  ©ic       folgen  @ie 

Infinitives 
KcBen  fofgen 

gelicbt  ^obm     geforgt  feln 

Participles 
liebcnb      fofgcnb  fel^enb 

geliebt       gefotgt  gefe^en 

78  Passive  Voice 


Strong 
id)  ttJiirbe  feljctt 
ic^  iviirbe  Qeje^en  ^attn 
id)  tuiirbe  faHen 
id^  ttjitrbe  gefttaeu  feln 


Pres. 
Perf. 


Pres. 
Perf. 


fie^  (bu) 
fe^(e)t  (i^r) 
fel^en  ©ic 

fel^en 
gcfc^en  j^aHen 


faUe  (bu) 
fall(e)t  (i^r) 
faflen  ©ie 

faKcn 
gefollen  feln 


fallenb 
gefaHcn 


Form:  conjugation  of  toerben  -j-  perf.  part,  of  verb. 


Indicative 
Pres.  id^  toerbe  gel^ort 
bu  tiiirfl  „ 
er  tiilrb  ,, 
ttjirtoerben  „ 
il^r  ttierliet  „ 
fie  ttierlictt     „ 

Pret.  id^  tQurbe  gc^ort 
bu  ttmrlieiii  „ 
cr  ttmrlic  „ 
ttJir  ttiitrliett  ,, 
ii^r  ttittrbct  „ 
fie  tottrbm     „ 

*  The  full  paradigm  is : 
id^  ttJiirbe  liebcn 
bu  ttJilrbeft     „ 
er  tDiirbe       „ 
tt)ir  toiirbcn  liebcn 
i^r  hJiirbet     „ 
fie  tuilrben     „ 


Subjunctive 
id^  ttiiirbc  ge^ort  (toerbe) 
bu  ttifrbeft    „ 
er  toctbc      „ 
toir  toiirliett  «     (tuerbcn) 
il^r  ttiiirliet    ,,     (tuerbet) 
fie  touthtn     „     (toerben) 

id^  toiirbc  ge^ort 
bu  toiltbcfii  „ 
er  toiirbe  „ 
toirmiitbctt  „ 
i^r  ttiiiriiet  „ 
fie  tiiiiriieii    ,, 


id)  tDiirbe  geliebt  ^oben 
bu  ttJiirbeft         „ 
er  toiirbe  „ 

ttir  hJlirben  geliebt  ^aben 
il^r  ttJiirbet  „ 

fie  hJiirben  „ 


\6)  tt)iirbe  gefaHen  fefn 
bu  tDiirbeft         „ 
er  tt)iirbe  „ 

toir  ttJiirben  gefoUen  fcin 
il^r  ttJiirbet  „ 

fie  tuiirben  « 


APPENDIX 


255 


Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Perf.  xO)  h\n  ge^ort  ttjorben* 

\^  fei  ge^ort  ttiorbctt 

bu  m      n 

« 

bu  fcicjl  „ 

w 

criP 

/» 

ct  fcl      „ 

/i> 

\o\xm    n 

n 

toir  feten  „ 

^# 

t^r  fcm     „ 

tt 

i^rfeict  „ 

}f 

fie  Pnb      ,, 

It 

ficfetctt   „ 

II 

Plup.  id^  toar  gci^ort  tijortm 

id^  to'dre  geprt  tooriim 

bu  ttiarfi    „ 

n 

bu  totttefi    „ 

11 

er  tour 

ct 

er  toiirc 

II 

toir  ttittrett  „ 

tt 

toirtoiirett   „ 

II 

i^r  ttjttrt     ,. 

n 

i^r  ttidret    „ 

II 

fie  tijaren    ,, 

tt 

fie  toiirnt     „ 

It 

FuT.     id^  ttcrbc  ge^ort  uierbttt 

id^  toiirtie  ge^ort  toerben  (tocrbc) 

bu  tiJirft 

tt 

'tiVi  toerbcfr    „ 

If 

er  ttjirb 

It 

er  tocriic       „ 

It 

njir  ttierben  „ 

tt 

toirttiirbctt  „ 

„      (tocrben) 

i^r  ttjcrbct    „ 

It 

i^rttiurbet     „ 

„      (n)erbet> 

fie  tticrbtn    „ 

It 

fie  tottrten     „ 

„      (toerben) 

F.  P.    td^  ttjerbe  gei^ort  luorben  feln 

tc^  toiirbe  ge:^5rt 

toorben  fein  (toerbc) 

bu  ttilrfi      n 

tt           It 

bu  ttierbeft    „ 

It        It 

er  tijlrb        ,, 

tt          It 

er  tuerbe       „ 

It           n 

ttjirtoerben  „ 

It          It 

toirmurben  „ 

„        „  (toerben) 

i^r  ttjcrbct   „ 

It           It 

i^r  tDiirbet     „ 

„        „  (toerbet) 

fie  tticrliett    „ 

It          It 

fie  tourbeit     ,, 

„  (toerben) 

79  Conditional 
I.  id^  ttiirbc  geprt  merbeti  II.  tdf)  tnurbe  ge^ort  ttiorbctt  fcltt 

Imperative 
ttcrbc  (bu)  ge^ort         merbet  (il^r)  ge^ort 

Infinitives 
Pres.    gel^drt  toerbm  Perf. 

Participles 
Pres.    ge^5rt  toerbenb  Perf. 

80  Compounds 

An  adverbial  particle  modifies  the  meaning  of  a  verb  and  changes 
its  form  according  to  certain  laws. 

♦Observe  tbat  the  perf.  participle  getoOtben  loses  its  augment  xn  the  passive. 


ttierbctt  <Sie  ge^rt 
gef)ort  hiorbctt  feltt 
gept>t  ttiorben 


256 


APPENDIX 


Example 
fragen=to  question     ]befra8Cit=to  interrogate 
These  compounds  may  be : 


Ott8fragen=to  draw  out 


1.  Inseparable 


(a)  Accent  on  root  syllable  —  Befragcn 
(5)  No  augment  in  perf .  part.  —  bcf ragt 
(  (c)  Not  separated  in  infinitive  —  gu  befragcn 

i  (a)  Accent  on  prefix  —  auSfragen 
Separable  J  (5)  Augment  between  part,  and  root  —  au^geftagt 
(  (c)  Separated  in  infinitive  —  auSgufrageu 
Principal  Parts 

1.  Inseparable       Jefragen  Jbcfragte  befragt 

2.  Separable  ougfragen        fragte  ttuS       ttUggefragt 

Synopsis  of  Compounds 

Indicative 

Separable 


Inseparable 
i(i)  befragc 
i^  befragtc 
i^  f^cthe  befragt 
ic^  l^atte  befragt 
id)  tDcrbe  befragen 
ici^  hjerbe  befragt  l^aben 


ic^  frage  ottS 

i^  fragte  aug 

ic^  ^abe  a«8gefragt 

id)  i^atti:  auggefragt 

id)  toerbe  au§fragen 

id)  toerbe  auggefragt  l^aben 


Pres. 
Perp. 


befrage  (bu) 
befrag(e)t  (i^r) 
befragen  ©ie 

befragen 
befragt  f)ahen 


Imperative 


Infinitive 


rage  (bu)  ou5 
rag(e)t  (i^r)  au^ 
ragen  ©ie  au9 

augfragen 
OttSgefragt  ^aben 


Pres. 
Perp. 


befragenb 
befragt 


8i 


Participles 

ttUSfragenb 
auSgefragt 

Modal  Auxiliaries 

ftiinnett,  mofien,  biirfctt,  miiffeu,  fottcn,  mUtn,  These  (all  but  moffen) 

are  preterite  presents,  i.e.,  they  have  the  form  of  the  preterite  (of 
strong  verbs)  while  they  are  used  as  presents.  Hence  \6)  fatltt  (I  can), 
t(5  barf  (I  may)  correspond  in  form  to  i6)  fatttt  (I  thought),  id)  ttiarf  (I 
threw).  The  infinitive,  weak  preterite,  and  participle  now  in  use  were 
formed  in  analogy  with  weak  verbs.  This  accounts  for  their  peculiar 
form,  which  must  be  memorized  with  care. 

The  singular  and  the  plural  present  differ  in  form,  and  the  new 
infinitive,  preterite,  and  perf.  part,  are  formed  on  the  plural  stem. 


APPENDIX 


257 


f5nnen 

fonnte 

gefonnt 

ntogen 

ttiod)te 

gemoc^t 

biirfen 

burfte 

geburft 

tttiiffen 

ntu^tc 

gemu^t 

foHen 

foEte 

gefoKt 

nJoCen 

tooUte 

gehJoUt 

Present 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

id)  lann 

fonne 

mag 

moge 

barf 

biirfc 

bu  fannft 

fonneft 

ntagft 

mogeft 

barfft 

biirfeft 

er  tann 

fonne 

mag 

moge 

barf 

burfe 

tt)tr  fonnen 

fOtttltCtt* 

mogen 

miji^ten* 

biirfen 

biirften* 

i^r  fdnnt 

ronntet 

mogt 

tniiiltet 

biirft 

biirftct 

fie  !6nnen 

ronntctt 

mogeit 

mof^tm 

biirfen 

biirften 

Preterite 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

i(f|  fonntc 

fonnte 

moc^te 

mod^tc 

burfte 

biirftc 

bu  fonnteft 

!onntcft 

mocf)te[t 

moc^tcft 

burfteft 

biirfteft 

er  f  onnte 

fonntc 

moc^te 

moc^te 

burfte 

biirftc 

ttjir  f  onntcn 

fSnnten 

mod)ten 

mod^ten 

burften 

burften 

i^r  f  onntet 

fonntet 

mo(f)tct 

mod^tet 

burftct 

biirftet 

fic  fonnten 

fi3nnten 

mod^tcn 

mod)ten 

burften 

biirften 

Present 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

id)  mu§ 

miiffc 

foK 

folic 

hJill 

toollc 

tn  tnu^t 

muifeft 

foHft 

foneft 

toittft 

ftjoUcft 

ermug 

nmjfc 

fott 

foUe 

njill 

hjollc 

icir  ntiiffcn 

miigtttt 

follen 

fomen 

njoHen 

mHitn 

i^x  mii^t 

mitpet 

font 

foatet 

hjont 

tooatet 

fie  muffcn 

mtiitett 

foflen 

foaten 

n)oIIen 

mUitn 

Preterite 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

INDIO. 

SUBJ. 

id)  mufetc 

ntiifetc 

foUte 

fonte 

toonte 

UJoIIte 

bu  mufeteft 

ntiifeteft 

fonteft 

foateft 

hjonteft 

hjoflteft 

er  mu^te 

miifete 

fonte 

foUtc 

hjonte 

njoKte 

tt)ir  mufeten 

nt  listen 

foHtcn 

foUten 

moHten 

hJoHten 

il^r  mufetet 

ntiifetet 

foHtet 

fontet 

hJoKtet 

hjolltet 

fic  mufeten 

miifeten 

foEten 

fottten 

hjoflten 

hJoHtcn 

*  Preterite  forms  Instead  of  presents  which  are  identical  with  indicative;  cL 
footnote. 


258  APPENDIX 

82  In  the  formation  of  the  perfect  tenses  we  distinguish  between 
the  use  of  these  verbs  as  pure  verbs  and  as  auxiliaries.  When  used  e  j 
pure  verbs  the  participle  is  weak .  Qefotttti,  etc.,  when  used  as  auxiliary, 
with  an  infinitive  complement  the  old  strong  participle  (without  aug- 
ment) is  used :  f  onnctt. 

\(S)  f)aJ)e  gcfottttt  id^  f)Cihe  ge^en  fottttCtt 

(I  have  been  able)  (I  was  able  to  go) 

id)  l^abe  gelittrft  ic^  ijd^^  \pxe6)en  bitrfctt 

(I  was  permitted)  (I  was  permitted  to  speak) 

i^  f)ahe  gefottt  id)  'i)aU  ge^en  foffctt 

(I  was  supposed  to)  (I  was  supposed  to  go) 

id)  \)aU  gcttJOfft  id)  i)ahe  ge^en  ttJOffctt 

(I  wished  to)  (I  wanted  to  go) 

ic^  l^abe  geittttfet  id)  f)ahe  ge^en  niiiffm 

(I  was  compelled)  (I  had  to  go) 

id^  'i)ahe  gemoi^t  id)  l^abe  fd^reiben  tttiifiett 

(I  wanted  to)  (I  felt  like  writing) 

The  future  tense  and  the  first  conditional  are  formed  regularly: 

id)  irerbe  mogen  ic^  wcrbe  fc^reiben  mogen 

id)  njiirbe  mogen  id)  hJiirbe  [cfireiben  mogen 

The  future  perfect  and  the  second  conditional  are  too  long  and 
clumsy  for  use. 

83  Another  preterite  present  but  not  a  modal  auxiliary  is  toiffm: 

ttJiffen  hJu^tc  gett)u§t 

Indic.  Subj. 

id)  ttjeig  id)  njiffe 

bu  toeifet  bu;n)iffeft 

er  ttjetg  er  ttJiffc 

ttJtr  toiffen  voix  tiiitfetctt  (tt)i[fcn) 

i^r  toi^t  i^r  tiju^tet  (wiffet) 

ftc  toiffen  fie  ttiitfetett  (toiffen) 

Th3  other  tenses  are  formed  regularly. 

84  Like  the  modal  auxiliaries  in  use  is  the  verb  Ittffett: 

id)  laffe  ein  ^leib  madien  I  have  a  dress  made  ' 

„  lie§    ;,      „         „  I  had  a  dress  made 

„  l^abe  „      „         „      laffen  I  have  had  a  dress  made 

„  f)aU  ba§  ^nd)  gclaffen  I  have  left  the  book 


APPENDIX  259 

85  Cansatiyes 

Causatives  are  weak  transit! ves  formed  from  strong  intransitive 
verbs.  They  represent  the  object  as  being  made  to  do  the  action 
implied  in  the  verb. 

liegen  (lie)  legen  (lay) 

[i^en  (sit)  fe|en  (set) 

fte^en  (stand)  fteflen  (put,  i.  e.,  make  to  stand) 

trinfen  (drink)  trdnfen  (give  to  drink) 

finfen  (sink)  fenfen  (make  to  sink) 

86  Reflexive  Verbs 

Reflexive  Verbs  require  a  pronominal  object  that  refers  back  to 
the  subject.  In  the  first  and  second  person  this  object  is  the  regular 
personal  pronoun  in  the  dative  or  accusative.  In  the  third  person  it 
is  fl^,  both  singular  and  plural. 

Present  Future 

iNDic,                SuBj.  i^  ttjerbe  mid)  freucn,  etc. 

ic^  freue  mid^     freutc  mid)  (f rcue)  Fut.  Perf. 
bu  f reuft  bii^      fteutefi  bic^  (freucft)    ic^  merbe  mic^  gef reut  ^aben,  etc. 

er  freut  fid^        freue  fid)  Imper. 

tuir  freuen  unS  freuten  un§  (freuen;  freue  (bu)  bid) 

i^r  freut  ettr^      freutrt  eud^  (freuet)  freuet  (i^r)  euc^ 

fie  freuen  {id^    [  freuten  fid)  (freuen)  freuen  6ie  fid) 

Preterite  Infinit. 

i^  freute  mid),  etc.  ^'^  ^^^"^"'  ^'^  Sefreut  ^aben 

^^^J^^^  fic^  freuenb,  fid)  gefreut 

id^  %Oibt  m\6)  gefreut,  etc.  ^^^^ 

Pluperfect  id)  ttJiirbe  mid)  freuen 

\6)  ^atte  mic^  gefreut,  etc.  „     „        „    gefreut  ^abcn 

87  Impersonal  Verbs 

Impersonal  Verbs  have  e8  (with  no  definite  antecedent)  for  sub- 
ject. They  usually  represent  a  condition  (mental  or  physical)  and 
have  many  idiomatic  constructions. 

Physical  Mental 

e§  regnet  e§  grout  mir 

e§  fd)neit  e§  freut  mic^ 

e§  frtert  mic^  e§  argert  mid) 


260 


APPENDIX 


Idiomatic 
CS  gibt  (there  is,  or  there  are) 
e§  gitt  (it  is  a  question  of) 
e§  fragt  \\6)  (the  question  arises) 
e§  ^anbelt  ftc^  urn  (it  is  a  question  of) 
e§  lol^nt  fid^  (it  is  worth  while) 
c8  Idfet  fid^  tun  (it  can  be  done) 

88  Irregular  Verbs 

Seven  weak  verbs  are  irregular  in  appearance,  since  the  infinitive 
has  undergone  an  umlaut  change  because  of  a  suffix  (now  lost)  which 
did  not  affect  the  other  principal  parts. 

brcnnen  brannte  gebramit 

fenneii  fanntc  gefannt 

ncnnen  nannte  genannt 

rcnnen  rannte  gerannt 

fenben  fanbte  gefanbt 

ttjenben  njanbtc  genjanbt 

bcnfen*  bad)te  gebttdjt 

♦  Observe  that  the  last  named  has  lost  the  nasal  before  (jh  and  has  undergone 
a  consonant  change.    So  also: 


89 


bringen  Ua6)it  gebrac^t 

Table  of  Strong  Verbs 


Two  forms  used  interchangeably  are  connected  by  a  brace.  If  one 
is  less  frequently  used  it  is  in  brackets.  If  a  verb  is  sometimes  weak, 
this  is  indicated  by  a  (w)  after  the  infinitive  form. 


Pbes.  Indic. 

INF. 

PRET.  IND. 

Pebf.  Pakt. 

3bd  Pebs. 

Pbet.  Subj. 

IMPER. 

Ibaden 

buf 

gebaden 

bQdt 

biife 

bocf(e)! 

ficfe^lm 

befall 

befo^Ien 

befie^lt 

befotjle 

befle^ll 

^eflei^en 

befliB 

befliffen 

befleiBt 

befliffe 

befleifee! 

Beginnen 

begann 

begonnen 

beginnt 

begonne 

beginn(e) 

fteifeett 

btfe 

gebt[fen 

beifet 

biffe 

beife(e)! 

Bctfiett 

barg 

geborgen 

birgt 

biirge 

birg! 

fietftctt 

barft 

geborften 

birft 

borjte 

birft! 

bettJCBCtt(w)  bettJog 

betDogen 

betuegt 

bettjogc 

bett)eg(e)! 

biegen 

bog 

gebogen 

biegft 

boge 

bieg(e)! 

Meten 

bot 

geboten 

bietet 

bote 

biet(e)! 

(tntien 

banb 

gebunben 

binbet 

banbe 

binb(e)i 

bitten 

bat 

gebeten 

bittet 

bate 

bitte ! 

tlafen 

blieS 

geblofen 

bliift 

bliefe 

blaf(e)! 

APPENDIX 

26] 

PRES.  INDIC, 

INTT. 

Pbet.  Ind. 

PsBF.  Part. 

3rd  Pers. 

Pret.  Subj. 

IMPER. 

himtn 

blieb 

geblicbeu 

bteibt 

bliebe 

bleib(e)! 

hxattn 

briet 

gebraten 

brat 

briete 

brat(e)! 

Hrei^en 

brac^ 

gebroc^eii 

bric^t 

hxa6)C: 

brirf)! 

btngeti  (w) 

bang 

gcbuiigen 

bingt 

bingte 

binge! 

brcf(i§ett 

j  brafcfi 
i  [brofrf) 

gebrofrf)en 

brifc^t 

brofcfie 

brifc^! 

] 

tirtngen 

brang 

gebrungen 

bringt 

brangc 

bring(e)I 

emiife^Iett 

empfo^l 

empfol^Ien 

empfie^It 

empfo^le 

cmpfiel^n 

erbletj^ett 

erbtic^ 

crblic^en 

erbteic^t 

erblid^e 

erblei(^(e)! 

erlijfri^ctt 

erlofc^ 

erlofc^en 

erlifdit 

crlo[cf)e 

crtifc^! 

ClfCtt 

aB 

gcgeffen 

ifet 

o^e 

ife! 

fa^rctt 

fu^r 

gcfat)ren 

fa^rt 

fit^re 

fa^r(e)! 

faactt 

ftel 

gefaHcn 

fdllt 

ficlc 

fall(c)! 

fattfictt 

fing 

gcfangcn 

fangt 

fingc 

fang(e).' 

fci^ten 

fodit 

gefoc^ten 

m 

foc^tc 

fic^t! 

flnbett 

fanb 

gefunbeu 

finbet 

faube 

finbe! 

Her^ten 

floc^t 

gefloc^tcn 

fltc^t 

flotfite 

flicgt! 

fiiefien 

flog 

geflogeii 

flicgt 

floge 

flieg(c)! 

fitelen 

flo^ 

geflo^cii 

flie^t 

P^e 

flie^(e)!: 

fliefeett 

Po§ 

gefloffcn 

fliefet 

floffc 

flie6(e)! 

freffett 

fra& 

gcfreffeu 

frifet] 

frafee 

fn§! 

frictctt 

fror 

gefroren 

friert 

frore 

frier(c)! 

prctt  (w) 

gor 

gegoren 

gart 

gore 

gare! 

flcfiiirctt 

gebar 

gcboreu 

gcbiert 

gcbarc 

gcbier! 

Qe6en 

gab 

gcgeben 

gibt 

gabc 

gibl 

Oeliei^en 

gebie^ 

gcbie^cu 

gebei^t 

gcbie^c 

gebei^(e)! 

fie^en 

fling 

gegangeu 

ge^t 

giiige 

gc^(e)! 

fieUttfiCtt 

getang 

gehiugen 

gelingt 

gelduge 

ftclten 

gait 

gegoUen 

gilt 

golte 

gilt! 

fteucjen 

gena§ 

genefen 

geneft 

gendfc 

gcnefe ! 

gente^en 

genofe 

genoffen 

genieBt 

genoffe 

genieB(e)! 

Oefii^c^m 

gefc^a^ 

gcfc^e^en 

gefc^ic^t 

gcfc^d^c 

fiettJittttCtt 

gettjami 

gcttjonnen 

gcnjinnt 

getuonne 

gettJinn(c)! 

fitefeett 

goB 

gegoffen 

giefet 

goffe 

gieB(e)! 

flkti^ctt 

gticf) 

geglid)en 

gteicfit 

glid^e 

gleic^(e)! 

fllciten 

glut 

geglitten 

gleitet 

glittc 

gleit(e)! 

gUmmen 

gtomm 

gegfommen 

glimmt 

glommc 

glimm(e)! 

grabctt 

grub 

gegrabcn 

grobt 

grubc 

grab(e) ! 

ftrcifcn 

griff 

gegriffeu 

grcift 

griffe 

greif(c)! 

lalten 

^ielt 

ge^altcn 

^alt 

^ielte 

^alt(e)! 

262 

APPENDIX 

Prbs.  Indic. 

Inf.          Pbet.  Ind. 

Perf.  Part. 

3rd  Pers. 

Pret.  Subj. 

IMPER. 

^angeit 

^ing 

ge^angen 

tiangt 

^inge 

^ang(e)! 

^auen 

tjieb 

ge^ouen 

l^aut 

l^iebe 

^au(e) ! 

ithm 

^ob 

ge^oben 

^ebt 

pbe  (pbe) 

^eb(e)! 

mtn 

^ieB 

ge^eifeen 

IieiBt 

^iefee 

I)ei§(e) 

mtn 

^alf 

ge^Dlfen 

^ilft 

Plfc 

^ilf! 

ftefett(w) 

for 

(ge)foren 

fieft 

fore 

fiefe! 

Htmmen  (w 

)  flomnt 

geflommen 

flimmt 

flomme 

flimm(e)! 

fltngeit 

flong 

geftungen 

flingt 

flange 

fting(e)! 

fnctfen 

fniff 

gefniffen 

fneift 

fniffe 

fneif(e)! 

fommen 

lam 

gefontmen 

fommt 

fame 

fomm! 

ttmtn 

!rifc^ 

gefrifcJjen 

frcifd^t 

frif^e 

freif(f)(e)I 

ftlt^tn 

froc^ 

gefroc^en 

friecfit 

frdd)e 

friec^(e)! 

fitrctt(w) 

for 

geforen 

flirt 

fore 

fiire! 

Ittben  (w) 

lub 

gelaben 

labet  (labt) 

labete  (liibe) 

lab(e)! 

laffett 

m 

gelaffen 

lofet 

liefee 

lafe! 

laufen 

lief 

gelaufen 

lauft 

liefc 

rauf(e)! 

leiben 

titt 

gelitten 

leibet 

litte 

leib(e)! 

lei^ctt 

tie^ 

gelie^en 

lei^t 

lielic 

lei^(e)! 

lefeti 

Ia§ 

gefefen 

Heft 

tofe 

lie§! 

Ilegeti 

lag 

gelegen 

Hegt 

tagc 

liege ! 

imn 

log 

gelogen 

lugt 

loge 

mg(e)! 

mcibett 

mieb 

gemieben 

meibet 

ntiebc 

meib(e)! 

mcffctt 

mo§ 

gemeffen 

ntifet 

ma§c 

mi§! 

ttc^mctt 

no:^tn 

genommen 

nimmt 

na^nte 

nimm ! 

^ifetfett 

^ftff 

gepfiffen 

pfeift 

^ftffe 

^feif(e) 

Ijftegctt  (w) 

Pflog 

gepflogen 

^flegt 

^floge 

^flege! 

Jjretfett 

pvk§> 

ge^riefen 

preift 

Ijriefe 

^reif(e)! 

^MtUtn 

quoU 

gequoKen 

quint 

quoHe 

quill ! 

ttttett 

riet 

geraten 

rat 

riete 

rat(e)! 

vtlttn 

rieb 

gerieben 

reibt 

riebe 

reib(e)! 

tt'i^tn 

rife 

geriffen 

reifet 

riffe 

rei6(e)! 

relten 

ritt 

geritten 

reitet 

ritte 

reit(e) ! 

tlcd^ett 

rod^ 

geroc^en 

ried^t 

rdd^c 

rie(^(e)! 

rlttgett 

rang 

gerungen 

ringt 

range 

ting(e) ! 

rttttten 

rann 

geronnen 

rinnt 

ranne 

rinn(e) ! 

rwfctt 

rief 

gerufen 

ruft 

riefe 

ruf(e)! 

faufett 

[off 

gefoffen 

fauft 

foffe 

fauf(e)! 

fttugen 

[09 

gefogen 

faugt 

foge 

faug(e)! 

fi^affett(w) 

[d)Uf 

gefc^affen 

fc^afft 

fc^iife 

fd)aff(e)! 

fj^ttHCtt  (w) 

fc^oa 

gefcfjoUen 

fctiam 

f(f)6ne 

fci)alle(e)! 

APPENDIX 


263 


Pres.  Indic 

Inf.          : 

Pret.  Ind. 

Perf.  Part. 

3rd  Pers. 

Pret.  Subj. 

IMPER. 

fi^eitteu 

fcfiieb 

gefc^ieben 

fc^eibet 

fc^iebe 

f(f|eib(e)! 

fi^etnen 

(C^ien 

gefc^ienen 

idjeint 

fd^iene 

fcf)ein(c)! 

ji^elten 

ftfiart 

gefc^olten 

fc^irt 

fd^oUe 

f^ilt! 

fr^ereii  (w) 

frfior 

gefd)oren 

fd)iert 

fc^orc 

fd^ier! 

Witltn 

fdiob 

gefc^oben 

fd)icbt 

fc^obc 

fd^ieb(e)! 

mtfitn 

fdloB 

gefc^offen 

mm 

fc^offe 

fc^icB(e)! 

f(^ittiictt 

fd)unb 

ge[d)unben 

fc^inbet 

fc^iinbe 

fd)inb(e)! 

jt^Ittfen 

fc^Iief 

gefc^rafen 

\m\t 

fdtiaefe 

frf)Iaf(e)! 

fr^tagen 

fc^Iug 

gefc^ragen 

fdjldgt 

frf)tugc 

fc^rag(e)! 

ft^Icii^ett 

Wi^ 

gefd^Iid)en 

fd)Iei(^t 

frf)Iid)e 

fcf)tei(f)(e)! 

f«^lclfen(w 

)  fc^ltff 

gefc^liffen 

fd)reift 

fc^affe 

fcfifeif(e)! 

|(^lte^en 

fcf)lo6 

gefc^Io[fen 

fef)Iie§t 

mm 

fci)Iie6(e)! 

fd^Uttfictt 

f  Chiang 

gefc^rungen 

fd^ringt 

fciirange 

fd)ang(e)! 

fi^meigen 

fc^mife 

gefc^miffen 

frf)mei§t 

fd^miffe 

fc^meiB(e)! 

fi^tncljett  (w)  fc^mol5 

gefc^molaen 

fc^mit^t 

fdimol^e 

frfimir^ ! 

ir^ttaubett(w)fcf)nob 

gefc^noben 

fd^naubt 

fdinobe 

fd^naub(e)! 

fc^ttctiJCtt 

frf)nitt 

gefd^uitten 

fc^neibet 

fc^nitte 

fc^neib(c)! 

fi^rerfctt 

fcfiraf 

(ge)fc^ro(Ien 

fc^ricft 

fdirafe 

fcfiricf! 

f^retben 

f(i)rieb 

gefc^ricben 

frfireibt 

fc^riebe 

fc^reib(e)! 

fj^reten 

fdiric 

gefc^riecn 

fd)reit 

fd^riec 

fcf)m(e)! 

f(^rettctt 

fc^ritt 

gefc^ritten 

fc^reitet 

fc^rittc 

fd)rcit(e)! 

fi|to)aren 

fc^ttjor 

gefd^njorcn 

fcfttuiert 
fc^iDort 

fc^trore 

j  fcbttjore ! 
1  fc^njier! 

1      fjlttlCtfiCtt 

fc^iBicg 

gefd^ttJicgen 

fc^tueigt 

fdjttJiege 

frf)tucig(e)! 

ft^ttjeUeii  (w)  fc^mott 

gefc^iDoUen 

fd)h)iat 

fc^tuotte 

fc^  trill! 

f(^tt)tmmen 

[d^tDaitint 

gefcf)h)ommen  fdjmimmt 

fc^ttjommc 

fd^ttjtmm(e)! 

fi^ttimtien 

fc^tuanb 

gefdjirunbcn  fd)tt)inbet 

fcf)tt)dnbe 

fc^njinb(c)! 

fl^ttltttfiCtt 

fc^tcang 

gefc^njungen  frfiiuingt 

fdjtDQngc 

fc^h)ing(e)!; 

fii^tDdren 

( frf)tt)ur 
}  \a)tt)OX 

gefd^ttjoreii 

fd)tt}ort 

fc^ttjiire 

fc^n)or(e)! 

fc^en 

fa^ 

gefe^en 

fie^t 

fS^e 

[ie^! 

fetn 

mar 

gettjefcn 

ift 

ttjare 

fei! 

fiebett  (w) 

fott 

gefotten 

fiebet 

fotte 

fieb(e)! 

jittflctt 

fang 

gefungen 

fiiigt 

fange 

ftng(e)! 

finfeit 

fanf 

gefunfen 

fin!t 

fan!e 

finf(e)! 

finneit 

fann 

gefonnen 

ftnnt 

fanne(fanue)finn(e)! 

ft^ett 

faB 

gefeffen 

fi|t 

fafee 

file! 

f^ICiCtt 

f^ie 

ge[))ieen 

fpeit 

fpiee 

fpei! 

fjilnnen 

fpann 

gefponnen 

fpinnt 

fponne 

fptnn(e)! 

Hirct^ctt 

fprac^ 

gefproc^en 

[priest 

fprdc^e 

fprid) ! 

{)irie|en 

[profe 

g»f|)ro[fen 

fprielt 

fproffe 

fprieB(e)! 

264 


APPENDIX 


Pres.  Indic. 

t  Inf.          Pbbt.  Ind. 

Perf.  Part. 

3rd  Pers. 

PRBT.  SUBJ. 

IMPEB. 

fjirinfien 

fprong 

gefprungen 

fpringt 

fprdnge 

fpring(e)! 

mtn 

\tad) 

geftoc^en 

fticfit 

ftad^c 

ftirf)! 

fierfen  (w) 

\ial 

geftedt 

ftedt 

ftQ!e 

ftecf  (e) ! 

ftc^en 

ftanb 

gcftanben 

fte^t 

{  ftdnbe 
I  ftiinbe 

fte^(e): 

fte^lett 

rta^i 

gefto^fcn 

ftie^rt 

fto^Ie(ftd^Ie)ftiet)l! 

fteigeti 

ftieg 

geftiegen 

fteigt 

ftiege 

fteig(e)! 

fterktt 

ftarb 

geftorben 

ftirbt 

ftiirbe 

ftirb! 

fiicBeit 

ftob 

geftoben 

ftiebt 

ftobe 

ftieb(e)! 

ftittfm 

ftaitf 

geftunfeu 

ftinft 

ftdnfc 

ftinf(e)! 

Mtn 

ftteB 

geftoBen 

ftoBt 

ftieBe 

ftofe(e)! 

ftrcii^ett 

ftrid, 

geftrid^eu 

ftrcid)t 

ftric^e 

ftrei(f)(e)! 

ftretten 

flritt 

geftritteu 

ftreitet 

ftritte 

ftreit(e)! 

trttficn 

trug 

getragen 

triigt 

triige 

trag(e)! 

treffctt 

traf 

getroffen 

trifft 

trdfc 

triff! 

irciktt 

trieb 

getriebeu 

treibt 

triebe 

treib(e)! 

trcten 

trot 

getreten 

tritt 

trdte 

tritt! 

ttlcfett(w) 

troft: 

getroffen 

trieft 

troffe 

trief(e)! 

trittfeit 

tmnf 

getrunfeu 

triiift 

trdnfe 

trinf(e) ! 

triifictt 

trog 

getrogeu 

triigt 

troge 

triig(e)! 

tm 

tat 

getan 

tut 

tote 

tu(e)! 

tierMcti^ett 

tjerblic^ 

t)erblid)en 

tjerblei(^t 

Oerblic^e 

t)erb(ei(^(e)! 

Ueriicrften(w)  derborb 

tjerborbeii 

tjerbirbt 

Derbiirbc 

berbirb ! 

tiertirie^eu 

t)erbro§ 

tjerbroffen 

berbrie^t 

Uerbrofee 

t)erbrieB(e) ! 

tjctfleffen 

Dergafe 

Dergeffen 

Dergi§t 

Dergdfee 

t)ergi§! 

ticrliereit 

berlor 

tjerroren 

berfiert 

t}erlore 

t)eraer(e)! 

tiJttt^fCtt 

tt)ud)§ 

gehjac^fen 

ttJdc^ft 

ttJiic^fc 

Jt)act)f(e) ! 

ttiiiften  (w) 

tt)og 

gettjogen 

ttJogt 

tt)6ge 

tt)dge(!) 

ttiaf(^en 

tDUfd) 

genjofd^en 

luafd^t 

n)iifd)e 

n)afc^(e)! 

mhtn  (w) 

tt)ob, 

gelDoben 

ftjebt 

tcobe 

n)eb(e) ! 

tueit^en 

tt)ic^ 

gettJt^en 

meic^t 

njtc^c 

ttjetc^(e)! 

tueijen 

h)ie§ 

gehjiefen 

hjeift 

njtefe 

hjeif(e) ! 

ttierftett 

luarb 

gett)orben 

n)irbt 

njiirbe 

n)irb' 

toiertien 

tt)arb 

rtlllfhp 

gettjorben 

ttJirb 

njiirbe 

ttJerbe! 

tticrfm 

lUUtUt' 

njarf 

gettjorfen 

hJtrft 

tt)iirfe 

Wirf! 

toiegm 

ttjog 

geiDogen 

tuiegt 

n)ogc 

n)teg(e)! 

ttitn))en 

ttjanb 

genjunben 

n)iubet 

h)dnbe 

tDinbe ! 

xei^eit 

5te^ 

ge^ie^en 

aei^t 

gie^e 

3eit)(e)! 

jle^en 

309 

gejogen 

Sie^t 

goge 

aiet)(e)! 

attilnfictt 

5tt)ang 

gestt)ungen 

gtutngt 

5tt)dnge 

5ttjing(e)! 

APPENDIX  265 

SYNTAX 

90  THE  SENTENCE— ORDER 

J.  JVbrmaZ-Subj.Terb  Adjuncts,  obj.  {  ^^^.^P^^^^^*  °^*"f^  ^' 

^     gmning  with  subject. 

)  Question. 
Independent  clauses  not  begin- 
ning with  subject. 
III.  TVansposed—S,  Adjuncts.  O.  V,— Dependent  clauses. 

Examples 

I.    ©r  Itefl  je^t  ha^  SSuc^.    (£r  f^at  je^t  t>a§  md)  gclefen. 
II.    ^ei^t  \it^  ex  ))a^  93ud).    ^at  er  je^t  t>a^  S3ud)  gelefen? 
III.    Scf)  fe^e,  boB  et  je^t  t)a^  mci)  Ilej}.     S^t^  fe^C/  ^ofe  er  jcfet  ba8 
58uc^  gelefen  |ot. 

It  is  only  the  inflected  part  of  the  verb  that  changes  its  position. 

MINOR  RULES 

91  Of  a  number  of  adjuncts  the  most  important  comes  last.  Hence  ; 

92  The  infinitive,  participial,   or  adverbial  complement  always 

comes  last  in  the  sentence : 

@r  ftjiU  nai)  ^aiife  %t^tn, 
®r  ift  md)  ^au\e  gcBangett. 
@r  fc^lagt  ha^  ^u6)  auf. 

93  An  infinitive  phrase  (with  ju),    together  with  its  adjuncts, 

comes  last : 
(Sr  ging  au§,  um  ba§  ju  fcl^eit. 
3c^  bad^te,  ba§  er  auggegangen  fci,  um  i>a^  ju  fe^etl. 

94  The  negative  adverbs  u\^i,  UXt,  UlttadU  come  last,  unless  the 

negation  applies  to  one  especial  word,  in  which  case  the 
negative  adverb  immediately  precedes  it.  Ex.  —  ©in  ebler 
SUJann  bergi^t  fein  SSaterlanb  niri^t  (A  noble  man  does  not  for- 
get his  fatherland).  But :  ©in  ebler  ffftann  Dergifet  aUe^,  nur 
ttid^t  fein  SSaterlanb  (A  noble  man  may  forget  everything,  but 
he  never  forgets  his  fatherland). 

96       An  adverb  of  time  precedes  all  othei*s: 

®r  fiel^t  petite  morgctt  langfam  jur  ©d^ulc. 


266  APPENDIX 

96  A  pronoun  precedes  a  noun  object.     @g  and  ^^  precede  all 

others.    When  both  objects  are  nouns,  the  indirect  usually 
comes  first. 

er  gibt  c8  tcm  Wlann. 
er  toxU  flr^  bem  Manne  nid^t  anbertraiien. 
er  njin  bem  SRanne  tiag  ©c^cimnig  nidjt  ant)ertrauen. 
When  both  are  pronouns,  the  direct  takes  precedence :     @r  gibt 
i^tt  und. 

97  -<4fi/ecfives — As  a  rule  adjectives  precede  the  nouns  they  mod- 

ify.    If  the  adjective  itself  has  adjuncts,  it  is  preceded  by 
them. 
^Ir.— 3)cr  gttte  ^nabc. 

S)er  fe^r  %uit  ^nobe. 

S)cr  ton  feincr  abutter  8c|(^oItettc  ^nabc. 

S)er  wit  lanitv  ©timwe  ein  IciUgeg  fiieb  flnfienbe  SKart^rcr. 

98  An  adjective  word,  phrase,  or  clause   may  follow  its  noun, 

especially  in  elevated  diction : 

3)tc  junge  grau,  fii§an  llttll  llcbettSttiiirblfl*  toJte  ein  enficl,  er[rf)ien  on 
ber  Xiir. 

S)er  ©anger  wit  ben  ml^tn  8odfen,  ergriff  bie  §arfc. 
®er  ^onig,  ber  lanfle  flefr^miegen  ^atte,  fing  an  ju  reben. 

♦The  adj.  in  this  position,  like  the  predicate  adj.,  is  not  inflected. 

Only  the  modifiers  of  the  noun  may  intervene  between  subject  and 
verb  in  normal  and  inverted  order.  Thus  for  the  English:  She  never 
saw  him,  we  must  say :  ©le  |at  tl^n  nle  gefel^en. 

USE  OF  ARTICLE 

Definite 

99  As  in  English,  the  definite  article  is  used  to  individualize. 
1 OO    Deviations  from  English— 

1.  GENERIC — With  abstractions,  verbal  nouns,  and  nouns  of  mate- 
rial,* where  the  English  omits  the  article,  the  German 
inserts  it.  J^ttS  2ehen  i[t  ber  ©iiter  l^oc^fteS  nic^t  (Life 
is  not  the  greatest  of  blessings).  ^aS  ®el^en  ift  bir 
gcfunb  (Walking  is  good  for  you).  $^a8  ©ifen  ift  ba§ 
nii^lid^fte  TletaU  (Iron  is  the  most  useful  of  metals). 
In  all  these  cases  the  noun  is  generalized  by  its  article,  i.  e.,  the 
particular  noun  stands  for  the  entire  class. 


APPENDIX  267 

2.  CLASS,  OCCUPATION,  NATIONALITY — Here  the  article  is  omitted 
when  the  noun  represents  an  abstract  idea  rather 
than  a  particular  individuality.  Ex.—^x  \\i  %tf\t\itt 
(He  is  a  workman).  (Sr  hJtrb  ^rjt  (He  will  become  a 
physician).     ^6)  bin  ^merifanet  (I  am  an  American). 

8.  WITH  PROPER  NOUNS— (a)  Familiarly:  ^ennft  bu  betl  Xctt?    ^^ 
fe^e  iiett  ftarl. 
(6)  With  a  preceding  adjective:  bet  jungc  ®oet^c. 

(c)  Names  of  countries  are  usually  not  preceded  by  the 
article,  (Snglanb,  2)eutfc^Ianb,  but  those  ending  in  el 
always  take  it,  as:  bie  Xiirfei,  bie  Xaxtaxei;  also  bic 
©c^njcij,  bic  ^falj,  bic  SfJicbcrfanbc. 

(d)  Names  of  rivers,  mountains,  and  seas  take  the  article: 
ber  9l^cin,  bic  S)onau,  bcr  fjclbbcrg,  bic  D[tfcc. 

4.  INSTEAD  OF  POSSESSIVE — When  the  relation  is  very  clear.     ®r 

nimmt  ten  $ut  tiom  fto)lfe  (He  takes  his  hat  from 

his  head). 
6.  DISTRIBUTIVE — Where  in  English  we  use  the  indefinite.    ^aS 

Sanb  f  oftet  l^unbcrt  Xalex  ben  Sfttfe  (The  land  costs  one 

hundred  dollars  a  foot). 

f  O I  There  are  many  deviations  which  can  not  be  classified.  Certain 
phrases  have  become  stereotyped : 

nadb  Sfiorbcn,  ©iibcn,  etc.=  towards  the  north,  south,  etc. 
nam  ^au8  =  home       na6)  bent  ^au3  =  to  the  house 
gu  ^au§  =  at  home      gu  bcm  ^aug  =  toward  the  house 
f^olgcnbe^  =  the  following 
With©acl^c,@runb,  Urfac^c,  etc.,  the  article  is  often  omitted. 

102  Contractions — The  dative  and  accusative  cases  of  the  definite 

article  are  often  contracted  with  a  preceding  preposition 
so  as  to  form  one  word.     No  apostrophe  is  used.     Ex. : 
uhex  tai  ^a^r  =  iiberS  ^a^x  untcr  bo§  ^au3  =  unter8  §au§ 

ju  bcr  ©d^ule  =  gut  ©d)ulc  in  bag  ®cbirgc  =  in§  ©ebirgc 

m  bent  ®cbirgc  =  im  ®ebirgc  bei  bent  SSater  =  beim  SSatcr 

103  This  contraction  takes  place  very  frequently  in  familiar  lan- 
guage, but  can  not  be  used  when  the  noun  is  particularized  by  a  fol- 
lowing clause  or  phrase.    Ex. : 

®r  Qtf)t  5ur  ^ird^c,  but,  @r  gcl^t  gu  bet  ^ird^c,  gu  bcr  and)  fcin  SSatcr  ging. 
®r  lebt  im  ©cbirgc,  but,  @r  lebt  in  bem  ®ebirge,  t)a^  man  oon  ^ier  fcl^cn  fann. 

104  Where  several  noims  in  the  same  construction  follow  each 
other,  the  article  must  be  repeated  before  each :  The  father  and  mother 
were  at  home  =  2)er  SSatcr  unb  bic  SKutter  toaxtn  ju  §au[e. 


268  APPENDIX 

NOUNS 

Syntax  of  Cases 

GENERAL 

105  Appositives — Nouns  in  apposition  with  other  nouns  or  pro- 
nouns are  in  the  same  case.  They  may  stand  without  connecting 
particle  or  with  the  particle  ttl0  or  toie. 

dx  tritt  aU  filacer  auf. 

(£r  fie^t  i^n  al§  fctnctt  ffftnti  an. 

er  ^at  ijen  ©cncral,  ben  crftcn  Wlann  be§  fianbeg  gefe^en. 

NOMINATIVE 

1 06  !•    Subject  (and  vocative) — as  in  English. 

1 07  II.    Predicate  Noun— with  or  without  aU, 

1 08  III*    Absolute. 

II.    Predicate  Noun 

109  After  the  verbs  geltett  (to  be  valued  at),  erfii^clnett  (appear), 
l|ertiorfic|ctt,  oufjie^ett,  Itbtn,  ^tthtn,  fie^en,  the  participles  anficjieHt 
(placed),  krufctt  (called),  erfiiirt  (explained),  ttUgoeflCbCtt  (declared), 
ftcfUttbctt  (found),  gefit|U  (felt),  erfattttt  (recognized),  gcfitri^tct  (feared), 
Hege^rt  (desired)  (i.  e. ,  verbs  which  are  synonymous  with  to  be  in  a 
wider  sense),  we  use  the  predicate  nominative  with  the  inter- 
medial particle  dU. 

Ex.—(^e^t  ^^x  itic^t  aU  cine  tonigitt  ^crtjor? 
er  toax  aU  rettcnber  ^ngel  erfc^ienen. 
S)er  S3auer  fonnte  aU  Wontv  2Rtttttt  gelten. 

I  lO  After  the  verbs  fcitt,  ttJCrbctt  (become),  bleiftctt  (remain),  fji^ela 
nett  (seem),  iJiittfftt  (imagine),  ^cifectt  (to  be  called),  gcjri^imjjft  tocrbctt 
(to  be  called  in  a  bad  sense),  in  fact,  after  all  verbs  denoting  condi- 
tion, the  predicate  nominative  is  used  without  the  intervening  particle. 
Ex.—^x  tft  cltt  pter  SKatttt  geBIieben. 

er  h)irb  cltt  tttficr  ©ofcmitl^t  gefc^im^ft. 

SBit^elm  tjon  ber  S^orntanbie  tuirb  bcr  6rokrcr  gcnannt. 

es  ift  nic^t  jebem  gegeben,  citt  flrofecr  ^clb  gu  [ein. 

The  English  construction  after  to  be  elected,  nominated,  created, 
etc.,  appears  in  German  in  the  form  of  a  prepositional  phrase: 
gu  -f  dative.    Ex.—lELe  is  elected  president  =  (£r  toirb  inm  ^riifliietttett 


APPENDIX  269 

The  same  is  true  after  the  active  form  of  these  verbs.  Ex. — They 
nominate  him  mayor  =  (Sie  ernennen  x^n  jum  ©itrgermeificr. 

The  predicate  after  tDCrbett  may  also  be  expressed  with  ju  and  the 
dative — Seiber  ift  btr  bie  ^eitnat  gur  Srcmbc  getnorben,  instead  of:  S)ie 
^eintat  ift  bie  i^xem'be  gettjorben.  This  is  especially  the  case  when  Uierlien 
expresses  a  complete  change  in  substance  as  in  the  above  example. 

The  English,  "I  consider  him  to  be  a  good  man,"  where  man 
would  agree  with  him  in  the  objective  case,  is  expressed  in  German  by 
means  of  a  preposition,  fiir  —  ^d)  italic  t^n  fiir  elttCtt  fitttctt  9kam. 

Ill  III.    Absolute 

The  Nominative  Absolute  is  not  very  frequent  in  German.  It  is 
used  mainly  for  vivid  description. 

Ex.—'^^ie  STrmce  5og  iihev  bie  93ruclen,  affc  ©ejlii^ter  bilfter,  Jebet  SWuttli 
tjerfc^Ioffen.  —  2)ie  ©rafin  ging  gurilcf,  in  i^ren  Hugen  flebcr^after  ©Ittttg. 
In  all  these  cases  some  part  of  the  verb  to  be  may  be  supplied. 

I  12  GENITIVE 

I.  Attributiye — modifying  nouns. 

Ilk  Partitive — denoting  the  whole  from  which  a  part  is  taken. 

III.  Objective — after  verbs,  adjectives,  adverbs,  prepositions. 

IV.  Adverbial— used  instead  of  an  adverb. 
V.  Appositional— with  another  genitive. 

I.    Atiributive  (expressed  in  English  by  of). 

113      A  genitive  is  attributive  if  it  modifies  a  noun.     It  may  then 
express  a  variety  of  relations* 

I  14     POSSESSION  —  S)ie   ^eimat    bc8  ^InM    toar  unbefannt.  —  2)o8 

@elb  ift  M  SttifcrS. 
I  i  5     IDENTITY— ^ag  Softer  M  Xtnntti, 
Proper  nouns  are  placed  in  apposition,  instead  of  in  the  genitive: 

ber  momi  ^pxW,  bie  Stabt  gJarlS. 

I  16     QUALITY  OR  MATERIAL— ^et  Sijulctt  ©IttTtj  (for  bic  granjenbcit 
©aufen).  —  @in  SSec^er  cblcn  ©olbcg. 

117        AS  OBJECT  OR    SUBJECT  OF   THE  ACTION   IMPLIED   IN   A  VERBAL 

NOUN— 2)ie  Xeilung  tier  6rbe,  bie  Siebe  @otte0,  bie  gutd^t 


270  APPENDIX 

I  1 8  Instead  of  the  genitive  we  may  use  tlOtl  +  dative  in  certain 
cases : 

(a)  To  avoid  ambiguity  where  no  article  can  be  used  and  where 

no  inflection  of    the  noun    designates  the  case :     Ex.  —  S)ie 

©tra^en  ton  Sonbon,    bie   S3cforgung  t)on  ©cfc^aften    (but,   bic 

SSeforgung  mand^er  ©efc^afte). 
(6)  In  the  designation  of  ranks  and  titles:    Ex.  —  2)er  ^onig  t)on 

©ad^fen. 
(c)  To  avoid  a  series  of  genitives:    Ex.—'^ex  ^at)re§tag  toon  Sl^afe* 

fpearg  Xob  (not  be§  XobeS  S^afefpearg). 

I  1 9  The  relationship  as  expressed  by  tlOtt  +  dative  is  less  close 
than  that  of  the  genitive.  ^eutf(||lanb§  ^aifet  indicates  a  unity  of 
interest,  while  hit  St(il\tX  tlOtt  ^Cttt|(i^(tttttl  merely  expresses  the  title. 

II.    Partitive 

1 20  Denoting  the  whole,  from  which  a  part  is  taken, 
(a)  After  numbers— Qtoei  bet  <SoIbatett 

(6)  After  adjectives    denoting    quantity    (usually  plural)  —  tjtele, 
inancf)c,  fein,  etlic^e,  genug. 

Ex.—^eine^  bet  ftittbct  f^atte  eg  gcprt. 
(StUd^e  bet  Wdnntt  famen  gelaufen. 
These  adjectives  may  be  followed  by  the  noun  in  the  same  case,  as: 
^ein  ^inb  ^atte  e§  Qef)'6xt,    (Stlid^e  Wdnnet  famen  gelaufen. 

(c)  After  any    substantive  adjective,    especially  in    comparative 
and  superlative  degree. 

^ic  glitdEIic^ytc  bet  ^ttttfiftttueii. 

^et  (©lege  gottlic^fter  \\t  ha^  SSergeffcn. 

III.    Objective 

121  1.  After  verbs. — Certain  verbs  take  the  genitive  as  a  direct 

object.  These  verbs  originally  represented  the  action  as 
affecting  not  the  whole  but  only  a  part  of  the  object. 
Ex.—Qx  ttanl  ben  SSetn  =  He  drank  the  wine  (all  of  it).  (Sr 
tranf  be§  2Beine§  =  He  drank  of  the  wine  (some  of  it).  This 
use  of  the  genitive  is  decreasing  and  is  found  most  fre- 
quently in  elevated  discourse,  poetry,  etc.  In  ordinary 
speech  it  is  often  superseded  by  the  dative  or  accusative, 
used  directly  after  the  verb  or  with  a  preposition.  Follow- 
ing is  a  list  of  verbs  that  frequently  govern  the  genitive, 
together  with  permissible  substitutions. 


APPENDIX  271 

1 22  Representative  Verbs  with  Genitive  as  Sole  Object 
ad^ten=heed  (auf,  ace. )  gebenf en=think 
bebiirf en=need  (ace. )  genefen=give  birth  to 
6ege^ren=desire  (ace.)  ]^arren=wait  (auf,  ace.) 
E)rau(^en=need  (ace.)  iad)en=laugh  (iiber,  ace.) 
ben!en=think  (an,  ace.)  fc^onen=spare  (ace.) 
entbe^ren=lack  (ace.;  f|)Otten=mock  (iiber,  ace.) 

•  ertt)a:^nen=mention  (ace.)  t)erge[fen=forget  (ace.) 

fro^roc!en=exult  (iiber,  ace.)  n)arten=rule  (iiber,  ace.)         ^ 

tt)arten=wait  (auf,  ace.) 
Ex. — ©potte  feltter  uicf)t  (Do  not  make  sport  of  him). 
®ebenfe  meitt  (Think  of  me). 

1 23  Genitive  as  Secondary  Object 

A  number  of  verbs  are  followed  by  the  accusative  of  the  persoq 
and  the  genitive  of  the  thing.    Such  are : 

(a)  Verbs  denoting  separation  or  deprivation,  as : 
beraubcn=rob  cntlaften=relieve 

entt)eben=deprive  or  relieve  entleb{gen=exempt 

entfleiben=divest  entfe^en=dispossess 

entlaffen=dismiss  (au§,  dat.)  Uerttjeifen=banish  (au8,  dat.) 

Ex.—^ev  ^aifer  ent^ob  ben  ©eneror  feineS  %mit^. 

The  emperor  deprived  the  general  of  his  position. 
(&)  Verbs  denoting  accusation,  acquittal,  etc.,  as 

anflagen       befc^ulbigen       begiditigen       freifpred^en 
iibcrfiil^ren       iibernjcifen       geil^en 
Ex.—^et  9?ic^tcr  befdjulbigte  ben  aTJenfc^en  iie§  ^leBWtt. 
The  judge  accused  the  man  of  theft. 

124  Some  reflexives  take  the  genitive  as  secondary  object,  as' 

\[(i)  bemad)tigen  =  to  get  possession  of 

jicf)  bebienen  =  to  make  use  of 

fid^  entfinnen  =  to  recollect 

fid^  erinnern  =  to  remember 

fid^  ermel^ren  =  to  keep  from 

ftcfi  berfel^en  =  to  expect 

£!».— ®r  bentac^tigte  fid)  beg  Itinbeg. 

He  got  possession  of  the  child. 

(gr  !onnte  fic^  ber  Ubermttji^t  nid)t  ertuei^rctt. 
He  could  not  resist  the  superior  power. 


I 


272  APPENDIX 

125  2.  After  ad/ec^tves.— Adjectives  which  express  pow?er,  knowl- 

edge, plenty,   capacity,    and    their  opposites,    govern  the 

genitive,  as: 

Bar  =  bare  Icbtg  =  free 

bebilrftig  =  in  need  tnad^tig  =  able  to  control 

betuugt  =  conscious  miibe  =  tired 

Uo^  =  bare  quitt  =  done 

eingeben!  =  mindful  fatt  =  sated 

fret  =  free  fc^ulbig  =  guilty 

f  rol^  =  glad  fid^er  =  certain 

gebenf  =  mindful  t)oK  =  full 

gewfirtig  =  expectant  Wert  =  worth 

genji^  =  certain  tciirbig  =  worthy 

126  3.  After  prepositions. —  Certain  prepositions  always  govern 

the  genitive.     These  are : 

(a)  Old  noun  forms  which  have  acquired  a  prepositional  force — 

anftatt  =  instead  of  unterl^alb  =  beneath 

bie§feit(§)  =  on  this  side  of  urn toiHen  \ 

inf  olge  =  in  consequence  of  luegen               [  for  the  sake  of 

jenfeit(§)  =  on  that  side  of  l^alber              ) 

oberl^alb  =  above  tjermittefft  =  by  means  of 

fetten§  =  on  the  part  of  Dermoge  =  by  means  of 

tro^  =  in  spite  of  guf  olge  =  in  consequence  of 

(h)  Old  participles  which  have  acquired  a  prepositional  force — 
imbefc^abet  =  in  spite  of 
ungead^tet  =  notwithstanding 
njdl^renb  =  during 

(c)  Old  ad jectives— unf em  =  not  far,  untoeit  =  not  far. 

This  use  of  the  genitive  is  growing  less  frequent  in  spoken  Ger- 
man. Phrases  in  which  a  preposition  governs  the  dative  or  accusa- 
tive are  frequently  substituted. 

Ex.—Vintotit  beg  XorfcS  =  nic^t  weit  tion  bem  ^orfe. 

1 27  IV*  Adverbial  Genitive  (used  mainly  in  poetry). 

The  Adverbial  Genitive  is  used  like  any  adverb  to  express: 

PLACE  — ^e^t  gefie  jeber  feineS  ISSegeS  (Let  everyone  now  go 
his  way).    S)a§  ijt  beg  fittttbeg  nii)t  ber  S3rauc^  (That 
is  not  customary  in  this  land). 


APPENDIX  273 

128  TIME— (Indefinite)    XttgeS    5lrbeit,   9((tnt)3    ©afte    (during   the 

daytime,  work;    at  night,  guests).    @inc§  fc^onen 

XageS  (on  a  beautiful  day). 
For  definite  time  the  accusative  is  used :  bte^ett  9[benb  ging  er  a\x^. 
Instead  of  either,  conversational  German  employs  the  preposition  tttt 
with  the  dative :  ont  Xage,  an  biefem  5lbenb. 

1 29  (a)  MANNER— 9Jac^  nri  fa^r'  ic^  jie^cnbcn  iJufecg  (I  shall  proceed 

to  Uri  at  once),     ^c^  foge  e§  otteS  6rnf^cS  (I  say  it 
in  all  earnestness). 
(6)   CAUSE— ^ttngerS  fterben  (to  die  of  hunger). 
Related   to  the  adverbial  is  the  exclamatory   genitive:     D  iie§ 
ItnglitifUi^en  Xage§!    We  may  substitute:  ber  unglutflid)e  Xag!  or  iiber 
ben  nngliicf nd)cn  %clq  I 

1 30  DATIVE 

The  main  use  of  the  dative  is  that  of  the  indirect  object.  This 
must  be  regarded  in  a  rather  wide  sense,  in  which  the  dative  is  used 
to  represent  the  person  or  object  towards  whom  or  which  the  action 
is  directed,  or  from  whom  or  which  it  is  removed.  Hence  the  dative 
can  be  used  with : 

I.    Verbs 

II.    Adjectiyes  (Participles  and  Adverbsy 
III.    Prepositions 

131  I.    With  Yerbs 

1.  IMMEDIATE  object — Certain  verbs  which  in  English  take  accu- 

sative (many  impersonals  and  reflexives). 

2.  INDIRECT  object — designates  for  whom  the  action  is  done. 

3.  INTEREST — designates  the  person  for  whose  advantage  some- 

thing is  done. 

4.  ETHICAL — person  whose  feelings  are  concerned  in  the  action. 

5.  POSSESSIVE — showing  a  very  close  relationship. 

1 32  1.    IMMEDIATE  OBJECT 

Certain  classes  of  verbs  which  in  English  take  the  direct  object, 
in  German  govern  the  dative.  The  Germans  recognize  by  this  use 
a  distinction  between  the  action  which  affects  the  object  as  directly 
as  in  the  sentence  id^  f^ldgC  bi^,  and  that  which  represents  an 
approach  or  a  feeling  towards  it,  as :  ic^  nd^ere  ntic^  blr  and  id;  JianfC 
\^\X,    The  verbs  that  govern  the  dative  directly,  express: 


274  APPENDIX 

133  Approach    or   Departure:     as   an^toeidjen   (avoid),    begcgnen 

(meet),    fel^Ien   (lack),    folgen    (follow  or  obey),   nad^geben 
(yield),  nal^en  (approach). 

Ex.  — gr  tuid)  bcm  Sf tttbc  au§. 

He  avoided  the  enemy. 
@§  fel^It  mix  an  bent  S^Zotigften. 

I  am  in  lack  of  the  most  necessary  things. 
S)ie  ajJutter  gibt  bem  ftinbe  su  \e\)x  nac^. 

The  mother  yields  to  the  child  too  much. 

1 34  Similarity  or  Identity :   gteid^en,  ai^neln,  or  o^nlid^  fcl^en  (to 

resemble),  ent[|) redden  (to  correspond). 

Ex.—dx  a^nelt  fettter  Mntttt,  or  er  fie^t  feiner  SJJutter  a^nlid^. 
He  resembles  his  mother. 
S)o§  ent[^rid)t  nic^t  bett  ^atftti^ctt. 
That  does  not  correspond  to  the  facts. 
S)u  gleicfift  bcm  @cift,  ben  bu  begreifft,  nirfjt  mlr. 
You  resemble  the  spirit  that  you  comprehend,  not  me. 

135  Appurtenance:  angel^oren  and  gel^oren  (belong),   gebiil^rcn  (to 

be  owing  to),  gegiemen  (to  be  proper),  itberla[fen  (to  leave  to), 
5uf  ommen  (to  be  due  to). 

E'ic.— 2)iefe  e^re  gebii^rt  i^m  nid^t. 

This  honor  does  not  befit  him. 
S)a§  iiberlaffen  toir  beittem  ©utai^tett. 

We  leave  that  to  your  judgment, 
liefer  9?ang  fomntt  tntr  nitf)t  ju. 

I  am  not  entitled  to  this  rank. 

136  Inclination   or   Repulsion:    bel^agen  (to  suit),    gefallcn    (to 

please),  l^ulbigen  (to  pay  homage  to),  ftjiberftel^en  (to  resist), 
giirncn  (to  rage  at),  gufagen  (to  suit). 

iJoj.— 2)a§  SBettcr  gefallt  m\t  ^ar  nid^t. 

The  weather  does  not  please  me  at  all. 
8ie  l^ulbigen  bcr  Siitttgltt. 

They  pay  homage  to  the  queen. 
®a§  ^attS  fagt  mir  gu. 

The  house  suits  me. 

137  Utility  and   its  Opposite:    beiftel^en   (assist),    bicncit  (serve), 

nii^en  (benefit),  ^elfen    (help),  [d^aben  (injure),  Untcc^t  tun 
(do  wrong), 


APPENDIX  275 

Ex.— (Bin  guter  SO^enfc^  ftel^t  tim  ^vmm  bei. 
A  good  man  succors  the  poor. 

^a§  fc^ttjere  SBerf  ift  t|m  gelungcn. 
He  succeeded  in  the  diflacult  task. 

Tlan  foU  fctttCtt  Jliiti^ftett  nid)t  Unred^t  tun. 
One  ought  not  to  wrong  one's  neighbors. 

138  An  Attitude  of  Receptivity  and  Obedience  (and  the  opposite): 

folgen,  ge^ord^en,  laufd^en,  ju'^oren,  bci' jtintmen,  banfen,  tpiber* 
fpre'cfien. 

£Jr.— Einber  foUen  iieti  ©Item  gel^ord^en. 

Children  should  obey  their  parents. 
3)ic  3u^orer  ^aben  bcm  9tetiner  bcigeftimmt. 

The  audience  agreed  with  the  speaker. 
e§  i[t  unpflid),  dlteren  ^tuitn  S"  hJtberfprec^cn. 

It  is  impolite  to  contradict  older  people. 

139  Impersonals  with  the  Dative 

eS  a^nt  mir  =  I  have  a  presentiment 

cS  efelt  mir  =  I  am  disgusted 

e§  gelingt  mir  =  I  succeed    : 

c8  bel^agt  mir  =  It  suits  me 

c§  gefant  mir  =  It  suits  me 

e§  graut  mir  =  I  have  a  horror  of 

c8  liegt  mir  an  =  I  care 

c2  fcf)tt)inbeU  mir  =  I  am  dizzy 

eg  fdjeint  mir  =  It  seems  to  me 

e2  tut  mir  leib  =  I  am  sorry 

c8  tut  mir  ttje:^  =  It  hurts  me 

140  After  Reflexive  Verbs 

Some  reflexive  verbs  take  the  dative  as  secondary  object. 
fid)  ergeben  =  to  submit 
fic^  f iigen  =  to  yield 
\id)  na^ern  =  to  approach 
fid)  n)iberfe|en  =  to  resist 

£ic— er  fiigt  ftc^  meittcr  5(ttoriinttttfi. 

He  yields  to  my  arrangements. 
^  ©ie  ttJiberfefet  ftd^  felnem  Sefep. 

She  resists  his  command. 


276  APPENDIX 

141  2.    INDIRECT  OBJECT 

The  indirect  object  shows  to  or  for  whom  the  action  is  performed. 
It  is  found  after  the  verbs  of  giving,  communicating,  showing,  com- 
manding, taking,  etc. 

Ex.— ^6:)  gebe  btr  ba§  93u(^  (I  give  you  the  book).  ®r  ergai^It  t^m 
bie  @efd)ic^te  (He  tells  him  the  story).  ®r  na^m  i^m  fein  re|te§  @ut  (He 
took  his  last  possession  from  him).  ^6)  geige  l^m  ben  red^ten  28eg  (I 
show  him  the  right  way).  @r  gebot  i^m  gu  fc^n?eigen  (He  commanded 
him  to  be  silent. 

Sometimes  the  dative  expresses  the  object  of  the  prefix  of  the 
verb  — ^rf)  lege  "ba^  @elb  bem  S3riefe  bei  (I  enclose  the  money  in  the 
letter).  Here  bem  S3riefe  is  the  object  of  bei  and  ©elb  is  the  object  of 
the  entire  verb. 

I  42  3.    INTEREST  OR  ADVANTAGE 

SBie  gel^t  e§  ^j^nen?  (How  are  you  ?  How  goes  the  world  for  you  ?) 
2Rtr  ift  afleS  ein§  (It  is  all  one  to  me),  ^c^  beforge  t^m  bie[e§  ©efc^aft 
(I  attend  to  this  business  for  him).  3Ktr  gefd)ie!^t  red)t  (It  serves  me 
right);  and  many  of  the  impersonals  mentioned  in  section  139). 

I  43  4.    ETHICAL  DATIVE 

This  dative  is  very  difficult  to  translate.  It  represents  the  person 
whose  mental  interest  in  the  action  is  solicited.  Ex. — 'S^len  2Ipfel  fcf)iefet 
ber  SSater  bir  t)ont  SSaum  (Father  will  shoot  an  apple  off  the  tree,  if  you 
want  him  to).  9Jiac^t  niir  nur  feine  folc^en  ©efd)id;ten  me^r  (Don't,  I  beg 
of  you,  perform  any  more  such  tricks). 

I  44  5.    POSSESSIVE  DATIVE 

In  speaking  of  parts  of  the  body,  or  of  anything  very  closely 
related  to  the  person,  as  honor,  life,  home,  friends,  etc.,  we  often  use 
the  definite  article  instead  of  the  possessive  pronoun  and  express  the 
idea  of  appurtenance  by  the  dative. 

Ex.—%ti  SBinb  bla[t  iltr  ben  ^Vii  bom  ^o|3f  (The  wind  is  blowing 
your  hat  from  your  head).     ^Ci\6)t  bit  bie  ^(ittbc  (Wash  your  hands). 

145  II.    With  Adjectives 

Adjectives  (participles  and  adverbs)  govern  the  dative  in  cases 
where  the  meaning  is  similar  to  the  verbs  (cf.  133  to  138)  that  gov- 
ern the  dative,  i.e.,  approach,  similarity,  inclination,  utility,  obedience, 
and  their  opposites:  na^e  (near),  feme  (far),  a^nlic^  (similar),  l^olb  and 
gut  (kindly  disposed),  nii^lic^  (useful),  ge^orfam  (obedient). 

Ex.—^xn  9Kdbd)en  in  ber  S3urg  \\i  mxx  I^olb  [or  gut]  (A  maid  of  the 
castle  is  fond  of  me). 


APPENDIX  277 

III.    With  Prepositions 
f  46      Certain  prepositions  always  govern  the  dative. 
ah  =  away  from  nad)  =  after 

au§  =  out  of  md}\i  =  next  to 

au§er  =  outside  of  (except)  neb[t  =  besides 

bei  =  near  or  with  famt  =  together  with 

binnen  =  within  feit  =  since 

cntgegen  =  towards  t)on  =  from 

gegeniiber  =  opposite  5U=:to 

tnit  =  with  guttjiber  =  against 

1 47  Prepositions  which  denote  either  position  or  transition  govern 

the  dative  when  the  verb  does  not  express  motion  towards 
the  object,  i.e.,  when  the  phrase  answers  the  question  tOO  ? 
These  prepositions  are : 
an  =  at  ncbcn  =  beside 

ouf  =  upon  iiber  =  over 

l^inter  =  behind  itnter  =  under 

in  =  in  t)or  =  before 

5h)ifrf)en  =  between 
Ex. — Ace.     (5r  ge^t  an  belt  X\\^  (He  goes  up  to  the  table). 
Dat.     er  \tc\):  an  bcm  Zi\^  (He  stands  at  the  table). 

1 48  ACCUSATIVE 

I.    Direct    Object    of   Transitive   Verb    (many    impersonals    and 
reflexives). 

(  (a)  Two  Nouns; 
II.    Double  Accusative  i  {b)  Factitive; 

(  (c)  Noun  and  Infinitive. 

III.  Cognate  Accusative  (intransitive  verb). 

IV.  Adverbial. 
V.    Absolute. 

VI.    With  Prepositions. 

I.    Direct  Object 

149  Transitive  verbs  take  the   direct   object    in  the   accusative 

case  — er  fj^tefet  tictt  ®oliittten. 
i50  Verbs  that  are  intransitive  ir  their  simple  form  are  some- 
times made  transitive  by  a  prefix  which  limits  or  directs 
the  meaning  — ;5(^  tttttttJOrtc  btr  auf  bie  forage;  ic^  bcttttt* 
ttJOrte  Die  3^rage.  ^c^  banfe  bir;  ic^  htHntt  mx^  bei  bir.  ^6) 
f olfie  bent  9?at ;  ic^  befolge  ^^n  diaU 


278  APPENDIX 

151  Certain  impersonals  (mostly  representing  a  physical  state) 
take  the  accusative. 

e§  biinft  m\6)  (also  c§  bilnft  mir)  I  think 

e§  biirftet  mid^  I  am  thirsty 

c8  efelt  mid^  an  (but  e§  efelt  mir  bat)or)  I  am  disgusted 

e§  friert  mid)  I  am  cold 

e§  l^ungert  mid^  I  am  hungry 

e§  fd^ldfert  mid^  I  am  sleepy 
In  many  of  these,  the  eS  is  often  omitted  and  the  accusative  placed 

first,  as  though  it  were  the  subject,  i.e.,  mic^  l^ungert,  biirftet,  fc^liifert, 

etc. 

1 52  Reflexive  verbs  take  the  direct  object  in  the  accusative. 

^d)  \d)ame  ttttii^  I  am  ashamed 

^^  freue  mtr^  I  rejoice 

^d)  furrfjte  tnii!^  I  am  afraid 

^6)  erinnere  mld^  I  remember 

^6)  fe^ne  tlttd^  I  long 

^d)  befinne  mid^  I  recollect 

II.    Double  Accusative 

f  53  Some  verbs  take  two  accusatives,  the  person  affected  and  the 
thing  produced. 

154  The  second  object  may  be  a  noun,  or  pronoun,  as:  Sef)re  tJlC 
8(^ttlcr  iiie  ttjo^tc  2Bei§|eit.    ^c^  frage  eg  iitri^. 

155  When  the  object  is  the  result  of  the  action,  it  is  called /ac^i- 
tive,  i.  e. ,  (£r  nennt  i^n  eiuett  bttmmett  Sungett,  Verbs  which  take  this 
construction  are :   nennen,  ^ei^en  (to  call),  fc^tmpf en,  [d)elten,  tauf en. 

1 56  The  secondary  object  may  be  an  infinitive  (without  jtt).  ^d) 
pre  l^tt  flnfien.  Verbs  capable  of  this  construction  are :  pren,  fe^en, 
finben,  (e^ren,  (ernen,  l^ei^en  (to  command),  laffen. 

III.    Cognate  Accusative 

I  57  Intransitive  verbs  may  have  an  object  that  expresses  the  idea  of 

the  action  in  the  form  of  the  noun.     Sometimes  the  two  are  formed 

from  the  same  root :    (St  ttdumt  einen  f d^onen  Xraum. 

er  lebt  ein  gotttic^eS  ficBen. 

Sometimes  merely  synonymous  in  meaning: 

©r  \iixU  einen  [c^onen  Xob. 


APPENDIX  ,  279 

^  TIME 

IV.    Adverbial  Accusatiye  <  measure 

(  DISTRIBUTION 

1 58  Like  the  genitive,  the  accusative  may  express  certain  adverbial 
relations. 

159  TIME— The '  accusative   expresses   a   definite   time,    as    btefett 

Witnti  toav  ex  auSgegangen;  or  duration  of  time,  as  liett  gattfl 
jm  Xag  blieb  er  gu  ^aufc.  [Note  that  the  genitive  expresses 
indefinite  or  habitual  time;  cf.  128  (b).] 

160  PLACE— eJel^e  ticinm  ffiJcg,  bctt  giuft  l^inab. 

1 6  1  MEASURE — After  certain  adjectives  that  express  size,  weight, 
or  quantity,  the  accusative  is  used  to  designate  the  amount, 
i.e. ,  2)a§  ^aftcfjen  ift  ctnett  ^off  ^o6).  (£g  ttjiegt  gtucl  ^funb. 
®ag  ipeer  ift  toufenb  aRann  ftarf.* 

1 62  DISTRIBUTION— ®§  !oftct  f unf  Xaler  ben  3Rctct. 

♦  In  the  accusative  of  measure  the  noun  is  used  without  inflection,  giving  the 
appearance  of  the  singular  form— 4  ^funb  ^affec,  7  QoU  ifod),  3  2)U|enb. 
In  the  neuter  nouns  this  is  the  old  form  of  the  plural,  the  masculines  and  femi- 
nmes  follow  by  analogy. 

V.    Absolute  Accusative 

1 63  More  frequently  than  the  nominative  the  accusative  is  used 
vvrithout  grammatical  connection,  for  the  purpose  of  vivid  description. 

©r  ging  l^inauS,  ben  fto)if  ^od^  er^oben. 

VI.    With  Prepositions 

1 64  Certain  prepositions  always  govern  the  accusative.  They  are; 
burc^  (through),  um  (around),  ol^nc  (without),  bi§  (until),  fiir  (for),  gegen 
(against),  ttJtber  (against).  Prepositions  denoting  both  position  and 
transition  govern  the  accusative  when  motion  towards  an  object  is 
implied  (cf.  147). 

A       i  SBol^ttt  ift  er  gegangen?="Where  did  he  go? 

■  i  @r  ijt  in  iia0  ^ttU§  gegangen=He  went  into  the  house. 

jN       j  2Bo  i[t  cr  gett)efen?=Where  has  he  been  ? 

*  (  @r  ift  In  bcm  ^aufc  gen)cfen=He  has  been  in  the  house. 


280  APPENDIX 

PRONOUNS 

Personal 

I  65  USE  OF  btt  AND  ®lc 

^tt  is  the  natural  form  of  address  and  is  used  whenever  no  con- 
ventional restraints  are  felt,  as  is  the  case  when  we  address  animals, 
children,  members  of  the  family,  or  very  intimate  friends,  and  in 
prayer.  (©tC  (really  third  person  plural)  is  used  in  all  conventional 
conversation,  both  in  singular  and  plural. 

Ex.—^axi,  gib  mir  bettt  33u(^!    (SJott,  tuir  banfen  ^ir  fiir  beine 
@nabe ! 

©eben  ©ie  mir  ^:^re  ^anb!    Segen  6ie  aHe  ^^xc  SSiic^er  nieber! 

1 66  Demonstrative 

The  demonstrative  pronoun  is  often  used  in  German  where,  in 
English,  we  would  employ  the  personal.— ^c^  fe{)e  ^axl,  ber  f  ommt  gerabc 
red)t  (I  see  Charles,  he  is  just  in  time).  The  demonstrative  pronoun 
produces  greater  stress  and  emphasizes  the  relation  to  the  preceding 
word.  The  only  difference  between  a  demonstrative  clause,  such  as 
the  above,  and  the  relative  clause  is  in  the  order  of  words,  which, 
however,  changes  the  emphasis :  ^(i)  fe Je  ^axl,  bcr  gerabe  rec^t  f ommt 
fj.  see  Charles,  who  is  just  in  time).     This  is  much  less  emphatic. 

1 67  The  demonstrative  \i\t\tV  is  used  for  the  latter,  and  Jencr  for 

the  former. 

Ex.~Wax\e  imb  i^re  SlJJutter  finb  im  Garten,  biefc  mit  ^df)en,  jjene 

init  (Spielen  befdjoftigt  (Mary  and  her  mother  are  in  the  garden, 

the  latter  busied  with  sewing,  the  former  with  playing. ) 

Occasionally,  to  avoid  ambiguity,  the  demonstratives  berfelbe,  ber- 

jenige  are  used.    Ex.—'^a^  S3uc^  liegt  in  hex  S^ahe,  ber  2)erfel  be^felben  ift 

aufgefd^Iagen.    But  this  somewhat  stilted  form  is  usually  avoided. 

1 68  Relative 

The  relatives  bet  and  tuell^et  do  not  differ  in  meaning,  ^ct 
is  used  more  frequently ;  good  writers  use  toclli^Ct  to  avoid  a  weari- 
some repetition  of  ber.  Ex- — X\t,  tOtl^t  tcf)  gefefjen,  instead  of  bte,  bie 
ic^  gefe^en,  although  the  latter  also  is  often  used.  The  genitive  of 
tceld^er,  U)el(ipe§,  is  not  used  relatively,  except  in  comparatively  rare 
cases  in  which  the  pronoun  is  used  adjectively,  as :  Si^elli^e§  SDianne^ 
©oI)n  er  and)  fei  (No  matter  whose  son  he  be).  But  here  the  word  may 
be  considered  as  interrogative.  For  the  relative  toMt&  we  now 
substitute  beffeil  (the  genitive  of  ber).  S)er  ajJann,  beffett  ©o^n  ©ie 
f ennen  (The  man  whose  son  you  know). 

169  9Ber  and  tuag  as  relatives 

The  indefinite  toer  is  used  as  a  relative  in  tKe  following  cases: 
(a)  When  it  includes  both  antecedent  and  relative :  9Ber  nic^t  ^oren 

tDxU,  tnu§  fitt)Ien  (Whoever  will  not  obey,  must  suffer). 
(6)  Indirect  question:  ^<i)  tt)ei§  m6)t,  mx  e^  iff. 


APPENDIX  281 

f  70     The  indefinite  ttiaS  may  be  used  (instead  of  ba8)  after  ottc§, 
ttld^tS,    etttlttg,    bag,  and  the  indefinite   adjectives,    tttterlcl,    tllclerlel, 
mtttlii^erlet,  and  any  other  neuter  adjective  used  indefinitely ;  as,  bttS' 
®Utt,  JlttS  SJcfte,  etc.     2Ba§  also  represents  an  antecedent  clause. 

Ex.—'$iUe^,  bia§  id)  t)abe,  fte^t  bit  §ur  SSerfiigung  (All  that  I  have 
is  at  your  disposal)  ®r  fa^  feine  (5i)ulb  etn,  tiia§  aber  nic^tS  mef)r 
gut  mad^te  (He  recognized  his  fault,  which  fact,  however,  did  not 
mend  affairs. 

Pronouns  with  Prepositions 
1 7  I       When  demonstratives  and  relatives  as  objects  of  prepositions 
refer  to  animals  or  things,  they  are  usually  compounded  with  the 
preposition,  the  pronouns  being  reduced  to  ba(r),*  ttlO(r),*  respectively. 
Demonstrative       babei,  barin,  baburd^,  baneben,  etc. 
Relative  tootjon,  ttjobet,  tooburd^,  wotan,  hjorin,  etc. 

Ex.—(Sx  l^atte  jtnei  ^ferbe,  tt)Ot)on  tia^  eine  \d)tDav^,  ta^  anbere  toeife  ttat. 
♦The  r  is  inserted  to  keep  two  vowels  apart 

1 72  Xa  may  point  forward  to  a  following  clause  or  phrase: 

(Sr  tDarb  baburd^  bcleibtgt,  t>a%  t^n  niemanb  bemerfte. 

He  was  offended  at  nobody's  noticing  him. 
@S  lag  i^m  nid)t§  baran,  ettoaS  gu  berbtenen. 

1 73  ^atnit  may  be  either  the  compound  {demonstr.  -f  mlt)  or  a 
conjunction  introducing  a  clause  of  purpose. 

@r  !^at  ba§  ^elb;  batnit  tann  man  t)iele3  anfangcn. 

He  has  money;  with  it  one  can  do  much. 
dt  Derbicnt  ta^  ®clb,  bamit  cr  ettoaS  an[angen  tann. 

He  earns  money  in  order  to  be  able  to  accomplish  something. 

1 74  ^(l  and  tbO  are  also  contracted  with  the  adverbs  l^in  (thither) 
and  |ct  (hither)  to  form  demonstrative  and  relative  compounds. 
These  compounds  may  be  used  as  subordinate  conjunctions. 

@r  ge^t  ba^ltt,  ttiol^cr  feinc  SSorfal^ren  gefommen  finb. 

He  goes  to  the  place  whence  his  ancestors  came. 
SBo  bu  bij"t,  ba^irt  toiU  id)  and)  gef)en. 

Where  you  are,  thither  will  I  go  also. 

175  The  prepositions  l^alb  and  tuegCtt  are  compounded  with  the 
genitives  of  the  demonstrative  and  relative  pronoun,  forming  beSi^alb, 
be^tOPfiCn^  tbeSl^alb,  tocStiJefietl,  which  are  used  as  causative  conjunctions. 

(kt  Wax  Ixant,  be^^db  blieb  ex  ju  |>aufe. 

He  was  sick,  therefore  he  stayed  at  home, 
©r  war  franf,  ttieS^alb  er  §u  ^aufe  blicb. 

He  was  sick,  for  which  reason  he  stayed  at  home. 


Tenses 


Past  Time  <  perfect  tense 


282  APPENDIX 

VERBS 

Mode 

INDICATIVE— Statement  of  fact. 
cSZtionI^  i  statement  of  a  supposition. 
IMPERATIVE— Command. 
INFINITIVE — General  statement  of  the  action. 

Indicative 

176      Direct  statements  or  questions  are  expressed  in  the  indic- 
ative mode. 

1.  Present  Time — present  tense 

preterite  tense 
perfect  tense 
pluperfect  tense 

I  3.  Future  Time  }  ^^^^®  *^"f  \  , 

I  future  perfect  tense 

1.  Present  Time 
(a)  To  express  an  action  taking  place  at  the  time—^d)  gc|c  je^t  aug. 
(6)  To  express  a  general  truth— ^etcn  Ifi  ©ilber,  (Sc^tueigen  ifi  ©olb, 

(c)  To  express  a  very  vivid  future— WtoxQen  ge|t  er  fort  (To-morrow- 
he  will  go  away). 

(d)  To  express  a  state  of  affairs  beginning  in  the  past  and  con- 
tinued in  the  present  (expressed  in  English  by  the  perfect 
tense)— ^d^  bin  je^t  gtoet  ^al^re  in  ©l^icago  (I  have  now  been  two 
years  in  Chicago). 

In  German  ^6)  Bin  JhJei  ;^alf)re  in  ©l^tcago  Qettiefen  vt^ould  mean,  I 
was  in  Chicago  for  two  years.  Such  a  use  of  the  perfect  indicates 
a  cessation  of  the  action  or  condition  in  the  present,  hence:  er  i)at 
gelebt  =  he  is  dead. 

(e)  To  express  a  very  vivid  imperative  —  ®ic  ^ontgin  fprad)  junt 
$agen:  2)u  Xm\\i  einmal  unb  |oIfi  mir  ben  S3eutel  gum  ©^iele. 

This  use  of  the  present  indicates  that  the  speaker  is  very  sure  that 
the  order  will  be  carried  out. 

(/)  Historical  present  for  very  vivid  past  descriptions — ^ann  mat* 
fii^lert  "^(^i^  §eer  im  rafd^en  %tmpo  weiter  unb  jeber  ©olbat  fji^U  fid^ 
gel^oben  (Then  the  army  marched  on  at  a  rapid  pace  and  every 
soldier  felt  himself  uplifted). 


APPENDIX  283 

(  Preterite 
2.  Past  TimeK  Perfect 

(  Pluperfect 

1 77  Past  time  may  be  expressed  by  the  preterite,  the  perfect,  the 
pluperfect,  according  as  the  action  is  considered  as  absolutely  or  rela^ 
tively  past.  If  a  simple  statement  of  a  fact  that  has  taken  place  in  the 
past  is  made  without  any  reference  to  an  accompanying  fact,  it  is 
more  usual  to  employ  the  perfect  tense. 

^c^  Bin  geftern  bort  QctDCfen  (I  was  there  yesterday). 
^d)  f^aht  bag  gefagt  (I  said  that). 
If  this  is  limited  by  some  other  fact,  the  preterite  is  preferable: 

21I§  er  in§  3^1""^^^^  txat,  gtttft  fein  S3ruber  l^inauS. 
When  he  stepped  into  the  room,  his  brother  went  out. 
This  rule  is  not  absolute,  as  the  best  writers  show  great  divergence 
of  use,  but  it  will  be  found  a  safe  working  basis. 

The  pluperfect  tense  represents  an  action  that  has  occurred  previ- 
ous to  some  other  past  event — 

®r  ^tttte  fc^on  fein  Sdud)  tmrd^gelefeu,  e^e  ber  Scorer  lam. 
He  had  read  his  book  through  before  the  teacher  came. 

8.  Future  and  Future  Perfect 

1 78  The  simple  future  tense  is  used  (as  in  English)  to  express  an 
event  about  to  take  place  from  the  standpoint  of  the  present- 
er ttiirii  morgen  fommen. 

179  The  future  perfect  expresses  an  event  completed  from  the 
point  of  view  of  the  future— 

©r  tolrb  big  ba^in  %ttommtn  fein  (By  that  time  he  will  have  come). 
For  the  future  we  may  substitute  the  present  [cf .  1 76  (c)].     For  the 
future  perfect  we  may  substitute  the  perfect— 

S3i§  ba^in  ifi  er  fdjon  (jefommen. 
These  substitutions  give  a  greater  vividness. 

The  future  and  future  perfect  have  an  idiomatic  use  to  indicate 
probability — 

eg  mirb  njo]§t  tier  U^r  feitt. 

It  is  probably  four  o'clock, 
©g  toirb  tuag  anbereg  tt)o:^l  ht'^tutti  l^aBen. 

It  probably  meant  something  else. 
SBo  ttiirb  er  bie  ^aci)t  jugebrttt^t  ^aftm  ? 
Where  can  he  have  spent  the  night  ? 


284  APPENDIX 

Subjnnctive 

1 80  The  subjunctive,  in  contrast  to  the  indicative,  expresses  not  a 
fact  but  a  thought,  often  a  thought  for  the  truth  of  which  the  speaker 
assumes  no  responsibility. 

KINDS  OF  SUBJUNCTIVE 

I.    Snpposition. 

(a)  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE. 
(6)  CONDITION  (UNREAL), 
(c)    DOUBT. 

II.    Desire. 

(a)    UNFULFILLED. 

(  COMMAND, 
(6)     POSSIBLY  FULFILLED    \  PRAYER  AND  WISH, 

(  CONCESSIVE. 

I.    Supposition 

(a)  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 
1 8  I  This  use  of  the  subjunctive  occurs  most  frequently  and  must 
be  carefully  studied.  It  is  used  after  verbs  of  saying,  wishing,  think- 
ing, feeling,  asking ^  etc.,  whenever  the  quoted  sentence  is  not  stated 
^s  a  positive  fact.  Thus  we  say,  (5r  glaubte,  W^  e0  ric^ttg  fei  (He 
thought  it  was  right),  but  @r  tru^te,  ba§  e§  rid)tig  torir  (He  knew  it 
was  right),  because  in  the  second  sentence  is  implied  the  actuality 
of  the  fact. 

182  The  conjunction  bttft  is  frequently  omitted  in  ordinary  con- 
versation. In  that  case  the  order  becomes  normal,  and  the  sub- 
junctive mode  is  used  to  show  the  indirect  discourse. 

Ex.—^x  tDu^te,  c§  fci  tt)a^r. 

Tense  Use  of  Indirect  Discourse 

1 83  In  ail  uses  of  the  subjunctive  tenses  we  find  a  weak  sense  of 
time.  The  various  tenses  are  used  to  express  a  variety  of  relationship 
of  the  speaker  towards  the  thought  expressed.  In  indirect  discourse, 
the  tense  of  the  quoted  sentence  has  no  dependence  upon  that  of  the 
leading  verb,  i.  e. ,  there  is  no  sequence  of  tense  as  in  Latin.  Each  tense 
of  the  indirect  discourse  may  correspond  with  the  tense  of  the 
direct  quotation,  except  in  the  preterite.  The  preterite,  as  shown  in  the 
paradigm  (cf.  62,  p.  2.)  has,  in  many  instances,  crept  into  the  present, 
to  take  the  place  of  those  present  forms  which,  because  of  similar- 
ity with  the  present  indicative,  have  lost  their  subjunctive  force. 
Thus  the  preterite  subjunctive  has  lost  the  significance  of  past  time 
and  stands  for  the  present.  For  the  preterite  we  use  the  perfect  in 
indirect  discourse. 


APPENDIX 


285 


1 84     Hence  we  may  have  the  following  correspondence 


Direct  Quotation 

Indicative 

Present  tense 

Preterite  tense 
Perfect  tense 
Pluperfect  tense 
Future  tense 
Future  Perfect  tense 


Indirect  Quotation 

Subjunctive 
(  Present  tense 
■j  or 

(Preterite  tense 

Perfect  tense 

Perfect  tense 

Pluperfect  tense 

Future  tense 

Future  Perfect  tense 


This  shifting  has  tended  still  further  to  weaken  the  sense  of  time 
in  the  tenses,  so  that  good  authors  use  present  and  preterite,  perfect 
and  pluperfect,  future  and  conditional,  interchangeably  to  avoid 
wearisome  repetition,  without  any  feeling  of  difference  in  time. 

Examples 


Direct 

Indirect 

(  fic^e  ) 

^t  ge^t  ^eim 

6r  -J     or     ■  ^eim 

(  fiinfie) 

^^  fitttg  ^cim                  J 

(  ^P^  ) 

(£r  ifi  ^eim  gegangen        !■ 

©r  -j    or      ()cim  gegangen 

er  ttittr  ^eim  gegangen     ) 

(ttittrc) 

er  ttiirb  l^eim  ge^cn 

(5r  mettle  ^eim  gel^en 

er  ttiirb  ^eim  gegaitgctt  feiit 

er  merbc  ^eim  %t%m^tn  feitt 

When  the  present  subjunctive  is  identical  in  form  with  the  present 
indicative,  or  similar  in  sound,  the  preterite  subjunctive  is  to  be  pre- 
ferred.   This  is  always  true  in  the  1st  person  singular  and  in  the  plural. 

iNDic— ^d^  ^abe  t)a^  93u(^.  Subj.— (Jr  fagt,  ta^  \^  bag  S3u(^  f^dite 
(not  l^ttBe).  Indic— 2Btr  ^aben  ha^  93u(^.  Subj.— ©r  fagt,  ba^  n)ir  ha^ 
^VLii)  J^iittCtt  (not  |akn).    For  insertion  or  omission  of  tittfe  cf.  182. 

(b)    UNREAL  CONDITION 

1 85  This  levelling  out  of  all  difference  in  meaning  between  present 
and  preterite,  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  has  not  extended  to 
the  other  uses  of  the  subjunctive.  On  the  contrary,  there  is  here  a 
very  sharply  drawn  distinction  in  meaning. 

1 86  The  present  and  perfect  are  used  for  the  expression  of  thoughts 
which  may  be  true  to  actual  facts ;  the  preterite  and  pluperfect  for 
suppositions  which  are  known  to  be  unreal.  This  is  illustrated  in 
unreal  conditions. 


286  APPENDIX 

Present  time        =       Preterite  subj. 
Past  time  =       Pluperfect  subj. 

Ex.—^enn  i^  ein  SSoglein  toiit',  flog'  id^  3U  bir. 
If  I  were  a  bird,  I  should  fly  to  you. 
aSenn  id^  ein  SSoglein  %mt\tn  ttrire,  ttiire  i^  gu  bir  geffogm. 
If  I  had  been  a  bird,  I  should  have  flown  to  you. 

1 87  In  place  of  the  subjunctive  in  the  apodosis,  the  conditional 
mode  may  be  used  (cf.  paradigm  63). 

Ex.—fS^enn  i^  ein  SSoglein  toare,  toiitrtie  \^  s^  bir  fliegett. 

SSenn  icf)  ein  SSoglein  gettJefen  ttjare,  tuittbe  id)  ju  bir  geflogett  fclit. 

1 88  The  ttientt  may  be  omitted,  in  which  case  the  order  is  inverted : 
SBiire  idi  ein  SSoglein. 

1 89  A  real  condition  is  a  statement  of  fact,  hence  is  expressed  by 
the  indicative:  SSenn  e§  tt^ntt,  tttmmt  man  einen  3fiegen[cf)irm  (When- 
ever it  rains,  one  takes  an  umbrella). 

1 90  Occasionally  one  of  the  two  parts  of  the  condition  is  made  espe- 
cially vivid  by  being  placed  in  the  indicative:  Wlit  biefem  $feil  tutrd^^ 
fd^O^  i^  (Sud^,  ttJenn  id^  mein  liebeS  ^inb  getroffen  t)dtte  (With  this  arrow 
I  should  have  shot  you,  if  I  had  hit  my  beloved  child). 

(c)     DOUBT 

1 9  I  After  nU  oh  (as  though)  —closely  related  to  the  conditional 
subjunctive  —  @r  \at}  au§,  al8  ob  er  ein  Unred^t  Ibegangen 
l^dtte  (He  looked  as  though  he  had  done  a  wrong).  (£r  tat 
alg  fd^Uefe  er  (He  acted  as  though  he  slept). 

192  Dubitative  or  Diplomatic  (also  known  as  subjunctive  of 
weakened  assertion),  i.e.,  a  modest  statement  of  a  fact 
which,  by  being  put  into  the  subjunctive,  receives  a  ten- 
tative air,  as  though  the  speaker  were  open  to  conviction 
on  the  subject.  (This  may  be  considered  a  part  of  an 
unreal  condition. ) 

Ex.—  ^d)  bac^te  boc^  =  I  should  really  suppose 

^\6)i  ha^  id)  ttJiifeie  =  Not  that  I  am  aware  of 

^d)  moc^te  njo^t  =  I  should  like 

^6)  pttc  e2  lieber  =  I  should  prefer 

®§  ware  too^l  an  ber  3ctt  =  It  is  about  time 

2)a§  biirfte  gef al^rlic^  fein  =  That  might  be  considered  dangerous 

28er  toilfete  t)a§  nicf)t?  =  Who  doesn't  know  that  ? 

2Ba§  l^atte  ic^  gu  fiirc^ten?  =  Of  what  should  I  be  afraid  ? 

2)a§  toaxe  tt)a^r?  =  Could  that  be  true  ? 

©ie  l^attc  ba^  fietan?  =  I  cannot  believe  that  she  has  done  that 


APPENDIX  287 


II.    Desire 


f  93  The  difference  in  meaning  between  the  present  and  preterite, 
perfect  and  pluperfect  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  (cf.  186)  is  further 
illustrated  in  the  subjunctive  of  Desire. 

1 94  A  desire  may  be  of  two  kinds : 

r  ,/»„       ^  j  Preterite  subj, 
(a)  Impossible  of  fulfillment  |  pluperfect  subj. 

(6)  Possible  of  fulfillment— Present  subj, 
Ex.^{a)  SSenn  er  hod)  noc^  am  fieben  ttJire  I 
Oh,  that  he  were  still  alive! 
SSenn  er  t)oc^  nod^  einige  ^diixe  gelcBt  f^Uit  I 
Oh,  that  he  had  lived  a  few  years  longer 
As  in  case  of  the  conditional  subjunctive  (cf.  §  188)  the  ttJeittl  may 
be  omitted  and  the  order  become  inverted:    Wdtt  er  boci^  nod^  am 
Seben !    §dtte  er  borf)  itoc^  einige  ^a!^re  gcIcBt ! 

(&)  Desire  that  is  expected  to  be  fulfilled. 

195  1.  COMMAND— 1st  and  3d  person. 

2.  PRAYER  OR  WISH— 1st  and  3d  person. 

3.  CONCESSIVE. 

1 96  !•  Under  the  desire  that  is  expected  to  be  fulfilled  we  class 
the  command  addressed  to  the  first  and  third  persons  (represented  in 
English  by  let  and  the  infinitive). 

Let  us  go  home !  =  ®tf^tn  tiJir  nad)  §aufe ! 
Let  him  not  forget !  =  JBcrgeffe  cr  nic^t. 

197  2.  Forms  of  prayer  or  beseeching:  S)ein  9leid^  fomntel  (Thy 
kingdom  come!) 

Since  the  third  person  plural  subjunctive  is  identical  in  form 
with  the  corresponding  person  of  the  indicative  (cf.  §  62,  p.  2 .)  we  often 
substitute  for  this  construction  the  modal  auxiliary  tnogPIt  +  infinitive. 

Ex.—JXtttiltn  SBeifere  iiber  bie  forage  =  SBetfere  tnoQcn  iiber  bie  forage 
itrtcileti. 

1 98  3.  Concessive — This  represents  a  willingness  on  the  part  of  the 
speaker  to  grant  certain  claims  as  not  affecting  the  validity  of  his 
main  contention.     It  is  always  in  the  present. 

Ex.—Wie§  anbere,  fct  e§  tt)a§  e§  fei,  gilt  nid^ts. 

Everything  else,  be  it  what  it  may,  coimts  for  nothing. 
e§  fel  fo  tote  bu  gefagt  J^aft.  (  ) 

Let  it  be  as  you  have  said. 


288  APPENDIX 

1 99  The  same  idea  is  sometimes  expressed  by  the  modal  auxiliary 
mogm  +  infinitive. 

Ex.—Q^  tnag  fo  fein,  trie  bu  gefagt  t}a\t 
Granted  what  you  have  said. 

Imperative 

200  Strictly  speaking  there  are  but  two  forms  of  the  imperative, 
the  second  person  present  singular  and  plural — 

Btfi  Bcfi(e)t 

20 1  But  the  use  of  the  third  person  plural  pronoun  (©ie)  for 
the  conventional  form  of  address  has  introduced  a  new  form  into  the 
imperative  (cf.  105):  gebett  ®lc  (always  with  the  subject  expressed 
after  the  verb). 

202  These  three  forms  are  used  for  direct  command  addressed  to 
another  person  or  persons. 

203  An  indirect  command  referring  to  a  third  person  may  be 
expressed  by  the  subjunctive  (cf.  196). 

204  Extremely  emphatic  commands  in  familiar  speech  are  often 
expressed  by  the  indicative  present  (cf.  176e),  by  the  perfect  participle: 
\d)neU  gelaufen!  (run  quickly)  and  by  the  infinitive:  nirfit  fo  laut  fprec^en! 
(don't  speak  so  loudly). 

Thus  we  may  express  commands  in  eight  ways — 

Imperative  jtt»*5f»^f(^«)J 
( axWttti  (i^r)! 

( ar0eiten  ®te  I 

Subjunctive  ■]  at!6ette  cr ! 

Indicative— titt  tttbettefi  I 
Participle— fij^neff  fiCttrtettctl 
Infinitive— f^ttctt  ttrbclten! 

205  Infinitive -Yerbal  Noun 

I.    Part  of  the  Yerb  (without  ju) 
II.    With  Noun  or  Adjective  (with  pi) 
III.    Substantive  (with  or  without  jn) 

206  !•    Part  of  Yerb 

The  infinitive  is  used  to  form  (a)  the  future  tenses,  (b)  the  con- 
Mlitional  mode,    (c)    the  complement  of  the  modal  auxiliaries    and 
(d)  of  a  few  verbs  of  similar  construction.     In  this  use  the  infinitive 
without  |tt  is  the  rule. 


APPENDIX  289 

(6)   ^d^  ttjiirbe  BcganGCtt  fcin. 

(c)  (S§  mu§  gefttgt  meriJett. 

(d)  The  other  verbs  that  admit  of  this  construction  are :  finben, 
fiil^Ien,  t)ei^en,  l^elfen,  l^oren,  ta[fen,  le^ren,  ternen,  ntad)en,  feften. 

;Sc3^  laffe  ba§  bon  ber  9JJagb  tun  (cf.  212). 
er  mtt^t  tnic^  t)or  bent  gangen  |)ofe  erroten. 
He  makes  me  blush  before  my  entire  court. 

(e)  After  a  few  verbs  the  infinitive  (without  gu)  is  used  idiomat- 
ically to  express  duration  of  condition. 

Ex.—  dt  Ut'ibi  fl^etl.  He  keeps  his  seat. 

6r  Itttte  t>a^  ®elb  tm  ^aften  lit^tn.      He  had  the  money  lying 

in  the  box. 
@e^',  lege  t)i6)  fiJ^lofenl  Go  to  sleep  I 

©C^C  ftlttjicrcn !    ®C^C  Pfd^cri  I  Go  for  a  walk!  Go  fishing  1 

207  Command — In  familiar  language  this  infinitive  is  used  to 
express  an  emphatic  command,  especially  in  prohibition,  correspond- 
ing to  our  English  don't :  %ie  Wluttn  fagt  gum  ^inbe :  „^\<i)i  fo  laut 
fc^reien!  ©till  fi^en  unb  effen!"    (Don't  scream  so  loud,  sit  still  and  eat!) 

208  II.    With  Noun  or  Adjective 

Infinitive  phrases  (with  p)  are  used  (a)  to  modify  nouns  very 
much  in  the  sense  of  the  attributive  genitive  (cf.  1121). 

%ie  ^unfl  pt  IeBett  =  The  art  of  living  =  2)ie  ^unft  be§  SebenS. 
(b)  To  modify  adjectives — 2)a§  \\i  \djtoex  ju  fajjcn  (hard  to  say). 

(  Noun 

209  III*    Substantive]      or 

(  Clause 

As  a  substitute  for  noun  or  clause,  the  infinitive  may  be  subject 
or  object  of  the  verb. 

When  the  substantive  infinitive  is  used  instead  of  a  noun  it  may 
be  pure  (without  ju)  or  prepositional  (with  gu). 
Ex.—  '^a§  ©cl^en  toirb  i^r  fe{)r  fd^tuer. 

Walking  is  very  difficult  for  her. 
(£r  ^flegt  ben  SSogen  raftf)  p  f^ittttttett. 
He  is  accustomed  to  stretch  the  bow  quickly. 

2  I O  It  is  difficult  to  give  a  rule  that  will  apply  in  all  cases  for  the 
insertion  or  omission  of  ju  in  this  use  of  the  infinitive.  When  the 
verbal  property  of  the  infinitive  is  made  emphatic  by  a  modifying 
adverb  or  an  object,  the  p  is  usually  inserted. 


29a  APPENDIX 

JKr.— ^ung  fur  t>a^  SSaterlanb  ju  fterten  ift  em  tul^mfid^er  %oh. 

To  die  young  for  one's  fatherland  is  an  honorable  death. 
When  the  substantive  use  is  the  more  emphatic,  the  ju  is  omitted. 
Ex.^x  gog  eitt  fj^netteS  (©terpen  bem  MnriilmUii^ett  8eften  5>ot» 
*       He  preferred  a  quick  death  to  a  dishonorable  life. 
When  the  substantive  infinitive  is  used  for  a  clause  of  purpose  or 
direction  the  JU  must  always  be  inserted. 

©ie  ging  nm  Slumen  p  iiprfcn  (bamit  [ie  SSrunten  p^Me), 

2  If  ■    Sometimes  in  exclamations  a  connecting  word  is  omitted  and 
the  so-called  elliptical  infinitive  appears  to  stand  alone  in  the  sentence. 
Sld^,  auf  ba§  tnutige  9io^  m\6)  p  f^ttitngen !   (we  might  add,  to  com- 
plete the  sense:   ift  ntein  fel^nlicifter  SSunfci^.=To  mount  the  brave 
charger  is  my  dearest  wish.) 

^6)  ta^  im !  (for  ic^  foE  \>a§  tun!  =  I  do  that!) 

2  1 2  After  loffm,  Mcrt,  prett,  fit^lctt,  as  well  as  after  the  verb  fefel, 
the  active  infinitive  may  have  a  passive  meaning. 

Ex. —  @§  ift  t)iel  p  tJItt  (There  is  much  to  be  done). 
@r  I'd^t  e§  ttttt  (He  has  it  done). 
Wan  t)5rt  bict)  lobtn  (One  hears  you  praised). 

213  Precaution 

The  use  of  the  infinitive  with  subject  accusative,  so  common  in 
English,  is  not  found  in  German.  The  infinitive  must  either  have  the 
same  logical  subject  as  the  main  verb:  id)  tt)iinf{f)e  i:^n  ju  fcl^en  (I  wish 
to  see  him),  or  must  be  the  direct  object  of  the  verb:  id)  befal^I  il^m 
nac^  ^aufe  gu  gefjen  (I  commanded  him  to  go  home). 

Such  constructions  as,  I  wish  him  to  go,  or  I  believe  him  to  he  a 
good  man,  must  be  translated  by  a  clause : 
,       .  :Sd)  iDiinfc^e,  bttfe  tx  ge^e. 

^d)  glaitbe,  baff  er  eitt  outer  Wtmn  ifi. 

214  The  Participle— Terbal  Adjectire 

In  use,  the  participle  conforms  entirely  to  the  adjective,  being 
declined  like  the  latter  and  employed,  attributively,  predicatively,  or 
substantively  like  it.  The  only  difference  is  that  the  participle  may 
have  a  verbal  or  objective  modifier  which  always  precedes  it.  The 
present  participle  is  active,  the  past  participle  passive  in  its  meaning. 
Ux.^^a^  ben  roten  Sl^jfel  mit  gro^em  SSergniigen  tjerfjieifettiie  ^inb. 

•   The  child  who  was  eating  the  red  apple  with  much  pleasure. 
.  « '  '©cr^bcn  tierfjjelfte  ^pfel  befatn  i^m  nid^t. 

The  apple  that  had  just  been  eaten,  did  not  agree  with  him. 


APPENDIX  291 

2  15  The  participial  noun  common  in  English,  is  not  fouiid  in 
German.  In  translating,  either  an  infinitive  or  a  clause  taust  be  sub- 
stituted. 

216  If  the  participle  is  used  as  subject  or  object,  the  substantive 
infinitive  (without  ju)  is  used  in  German. 

The  rain  made  walking  very  difficult. 

The  rushing  of  the  water. 
^ttS  ^IttUfi^Ctt  be§SSa[jer§. 

217  If  the  English  participial  noun  is  governed  by  prepositions,  it 
is  translated  by  a  prepositional  infinitive  or  a  clause. 

1.  The  prepositions  alette,  attfiatt  ttitt  govern  the  infinitive  phrase, 

Kx.— Without  seeing  his  friend  =  ot^nt  ^^ineux^xeunt)  pt  \t^tn. 
Instead  of  going  home  =  ttttfitttt  nad)  ^aufe  pi  p|eii. 
For  the  purpose  of  seeing  her  once  more=  ttllt  fie  nod)  ein* 
mar  in  fc^en. 

2.  When  prepositions  other  than  these  three  govern  the  English 
participial  noun,  the  phrase  must  be  turned  into  a  clause  in  German. 

Ex. — After  seeing  his  mother  =  9la^beHt  cr  feine  SUiutter  gefe^ett  ^diit. 
By  saying  this  =  3ntlcm  er  bie§  \a%tt. 

The  participle  as  such  can  not  be  substantivized  in  German.  It 
is  primarily  an  adjective  with  the  full  adjective  declension.  As  an 
adjective  it  may  be  used  without  a  noun.  Ex. — dx  freute  \i6)  iiber  ^rig 
(Bejli^el^ene  (He  rejoiced  at  what  had  happened).  Here  ba^  ©efd^eljtne 
stands  for  bttS  gefl^e^CtlC  ^Ittfl,  just  as  tag  @tttc  may  stand  for  ttt^ 
pte  Xing. 

The  participle  may  be  used  to  express  an  emphatic  command: 
SfJicfit  gefadelt,  [c^neE  an§  SBerf  gCQangm !  (No  fooling  there,  go  to  work 
quickly!) 

The  Passive  Toice 

2  1 8  Every  transitive  verb  can  be  made  passive  as  in  English.  The 
preposition  of  agency  (English  by)  is  tiott. 

Active— @r  fti^ldgt  ben  ^naben. 

He  strikes  the  boy. 

Passive— S)cr  f  nabe  ttirb  ijon  i^m  %t\fi^la%m. 
The  boy  is  being  struck  by  him. 


292  APPENDIX 

219  In  German  we  distinguish  carefully  between  the  real  passive, 
i.  e.,  an  action  of  which  the  subject  is  the  sufferer  and  not  the  agent, 
and  a  mere  condition  of  the  subject,  arising  out  of  some  former  action. 

®a§  papier  miril  ^ettiffm  =  The  paper  is  (being)  torn. 
S)a§  papier  tfi  jerrtffen  =  The  paper  is  torn. 
Observe  that  jettiffett  in  the  second  sentence  is  only  a  predicate 
adjective. 

220  SUBSTITUTES  FOR  THE  PASSIVE 

(a)  man  +  active. 

(&)  M  ittffen  +  active  infinitive. 

(c)  Reflexive  Form  of  Verb. 

22  I  The  passive  is  often  clumsy  and  is  used  less  frequently  in  Ger- 
man than  in  English,  especially  in  cases  in  which  the  agent  is  not 
named. 

Ex.-^{a)  aj^an  offnete  eine  Xwc  (A  door  was  opened). 
(6)  ^a^  Idfet  fid)  tun  (That  can  be  done), 
(c)  %xt  %nxt  offnete  fid^  langfam  (Slowly  the  door  was  opened). 
This  substitution  is  especially  frequent  after  modal  auxiliaries, 
where  a  passive  infinitive  would  cause  unwieldy  length. 

The  door  could  not  have  been  opened  =  2)te  Xitr  ^Hit  nid^t  geoffltct 
toetben  UWXVX,  or  better: 

(a)  Wan  pttc  bte  Zux  nid^t  dffneti  fottiictt. 
(5)  %\t  Xitr  Ittttc  \v^  nid)t  offnett  laffcn. 

222  When  the  object  of  the  active  verb  is  in  the  dative,  it  can  not 
be  made  the  subject  of  the  passive.  An  impersonal  subject  must  then 
be  substituted  and  the  dative  object  remains  unchanged. 

Active— ©te  ^at  i^m  fie^olfett. 

Passive— @g  ift  i^m  t)on  i^r  ge^olfett  tiiorlictt. 

Modal  Auxiliaries 

223  They  express  the  mental  attitude  of  the  speaker  to  the  action 
implied  in  the  verb.     There  are  six. 

fiittttett  =  possibility  (physical,  moral,  or  intellectual) 

Qtogen  =  desire  (always  a  mental  attitude) 

bitrfcil  =  permission  (on  the  part  of  an  outside  power) 

Wiiffen  =  necessity 

fotten  =  the  desire  or  declaration  of  an  outside  power 

ttlOtten  =  the  desire  or  declaration  of  the  speaker  himself 


224 

I. 

225 

11. 

226 

in. 

227 

IV. 

228 

V. 

229 

VI. 

APPENDIX  293 

From  these  general  meanings  various  allied  uses  have  been  derived. 
I.     fotttten  =  possibility 
230      ^(^  tatttt  t>ci^  nid^t  tJtn  (I  can  not  do  that). 

The  infinitive  of  the  verb  may  be  omitted  if  the  meaning  is  clear 
from  the  context:  ^6)  fann  e§  nic^t. 

23  I  An  original  meaning  of  fdnttett  was  to  know.  This  is  still 
preserved  in  phrases  like:  ^attttfi  t)U  beine  5lufgabe?  (Do  you  know 
your  lesson?)    ^attttfii  buS)eutfd)?  (Do  you  know  German?)  etc. 

II.     mofiCtt  =  desire 

232  2Ber  mo^tt  fofd^  cin  Sebcn  fiil^ren?  (Who  would  care  to  live 
such  a  life  ?) 

After  ntdgeit,  also,  the  infinitive  may  be  omitted. 
^6)  tnag  nid)t  (I  don't  want  to). 
^6)  mag  e§  nid^t  (I  don't  like  it). 

233  The  original  meaning  was  to  be  able.  But  this  is  now  found 
only  in  the  compound  tiermogen:  @r  tiermag  ba^  nid^t  ju  ttttt  (He  can 
not  do  that). 

234  SD^ogen  occasionally  translates  the  English  may,  with  the  idea 
of  possibility  or  probability. 

Ex.—  fBa^    ag  wol^l  brinnen  fein? 
What  may  be  in  it  ? 
6r  tnag  ein  bofeS  @ett)i[fen  l^aben. 

He  may  have  a  bad  conscience, 
©r  tnoc^tc  gttjet  ^al^re  bageiuefen  [cin. 
He  may  hav'e  been  there  for  two  years. 
But  the  English  "May  I  go"?  is  „2)arf  id^  gel^en"? 

III.     bitrfen  =  permission 

235  ^n  bet  ©d^ule  barf  man  ntdf)t  f^jred^en  (One  is  not  permitted  to 
speak  in  school).     (The  English  you  must  not  do  so  is  also  bu  batfft 

ha^  nidf)t  tun.) 

236  The  original  meaning  to  be  in  want  of  is  now  found  only  in 
bebiirfen.  ajian  bebarf  manc^eg  in  ber  SSelt  (One  needs  many  things  in 
this  world). 

237  The  preterite  subjunctive  of  Diirfen  (biirfte)  is  used  idiomatically 
to  express  probability.  S)a§  biirftc  5U  fd^mcr  fein  (That  is  probably  too 
hard). 


294  APPENDIX 

IV.     miiffett  =  necessity  (from  without) 

238  ^(S)  tnufetc  nad^geben  (I  had  to  submit). 

er  tDirb  e§  tun  miiffett  (He  will  be  obliged  to  do  it). 

239  A  derived  meaning  is  found  in  the  following  usages: 
9?un  mu^tc  e§  and)  nod^  regnen !  (Now  fate  would  have  it  rain !) 
S)er  mni^  ein  SO^orber  fein!  (He  must  be  a  murderer!) 

V.     foffett  =  desire  or  statement  (from  without) 

240  S)ufoaftnic^t  Mien!  (Thou  Shalt  not  steal). 
2)er  ^onig  foH  leben!  (Long  live  the  king!) 

®r  fott  einen  2tuf fa^  fd^reiben  (He  is  to  write  an  essay). 

24  I       Without  the  infinitive— 

SSaSfjjaber^nabe?  (What  is  the  boy  to  do?) 

242  Hearsay— 

2)a§  foff  ein  reigenbeg  Sanb  fcin  (That  is  said  to  be  a  charming  land). 

243  In  the  subj.  pret.  it  represents  a  conditional  meaning— 

Wan  foUte  glauben  (One  should  suppose), 
©r  fottte  ge^en  (He  ought  to  go). 
Note  that  this  is  the  only  exact  rendering  of  the  English  ought. 

VI.     tiiottett  =  desire  or  declaration  (from  within) 

244  SBittfi  ^n  eth)a§?  (Do  you  want  anything?) 

er  ^at  ta^  nidjt  tun  tooKcit  (He  did  not  want  to  do  that). 

245  It  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  the  English  "wiir'=futurity. 
For  this  purpose  the  German  employs  ttierbett.  But  sometimes  it  is  to 
be  translated  with  to  be  about  to^  or  on  the  point  of,  but  always 
expressing  volition. 

(Sr  toiU  gel^en  =  He  is  about  to  go  (makes  a  motion  of  going). 

246  With  non-personal  verbs  ttiottett  has  many  idiomatic  uses,  aJl 
of  which  rest  on  personification. 

S)a3  miff  btr  nicf)t  gefaUen  (That  does  not  suit  you). 

S)a§  tultt  ntdf|t§  fagen  (That  is  of  no  importance). 

^a§  ttJtff  tuol^r  bebad^t  fein  (That  requires  careful  consideration). 

247  ^oHett  may  express  a  claim  on  the  part  of  the  speaker. 

@r  ttiiff  ein  reic^er  ©nglanbcr  fein  =  He  claims  to  he  a  rich  English- 
man (cf.  with  a  similar  use  of  foUen  242). 


APPENDIX  29S 

VERBS  OP  A  SIMILAR  CONSTRUCTION 

248  loffctt  =  permission  or  command. 
j^ei^ett  =  command. 

^d)  lic^  @uc^  ftet§  entttJifcfjcn  =  I  always  let  you  escape. 

Wlan  breitet  au^,  [tc  fc!^ttjinbe,  la^t  fie  franfcrunb  txanler:  toexhen,  enblid^ 
ftifl  fierfd^eiben.  (One  can  spread  the  report  that  she  is  declining,  make 
her  grow  worse  and  worse,  and  at  last  quietly  fade  away). 

^^  Ittffe  ntir  ein  neue§  ^leib  mac^en  =  I  have  a  new  dress  made 
(order  it  to  be  made). 

j^ei^en  =  command  (to  be  carefully  distinguished  from  l^ei§cn  =  to 
call  or  be  named), 

6t  ^ctfet  bie  Oolbaten  bic  SBriiden  tjerbrennen. 
He  commands  the  soldiers  to  burn  the  bridges. 

Impersonal  Verbs 

249  Many  verbs  which  have  a  personal  subject  in  English  are 
impersonal  in  German,  i.  e.,  the  person  concerned  is  regarded  as  being 
affected  by  the  action  rather  than  as  the  agent.  The  subject  is  the 
impersonal  c8,  while  the  person  affected  is  represented  by  a  dative  or 
accusative  noun  or  pronoun. 

e§  bauert  mid)  =  I  am  sorry 

e§  efelt  mic^  an  =  It  disgusts  me 

e§  erbarmt  mid^  =  I  pity 

cS  faUt  mix  ein  =  It  occurs  to  me 

e§  fdHt  mir  auf  =  I  notice  (my  attention  is  attracted) 

c8  freut  mid)  =  I  rejoice 

e§  gefallt  mir  =  It  pleases  me  (I  like) 

c§  gelingt  mir  =  I  succeed 

e§  gcniigt  mir  =  It  suflaces  me 

e§  jammert  mi(^  =  I  take  pity  on 

e§  rent  mic^  =  I  repent 

eg  fd^minbelt  mir  =  I  grow  dizzy 

eg  tut  mir  leib  =  I  am  sorry 

eg  tut  mir  mel^  =  It  hurts  me 

eg  oerbrie^  mic^  =  It  vexes  me 


VOCABULARIES 


VOCABULARY 


EXPLANATORY  NOTE 


1.  Words  not  marked  with  the  accent  are  to  be  accented  on  the  first  syllable. 

2.  The  principal  parts  of  strong  and  irregular  verbs  will  be  found  in  Section  86 
of  the  Api)endix. 

3.  Verbs  that  form  the  perfect  tenses  with  the  auxiliary  [eill,  are  indicated  as 
follows : 

bleiben,  to  remain,  (fein) 

4.  The  endings  of  the  gen.  sing,  of  masculines  atid  neuters  and  of  the  nom. 
plur.  of  all  nouni^  are  given.  A  dash  indicates  that  the  plural  is  formed  without 
additional  ending. 

5.  Irregular  comparatives  and  superlatives  are  given. 

6.  The  parts  of  speech  are  indicated  only  when  the  translation  might  lead  io 
misunderstanding. 


ABBREVIATIONS 


ace.  =  accusative 

adj.  =  adjective 

adv.  =  adverb 

App,  =  Appendix 

art.  =  article 

aux.  =  auxiliary 

of.  =  compare 

cond.  =  conditional 

conj.  =  conjunction 

dat.  =  dative 

def.  =  definite 

dem(onstr.)  =  demonstrative 

dim.  =  diminutive  . 

Eng.  =  English 

ex.  =  example 

fem.  =  feminine 

fut.  =  future 

gen.  =  genitive 

imper.  =  imperative 

indecl.  =  indeclinable 

indef .  =  indefinite 

indie.  =  indicative 

inf.  =  infinitive 

inter.  =  interrogative 

interj.  =  interjection 

intr(ans.)  =  intransitive 

irr.  =  irregular 


masc.  =  masculine 
neut.  =  neuter 
nom.  =  nominative 
num.  =  numeral 
obj.  =  object 
part.  =  participle 
perf.  =  perfect 
I)ers.  =  i)erson(al) 
plup.  =  pluperfect 
pl(ur.)  =  plural 
poss(ess.)  =  jxjssessive 
pred.  =  predicate 
prep.  =  preposition 
pres.  =  present 
pret.  =  preterite 
pron.  =  pronoun 
refl.  =  reflexive 
reg.  =  regular 
rel.  =  relative 
sing.  =  singular 
str.  =  strong 
subj.  =  subjunctive 
subst.  =  substantive 
superl.  =  sui>erlative 
tr(ans.)  =  transitive 
w.  =  weaik 


GERMAIS^-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


bcr  2Cai:, -(e)S, -c,  eagle  X 

ti^,  away,  from 

bag  SlbcttbUeb,  -(e)^/  -«r.  evensong 

bag  2lbentcucr,  -§,  — ,  adventure 

ober,  but,  however 

ttbjjerlffcu,  shabby 

a b' (eg en,  «'.,  to  take  oflF 

ttb'nefjmen,  sir.,  to  take  off 

ttb'reifeit,  «'.,  to  depart  (feitt) 

ab'f<i)(iefKnf  s'r.,  to  shut  off,  lock 

a^/  oh  !  alas  !  well  then  ! 

oj^t,  eight 

bie  9lcf)t,  care ;  —  geben,  to  take  care  y  ^ 

bie  91(f)  tuns  r  regard  ^^  / 

ii^jett,  «'.,  to  groan 

abe,  adieu  !  farewell ! 

bag  9lbiefttb%  -g,  -c,  adjective 

tttt,  every,  all 

fttteitt',  alone;  but 

allesi,  everything,  all  the  world 

ttHejclt,  always 

tHUbatcr,  -g,  Odin,  father  of  gods  and 

men 
bie  2ltWe),  -en,  Alps 
ttt§,  when,  as,  than,  but 
ntfo,  so,  therefore,  that  is  to  say 
Olt,  old 

bag  Sitter,  -g,  — ,  age 
bag    Slltertum,    -g,   ^er,    antiquity; 

pluT.,  relics  of  antiquity 
altettitmlit^ , 
ber  Stmboft, 
ber  2lmcrtfo'ttcr,  -g,  — ,  American 
btc  Slmcrifa'ttettn,  -nen,  American 
ber  5lmtmatttt,  -(e)g,  -^er,  burgomastpr 
Qmitfteren,  w.  reft.,  to  amuse  oneself 
tttt,  p^ep.  with  dat.  and  ace, 


I,  antique «L— 
-f1'«^,  -ffe,  anvil 


2.,  at,  tOfhyl     ( 
'299 


anf  bitten,  str.,  to  offer 

an'binben^  «^r.,  to  tie        ; 

tttt'blicfen,  «.,  to  look  at  ^ 

anber,  adj.,  other 

anberi,  otherwise,  differently 

ber  Stnfoitfl,  -(c)«,  ""e,  beginning,  com- 

mencement 
tttt'fonBcn,  str.^  to  begin 
on'fofTen,  «'.,  to  seize,  take  hold  of 
bie  ginforbcruttfl,  -en,  claim,  demand 
on'Beben,  str.,  to  tell  , 

an' fl el) en,  str.,  to  concern,  beg    A/^^ 
on' B  ebb  rem  w.,  to  belong  to      ^ 
ber  Slnflebbrifie,  subst.  adj.,  relative   y 
bag  ^ngefil^t,  -g,  -e,   face,    counte- 
nance 
anoeftrenst,  bard,  with  great  exer- 
tion 
an'b(inoen>  ^o.,  to  hang  on  to,  attach 

to 
on'f ommen,  str. ,  to  arrive  (fein) 
bie3lnl0fie,  -         talent,    disposition, 

advantage 
ber  9ln(a^,  -ffeg,  ^fle,  occasion 
an'tio^en,  w.,  to  knock 
an'f^tie^en,  str.  rejl.,  to  attach  one- 
self to 
on'feben,  str.,  to  look  at 
bag  Slnfeben,  -g,  — ,  renown 
on'ftannen,  «>.,  to  stare  at 
aii'ftrcnflen,  «•.  re/l.,  to  strain,  make 

an  effort 
btc  ^nttvovt,  -en,  answer 
ont'niorten,  w.,  to  answer 
on'bertrttnen,  w.,  to  entrust  to 
on'maibfen,  str.,  to  grow,  increase 
bag  Slnmadilfen,  -g,  increase,  growth 
«in''selflen,  w.,  to  report 
ttn'jitnbett/  w.,  to  kindle,  light 


300 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


ber  2H>fct,  -§,  •",  apple 

ber  9l^felbaum,  -ie)5S,  ^e,  apple-tree 

O^JfclBtOU,  dapple  gray  J 

bie  2UtJCit,  work  / 

atbcitctt,  w.,  to  work 

ber  ^vbtitev,  -§,  — ,  workmao,  laborer 

ber  Slrget,  -^,  vexation 

axm,  poor 

ber  Slrni,  -(e)§,  -e,  arm 

bie  2lrmcc',  -n,  army 

bie  2lrt,  -en,  kind,  sort 

au^,  also 

bie  2lu{c),  -en,  meadow 

auf,  ^J'ep.  wilh  dat.  and  ace,  up,  at, 

upon  ;  adj.  or  adv.,  open 
auf'bemoIjtCtt,  w.,  to  keep,  guard 
ouffrcffcttf  «<^.,  to  devour 
bie  ^lufsabCf  -n,  task,  exercise,  lesson 
ftltf  gebcitf  sir.,  to  put  to  ;  give  up 
auf'ficfien,  sir.,  to  rise  (fein) 
auf'ftcbcn,  J<r.,  to  pick  up 
QUfmodjctt,  «^.,  to  open 
bie  Slttfmcrffomfcit,  -en,  attention 
bie  3lufttabmc,  -n,  shelter,  reception 
auffoflCtt,  w.,  to  give  warning  (to  a 

servant) 
OUf'ffttOflCtt,  str.,io  open 
ttUf  flJcrtcil,  w.,  to  open  wide 
auf  ftct)cn,  str.,  to  get  up  (fein) 
auf'ma^ett,  w.  t'w^r.,  to  awaken 
auf  Siil^tenf  w?.,  to  name,  enumerate 
auf'SCljrCtt,  w.,  to  consume 
ba§  Slufic,  -S,  -n,  eye 
ba§  SiugteiU,  -S,  — ,  (iim.,  little  eye 
au§,  prep,  with  dat.,  or  adv.,  out,  out 

of,  of 
au§'bretteu,  w.  refl.,  to  spread  out 
auS'btiirfCtt,  «'.,  to  express 
OU§SCba(fen>  thoroughly  baked,  done 
auS'fiCbCU,  str.,  to  give  out,  spend 
auS'flCljcn,  str.,  to  go  out  (fein) 
auSflcfc^t,  exposed  ^ 
auSflcjcidjnct,  excellent     < 
bie  9ru§fUttft,  ^C,  information 
ber  9lu§lan»er,  -§,  — ,  foreigner 
auS'lanblfdi,  foreign 
au§'(eben,  refl.,  to  live  oneself  out 
au§'red)ncn»  w.,  to  reckon,  work  out 
au§'fd)auen>  w.,ixi  look  out 
ttttS'felllttflCtt,  5<r.,  to  sprout 
auS'feljctt,  str.,  to  appear,  look 
ba«  2ltt§feftcn»  -S,  appearancie 


i; 


ber  SluS'tties,  -(e)^,  -e,  device,  way  out 
aug'meidjen,  5<r.,  to  getiout  of  the 

way  (fein)  "^ 

ausmeubtg,  by  heart  \  —  lernen,  to 

learn  by  heart  / 

auS'Seidjneu,  w.  refl.,  to  distinguish     y 
aU^erBettibbultd),  extraordinary 
iiu^erftf  extremely 
aUS'jieftcu,  str.,  to  draw  oflf 


ber  ©ai!|,  -(e)g,  ^e,  brook 

bag  93a(f)lcin»  -§,  — ,  <fm., brooklet 

bacfcn,  str.,  to  bake 

ber  JBorfofctt,  -§,  ^,  oven 

balb(c),  soon 

bie  lBaQa''be,  -n,  ballad,  poem 

bans,  afraid  ;  eS  ift  mir  — ,  1  am  afraid 

bangen^  «'.  refl.,  to  be  afraid 

bie  3)anf,  ^e,  bench 

ber  ©ar,  -en,  -en,  bear 

ber  ©art,  -(e)g,  ^e,  beard 

ber  ©ou,  -(e)g,  -e,  building 

bie  93auart,  -en,  style  of  architecture 

bauen,  w.,  to  build 

ber  ©auetr  -§  or  -n,  -n,  farmer,  peas- 
ant 

ber  IBauetniunse,  -n,  -n,   farmer's 
boy 

ber  aSaum,  -<e)§,  -^e,  tree  v 

ber  ©aufttt,  -§,  -e,  style  of  archite&^^^^V'^ 
ture  ^"^ 

bebc'rfcn, «'.,  to  cover 

bebCU'tcn,  w.,  to  mean 
bie  ©ebinguuo,  -en,  condition    -"i, 
bcbro'bCttr  «'•>  to  threaten  ' 

ber  IBcfcftt',  -§,  -e,  command   f 
bcfcb'tcu,  «</■.,  to  command 
bcftn'bcn,  str.  rejl.,  to  be 
beftci'cn,  w.,  to  set  free 
begeben,  str.  refl.,  to  betake  oneself 
bcecfl'ncu,  w.,  to  meet,  happen 
bejlCtftert,  enthusiastically 
bcflitt'ttcn,  str.,  to  begin 
bcjjnu'flCtt,  w.  refl.,  content  oneself 
Benrii'^en,  w.,  to  salute,  greet 
bcbal'tcn,  str.,  to  keep;  to  remember 
bcban'bcltt,  w.,  to  treat 
bcljauij'tcn,  w.,  to  insist 
bie    ©c^outJ'tUUfi,    -en,    statement, 
declaration 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


301 


bcfterrfiftt',  self-controlled,  composed 

bcljcrjt',  brave 

btWttn,  «'.,  to  guard 

bci,  prep,  with  dat.,  with,  by,  at;  — 
mir,  at  my  house 

t)eil>C,  both ;  aUe  — ,  both  of  them ; 
bie  beiben,  the  two 

fici'ieite,  aside,  to  one  side 

bei'fteUen,  w.,  to  set  aside 

htx^tn,  sir.,  to  bite 

bci'trctctt,  str.,  to  join  (fetn) 

htlawxxt' ,  known,  acquainted 

bcfotn'mcn,  str.,  to  receive;  e§  6e* 
fommt  mir  gut,  it  agrees  with  me. 

bic  iBctci'btfiunB,  -en,  insult  V 

^cUcn,  tf'.,  tobark  ^ 

htioli'ntn,  w.,  to  reward 

btm'ddt^tiRcn,  w.  refl.,  to  get  posses- 
sion of 

bcmet'fctt,  w.,  to  notice,  remark 

bie  fflcmcr^funfl.  -«">  remark,  obser- 
vation 

bcnath'bavt,  neighboring  ^ ' 

htnu'litn,  w.,  to  use. 

htob'aiittn,  w.,  to  observe 

bereifi'nen,  «".,  to  take  into  account, 
reckon  up 

ietclfen,  w.,  to  travel  through 

btxtW,  ready      *^ 

ber  ©ergf  -(e)^»  -«/  mountain 

Bernettr  *<»".,  to  hide 

ber  ©criiftt',  -§,  -e,  report 

btx'WXtw,  w.,  to  report 

beru'fcit,  «<r.,  to  call 

6crit^tnt',  famous 

bcriifi'vctt,  tt.,  to  touch  %/^ 

bic  aScritfi'ruttB,  -en,  touch 

btld'en,  w.,  to  sow 

bcfot',  studded 

btWa'mtnb,  humiliating 

bcfd)ir'mctt,  w.,  to  guard 

bcftf)tci''bctt,  s<r.,  to  describe 

befdjit'ftctt.u'.,  to  protect 

befl!)tt)Ct'««f|,  difficult,  hard 

bcfcc'Iett,  «'. ,  to  fill  with  life 

Bcfltfl'HftCtt,  to.,  to  view,  examine    X 

bcfin'eett,  sir.  trans.,  to  sing,  cele- 
brate (in  song) 

befln'ttClt,  str.  refl.,  to  recollect,  recall 

bcfott'bcrS,  especially 

bcfott'nett,  calm,  composed  ^ 

ftcfOt'BCW'  w.,  to  care  for,  look  after 


beffer,  better 

beffern,  u\  refl.,  to  improve 

beft,  best 

bt\tf\it\\,  str.,  to  pass  (.examination) ; 

—  au^,  to  consist  ot 
bcftclj'len,  str.  to  rob 
befu't^en,  w.,  to  visit,  attend 
ber  JBefu'fter,  -s,  — ,  visitor 
beten,  w.,  to  pray 
btttXX'tXW,   w.,  to  protest;  to  affirm 

solemnly 
ber  ^tiXdiiX',  -§,  consideration 
betrau'etrn,  w.  trans.,  to  mourn 
bttXt'ttn,  str.,  to  enter,  step  upon 
bag  »ett,  -e§,  -en,  bed 
btuitn,  w.,  to  bend  ;  ficl^  — ,  to  bow 
ber  ^tntti,  -S,  — ,  money-bag,  purse 
bttoaVbtX,  wooded 
bemei'fen,  str..  to  prove 
betuir^ttn^  -v.,  to  entertain 
ber  S3e)tlO^'ner,  -S,  — ,  inhabitant 
bie  S3enio^'nerin,  -nen,  inhabitant 
beitiun'bern/  w.,  to  admire 
bejat)'(en,  w.,  to  pay 
bejeiifi'nen,  w.,  to  designate 
ber  iBejUS'>  -^,  "^e,  reference,  regard 
btetettf  str.,  to  offer 
bag  S3ilbr  -(e)§,  -er,  picture,  reilectiou 
bilbett,  w.,  to  form    / 
ber  93i(bb(iutv,  -§,  -^,^  sculptor 
bie  SBt(bunSr  education 
biaiB'  cheap 
binbem  «^r.,  tobind 
bi§,  until,  up  to 
bii^er'r  up  to  now,  formerly 
bie  93itte,  -n,  prayer,  request 
blttc,  please !  -^ 
bitten,  str.,  to  request,  ask 
bitter,  bitter 
bittcrli*,  bitterly 
blanf,  bright,  sparkling 
blafen,  str.,  to  blow 
baS  ©tott,  -(e)g,  -^er,  leaf,  page 
bteiben,  str.,  to  remain  (fein) 
ber  S3IidF,  -{e)§,  -e,  glance,  look 
blidfett,  w.,  to  look 
blittb,  blind 
bHt^cn,  w.,  to  fiash 
blitljen,  w.,  to  bloom,  flourish 
ba§  93Iiintd)ett,  -§,  — ,  rfuft.,  flowret 
bie  ©Iltmc,  -n,  flower 
ba§  ©Ittt,  -(e)§,  blood 


|/ 


302 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


y 


bic  S&tntt,  -H,   blossom,   flourishing 

condition 
bcr  Soben,  -^,  ^,  ground,  floor 
ber    iBbljnicrttialb,    -(e)^,    Bohemian 

Forest 
bic  ©orfc,  -n,  purse 
ftO^,  bad,  wicked,  angry 
hH^avtii,  malicious 
Btrateit/  sir.,  to  roast 
ber  JBraucft,  -(e)§,  ^c,  custom 
htdXtiiitXtt  w.,  to  use,  employ 

hvamn,  i^.,  to  brew 

firaUtt,  brown 

hV(lU\cttf  «'.,  to  roar,  resound 

hvtditnt  sir.,  to  break 

hxtit,  broad 

hvtnntn,  irr    to  burn  ;  cf.  App.  88 

bcr  «Brtef,  -{e)§,  -e,  letter 

bic  ^riUe,  -n,  spectacles 

brinoett,    t/*?".,    to    bring,    take ;    cf. 

App.  88 
ba§  Sdvot,  -(e)^/  -C/  bread 
bcr  IBru*,  -(e)^,  ^c,  fraction 
bcr  IBruber,  -^,  ^,  brother 
hvummtn,  w.^  to  grumble 
bcr  Srutttten,  well 
ba§  S^ritnnleiUf  -S,  — ,  rfm.,  little 

spring 
bic  Stuftr  ^c,  breast,  bosom 
ba§  JBu*,  -(e)§,  ^cr,  book 
bie  aSiidjfe,  -n,  rifle 
hudtn,  w.  refl. ,  to  bend 
Ibuffeitt,  to  study,  •'  dig" 
boS  ©uttbet,  -3,  — ,  bundle 
hunt,  gay,  varicolored 
bie  93urBf  -en,  castle 
ber  93urscr,  -3,  — ,  citizen 
ber  Surf^e,  -n,  -n,  student,  lad 
bic    SSnfiitttnlitvv'UitiUit,    joyous 

student-life 
bic  93utf$entuft»  ^e,  joy  of  youth 


bcr  Gfiarol'tcr,  -8,  -c,  character 
bic  ^OttWnt,  -n,  cousin 

s 

bo,  adv.,  there,  then  ;  coraj.,  aa 
babel',  adv.,  with  that,  over  it 
ba§  So^,  -e3,  -^cr,  roof 


bofur'f  for  that 

bftficr',  hence,  from  there 

ba^in',  thither,  there 

bdtttalS,  at  that  time 

bamit',  iu  order  that,  with  that 

batn^fen,  «'.,  to  subdue 

bonn,  then 

batauf,  thereupon,  on  it 

barin'/  in  that,  therein 

bftru'bcr,  at  it,  about  it,  at  that 

borum',  therefore,  about  it 

barun'ter,  under  it 

boft,  C071J.,  in  order  that ;  that 

bau'cm, «?.,  to  last 

babon,  adv.,  from  that,  away  ' 

batJDt'',  before  that 

bQ3tt'»  at  that,  in  addition,  besides 

beifen,  w.,  to  cover,  set 

bcitt,  thine,  your 

ber  Segen,  -3,  — ,  sword 

bcrfcl'be,  that  one,  he 

beftittie'ren,  w.,  to  decline 

bemittisen,  w.,  to  humiliate 

benfen,  in-.,  to  think.     Cp.  App.  88 

ba§  2)enfma(,  -3,  -"er,  monument 

beim,  conj.,  for 

bcr,  bie,  ba§,  the;  this;  who 

berienige,  dem.  pron.,  that  one 

bertuetr,  while,  meanwhile 

ber  2)crhilfjft,  -8,  -C,  dervish 

bc^,  archaic  for  beffen 

beS^albf  therefore,  on  that  account 

befto,  adv.,  the 

bCUtUd),  distinct 

beutfA,  German;    ber,   bic    2)eutfcfte, 

the  German 
beutfft'frottjbflf*,  Franco-Prussian 
ba^  2)eutffttonb,  -(c)g,  Germany 
ber  Xi^ttv,  -3,  — ,  poet 
btrf,  thick ;  fleshy 
bienen,  w.,  to  serve 
ber  ^ten^r,  -§,  — ,  servant 
ber  Sicttft,  -<e)§,  -c,  service 
blcfcr,  this  ;  the  latter,  he. 
ba§  2iitt8,  -e5»  -e»  thing 
bircft%  direct 
boft,  but,  yet,  nevertheless 
ber  2)o!tor,  -§,  -en,  doctor 
bie  Xonau,  Danube 
bcr  XonntvfiaU,   -§,  -e,   sound    of 

thunder 
baS  Sotf,  -e3,  -"er,  village 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


303 


ber  Sum,  -e3,  -en,  thorn 
bottr  there 

borttg,  adj.,  at  that  place 
ber  StO^C,  -n,  -n,  dragon  y 

bve^en, «'.,  to  turn 

btci,  three 

bretftlfi,  thirty 

brclfttfliaftrtB,  adj.,  thirty  years' 

btitt,  third 

ba§  artttcJ,  -§,  —  third 

btO'^eUf  w'.,  threaten    V^ 

btitcfetty  «'-,  to  oi)pres3 

btuntr  see  barum 

bvuntcn,  below,  down  below 

brutttcr,  below 

bit,  thou,  you 

butbeit,  w.,  to  suffer,  bear 

bumm,  stupid 

bunf  c(,  dark,  obscure ;  faintly 

bttt^,  prep,  with  ace,  through,  by 
means  of 

bur^'fallctt,  str.,  to  fail 

buriftfrew'jcn,  «>.,  to  traverse 

bUVt^^maiQen, «'.,  to  pass  through,  ex- 
perience 

bur(6fc^au^cn»  «'.,  to  see  through, 
penetrate 

burdrfd)(QSen,  sir.  refi.,  to  make  one's 
way 

ber  Uurftfdjttttt,  -(e)^,  -e,  average    y 

btttfen,  w.,  to  be  allowed 

biirr,  thin,  withered 

burfttQf  thirsty 

bitftet,  dark,  gloomy 


e(en,  adv.,  just  now  ;  adj.,  level 

cbcnfo, just  as 

bic  ®cfc,  -n,  corner 

cftc,  ronj.,  before 

bie  ©five,  -n,  honor 

t\^X\\^,  honest 

bie  €^rnd)fcit,  -ctt,  honesty 

ei,  why  ! 

bie  61^ c,  -n,  oak 

ber  ©ib,  -{e)^,  -e,  oath 

ber  ©ifcr,  -3,  eagerness,  zeal 

elftcn,  adj.,  own 

bic  ©tflcnart,  -en,  peculiarity 

ba§  ^iflCntUW,  -^,  ^ev,  property 

eilCtt,  M'.,  to  hurry  (fein) 


elit»  one,  a,  an 

etltatt'bcr,  one  another,  each  other 
etu'6t{ben,  w.  refl.^  to  imagine 
ber  ©tttbrurf,  -{e)g,  ^e,  impression 
ctnfa^,  simple 

ber  ©infnil,  -8,  ^c,  scheme,  idea 
ein'fftHctt,  sir.  rejl.,  to  occur;  to  in- 
terrupt (fein) ;  e^  faUt  ntir  ein,  it  oc- 
curs to  me 
Ctu'flttbcn,  str.  rejl.,  to  come,  to  join 

in 
ber  ginflu^,  -ffe§,  ^ffe,  influence 
Ctn'flCllCtt,  str.,  to  agree  (with) 
etn'flrobcn,  str.,  to  bury 
bie  Ginficlt,  -en,  union 
eintjettn^,  homogeneous    A, 
eitttR,  ivt  one,  unified 
etntgef  several,  a  few,  some 
eiittge§,  some 

ctn'ft^rcit,  "'.,  to  lodge  with,  stop 
(fein) 

ctum(t(,  once ;  once  upon  a  time 

ba^  @tnma(eins)',  — ,  multipMcatloH 
table 

bie  @inr{ti)tun(},  -en,  arrangement -,^-3 
—  treffcn,  to  make  arrangements 

(infant,  lonesome,  alone 

eln'fdjtftfcn,  str.,  to  go  to  sleep  (fein) 

eln'fdjHcftCtt,  sir.,  to  enclose 

cln'frftreltcn,  str.,  to  intervene  (fein) 

Ctn'fcftcn,  str.,  to  admit 

elnft,  once,  at  some  time 

etn'ftccfctt,  10.,  to  pocket 

eln'trctcn,  str.,  to  enter  ^ 

ber  ©intritt,  -(e)§,  -c,  entrance  v 

bag  ^intierftiittbnid,  -ffe^,  -ffe,  under- 
standing 

ein'minigen,  w.,  to  consent  / 

bie  (Stntno^nersofil,  -en,  population \/ 

einjifl,  only,  sole 

bag  @ifcn,  -g,  — ,  iron 

bie  ©if  cnftonec,  -n,  iron  rod,  staff    ; 

ber  ©lcfrtnt'»  -en,  -en,  elephant 

bag  ©tementar'fad),  -eg,  ^er,  branch 
of  elementary  instruction 

ber  e(cmcntar'nntcrrid)t,    -3,   ele- 
mentary instruction 

elf,  eleven 

bic  ©Item,  plw.,  parents 

cmtJOtTommcn,  str.,  to  rise  (in  the 
world)  (fein) 

emtior'f^auen,  «'.,  to  look  up 


304 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


tm\i0V'Uvthtn,  w.,  to  seek  to  rise 

bag  (Sttbe,  -§,  -n,  end 

euben>  w.,  to  end 

cni»H«ft,  final ;  finally 

enB(c),  narrow y, 

bcr  @nact,  -3,  ~,  angel 

bag  eufilottb,  -§,  England 

CltBlifft,  English 

CtttfleB'ncn»  w.,  to  reply 

Ctttftat'tCtt,  *«r.,  to  contain 

entra'ten*  sir.,  to  escape 

bie  ©ittfftcl'bUttBf  *cn,  decision 

Cntf^tittJ'fen,  w'.,  to  escape;  to  slip 

away  (fein) 
entflftttJltt'bCtt,  str.,  to  disappear  (fein) 
Ctttjc^'Utft,  terrible  [ment 

bie  @nttau^f^unBf  -en,  disappoiut- 
enttoei'l^en,  w.,  to  desecrate 
ettttui'rfeltt,  w.,  to  develop 
bie  @ttth>irf'(e)IUttB,  -en,  development 
entju'rfett*  w.,  to  charm 
bic  Stio'llge,  -n,  epoch 
er,  he 

tvbt'btn,  V}.,  to  tremble 
bie  @tbe,  -n,  earth 
baS  @rctB'nt§,  -ffe§,  -ffe,  event 
bie  @irf  al^'vunB'  -en,  experience 
tX^Xt'^tXi,  sir.  refl.,  to  pour  forth 
crBrel'fcn»  sir.,  to  seize    J^ 
etr^al'ten,  str.,  to  receive  ;  to  maintain 
tt\tt'htXl,  sir.  refl.,  to  rise 
bie  ©rfie'fittttBr  -en,  rise,  uprising, 
ttln'XlttXt,  w.  refl. ,  to  remember  ^^ 
etfctt'ticn,  irr.f  to  recognize ;  of.  App. 

88 
crfto'rctt,  w.,  to  explain,  disclose 
bie  @tf((irunBr  -en,  explanation 
crfUn'BCttf  str.,  to  resound  (fein) 
ertau'fiett,  w.,  to  permit 
ber  ^v\V6nx%,  -3,  -e,  erl-king 
ernft,  earnest 
tXQ'htvn,  to  conquer 
ertiro'Ben,  w'.,  to  prove,  to  test 
crpttttfcn,  tf.,  to  refresh 
crrei'djcn,  'w.,  to  reach 
crf^al'tcttf^f .  to  resound  (fein) 
crfdjci'ncn,  str.,  to  appear  (fein) 
bie  @tf$ci'nunB>  -en,  phenomenon 
erfftto'flett,  str.,  to  slay 
et;flftb|)'fcit,  M*.,  to  exhaust 
etf^tCCfCtt,   w.    trans.,    to    frighten; 

str.  intrans.,  to  be  frightened 


crflftt'lteft,  evident 

Crft,  first,  only 

ba§  @tftaunen»  -§,  astonishment 

erftOUtt'tlft,  surprising 

etftaUttt',  astonished 

crftcnS,  first 

erftrc'rfcn,  w.,  to  extend 

ettva'djotf  w.  i»/r.,  to  wake  up 

tXiOdV'Xtn,  w.,  to  expect,  wait  for 

CrItiar'tUttfiStJOn,  expectantly 

erttjcr'bcn,  str.,  to  earn 

er)a^'(en,  w.,  to  relate 

bic  ©rjie^'unBr  -en,  education 

C§,  it 

ber  @fet,  -§,  — ,  ass,  donkey 

effctt,  sir.,  to  eat 

bag  @fTcn»  -8,  food,  victuals 

ettUQ^r  something,  somewhat 

cucr,  your 

eurojjo'tfd),  European 

CtuiB'  everlasting,  ever 

bag  ©la'mcn,  -g,  — ,  examination 

bag  ©icm'tJCI,  -g,  — ,  example 

tlWtWxtn,  w.,  to  exist 


bag  Sftftf  -(e)§f  ^er,  branch 

bag   gobftCtt,   -§,   — ,   fH»«.,   slender^ 

thread 
ber  Sabcn,  -g,  "■,  thread 
bie  Softue,  -n,  flag 
fa'^ten,  str.,  to  go,  drive,  ride  (fein) 
ber  {^Ql^ritieB'  -<e)g,  -e,  road 
ber  3il(f(>  -"/  -"/  falcon 
ber  3f«»Hf  -{e)g,  ^e,  case 
fatten,  «<n,  to  fall  (fein) 
bie  gonii'ltc,  -n,  family 
foUBCtt,  5/r.,  to  catch;  flefanflcn  nel)« 

men,  to  take  prisoner 
bie  garbe,  -n,  color 
fftfTctt,  w.,  to  grasp     s/ 
fftft,  almost  I 

faut,  lazy 
foulcnjctt,  to  idle 
bie  gouft,  -^e,  fist 
fcfttctt,5<^.,  to  fight 
bie  3cber,  -n,  pen 
bag  (^ebetbett,  -g,  -en,  feather-bed 
fcfttCtt,  w.,  to  be  lacking;  loag  fel^'t 

bir  ?  what  ails  you  ? 
feiern*  w.,  to  celebrate 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


305 


bcr  Setertofl,  -e§,  -c,  holiday 

fcin,  soft,  delicate;  thiely,  well 

ber  3ct§,  -cn(S),  -en,  rock 

ber  O^ciut),  -e§,  -e,  enemy 

ba§  gclb,  -(e)^,  -er,  field 

bag  gcttftcr,  -§,  — ,  window 

bic  5ctttC,  -n,  distance^J^ 

ba§  3tft,  -{e)^/  -e,  feast,  celebration 

fcft,  fast,  firm 

bag  Scucr,  -§,  — ,  fire 

bie  gcucrmoucr,  -n,  wall   of  fire, 

fiery  circuit 
ber  Seitetf^etn,  -g,  glare  of  fire  J^ 
fcurift,  fiery  N 

bie  'S'tthtl,  -n,  fiddle,  violin 
fintten,  str.,  to  find 
ber  Sinber,  -S,  — ,  finder 
dnftcr,  gloomy,  dark 
ber  Stf(6,  -(e)g,  -e,  fish 
bie  ^i'ddit,  -n,  surface 
bie  t]^(ammc,  -rt,  flame 
flammen/  iv.,  to  flame 
flattnn,  «'.,  to  flutter  (fein) 
ber  gtcift,  -eS,  diligence  ;  '^-^ 
fictftifl,  diligent,  industrious 
bie  3ttCBe,  -n,  fly 
fliegen,  s<r,,  to  fly  (fetn) 
Ptefteit,  s/r.,  to  flow  (fein) 
fllnf,  quick 

ber  Stufl,  -eg,  "e,  flight 
ber  t^nincl,  -g,  — ,  wing 
bie  3(ur,  -en,  meadow   i  j^ 
ber  "Shift,  -ffeg,  ^ffe,  streihm,  river 
folficn,  v.,  to  follow  (fcin) 
fort,  away,  on 

fort'Bcl)cn,  .?/?•.,  to  go  away  (fcin) 
fortfommcn,    str.,  to    come    on,   get 

along 
bie  {^ortfct^uud,  -en,  continuation 
bie  SraQe,  -n,  question 
fraoen,  10.,  to  ask  [Dame 

bie  Stan,   -en,   woman,   wife,  Mrs., 
frcmb,  strange 
bic  Srembe,  foreign  lands 
frcffen,  sir.,  to  devour 
bie  greitbc,  -n,  joy 
frcuett,  refl.,  to  rejoice 
ber  i^reunb,  -eg,  -e,  friend 
ftCUnbU^,  friendly,  pleasantly 
bcr  t^tteb^of,  -g,  ^e,  cemetery 
ber  3rtcbf)of§BattB»  -(e)g,  ^e,  walk  to 

the  cemetery      ^^ 


fricbltd)/  peaceable 

ftictCtt,  sir.,  to  freeze,  be  cold 

frif(!ft,  fresh 

frot),  glad 

froI)lt^,  cheerful,  joyous     ' 

friJmm,  pious,  gentle  '^  ' 

fnt^tbor,  fruitful 

frill),  early 

bic  Sti't^C,  early  morning 

fritftct,  formerly,  earlier 

ber  ;5riil)n«n,  -g,  -e,  spring 

bie  griifjliiiflSjctt,  -en,  springtime 

ber  3uif)S,  -eg,  ^e,  fox  ;  freshman 

fiiftlctt,  w.,io  feel 

fitfirett,  "'.,  to  lead 

ber  gUDrer,  -g,  — ,  guide,  leader 

bie  'Sn^lici\te,phir.,  wagoners 

fiiuf,  five 

fitnftn^rtnf  five-year-old 

fiittffiun'bcrt,  five  hundred 

bag  giinftrl,  -g,  —  fifth 

fiir,  prep,  ■with  ace,  for 

bic  3itrtf)t,  fear  /\ 

furdjtbor,  terribly 

fiird)tcn,  w.  rrjl.,  to  fear 

fiirdjtcrHtf),  adj.,  dreadful 

ber  Siitft,  -en,  -en,  prince 

ber  3u6,  -eg,  ^c,  foot 

bog  gutter,  -g,  food 


0 

ber  ^an(\,  -(c)g,  ^c,  walk,  way 
nouj,  quite;  ciu  ©anjcg,  a  whole,  a 

unit 
nnn^n^,  altogether,  cotnplete 
Bar»  entirely,  very 
bic  @nrbc,  -n,  sheaf 
ber  (ijortCU,  -g,  ^,  garden 
ber  Ooft,  -(e)g,  -^e,  guest 
ber  (*)ftttc,  -n,  -n,  husband 
bag  ^thdn'tte,  -g,  — ,  building 
iltben,  sir.,  to  give  ;  eg  flibt,  there  is 
bag  ©cbir'flC,  -g,  — ,  mountain  system 
Bcbo'rcn,  born 
bcr  ©cbon'fc,  -ng,  -n,  thought  icf. 

A  pp.  25) 
bag  ©cbttftt',  -g,  -c,  poem 
BCbttCbtB'  patient 
bie  «jcfof)r',  -en,  danger      V* 
flcfnijr'lttf),  dangerous 
ber  ©effi^r'tc,  -n,  -n,  companion    x 


306 


ELEMENTS   OF   GERMAN 


bic  ©cfoftt'titt,  -nen,  companion 

BCfal'tm,  sir.,  to  please 

BCfat'tifl,  obliging 

bic  ©cfon'SCnUQlbntC,  arrest,  capture 

ba§  ©cfottfittiS,  -ffc§,  -fjc,  prison- 

ba§  ©cflc'bcr,  -§,  plumage 

ba§  ©CfttJlC  -S,  -C,  feeling 

BC9Ctt,i>?"ep.  ■Jft'^A  ace,  against,  toward 

bic  @escnb,  -en,  region 

ba§  @cftcim'tti§,-ffeS,  -flc,  secret 

Rtfitimni^tioU,  secret      X 

St!^cn»  5<r,,  to  go,  walk  ;  fare  (fein) 

flcftor'djcn,  w.,  to  obey  '  ^ 

RtWtm,  w.,  to  belong 

BCftOt'fam,  obedient 

bcr  @etft,  -<c)§,  -cr,  ghost,  spirit ;  in- 
tellect 

flclott'BCtt,  w.,  to  reach,  get  to  (fctn) 

Bctb,  yellow 

bag  @clb,  -(e)§,  -cr,  money 

aeVm'ncn,  sir.,  to  succeed 

gelten,  sir.,  to  be  worth;  to  mean; 
bag  gilt  ntir,  that  means  me    -I^ 

Qentd^^f  softly,  comfortably  /I 

BCn,  prep,  w/<A  ace,  toward  / 

BCttOtt'r  exactly    f 

Benie'f^en,  sir.,  to  enjoy 

ber  ©cnof'fe,  -tt,  -n,  companion 

BenUB'/  enough 

bic  @eOBtatlIne^,  geography 

bag  (^tpva'^t,  -g,  — ,  imprint,  stampw 

BCta'bCf  just,  straight,  even  * 

QtVttht',  just,  honorable 

ber  ©crcdj'ttBfcitSfltttt,  -(e)g,  -c, 
sense  of  justice 

bcr  @eriif>t§'btcttct,  -g,  — ,  beadle 

BCttt,  lieber,  liebft,  gladly ;  ic^  l^abc 
— ,  I  like  ;  i<S)  tuc  eg  — ,  I  like  to  do 
it 

Qtvufttt',  touched,  moved 

BCfftof'tlB,  busy  >^ 

Qe^(f)t'f)tn,  sir.,  to  happen  (fein) 

BC[ftctt',  smart,  clever 

bag  @cfftcnf%  -{c)g,  -c,  present 

bic  ®t\{iiWtC,  -n,  story,  history 

BCfd)tncrbiB,  pliable 

BCfdjhJtttb',  quick     V-^ 

ber  ©cfcl'Ie,  -tt,  -tt,  companion 

bag  ©cfldjt',  -<e)g,  -er,  face 

bic  ©cftoU', -eit,  form    T 

BCftc'ftCtt,  sir.,  to  confess 

flefunb',  healthy,  well 


bag  @ctb''fc,  -g,  racket,  roar 

BCtrcu',  faithful 

BCtWOftr',  aware 

BCtuH^'rcn.  w'.,  to  grant 

bic  &CtvaW,  -ett,  power,  violence, 
force 

QCtvaVttQ,  powerful,  violent 

bag  ©ChJOttb',  -{e)g,  -^er,  garment     ^ 

bag  ©chicljr',  -g,  -e,  gun 

bic  ©CtocrbS'ftabt,  ^e,  commercial 
town,  industrial  city^_,,^ 

bag  ©ehiiftt',  -eg,  -e,  \^?ght 

BChJitt'ncit,  sir.,  to  wiu 

bag  ©CttJif'fCW,  -g,  — ,  conscience 

BCltJlfJ',  certain 

QCttiOli'nen,  w.  reft.,  to  become  accus- 
tomed 

nttnoWliih,  "sual 

ber  @i})fc(,  -g,  — ,  summit 

ber  ®lani,  -eg,  sheen,  glitter 

bag  @(a§,  -eg,  -^cr,  glass 

Blafcrn,  adj.,  glass 

Btauben,  «'.,  to  believe 

ber  ^(ctfttier,  -g,  — ,  glacier 

Btci(!ft,  «<(/.,  like;  at/y.,  immediately 

bag  (i^Iitlf ,  -{e)g,  luck,  hai)piuess 

Bliirflid),  happy;  luckily 

Bluljcn,  w.,  to  glow 

bic  (91ut»  -ett,  glow 

bic  ®naht,  grace,  pardon 

bag  ©otb,  -eg,  gold 

BOlbCtt,  golden 

ber  ®oWvtUCn,  -g,  shower  of  gold 

ber  ©otbfdjmicb,  -(e)g,  -e,  goldsmith 

bag  @olbftii(f ,  -eg,  -e,  gold-piece 

BOttfA,  gothic 

ber  ^ott,  -eg,  -^er,  God 

bag  ®vah,  -(e)g,  -^cr,  grave 

uvahen,  sir.,  to  dig 

Bvabe,  see  gerabc 

bcr  @taf>  -ett,  -ett,  count,  earl 

ber  ©rantf  -(e)g,  sorrow 

Btfttt,  gray 

bag  (Bvauen,  -g,  horror 

Btaufen,  w.,  to  shudder ;  eg  flvauft 
il^ttt,  he  shudders 

bag  @rauf en,  -g,  horror 

Btei§,  old,  hoary 

ber  @tobtan,  ruffian  ;  lout 

Broft,  large,  great 

BtofjarttBr  grand,  magnificent 

bic  ®viifit,  -tt,  greatness 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


307 


bic  ®VOfitUttn,  plur.,  grandparents 
bie  ®tOfnnuttCV,  ^,  graudmother 
ber  ^ro^tiatcr,  -^,  ^,  grandfather 
Btiitt,  green 

ber  @runb,  -(e)§,  -^e,  ground,  reason 
Qtiinben,  «'.,  to  establish,  found 
Btunbttftr  thoroughly 
Brilftctt,  w.,  to  greet 
gutfctt,  w. ,  to  peep,  gaze  slyly 
BUtbcn,  golden 
bie  @unft,  favor  \ 
gut,  good,  well 

ba3  (iitjmna'fium,  -§,  -ien,  prepara- 
tory school 

6 

bag  ^aav,  -(e)§,  -c,  hair 

IjaOcn,  w.,  to  have 

ber  fyabidit,  -3,  -e,  hawk 

ber  Qal)n,  -(c)^,  -"e,  cock,  rooster 

Iiald,  (idj-,  half  l^iay 

bee  ^QltifctcrtOfl,  -{e>3,  -c,  half-holi- 

bie  J&otftc,  -n,  half 

ftalten,  sir.,  to  hold,  stop;  —  toon, 
think  of 

ber  jammer,  -3,  ^,  hammer 

bie  ^anbr  ^c,  hand 

bie  Qant>axbtit,  -en,  fancy  work,  sew- 
ing 

ber  Iponbcl,  -3,  trade  ;  fight 

Iianbcdt,  w.,  to  treat,  act 

bie  OaUbc(Sftabt,  ^e,  commercial 
town 

fian^tn,  sir.  inlr.,  to  hang 

tliinoen,  w.  Ir.,  to  hang 

I) art,  hard 

ber  ©afe,  -n,  -n,  hare 

fiaffcn,  w.,  to  hate 

ftofjU*,  ugly 

ber  Qauih,  -e^/  breath 

!0(tU(f)Cn,  «'.,  to  breathe 

bag  fyau\it,  -(e)§,  "er,  head 

ftoit^tfa^lid),  principal 

ber  ^ttU^tfolj,  -eg,  "e,  principal  clause 

ber  ^au^t^(ht*)Cvt>miU,  -(e)§,  -e,  main 
emphasis 

bie  OoutJtftobt,  ^e,  capital  city 

bag  ^au§,  -eg,  ^er,  house;  5u  §auf(e), 
at  homo ;  nad)  ^auf(e),  home(ward) 

bag  ©ftuStlct,  -(e)g,  -e,  domestic  ani- 
mal 


I)Ct(ia,  holy,  sacred 

bag  Qeim,  -eg,  home 

I)Ctnt,  adv.  (towards)  home 

bag  ^cimattanb,  -<e)g,  -e,  home  coun- 
try 

bie  ^ctmlcfjr,  return  (home) 

ber  ^cimttics,  -g,  -e,  way  home 

bag  ^cimiue^,  -g,  homesickness 

IjCift,  hot 

I|Ctf;en,  str.,  to  be  called  ;  to  command 

licitev,  gay 

ber  J&clb,  -en,  -en,  hero 

ber  j&clbcnncift,  -eg,  -er,  heroic  spirit 

ftclfClt,  sir.,  to  help 

ficU,  bright,  light,  clear 

bie  ^cnne,  -n,  hen 

Ijcr,  along,  here,  hither 

l^crab'f  down,  downward 

ftcroUS',  out,  forth 

l^crb,  severe,  harsh 

fictbci',  hither,  up  to 

bie  i^tvhtvtie,  -n,  inn,  tavern 

ber  iocvb^t,  -(c)g,  -e,  autumn 

Ibcrciu',  in 

ftcritic'bcr,  down,  downward 

ber  ©err,  -n,  -en,  Mr^,  Lord,  master 

I^errUtf),  glorious  T 

Iftcr'fOBCtt,  tv.,  to  recite 

ficr^ftcUcu,  t«?.,  to  restore. 

ftcrum',  around 

(jcrum'fommcm  sir.,  to  knock  about, 
travel 

btVltn'tev,  down,  downward 

Jicrtior',  forth,  forward 

fittbOV'bvciittn,  sir.,  to  break  forth 
(fein) 

bag  OcrJf  -eng,  -en,  heart,  cf.  App.  25 

l^crjinntB,  heartily 

ftCUtC,  today 

ftcutlB,  a(/y.,  today's 

IftiC,  archaic  for  ^ter 

I)tcr,  here 

^icflfl.  locaJ 

ber  (piinmcl,  -8,  — ,  heaven,  sky 

:^tmmc(D(au,  sky-blue 

bie  C>immcts(aM{c),  -en,  elysian  fields 

bic  fyimmtl^^avbt,  -n,  heavenly 
sheaf 

bag  ©immctsadjt,  -(e)g,  light  of 
heaven 

bag  .€)tmmct§jclt,  -eg,  sky 

InmmUfd),  heavenly 


308 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


Jiin,  away,  along,  on,  thither 

IjtUOb',  down 

l)inbuird)',  through 

t)inein%  in,  within 

IliltUseU,  w.,  to  lay  down;  refl.,  lie 
down 

l)tnteir,  prep.  tv'Uh  dat.  or  ace,  behind 

bei-  <&ttttcrBrunb,  -(e)§,  ^c,  back- 
ground 

fiilt  ttttb  !)Cr,  to  and  fro 

Innmi'tev,  dowu(ward) 

lliftor'ifd),  historical 

Iiodi,  high  (^b^er,  l?0(f)ft) 

bie  ^ocflfdiulc,  -n,  university,  tech- 
nical school 

f)bd|ft,  extremely 

ber  i5of,  -e§,  ^e,  court,  yard 

Itoffen,  w.,  to  hoi>c 

bie  i^offttuitn,  -en,  hope 

bic  ©bljc,  -n,  height 

ber  i^o^lroeo,  -(e)^,  -e,  gorge 

f)Olt>,  gracious     i 

f)o(en,  w.,  to  get,  fetch 

ba?  Qolh,  -e^,  wood 

Ijdljcrn,  wooden 

tt'oven,  w.,  to  hear 

ba§  j&of^Jitat',  -3,  "^er,  hospital 

hiibftfl,  pretty 

ba§  ©iificUottli,  -e§,  "er,  hilly  country 

I)itncn,  10.,  to  veil,  cover,  clothe 

ber  jOujib,  -(e)§,  -e,  dog 

Jmitbcrttoufenti,  100,000.  Cf.  App.  47 

ber  QmxfitV,  -§,  hunger  :  —  Ijabin,  to 
be  hungry 

I)ttnan8»  hungry 

l)it))fcit,  w.,  to  hop.  juinp(fein) 

ber  J&ut,  -e§,  "e,  hat 

bie  ^Ut,  care,  protection  .,/ 

I)ittcn,  w.,  to  guard,       take  care  of    ' 

ber  J&utcr,  -§,  — ,  guardian,  shepherd 

bie  ^ittte,  -n,  hut 


inbeffeu,  meanwhile ;  while 
ber  ^fUtiifatttl^  -^,  -e,  indicative 
bie  ^iibuftrie',  -n,  industry 
inbuftricU',  industrial 
ber  Ont)nltf  -§,  conteutsv 
imtCtt,  within  . 

iuSflCfomt',  altogether    X^ 
ber  Snf^cftor,  -^,  -en,  inspector 
iutcrcffOttt',  interesting 
ilttcrcffie'tCtt,  w.  rejl.,  lo  be  interested 
bie  ^nucrfiou',  -en,  inversion 
iro'nifd),  ironicj|l 

ivvit),  wrong     IT  /* 

trrctt»  ^t?.  »"e/Z.,  to  err,  be  mistaken    / 
ber  ^ri'tum,  -^,  "er,  error,  mistake 
ba§  atn'Ucu,  -§,  Italy 
italic'ttifrf),  Italian 


io»  yes,  indeed 
{nflCtt,  "'.,  to  hunt,  chase 
ber  ^Hflcr,  -§,  — ,  hunter,  huntsman 
ba^  3rtl)r,  -e^,  -e,  year 
bic  3nl)rcsjnl)l,  -en,  date;  year 
bag  3rtt)Cl)im'ticrt,  -g,  -e,  century 
iiiljrlicl},  yearly 
ber  3al)rmnrft,  -§,  ^e,  fair 
bev  Oammcr,  -§,  pain,  sorrow,  long- 
ing 
initduett/  w.,  to  shout  with  joy     f"^ 
ic  .  .  .  bcfto,  the  .  .  .  the 
Jcbcr,  every, each 
jcb0d)'»  however 
ientanb,  someone,  somebody 
iener,  that,  the  former,  he 
ic^tB,  present 
UHt,  now 
iunfi,  young 
ber  Suttfic,  -n,  -n,  boy 
bie  ^uuflfvnu,  -en,  maiden 
ber  ^uuBtittB,  -§,  -e,  youth 
iihlBft,  recently 


3Iir»  your;  you 

iftr,  her ;  their 

immcr,  always 

tmmcrbor,  ever 

ber  SmtJcrtttiU',  -§,  -e,  imperative 

ba§  3m|)crfcft,  -§,  -e,  preterite 

itt,  prep.  iot7/i  dat.  or  ace,  in,  into 

inbem',  while;  in  that 


ber  Sotfcr,  -§,  — ,  emperor 
bag  S!atfcrrct*,  -g,  -e,  empire 
fftU,  cold 

ber  ^omcrab'r  -en,  -en,  comrade 
ber  ^om^Jf,  -e8,  -"e,  fight,  struggle, 
battle 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


309 


fiimtifem  w.,  to  struggle,  fight 

bie  JJanilC,  -n,  can 

bie  UapH,  -n,  cap 

bie  Uavtt,  -n,  map 

bie  Sotoftro'iJ^c,  -n,  catastrophe 

bcr  Soter,  -^,  — ,  male  cat 

bie  Jialfc,  -n,  cat 

faufett/  M'.,to  buy 

ber  Slaufmann,  -{e)g,  ^er,  merchant 

(^aufleute) 
laum,  hardly,  scarcely 
tef}Vtn,  w.,  to  turnj 
feitt,  no,  not  any 
icuntn,  irr.,  to  know,  be  acquainted 

with,    Cf.  App.  88 
ber  tcrr,  -(e)§,  -e,  fellow 
fif crlfif  cockadoodledoo ! 
ba§  ^ittb,  -eg,  -er,  child 
ber  ^ittbcrRittt,  -{e)g,  -e,  child's  mind 
bie  ^irdde,  -n,  church 
ber  Sirftturm,  -3,  H,  church-tower, 

steeple 
flor,  clear 
bie  ^(affC/  -n,  class 
f(affifd),  classical 
fleibettr  w'.,  to  clothe 
bie  ^leibuuB,  -en,  clothing 
fltin,  small,  little  [school 

bie  tteinftnberfditttc,  -n,  elementary 
iUttevtt,  w.,  to  climb  (fein) 
bag  ^lima,  -§,  climate 
fUltSen,  str.,  to  resound,  ring 
bag  ^(oftet,  -§,  ";  convent 
Hufl,  wise,  clever 
ber  $$(umt)eu,  -«,  — ,  lump 
ber  ^nabe,  -n,  -n,  boy,  lad 
bie  Slneiiie, -n,  tavern       C^ 
ber  Sod),  -(e)§,  ^e,  cook 
toUttn,  IV.,  to  boil,  cook 
bie  Sodjin,  -nen,  cook 
fol)Ifd)ltiOtJ,  black  as  coal 
ber  Somet',  -en,  -en,  comet 
fommen,  str.,  to  come  (fein) 
ber  Sbnifl,  -8,  -e,  king 
bie  JliintBttt,  -nen,  queen 
fontBttdl,  royal 

bag  tottiBtCtft,  -g,  -e,  kingdom 
ber  Soniunfttb',  -g,  -e,  subjunctive 
fbnnen,  w.,  to  be  able,  can,  may 
bcr  So^jf ,  -eg,  H,  head  '[tic 

bag  SoDfredmettf  -g,  mental  arithme- 
bag  Sortt,  -<«)^,  ^er,  grain,  corn 


bcr  SbrtJcr,  -g,  •-,  body 

foimotlDti'tU^/  cosmopolitan 

foften,  w.,  to  cost 

bie  JlofteiU  pi-,  cost,  expense 

ber  SlroflCttf  -g,  — ,  collar 

bie  Jlraft,  H,  strength,  force  V' 

froitf ,  sick,  ill 

ber  Sl'reusjus,  -g,  ^e,  crusade 

fried) en,  str.,  to  creep 

bev  S^ricfl,  -eg,  -e,  war 

friCflCtt,  «'.,  to  get,  catch      ^^.-^ 

ber  JJriCflcr,  -g,  — ,  warrior 

bie  ^rottC,  -n,  crown 

bie  R'rbUUng,  -en,  coronation 

bie  Sriicfe,  -n,  crutch 

bag  Siitftlcltt,  -g,  — ,  chick 

bie  KuficJ,  -n,  bullet 

bie  Sul),  ^e,  cow 

fiifti,  cool 

fitl^n,  brave,  daring,  bold 

fulturcU',  cultural 

bie  Sunft,  'e,  art 

ber  Siinfttcr,  -g,  — ,  artist 

bie  Suttftftattc,  -n,  home  of  art 

bag  Sunftitierf,  -g,  ~t,  work  of  art 

ber  SiH)fcrftcd)cr,  -g,  — ,  steel  en-^V/ 

graver 
ber  S^urfurft,  -en,  -en,  Prince  Elector 
lurU'reu,  w.,  to  euro 
ber  SutrfuS,  ^urfe,  course 
furj,  short 
fiiffen,  w.,  to  kiss 
bie  Sitfte,  -'    .coast,  shore 


((id)e(n,  w.,  to  smile 

Iad)Cn,  w.,  to  laugh 

bie  SoflC,  -n,  situation,  site 

bag  !i!anb,  -eg,  ^er,  land,  country 

bie  fianbc§morf,  -en,  border  (of  a 

country) 
ber  Sanbtttann,   -<e)g,  ^er,    farmer 

(fianbleute) 
bie  fianbfdittft,  -en,  landscape 
lana,  long 

lanne,  adv.,  long,  for  a  long  time 
lansfam,  slow 
lanaft,  long  since,  long  ago 
lunnmctltB,  tiresome 
loffctt,  atr.,  to  let,  to  leave,  to  make; 

madden  — ,  to  have  done 


310 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


latei'ttif $»  Latin 

lait,  soft,  mild 

ber  8auf,  -(e)g,  ^e,  course 

loufcn,  str.,  to  run  (fcin) 

bie  Saune,  -n,  mood  ;  bei  guter  — ,  in 

a  good  humor 
laujtfiem  «>.,  to  listen 
laut,  loud 

laxtttn,  w.,  to  run  ;  sound  ;  be 
lauitv,  sheer,  nothing  but 
ItbtXt,  w.,  to  live 
baS  ficbCtt,  -^,  life 
le6ettbf  living 
bie   fieben§art,    -en,    mode   of   life, 

good  manners 
bag  Selien§icil|ir,  -(e)§,  -e,  year  of  one's 

life 
leifen,  w.,  to  lick 
leiftnem  «'•,  to  lean 
(elbtcttf  «'.,  to  teach 
ber  gcljrcr,  -§,  — ,  teacher 
bie  gcftrcrittf  -non,  teacher 
ber  ficibfudjS,  -(e)^,  ^e,  fag 
Ici^t,  easy,  light 
ba§  gcib,  -eS,  sorrow,  harm 

ba§  gcibCtt,  -3,  — ,  suffering 
Ictb  tun,  to  hurt,  harm 
Icifc,  soft,  gentle 
bic  ficftion',  -en,  lesson 
bie  ficrftc,  -n,  lark 
Icxtltn,  w. ,  to  learn 
IcfCtt,  sir.,  to  read 
ber  fief  cr,  -g,  — ,  reader 
bic  ficfcrittf  -nen,  reader 
lc^t»  last ;  le^tereg,  the  last-named  ^ 
ICttthUn,  w.,  to  shine  ^ 

bie  fiettte,  plur.,  people 
ba§  fit*t,  -e§,  -er,  light 
lieb,  dear 

bie  fitc6e>  -n,  love  ;  beloved 
licbeit,  w.,  to  love 
UcbenStoitrbtB.  charming 
liebliA,  lovely,  charming  ^ 
ba§  fitcb,  -eg,  -er,  song 
bag  fitebetf  rfim.,  little  song 
liegen,  «<r.,  to  lie 
Itttb,  gentle 

bie  fiinbc,  -n,  linden-tree 
littf,  left ;  IxnU,  to  the  left,  at  the  left 
bie  fiorfc,  -n,  lock,  curl 
bag  fiorfcn,  -g,  enticement 
lotitvn,  w.,  to  loosen 


(obern>  w.,  to  flare 

ber  fiol^n,  -{e)g,  -"e,  reward,  pay 

ber  fiofat'bcjirf,  -g,  -e,  local  district   »/" 

bag  fio!^,  -eg,  -e,  lot,  fate  ^ 

Ibfeit,  ^t'-,  to  loosen,  solve 

losS'flCften,  s<r.,  to  start  for,  to  make 

for 
bie  fiitrfe,  -tt,  gap,  flaw 
bie  fiuft,  -"e,  air,  breeze 
bag  fiuftlctn,  -g,  dim.,  breeze 
bie  fiitflc,  -n,  lie 
ber  fiiignet  -g,  — ,  liar 
bie  fiitfiuerittf  -nen,  liar 
bie  fiuft,  ^e,  joy,  desire 
bag  fiitftQCtblt,  -g,  joyful  sound 
luftig,  jolly,  gay,  merrily     , 


( 


f 


m 

tnadjen,  w.,  to  make,  do  ;  eg  tnad^t  fld^, 

it  will  do 
bie  UJiaftt,  ^e,  power 
intidjtifl,  powerful,  mighty 
bag  mdtihtn,  -g,  — ,  girl 
bie  'MaffMUm,  -en,  warning 
ber  mai,  -(e)g.  May  4—^ 

bie  9J{aib,  maid 
bag  maU  -<e)g,  -c,  time 
ber  Wlaltt,  -g,  — ,  painter 
lit  an,  indef.  pron,,  one 
man  A,  many  a 
moneljcr,  many  a 
ber  9JIann,  -eg,  ^er,  man,  husband 
ber  artantct,  -g,  ^,  cloak 
ber  TiavUpla^,  -eg,  ^e,  market-place 
tttarfil)tcrcn,  w.,  to  march  along 
ntri^tQ,  moderate 
bie  9)lattt,  -n,  meadow    \ 
bie  ^lan§,  ^e,  mouse 
bie  SUicbtsin',  medicine 
ber  aWccrcsifiJtCBci,  -g,  surface  of  sea 
mcljt,  more 
bie  Wflc\)na\iU  plural 
bie  9)tcUc,  -n,  mile,  league 
incin,  my 
metncn,  «'.,to  mean;  to  think;  to 

say 
tneift,  mostay) 
tltciftcnS,  mostly 
ber  ^ItiHtv,  -g,  — ,  master 
niCttcntanB,  adj.,  for  miles 
ber  ajicnfdl,  -en,  -en,  human  being 


S 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


311 


Ittctfctt,  w.,  to  note,  observe 

bag  mc^tv,  -8,  —  knife  / 

bic  9JUCUC>  -n,  mien,  manner*-^ 

bie  WiQvation',  -en,  migration 

mitb,  mild 

bie  9Jti(tie,  mildness,  generosity 

bte  WiUion',  -en,  million 

ber  WlUion'dv',  -8,  -e,  millionaire 

bie  WtnWtt,  -n,  minute 

niit,   prep,    with    dat.,    with;    adv., 

along 
tnttchtait'ber,  together 
bag  UJattclb,  -§,  pity 
niit'fdjJUOrmCtt,  w.,  to  wander  along 
bag  arattet,  -g,  — ,  means 
mittclnltcrllrf),  mediteval 
ber  9jattclDunft,  -<c)g,  -e,  center 
mittlerr  middle,  central 
nitttlcrnieilc,  meanwhile 
ber  9JItttltl0d).  -g,  -e,  Wednesday 
bas>  yjiobei,  -8,  — ,  furniture 
bag  iWiobarijilfShiort,  -(e)g,  ^er,  mo- 
dal auxiliary 
tltOBClt,  «'.,  may,  like 
mofl(td),   possible;   nxbfllic^ft    flut,   as 

good  as  possible 
ber  a^oitb,  -(e)g,  -c,  moon 
ber   artonbcnfdietiu   -g,   moonshine, 

moonlight 
bag  9)toos>,  -eg,  -e,  moss 
IttOOfin.  mossy 
ber  iUtorb,  -{e)g,  -e,  murder 
ber  iUtorber^  -g,  — ,  murderer 
tuorncn,  tomorrow 
ber  9JiornCtt,  -g,  — ,  morning 
bag  SWorncntrot,  -<e)g,  dawn 
morQenS,  arfv.,  in  the  morning 
mitbC,  tired 
bie  BRutte,  -n,  trouble ;  fi^  —  fleben,  to 

take  i)ains 
ber  Munb,  -eg,  -c  or  ^er,  mouth 
mituben,    w.,    to    empty    (said   of   a 

stream) 
bag  aWiinftcr,  -g,  — ,  cathedral      ^ 
muntev^  brisk,  cheerfully 
bag  ajtufc'um,  -g,  a«ufe'en,  museum 
iniiffcn,  ^o.,  to  be  obliged  to 
ber  ''Mut,  -(e)g,  mood  ;  courage  ;  guten 

SWutg  fein,  to  be  of  good  courage  ;  eg 

ift  mir  ju  aJhtte,  I  feel 
bte  Whtttcr,  -,  mother 
bie  aJiuttcrlicbe,  mother's  love 


Itad),  prep,  with  dai.,  to,  toward ; 
after ;  according  to 

ttotfi'blicfctt,  w.,  to  look  after 

nadibem,  co7ij.,  after 

nddi'tcnftn,  w.  irr.,  to  consider,  me- 
ditate 

ber  9}aAfomme»  -n,  -n,  successor 

nddift,  next 

bie  9laHit,  ^e,  night 

nS(fttttft,  nightly 

bag  9}aAt(icb,  -(e)g,  -er,  even-song 

Urtf)  (na^er,  ncid^ft),  near 

bie  9{(i6c,  -n,  neighborhood 

ber  5lamc(n),  -ng,  -n,  name 

Uftmeit^,  by  name  of,  named 

bie  92ationari|t)mnc,  national  hymn 

bie  9latliV'lefiVC,  -n,  nature-study 

bie  9iatur'niifTcttfdjnft,  -en,  natural 
science 

ber  9!e6e(,  -g,  — ,  fog,  mist 

ber  9Iebclftrcif,  -g,  -en,  wreath  of  fog 

ItetiCU,  prep,  toith  ace.  and  dal.,  beside 

ber  9^e6ettfa^,  -eg,  ^e,  subordinate 
clause 

ber  9icffe,  -n,  -n,  nephew 

neftnttn,  sir.,  to  take 

neioeit,  w.,  to  bend,  incline 

neln,  no 

nenttcn,  irr.,  to  call,  to  name,  cf.  App. 
88 

bag  91  eft,  -(e)g,  -er,  nest 

ncu,  new  / 

UtUiltCrin,  curious,  inquisitive 

Utun,  nine 

licuujcfint,  nineteenth 

Mltftt,  not 

Ut^tS),  nothing 

nlc,  never 

ntcber,  adv.,  down 

bie  92tcber(aae,  -n,  defeat 

uicbrifl,  low 

ulcmnrsi,  never 

nicmnnb*  nobody,  none 

nimmer,  never 

nod),  still,  yet;  nor;  —  einmol,  once 
more 

UOtf)  cin,  another 

ber  9lorbcn,  -g,  north 

UOtbtfll),  northern 

novnxaV,  normal,  natural 


312 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


bie  dloi,  "c,  need,  trouble  ;  e^  tut  — , 

it  is  necessary 
niittQCU,  IV.,  to  press,  insist,  compel 
ba^  ^lotn^bntti,  -(e)g,  -^er,  notebook 
nn,  well ! 

ber  9lu,  moment,  trice,  jiffy 
bte  9lummer,  -n,  number 
nun,  adv.,  now  ;  iiUerj.,  well! 
nur,  only 
bie  9m,  ^f[e,  nut 

Ob,  whether,  if  (I  wonder)  if 
Obtn,  overhead,  above 
ObcnhtU',  superficially  \/ 
bie  Dbcrflitdjc,  -n,  surlifce 
ObQirtti)',  although 
Obiflf  cidj.,  above    ;     ' 
OAl\tn,  w.,  to  study,  "  dig  " 
ber  Cbcm,  -^,  breath 
obcr,  or 

ber  Dffi3t«•^  -3,  -e,  officer 
ijffncn,  w.,  to  open 
^\\\\t,j>rep.  with  ace,  without 
bag  Cftr,  -{c)§,  -en,  ear 
ber  Dnfct,  -§,  — ,  uncle 
orbentdd),  proper,  orderly 
bie  Orbnung,  -en,  order 
bie  DrbtC,  -S,  command,  order 
ber  Drt,  -{c)§,  ^er,  place  <X- 
bic  Drtfj^oft,  -en,  village    J 
ijfttil!^,  eastern  / 


ba§  ^ft«xr,  -(e)g,  -e,  pair 

cin  Danr^  a  few,  a  couple 

ber  «PaIttft',  -e^,  ^e,  palace 

ber  ^anjcr,  -§,  — ,  armor  /C 

ba§  ^obicr',  -(e)§,  -e,  papdt 

iJU^Jtc'ren,  af^J.,  paper 

ber  ^o^jft,  -(e)§,  ^e,  pope 

Jjunfcn,  w'.,  to  fight 

ba§<)3ctf),-(e)§,  pitch 

bag  ^crfcft'f  -§,  -e,  perfect  tense 

ber  «Pfob,  -(e)§,  -e,  path 

ber  ^f (trrcr,  -§,  — ,  pastor 

ber  $faUf  -^,  -e,  peacock 

ber  ^fcnntJl,  -§,  -e,  farthing,  pe^ny 

bag  ^fcrb,  -(e)g,  -e,  horse 

iJftonjCtt,  w.,  to  plant 


bie  ^fltdltttCUC,  conscientiousness 

<jflutfcu»  w.,  to  pluck,  pick  J 

ber  ^flttfi,  -(e)g,  ^e,  plough      i 

bag  *4?fubt,  -(e)g,  -e,  pillow    'T** 

ber  »i<l)ili'ftcr,  -g,  — ,  Philistine 

4)ltfcn,  «'.,  to  pick 

ber  *P(att,  -(e)g,  ^e,  plan 

t)IaOeu,  «'-,  to  burst 

»)lblfUd),  sudden 

bie  *-l.»ocf!c',  -(e)n,  poetry 

ber  *|Joct',  -en,  -en,  poet 

iJOli'tlfd),  political 

ber  ^.^dften,  -g,  — ,  post  . 

bie  ^radlt,  glory,  splendor  / 

\ivM)i\^,  splendid(ly) 

bag  ^riifcnSr  ^rafen'tia,  present  tense 

tireu^tfd),  Prussian 

ber  ^ricftcr,  -g,  — ,  priest 

bev  ^rinj,  -en,  -en,  prince 

bie  *4Jrtnjcf'fln,  -nen,  princess 

Vrobtc'rcu,  w.,  to  try 

bie  4)rofa,  prose 

4)titfen,  w.,  to  test,  to  prove 

bie  ^-Priifnun,  -en,  examination,  test 

bag  qjult,  -(c)S,  -c,  desk 

bev  4^uuft,  -(e)g,  -e,  dot,  period 


bie  Clunl,  -en,  torture,  trouble 
bie  Ciucnc,  -n,  spring,  source 


ber  9Inbe>  -n,  -n,  raven 

rtidicn,  w.,  to  avenge,  take  revenge 

bag  Siiibliien,  dim.,  wheel ^k 

ber  JRanb,  -{e)g^^er,  edge,  margin 

rrtfd),  quick  Y 

troftcn,  to.,  to  rest 

ber  '^ai,  -(e)g,  advice 

tntcn,  .'itr.,  to  guess,  advise 

ber  Statgebet,  adviser,  counsellor 

bag9fiatf(fr,-g,—,  riddle 

roul),  rough 

ber  JHaum,  -(e)g,  H,  space,  room 

riiumcn,  w.,  to  clear 

tftufdien,  w.,  to  rustle 

bag  Sicorntjmnofinm,  -§,  -ien,  high- 
school  (scientific) 

bie  9iei!^enmaf^ine,  -n,  counting-ma- 
chine 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


313 


rcdiltCU,  «'.,  to  reckon,  do 

ba^  dieifinen,  -§,  — ,  arithmetic 

Vttht,  right 

bie  dicbe,  -n,  speech,  discourse ;  eine 
—  I^alten,  to  malve  a  speech 

rcbettf  w.,  to  speali,  tallc 

bag   iHcfortn'Qtjmnafiuitt,    -S,    -en, 
high-school 

rCflC,  active 

bcr  dUfitn,  -t.  — ,  rain 

bic  9{egen)eit,  -en,  rainy  season 

bag  dicidt,  -(e)g,  -e,  reahn,  empire 

ret*,  rich 

retdjenf  «'.,  to  reach,  hand 

ber  9{eiff|tum/  -(e)g,  ^er,  wealth,  riches 

rcif,  ripe 

bag  9ieife)ettnnt§,  -fteg,  -ffc,  final  ex- 
amination ;  graduating  diploma 

bie  Mcifte,  -n,  row,  turn 

ber  9ictf)CU>  -g,  — ,  dance 

rein,  clean,  pure 

bie  JRcifc,  -n,  trip,  journey 

rcif  en,  «-.,  to  travel  (fcin) 

ber  9ictfent»e,  -n,  -n,  traveller 

ret^en,  sir.,  to  tear,  snatch 

ber  92ettergmoun,  -{e)§,  ^er  (-Icute) 
rider,  cavalryman 

rctten,  sir.,  to  ride  (horseback)  (fein) 

ber  9ieij,  -eg,  -e,  charm 

reijcn,  «'.,  to  charm  ;  to  aggravate 

rctjcnb,  charming 

bie  ateHfiion',  -en,  religion 

bcr  die\t)cU\  respect 

retten,  «'.,  to  save,  rescue 

rtd)ten,  »'.,  to  direct 

ber  SHirtjter,  -g,  — ,  judge 

ridjtlji,  right 

ber  9Ji(fttfDru*,   -{e)g,   -^e,   sentence, 
judgment  • 

ber  JRieBcI, -§,  — ,  bolt^      v 

ber  JRicfc,  -n,  -n,  giant       ^ 

tinoen,  str.,  to  wrestle,  wring 

rins§,  <tdv.,  around  V^ 

rtttBSnm',  adv.,  all  arAund     ^ 

tlnnen,  sir.,  to  run  (said  of  water) 

ber  9iitt,  -(e)g,  -e,  ride,  journey 

ber  miiiev,  -g,  —  knight 

roman'ttfdi,  romantic 

ber  91bmcr,  -g,  — ,  Roman 

rbmtftfl,  Roman 

ber  9idfenfranj,  -{e)g,  ^e,  rosary 
*1  bag  9ioff,  -fjcg,  ^ffe,  horse,  steed  ^ 


rot,  red 

ber  9Jnf,  -eg,  -e,  call,  reputation 

tnfcu,  sir.,  to  call 

bie  Stulje,  rest,  peace 

ruljen,  w.,  to  rest 

rnfiifl,  quiet     *^  y 

bcr  9inl)m,  -eg,  fame    r 

riitimen,  tf.,  to  praise,  boast 

rittjren,  «<'.,  to  touch,  move,  stir/^ 

runjltO,  wrinkled 

bie  aiiitftiafeit,  -en,  activity,  energy 


?^ 


bcr  ®aal,  -eg,  ©ale,  hall,  audience 

chamber 
ber  S'dbeU  -g,  — ,  sword,  saber 
bie  Sadie,  -n,  thing  ;  case,  cause 
frtftflfrflr  «'0-.  Saxon 
fnnen,  ?<'.,  to  say 
ber  SamStog,  -g,  -c,  Saturday 
fnubtfl,  sandy 
fonft,  gentle  ^ 
ber  Sfinoer,  -g,  — ,  singer 
ber  So^»  -eg,  ^e,  sentence 
fauer,  sour,  hard,  bitter 
bag  Sauerfrant,  -(c)g,  sourkrout 
fiiumcn,  tv.,  to  linger,  hesitate 
fdufefn,  to.,  to  rustle 
fdiaben,  w.,  to  harm,  hurt 
bag  ©iftnf,  -(e)g,  -c,  sheep 
ber  'ZHt'dUt,  -g,  — ,  shepherd 
ber  ®d|(tn,  -(e)g,  -e,  sound,  ring 
ff^aUen,  w.,  to  ring,  resound 
fdiatten,  «'.,  to  rule,  hold  sway 
fdiamen,  refl.,  to  be  ashamed 
bie  iSdiontie,  shame 
ber  <S(f|atten,  -g,  — ,  shadow,  shade 
ber  Sd|a0,  -eg,  -"e,  treasuie      '^'^ 
ftfjoucn,  «'.,  to  look,  see  -^     ." 
bie  Sdieibe,  -n,  pane,  disk  1/ 
fdieiben,  -f^n,  to  depart  (fein) 
ber    Sdietn,    -(c)g,    -e,    appearance; 

sheen,  light 
fdieinen,  sir.,  to  seem,  appear 
bie  ©(HeUc,  -n,  bell 
fdjelten,  sir.,  to  scold 
fd)enfen,  w.,  to  present,  give 
f^trfen,  «'.,  to  send  ;  re/?.,  to  beseem, 

be  proper 
f^teben,  sir.,  shove,  push 
fiftlef,  crooked 


^ 


314 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


f thicken,  str.f  to  shoot 

ber  ©*Ub,  -<e)g,  -e,  shield 

bic  ^^{a6;ii,  -en,  battle 

ber  iS^taf,  -{e)3,  sleep 

f^Iafen,  s^r.,  to  sleep 

f  tbtaseUf  5^?'.  re/?. ,  to  fight ;  kill,  strike 

f*lC(I)t,  baday),  evil(ly) 

\^U\6)t\x,  str.,  to  creep  (fein)  Vp 

ftfttic^Ctt,  5^n,  to  lock,  close,  conclude 

fftttcfttidj,  finally 

fftliinm,  bad    ^ 

baS  ©cljtoft,  -ffe§,  ^ffer,  castle     '/ 

(^(umtncrn,  w.,  to  slumber,  doze 

ber  <Sd)(u^,  -ffc§, -^ffe,  end,  conclusion 

fdjmcrfcn,  ^/^.j  to  taste 

bie  iSdjmictie,  -n,  smithy 

fcftmlcbCtt,  w.,  to  forgo  / 

f^mitrfen,  w.,  to  adorn,  decorate  'v 

f«J)lttU^t0,  dirty 

ber  <S$na6et,  -§,  ^,  bill,  beak 

ber  'S^xxtt,  -§,  snow 

\^\Xttht't>tdt,  snow-covered 

bie  Sdinccfloife,  -n,  snowflake 

ber  (©tftttcibcr,  -§,  — ,  tailor 

fc^nctcn,  w.,  to  snow 

fdjllcH,  quick 

bie  ©dmcHiflfcit,  rapidity 

ber  8d)nitter,  -§,  — ,  reaper 

bie  (©fthtttcrin,  -nen,  reaper 

fftttitrctt,  v).,  to  strap,  lace  up 

ftfinttrrctt,  «'.,  to  hum 

fdjOtt,  already 

fd) bu,  beautiful ;  interj.,  very  well ! 

bie  <SA)'6xx\itxi,  -en,  beauty 

ber  <Bil)Q^,  -e§,  "-t,  lap,  bosom 

ber  @$tcdfen,  -S,  — ,  terror,  fright, 
horror 

fdjrcctnd),  dreadful  ^  ' 

fdjreiben,  str.,  to  write 

ft^reten,  5<?'.,  to  scream,  squeak,  yell 

ber  ©tfjritt,  -W,  -e,  step 

ber  ®d)ulb,  -(e)3,  -c,  shoe 

ber  ®d)U()ma^er,  -§,  — ,  shoemaker 

ber  (S*utbcfuft,  -(e)§,  -e,  school-at- 
tendance 

bie  iS^utb,  -en,  debt,  guilt 

bie  8$ule,  -n,  school 

ber  <B^Xx\tX,  -§,  — ,  pupil,  student 

bie  6d)iiterin>  -nen,  pupil,  student 

ber  (SdjuIIe'^rerr  -§,  — ,  school-teacher 

bie  (Scljultcr,  -n,  shoulder 

ba§  iS^U(n)Cfcu>  -§,  school-system 


bie  84u()eit,  -en,  school-time 

ber  6lf)Uftcr,  -^,  — ,  shoemaker,  cob- 
bler 

f^Uttcftt,  w.,  to  shake 

ber  (S^U^,  -{e)§,  protection 

fd)it)ad)U^f  weakly 

ber  ©^mStftlittB,  -§,  -e,  weakling 

ber  (SdltvaQCt,  -§,  -^j  brother-in-law 

bie  iSd)tutiocrin,  -nen,  sister-in-law 

ber  ©ifttMOttj,  -e§,  %  tail 

fdimarmcn,  w.,  to  gush ;  express 
enthusiasm ;  wander  (fein) 

f^tuarj,  black 

ber  ©(fittJarjhuilb,  -(e)g,  ^er.  Black 
Forest 

ftfltucbcttf  ^f'.,  to  hover  (fein)  ^ 

ber  Sijjjtjctf,  -(e)§,  -e,  tail      •''^ 

ftf)tUCtncn>  «^n,  to  be  silent 

ba^  ®ii)it)eiocnr  -S,  silence 

bie  S^tveij,  Switzerland 

f  Atuer,  heavy,  difficult 

ber  @(l)tvcrt)unft,  -e§,  -e,  centre  of 
gravity 

bn^  (edliuert,  -(e)§,  -er,  sword    / 

bag  Sdltticrtscflttt,  -«,  rattling  of 
swords 

bie  Sdinieftet,  -n,  sister 

fd)tuiens,  difficult,  hard     K 

fdltDUtgen^  5^r,,  to  swing,  flutter  ;  refl., 
to  vault 

f  d)tt)0ten,  */r.,  to  swear,  vow] 

ber  SdittJttt,  -(e)§,  ^e,  vow,  oath 

fcft§,  six 

bag  ©ctfjftcl,  -§,  — ,  sixth 

fC(I|Siunbfie&3tn,  seventy-six 

fcdljel^n,  sixteen 

ber  ©cc,  -§,  -n,  lake 

bie  ©cc,  -n,  sea 

bie  ©cctc,  -n,  soul 

ber  (Scoettf  -g,  — ,  blessing  4^ 

\t\stXX,  str.,  to  see  / 

fcljr,  very 

bie  iSeibe,  -n,  silk  , 

fclbCtt,  silken 

fcitt,  his 

fcttt,  str.,  to  be  (fein) 

f  etnctltienenr  for  his  sake 

fcit,  prep,  with  dat.,  conj.,  since  ' 

bie  Scitc,  -n,  side 

fcttCttS,  prep,  ivith  gen.,  on  behalf  of 

bie  (Scfun'bc,  -n,  second 

fclbcr,  fctbft,  self 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


315 


fcWcn,  seldom 

ba§  Scmc'ftcr,  -§,  — ,  semester 
ber  (Sena' tor,  -§,  -en,  senator 
fe^cn.    It}.,  to    put,  set;  refl.,  to   sit 

down,  be  seated 
feufjCtt,  w.,  to  sigh 
fl^,  liimself,  herself,  itself,  oneself, 

themselves 
fi^cr,  sure,  safe 
fie,  she;  they 
fleben,  seven 

flefienftUttbert,  seven  hundred 
ba§  <B\thlt\i\\it\,  -i,  —,  seventeenth 

fieben,  sir.,  to  boil 

ber  <£iCB,  -(e)^,  -c,  victory 

ficgeitf  "if.,  to  be  victorious,  conquer   ^ 

flcl),  behold!  lo!  ? 

ba§  <Stt6er,  -§,  silver 

fttberljen,  bright  as  silver 

f fib  cm,  adj.,  silver 

finoen,  sir.,  to  sing 

finteu,  str.,  to  sink  (feln) 

ber  Sinttr  -(e)§,  -e,  sense  ;  mind 

finnen,  x<r.,  to  meditate 

bic  8ttte,  -n,  custom 

fit^en,  sir.,  to  sit 

ber  8mar(iob'  -(c)^,  -e,  emerald 

fo,  as,  so,  then,  thus,  indeed 

fobaitt',  as  soon  as  f 

fofott',  at  once,  immediately  ^** 

fogat',  adv.,  even 

fogcnannt,  so-called 

foSletd)',  immediately 

ber  iSo!)n,  -(e)^,  -^e,  son 

fold),  such 

ber  (eo(bnt^,  -en,  -en,  soldier 

fdUett,  «'.,  shall,  ought ;  be  to,  be  said 

to 
ber  <eommcr,  -3,  — ,  summer 
fonberbar,  strange,  queer 
bie  Sonne,  -n,  sun 
ber  Sonncnfrtiein,  -§,  ramshine 
ber  Sonncnftraf)!,  -i,  -en,  sunbeam 
fonnin,  sunny 
f onft,    otherwise ;    at    other    times ; 

formerly 
iSonntttflmorfJcn,     -§,     — ,     Sunday 

morning 
bte  Sorge,  -n,  care,  worry,  sorrow 
fornenfrct,  care-free 
f^ii^en,  w.,  to  look,  search,  peer 
f^annen,  w.,  to  stretch  ;  interest 


f))rit,  late 

ber  SDai^,  -e§,  -en,  sparrow 

ber    StJOjicr'fiana,  -(e)§,  -^e,   walk, 

stroll 
ber  ®t>C^t,  -§,  -e,  woodpecker 
ber  S|)erltns,  -^,  -e,  sparrow 
ber  StltCgct,  -§,  — ,  mirror,  surface 
ba§  8t)iel,  -eS,  -e,  game 
ftJtclcn,  w.,  to  play 
ber  SiJtctmonn,   -(e)g,   ^er  (-leute), 

fiddler,  player 
fptnncn,  sir.,  to  spin 
ber  S^orn,  -(c)§,  ©jjoren,  spur 
bie    S|)rad)C,   -n,   speech,  language ; 

einc  —  [?alten,  to  make  a  speech 
fprc^cn,  sir.,  to  speak 
fVticftcn,  sir.,  to  sprout  (fein) 
fliringcn,  str.,  to  spring ;  leap  (fein) 
ber  («Dro6,  -ffe§,  -ffe  (bte  e^nofie,  -n), 

scion,  shoot,  sprout. 
f^rnbeln,  «'.,  to  gush  forth  (fein) 
bte  <St)n(c,  -n,  shuttle 
bte  ®|)nt,  -en,  trace,  track 
f))tircn,  w.,  to  trace,  scent;  notice, 

feel 
ber  'Z\(iti\,  -e3,  -en,  state 
ftaot(id)  adj.  (belonging  to  the)  state 
ber  Stab,  -(e)3,  "c,  stafl",  rod 
bte  Stabt,  "e,  city 
ber  Staljl,  -(e)^,  -"e,  steel 
ber  ^XtiVi.,  -W,  H,  stable 
ber  Stantnt,  -(e)g,  ^e,  stem,  trunk ; 

race 
ftorf,  strong 

ftarren,  »/>.,  to  stare,  glare,  gaze 
Si^Wt  prep,  with  gen.  instead  of 
ftatt'flnbcn,  sir.,  to  take  place 
ftc^en,  str.,  to  prick,  stab 
ftetf  en,  "'.,  to  place,  put ;  be 
ber  Stetfcn,  -§,  — ,  stick,  staff,  rod    / 
ftclftcn,  str.,  to  stand 
ftcljtcn,  str.,  to  steal 
ftciflcn,  str.,  to  climb  (fein) 
ber  Stein,  -(e)^,  -e,  stone 
bie  Stede,  -n,  spot,  place 
ftedcn,  w.,  to  place,  put 
ftcrbcn,  str.,  to  die  (fein) 
ber  Stern,  -(e)^,  -e,  star 
bag  Stcrntcin,  -§,  — ,  dim.,  little  star 
ftctlA,  steady,  continual 
bag  Sticffinb,  -e§,  -er,  stepchild 
bie  Stiefmutter,  '^,  stepmother 


316 


ELEMENTS   OF   GER'MAN 


'3-- 


ftill,  soft,  quiet,  silent 

bic  <Stimme,  -n,  voice 

ber  iStotf ,  -{e)^,  -"e,  stick 

ftOCfCU,  w.,  to  stop,  stick 

ber  <StoU,  -c§,  pride  /^ 

ftotj,  proud  -  [field 

bag  (Sto^^elfclbr  -{e)§,  -er,  stubble- 

ber  <Stovil),  -^e)^,  ^c,  stork 

itoffcn,  sir.,  to  push,  nudge,  jar 

ftrofcn,  w.,  to  punish 

ber  @tral)(,  -(c)§,  -en,  beam,  ray 

ftrableUf  w.,  to  beam 

ber  iStranb,  -{e)§,  -e,  strand,  shore 

bic  ^tva^t,  -n,  street 

bic  ©trcrfc,  -n,  distance  ^ 

ftrcrfettf  «'.,  to  stretch,  reach  . 

ber  ©trcit,  -(e)§,  -e,  fight,  quarrel     )( 

ftteltCtt,  str.  refl.,  to  quarrel 

ftrCttfl,  severe,  harsh  , 

bic  Strengc,  severity,  harshness    V 

ber    @trom,   -e^,  -"e,   stream,   river ; 

current 
ftntfl^iS,  unkempt,  rough  _ 
bie  Btubt,  -n,  room 
ba§  @tu6(etn,  dim.,  little  room  J 
bag  6tU(f ,  -(e)g,  -e,  piece  ' 

ber  Stubent',  -en,  -en,  student 
bic  Sttti»Ctt'tcnf|)roiJ)C,  -n,  students' 

slang 
bic  StUben'tim  -nen,  student 
ftubie'rcn,  w.,  to  study 
bag  Stttbium,  -g,  -ten,  study 
bic  8tttfe,  -n,  step  ;  grade 
ber  <StU^(,  -(e)g,  ^e,  chair 
fttt(^en>  IV.,  to  put,  jam 
bie  <SUtn'OC,  -n,  hour,  lesson 
ftutmen>  uk,  to  storm,  rush 
ftitrjcn,'  w.,   to   fall  (fein);  refl.,   to 

plunge  ( 

ftit^en,  w.,  to  support 
fU^tn,  w.,  to  seek,  look  for 
ber  iSitbeu,  -g,  south 
fitblt^,  southern,  south 
bie  ^nntmt,  -n,  sum,  total 
fitft,  sweet 

bag  <St)ttoni)m'.  -(e)g,  -e(n),  synonym 
btcSjettCrie',  scenery 


bag  Xa\,  -{e)g,  "er,  valley,  vale 
bic  Safeir  -n,  blackboard 


to  divide,  share   V 
tit,  sir.,  to  take  part      \ 


ber  Jan,  -(e)g,  -e,  day 

bag  ^naemerf,  -(e)g,  -e,  day's  labor 

tasHtil,  daily 

bic  Zaxmt,  -n,  fir-tree 

bic  Xantt,  -n,  aunt 

tonjCtt,  w.,  to  dance 

tat)fcr,  brave 

bie  Xaulie,  -n,  dove 

tftUfftCtt,  M'.,  to  exchange 

toujcttb,  thousand 

taufcubial)rtQ,  a<]j.,  a  thousand  years 
old 

tauf  enbmat,  a  thousand  times 

tcrJittlflJl,  technical 

bag  (ber)  Sett,  -{e)g,  -e,  part,  share, 
portion 

UUcn,  u\, 

tclt'neftmctt, 

tCltcr,  dear,  expensive  ;  beloved 

bag  Xf)ca'tev,  -g,  — ,  theatre 

tfiVOnm,  «'.,  to  be  enthroned 

SfturiiiBcriuotb,    -{c)g,    Thuringian 
Forest 

ticf,  deep 

ttcfblrtU,  dark  blue 

bag  3;tcr,  -(e)g,  -e,  animal 

ber  3;iffli,  -{e)g,  -e,  table 

bie  Zothttv,  "-,  daughter 

ber  lob,  -(e)g,  -e,  death 

bie  Sobcsftunbc,  -n,  hour  of  death 

toU,  crazy,  mad 

tbuettf  w'.,  sound 

ber  JoDf ,  -{e)g,  ^e,  pot,  kettle 

ber  %ov,  -en,  -en,  fool    >j^ 

bag  2;or,  -(e)g,  -e,  gate 

tot,  dead 

to  ten,  w.,  to  kill 

bag  Xotenamt,  -(e)g,  ^er,  burial  ser-  f 
vice  ' 

ber  JotettBrrifier,  sexton  '*-* 

ber  SotfditOBf  -^,  ^C/  murder,  man- 
slaughter 

bie  2robitton',  -en,  tradition 

tvagen,  str.,  to  bear,  carry  ;  to  wear 

bic  %xa\it,  -n,  tear 

tcHnenfeu^t,  damp,  tear-bedewed  ^ 

ber  Svauitt,  -<e)g,  H,  dream 

ttdumen,  w.,  to  dream 

ttaurid,  sad 

trcffcit,  str.,  to  meet ;  to  hit. 

tretben,  str.,  to  drive 

tventtettf  w.  to  separate 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


317 


trcten,  sir.,  to  step  (fetn) 

trcu,  faithful 

bie  Ircuc,  faithfulness,  fidelity 

triufcu,  sir.,  to  driulc 

ber  2;ritt,  -(e)§,  -e,  step,  footstep 

trot* en,  dry 

bie  !X:romntc(,  -n,  drum  '^ 

bev  Xvom\ft^ttv,  -^,  — ,  truiupeter 

bev  !Ivot}fen,  -^,  — .  drop 

ber  Xroft,-ffe^,-ffc, (cavalry)  company 

trbftcn,  w,,  to  comfort 

tro^cn,  w.,  to  defy 

tiidltig,  thorough  ;  splendid     . 

inn,  sir.,  to  do  \ 

bie  liirc,  -n,  door 

bev  Xurrn,  -(e)^,  ^e,  tower 

turncit,  w.,  to  takeKymuastie  exercise 

ber  lt)t)fltt§,  typhoid  fever 

It 

iiliel,  evil,  bad 

iibev,  prep,  wilh  ace.  and  dnt.,  over, 
above 

nbtvtinftommcn,  sir.,  to  agree  (fein) 

itticrfUli'veH,  w.,  to  couvict 

ubtvtom'mtn,  sir.,  to  come  over  (fein) 

nbevlt'ticn,  superior 

iibcrtc'flCU,  «?.,  to  consider 

itbcrfdiut'tcit,  w.,  to  cover 

itberfc^'cit,  w.,  to  translate 

itl)tt(l,  adj.,  over,  left 

bag  Ufcr,  -g,  — ,  shore,  strand 

bag  Ufcrnefditdit  -(C)^,  reedy  shore 

bie  llljr,  -eit,  watch,  clock 

nw,  prep,  wilh  ace.,  about;  wilh  inf., 

in  order  to 
itmat'wctt,  «;.,  to  embrace 
ier  Untnano,  society,  intercourse 
nm^t'btn,  sir.,  t»  surround 
umljcr',  around,  about 
umftfjne'f^en,  sir.,  to  contain,  bound 
UW'fc^CU,  'w.,  to  change,  turn 
Mlttfdttft',  adv.,  in  vain    >y 
unt'ftiitjen,  w.,  to  subvert,  overturn 
Um'tUtt,  sir.,  to  wrap 
Itttbcfottttt,  unknown 
unb,  and 

ungebunben,  unrestrained 
unnefiifir,  about  / 

unncfttltbcrt,  uuhinderedV 
ttltflcljorfom,  disobedient     J, 


Itnncrftbc,  uneven,  odd  Z 

bass  Uunctiim,  -g,  -C,  monster  1/ 
ttuntittfltd)/  unfortunate,  unlucky 
bie  UntUcvfitot',  -en,  university 
bag  XlniucrfltatS'tcfiCtt,  -g,  university 

life 
UnmoB'Hrfl,  impossible  W 
Uimitl^  useless 
>ag  Unredjt,  -<e)g,  wrong,  injustice 

v/nnfcr,  our 

Mtttcr,  prep,  with  dat.   and  ace.,   be- 
neath, below,  under 
ittttcrbriirf'cn,  w.,  to  oppress 
ber  Utttcrbrii'rfcr,  -g,  — ,  oppressor 
bie  Untcrbvit'cfitUQ,  -en,  oppression 
wntcrflC'bett,  adj.,  subject 
Un'tcracftCtt,  to  perish,  go  under 
ttn'tevotbncn,  ?".,  to  subject, 
ber  Unterri^t,  -g,  instruction 
bie  Untcrri^tftuitbc,  -n,  lesson,  les- 
son period 
bag  Unterri(i)t§tucfcn,  -g,  school-sys- 
tem 
UUtcrfdiei''bcn,  sir.  reft.,  to  differ,  dis- 
tinguish 
ber  lltttcrfdjicb,  -g,  -e,  dilference 
UMtcrtnu,  adj.,  subject    -^ 
unUcrmbBtnb,  dowerless;  upable 
UnUcrluunb'&ar,  invulnerable  v<' 
uniiilins,  uncounted,  innumerable 
bag    Urscftcim    -(e)g,   -e,    primitive 

rock 
bo8  Uv'teU,  -g,  -e,  judgment 


ber  JBotcr,  -g,  ^,  father 

bag    JBotctlonb,     -(e)g,     ^cr,    native 

country 
tjcrou'bcrn,  w.,  to  change,  alter 
bcrbcf'fcrn,  w.,  to  improve,  correct 
tjcrbtn'bcn,  sir.,  to  unite 
bie  SJetbiu'bUUQ,  union,  connection, 

society 
bCtbteit'ncn,  irr.,  to  burn.  Cf.  App.  88 
bag  JBcrbcr'bCtt,  -g,  destruction  \r 
tjcrbtc'nctt,  w.,  to  deserve,  earn    .  " 
bag  JBcrbicttft',  -(e)8,  -e,  desert,  earn- 
ings 
toerbin'fien,  w.  refl.,  to  hire  oneself 
bev  93crcltt',  -g,  -e,  club,  association  ; 
union,  company 


318 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


betei'nettf  w.,  to  unite,  join,  unify 
Ucrct'tttaen,  w.,  to  unite 
tJCrfet'ttacttf  10.,  to  make,   prepare, 

produce 
tjetffte'ftctt,  str.,  to  melt,  flow  away  ; 

pass  (fetn) 
t)Crful)'rCtt.  W',  to  lead  astray 
tJCtfiOtt'fiCtt,  past  , 

bie  fBevQan^Qtnl]t\t,  past  time    "/ 
tJCrflC'fiCtt,  s^'-.,  to  forgive 
DCrflC'tlCttS,  af^y.,  ill  vain      w 
tjerflc'tiett,  ««n,  to  pass  (fein)^ 
tjcrflcffcit,  «<n,  to  forget 
tjcranufit',  joyous,  happy 
ticrfirb'ftcrtt,  w.,  to  increase 
iJCrf)artcn,  «'.,  to  arrest 
bft^  aScrljat'tCtt,  -§,  behavior 
tocr^icl'fcu,  «^;-.,  to  assist,  raise 
t)Crfiitt'bcrtt»  w.,  to  prevent,  hinder, 

stop  [hide 

t)tviiul'ltn,  IV.,  to  cover  from  siglit, 
tJCrlr'rcn,  iv.  rejl.,  to  lose  one's  way 
bcr  JBctirr'tc,  -n,  -n,  lost  (one) 
ber  JBcrfrtitf,  -^,  H,  sale 
tjcrfau'fcn,  «.,  to  sell 
ber  JBccfcftt',  -§,  association,  society  >/ 
bag  ascrfcljrfe'hjcfcn,  -g,  social  iuter- 

course    f — 
Ucvfcfjrt',  inverted  ;  wrong 
tJCrlOtt'nCtt,  Ji'.,  to  demand 

bag  iBertan'ncn,  -g,  demand    -+• 
Ucrtaf'fCtt,  5^r.,  to  leave,  desert  I 
tJCtUe'rcit,  5ifv.,  to  lose 
ber  ajcrluft',  -(e)g,  -c,  loss 
bcrmirfctt,  «.,  to  miss 
ber  SJetSr  -eg,  -e,  stanza,  verse.  Hue 
uerfSu'mctt,  w.,  to  miss 
tJCrftfjaf'fCU,  "'.,  to  procure 
Ucrfdjic'ticn,  diflfereut 
bie  ajcrfrfjic'bcnljctt,  -en,  difference 
UCl'frfllic'ffCtt,  sir.,  to  lock  up,  shut  off 
Ucrfdjo'ttCtt,  «'.,  to  spare 
Ucrf^rct'bCU,  «<r.,  to  make  a  mistake 

in  writing;  deed  to,  prescribe 
tlCrf^rc'djClt,  str.,  to  promise 
Uetftdltb'ddilr  comprehensible 
tJCrftc'ftCtt,  5<r.,  to  understand 
tJCrfu'djCtl,  w.,  to  try 
tJCrtrci'facil,  str.,  to  drive  away 
bcntu'cljrcit,  w.,  to  dishonor 
tjerur'tctlctt,  «>.,  to  condemn 
bert)3unt>'barr  vulnerable 


Ucrjci'lftCtt,  sir.,  to  forgive 

ber  JBcttcr,  -g,  -n,  cousin 

Ijict,  much 

Uielfrift,  manifold 

t)teQet^t%  perhaps 

Dtcr,  four 

Uierf^annta,  four-in-hand 

bag  aSicrtcl,  -g,  — ,  fourth,  quarter 

uicrunbulcrjin,  forty-four 

btCt-Unb)tuaiUt(l,  twenty-four 

Ulcrjcftu,  fourteen 

iJicrjtfl,  forty 

ber  JBoact,  -g,  ^,  bird 

bag  2$oae(d)en>  -g,  — ,  dim.,  little  bird 

bag  S^onUitt,  -g,  — ,  dim.,  little  bird 

bag  5Kolf»  -eg,  ^er,  people  ;  nation 

bte  JBiJlfcrnianbcrUttfl,  -en,  migration 

of  races 
bie  S^oltsfi^ute,  -n,  public  school 
ber  JBoHsftamm,  -(e)g,  ^e,  tribe 
bie    58otf5hlittfd)oft,    political  econ- 
omy 
tJOa/full 

tloIIbrtn'nCU^  irr.,  to  accomplish  \ 
Mow,  prej>.  with  dat.,  from,  of,  out  of 
tiOt,  ]>rep.  with  dat.  and  ace,  before, 

in  front  of ;  out  of,  because  of 
tjorbci',  adv.,  past 
UorliCl'CttCU,  w.,  to  prepare 
bie  iSorbcrcitung^  -en,  preparation 
iJOr'fiubcn,  str.,  to  discover,  iind 
Dor'fommcu,  sir.,  to  occur  (jein) 
bor'HcflCtt,    sir.,    to   lie    before;    ein 

;3rrtum  liegt  Dor,  a  mistake  occurs 
Uor'traflCtt,  sir.,  to  recite 
tiotit'ber,  adv.,  past 

as 

ttiriA,  wakeful 

bie  9Sad)C,  -n,  watch,  guard 

tuadjCU,  w.,  to"watch,  guard 

tvadlfctt,  str.,  to  grow  (fein) 

bie  S3ftlf)tf  -en,  watch,  guard 

tuaantf  w.,  to  dare,  venture 

ber  SSJftflcn,  -g,  — ,  wagon,  carriage 

hjanbrttflR,  reckless 

ber  ^abtf^tudlr  -^^,  ^^i  watchword, 

battle-cry 
toahv,  true 
tttcifirenb,  ndv.  ccnj.,  while ; />re/).  wtVA 

P'en,,  during 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


310 


ttJaftrfjuft,  truthful,  truly 

toaffvliih,  truly  ! 

bte  SSaifc,  -n,  orphan 

ber  SBalb,  -eg,  -"er,  woods,  forest 

bag  aSotti'njcititcitt,  -§,  — ,  wood- 
nymph 

ber  aSatbjOUbCt,  -§,  — ,  forest  charm 

bte  aBatftot'tft,  Walhalla  (the  palace 
of  departed  heroes) 

bte  aSalfu're,  -tt,  valkyrie 

tnattcn,  «'.,  to  wander,  drift  (fein) 

bte  gSottb,  ^e,  wall 

njanbetttf  side  form  to  toanbern 

ber  SBonbcrcr,  -§,  — ,  wanderer 

nianbcrm  w.,  to  wauder(fein) 

tuanfcUf  w'.,  to  waver,  swerve 

Joontt,  when? 

tuarnu  warm 

njortctt,  w.,  to  wait 

tuarum',  why? 

twos*,  what,  that  which 

hias  fitr  eiit,  what  sort  of 

bag  JCSoffcr,  -g,  — ,  water 

bte  aajoffcrfdicibe,  -n,  watershed 

ber  aBc(!)fct,-g,—,  change;  bill  of  ex- 
change 

totdcn,  w.  trans.,  to  awaken 

Uiebec  .  . .  nocfl,  neither  .  .  .  nor 

mcfl,  adv.,  away 

ber  aSJcfl,  -{e)g,  -c,  way 

toCflCll,  prep,  vnth  gen.,  because  of,  for 
the  sake  of 

tucg'raumeu,  w.,  to  clear  away 

ItJCfl'rciftCtt,  sir.,  to  tear  away 

tticljcn,  w.,  to  wave  ;  blow  . 

bte  i£8e^mut>  wistfulness,  nielancholy)o 

mcfl'tun,  str.,  to  hurt 

n)Ctd)Ctt,  str.,  to  yield  (fetit)      ^/ 

bte  SEBciiftfcl,- Vistula  (river) 

bte  JKQcibc,  -n,  willow 

bte  9Beit)nad)t,  -ett,  Christmas 

hjeit,  because 

bte  SBcitc,  time;  while 

ber  SSctlt,  -(e)g^  -c,  wine 

meinen,  w,,  to  weep 

ttjctfc,  wise 

h)Ct''fctt,  str.,  to  show,  point 

bie  SScisfjcit,  -ett,  wisdom 

Jtjcift,  white 

tucit,  far,  wide 

bte  aScttC,  -n,  distance 

meiter,  farther,  on 


tvcC4ier>  which 

melicn,  w.,  to  wither  (fein) 

bte  $Sc(t,  -ett,  world 

bag  SSc(tQett)U!f)(,  turmoil  of  the  world 

bte  aScttftabt,  ^e,  metropolis 

hJCtttfl,  little,  few 

tuenigftcnS,  adv.,  at  least     / 

tUCUtt,  when,  if 

toier,  who,  he  who 

tuetbett,  str.,  to  become 

ttietfcnf  str.,  to  throw,  hurl 

bte  SBcrfftott,  (-ftatte),  ^eit,  workshop 

to  ett,  worth 

ber  aScrt,  -(e)g,  -e,  value 

bag  SScf  en,  -g,  — ,  being 

toesliatbr  why,  wherefore 

toeftltl^^  westward,  west 

totbev,  prep,  tvith  ace,  against 

hjtbtift,  disagreeable 

toic,  as  ;  than  ;  how 

tuiebcr,  again 

tutrnrit,  "'.,  to  rock 

bie  JUJicfe,  -it,  meadow 

njitb,  wild 

ber  3BtQe(n)>  -ttg,  will,  determination 

iuidtR,  willing 

niiafom'mett,  welcome ! 

ber  SBinbf  -(e)g,  -e,  wind 

ber  JCBittter,  -g,  — ,  winter 

UliujtB,  tiny 

ber  9[9tpfe(,  -g,  — ,  tree-top 

totrbcln,  to.,  to  eddy,  whirl 

hiirfCid),  real,  true 

ber  aStrt,  -(e)g,  -e,  landlord,  boat      ^ 

toiffeu,  irr.,  to  knov*r 

bie  iCQitme,  -it,  widow 

too,  where 

bie  SSodie,  -it,  week 

toobur^'f    by    means  of   whicb  ;  by 

what  means? 
ioofiir',  why?  for  which 
bte  SBone,  -n,  wave 
ber  aSoBcntJrott,  -g,  surf 
tooljet',  whence 
toollitt',  whither 
tooftt,  well;  truly,  probably,  I  d:.re 

say,  I  suppose 
toolitaemut,  cheerful 
tuoiiueu,  if.,  to  dwell,  live 
ber  aBolf ,  -(e)g,  -"c,  wolf 
bte  953 0 If c,  -n,  cloud 
ber  aSotfcttflrauS,  -eg,  black  clouds 


320 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


tOoUtn,  w.,  to  wish,  desire,  want  to 
tDOttttt'r  with  which  ;  with  what? 
tOOVan',  at  which,  at  what? 
tttOtHUf'f  upon  which  ;  upon  wliat? 
ttiOtauS'f  from  which  ;  from  what? 
ttJortn'/  in  which  ;  in  what,  wherein  ? 
bag  SBott,  -e§,  -^er  or-^,  word,  speech 
bie  gBortftcttUttB*  -en,  word-order 
XOOVn'htX,  at  which  ;  about  what? 
tuobor'f  before  which ;  before  what? 
tUOJU'f  for  which  ;  why  ? 
tuunberbar,  wonderful 
nJttttbertli!^),  queer 
tounbetn,  •w.  refl.,  to  wonder 
tounbctf  $bu,  wonderfully  beautiful 
ber  SSQunf^,  -eS,  "-t,  wish,  desire 
toiittftfjctt,  ti'.,  to  wish 
ber  SBurm,  -(e)8,  -^er,  worm,  serpent 
bic  JEButjct,  -n,  root 
ttlitrien,  w.,  to  season,  fill  with  scent 
ba§  JEBurjteitt,   -3,   — ,   rfim.,   little 

root 
)»VLUn,  w.,  to  rage 


3 


blc  Bttfil,  -en,  number 
joljlcn,  i*.,  to  count 
ber  3ol)tt,  -{e)§,  -^e,  tooth 
ber  3onf ,  -§,  quarrel 
jatt,  tender 

ber  3ftttbettrftttf,  -(e)^,  "e,  magic  po- 
tion 
XCl^ttCtt,  w.,  to  draw 

jetsen,  w.,  to  show 

bie  3ctlc,  -n,  line 

bie  3cit,  -en,  time 

bie  3citlan8,  stretch  of  lime 

JCrfal'len,  str.,  to  fall  to  pieces ;  to 

decompose 
3Crflic'fjCtt#  «^.,  to  melt  away  (fetn) 


^ 


aiel^en,  str.,  to  draw,  pull  ((;aben);  go, 
wander  (fetn);  in  Setrac^t  — .  take 
into  consideration 

bag  3tct,  -s,  -e,  goal 

jicmlid),  pretty,  rather,  somewhat 

bag  3intntcr,  -g,  — ,  room 

joruta,  angry 

3 It,  to  ;  too 

jUifctt,  w.,  to  thrill,  start 

aucrff,  adv.^  at  first 

iW\<i\Xtn,  str.,  to  drop,  close 

JUfaHiSr  accidental(ly) 

Jufrtc'bCtt,  contented 

bie  3ufrte'bcnftctt,  contentment 

ker  3uB,  -(e)g,  -^e,  impulse;  feature,| 
procession 

XUfic'flCtt,  a(/u,  present 

ber  3uR(('  -^,  —,  bridle 

attgetan,  favorably  inclined 

iuUaV,  at  last 

ju'ntQ^en^  ■««'.,  to  close,  shut 

bie  3unfic,  -n,  tongue  ^^>\^ 

iUvM\  adv.,  back 

JUturf'ficftcn,  str.,  to  go  back  (fetn) 

iUritrf'slcIlCtt,  5/7-.  re^.,  to  withdraw 

jufom'tnctt,  together  [join 

jufont'mcttfitacit,  w.,  to  put  together, 

}U'f|ire^en,  s'?"-,  to  encourage;  pro- 
nounce judgment 

ju'traucn,  w.,  to  entrust,  believe,  to 
be  capable  of 

jutiot'r  adv.,  before 

jtwci,  two 

ber  3hJci6,  -<e)§,  -e,  branch,  twig 

itntintn,  w.,  to  branch,  grow 

Jtwelt,  second 

itocitenS,  secondly 

ber  3ltJCtfi»  -(e)g,  -e,  dwarf 

3hJUtf)cn,i?rep.  tviih  ace.  and  dat.,  be- 
tween 

3njotf»  twelve 


/ 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


a,  an,  ein,  eine,  ein. 

able,  be  able  to,  fonnen,  w. 

about,  adv.,  imgefa^r,  etttja;  jprep. 
um  (ace),  tjon  (dat.). 

according  to,  \\a6)  (dat.). 

account,  on  account  of,  tuegcn 
(gen.);  on  that  account,  be§^olb, 
be^tcegen;  on  which  account, 
tueS^alb,  tt)c§n)egen;  on  my  ac- 
count, meinetiDcgen. - 

act,  l^anbcln,  w. ;  tun,  str. 

A.D.,  na6)  efjrifto,  n.  e^r. 

Adam,  5(bam,  — §. 

address,  an '  rcben,  w. 

advance,  tior'fc^reiten,  str.  (fcin); 
most  advanced,  t)orge[c^ritteiift. 

adventure,  bag  Slbenteuer,  — §,  — . 

afraid,  adj.,  bang;  be  afraid  of, 
ftc^  fiird)ten  tjor,  w. 

afternoon,  bcr  9fJad)mittag,  — §,  — e. 

again,  njicber,  noc^  cinmal. 

age,  bag  5(Itcr,  — g,  — . 

all  (=all  of),  all;  (=  whole), 
gan§;  all  day,  ben  ganjen  Xag; 
all  sorts  of,  allerlei  (indecl); 
(=  exclusively),  laiiter. 

allowed,  be  allowed,  biirfen,  w. 

along,  mit;  entlang', 

also,  auc^. 

although,  obgleid^'. 

always,  immer. 

America,  \i(k%  Slme'rifa,  — g. 

American,  ber  Slmerifa'ner,  — §, 
— ;  bie  ?lmerif a '  nerin,  — nen ;  adj. 
amerifa'nifcf). 


amuse  oneself,  \i6)  antiifie'ren,  w. 
ancient,  alt,  altertum'lid^. 
and,  unb. 

animal,  \ia^  Xier,  —{t)^,  —  e. 
answer,  antttjorten,  w. ;  bie  5lntn)ort, 

—en. 
anvil,  ber  %vxho%  — ffe§,  — [fe. 
anything,  etmag;    not   anything. 

nicl)tg. 
appear,  erfcfjei'nen,  str.  (fcin). 
appearance,  tk  erfcf)ei'nung,  —en; 

ha^  Slugfe^cn,  — g. 
apple,  ber  Slpfel,  — §,  — . 
architecture,    bie    ^aufunjl,    bie 

Slrd^iteftur'. 
area,  ber  ^lodjenraum,  — (c)g,  — e. 
arithmetic,  "HOi^  Oiecljnen,  — g ;  men- 
tal arithmetic,  bag  ^opfred)nen, 

— g. 
arm,  ber  9lrm,  — (e)g,  — c 
armor,  ber  ganger,  — g,  — . 
aronnd,  nm  (ace). 
arrest,  tjer^af '  ten,  w. 
art,  bie    ^unft,  — e;    art    centre, 

bie  ^unftftdtte,  — n, 
as,  conj.,  alg,  "Ha,  tt)ie;  as,  so. .  .as, 

fo...alg,  ttJte;  as  if,  alg  ob;  as 

many,  [o  t)iete. 
ask,  fragen,  w. 
at,  an  (ace.  and  dat.);  gu  (dat.); 

(of  time),  um  (ace);  with,  at  the 

house  of,  bei  (dat.). 
Augsburg,  bag  5luggburg,  — g. 
autumn,  ber  §erbft,  — (e)g,  —^. 
avenge,  rod) en,  w. 


321 


322 


ELEMENTS    OF   GERMAN 


awaken^  ertre'cfen,  w. 
aware,  getca^r'. 
away,  fort,  ttjeg. 

back,  juriid', 

Baltic  Sea,  bie  £)ft[ee ;  ha%  baltifcl)e 

bark,  beHcn,  i^. 

bathe,  baben,  i/j. 

battle,  bie  ©c^(acf)t,  ~cn. 

be,  [ein,  str.  ([ein) ;  there  is,  are,  e§ 

ift,  e§  finb,  eg  gi bt. 
be,  is  to,  follen,  w. 
bear,  ber  SSar,  —en,  —en. 
beautiful(ly),  fdjon,  rcigcnb. 
beauty,  bie  ©c^ou^eit,  —en. 
because,  njeil. 
become,  hjcrben,  str.  (fcin). 
bed,  Us>  S3ett,  — (e)§,  —en. 
before,  otdij. ,  e^e;  prep.  Dor  (ace. 

anddat.);  (=  hitherto),  bi§l)er'. 
beg  (=  request),  bitten,  s^r.;  (for), 

um  with  ace. ;  (=  beg  for  alms), 

bettein,  w. 
begg-ar,  ber  SSettler,  — §,  — . 
begin,  an '  f  angen,sfr. ,  begin '  nen,sf  r. 
believe,  glauben,  w. 
bell,  bie  ©dieUe,  — n. 
belong  (=  be  in  the  possession  of), 

gel^o '  ren,  w.  (dat. ) ;  (=  appertain 

to),  getjo'ren  gn  (dat.). 
bench,  bie  SSan!,  — e. 
Berlin,  S3erlin',—§. 
best,  beft,  ber  befte,  am  beften;  auf§ 

bcjte,  au^erft  gut. 
better,  bejfer. 

between,  gtoifc^en  (ace.  and  dat.) 
bird,  ber  SSoge(,-§,-^. 
birdling,  ta^  SSogeld^en,  — §,  — . 
black,  fd^njarg. 
blood,  ha^  mm,  — (e)§. 
bloom,  blii^cn,  w. 


blow,  blafen,  str. 

blue,  blau. 

board  (=  blackboard),  bie  XafeC, 

— n;    (=  wooden    board),    ba§ 

SSrett,  — e§,  — er. 
boast  of,  \id}  rii^men,  w.,  (gen.). 
bold(ly),  be^er5t',fii^n. 
book,  ta^  mid),  — (e)§,  — er, 
boundary,  bie  ©renge,  — n. 
boy,  ber  ^nabe,  — n,— n;  ber^unge, 

— n,   — n;   ber  93urfrf)(e),  — (e)n, 

(e)n. 
brave,  ta:pfer,  fiil^n. 
bravery,  bie  5ra:pfer!eit. 
brew,  brauen,  w. 
brightness,  ber  @(an§,  — e§. 
bring,  bringen,  irr.  cf.  App.  88. 
brook,  ber  SSac^,  — (e)^,  — e. 
brooklet,  t)a§>  S8ad)Iein,  —  §,  — . 
brother,  ber  33rubcr,  — §,  — , 
brother-in-law,  ber  (3d)n)ager,  — §, 

brown,  braun. 

busy,  ge[d)aftig. 

but,   conj.,  aber;  fonbern;  aUein; 

adv.  nur. 
buy,  fauf en,  w. 
by,  an  (dat.,  ace);  neben  (dat., 

ace);  bei  (dat.);  (=  agency),  Oon 

(dat.);  (=  means),    burd^   (ace); 

by  myself,  fiir  mid^, 

call,  riifen,  str. 
can,  fonnen,  w. 
can,  bie  ^anne,  — n. 
canon,  ber  ^o^Iweg,  — (e)§,  — e. 
capital,  bie  ^aiiptftabt,  — e. 
carriage,  ber  SBogen,  — §,  — . 
carry,  tragen,  str. 
castle,  bag  ©d)lo§,  — ffe§,  — ffer. 
cat,  bie  ^a^e,  — n;   tom-cat,  ber 
^ater,  — g,  — 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY 


323 


catch,  fangen,  str. 

cause,  laffen,  str. ;  cause  to  fall, 

fallen  laffeu. 
century,   ha^    i^a^rfiim'bcrt,   — §, 

— e;  century  old,  t)uubcrtjdl)rig. 
chair,  ber  <Btut)l,  — (e)^,  — c. 
change,  fid)  berdn'bern,  w. 
Charles,  ^arl,  — §. 
Charles  the  Great,  ^art  ber  ^irofse, 

^arB  be§  ©rofeen. 
charm,  eutp'c!en,  la 
charm,  ber  dici^,  — e§,  — e. 
charming,  liebcnSWiirbig,  rei^cnb. 
chase,  jagen,  w. 
chick,  t)a§>  ^iic^Icm,  — §,  — . 
child,  t)a§>  ^\nt>,  — (e)§,  — er. 
choose,  tt)af)Ien,  if?. 
city,  bie  ©tabt,  — e. 
climate,  bag  ^lima,  — g,  — tc. 
climb,  fteigen,  str.  (fein);  flettern, 

m  (fein). 
clock,  bie  Vit)x,  —en. 
close,  t)erfd)Iie'feen,  str.,  fdjlie'feen, 

str.,  §u'mad)en,  w. 
cloud,  bie  SBolfe,  — n. 
coast,  bie  ^iifte,  — n. 
coat,  ber  9?ocf,  — {e)g,  — c. 
cock,  ber  ^at)n,  — (e)g,  — c. 
cold,  fait;  catch  cold,  fid)  erfdl'tcn; 

a  cold,  eine  ©rfdl'tnng. 
come,  fontmen,  str.  (fein). 
comfort,  troften,  w. 
command,  befcl^'len,  str. 
commercial  city,  bie  ^anbclSftabt, 

— e. 
compelled,  be  compelled    to, 

miiffen,  w. 
completely,  ganj,  tioHftanbig. 
conqueror,  ber  @ro '  berer,  — g,  — . 
contain,  entljal'ten,  str. 
contents,  ber  i^nl^alt,  ~(e)§. 
convict,  iiberfii^'rcn,  w. 


cook,   ber   ^od),   ~(c)g,    — e;   bie 

^oc^in,  — nen. 
cost,  !often,  w. 
councilor,  ber  9?atgeber,  —§,  — ; 

ber  mat,  —{e)^,  ^e. 
count,  ber  ^raf,  —en,  —en. 
count  up,  anf '  red^nen,  w. 
courage,  ber  9Jlnt,  — (e)§. 
course  (of  a  stream),  ber  Sauf,  — e§, 

— e ;  (at  a  school),  ber  ^nrfnS. 
cousin,   ber   SSetter,   — §,   — ;   bie 

©onfi'ne,  — n. 
covered,  bebedt'. 
crow,  frozen,  w. 
crown,  bie  ^rone,  — n. 
crutch,  bie  ^riicfe,  — n. 
cry,  rnfen,  str. ;  njeinen,  w. 
cure,  fnrie'ren,  iv. 
custom,  ber  SSrand),  — e§,  — e;  bie 

©itte,  — n ;  bie  ©ctuo^n '  l;cit,  —en. 

dame,  bie  i^xau,  —en. 

dark,  bnnfcl. 

daughter,  bie  Xodjter,  — . 

dead,  tot. 

dear,  tencr. 

death,  ber  %o\),  — e§,  — e. 

declare,  bel^an^ '  ten,  iv. ;  erfld '  ren, 

w. 
deep,  tief. 

defeat,  befie'gen,  w. ;  fdjlagen,  str. 
defy,  tro^cn,  w.  (dat.). 
demand,  bie  Slnforberung, — en;  to 

make   a  demand,  eine  Slnforbe^ 

rnng  fteHen,  w. 
departure,  ha§>  f^ortgeiien,  — §;  ber 

5luf  brnc^,  — g,  -^e. 
dervish,  ber  ^ertt)ifd),  — e§,  — e. 
desk,  i>a§>  ^nlt,  — (e)§,  — e. 
destined,  be  destined,  foEen,  w. 
devour,  f ceffen,  str. 
die,  fterben,  str.,  (fein). 


324 


ELEMENTS    OF    GERMAN 


difficult,  fd)h)er,  fc^njierig. 
diligent,  flei^tg. 
disobedient,  uiige^orfam. 
disobey,  ungc^or[am  fein,  s^r.  (dat.) 

(fein);  txo^cn,w.  (dat.). 
distinguish,  au^'jeid^nen,  w. 
divergence,    bie    SSerfd)ie '  bent)eit, 

—en, 
do,  tun,  str.,  madden,  w. ;  how  do 

you  do?  tt)te  gel^t  eg  ^^ntw,  h)ie 

befinben  ©ie  fic^  ?  that  won't  do, 

ba§  gel^t  nic^t. 
doctor,  ber  ®  of  tor,  — §,  ^ofto'rcn; 

ber  Slrgt,  —  (c)g,  — e. 
dog,  ber  §imb,  — (e)§,  — e. 
domestic   animal,    ba§  §au§ticr, 

-(e)§,  -e. 
donkey,  ber  (£fef,  — §,  — . 
dot,  ber  ^un!t,  — (e)§,  — e. 
dove,  bie  Xaube,  — n. 
down,  (=below),  brunten,  uiitcii; 

(=downward«),  nicbcr ;  sit  down, 

\\d)  fe^en,  w. 
dragon,  ber  ®rac^e,  — n,  — n. 
dreadfully,  furc^tbar. 
dream,  traumen,  w. ;  ber  Xrauni, 

-(e)§,  --e. 
drink,   trinlen,   str.;    ber    2^raii!, 

Srun!,  — (e)g,  — e. 
drive,  fal^ren,  str.  (fein). 
drop,  faGen  laffen,  sfr. ;  she  drops 

it,  [ie  lafet  e§  fallen. 

each,  jeber,  jebe,  jebeg;  each  other, 

un§,  eud£),  fid^,  einan '  ber. 
eagle,  ber  2lar,  — (e)§,  — e. 
ear,  \>a^  DIjr,  — §,  —en. 
early,  frill^. 
easy,  Teic^t. 
eat,  effen,  str. 

effort,  bie  Slnftrengnng,  —en. 
eight,  (id:^t 


elector,  ber  ^nrfiirft,  —en,  —en. 
elephant,  ber  (Slcfanf,  -en,  —en. 
eleven,  elf. 

emerald,  ber  ©maragb',  — (e)§,  — e. 
emperor,  ber  5^aifer,  — §,  — . 
emphasis,  ha^  ©etoic^t',  — e§;  bie 

SSeto'nnng,  —en. 
empire,  tia^  ^aifcrreid^,  — §,  — e. 
encounter,  befte '  ^en,  str. 
enjoy  oneself,  fid)  amiifie'rcn,  w. 
enumerate,  anf 'goljlen,  w. 
equally,  ebenfo  fel^r;  gleic^;  tolove 

equally,  gleicf)  gem  l^aben,  ebenfo 

feljr  (ieben  n)ie. 
error,  ber  i^itrtum,  — §,  — er. 
everybody,  jcbcrmann. 
examination,  bie  ^riifnng,  -en. 
example,  "ba^   ©jem':pel,  — §,  — ; 

ha^  S3eif^)iel,  — §,  — c. 
exceedingly,  anf§   :^od)fte  or    an- 

fecrfte;  l^odjft,  anfjcrft. 
except,  an^er  (dat.). 
exhaust,  erfd)i)p'fcn,  w. 
expend,  an§'  gebcn,  str. 
explain,  erf  Id '  ren,  w. 
expose,  OLM^'^t^nXfW.  (dat.). 
extant,  befte 'l^enb. 
eye,  'aa^  5lnge,  — §,  — n. 

face,  bag  ©efid^t,  — (e)§,  — er. 
fact,  bie  Satfac^e,  — n. 
fair,  ber  ^a^rmarft,  — (e)§,  — e. 
fall,  fallen,  str.  (fein);  fall  asleep, 

ein'fd)tafcn,  str.  (fein). 
famous,  berii^mt'. 
farmer,  ber  SSauer,  — n  or  — §,  — n. 
father,  ber  SSater,- §,  — ;  father  of 

gods  and  men,  ber  2lIIt)ater,  — §. 
fear,  fiird^ten,  w. 
feather,  bie  geber,  — n. 
feather-bed,  tiOi^  geberbett,  —  (e)§, 

-en. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


325 


feeble,  ^djtoad). 

fellow,  bcr  ^erl,  —§,  — e. 

field,  bag  gelb,  — (e)§,  — er. 

fl^ht,  fdmpfen,  iv. ;  fedjten,  sir. 

find,  [inben,  sfr. 

finder,  ber  ginber,  — g,  — . 

fir,  bic  Sanne,  — n;  bcr  Xannen-- 
baiint,  — §,  — e. 

fire,  ba§  i^enex,  — §,  — . 

firm(ly),  feft. 

first,  adj. ,  erft;  adi?.  (=not  until), 
erjt;  at  first,  guerft;  in  the  first 
place,  erfteu§;  (=next),  sunad^jt. 

five,  fiinf. 

fiame,  tobern,  w. ;  bic  fjfamme,  — n. 

flat  land,  bic  ©bene,  — n. 

flower,  bic  ^lumc,  — n. 

flowret,  t)a^  S31iimlein,  — §,  —,  bag 
S31iimci)cn,  — g,  — . 

fly,  flicgen,  str.  (fcin). 

fo^,  ber  S^ebel,  — §,  — . 

fond,  be  fond  of.  licb  l^abcn,  Qcrii 
l^abcn;  adj.,  liebenb. 

foolish,  toric^t,  bumm. 

for,  prep.,  fiir  (ace);  not  for 
years,  erft  nad)  ^al)rcn;  for  cen- 
turies, ;^a:^rl)un '  berte  lang;  look 
out  for  him,  aiig'fd^auen  iiai^  i^m, 
w.;  conj.,  bcnn. 

foreign,  fremb. 

forest,  ber  SSalb,  — (c)§,  -^^r. 

forge,  fd)miebcn,  w. 

forget,  bergef'fen,  str. 

form,  bilben,  w. 

former,  pron.,  jencr,  jene,  jeneg; 
adj.,  frii^er,  borl^er'ge^enb. 

formerly,  friil^er. 

four,  t)ier. 

four-in-hand,  bierfpannig. 

fox,  ber  %m&)^,  — e§,  — e. 

free  ( =set  free),  bef rei '  en,  w. ; 
adj.,  frei. 


friend,  ber  f^reimb,  —it%  ~e. 
frightened,  bang;  be  frightened, 

erfc^ro'cfcn  fcin. 
from,  t)on  (dat. ),  au§  (dat.);  from 

that,  babon' ;  from  (out  of)  what, 

tt)obon'. 
full,  tjoIL 

garden,  ber  ©arten,  — §,  — . 
gay,  bnnt;  frotjlic^. 
gentle,  milb,  [anft,  giitig. 
German,  bciitfd);    a  German,  ein 

©entfd^er,  eine  %n\i\d)t. 
Germania,  bie  ©crma'nia. 
Germany,  tia^  2)entf(i)lanb,  — g. 
get,  bcf  om '  men,  s^r. ;  get  out  of  the 

way !  ge^  au§  bent  SBcg ! 
girl,  bag  aRobd)cn,  — g,  — . 
give,  gcben,  str. 
glass,  bag  ©lag,  —eg,  — er;  adj.» 

grofern. 
gloomy,  biifter. 
go,  gel^en,  str.  (fein);  go  to  sleep, 

cin'fd^tafen,   str.    (fein),   f^lafen 

ge^en;  go  out,  aug'gcl^cn,  s^r. 
God,  ber  @ott,  —eg,  — er. 
gold,  bag  ©olb,  — (e)g;  gold-piece, 

bag  ©olbftiicf,  — (e)g,  — e. 
golden,  gotbcn. 
goldsmith,  bcr   ©olbfd^mieb,   — g, 

— e. 
good,  gilt. 

gorgeous,  prodjtig,  praditboH. 
gown,  bag  ^leib,  — (e)g,  — er. 
grade,  bie  ©tuf c,  — n. 
grandfather,  ber  (SJro^bater,  — g, 

grandmother,  bie  ©rofemntter,  — ♦ 
grass,  bag  ©rag,  —eg,  -^er. 
gray,  grau. 
great,  gro^ 
green,  griiiu 


326 


ELEMENTS    OF    GERMAN 


^ow    (=  become),    toerben,    sir. 

(fein);  (=  increase),  ti)ad)\cn,  str. 

(fein). 
growth,  ba§  28ad)§tiim,  — (c)g;  ba§ 

SBad^feit,  — g;   (=  increase),  bag 

5lntt)a(i)[en,  —§♦ 
guard,  fi^ii^en,  ii?. 
guess,  raten,  str.;  guess  riddles, 

diat\el  15  fen,  z^?. 
gymnasium,  bag  ©tjmna '  fiiim,  —§>, 

— fieiu 

hair,  ba§  §aar,  — (e)§,  — e« 

half,  bie  ^olfte,  — n;  adj.,  t^alb, 

hammer,  ber  jammer,  — §,  — . 

hand,  bie  §anb,  — e* 

hand,  reic^en,  w. 

happy,  gludliii). 

hard,   tjart,    fcfitoer;   work   hard, 

fc^toer   arbeiten;    hard    earned, 

fauer  tierbient'. 
hare,  ber  §afe,  — n,  — n. 
hat,  ber  §ut,  — (e)§,  — e, 
hate,  l^affen,  w. 
have,  l^aben,  tc. ;  have  a  thing  done, 

eitoa§>  madden  (tun)  laffen, 
have  to,  miiffen,  w. 
hawk,  ber  ^abic^t,  — §,  — e. 
he,  er;  ber;  biefer, 
head,  ber  ^o^f,  — (e)§,  -^c. 
hear,  pren,  w. 
heart,  ta^  §ers,  — en§,  —en. 
heaven,  ber  ^intmel,  — §,  — . 
heavy,  fd^tcer. 
help,  l^elfen,  s#r.  (dat.). 
hen,  bie  §enne,  — n. 
hence,  barum' ;  beStuegen. 
her,  iijx,  xf^xe,  if)V, 
herd,  pten,  w. 
Herman,  Hermann,  — §. 
hero,  ber  ^etb,  —en,  —en. 
hers,  il^rer,  i:^re,  i^r(e)§. 


high,  \)od), 

his,  adj.,  fein,  feinc,  fein;  pron., 

feincr,  feine,  fein(e)§;  pred.  adj., 

fein. 
historical,  l^ifto '  rifcf). 
history,  bie  (5)cfc^id)'te,  — n. 
hold,  l^alten,  str. 
home,    bie   §eimat,    —en;    adv. 

(=homewards),  nad)  §aufe,  ^cint ; 

(=at  home),  §u  ^aufe,  bal^eim'. 
homogeneous,  einl^eitlic^. 
hope,  fjoffcn,  w. 
horse,  "^(1%  $ferb,  — (e)§,  — e;  tia^ 

9?ofe,  -ffe§,  -ffe. 
hospital,  ^a%  ^ofpital',  — §,  — er. 
host,  ber  SKirt,  — (e)§,  — e. 
hour,  bie  ©tunbe,  — n. 
house,  ha^  ^axi^,  — e§,  — er. 
how,  n)ie. 

however,  cber,  boc!^. 
humiliate,  bemiitigen,  w. 
hunter,  ber  ^ciger,  — §,  — . 
hurt,  nie^  tun,  dr. 
husband,  ber  Wamx,  — (e)g,  — er; 

ber  (^atte,  — n,  — n. 
hut,  bie  §iitte,  — n. 

I,i(^. 

if,  ttjenn ;  ob. 

ill,  franf. 

impulse,  ber  ^Vi%  — (e)§,  — e. 

in,  in  (aco.  and  dat.),  in  the 
evening,  am  §lbenb ;  in  order  to, 
urn  gu  (inf.);  in  it,  barin';  in 
what  or  which,  n)orin'. 

inclination,  bie  SFJeignng,  —en ;  ac- 
cording to  his  own  inclination, 
nacf)  feinem  eignen  ^opf. 

increase,  "i^a^  SSergro^crn,  — §. 

indoors,  brinnen,  int  ^au^, 

industrious,  flei^ig. 

influence,  ber  ©influ^,  — ffe§,  —ffe. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


327 


inspiration,  bet  ginfaU,  — (e)§,  — c. 
instead  of,  (an)[tatt '  (gen. ) 
instruction,  ber  Unterrid^t,  — §. 
interesting,  intereftant'. 
tntervention,  ha^  (Sinfcl)reitcn,  — §. 
into,  in  (ace.)- 

inYulnerable,  unbertounb '  bar. 
it,  e§ ;  ex,  [te. 

its,  adj.,   fein,  feme,  feitt;  pron., 
fetner,  feine,  fein(e)g. 

joyous(ly),     tDO^Igemut,     freubig, 

fro^. 
judge,  ber  9licf)ter,  — §,  — . 
jump,  fpringen  str,  ([cin). 
just,  adj.,  gered^t;   adv.,    gerabe, 

eben. 
keen(ly),  fcf)arf. 
keep,  bel^ol'ten,  str. 
kill,  toten,  w. 
kind,  giitig,  freimbltdE}. 
kindergarten,   ber    ^inbcrgarten, 

kindly,  freunbfid^. 

king,  ber  ^bnig,  — §,  — c. 

kingdom,  ha^  konxQxeid),  — (e)§,— c. 

kiss,  fiiffen,  lo. 

knight,  ber  9iitter,  — §,  — , 

know,    (=be    acquainted    with) 

fennett,   irr.,  cf.   App.    88;   (= 

be  cognizant  of)  toiff en,  irr. ,  cf . 

App.  83;   know  a   lesson,  eine 

Stnfgabe  fonnen,  w. 
known,   be!annt';    well   known, 

njol^Ibefannt 

lady,  bie  ©crnte,  — n;  bie  fjrau,  —en. 
land,  ha^  £anb,  — e§,  — er  or  — e. 
language,  bie  (Bpxad)C,  —n;  ancient 

languages,    bie    alien  <Bpxad)en; 

modern  languages,   bie  nencrcn 

©^rad£)en. 


large,  gro^ 

last,  le^t. 

last,  bauem,  w. 

late,  f^jat. 

latter,   biefer,  biefe,   biefeS  (bie§); 

ber  Ie|tere. 
laugh,  lad^en,  w. 
lazy,  f anl. 

leaf,  ba§  SSIatt,  — (e)§,  -^er. 
less,  lueniger. 
lesson,  bie  Seftion',  —en;  to  take 

a   lesson,  eine   ©tnnbe  ne^men. 

str. 
let,  laffen,  str. 
letter,  ber  S3ricf,  — (c)§,  — e. 
lie,  lie  gen,  str. 
life,  \)a^  Seben,  — §,  — . 
like,  gem  ^aben ;  I  like  it,  ic^  l^abe 

e§  gern,  e§  gefaEt  ntir;  I  like  to 

do  it,  icf)  tne  e§  gem. 
linden  tree,  bie  Sinbe,  — n;  linden 

leaf,  \)a^  Sinbenbfatt,  — (e)§,  — cr. 
listen,  l^oren,  w. ;  t)or(^en,  w. ;  listen 

to  the  birds,  anf  bie  SSogel  l^oren, 

w. ;  ben  SSogeln  ju'l^oren,  w. 
little,  flein. 
live,  leben,  w.;  hJot)nen,  w.;  live 

oneself  out,  ftcf)  au^'tchen,w. 
load,  bie  Saft,  —en. 
long,  lang. 
look,  fei^en,  str.;  (==  appear)  on§'» 

[e^en,  str. ;  look  out,  an§> '  fc^auen, 

w.;    look    at,    an'f(i)aucn,    w.; 

an'fel^en,  str. 
loosen,  lofen,  w. ;  lodern,  w. 
lord,  ber  §err,  — n,  —en. 
lose,   berlie'ren,   str.;   lose   one's 

way,  fic^  berir'ren,  w. 
lost,  berirrt'. 
Louis,  SnblDig,  — §. 
love,  lieben,  w. ;  his  first  love,  fcine 

erjte  Siebe. 


328 


ELEMENTS    OF   GERMAN 


lover,  bet  Siebl^aber,  — §,  — . 
low,  nicbrig* 
lowland,  bie  ©bene,— n. 

maiden,  bic  ^ungfrau,  —en. 
make,  madden,  w. ;  make  one's  way, 

\id)  biirc^ '  fd)Iagen,  str. 
man,   ber   9)Jann,  — e§,  — er;    bcr 

^en\d),  —en,  —en. 
manufacturing  city,  bie  ©ettjerbS- 

ftabt,  -^e. 
many,  tjtele. 
marry,  ^eiraten,  t<7. 
master,   ber  §err,  — n,  —en;    ber 

Wei\tex,  — §,  — . 
may,  bilrfcn,  w. 
meadow,  bie  SBiefe,  — n. 
means,  by  means  of,  mittel^  (gen.) 

burc^  (ace.) 
medicine,  bie  SD^ebi^in',  —en. 
medieyal,  nnttelaltcr(id). 
meet,     begeg '  nen,  w.  (dat. ),  (fcin) ; 

treffen,  str. 
melt,  fc^melgen  sfr.,  (fein). 
merciiant,   ber  ^anfmann,  — (e)§, 

— leute. 
mi^lity,  mad)tig. 
migration  of  races,   bie   SSoIfcr- 

tttanberung,  —en. 
mild,  mitb. 
millionaire,  ber   ^iUionax',  — §, 

— e. 
mind,  ber  (Sinn,  — (e)§,  — e. 
mine,  meiner,  meine,  mein(e)§ 
mislead,  berf iil^ '  ren,  to. 
moan,  dd^^en,  w. 
modern,  neuer;  mobern'. 
money,  ta^  @elb,  — e§,  — er. 
moon,  ber  Tlonh,  — (e)§,  — e. 
morning,    ber    aJJorgen,   — §,  — ; 

mornings,  ntorgen^;  this  morn- 
ing, j^ente  morgen. 


mortal,  bcr  Wen^d),  —en,  —en. 
most,    ttieift;    a    most    difficult 

examination,     eine     pc^ft     (or 

au^erft)  fdiioierige  ^riifnng;  the 

most  difficult  examination,  bie 

fd^njierigfte  ^riifnng. 
mother,  bie  SD^ntter,  — ♦ 
mountain,   ber   33erg,  — (e)§,  — e; 

the  mountain-range,  ba§  (SJebirge, 

— §,  — . 
mountain  top,  ber  ©i^fcl,- §,— . 
mourn,  tranern,  w.  (urn  and  ace); 

betran'ern  (ace.) 
mouse,  bie  Wlau^,  — e. 
moutli,  ber  SJlnnb,  — (e)§,  — er. 
Mr.,  ber  §err,  —n,  —en. 
mucli,  biel;  fel^r. 
multiplication  table,  bo§  ©inntal- 

ein§',— ,— . 
Munich,  \)a^  aJJiinc^en,  — §. 
museum,  ha^  2JJnfe'um,  — §,  Win- 

f  e '  en. 
must,  mii[fen,  w. ;  you  must  not, 

bn  barfft  nid)t. 
my,  ntein,  meine,  meiiu 

name,  ber  9?ame(n),  — men§,  —men. 

narrow,  eng. 

national,    national';    national 

hymn,  bie  9'?ationar'!^l)mne,  — n. 
native  land,  t>a§^  ^eimatlanb,  —{c% 

— er. 
natural,     natiir'fici);     natural 

science,    bie   9Jatnr'n)iffenfc^aft, 

—en. 
near,  nal^. 
need,  brand^en,  w. 
neighborhood,  bie  ^at)e,  — n. 
neither. .  .nor,  ttieber. .  .noc^. 
nephew,  ber  S^Jeff e,  — n,  — n. 
never,  nie. 
new,  neiu 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


329 


next,  nac^ft. 

ni^ht,  bie  '^a^t,—e* 

nine,  neiuu 

no,  itein ;  !em,  fcine,  f ciiu 

nor,  no(i)'f  nor  I  either,   icij  and; 

nic^t. 
northern,  norbUc^,  norbifdj. 
not,  nic^t. 
now,  mm,  je|t. 
number,  bie  ^a%  —en;  bic  SfJiim^ 

ttter,  — n. 
nut,  bie  3lu%  — ffe. 

oak,  bie  (5id)c,  — n. 
obedient,  gc^or'fam,  fclgfanu 
obey,  QcfiOX'd)cn,  w. 
obliged,  be  obliged,  miiffen,  w. 
obli^in^,  gefcil'Iig. 
observant,  beo'bad)tenb. 
observe,  bemcr'fcn,  w. 
occur,  ftatt '  ftitbcn,  str. 
o'clock,  U^r;  at  six  o'clock,  um 

fed)§  U^r, 
of,  t)on  (dat.);  of  course,  natiirlid); 

of  it,  that,  bat)on';  of  which, 

what,  njot)on'. 
ofl'er,  bictcii,  str. 
ofllcer,  ber  iDffiaier',  — §,  — c. 
often,  oft, 
old,  alt. 

on,  auf,  CL\\  (dat.  and  ace),  on  ac- 
count of,  ttjcgen  (gen. ). 
one,    ein§;    adj.,    tux,   cine,   cin; 

pron.,  einer,  eine,  eine§;  indef. 

pron. ,  man. 
only,  nur. 
open,  adj.,  often;  open  the  door, 

ntac^e  bie  Xixx  auf. 
or,  ober. 

order,  in  order,  um  (inf.) 
orphan,  bie  SSaifc,  — n. 
our,  unfcr,  unfre,  unfcr. 


ours,  unfrer,  unfrc,  unfer§;  unfcr. 
out,prep.  aug (dat.);  adv.,  'ijcxau^' , 

I)inau§',  bran^cn. 
own,  eigen. 

pa^e,  bie  ©eite,  — n. 
pair,  ha^  ^aat,  — e§,  — e. 
paper,  ha^  ^apicx',  —^,  — e. 
past,  nac^  (dat.);  oorbci',  ooriibcr; 

half-past  ten,  Ijalb  etf. 
pastor,  bcr  ^farrcr,  — §,  — . 
peace,  bie  9f{u^c;  bcr  ^ricbcn,  — §. 
peasant,  ber  33auer,  — §  or— n,  — n ; 

bie  SSduerin,  — ncn. 
penny,  bcr  pfennig,  — §,  — e. 
people,  bie  Scute ;  "hg.^  SSolf,  — (c)§, 

— er. 
permitted,  be  permitted,  biirf en,  iv. 
phenomenon,     bie     (gr[d)ci '  uung, 

—en;  ba§  ^pnomcn',  — §,  — e. 
pick,  )jidcn,  w. 
piece,  "ba^  QiM,  — (e)§,  — e. 
place,  bie   ©tcUe,  — u;   bcr   ^la|, 

— e§,  — e  ;bcr  Drt  — (e)g,  — er. 
place,  tegcn,  w. ;  ftcGen,  w. ;  fe^en,  w. 
plant,  ipflangcn,  w, 
play,  fpiclcu,  w. 
play,  \)(i^  6^icl,  — §,  — c. 
please,    bittc ;    gcf atlcu,    str. ;    it 

pleases  me,  e§  gcfallt  mir. 
pliable,  gcfd)mei'big. 
poet, ber ®id)ter,—§,  —  ;  bcr^oct', 

—en,  —en. 
poor,  arm. 
population,     bie    ©inmo^ucrgal^r, 

—en. 
praise,  loben,  w. 
prefer,  Ueber  ^aben,  w. ;  bor'gicl^en, 

str. 
prepare,  Oor'bereiten,t(?. 
prescribe,  oerfd)rciben,  str. 
present,  ta^  ©cfd^eri',  — §,  — c. 


330 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


pretty,  l^iibfc^. 

prince,  bcr  giirft,  —en,  —en;  bcr 

$rin§,  — en,  — en'» 
princess,  bie  ^ringef'fin,  — nen. 
probably,  hjo^l;  ttja^rfdiein'Iid). 
promise,  tjerfpre '  d)en,  s^r. 
protection,  ber  (S(i)U^,  — e§. 
proud,  jtolg, 
Prussian,  :preu^ifc!^, 
punish,  ftrafen,  w. 
pupil,  ber   ©d)uler,   — §,   — ;    bie 

©(i)ulerin,  —nen. 
purse,  bie  SSorfe,  — n. 

queen,  bie  ^onigin,  —nen. 
queer,  tonnberlid). 
quick(ly),  [rf)nell. 
quite,  gang. 

raise,  l^eben,  str.\   gur  SSIiitc  ber- 

l^el'fen,  s^r. 
rapi(l(ly),  [d)neE. 
rather,  bod^. 
raven,  ber  ^aht,  — n,  — n. 
reach,  errei'd)en,  m  ;  reid)en,  ?^. 
read,  lefen,  str. 
receive,  befom' men, s^r. ;  er^al'ten, 

str. 
reckless,  toog^alftg. 
red,  rot 
reformation,    bie    9?ef orntation ' , 

—en. 
rejoice,  fid^  fren'en,  w.  (uber  and 

anf  with  ace.) 
relate,  er§a:^'Icn,  w. ;  beric^'ten,  w. 
release,  txVb'\n\,w.\  befrei'en,  w. 
remain,  bleiben,  str.  (fein). 
remember,  \\6)  erin'nern,  2^. 
remind,  erin '  nern  w.  (an  and  ace. ). 
reply,  antttjorten,  w. ;  entgeg'nen,  w. 
resemble,  al^nlic^  [e!^en,  str.  (dat.); 

gleid^en  (dat.) 


resound,  er!Iin '  gen,  str. 
return,  bie  ^uriic! '  f nnf t. 
return,  §nriic!'   !ef)rcn,   w.  (fein); 

gnriid'Jommen,  str.  (fein). 
revolutionize,  nrn'^turgen,  w. 
reward,  bie  SSelol^'nung,  — en;  ber 

Sol^n,  —  e§,  — e. 
Rhine,  ber  9f{{|ein,  — §. 
rich,  reic^. 

riddle,  \ia^  9?atfel,  — §,  — . 
ride,  reiten,  str.  (fein). 
ri^ht,  recl)t,  rid^tig ;  be  right,  rcc^t 

l^aben. 
ripe,  reif. 
rise  (of  the  sun),  anf'ge^en,  str. 

(fein);    (of  persons),   anf  fte^en, 

str.  (fein). 
river,  ber  %lvi%  — ffe§,  — ffe. 
robe,  bo§  @ett)anb'— (c)§,  — cr. 
Roman,  ber  Oiomer,  — §,  — ;  adj., 

rontifcf). 
romantic,  rontan'tifc^. 
ragged,  ^erb. 
run,  lanf en,  str.  (fein) ;  run  away, 

fort 'lanf en,  s^r.  (fein). 
rusli,  fic^  ftiirgen  (onf  and  ace.)  iv. 
rustling,  ranfd^enb. 

safe(ly),  fielder. 

sauerkraut,  ba§  ©anerfrant,  — (e)§. 

save,  retten,  w. 

say,  fagen,  w. ;  said  to  be,  foKen, 

w. 
scenery,  bie  ©generie',  —en;   bie 

SanbfcEiaft,  —en. 
school,  bie  ©d^nle,  — n;schoollife, 

tid^  ©d^ulleben,  — §. 
school   system,    ba§    ©dinlnjefen, 

science,  bie  SBiffenfd^aft,  — en. 

scold,  fd)elten,  str. 

search,  in  search  of,  nad^  (dat. ) 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


331 


secret,  ba§  ^e^etm'ni§,—ffe§,  — ffe. 

see,  fe^en,  str. 

seek,  \ud)en,  w. 

sell,  tjertau'fen,  «7. 

semester,  bo§  Seme'fter,  — §,  — . 

sentence,  ber  (2q^,  —eg,  — c;   bcr 

3f?id)t§f^rnc^,  ©pruc^,  — (c)§,  -^c. 
servant,  ber  Wiener,  —^,  — ;  bcr 

^ned)t,  — (e)§,  — e, 
set,  un'tergei^en,  s^r.  (feiii);  ftcHen, 

w.\  tegen, ttJ. ;  fe|en, tt;. 
seven,  [tebem 
shake,  fc^iitteln,  ti7. 
she,  fie. 

sheep,  "aa^  ©d)af,  — <e)§,  — e. 
shepherd,  ber  (SdE)dfer,  — §,  — . 
shoe,  ber  <B6)\\%  (c)§,  — c. 
shoemaker,  ber  Sc^ul)iuad)er,  — #, 

— ;  ber  ©c^ufter,  — §,  — . 
shoot,  [(i)ie^en,  str. 
shore,  ba§  Ufcr,  — §,  — . 
shoulder,  bie  ©d^ultcr,  — n. 
show,  seigen,  w. 
shuttle,  bie  ©^3ure,  — n. 
silk,  bie  (Seibe,  — n;  ad/,  feibcii. 
silver,  tiOi^  (Silber,  — ^;  ad/.,   fil- 

beriu 
simple,  einfacfj. 
simplicity,  bie  ginfadj^eit. 
since,  feit;  "ba. 
sing,  jingen,  str. 
Sister,  bie  ©(i)tt)efter,  — n. 
sister  -  in  -  lawy    bie    Sc^ttJageria, 

— nen* 
sit,  fi|en,  str. 
situated,    gelcgen;   be    situated, 

liegen,  str. 
six,  fed^S. 

sixteenth,  \t6)^t\)\\t 
sky,  ber  ^immel,  —^,  — ♦ 
slay,  erfd)la'gen,  str. 
sleep,  ber  ©djlaf,  — (e)§. 


sleep,  fc^fafeit,  s^r. ;    go  to  sleep, 

ein'fd)Iafen,  str.   (fein);    fc^lafen 

ge()en,  sfr.  ([ein). 
small,  !lein. 
smile,  lad)elit,  w. 
smithy,  bie  ©dimiebe,  — n. 
snow,  ber  ©d^nee,  — §♦ 
soft,  fanft. 

soldier,  ber  ©olbat',  —en,  —en. 
son,  ber  (5ot)n,  — (e)§,  — e. 
song,  ba§  Sieb,  — (e)§,  — er. 
sorry,  leib ;  I  am  sorry,  e§  tnt  mir 

Icib ;  I  am  sorry  for  you,  bn  tnft 

mir  leib. 
south,  ber  6iiben,  — §. 
southern,  [iiblid). 
South  Germany,   ©iibbentfc^Ianb, 

— §. 
sparrow,  ber  O^jerling,  —  §,  — e. 
speak,  fpred)en,  str. 
spectacles,  bie  SSriUe,  — n. 
spin,  fpinnen,  str. 
spirit,   bcr  @ei[t,  — (e)§,  — cr;  in 

good  spirits,  tuol^lgcmnt,  bci  gntcr 

Sanne,  tjeiter. 
splendid(ly),    :prad^tig,    prac^tboE, 

gro^artig. 
splendor,  bie  ^rad^t. 
spring,  ber  griil^Iing,  — §,  — e. 
sprout,  f^riegen,  str.  (fein). 
stand,  fte:^en,  str. 
star,  ber  (Stem,  — §,  — e. 
statue,  bie  (Statue,  — n;  t>a^  ®enf '^ 

mat,  — §,  — er. 
stay,  bleiben,  str.  (fein). 
steal,  fte^len,  str. 
step,  treten,  str.  (fein);  step  for- 
ward, bortreten,  str.  (fein). 
stepmother,  bie  (Sticfmutter,  — . 
still,  nod), 

stork,  ber  ©tord^,  — §,  — e. 
story,  bie  ©efc^ic^tc,  — n. 


332 


ELEMENTS   OF  GERMAN 


Strassburg",    ta^  ©trapxirg,  — §; 

adj.,  ftrapurger. 
stream,  ber  glit§,  — ff^^/— fl^j  ^^^ 

<Btxom,  — (e)§,  — e. 
street,  bte  ©tra^e,  — n. 
strong,  ftarL 
student,  ber  ©tubent',  — eit,  —en; 

bie  ©tuben '  tin,  — nen, 
study,  jiubie'ren,  w. ;  \>a^  ©tnbinm, 

— §,  — bten» 
style,  ber  ©tU,— (e)§,  — e;  style  of 

^  architecture,  ber-  S3anftil. 
subject,  \)a^  ^ad),  — (e)§,  — cr ;  ber 

Untertan,  — §,  —en;  adj.,  iinter= 

tan. 
subject,  nnterorbnen,  m 
sudden(ly),  ^jlo^Iic^. 
suffer,  leiben,  str. 
sum,  bie  ©nmme,  — n. 
summer,  ber  ©ontmer,  — §,  — ♦ 
sun,  bie  ©onne,  — n, 
Sunday,  ber  ©onntag,  — §,  — e. 
superior,  liberie 'gen. 
support,  fid)  itii|en,  w. 
suppose,  be  supposed  to,  foUen. 
surprised,  iiberrafdit;  be  surprised 

at,  fid^  hJnnbern  iiber. 
sweetly,  fii^. 

sword,  t>a^  ©c^njert,  — (e)§,  — er. 
system  of  instruction,  ha^   Un^^ 

terri(i)t§mefen,  — §,  — . 

table,  ber  %\\<^,  — (e)§,  — e. 
Tacitus,  ber  SacitnS,  be§  SacituS, 
tailor,  ber  ©dineiber,  — §,  — . 
take,  ne^nten,  str.,  take  to  heart, 

[id)  gn  ^ergen  nel^men. 
take  off*,  ab 'nefinten,  s*r.,ob'legen, 

w.,  an^giel^en,  str. 
tankard,  bie  ^anne,  — n. 
teacher,  ber  Sel^rer,  — §,  — ;  bie 

Sel^rerin,  — nen. 


technical,  ted)nifc^;   technical 

school,  Ue  tec^nifd)e  ^od)\d}uU,  -n. 
tell,  fagen,  w.,  ex^af)'ien,  w. 
ten,  gel^n. 
than,  al§. 
that,  dem.  pron. ,  jener,  jenc,  jeneS ; 

ber,  bie,  ba§;  rel,   ber,  bie,  bo^; 

con/.,  ha^ 
tlie,  def.  art,  ber,  bie,  ba§;  the. . . 

the,  j;e...befto. 
their,  i:^r,  tf)re,  it)x. 
theirs,  i^rer,  i^re,  i^r(e)§. 
there,  \)a,  bort;  there  is,  are,  c3, 

ift,  e§  finb,  e§  gibt 
therefore,  barnm',  beg^alb,  be^mc- 

gen. 
they,  fie. 
thing,  ta^  S)ing,  — (e)§,  — e,  the 

second  thing,  'i)a§>  l^meite. 
think,  benfen,  irr.,  cf.  App.  88; 

think  of,  geben'fen  (gen.). 
third,  britt 
thirty,  brei^ig. 
this,  biefer,  biefe,  biefe§  (bie§). 
thoroughly,  tiid)tig. 
thought,  ber  (5Jeban!e,  — n^,  — n. 
three,  brei. 
through,    bnrcf)    (ace),    through 

it,    baburc^ ' ;    through    which, 

tt)oburd)'. 
time,  bie  3eit,  —en;  the  first  time, 

t)a§>  erfte  Ttal 
tiresome,  langttjeilig. 
to,    §u    (dat.);    nacf)    (dat.);    an 

(ace);  to  and  fro,  !^in  unb  ^er. 
too,  §u;  and). 

tower,  ber  Surm,  — (e)§,  — e. 
trace  back,  jnriid'fii^ren,  ti?. 
treat,  befjan '  bein,  w. 
tree,  ber  SSaunt,  — (e)§,  — e. 
tree  top,  ber  SBipfel,  — §,  — . 
trice,  in  a  trice,  im  3Zn» 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


333 


trunk   (of    a   tree)    ber    ©tamm, 

turn,  !e^ren,  w. 
twelve,  gujolf. 

twenty-four,  t)icrunb5n)an^ic|. 
two,  gttjei. 

uncle,  bet  Dn!cl,  — §,  — . 

uniform,  ein^eitUd). 

unite,  tjerei'nen,  lo. 

university,  bie  Unibcrfttat,  — cit. 

until,  big;  not  until,  cr[t. 

upon,  auf,  (ace.  and  dat.);  once 
upon  a  time,  einmal' ;  upon  the 
whole,  tm  gan^en;  upon  this, 
that,  barauf;  upon  vsrhich, 
ttjoraitf. 

use,  gebraiid^en,  w. ;  beiiii^cn,  lo. 

usually,  geh)oi)ufid). 

yalkyrie,  bie  SSalfii'rc,  — n. 

vast,  mdt^tig,  rie[ig. 

very,  fe^r. 

village,  'ba^  %ox\,  — (e)§,  — er. 

visitor,  ber  SScfu' c^er,  — §,  — . 

vulnerable,  tjertDunb '  bar. 

wagon,  ber  SSagcn,  — §,  — . 
wagoner,    ber  f^u^rmaun,   — (e)§, 

— leiite. 
walk,  gel^en,  fpagie'reu  gc^eit,  str. 

(fein). 
walk,  ber  @ang,  — e§,  — e. 
wall,  bie  SSJJaiier,  — n;  bie  3Banb, 

— e* 
want,  tDoflen,  w. 
war,  ber  ^rieg,  — (e)§,  — e. 
warrior,  ber  ^rieger,  — §,  — . 
watch,  bie  2Bacf)t,  —en. 
watch,  pten,  w.,  n)arf)cu,  w.,  be* 

ttja '  c^en,  w, 
water,  ha^  SBaffer,  — §,  — . 
watershed,  bie  a8a[jer[d)cibe,  — lu 


way  (=manner),   bie  2Bei[e,  — n; 

(=road,  path)  ber  28eg,  — (e)§,  — e» 
we,  tt)ir* 

wear,  tragen,  str. 
week,  bie  SSodie,  — n, 
well,  ad/.,  gefunb;  ctdi;.,  gut;  fc^on; 

wo^l;  I  am  well,  \6)  befiube  mid^ 

t»oi)l;  I  do  not  feel  well,  mir  ift 

nic^t  tuo^L 
well,  ber  SSrunnen,  — §,  — . 
west,  ber  SBeften,  — §. 
western,  tueftUd). 
what,  trag. 
when,  interr.  adv.,   tuann;   conj., 

Wenn,  aB. 
whence,  trto^er'. 
where,    tt)o;   where    to,    tropin'; 

where  from,  njot)er'. 
whether,  ob. 
which,  reZ.,  hjeld^er,  ttjctd^c,  tDeld)e§; 

in  which,  ttJOrin' ;  upon  which, 

ttjorauf  ;  interr.,  tuer,  toa^. 
while,  bie  335eile;  conj.  or  prep., 

tuQ^renb. 
whither,  tuo^in'. 
why,    ttJarum';    inter j.,    ei,    nun, 

wicked,  b5fe  (bog),  fc^led)t. 

wide,  hjeit 

widow,  bie  SBitwe,  — n. 

wife,  bie  f^rau,  —en;  bie  (ijattin, 

— nen. 
will  (wish)  wollen,  w. 
willow,  bie  SBeibe,  — n. 
window,  tia^  ^enfter,  — g,  — . 
wine,  ber  SSein,  — (e)§,  — e. 
winter,  ber  ^Sinter,  — §,  — . 
wish,  triinfd^en,   lo.;    ber  SBunfc^, 

— e§,  — e. 
with,  mit  (dat.);  with  it,  bamit', 

with  which,  what,  ttJOmit'. 
withdraw,  fic^  guriid'aie^en,  str. 


334 


ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN 


without,   oI)ne  (ace);    (=  out-of- 
doors),  brau^en. 
wolf,  ber  SSolf,  — (e)§,  ^e. 
woman,  bie  i^xau,  —en. 
wonderful,  tuunberbar. 
wood,   ta§>  ^oI§,  — e§,  — er. 
wood-nymph,    ha^   SBoIbtDcibleitt, 

woodpecker,  ber  'Bpe^t,  — (e)§,  — e. 
woods,  bet  SBolb,  — (e)§,  — er. 
wood-sprite,  t)a§^  SBalbmeiblein,  — §, 

work,  bie  5lrbeit,  —en;   arbeiten, 

work  of  art,  \)a§>  ^mi\itvext,  — §, 

— e. 
world,  bie  2BeIt,  —en. 


worm,  ber  SSiirm,  — (c)§,  — er. 
write,  f(l)reiben,  str. 
wrong,  falfcf);  unri(i)tig. 

year,    ba§  ^a^r,  —  (e)§,  — e. 

yes,  ja. 

yield,  nad^'geben,  str.  (dat.);  aug'== 

ttJeic^en,  str.,  (dat.)  (fein). 
you,  bit,  6ie,  i:^r. 
young,  jung. 
your,  bein,  beine,  bein;  ^t)r,  ^:^re, 

^t^x;  ener,  eure,  euer. 
yours,     beiner,     beine,      bcin(e)§, 

i^firer,  ^^re,  ^^reg;  eurer,  eure, 
eure§. 
youth,  ber  ^iingling,  — §,  —  e. 

zephyrs,  bie  Siifte. 


THE  LAKE  GERMAN  SERIES. 

ELEMENTS  OF  GERMAN. 

By  Henrietta  K.  Becker,  Ph.D.,  The  University  of 

Chicago. 

A  beginner's  book  intended  to  cover  the  work  of 
the  first  year's  German  in  high  school  or  the  first  six 
months  in  college.  A  series  of  graded  lessons  cover- 
ing the  main  points  of  grammar,  based  upon  carefully 
selected  stories  and  poems,   cioth,  334  pages.   Price,  $1.00. 

EASY  GERMAN  STORIES.    Vol.  I. 

By  Philip  S.  Allen,  Ph.D.,  and  Max  Batt,  Ph.D. 
A  collection  of  short  stories,  including  two  of 
Baumbach's  Somniernidrchen,  two  of  Rosegger's 
rustic  sketches,  and  Heyse's  VArrabbiata.  The  book 
contains  practical  Exercises  for  German  conversation 
based  upon  the  text,  a  Grammatical  Appendix,  Notes 
and  Vocabulary.  A  book  of  first  readings  in  German 
prose.  Cloth,  242  pages.    Price,  70  cents. 

GERMAN  STORIES.    Vol.  II. 

By  Philip  S.  Allen,  Ph.D.,  and  Max  Batt,  Ph.D. 

A  continuation  of  the  above.    Contains  Liliencron's 

Der  Narr,  Riehl's  Der  Leibmedikus,  and  Wilden- 

bruch's  Das  edle  Blut.     For  second-year  reading  in 

high  school  or  college.     Cloth,  242  pagres.    Price.  70  cents. 

SCHILLER'S  MARIA  STUART. 

Edited  with  Notes  and  Introduction  by  Carl  Edgar 
Eggert,  Ph.D.,  of  the  University  of  Michigan. 

Cloth,  280  pages.    Illustrated.    Price,  70  cents. 


SCOTT,  FORESMAN  &  CO., 

378-388  Wabash  Avenue       :       :       CHICAQO. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


;      120ec'5tR!' 

UBecMlP 

,      \«i^^*^^^ 

pj,6   8  1388  99 

HUG  18 1952  Uli 

U0cV56Bli 

SEP20«8'4p 

.1 

REC'D  LD 

SEP  27  1956 

i0cf64SM 
REC'D  I 

.D 

SEP  2  fc '64- 

IPM 

LD  21-95m-ll,'50(2877sl6)476 


9266^ 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


J 


